Skip to content Skip to navigation

Print Policies

1.1.1 University Code of Conduct

Last updated on:
08/13/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
1

This Guide Memo defines the University's Code of Conduct.

Authority: 

This Guide Memo was approved by the President.

Applicability: 

The Code applies to these groups of people, referred to as "members of the Stanford University Community":

  • Individuals who are paid by Stanford University when they are working for the University—this category includes faculty, staff and students;
  • When required by contract, consultants, vendors, and contractors when they are doing business with the University;
  • Individuals who perform services for the University as volunteers and who assert an association with the University; and
  • Students.

1. Introduction and Purpose

a. Introduction
As members of the Stanford University community, all faculty, staff, students, members of the Board of Trustees, University Officers and affiliates are responsible for sustaining the highest ethical standards of this institution, and of the broader community in which we function. The University values integrity, honesty and fairness and strives to integrate these values into its teaching, research and business practices.

b. Purpose
In that spirit, this Code (the "Code") is a shared statement of our commitment to upholding the ethical, professional and legal standards we use as the basis for our daily and long-term decisions and actions. We all must be cognizant of and comply with the relevant policies, standards, laws and regulations that guide our work. We are each individually accountable for our own actions and, as members of the University community, are collectively accountable for upholding these standards of behavior and for compliance with all applicable laws and policies.

c. Violations
Adherence to this Code also makes us responsible for bringing suspected violations of applicable standards, policies, laws or regulations to the attention of the appropriate cognizant office. Raising such concerns is a service to the University and does not jeopardize one's position or employment. Confirmed violations will result in appropriate disciplinary action up to and including termination from employment or other relationships with the University. In some circumstances, civil and criminal charges and penalties may apply.

d. Questions
Direct any questions regarding the intent or applicability of this Code to the Director of Institutional Compliance or the Office of the General Counsel .

Back to top

2. Standards of Integrity and Quality

Stanford recognizes that it must earn and maintain a reputation for integrity that includes, but is not limited to, compliance with laws and regulations and its contractual obligations. Even the appearance of misconduct or impropriety can be very damaging to the University. Stanford must strive at all times to maintain the highest standards of quality and integrity.

Frequently, Stanford's business activities and other conduct of its community members are not governed by specific laws or regulations. In these instances, rules of fairness, honesty, and respect for the rights of others will govern our conduct at all times.

In addition, each individual is required to conduct University business transactions with the utmost honesty, accuracy and fairness. Each situation needs to be examined in accordance with this standard. No unethical practice can be tolerated because it is "customary" outside of Stanford or that it serves other worthy goals. Expediency should never compromise integrity.

Back to top

3. Confidentiality and Privacy

Community members receive and generate on behalf of the University various types of confidential, proprietary and private information. It is imperative that each community member complies with all federal laws, state laws, agreements with third parties, and University policies and principles pertaining to the use, protection and disclosure of such information, and such policies apply even after the community member's relationship with Stanford ends.

Information on the University's "Principles of Privacy" or specific privacy laws, such as the Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act (FERPA—student records); Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA—personal health information); California Civil Code section 1798.85 (Social Security numbers); and Civil Code section 3426 (trade secrets) may be obtained from the Office of the General Counsel.

Additionally, Administrative Guide Memo 6.2.1: Computer and Network Usage Policy and the Academic Policies and Statements, for students, govern any privacy rights of information stored on University computer systems.

Back to top

4. Conflict of Interest/Conflict of Commitment

Community members who are Stanford faculty and staff owe their primary professional allegiance to the University and its mission to engage in the highest level of education, patient care, research and scholarship. Outside professional activities, private financial interests or the receipt of benefits from third parties can cause an actual or perceived divergence between the University mission and an individual's private interests. In order to protect our primary mission, community members with other professional or financial interests shall disclose them in compliance with applicable conflict of interest/conflict of commitment policies, which are available on the following websites:

Back to top

5. Human Resources

Stanford University is an institution dedicated to the pursuit of excellence and facilitation of an environment that fosters this goal. Central to that institutional commitment is the principle of treating each community member fairly and with respect. To encourage such behavior, the University prohibits discrimination and harassment and provides equal opportunities for all community members and applicants regardless of their race, color, religious creed, national origin, ancestry, physical or mental disability, medical condition, marital status, sex, age, sexual orientation, gender identity, veteran status or any other characteristic protected by law. Where actions are found to have occurred that violate this standard the University will take prompt action to cease the offending conduct, prevent its recurrence and discipline those responsible. Find specific policies in support of this standard at these locations:

The University shall also comply with all laws and regulations governing the circumstances under which former United States military personnel may be employed or retained as consultants.

Back to top

6. Financial Reporting

All University accounts, financial reports, tax returns, expense reimbursements, time sheets and other documents, including those submitted to government agencies must be accurate, clear and complete. All entries in University books and records, including departmental accounts and individual expense reports, must accurately reflect each transaction. See Administrative Guide Memos 3.1.1: Responsibility for University Financial Assets and 3.1.4: Cost Policy.

Back to top

7. Compliance with Laws

Members of the University community must transact University business in compliance with applicable laws, regulations, and University policy and procedure. Managers and supervisors are responsible for teaching and monitoring compliance. When questions arise pertaining to interpretation or applicability of policy, contact the individual who has oversight of the policy. Refer all unresolved questions and/or interpretation of laws and regulations to the Office of General Counsel. University-wide policy documents can be found here

a. Contractual Obligations
The acceptance of an agreement, including sponsored project funding, may create a legal obligation on the part of Stanford University to comply with the terms and conditions of the agreement and applicable laws and regulations. Therefore, only individuals who have authority delegated by an appropriate University official can enter into agreements on behalf of the University. See Administrative Guide Memo 5.1.1: Procurement Policies.

b. Environmental Health & Safety, including Workplace Health and Safety
Members of the University community must be committed to protecting the health and safety of its members by providing safe workplaces. The University will provide information and training about health and safety hazards, and safeguards. Community members must adhere to good health and safety practices and comply with all environmental health and safety laws and regulations. See Stanford Health and Safety Training Policies.

c. Non-University Professional Standards
Some professions and disciplines represented at the University are governed by standards and codes specific to their profession (such as attorneys, certified public accountants, and medical doctors). Those professional standards generally advance the quality of the profession and/or discipline by developing codes of ethics, conduct, and professional responsibility and standards to guide their members. Those belonging to such organizations are expected to adhere to University policies and codes of conduct in addition to any professional standards. If a community member believes there is a conflict between a professional standard and University policy, he/she should contact the Office of the General Counsel.

d. Academic Policies
See "Academic Policies and Statements" on the Stanford Bulletin website for academic policies.

Back to top

8. Use of University Resources

University resources must be reserved for business purposes on behalf of the University. They may not be used for personal gain, and may not be used for personal use except in a manner that is incidental, and reasonable in light of the employee's duties. University resources include, but are not limited to, the use of University systems (e.g., telephone systems, data communication and networking services) and the Stanford domain for electronic communication forums; the use of University equipment (e.g., computers and peripherals, University vehicles); the use of procurement tools such as purchasing cards and petty cash; and, the time and effort of staff, students and others at Stanford.

Back to top

9. Reporting Suspected Violations

a. Reporting to Management
Members of the Stanford community should report suspected violations of applicable laws, regulations, government contract and grant requirements or this Code. This reporting should normally be made initially through standard management channels, beginning with the immediate supervisor, instructor or advisor. If for any reason it is not appropriate to report suspected violations to the immediate supervisor (e.g., the suspected violation is by the supervisor) individuals may go to a higher level of management within their school or department.

b. Other Reporting
All violations of laws or regulations should be reported internally to the Compliance and Ethics Helpline or (650) 721-COMP (721-2667), or to the Office of the General Counsel at (650) 723-9611.

You may report any suspected violations of rules regarding federal funds to the Department of Defense Fraud, Waste, and Abuse Hotline at (800) 424-9098.

You may report any suspected violations of state or federal statutes, rules or regulations to the California Attorney General's Whistleblower Hotline at (800) 952-5225.

c. Confidentiality
Such reports may be made confidentially, and even anonymously, although the more information given, the easier it is to investigate the reports. Raising such concerns is a service to the University and does not in itself jeopardize employment.

d. Cooperation
All employees are expected to cooperate fully in the investigation of any misconduct.

Back to top

1.2.1 University Organization

Last updated on:
09/17/2013
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
11

This Guide Memo describes the governing organization of the University. Lists of the current names of both administrative and academic officers are published in the Stanford University Bulletin and in the Stanford University Faculty/Staff Directory.

Authority: 

This Guide Memo was approved by the President.

1. Founding of the University

a. Founding Grant
The Leland Stanford Junior University was founded by Senator and Mrs. Leland Stanford on November 11, 1885, in memory of their only child. The founding of the University was accomplished by a Grant of Endowment after Senator Stanford had procured passage on March 9, 1885, of an enabling act by the legislature of the State of California. The Founding Grant conveyed to trustees certain properties, directed that a university be established, and outlined the objectives and government of the university.

b. Amendments
The Founding Grant reserved to the Founders the right to amend the Grant. In the years following the death of Senator Stanford in 1893, Mrs. Stanford made several amendments in the form of addresses to the Board of Trustees on such points as the nonsectarian, nonpartisan nature of the University, the powers of the President, duties of the Trustees, financial management, housing on campus, gifts from others than the Founders, summer schools, research, and tuition.

c. Legislation and Court Decrees
The University operated under the Founding Grant without complications until Senator Stanford's death. However, some problems became apparent in connection with the transfer of the trust money to the Trustees, the taxation of property and revenue, and the legal status of the University. Provisions were presented to and approved by the California legislature to correct defects, and the Trustees were authorized to petition the courts for judicial decrees in matters concerning the legal status of the University and the role of the Trustees.

d. Information About the Founding
Detailed accounts of the steps taken in the founding of Stanford University, the texts of the various legal documents, and the history of the University are in the University Archives in the Green Library. The University also publishes a booklet, The Founding Grant with Amendments, Legislation, and Court Decrees, and a listing of some general works of history can be found in the bibliography of the Faculty Handbook

Back to top

2. The Board of Trustees

a. Powers and Duties
The Board of Trustees is custodian of the endowment and all the properties of the University. The Board administers the invested fund, sets the annual budget, and determines policies for operation and control of the University. The powers and duties of the Board of Trustees derive from The Founding Grant, Amendments, Legislation, and Court Decrees. In addition, the Board operates under its own bylaws and a series of resolutions of major policy.

b. Membership
Board membership is set at a maximum of 38 including the President of the University, who serves ex officio and with vote. Eight of the Trustees are elected or appointed in accordance with the Rules Governing the Election or Appointment of Alumni Nominated Trustees. All members of the Board serve five-year terms and, in general, are eligible to serve two such consecutive terms (except alumni nominated trustees, who serve one five-year term only).

c. Officers of the Board
The Officers of the Board are the chair, one or more vice chairs, the secretary, and the associate secretary. Officers are elected to one-year terms, with the exception of the Chair, who serves a two-year term. Their terms of office begin July 1.

d. Committees
The eight standing committees of the Board are the Committee on Finance; the Committee on Development; the Committee on Alumni and External Affairs; the Committee on Academic Policy, Planning and Management; the Committee on Land and Buildings; the Committee on Audit and Compliance; the Committee on the Medical Center; and the Committee on Trusteeship. Standing committees meet prior to each regular Board meeting unless otherwise directed by the Chair.

e. Meetings
The Board generally meets five times each year, in October, December, February, April and June. Meetings are normally on the second Tuesday of the month.

Back to top

3. The President

a. Appointment
Among the powers given to the Trustees by the Founding Grant is the power and duty to appoint a President of the University, who shall not at the time of appointment be one of their number, and to remove him or her at will. In accordance with the by-laws of the Board of Trustees, the President of the University shall be appointed or removed only by the affirmative vote of a majority of the Board of Trustees.

b. Powers and Duties
The by-laws and resolutions of the Board of Trustees set forth the following duties of the President of the University in addition to those he derives from the Founding Grant or by office:

  • "He shall be responsible for the management of the University and all its departments, including the operation of the physical plant and the administration of the University's business activities."
  • "The President shall report to the Board at each regular meeting on problems and progress of the University, and he shall make recommendations for action."
  • "In conformance with general objectives approved by the Board, he shall be responsible for preparation of the annual University operating budget and other annual budgets as specified. He shall submit these budgets to the Board for review and subsequent action and shall submit periodic reports to the Board on the status of plans and projections basic to preparation of budgets for succeeding years."

c. Appointment of Staff
To assist in the performance of presidential duties, the President of the University, with the approval of the Board, appoints and prescribes the powers and duties of a Provost, a Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer, a Vice President for Medical Affairs, a Vice President for Development, and a General Counsel. The President of the University, with theapproval of the Board, may appoint and prescribe the powers and duties of other officers and employees as the President may deem proper.

d. Absence or Inability to Act
In the absence or inability to act of the President, the Provost shall be Acting President and shall perform the duties of the President of the University. If both the President and the Provost are unable to act or otherwise believe the circumstances warrant, the President (or Provost when functioning as President) may designate one or more persons to act on the President's behalf. In emergencies, the Chair of the Board of Trustees may designate one or more persons to act on the President's behalf or as Acting President and, if the tenure exceeds 30 days, such designation must be confirmed by the Board.

Back to top

4. The Provost

a. Responsibilities
The Provost, as the chief academic and budget officer, administers the academic program (instruction and research in schools and other unaffiliated units) and University services in support of the academic program (student affairs, libraries, information resources, and institutional planning). In the absence or inability of the President to act, the Provost becomes the Acting President of the University.

b. Principal Staff
The principal staff officers of the Provost are shown in the organization chart in Guide Memo 9.2.1.

Back to top

5. The University Cabinet

a. Membership
Chaired by the President, membership of the University Cabinet includes the Provost, Deans of the seven Schools, the Vice Provost and Dean of Research, the Director of the SLAC National Accelerator Laboratory, the Director of the Hoover Institution, the Vice Provost for Undergraduate Education, and the Vice Provost for Graduate Education.

b. Responsibilities
The primary function of the University Cabinet is to recommend and review principles, policies, and rules of University-wide significance. Its purpose is to assure the centrality of academic objectives in the work of the University. The President and the Provost seek the Cabinet's advice on issues of University direction, policy and planning including but not limited to:

  • Long range planning for faculty and academic program development
  • Strategic planning on financial, facilities and fund-raising matters
  • Faculty and student affairs
  • Personnel policies

The Cabinet advises the President and Provost on other matters as appropriate.

Back to top

1.3.1 Academic Governance

Last updated on:
09/01/2004
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
13

The following briefly summarizes the roles of various faculty groups on issues that affect the academic policy of the University. Detailed descriptions of the academic organization of the University may be found in the Faculty Handbook and the Senate and Committee Handbook. Questions concerning academic governance may be directed to the Office of the Academic Secretary to the University.

1. Academic Council

a. How Formed
Includes the Tenure Line Faculty, Non-Tenure Line Faculty, Senior Fellows at specified policy centers and institutes, and specified academic administrative officers. (Does not include Medical Center Line Faculty or Center Fellows at specified policy centers and institutes.)

b. Role

Vested by Board of Trustees with all powers and authority of the faculty. Delegates functions to the Senate of the Academic Council, but retains review and referendum rights.

Back to top

2. Advisory Board of the Academic Council

a. How Formed
Elected by Academic Council from among its members

b. Role
  • Receives recommendations for appointments to professoriate that have originated in departments and have been approved by school Deans and Provost. 
  • Makes recommendations to the President on faculty appointments, promotions and dismissals, and on creation and dissolution of departments, etc. 
  • Holds hearings in cases which arise under the Statement on Faculty Discipline and in certain cases the Statement on Academic Freedom and the Statement on Faculty Grievance Procedures.

Back to top

3. Senate of the Academic Council

a. How Formed
Elected by Academic Council from among its members.

b. Role
  • Makes decisions on academic policy; reports decisions to Academic Council. 
  • Hears reports and discusses matters of importance to the faculty. 

Back to top

4. Chair and Steering Committee of the Senate

a. How Formed
Elected by Senate from among its members plus the President (or Provost) as a non-voting member.

b. Role
Directs the business of the Senate
 

Back to top

5. Committee on Committees (of the Senate)

a. How Formed
Appointed by Steering Committee from among members of the Senate.

b. Role
  • Appoints faculty members to Committees of the Academic Council. 
  • Nominates faculty members to University Committees, Panels, and Boards. 
  • Advises as requested on membership in other committees. 

Back to top

6. Planning and Policy Board (of the Senate)

a. How Formed
Appointed by Committee on Committees and Steering Committee from among members of the Academic Council.

b. Role
Exercises, on behalf of the faculty as a whole, responsibility for the general academic health of the University, examining long-term trends and formulating academic policy issues for further consideration.

Back to top

7. Committees of the Academic Council

The Committees of the Academic Council include:

  • Academic Computing & Information Systems (C-ACIS) 
  • Graduate Studies (C-GS) 
  • Libraries (C-Lib) 
  • Research (C-Res) 
  • Review of Undergraduate Majors (C-RUM) 
  • Undergraduate Admission & Financial Aid (C-UAFA) 
  • Undergraduate Standards and Policy (C-USP) 

a. How Formed
Faculty members appointed by Committee on Committees from among members of the Academic Council. Student members nominated by ASSU. 

b. Role
Make recommendations to the Senate on academic policy matters as laid out in committee charges. 

Back to top

8. Departmental Professoriate

a. How Formed
Members of Academic Council, appointed by Board of Trustees to department.

b. Role
Directs the work of instruction in department and internal administration of department. 

Back to top

1.4.1 Academic and Business Relationships With Third Parties

Last updated on:
08/11/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
14

From time to time, the University enters into agreements with various independent entities that may result in an ongoing business or academic relationship with the University. For example, entities with current relationships include Howard Hughes Medical Institute, Stanford Bookstore, Inc., and Stanford Federal Credit Union.

Although these types of entities remain independent from the University, nonetheless, the nature of the relationships makes it desirable to outline how the relationships might be structured. This Guide Memo also provides guidance to University officers, faculty and staff concerning issues that might arise and that need to be addressed prior to entering into such third party agreements.

Authority: 

This Guide Memo was approved by the President.

1. General Guidelines

a. Potential Issues
The agreement between the University and the other entity should make adequate provision for issues that may be called into play by the nature of the proposed relationship. Such issues might include the following:

  • Potential property tax or unrelated business income tax imposed on the University
  • Failure to appropriately file for a property tax exemption associated with leases of on-campus or off-campus space
  • Government contract and similar allocation issues
  • Vicarious liability to the University and indemnities
  • Issues relating to public image or government scrutiny
  • Effects on legal compliance of University benefit plans
  • All aspects of land use and landowner issues regarding environmental matters
  • The potential for liens or claims against Stanford property or assets
  • Fraud and abuse issues in the medical area
  • Employment law issues
  • Private inurement or private use where University assets, income or facilities may be used in a way that benefits or results in profits to private individuals or entities
  • Utilities issues
  • Conflicts of interest
  • The potential triggering of other statutes or governmental regulations

b. Definition of Relationship
The agreement should provide a clear definition of the nature of the relationship and of any responsibilities or obligations undertaken by the parties. The agreement should also address appropriate limitations on those responsibilities or obligations in both time and scope; the defense and indemnification of the University in the event of suit or other adverse action; the need for the University to be named as an additional insured on policies of insurance; the right of the University to review financial records of the entity, where appropriate in light of the relationship; and a date for termination or reevaluation of the agreement and relationship.

c. Form of Agreement
A detailed contract will not always be necessary; often a well-drafted business letter agreement may suffice. Whatever form the agreement takes, the other parties need to understand that the University does not seek to intrude inappropriately into the internal affairs of the other parties and in no way is taking on responsibility for their actions—except as to specified actions (if any) for specific reasons that are relevant to the relationship and are clearly delineated in the agreement.

Land, Buildings and Real Estate (LBRE)/Real Estate department  must receive a copy of any lease agreement made with third parties, for consideration of property tax or property tax exemption issues.

Back to top

2. Approvals and Consultations

a. Delegated Authority
The appropriate office or offices for reviewing and/or approving an agreement will depend upon the areas in which the proposed relationship arises. In this regard, please refer to the relevant resolutions and memoranda concerning delegations of authority by the University President, Vice Presidents and other senior officers. For more information concerning such delegations, contact the Office of the Secretary of the Board of Trustees.

b. Cognizant Offices
The following are examples of elements that may be present or contemplated and the corresponding office that needs to be consulted and whose approval generally will be required in connection with that element:

Element Office
Use of buildings or other facilities on Stanford academic land
Land, Buildings and Real Estate (LBRE)/University Architect/Campus Planning and Design (UA/CPD)
Use of buildings or other facilities on 
Stanford non-academic land
LBRE/Real Estate department
Application for appropriate property tax exemption in connection with any on-campus or off-campus lease
LBRE/Real Estate department
Use of Stanford's accounting or payroll systems
Controller's Office
Use of Stanford's benefits programs Benefits Department
Reliance on Stanford's insurance or self-insurance Office of Risk Management
Use of Stanford's networks or computing resources
Executive Director of IT Services
Use of Stanford's purchasing services Purchasing Department
Use of Stanford University Medical Center services or facilities
The Dean of the School of Medicine, the Chief Executive Officer of Stanford Health Care or the Chief Executive Officer of Lucile Salter Packard Children’s Hospital (for activities involving their respective organizations) 
Use of the Stanford name, marks or tax identification number 
The Provost (for activities involving teaching or research), the Dean of the School of Medicine (for matters involving any medical activities at the School of Medicine), the Chief Executive Officer of Stanford Health Care (for matters involving any medical activities at Stanford Health Care), the Chief Executive Officer of Lucile Salter Packard Children’s Hospital (for matters involving any medical activities at Lucile Salter Packard Children’s Hospital), the Director of Business Development (for matters involving use of Stanford tradenames or products or services offered for sale to the general public) and the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer (in all other situations)
Personnel Appointments (of the entity's personnel to Stanford's faculty or staff, or of Stanford personnel to the staff or governing body of the entity)
The Provost (for activities involving teaching or research), the Dean of the School of Medicine (for matters involving  medical activities), and the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer (in all other situations)
Toxic or Hazardous Materials Office of Environmental Health and Safety
Campus Sales (by Outside vendors) The Director of Business Development
Income to Stanford Controller's Office
Licensing of Technology Office of Technology Licensing 

c. Guidance on Legal or Liability Issues
As a general proposition, if the arrangement presents novel legal issues, or if the Stanford entities involved in the relationship would like general legal guidance, the Office of the General Counsel should also be consulted. Similarly, the Risk Management Department should be consulted on proposed relationships that raise risk or liability concerns, or whenever Stanford personnel expect their activities (whether on-site or off-site) to be covered by the University's policies of insurance and self-insurance.

Back to top

3. Situations not Covered By This Guide Memo

The following situations or types of agreements are not covered by this Guide Memo:

  • Conferences and summer camps
  • Arrangements with individuals to become visiting scholars
  • Consulting agreements with individuals
  • Externally-sponsored projects and gift-supported programs
  • Financial investments managed by the Stanford Management Company
  • Real estate investments managed by LBRE
  • The procurement of goods or services for University use in the ordinary course of business
  • Normal business and licensing transactions entered into by the Office of Technology Licensing

Back to top

Additional guidance on issues raised in this Guide Memo may be found in the following sources:

Guide Memo 1.5.2: Staff Policy on Conflict of Commitment and Interest
Research Policy Handbook Document 4.1: Faculty Policy on Conflict of Commitment and Interest
Guide Memo 1.5.3: Unrelated Business Activities
Guide Memo 8.2.1: University Events
Guide Memo 8.2.2: Conferences

Back to top

1.5.1 Political Activities

Last updated on:
03/17/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
15.1

Stanford University, as a charitable entity, is subject to federal, state, and local laws and regulations regarding political activities—campaign activities, lobbying, and the giving of gifts to public officials.

While all members of the University community are naturally free to express their political opinions and engage in political activities to whatever extent they wish, it is very important that they do so only in their individual capacities and avoid even the appearance that they are speaking or acting for the University in political matters.

In the limited circumstances where individuals must speak or act on behalf of the University in the political arena, they must do so in accordance with the provisions of this Guide Memo.

Authority: 

This Guide Memo was approved by the President.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to all members of the University community.

a. Campaign Activities
Contributions of money, goods, or services to candidates for political office and in support of or opposition to ballot measure campaigns are subject to a wide variety of political laws. Depending on the jurisdiction and the campaign, political contributions may be prohibited or limited and, in nearly all cases, are subject to a complicated series of disclosure rules. Because of the University's tax-exempt status, the University is legally prohibited from endorsing candidates for political office or making any contribution of money, goods, or services to candidates. It is important, therefore, that no person inadvertently cause the University to make such a contribution.

b. Lobbying
Lobbying can generally be described as any attempt to influence the action of any legislative body (e.g., Congress, state legislatures, county boards, city councils and their staffs) or any federal, state, or local government agency. Laws regulating lobbying exist at the federal, state, and local levels but can differ widely in scope, depending on the jurisdiction. Some laws, for example, only regulate lobbying of the legislative branch. Others, however, also cover lobbying of administrative agencies and officers in the executive branch (e.g., lobbying for federally-funded grants). To one degree or another, however, most lobbying laws require registration and reporting by individuals engaged in attempts to influence governmental action.

Tax-exempt organizations are permitted to lobby, and the University engages in lobbying on a limited number of issues, mostly those affecting education, research, and related activities. There is usually some threshold of time or money spent on lobbying that triggers registration and reporting requirements. Regardless of thresholds, however, no University employee—other than the following individuals, on matters under their jurisdiction—may lobby on behalf of the University without specific authorization:

  • President
  • Provost
  • Deans of the Seven Schools
  • Vice Provost and Dean of Research
  • Vice Provost for Graduate Education
  • Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer
  • Vice President of Human Resources
  • Director of the SLAC National Accelerator Laboratory
  • Director of the Hoover Institution
  • General Counsel
  • Vice President for Public Affairs

The Vice Provost and Dean of Research may grant permission to faculty members to lobby on behalf of the University for specific purposes. The Vice President for Public Affairs may grant permission to staff members to lobby on behalf of the University for specific purposes. All lobbying on behalf of the University should be coordinated with the Vice President for Public Affairs. Please see the Federal Lobbying Guidelines for Stanford Faculty and Staff in the Research Policy Handbook.

c. Giving of Gifts to Public Officials and Staff
Almost all jurisdictions have strict rules on the extent to which gifts and honoraria may be given to public officials (both elected and non-elected officials and, often, staff). In some cases gifts and honoraria are prohibited; in others they are limited; and in most cases they are subject to detailed disclosure. In addition, in some jurisdictions, such as California, gifts to both state and local public officials can result in a public official's disqualification from participation in any governmental action affecting the interests of the donor. Meals, travel, and entertainment are the most common types of gifts, but gift rules can also apply in cases where public officials attend a reception or receive tickets to sporting or other events.

As a non-profit organization, the University generally does not give gifts to public officials and, in those limited cases where it does give such gifts, it must do so in accordance with all applicable laws and regulations. Therefore, any University employee who, on behalf of the University, wishes to make a gift to a public official must receive prior approval from the Vice President for Public Affairs before making such a gift.

d. Reporting of Political Activities
The University must report most of its political activities above certain thresholds. Therefore, any University employee engaging in such activities on behalf of theUniversity should carefully review the remainder of this Guide Memo and should discuss the relevant activities in advance with the Vice President for Public Affairs.

Back to top

2. Prohibited and Restricted Political Activities

a. In General:

(1) No person may, on behalf of the University, engage in any political activity in support of or opposition to any candidate for elective public office (including giving or receiving funds or endorsements), nor shall any University resources be used for such purpose.
(2) No person may, on behalf of the University, lobby (or use University resources to lobby) any federal, state, or local legislative or administrative official or staff member unless specifically authorized to do so. Any lobbying activity, even when authorized, must be conducted in compliance with this Guide Memo, other applicable University policies, and applicable law.
(3) No person may, on behalf of the University, give a gift (or use any University resources to give a gift) to any federal, state, or local official or staff member, except in compliance with this Guide Memo, other applicable University policies, and applicable law.
(4) No person supporting candidates for public office or engaging in other political activities may use University space or facilities or receive University support, except in the limited ways described in section 3.a.
(5) No person may use for lobbying activities federally-funded contract or grant money received by the University.

Even the foregoing activities that are only restricted, rather than prohibited, may be subject to limitations imposed by law. Therefore, any person engaging in the activity, or contemplating doing so, should consult with the Vice President for Public Affairs.

b. Guidelines for Avoiding Prohibited Partisan Political Activities
The following guidelines should assist in preventing the involvement or apparent involvement of the University in political activities in support of or opposition to any candidate for elective public office—i.e., partisan political activities. Except in the limited circumstances set forth in section 3.b., below:

(1) Use of Name and Seal
Neither the name nor seal of the University or of any of its schools, departments, or institutions should be used on letters or other materials intended for partisan political purposes.

(2) Use of Address and Telephones
No University office should be used as a return mailing address for partisan political mailings, and telephone service that is paid by the University, likewise, should not be used for partisan political purposes. (Obviously, a student's dormitory room and telephone service that are personal to the student may be used for these purposes.)

(3) Use of Title
The University title of a faculty or staff member or other person should be used only for identification and should be accompanied by a statement that the person is speaking as an individual and not as a representative of the University.

(4) Use of Services and Equipment
University services, such as Interdepartmental Mail; equipment, such as duplicating machines, computers, and telephones; and supplies should not be used for partisan political purposes.

(5) Use of Personnel
No University employee may, as part of his or her job, be requested to perform tasks in any way related to partisan political purposes.

Back to top

3. Permissable Political Activities

a. In General
As noted above, the federal, state, and local laws which limit the partisan political activities that can take place in University facilities and with University support in no way inhibit the expression of personal political views by any individual in the University community. Nor do they forbid faculty, students, or staff from joining with others in support of candidates for office or in furtherance of political causes. There is no restriction on discussion of political issues or teaching of political techniques. Academic endeavors which address public policy issues are in no way affected.

Because the University encourages freedom of expression, political activities which do not reasonably imply University involvement or identification may be undertaken so long as regular University procedures are followed for use of facilities. Examples of permissible activities are:

(1) Use of areas, such as White Plaza, for tables, speeches, and similar activities.
(2) Use of auditoriums for speeches by political candidates, but subject to rules of the Internal Revenue Service, the Federal Election Commission, and the California Fair Political Practices Commission, and other applicable laws. Arrangements must be made with University Events & Services. (See also Guide Memo 8.2.1: University Events, for more information.)

To reiterate, because tax and political compliance laws impose restrictions, and even prohibitions, on certain political activities and on the use of buildings and equipment at a non-profit institution such as the University, any such activities must be in compliance with these legal requirements.

Individuals taking political positions for themselves or groups with which they are associated, but not as representatives of the University, should clearly indicate, by words and actions, that their positions are not those of the University and are not being taken in an official capacity on behalf of the University. 

b. Limited University Political Activities
Limited activities relating to specific federal, state, or local legislation or ballot initiatives are permissible where (1) the subject matter is directly related to core interests of the University's activities; (2) the President has determined that the University should take a position; and (3) the individuals who speak or write on the University's behalf are specifically authorized to do so.

Back to top

4. Responsibility for Interpretation

The Vice President for Public Affairs, in consultation with the General Counsel, is the administrative officer responsible for interpretation and application of the above guidelines. Questions on whether planned student activities are consistent with the University's obligations should be directed to the Dean of Student Life, who will consult with the Vice President for Public Affairs and/or the General Counsel. All other questions on whether planned activities are consistent with the University's obligations should be addressed directly to the Vice President for Public Affairs or the General Counsel.

Back to top

1.5.2 Staff Policy on Conflict of Commitment and Interest

Last updated on:
08/30/2012
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
15.2
Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources.

Applicability: 

Members of the Academic Council are covered by Research Policy Handbook 4.1: Faculty Policy on Conflict of Commitment and Interest. Academic Staff are covered by Research Policy Handbook 4.4: Conflict of Commitment and Interest. This Guide Memo summarizes existing policies and practices applicable to other University employees. Additional University policies are applicable to employees in individual departments and units, e.g., SLAC, Sponsored Projects and Purchasing Services. Individuals who use the department's services must follow the department's policies.

Purpose: 

When University staff members, or members of their immediate families (defined below), have significant financial interests in, or consulting or employment arrangements with, other business concerns, it is important to avoid actual or apparent conflicts of interest between their University obligations and their outside interests.

In addition to the conflict of interest concerns mentioned above—which apply to all University staff—Stanford staff members who are exempt from governmental regulations regarding compensation for overtime work owe their primary professional allegiance to the University. Care should be taken so that external activities do not result in inappropriate conflicts of commitment, i.e., conflicts regarding allocation of time and energies.

In order to preclude inappropriate actual or apparent conflicts of interest or conflicts of commitment, this Guide Memo sets forth related University policies and procedures.

1. Definitions

a. Significant Financial Interest
Current or pending ownership interest in an entity amounting to at least one-half percent (0.5%) of the company's equity or at least $10,000 in ownership interest (except when the ownership is managed by a third party such as a mutual fund).

b. Immediate Family Member
Spouse, dependent child as determined by the Internal Revenue Service, domestic partner.

c. Cognizant University Officer
President, Provost, Vice Presidents, Vice Provosts, Deans, Directors of SLAC, Hoover Institute and Athletics, and the University Librarian.

Back to top

2. Policy

The following actions on the part of staff members are prohibited:

a. Personal Gain
Transmitting to outsiders or otherwise using for personal gain University-funded or supported property, work products, results, materials, property records or information developed with University funding or other support.

b. Confidential or Privileged Information
Using for personal gain or other unauthorized purposes, confidential or privileged information acquired in connection with the individual's University-supported activities. Confidential or privileged information is non-public information pertaining to the operation of any part of the University including, but not limited to, documents so designated, medical, personnel, or security records of individuals; anticipated material requirements or price actions; knowledge of possible new sites for University-supported operations; knowledge of forthcoming programs or of selections of contractors or subcontractors in advance of official announcements; and knowledge of investment decisions. Questions about confidential information may be referred to the University Privacy Officer at privacyofficer@stanford.edu.

c. Approvals
Participation in negotiating or giving final approval to financial or other business transactions between the University and other organizations in which the individual or an immediate family member has a Significant Financial Interest or with which the individual or an Immediate Family Member has an employment or consulting arrangement.

All staff should also note that originating or approving financial or other business transactions between the University and other organizations with which the staff member has any financial or family ties (even those not rising to the level of Significant Financial Interest or constituting an Immediate Family Member) may create the appearance of a conflict of interest. It is required that all such situations be disclosed in writing to the cognizant University officer and this disclosure should be documented and retained for the duration of the business relationship.

d. Gratuities and Special Favors
Acceptance of gratuities, unsolicited gifts exceeding $50 in value, solicited gifts in any amount or special favors from private or public organizations or individuals with which the University does or may conduct business or extending gratuities or special favors to employees of any sponsoring government or other agency or entity.

e. University Resources
Use of University resources including, but not limited to, facilities, departmental parking permits, personnel or equipment, except in a purely incidental way, for any purposes other than the performance of the individual's University employment. Note: Acceptable use of University vehicles is covered in Guide Memo 8.4.2: Vehicle Use.

f. Business Relations
Acceptance of or continuing in employment, an official relationship, or a consulting arrangement with another concern which has or seeks to have a business relationship with the University.

g. Commitment
For staff members exempt from governmental regulations regarding compensation for overtime work: Acceptance of employment, consulting, public service, or pro bono work which can result in conflicts or the appearance of conflicts with a staff member's primary commitment of time and energy to the University.

Back to top

3. Procedures for Exceptions

Because it may be in the interest of the University to grant exceptions to the rules in Section 2, the following procedure has been established:

a. Disclosure
Whenever a staff member anticipates a situation where he/she may be potentially in violation of the policies in Section 2, that staff member must immediately make full disclosure in writing of the details of the situation, through his/her supervisor, to the cognizant University officer and request an exception. Exceptions must be approved in writing in advance. If a staff member finds that he/she has engaged in conduct that violates the policies in Section 2, such situation must be reported immediately to the cognizant University officer.

b. Responsibility of University Officers
Any requests for exception shall be reviewed and all facts thoroughly examined for apparent conflicts. Exceptions may be granted at the sole discretion of the University. If the cognizant University officer determines that the University would best be served by the granting of the requested exception, he/she may do so in writing with justification for the granting and delineating any conditions placed on the approval. Except in rare instances, University officers may not delegate this responsibility and any delegation must be in writing. If the designee grants an exception, the designee must provide the University officer with a memorandum detailing the circumstances of the exception.

Copies of the approval must be retained throughout the period of employment.

c. Annual Reports
University officers who receive and grant exceptions to the policies in this Guide Memo shall, at the end of each academic year, provide a detailed summary report to the Provost.

d. Other Reports
In addition to Section 3.c, cognizant University officers may establish, within their areas of responsibility, mandatory periodic conformance and compliance reporting procedures for all staff.

e. Consequences
Failure to adhere to any aspect of the policy and procedures shall subject the involved employee(s) to disciplinary action, up to and including termination of employment.

Back to top

1.5.3 Unrelated Business Activity

Last updated on:
12/15/2010
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
15.3
Authority: 

Approved by the Administrative Council April 1, 1987. It is reissued with approval of the Provost's Office and Controller's Office.

1. Policy

Stanford's resources exist to support the University's missions of creation, preservation, and dissemination of knowledge. The University's assets must be preserved for these purposes, not for the personal gain of individuals nor for outside parties' uses which do not further Stanford's academic objectives. The University receives frequent requests for access to its resources by outside entities, typically in exchange for some form of compensation to Stanford. Many of these, if granted, would constitute unrelated business activities. The purpose of this statement is to remind the University community that it is Stanford policy not to engage in unrelated business activities.

Unrelated business activities have the potential for distorting the University's primary teaching and research missions. Furthermore, revenues from such activities generally are taxable under the Internal Revenue Code, and thus carry consequences to the University in terms of income tax liability. They also can have implications for property tax as well as product liability, and they can create unfair competition with the for-profit sector.

Permission to engage in unrelated business activities at Stanford may be granted only by the Provost, and then only in those cases in which there is strong likelihood that the activity will significantly benefit the University as a whole.

Back to top

2. Definition

a. Generation of Revenue
For the purpose of this statement, "unrelated business activities" are activities that use Stanford resources to generate revenue from third parties, and that are unrelated in a programmatic sense to the teaching, research, and other educational functions of the University. An unrelated activity normally would not be thought to further the University's teaching or research activities, except for the revenue it produces. Because the Internal Revenue Code does not define with precision what activities are unrelated for tax purposes, a general rule of thumb to apply is to assume that any activity undertaken primarily for the revenue it produces is likely to be unrelated.

b. Support of Mission
However, there are certain activities which might at first appear to be unrelated, but which, under scrutiny, are in fact related in a programmatic sense or provide direct support to Stanford's academic missions. For example, certain services or programs may be conducted on campus for the convenience of University faculty, staff and students, such as food sales at Tresidder.

Back to top

3. Implementation and Exceptions

a. Need for Review
Because of the necessarily imprecise definition of "unrelated," activities that would generate income and are proposed to be undertaken on behalf of an outside party that involve the use of University lands, buildings or instrumentation or the rendering of services by University personnel must be reviewed in the context of the unit's programmatic mission, Internal Revenue regulations and prior case rulings before they may be approved. Examples include fabrication by University machine shops, testing or analysis of materials, use of University computer facilities and similar activities.

b. Responsibility
The responsibility for implementing this policy rests with line management. If a department chair, director, or dean has any question as to whether a proposed arrangement under his/her purview might constitute an unrelated business activity, it is his/her responsibility to have the activity reviewed by the cognizant vice president's office, who in turn may need to seek counsel from the Controller's Office—University Tax Director. Questions arising from departments or schools reporting to the Provost should be directed to the Office of the Vice Provost and Dean of Research.

c. Exceptions
If the cognizant vice president endorses a request for an arrangement that is determined to be an unrelated business activity, the proposal should be forwarded to the Controller's Office for a review of the potential tax consequences, and means of accommodating them, before the request is sent to the Provost for approval.

Back to top

1.5.4 Ownership and Use of Stanford Name and Trademarks

Last updated on:
12/15/2008
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
15.5

Stanford registered marks, as well as other names, seals, logos and other symbols and marks that are representative of Stanford, may be used solely with permission of Stanford University. Items offered for sale to the public bearing Stanford's name and marks must be licensed. Online Design Guidelines describe proper use of Stanford's emblems and provide downloadable artwork at the Identity Toolkit

Authority: 

This Guide Memo was approved by the President.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to all instances of use of Stanford's names and marks.

Purpose: 

The purpose of this policy is to ensure appropriate use of Stanford's names and marks.

1. Names and Marks Policy

Stanford University is internationally known for excellence in teaching, learning, research, medicine, athletics, the arts and similar activities. The widely recognized Stanford name and its associated seals, marks and symbols (together referred to as "name and marks") represent the high caliber of the University's faculty and students and convey the quality and breadth of the University's accomplishments. Stanford's name and marks are among the University's most valuable assets. Faculty, students and staff share in the benefits associated with the University's name and marks, and therefore also share responsibilities concerning their use.

The University will protect its name and marks actively from improper or misleading use by individuals or organizations not associated with the institution and will assure that use of the name and marks by faculty, students, alumni, staff, Stanford programs and others is appropriate. As described below, appropriate use indicates that the activity or product with which the name and marks are being used has the necessary approval for use of the name and marks and reflects appropriately on Stanford's reputation.

Use of the Stanford name and marks in a manner that implies endorsement of programs, products or services of any entity not directly associated with, or licensed in writing by, the University is prohibited.

a. Ownership
The University is the owner of a number of marks registered with the United States Patent and Trademark Office. These include:

  • STANFORD®
  • STANFORD UNIVERSITY MEDICAL CENTER®
  • Block "S" with tree
  • Stanford University seal

Additional registrations have been made with the California Secretary of State and in some international jurisdictions. All of Stanford's registered marks, as well as other names, logos, seals and other symbols that are representative of the University or its entities, whether or not registered, are the property of Stanford University. Such names and marks may be used solely with permission of persons having specific authorization by the Board of Trustees or the President of the University. Registered marks should be shown with the symbol, ®, designating their status as federally-registered trademarks. The block "S" without tree, as a non-registered trademark, should be shown with the designation "TM." For emblem artwork with the proper trademark designation, contact the Trademark Associate at (650) 723-3331 or by e-mail at trademarks@stanford.edu.

Use of the Stanford name and marks by third parties is strictly prohibited unless written permission from the University has been granted, in keeping with authority delegated by the President (described below under "Approval for Use.") As stated in the Research Policy Handbook 9.2, courses taught and courseware developed for teaching at Stanford belong to Stanford and may not be further distributed without permission of the University. Use of the Stanford name and marks in association with the distribution of such materials outside the University must be approved by the Provost.

Please refer to the Research Policy Handbook 9.5, for further information on the University's copyright policy.

b. Appropriate Use
The names and marks covered by this policy may be used only in connection with Stanford-sponsored or Stanford-sanctioned activities or materials. Stanford faculty, students, staff and volunteers must assure that use of the Stanford name and marks meets the following criteria:

(1) Accuracy
Use of the Stanford name and marks in association with an event, program, project, publication or product implies some form of involvement by the University. Involvement by individual faculty, students, alumni or staff is not a sufficient basis for indicating University sponsorship or endorsement. The activity must be one in which the University has an institutional role.

(2) Quality Standards
Stanford's name and marks may be used only in connection with activities that meet high standards and are consistent with the University's educational, research and related purposes.

(3) Prohibited Uses
In keeping with its status as a non-profit educational institution, Stanford does not permit its name and marks to be used in connection with partisan political activities. Individual faculty, students, alumni or staff may not use Stanford's name and marks in association with any commercial activity or outside venture without written permission of a person authorized by the Board of Trustees or University President to so act. Use of the name and marks in connection with third parties must conform to the policy provided in Guide Memo 1.4.1: Academic and Business Relationships with Third Parties.

c. Approval for Use
The President has delegated authority as follows for approving use of Stanford's name and marks:

  • To the Provost for use in connection with educational and research activities, including courseware and related materials developed for teaching at Stanford (see Research Policy Handbook 9.2, Copyright Policy and for special events (see Guide Memo 8.2.1: University Events)
  • To the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer for use in connection with business activities of Stanford or by vendors (including promotional use)
  • To the Dean of the School of Medicine for use in connection with medical activities
  • To the Director of University Communications for use in film, video, print and electronic media, including the University's home pages on the Web
  • To the General Counsel

The Office of the General Counsel and the Office of the Vice President for Business Affairs/CFO are responsible for protection of Stanford's name and marks. The Office of the Vice President for Business Affairs/CFO has been authorized to grant licenses for use of Stanford's name and marks on products for sale.

d. Guidelines for Faculty and Staff
In teaching, research and other academic activities of the University, Stanford's name and marks may be used, subject to the normal review processes established within schools, departments, centers and programs. This policy is not intended to limit use of the Stanford name for legitimate purposes that fall within the normal scope of University activities. However, when a faculty or staff member is involved in activities not directly associated with Stanford (e.g., independent consulting, other business activities, publications, etc.), use of Stanford's name and marks is limited to identification of the individual by his or her affiliation (e.g., Jane Smith, Professor of History, Stanford University).

The Stanford name and marks may not be used for purposes other than in direct relation to teaching, learning and research at Stanford without written approval from the designated office described above under "Approval for Use." Faculty members and others engaged in activities involving business relationships with third parties may contact the Office of the Vice President for Business Affairs/CFO for information and assistance on name use issues. For questions concerning courseware and related materials, contact the Vice Provost and Dean for Institutional Planning, Learning Technology and Extended Education.

Examples of permissible use include:

  • "John Smith, Professor of Psychology at Stanford University," on a book jacket
  • "Stanford Center for Buddhist Studies," as approved in accordance with the Committee on Research "Annual Report for 1996-97: Attachment A, Guidelines for the Establishment and Review of Centers at Stanford University"
  • "Stanford Conference on Law," when approved by the cognizant Dean or Department Chair and operated as a University special event

Examples requiring written approval and/or a license from the University:

  • Use of the Stanford name on any product that will be sold commercially, such as Stanford sweatshirts
  • Use of the Stanford name in the title of a book, such as "The Stanford Guide to Perpetual Youth"
  • Use of the Stanford name in the title of a test that will be sold commercially, such as "The Stanford Test of Psychic Abilities"
  • Use of the Stanford name in a course that will be marketed or otherwise used outside the University, either by a University official or by a third party, such as "The Stanford Seminar on Successful Startups"
  • Use of the Stanford name as part of the name of any outside business or other activity, such as "Stanford Worldwide Online Group, Inc."

e. Guidelines for Students and Alumni
Student and alumni groups that have official ASSU or Stanford Alumni Association recognition, and are registered as such, may use the Stanford name in association with their University-sanctioned activities. Recognized student groups producing merchandise for sale that incorporates Stanford's name or marks must comply with licensing and other procedures of the Office of the Vice President for Business Affairs/CFO. Students may use the name of a school, department or other Stanford program outside the University (other than on a resume) only with approval of the appropriate academic officer (dean, department chair, center director, etc.)

f. Registration of Internet Domain Names
No faculty, staff, alumnus, other volunteer or student may register a domain name that incorporates the word "Stanford" or "cardinal" except in accordance with the policies described above concerning use of the name and marks. Domain name registrations incorporating the word "Stanford" or "cardinal" are the property of the Board of Trustees and must be registered as such.

g. Registration of Trademarks
In keeping with its institutional responsibility for trademark protection, the Office of the Vice President for Business Affairs/CFO is responsible for trademark registration, working with the Office of the General Counsel. Faculty, alumni, other volunteers, staff or students seeking to register trademarks in association with University activities must do so by contacting the Office of the Vice President for Business Affairs/CFO. Trademarks registered in connection with any programs, products or services of Stanford University, its schools, departments, centers, alumni or related activities, are owned by the Board of Trustees.

Back to top

2. Licensing Program

a. License Policy
The Office of the Vice President for Business Affairs/CFO oversees the University's trademark licensing program. Any items offered for sale to the public bearing the Stanford name or marks must be licensed by the University. There are no exceptions. For information on the licensing program, contact the Trademark Associate at (650) 723-3331 or by e-mail at trademarks@stanford.edu.

b. Sellers' Responsibility
University departments, student or alumni groups, or entities having academic or business relationships with the University (e.g., ASSU), or faculty/staff/students/alumni organizations selling items bearing the Stanford name or marks for fundraising or other purposes must acquire such items from a licensed supplier or be licensed if they are self producing the items or using a non-licensed supplier.

c. Design Review
The Office of the Vice President for Business Affairs/CFO reviews the specifications for products bearing the Stanford name and marks and the design incorporating the name and marks prior to licensing.

d. Artwork
Camera-ready artwork of the Stanford name and marks is generally provided as part of the License Agreement.

e. Fees
A percentage of the wholesale value of items sold is charged as a trademark licensing royalty fee. Contact the Trademark Associate at (650) 723-3331 or by e-mail at trademarks@stanford.edu for royalty rate information. Net proceeds from the licensing program are designated for undergraduate student support, including financial aid and other purposes.

f. Give-Away Items
Use of the Stanford name or marks on items not sold to the public (such as giveaway items or for charity events) requires permission from the Office of the Vice President for Business Affairs/CFO and may be subject to a use fee. Contact the Trademark Associate at (650) 723-3331 or by email at trademarks@stanford.edu for further information.

g. Items for Internal Use
Items acquired by a University department or student or other group solely for internal University use generally do not require a license. Please check with The Office of the Vice President for Business Affairs/CFO to determine if a license is required for a specific project.

Back to top

3. Trademark Policy

This Trademark Use Policy of the Leland Stanford Junior University ("Stanford") is provided to licensees of certain designations comprising designs, trademarks, and service marks, including, without limitation, the designations "Stanford," "Stanford University," "Stanford University Medical Center" and other designs, seals, and symbols which have come to be associated with Stanford (the "Stanford Trademarks"). This Trademark Use Policy sets forth the requirements for use of the Stanford Trademarks. Use of the Stanford Trademarks is permitted only pursuant to a written agreement with Stanford that includes a license to the Stanford Trademarks and only as permitted by such written agreement. This Trademark Use Policy sets forth requirements in addition to those set forth in any such written agreement. All name and trademark license agreements must be approved by a University officer with delegated authority, as designated in Section 1.c above.

a. Use of Stanford Trademarks

(1) Trademark Notices
The Stanford Trademarks may be used only in the form and manner and with appropriate legends as prescribed from time to time by Stanford. Upon request, each licensee shall cause to appear with each use of the Stanford Trademarks by means of a tag, label, imprint or other appropriate device or mechanism, such copyright, trademark or service mark notices as Stanford may from time to time, upon reasonable notice, designate. Upon request by Stanford, each licensee shall cause all products bearing the Stanford Marks to bear an "Official Licensed Product" label in a form and manner that Stanford may from time to time, upon reasonable notice, designate.

(2) No Use of Identical or Similar Trademarks; No Combination Marks
The Stanford Trademarks may not be used with any other trademark or in combination with any of the other Stanford Trademarks without the prior written approval of Stanford. No licensee shall alter, modify, dilute or otherwise misuse the Stanford Trademarks.

(3) Goodwill
Stanford is the sole owner of goodwill associated with the Stanford Trademark(s). Licensees shall acknowledge this ownership and the value associated with the Licensed Trademark(s). Licensees shall not apply for trademark registration or otherwise seek to obtain ownership of any Stanford Trademarks, including Internet domain names, anywhere in the world, nor act in any manner or contribute in any way to actions or activities that would adversely affect the value of the goodwill associated with the Stanford Trademarks.

(4) Submission of Uses of Stanford Trademarks
Each licensee shall submit, at the licensee's expense, samples of proposed uses of the Stanford Trademarks prior to any particular use of a Stanford Trademark or other distribution to the public. Stanford shall have the right to object to any use within 5 business days of its receipt of a sample if Stanford reasonably believes that such use of the Stanford Trademark will damage the goodwill of the Stanford Trademark, or if the samples do not meet the requirements of this Trademark Use Policy or the written agreement between Stanford and the licensee relating to such Stanford Trademark. No licensee shall make use of a Stanford Trademark until such particular use has been approved in writing by Stanford.

Licensee shall submit to Stanford for approval samples of all tags, labels, packaging, computer images, Web pages and the like to be used in connection any Licensed Product(s) and to remove therefrom or add thereto any element Stanford may from time to time, upon reasonable notice, designate.

Licensee shall submit to Stanford copies of any advertisements or promotional materials containing Licensed Trademark(s) for Stanford's approval prior to any use thereof, and to remove therefrom either any reference to Licensed Trademark(s) or any element which Stanford may from time to time, upon reasonable notice, designate.

(5) No Sponsorship
No Licensee may state or imply, either directly or indirectly, that the licensee's activities, other than those permitted by written agreement, are supported, endorsed or sponsored by Stanford. Upon the direction of Stanford, a licensee shall issue express disclaimers to that effect.

(6) Notification of Infringement
Each licensee shall promptly inform Stanford of any suspected infringement of any Stanford Trademark by a third party. Stanford shall have the sole right and discretion to enforce the Stanford Trademarks, (subject to specific agreements that impose the costs or other duties of enforcement on third parties).

(7) Quality Control and Review
The Stanford Trademarks may be used with and applied to only those products, services and other materials permitted by the written agreement and only for so long as such products, services and other materials meet Stanford's high standard of quality consistent with the level of quality reflected in Stanford's own products and services. By means of example and not limitation,
   (a) The Stanford Trademarks may not be used on or in connection with any material that is pornographic or otherwise objectionable in the light of Stanford's reputation for quality educational and medical products and services
   (b) The Stanford Trademarks may not be used on or in connection with any material that libels or defames Stanford or any other person or entity
   (c) The Stanford Trademarks may not be used on or in connection with any material that violates any state, federal or foreign law or regulation.

b. Negation of Warranties
Nothing in this Trademark Use Policy shall be construed as a warranty or representation by Stanford (i) as to the validity or scope of the Stanford Trademarks or (ii) that anything made, used, sold or otherwise disposed of under any license granted to the Stanford Trademarks is or will be free from infringement of trademarks, copyrights and other rights of third parties.

c. Termination
Stanford may terminate any written agreement granting a license to the Stanford Trademarks by 90 days' prior written notice to the licensee (unless some other period of time has been designated in writing by the person specifically designated in Section 1.3). If a licensee is in default in royalty payments or providing reports, is in breach of any provision of this Trademark Policy or the licensee's written agreement, or provides any materially false report, Stanford may terminate such licensee's license to use the Stanford Trademarks on 30 days' prior written notice if licensee fails to remedy such default, breach or false report within 30 days after receipt of such notice from Stanford. Any cause of action or claim of Stanford that accrued or will accrue as the result of any breach or default by a terminated licensee and a terminated licensee's obligation to pay accrued or accruable royalties shall survive any such termination.

d. Construction
This Trademark Use Policy shall be read in conjunction with any written agreement between Stanford and a licensee; provided that in the event of any conflict between a provision of this Trademark Use Policy and such written agreement, the express provision set forth in the written agreement shall prevail.

Back to top

4. Further Information

a. Approval Questions
Questions concerning the proper office to approve use of Stanford's name and marks may be directed to the Office of University Communications, the Office of Business Development or the General Counsel. Questions concerning registration of trademarks or Internet domain names incorporating the word "Stanford" may be directed to the Office of the Vice President for Business Affairs/CFO or the General Counsel. For information regarding the use of the Stanford name and marks on courseware distributed by videotape or other media, contact the Vice Provost and Dean for Institutional Planning, Learning, Technology and Extended Education.

b. Trademark Licensing Program
Further information on the use of the registration symbols in conjunction with the registered marks, the use of the names and marks on clothing and other merchandise, license application forms, and sample license agreements may be obtained from the Office of the Vice President for Business Affairs/CFO. Contact the Trademark Associate at (650) 723-3331 or by e-mail at trademarks@stanford.edu.

Back to top

The following policies include related information:

Back to top

1.5.5 Ownership of Documents

Last updated on:
09/01/2003
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
15.6

Documents produced, received or filed in connection with Stanford's business activities are the property of the University.

Authority: 

This Guide Memo was approved by the President.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to all Stanford business documents.

Purpose: 

The purpose of this policy is to reiterate the University's ownership of business documents.

1. Document Ownership Policy

Documents produced, received or filed in connection with Stanford's business activities may be considered the property of the University. For purposes of this policy, the word "document" includes any memorialization of a communication, whether by paper, film, video, audio, electronic or other media. Also for purposes of this policy, the term "business activities" includes administration of a department, school, laboratory, office or other entity of the University (for example, a safety inspection conducted by a member of a dormitory staff would be a "business activity").

Back to top

2. Further Information

Questions regarding application and implementation of this policy may be directed to the Legal Office.

Back to top

The following policies are available online:

Research Policy Handbook Document 9.2: Copyright Policy
Research Policy Handbook Document 4.1: Faculty Policy on Conflict of Commitment and Interest
Guide Memo 1.5.1: Political Activities
Guide Memo 1.5.2: Staff Policy on Conflict of Commitment and Interest
Guide Memo 2.1.3: Personnel Files and Data

Back to top

1.6.1 Privacy Policy

Last updated on:
03/15/2013
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
16.1

Stanford University has an interest in ensuring that the privacy of its students, faculty, and staff is respected. The University is committed to protecting the privacy of Prohibited, Restricted and Confidential Information within its control in a manner consistent with applicable laws, regulations and University policies.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and CFO.

Applicability: 

This policy is applicable to all members of the Stanford community and visitors to the University, including but not limited to students, post doctoral scholars, faculty, lecturers/instructors, staff, third-party vendors, and others with access to Stanford's campus and University Prohibited, Restricted and Confidential Information.

1. Definitions

a. Disclosure: "Disclosure" is the release of, transfer of, provision of access to, or other communication of Information outside of the Stanford community.

b. Use: "Use" is the examination, sharing, or other utilization of Information within the Stanford community.

c. Information: "Information" is all Stanford University Prohibited, Restricted and Confidential information, whether in electronic or paper format, defined in Stanford's Data Classification, Access, Transmittal and Storage Guidelines.

d. Guidelines: "Guidelines" refer to the Information Security Office's secure computing guidelines and its Data Classification, Access, Transmittal and Storage Guidelines.

Back to top

2. Information Privacy

a. General Policy
Stanford should limit the collection, use, disclosure or storage of Information to that which reasonably serves the University's academic, research, or administrative functions, or other legally required purposes. Such collection, use, disclosure and storage should comply with applicable Federal and state laws and regulations, and University policies.

b. Legal and University Process
Notwithstanding the General Policy contained in section 2.a, the University may disclose Information in the course of investigations and lawsuits, in response to subpoenas, for the proper functioning of the University, to protect the safety and well-being of individuals or the community, and as permitted by law.

c. Policies That Apply to Special Categories of Information
Stanford has adopted policies governing certain categories of Information. These policies are listed in this section, 2.c. To the extent that there is a conflict between this Administrative Guide Memo 16.1 and any of these special policies, the special policy will control. For more information about Stanford's compliance with any of the laws and policies referenced below, please contact the University Privacy Officer at privacyofficer@stanford.edu or the individual listed in section 4.b as responsible for compliance.

(1) Prohibited Information, including Social Security Number ("SSN") and Drivers License Number ("DLN")
Stanford should not use an individual's SSN or DLN as a personal identifier unless required by law or approved by Stanford's Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer or the Data Governance Board. Prohibited information, including SSNs and DLNs, may be stored electronically only in compliance with the Guidelines. If Prohibited Information must be stored on paper, the files must be stored securely with access provided only to authorized persons.

(2) Student Records
Students have rights with respect to access to their education records under the Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act of 1974 ("FERPA"). These rights are outlined in the Stanford Bulletin.

(3) Health Information
Individuals have rights with respect to the privacy and security of their health information under Federal and state laws and regulations, including the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996 ("HIPAA"). These rights are outlined in Guide Memo 1.6.2 and in the University health information privacy policies that can be found at the HIPAA website.

(4) Human Subjects Research Information
In addition to the rights afforded by HIPAA and other laws related to health information, the Federal Policy for the Protection of Human Subjects ("Common Rule") outlines provisions specific to the privacy of research participants and the confidentiality of their information. The Stanford Research Compliance Office maintains the Human Research Protection Program ("HRPP") that includes the University policies related specifically to human subjects' research information.

(5) Financial Services Records
The Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act ("GLBA") requires that Stanford protect the privacy and security of information collected in the course of providing certain financial services, such as student financial aid or faculty staff housing loans. Stanford has adopted polices to protect this information. These policies are located on the Office of General Counsel's website.

(6) Information Collected in the Course of Electronic Commerce
Some areas of the Stanford website operate commercial enterprises online. Stanford also delivers online service through its network. To comply with the California Online Privacy Protection Act of 2003 when Stanford (or any of its partners) collects personally identifiable consumer information on one of the commercial areas of its website or as the operator of an online service, it will conspicuously post either a privacy policy or a link to a privacy policy on the portal page for the commercial activity. This policy will:

(a) Identify the categories of personally identifiable information collected through the commercial portions of its website or through its online service;
(b) Identify the categories of third-parties with whom Stanford may share that personally identifiable information;
(c) Provide a description of how an individual may request changes to their personally identifiable information collected through the Web site or online service and retained by Stanford, if any process exists;
(d) Describe the process by which Stanford will notify users of the commercial portion of Stanford's website or its online service of material changes to the Stanford's privacy policy for that portion of the website or online service (it is sufficient to say that the policy will be updated online); and
(e) Identify the effective date of the privacy policy and all updates.

d. Confidentiality Agreement
Members of the Stanford community are subject to the Confidentiality and Privacy provisions set forth in Section 3 of the Code of Conduct contained in Administrative Guide Memo 1. As a reminder of Stanford's commitment to privacy, students, faculty, staff and other members of the workforce may be asked to sign a confidentiality statement based on the Code of Conduct and this privacy policy. Failure to sign such a statement in no way diminishes the obligation to uphold Stanford's policies.

e. Training
Departments within Stanford University are responsible for ensuring that all members of their workforce (including, among others, faculty, staff, students, consultants and volunteers) receive appropriate training on Stanford's privacy and security policies to the extent necessary and appropriate for them to carry out their required job functions. Departments will maintain adequate records of workforce training, which will be provided upon request by the Office of the General Counsel, the University Privacy Officer, the Chief Information Security Officer, Internal Audit, Human Resources or other University official with a reasonable Stanford-related need for the information.

Back to top

3. Expectation of Privacy

a. General Policy
Stanford respects and values the privacy of its faculty, students and staff and will not monitor its community members without cause except as required by law or as permitted by the policies and agreement referenced below:

b. Photography and Recording on Campus
In order to protect the privacy of the Stanford community, photographs, video recordings and other recordings may be made only in accordance with University policies on campus photography.

c. Visitors on Campus
The University is private property; however, some areas of the campus typically are open to visitors. These areas include White Plaza, public eating areas, retail establishments, outdoor and indoor guided touring areas, roads, walkways, designated parking areas and locations to which the public has been invited by advertised notice (such as for public educational, cultural, or athletic events). Even in these locations, visitors must not interfere with the privacy of students, postdoctoral scholars, faculty, lecturers/instructors, and staff, or with educational, research, and residential activities. The University may revoke at any time permission to be present in these, or any other areas. Visitors should not be inside academic or residential areas unless they have been invited for appropriate business or social purposes by the responsible student, post doctoral scholar, faculty member, lecturer/instructor, or staff member.

Back to top

4. Responsibilities

a. University Privacy Officer
The University shall have a Privacy Officer who is responsible for:
(1) Interpreting this Administrative Guide Memo 1.6.1;
(2) Providing advice with a view to encouraging compliance with all privacy laws and regulations, improving privacy practices, and resolving problems;
(3) Establishing privacy policies and procedures in areas not covered by section 5.c below.
(4) Recommending privacy policy and policy changes in all areas related to privacy at Stanford;
(5) Chairing the Data Governance Board; and
(6) Facilitating special privacy-related situations.

In order to discharge these responsibilities, the University Privacy Officer will collaborate with Stanford's Chief Information Security Officer, the General Counsel, other University privacy officials and other University administration, as appropriate.

b. Establishing Privacy Policies and Procedures
The University has designated certain officials with primary responsibility for establishing policies and procedures governing University compliance with certain specific privacy laws and regulations:

  • FERPA. The University Registrar has primary responsibility for establishing policies and procedures related to compliance with the Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act.
  • HIPAA. The University Privacy Officer has primary responsibility for establishing policies and procedures related to compliance with the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996 for Stanford's Affiliated Covered Entity;
  • GLBA. The University Privacy Officer has primary responsibility for establishing policies and procedures related to compliance with the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act.

c. Information Custodians and System Owners
Each individual who retains custody of Information, and each system owner, is responsible for the application of this Guide Memo1.6.1 and all related University policies to the systems and Information under their care or control.

Back to top

5. Violations of this Policy

a. Failure to follow proper policies and procedures concerning access, storage and transmission of Information may result in sanctions and disciplinary action up to and including termination of employment, referral to Judicial Affairs or other applicable administrative process.

b. Members of the Stanford community who believe that these policies have been violated should report such violations to the University Privacy Officer, Office of the University Ombuds, Internal Audit or Office of the General Counsel. Complaints or concerns may also be reported anonymously by calling the University Compliance Officer at (650) 721-2667 or reporting it online.

c. Any School or Department found to have violated this policy may be held accountable for the financial penalties and remediation costs that are a direct result of this failure.

Back to top

6. Relevant Laws

a. State of California Constitution, Article 1

b. The Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act of 1974 (FERPA) (also known as the Buckley Amendment) 20 U.S.C. § 1232g; 34 C.F.R. § 99.1 et seq.

c. The Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act 15 U.S.C. § 6801 et seq., 16 CFR § 313.1 et seq.(privacy)16 CFR § 314.1 et seq. (safeguarding)

d. Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996 (HIPAA) (Pub. Law 104-191) and HIPAA regulations, including but not limited to the HIPAA Privacy Rule and HIPAA Security Rule, 42 CFR Parts 160, 162, 164

e. Health Information Technology for Economic and Clinical Health (HITECH) Act (H.R.1, 2009, Sec. 13001 et seq.) and related regulations, including but not limited to:

  • Breach Notification interim final rule: 74 Fed. Reg. 42740 (2009)
  • Enforcement Interim Final Rule: 74 Fed. Reg. 56123 (2009)

f. California breach notification law (businesses), CA Civ. Code 1798.8

g. Confidentiality of Medical Information Act, CA Civil Code 56 et seq.

h. Employee Health Information Privacy, CA Civ. Code 56.20

i. Lanterman Petris Short Act, CA W&I Code 5328 et seq.

j. Patient Access to Health Records Act, CA H&S 123100-123149.5

k. HIV Privacy, CA H&S 121010 et seq., 121075 et seq., CA Penal Code 12020.1, 1524.1

Back to top

a. Student Discipline — See Student Life/Codes of Conduct/Fundamental Standard/Honor Code
b. Staff Discipline — See Administrative Guide Memo 2.1.16: Addressing Conduct and Performance Issues
c. Faculty Discipline — See the Statement on Faculty Discipline
d. Computer and Network Usage — See Administrative Guide Memo 6.2.1, Computer and Network Usage Policy
e. Privacy Incident Response — See Administrative Guide Memo 6.6.1: Information Security Incident Response; HIPAA Policy, Breach Notification Policy for Incidents Involving Electronic and Non-Electronic PHI
f. The policies identified in sections 1, 2 and 3 of this Administrative Guide Memo 1.6.1.

Back to top

1.6.2 Privacy and Security of Health Information (HIPAA)

Last updated on:
03/15/2013
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
16.2

This Guide Memo describes Stanford University's implementation of the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996 ("HIPAA") and its regulations ("Privacy Rule" and "Security Rule") governing the protection of identifiable health information by health care providers and health plans. The portions of Stanford University that are impacted by HIPAA include the Stanford University HIPAA Components and the Group Health Plan, defined in Sections 3 and 4, respectively.

This Guide Memo references Stanford University HIPAA Components policies on the University HIPAA website and the Group Health Plan HIPAA policies. The Group Health Plan maintains HIPAA policies and procedures in the Resource Library section of the Benefits website. These policies outline more specific rights of individuals regarding their protected health information ("PHI") as well as the operational and system requirements to comply with the Privacy and Security Rules.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer and the Vice President of Human Resources.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to all staff, faculty, physicians, volunteers, students, consultants, contractors and subcontractors who are part of the Stanford University HIPAA Components and the Stanford University Group Health Plan ("Group Health Plan") workforce. Stanford Health Care ("SHC"), including Menlo Health Alliance and Lucile Packard Children's Hospital ("LPCH"), and their respective ERISA health benefit plans have separate HIPAA policies.

1. The Privacy Rule

The Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996 ("HIPAA") Privacy Rule limits Stanford University's use and disclosure of information that could potentially associate an individual's identity with his/her health information. Stanford University may not use or disclose PHI except as authorized by the individual, or as permitted or required by law. Use or disclosure of health information that does not have the potential to reveal an individual's identity is not limited.

Back to top

2. The Security Rule

The Security Rule requires Stanford University to implement administrative, technical, and physical safeguards to ensure the confidentiality, integrity and availability of PHI maintained in an electronic form ("ePHI") and to protect ePHI against any reasonably anticipated threats or hazards, unauthorized uses or disclosures. The Security Rule protects ePHI stored in University systems during processing and during transmission

Back to top

3. Stanford University HIPAA Components Designation

The portions of Stanford University that provide health care, or share PHI with those portions, are "health care components" and are known collectively as the "Stanford University HIPAA Components." Stanford University has authorized its Privacy Officer to designate the health care components to be included in the Stanford University HIPAA Components. A list of the schools, departments and functions designated as part of the Stanford University HIPAA Components can be found on the Stanford University HIPAA website or requested from the University Privacy Officer. Anyone who believes that his/her department or program uses or discloses PHI and ought to be designated as part of the Stanford University HIPAA Components should contact the University Privacy Officer.

In addition, the Stanford University HIPAA Components have joined Stanford Health Care ("SHC"), including Menlo Health Alliance and Lucile Packard Children's Hospital at Stanford ("LPCH") which are together referred to as the "Hospitals," to form a single affiliated entity under the Privacy and Security Rules, known as the Stanford Affiliated Covered Entity. By combining as a single affiliated entity, the Stanford University HIPAA Components and the Hospitals have the greatest flexibility to share information with one another to accomplish their missions.

Back to top

4. Group Health Plan

As an employer, Stanford University sponsors and maintains various ERISA health benefits plans that comprise the Group Health Plan. The Group Health Plan is a separate covered entity from the Stanford University HIPAA Components and, as such, has separate HIPAA privacy and security policies. The list of the plans included in the Group Health Plan can be found on the Stanford University HIPAA website or requested from the University Privacy Officer.

Back to top

5. Privacy and Security Information

a. Privacy Officials
Stanford University has designated a HIPAA privacy officer (the "University Privacy Officer") for the Stanford University HIPAA Components, the Stanford Affiliated Covered Entity and the Group Health Plan. The University Privacy Officer is responsible for the development and implementation of the policies and procedures necessary to comply with the Privacy Rule. Contact information for the University Privacy Officer is located in Section 13.

The University Privacy Officer may request that local privacy officials be designated by a school, department or program included in the Stanford University HIPAA Components or by the Group Health Plan (collectively and individually referred to as "Program") as necessary in order to implement the policies within their program effectively. Programs will promptly comply with any such request.

b. Security Officials
Stanford University has designated a HIPAA security officer (the "Chief Information Security Officer") for the Stanford University HIPAA Components and the Group Health Plan. The Chief Information Security Officer is responsible for the security of Stanford University HIPAA Components and Group Health Plan ePHI, including development of the policies and procedures necessary to comply with the Security Rule and the implementation of security measures to protect ePHI. Contact information for the Chief Information Security Officer is located in Section 13.

The Chief Information Security Officer may designate local security officials ("delegates") as necessary to facilitate the implementation of policies, local procedures, and security measures.

Back to top

6. Policies and Procedures

The University Privacy Officer has developed policies and guidelines designed to keep the Stanford University HIPAA Components and the Group Health Plan in compliance with the Privacy Rule. The University Privacy Officer may add or modify policies and guidelines as necessary and appropriate to incorporate changes in the law or to improve the effectiveness of compliance with the Privacy Rule.

The Chief Information Security Officer has developed policies and guidelines to comply with the Security Rule and may add or modify those policies and guidelines as necessary and appropriate to improve Security Rule compliance.

Each of the Stanford University HIPAA Components programs and the Group Health Plan must develop, implement, document, and train its workforce on the procedures necessary to comply with the appropriate HIPAA policies and this Administrative Guide Memo. For information concerning specific program procedures, workforce members should contact the local privacy or security official, as appropriate, or his or her supervisor.

Programs will comply with requests by the University Privacy Officer, the Chief Information Security Officer, the Office of the General Counsel and/or the Internal Audit Department to make written procedures and training materials available for review.

Back to top

7. Safeguards

The Stanford University HIPAA Components and the Group Health Plan will institute reasonable and appropriate administrative, technical, and physical safeguards to protect PHI from any intentional, incidental or unintentional use or disclosure that is in violation of the requirements of HIPAA, the Privacy Rule, the Security Rule or the Stanford University HIPAA policies.

Please see the Stanford University HIPAA website for more details.

Back to top

8. Training

The Stanford University HIPAA Components and Group Health Plan will train members of their respective workforces, including management, on the Stanford University privacy and security policies and Program procedures to the extent necessary or appropriate for the members of the workforce to carry out their functions. New members of the workforce for whom HIPAA training is necessary or appropriate will be trained prior to initial contact with PHI and in no event later than 30 days from the first date of employment. Each member of the workforce whose functions are affected by a material change in the policies or procedures will be trained on those changes in a timely manner, but normally not later than 30 working days from the effective date of the change. Programs will document that workforce training has been completed and will retain these records in the format requested by the University Privacy Officer and Chief Information Security Officer. Training documentation will be provided on request to the University Privacy Officer or the Secretary of the United States Department of Health and Human Services.

The Chief Information Security Officer will implement a security awareness program to instruct all workforce members on good security practices. The content of the security awareness program will include, but not be limited to information about (a) guarding against, detecting and reporting malicious software, (b) monitoring login attempts and reporting discrepancies, and (c) creating, changing and safeguarding passwords. The program will include periodic updates and reminders on pertinent security measures and issues, including environmental and operational changes affecting the security of ePHI.

Back to top

9. Violations

Anyone who knows or has reason to believe that the Privacy Rule and/or Security Rule, the Stanford University HIPAA policies, the policies contained in this Administrative Guide Memo, or any Program procedure developed to implement these regulations and policies have been violated should report the matter promptly to his or her supervisor, a local HIPAA official, the University Privacy Officer or Chief Information Security Officer, as appropriate. All reported matters will be investigated in a timely manner and, when possible, will be handled confidentially.

See Appendix A: Guidelines for the Implementation of Corrective Action in Matters Involving Violations of Patient, Research Participant and other Medical Information Privacy or Security.

If the workforce member requires anonymity, he or she may also report such matters to the Institutional Compliance Hotline. If the workforce member does not have internet access, he or she may contact Institutional Compliance at (650) 721-COMP or 721-2667.

To the extent practical, any known harmful effect from a violation of the Privacy Rule or the Security Rule or a security incident will be mitigated. Where appropriate, sanctions will be considered and imposed by the program and/or the University. Programs should document all investigations, resolutions, remedies and sanctions, and forward a copy of such documentation to the University Privacy Officer or Chief Information Security Officer, as appropriate.

Back to top

10. Refraining from Intimidating or Retaliatory Attacks

The Stanford University HIPAA Components and Group Health Plan will not intimidate, threaten, coerce, discriminate against, or take other retaliatory action against any patient, physician, employee, or any other person for exercising his or her rights, or for participating in any process, established under the Privacy Rule or Security Rule, including submitting a complaint or reporting a violation. Any attempt to retaliate against a person for reporting a violation in accordance with Section 9 above, may itself be considered a violation of this policy and may result in sanctions. An individual who raises concerns about any act or practice allegedly made unlawful by the Privacy Rule or the Security Rule, however, must have a good faith belief that the act or practice is unlawful, and the manner of raising such concerns must be reasonable and not violate the Privacy Rule or Security Rule.

Back to top

11. Sanctions

Violations of the Privacy Rule or Security Rule may, under certain circumstances, result in civil or criminal penalties. Members of the workforce who violate the Privacy Rule, the Security Rule, policies contained in this Guide Memo or the Stanford University HIPAA policies, or any program's procedures implementing these policies, may be subject to disciplinary action up to and including termination of employment, contract, or other relationship with the University.

See Appendix A: Guidelines for the Implementation of Corrective Action in Matters Involving Violations of Patient, Research Participant and other Medical Information Privacy or Security.

Back to top

12. Evaluation and Reporting

Each program will provide to the University Privacy Officer or Chief Information Security Officer all requested information in order that the University Privacy Officer or Chief Information Security Officer may (a) adequately address complaints, (b) respond to requests from the Secretary of the United States Department of Health and Human Services (HHS) or other HHS official, and (c) inform Stanford University or Hospital leadership about compliance with the Privacy and Security Rules.

Stanford University HIPAA Components and the Group Health Plan will periodically, and when deemed necessary in response to environmental or operational changes affecting the security of ePHI (e.g., newly identified security risks, newly adopted technologies), conduct a technical and non-technical evaluation of its security safeguards to establish the extent to which its security policies and procedures meet the requirements of the Security Rule, and document its compliance with the Security Rule.

Back to top

13. For More Information

Questions: If you have questions about these policies, please contact your supervisor. Department management should contact the appropriate program official and/or the University Privacy Officer (with respect to the Privacy Rule) or the Chief Information Security Officer (with respect to the Security Rule) with any questions related to the interpretation of these policies and/or the development of departmental procedures. It is important that all questions be resolved as soon as possible to ensure compliance with the Privacy Rule and Security Rule.

Back to top

14. Appendix A: Guidelines for the Implementation of Corrective Action in Matters Involving Violations of Patient, Research Participant and other Medical Information Privacy or Security

OVERVIEW

Stanford University is committed to conducting business in compliance with all applicable laws, regulations and University policies. The University endeavors to provide a strong infrastructure that promotes a culture committed to safeguarding the privacy and security of patient, medical and research participant information. These guidelines serve a dual purpose. They provide faculty, staff, trainees, students, contractors, vendors, volunteers, and other members of the Stanford community ("workforce members") notice of the consequences they will face for violating the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act ("HIPAA"), the Health Information Technology Economic and Clinical Health (HITECH) Act, the Confidentiality of Medical Information Act ("COMIA"), or other federal and state laws and regulations governing the confidentiality and security of patient information ("applicable laws"), or University policies relating to privacy and security of patient, medical and research participant information.

Separately, the guidelines provide University offices (e.g., privacy offices, human resources, academic and student affairs offices) and individual managers direction in determining appropriate consequences for workforce members who violate applicable laws or University policies that safeguard protected health information ("PHI") and other patient medical information. These guidelines should be used in conjunction with the corrective action or discipline policy applicable to the relevant workforce member including:

  • Guide Memo 1.1.1:Code of Conduct
  • Guide Memo 2.1.16: Addressing Conduct and Performance Issues
  • Collective Bargaining Agreement between SEIU Local 2007 and Stanford Section 12.7
  • Faculty Handbook Chapter 4.3 (Statement on Faculty Discipline)
  • The Fundamental Standard for Students
  • MD Program Handbook Chapter 8 (Committee on Performance, Professionalism & Promotion)
  • Research Policy Handbook Chapter 9 (Non Faculty Research Appointments)
For definitions pertaining to HIPAA and frequently asked questions relating to HIPAA and other applicable laws relating to the protection of patient health information, see the University's HIPAA website
 

PRINCIPLES

A. Imposition of Appropriate Sanctions
Workforce members will be sanctioned appropriately in the event that they:

(1) access, use or disclose more than the minimum PHI necessary to complete their job-related functions;
(2) fail to adequately protect PHI in accordance with Stanford University's information security policies;
(3) fail to promptly report a known or suspected HIPAA violation; or
(4) violate any of Stanford University's other HIPAA policies, procedures or guidelines.

Sanctions may also be imposed for failure to report a known or suspected HIPAA violation or for violating any of Stanford University's other HIPAA policies, procedures or guidelines. Sanctions for violations of HIPAA may include, without limitation, counseling, written warning, suspension, and termination. A workforce member's compensation and eligibility to continue in an academic or training program may also be impacted in the event of a violation. These guidelines are not intended to dictate a particular consequence in any particular situation. Rather, in consultation with the appropriate Human Resources and/or Privacy Office, managers, academic affairs and student affairs administrators have the discretion to decide:

(1) at which level to start the corrective action process based on the severity of the offense, the potential or actual harm to the patient and/or the Hospital(s) or University, and any mitigating factors; and
(2) whether immediate termination is justified based on the seriousness of the offense.

B. Levels of Violations
The level of a violation is determined by the severity of the privacy or security breach, whether the breach was intentional or unintentional or motivated by malice or personal gain, and the impact on the patient and/or institution. The following outlines some, but not all, types of violations and categorizes them broadly according to likely severity.

Level 1: A workforce member carelessly or inadvertently accesses PHI without a job-related need to know, or carelessly or unintentionally reveals PHI to which he/she has authorized access. Examples of Level 1 violations include, but are not limited to:

(1) Leaving PHI in a public area in the workplace or disposing of it in the trash instead of shredding receptacles;
(2) Misdirecting faxes, emails or other documents that contain PHI;
(3) Discussing PHI in public areas where the discussion could be overheard;
(4) Other behaviors reflecting carelessness or lack of judgment in handling PHI.

Level 2: A workforce member intentionally accesses PHI without authorization or seriously fails to protect PHI. Examples of Level 2 violations include, but are not limited to:

(1) Intentionally accessing or asking another to access PHI without a job-related need to know, the PHI or a friend, relative, co-worker, public personality or any other individual (including searching for the existence of a record or an address or phone number);
(2) Leaving paper files and records, computers, laptops, notebooks, smart phones or other devices containing PHI accessible and unattended;
(3) Sharing log-in IDs and passwords with others;
(4) Using personal email accounts (e.g., Hotmail, Gmail, Yahoo), cloud computing, or other media or storage devices not approved by Stanford University for transmission or storage of PHI or not meeting required security standards (such as encryption, secure email, password protection);
(5) Removing PHI from the Stanford University workplace without supervisor approval or failing to appropriately safeguard PHI if removed with supervisor approval or while in transit;
(6) Other behaviors reflecting intentional conduct or serious failure to safeguard PHI.

Level 3: A workforce member intentionally accesses, uses or discloses PHI without authorization, often motivated by willful disregard, malice or personal gain. A Level 3 violation is considered serious misconduct. Examples of Level 3 violations include, but are not limited to:

(1) Intentionally using or disclosing without a job-related need to know the PHI of a friend, relative, co-worker, public personality, or any other individual’s PHI;
(2) Accessing, using or disclosing PHI for personal purposes or gain, or with an intent to harm the patient or any third party;
(3) Discussing or disclosing PHI with any third party either directly or via social networking or blogging sites, such as Twitter and Facebook.
(4) Intentionally assisting an individual in gaining unauthorized access to PHI.
(5) Jeopardizing the integrity of Stanford University’s systems.
(6) Failing to cooperate during the investigation of a privacy or security incident.
(7) Falsifying information during a privacy investigation or reporting in bad faith or for malicious purposes.
(8) Other behaviors reflecting personal purpose or gain, malice or misconduct.

C. Considerations in Evaluating Violation for Appropriate Sanctions
Factors in determining appropriate disciplinary action may include, but are not limited to:

(1) Whether the breach was intentional or inadvertent;
(2) The nature of the breach, including whether the breach involved specially protected information such as HIV, psychiatric, substance abuse, or genetic data;
(3) The magnitude of the breach, including the number of patients and the volume of protected health information accessed, used or disclosed;
(4) The workforce member’s motive in accessing, using or disclosing PHI, and whether there was an element of malice or desire for personal gain;
(5) Whether the workforce member has committed prior HIPAA violations;
(6) The workforce member’s response or conduct during investigation;
(7) Risk of harm to the victim(s) of the breach or to the University;
(8) The existence of any compelling, aggravating or mitigating factors.

PROCEDURES

A. Prompt Reporting and Investigation
Each workforce member must report any alleged, apparent, or potential violations of HIPAA or applicable privacy and security laws promptly (within no more than twenty-four hours) to his/her supervisor/designee or to the supervisor's supervisor. Suspected violations shall be investigated appropriately and in coordination with the relevant supervisor, Human Resources officer, and the Privacy Officer. Matters involving faculty, students or trainees should also be brought to the attention of the appropriate senior associate dean(s) which may include:

  • Senior Associate Deans for Clinical Affairs—for events related to clinical faculty
  • Senior Associate Dean for Medical Student Education—for events related to medical students
  • Senior Associate Dean for Finance and Administration—for events related to any other individuals to whom this policy applies
  • Dean, Vice Dean and Senior Associate Dean for Academic Affairs, as applicable—for events related to faculty
  • Senior Associate Dean for Graduate Education and Postdoctoral Affairs—for events related to graduate students or postdoctoral scholars 
Results of the investigation and any decision regarding discipline will be documented in writing and disciplinary actions will be made part of the workforce member’s personnel, training or student file. Discipline will be issued in accordance with existing discipline or corrective action policies applicable to the particular workforce member. When faculty members are involved, the Senior Associate Dean shall be consulted, and the faculty member shall have the rights outlined in relevant faculty policies and grievance procedures. The cognizant vice president or dean, or his or her designee, retains final authority concerning sanctions and will review any sanction involving suspension, dismissal, or termination before it is implemented.
 

In the event of a possible violation of HIPAA or applicable law involving both University and SHC or LPCH personnel, the investigation must be coordinated and any correction actions or sanctions must be consistent between the organizations. Reports to state/federal oversight agencies may be required. In addition to any internal corrective action, employees may be subject to criminal and civil penalties, and referral to applicable licensing boards.

B. Guidelines for Sanctions
The following will serve as guidelines for appropriate sanctions for violations of HIPAA or other applicable laws or policies.

Faculty:
Appropriate sanctions will be imposed in accordance with the Statement on Faculty Discipline, Faculty Handbook section 4.3.

Employees, post-doctoral fellows, volunteers:
Students enrolled in undergraduate or graduate degree programs:

  • Level 1. Violations shall, in most cases, result in oral or written counseling and/or retraining. Repeat Level 1 violations shall be subject to further disciplinary action up to and including termination.
  • Level 2. Violations shall, in most cases, result in a written disciplinary warning with or without an unpaid suspension, and retraining shall be required. Disciplinary action up to and including termination may be taken for repeat Level 2 violations.
  • Level 3.Violations, in most cases, shall result in immediate termination of employment, academic appointment or ending of a volunteer assignment.

Students enrolled in undergraduate or graduate degree programs:

  • Level 1: Violations shall, in most cases, result in oral counseling and/or retraining. Repeat Level 1 violations shall be subject to progressive disciplinary action up to and including termination from the program of study.
  • Level 2: Violations shall, in most cases, result a written reprimand in the student’s file and retraining. The student may also be suspended from the program of study.
  • Level 3: Violations, in most cases, shall result in immediate termination from the program of study.

Contractors/Vendors:
Violations of any level shall, in most cases, result in termination of the contract/business relationship and disqualification from future contractual/business relationships.

Back to top

1.7.1 Sexual Harassment

Last updated on:
05/09/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
2.2.4; 23.2

Stanford University strives to provide a place of work and study free of sexual harassment, intimidation or exploitation. Where sexual harassment has occurred, the University will act to stop the harassment, prevent its recurrence, and discipline and/or take other appropriate action against those responsible. See also: Sexual Harassment Policy Office website.

Authority: 

Approved by the President.

Applicability: 

Applies to all students, faculty, staff and others who participate in Stanford programs and activities.

1. In General

a. Applicability and Sanctions for Policy Violations
This policy applies to all students, faculty and staff of Stanford University, as well as others who participate in Stanford programs and activities. Its application includes Stanford programs and activities both on and off-campus, including overseas programs. Individuals who violate this policy are subject to discipline up to and including discharge, expulsion and/or other appropriate sanction or action.

b. Respect for Each Other
Stanford University strives to provide a place of work and study free of sexual harassment, intimidation or exploitation. It is expected that students, faculty, staff and other individuals covered by this policy will treat one another with respect.

c. Prompt Attention
Reports of sexual harassment are taken seriously and will be dealt with promptly. The specific action taken in any particular case depends on the nature and gravity of the conduct reported and may include intervention, mediation, investigation and the initiation of grievance and disciplinary processes. Where sexual harassment has occurred, the University will act to stop the harassment, prevent its recurrence, and discipline and/or take other appropriate action against those responsible.

d. Confidentiality
The University recognizes the importance of confidentiality. Sexual harassment advisers and others responsible for implementing this policy will respect the confidentiality and privacy of individuals reporting or accused of sexual harassment to the extent reasonably possible. Examples of situations where confidentiality cannot be maintained include circumstances when the law requires disclosure of information and when disclosure required by the University outweighs protecting the rights of others.

e. Protection Against Retaliation
Retaliation and/or reprisals against an individual who in good faith reports or provides information about behavior that may violate this policy are against the law and will not be tolerated. However, intentionally making a false report or providing false information is grounds for discipline.

f. Relationship to Freedom of Expression
Stanford is committed to the principles of free inquiry and free expression. Vigorous discussion and debate are fundamental to the University, and this policy is not intended to stifle teaching methods or freedom of expression generally, nor will it be permitted to do so. However, sexual harassment is neither legally protected expression nor the proper exercise of academic freedom. It compromises the integrity of the University, its tradition of intellectual freedom and the trust placed in its members.

g. Required Training
In compliance with California Government Code Section 12950.1, all supervisors who are employed by Stanford are required to participate in a minimum 2-hour sexual harassment training at least every two years. Details on who is included and how this requirement can be met are located on the Sexual Harassment Policy Office website. Further, Stanford may require sexual harassment training of non-supervisory employees in appropriate circumstances. All new employees who are not faculty and who do not supervise other workers will be provided Harassment Prevention Training for New Non-Supervisory Staff generally within six months of hire. Participants will learn how to recognize sexual harassment in the workplace and about campus resources. Registration is through Axess on the STARS /Training Tab: https://axess.stanford.edu.

Back to top

2. What Is Sexual Harassment?

Unwelcome sexual advances, requests for sexual favors, and other visual, verbal or physical conduct of a sexual nature constitute sexual harassment when:
a. It is implicitly or explicitly suggested that submission to or rejection of the conduct will be a factor in academic or employment decisions or evaluations, or permission to participate in a University activity, OR

b. The conduct has the purpose or effect of unreasonably interfering with an individual's academic or work performance or creating an intimidating or hostile academic, work or student living environment.

Determining what constitutes sexual harassment depends on the specific facts and context in which the conduct occurs. Sexual harassment may take many forms; subtle and indirect or blatant and overt. For example, it may:

  • Be conduct toward an individual of the opposite sex or the same sex.
  • Occur between peers or between individuals in a hierarchical relationship.
  • Be aimed at coercing an individual to participate in an unwanted sexual relationship or it may have the effect of causing an individual to change behavior or work performance.
  • Consist of repeated actions or may even arise from a single incident if sufficiently egregious.

The University’s Policy on Sexual Misconduct and Sexual Assault (see Guide Memo 1.7.3), may also apply when sexual harassment involves unwanted physical contact. Under Title IX, sexual violence (sexual misconduct and sexual assault) is a severe form of sexual harassment.

Back to top

3. What to Do About Sexual Harassment

Use these resources for additional information:

  • For information, consultation, advice or to lodge a complaint, contact the Sexual Harassment Policy Office at 556 O’Connor Lane, Griffin Drell Residence, Room 101 Stanford, CA 94305-8210, (650) 724-2120; email to harass@stanford.edu. Note:Anonymous inquiries can be made to the SHPO by phone during business hours.
  • The Sexual Harassment Policy Office web page at http:/harass.stanford.edu.
  • Any designated Sexual Harassment Adviser or resource person listed in Sections 3.a or 5.a.
  • For incidents involving students, Catherine Criswell, Title IX Coordinator at (650) 497-4955, titleix@stanford.edu, Non-discrimination Resources

The following are the primary methods for dealing with sexual harassment at Stanford. There is no requirement to follow these options in any specific order. However, early informal methods are often effective in correcting questionable behavior.

a. Consultation
Consultation about sexual harassment is available from the Sexual Harassment Policy Office, Sexual Harassment Advisers including residence deans, human resources managers, employee relations specialists, counselors at Counseling and Psychological Services (CAPS) or the Faculty & Staff Help Center, deans at the Office for Religious Life at Memorial Church, the Ombuds and others. A current list of Sexual Harassment Advisers is available from the Sexual Harassment Policy Office and at Sexual Harassment Advisers. Consultation is available for anyone who wants to discuss issues related to sexual harassment, whether or not "harassment" actually has occurred or the person seeking information is a complainant, a person who believes his/ her own actions may be the subject of criticism (even if unwarranted), or a third party.

Often there is a desire that a consultation be confidential or "off the record." This can usually be achieved when individuals discuss concerns about sexual harassment without identifying the other persons involved, and sometimes even without identifying themselves. Confidential consultations about sexual harassment also may be available from persons who, by law, have special professional status, such as:

In these cases, the level of confidentiality depends on what legal protections are held by the individual receiving the information and should be addressed with them before specific facts are disclosed. For more information see http://harass.stanford.edu/help/resources. For further information on confidentiality, see Section 1(d).

b. Student Processes

(1) Administrative Review
Students who believe they are the target of sexual harassment and who would like administrative remedies to end the unwanted conduct, should bring forward a concern to the Title IX Coordinator.  The Title IX Coordinator will review the concern under the Title IX Student Sexual Harassment, Sexual Assault, Sexual Misconduct, Relationship (Dating) Violence and Stalking Policy and Procedures.

Mediation between parties is generally not available in cases of sexual harassment involving students.

Students may confer with, Catherine Criswell, Title IX Coordinator at (650) 497-4955, titleix@stanford.edu.

(2) Disciplinary Process
Students who believe they are the target of sexual harassment may file a disciplinary complaint against another student in the Office of Community Standards, which will be reviewed under the Alternate Review Process.

Students are subject to the Fundamental Standard.  Sanctions, for students found responsible for such a violation, range from a formal warning to expulsion from the University.

Students may confer with, Jamie Hogan, Associate Director, Office of Community Standards, jphogan@stanford.edu.

c. Faculty & Staff Processes

(1) Direct Communication
An individual may act on concerns about sexual harassment directly, by addressing the other party in person, or writing a letter describing the unwelcome behavior and its effect and stating that the behavior must stop. A Sexual Harassment Adviser can help the individual plan what to say or write, and likewise can counsel persons who receive such communications. Reprisals against an individual who in good faith initiates such a communication violate this policy.

(2) Third Party Intervention
Depending on the circumstances, third party intervention in the workplace or academic setting may be attempted. Third party may be the Sexual Harassment Advisers, human resources professionals, the Ombuds, other faculty or staff, or sometimes a mediator unrelated to the University. When third party intervention is used, typically the third party(ies) meets privately with each person involved, tries to clarify their perceptions and attempts to develop a mutually acceptable understanding that can insure the parties are comfortable with their future interactions. Other processes, such as a mediated discussion among the parties or with a supervisor, may also be explored in appropriate cases. Possible outcomes of third party intervention include explicit agreements about future conduct, changes in workplace assignments or other relief, where appropriate.

(3) Formal Grievance, Appeal and Disciplinary Processes
Grievance, appeal or disciplinary processes may be pursued as applicable.

(4) Grievances and Appeals
The applicable procedure depends on the circumstances and the status of the person bringing the charge and the person against whom the charge is brought. Generally, the process consists of the individual's submission of a written statement, of fact-finding process or investigation by a University representative, followed by a decision and, in some cases, the possibility of one or more appeals, usually to Stanford administrative officers at higher levels. The relevant procedure (see below) should be read carefully, since the procedures vary considerably. If the identified University fact-finder or grievance officer has a conflict of interest, an alternate will be arranged. The Director of the Sexual Harassment Policy Office or the Directors of Employee & Management Services can help assure that this occurs.

In most cases, grievances and appeals must be brought within a specified time after the action in question. While informal resolution efforts will not automatically extend the time limits for filing a grievance or appeal, in appropriate circumstances the complainant and the other relevant parties may mutually agree in writing to extend the time for filing a grievance or appeal.

A list of the grievance and appeal procedures are located online or from the Sexual Harassment Policy Office.

(5) Disciplinary Procedures
In appropriate cases, disciplinary procedures may be initiated. The applicable disciplinary procedure depends on the status of the individual whose conduct is in question. Faculty members are subject to the Statement on Faculty Discipline.

Back to top

4. Procedural Matters

a. Investigations
If significant facts are contested, an investigation may be undertaken. The investigation will be conducted in a way that respects, to the reasonable extent possible bearing in mind the safety of the campus community, the privacy of all of persons involved. In appropriate cases, professional investigators may be asked to assist in the investigation. The results of the investigation may be used in the third party intervention process or in a grievance or disciplinary action.

b. Record keeping
The Sexual Harassment Policy Office will track reports of sexual harassment for statistical purposes and report at least annually concerning their number, nature and disposition to the University President through the Dean of Research.

The Sexual Harassment Policy Office may keep confidential records of reports of sexual harassment and the actions taken in response to those reports, and use them for purposes such as to identify individuals or departments likely to benefit from training so that training priorities can be established. No identifying information will be retained in cases where the individual accused was not informed that there was a complaint.

c. Indemnification and Costs
The question sometimes arises as to whether the University will defend and indemnify a Stanford employee accused of sexual harassment. California law provides, in part, "An employer shall indemnify [its] employee for all that the employee necessarily expends or loses in direct consequence of the discharge of his/her duties as such..." The issue of indemnification depends on the facts and circumstances of each situation. Individuals who violate this policy, however, should be aware that they and/or their schools, institutes, or other units may be required to pay or contribute to any judgments, costs and expenses incurred as a result of behavior that is wrongful and/or contrary to the discharge of the employee's duties. In general, see Admin Guide Memo 2.4.6.

Back to top

5. Resources for Dealing with Sexual Harassment

a. Advice
Persons who have concerns about sexual harassment should contact the Sexual Harassment Policy Office, any Sexual Harassment Adviser or one of the other individuals listed below. Reports should be made as soon as possible. The earlier the report, the easier it is to investigate and take appropriate remedial action. When reports are delayed for a long period, the University will try to act to the extent it is reasonable to do so, but it may be impossible to achieve a satisfactory result after much time has passed.

Likewise, anyone who receives a report or a grievance involving sexual harassment should promptly consult with the Sexual Harassment Policy Office or with a Sexual Harassment Adviser.

There are a number of individuals specially trained and charged with specific responsibilities in the area of sexual harassment. In brief, they are:

  • Sexual Harassment Advisers, serve as resources to individuals who wish to discuss issues of sexual harassment, whether because they have been harassed or because they want information about the University's policy and procedures. There is usually at least one Adviser assigned to each of the schools at the University and to each large work unit. Most of the residence deans also have been appointed as Sexual Harassment Advisers. Advisers are also authorized to receive complaints.
  • The Director of the Sexual Harassment Policy Office is responsible for the implementation of this policy. The Director's Office also provides advice and consultation to individuals when requested; receives complaints and coordinates their handling; supervises the other Advisers; encourages and assists prevention education for students, faculty and staff; keeps records showing the disposition of complaints; and generally coordinates matters arising under this policy. Because education and awareness are the best ways to prevent sexual harassment, developing awareness, education and training programs and publishing informational material are among the most important functions of the Sexual Harassment Policy Office.
  • As stated previously, individuals with concerns about sexual harassment may also discuss their concerns informally with psychological counselors (for example through CAPS or the Faculty & Staff Help Center), chaplains (through the Memorial Chapel), or University or Medical School Ombuds. For more information, go to http://www.stanford.edu/dept/shpo/resources.html.
  • Title IX Coordinator: Students may confer with Catherine Criswell, Title IX Coordinator, at (650) 497-4955, titleix@stanford.edu.

b. External Reporting
Sexual harassment is prohibited by state and federal law. In addition to the internal resources just described, individuals may pursue complaints directly with the government agencies that deal with unlawful harassment and discrimination claims, e.g., the U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC), the Office for Civil Rights (OCR) of the U.S. Department of Education, and the State of California Department of Fair Employment and Housing (DFEH). These agencies are listed in the Government section of the telephone book. A violation of this policy may exist even where the conduct in question does not violate the law.

Back to top

6. Policy Review and Evaluation

This policy went into effect on October 6, 1993, and amended November 30, 1995, May 30, 2002, August 30, 2012, June 11, 2013 and December 6, 2013. It is subject to periodic review, and any comments or suggestions should be forwarded to the Director of the Sexual Harassment Policy Office.

Back to top

1.7.2 Consensual Sexual or Romantic Relationships In the Workplace and Educational Setting

Last updated on:
01/21/2014

This policy highlights the risks in sexual or romantic relationships in the Stanford workplace or academic setting between individuals in inherently unequal positions; prohibits certain relationships between teachers and students; and requires recusal (from supervision and evaluation) and notification in other relationships.

Authority: 

Approved by the President.

Applicability: 

Applies to all students, faculty, staff, and others who participate in Stanford programs and activities.

1. In General

There are special risks in any sexual or romantic relationship between individuals in inherently unequal positions, and parties in such a relationship assume those risks. In the university context, such positions include (but are not limited to) teacher and student, supervisor and employee, senior faculty and junior faculty, mentor and trainee, adviser and advisee, teaching assistant and student, principal investigator and postdoctoral scholar or research assistant, coach and athlete, attending physician and resident or fellow, and individuals who supervise the day-to-day student living environment and their students.

Because of the potential for conflict of interest, exploitation, favoritism, and bias, such relationships may undermine the real or perceived integrity of the supervision and evaluation provided. Further, these relationships are often less consensual than the individual whose position confers power or authority believes. In addition, circumstances may change, and conduct that was previously welcome may become unwelcome. Even when both parties have consented at the outset to a sexual or romantic involvement, this past consent does not remove grounds for a charge based upon subsequent unwelcome conduct.

Such relationships may also have unintended, adverse effects on the climate of an academic program or work unit, thereby impairing the learning or working environment for others – both during such a relationship and after any break-up.  Relationships in which one party is in a position to evaluate the work or influence the career of the other may provide grounds for complaint by third parties when that relationship gives undue access or advantage, restricts opportunities, or simply creates a perception of these problems.

For all of these reasons, sexual or romantic relationships--whether regarded as consensual or otherwise--between individuals in inherently unequal positions should in general be avoided and in many circumstances are strictly prohibited by this policy. Since these relationships can occur in multiple contexts on campus, this policy addresses certain contexts specifically. However, the policy covers all sexual and romantic relationships involving individuals in unequal positions, even if not addressed explicitly in what follows.

Back to top

2. With Students

At a university, the role of the teacher is multifaceted, including serving as intellectual guide, mentor, role model and advisor. This role is at the heart of the University’s educational mission and its integrity must be maintained. The teacher’s influence and authority can extend far beyond the classroom and into the future, affecting the academic progress and careers of our students.

Accordingly, the University expects teachers to maintain interactions with students free from influences that may interfere with the learning and personal development experiences to which students are entitled. In this context, teachers include those who are entrusted by Stanford to teach, supervise, mentor and coach students, including faculty and consulting faculty of all ranks, lecturers, academic advisors, and principal investigators.  The specific policies on teachers outlined below do not apply to Stanford students (undergraduates, graduates and post-doctoral scholars) who may at times take on the role of teachers or teaching assistants, policies for whom are addressed in a separate section.

As a general proposition, the University believes that a sexual or romantic relationship between a teacher and a student – even where consensual and whether or not the student is subject to supervision or evaluation by the teacher – is inconsistent with the proper role of the teacher.  Not only can these relationships harm the educational environment for the individual student involved, they also undermine the educational environment for other students.  Furthermore, such relationships may expose the teacher to charges of misconduct and create a potential liability, not only for the teacher, but also for the University if it is determined that laws against sexual harassment or discrimination have been violated.

Consequently, the University has established the following parameters regarding sexual or romantic relationships with Stanford students:

First, because of the relative youth of undergraduates and their particular vulnerability in such relationships, sexual or romantic relationships between teachers and undergraduate students are prohibited – regardless of current or future academic or supervisory responsibilities for that student.   

Second, whenever a teacher has had, or in the future might reasonably be expected to have, academic responsibility over any student, such relationships are prohibited. This includes, for example, any faculty member who teaches in a graduate student’s department, program or division.  Conversely, no teacher shall exercise academic responsibility over a student with whom he or she has previously had a sexual or romantic relationship. “Academic responsibility” includes (but is not limited to) teaching, grading, mentoring, advising on or evaluating research or other academic activity, participating in decisions regarding funding or other resources, clinical supervision, and recommending for admissions, employment, fellowships or awards.  In this context, students include graduate and professional school students, postdoctoral scholars, and clinical residents or fellows.

Third, certain staff roles (including deans and other senior administrators, coaches, supervisors of student employees, Residence Deans and Fellows, as well as others who mentor, advise or have authority over students) also have broad influence on or authority over students and their experience at Stanford. For this reason, sexual or romantic relationships between such staff members and undergraduate students are prohibited. Similarly, relationships between staff members and other students over whom the staff member has had or is likely in the future to have such influence or authority are prohibited.

When a preexisting sexual or romantic relationship between a university employee and a student is prohibited by this policy – or if a relationship not previously prohibited becomes prohibited due to a change in circumstances – the employee must both recuse himself or herself from any supervisory or academic responsibility over the student, and notify his or her supervisor, department chair or dean about the situation so that adequate alternative supervisory or evaluative arrangements can be put in place. Failure to disclose the relationship in a timely fashion will itself be considered a violation of policy.

Back to top

3. Between Students (Student Teachers, Teaching Assistants and Graders)

Many existing policies govern student responsibilities towards each other.  The current policy applies when undergraduate or graduate students or post-doctoral scholars are serving in the teaching role as teachers, TAs, graders or research supervisors. The policy does not prohibit students from having consensual sexual or romantic relationships with fellow students. However, if such a relationship exists between a student teacher and a student in a setting for which the student teacher is serving in this capacity, s/he shall not exercise any evaluative or teaching function for that student.  Furthermore, the student teacher must recuse himself or herself and notify his or her supervisor so that alternative evaluative, oversight or teaching arrangements can be put in place.  Failure to notify and recuse in this situation will be subject to discipline under the Fundamental Standard.

Back to top

4. In Other Contexts

Consensual sexual or romantic relationships between adult employees (including faculty) are not in general prohibited by this policy. However, relationships between employees in which one has direct or indirect authority over the other are always potentially problematic. This includes not only relationships between supervisors and their staff, but also between senior faculty and junior faculty, faculty and both academic and non-academic staff, and so forth.

Where such a relationship develops, the person in the position of greater authority or power must recuse him/herself to ensure that he/she does not exercise any supervisory or evaluative function over the other person in the relationship. Where such recusal is required, the recusing party must also notify his/her supervisor, department chair, dean or human resources manager, so that person can ensure adequate alternative supervisory or evaluative arrangements are put in place. Such notification is always required where recusal is required. Failure to disclose the relationship in a timely fashion will itself be considered a violation of policy.

The University has the option to take any action necessary to insure compliance with the spirit of this policy, including transferring either or both employees to minimize disruption of the work group.

Back to top

5. Additional Matters

If there is any doubt whether a relationship falls within this policy, individuals should disclose the facts and seek guidance rather than fail to disclose. Questions may be addressed to your supervisor or cognizant dean or to the Sexual Harassment Policy Office, or in confidence to the University Ombuds or the School of Medicine Ombuds. In those rare situations where it is programmatically infeasible to provide alternative supervision or evaluation, the cognizant dean, director or supervisor must approve all evaluative and compensation actions.

Employees who engage in sexual or romantic relationships with a student or other employee contrary to the guidance, prohibitions and requirements provided in the policy are subject to disciplinary action up to and including dismissal, depending on the nature of and context for the violation.   They will also be held accountable for any adverse consequences that result from those relationships.

Stanford’s policy with regard to employment of related persons can be found in the Administrative Guide 2.1.2.2c and is excerpted here:

Employment by a related person in any position (e.g. regular staff, faculty, other teaching, temporary, casual, third party, etc.) within an organizational unit can occur only with the approval of the responsible Vice Provost, Vice President (or similar level equivalent to the highest administrative person within the organizational unit), or his/her designee. Under no circumstances may a supervisor hire or approve any compensation action for any employee to whom the supervisor is related. An individual may not supervise, evaluate the job performance, or approve compensation for any individual with whom the supervisor is related.

Even when the criteria discussed here are met, employment of a related person in any position within the organization must have the approval of the local human resources office, in addition to the approval of the hiring manager's supervisor, including faculty supervisors. 

Back to top

6. Policy Review and Evaluation

This policy was originally part of the Sexual Harassment policy, which went into effect on October 6, 1993, and was amended November 30, 1995, May 30, 2002, August 30, 2012 and June 11, 2013. Its revision and conversion to a separate policy was made on December 6, 2013 and updated on January 21, 2014. Comments or suggestions should be made to the Provost.

Back to top

1.7.3 Prohibited Sexual Conduct: Sexual Misconduct, Sexual Assault, Stalking and Relationship Violence

Last updated on:
03/31/2015
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
2.2.5; 23.3

This Guide Memo outlines Stanford University's definitions and policies relating to sexual misconduct, sexual assault, stalking and relationship violence (“Prohibited Sexual Conduct”). In conjunction with this Guide Memo, Stanford has disciplinary and administrative procedures for making formal determinations of whether Prohibited Sexual Conduct has occurred, which are described in Section 8 of this Guide Memo. Prohibited Sexual Conduct is a severe form of sexual harassment; see Guide Memo 1.7.1: Sexual Harassment.

Authority: 

Approved by the President.

Enforced under the authority of the Vice Provost for Student Affairs, the Vice President of Human Resources and the Provost.  In addition, an individual who violates this policy may be subject to criminal prosecution and civil litigation.

Applicability: 

All students, faculty, staff, affiliates and others participating in university programs and activities are subject to this policy. This policy also applies to reports of incidents of Prohibited Sexual Conduct as required by Title IX.

1. Policy Statement

Acts of sexual misconduct, stalking and relationship (dating or domestic) violence (collectively “Prohibited Sexual Conduct”) are not tolerated at Stanford University. The University investigates or responds to reports of Prohibited Sexual Conduct under circumstances in which the accused person (responding party) is subject to this policy and (i) the individual who believes he or she has experienced the Prohibited Sexual Conduct (impacted party) is a student, faculty, staff member or program participant and there is a connection between the allegations and University programs or activities; or (ii) investigation and response are necessary for the proper functioning of the University, including the safety of the University community or preservation of a respectful and safe climate at the University. Students, faculty and staff found to be in violation of this policy will be subject to discipline up to and including termination, expulsion or other appropriate institutional sanctions; affiliates and program participants may be removed from University programs and/or prevented from returning to campus.

A comprehensive University web page dedicated to sexual violence awareness, prevention, response and support for those who have experienced sexual violence can be found at NotAlone.Stanford.edu. The web page contains a list of resources and describes reporting options. Resources are also provided at the end of this policy in Section 16 and at and at titleix.stanford.edu.

Back to top

2. What is Prohibited Sexual Conduct?

Prohibited Sexual Conduct is the umbrella term that Stanford uses to collectively define different types of misconduct relating to assault, violence or exploitation of a sexual nature, or connected to an intimate relationship. Prohibited Sexual Conduct includes Sexual Misconduct, Sexual Assault, Stalking, and Relationship (dating or domestic) Violence. Under federal law, Prohibited Sexual Conduct is a severe form of sexual harassment. (See Administrative Guide Memo 1.7.1 for more information regarding Sexual Harassment and Administrative Guide Memo 1.7.2 for information about Consensual Sexual or Romantic Relationships in the Workplace and Educational Setting.)

Back to top

3. What Are Sexual Misconduct and Sexual Assault?

a. What is Sexual Misconduct?
Sexual misconduct is the commission of a sexual act, whether by a stranger or nonstranger and regardless of the gender of any party, which occurs without indication of consent.

1. The following acts or attempted acts can be the subject of a Sexual Misconduct or Sexual Assault charge:
a) vaginal or anal intercourse;
b) digital penetration;
c) oral copulation; or
d) penetration with a foreign object

2.  Additional Acts of Sexual Misconduct
The following completed acts can be the subject of a Sexual Misconduct charge:
a) unwanted touching or kissing of an intimate body part (whether directly or through clothing); or
b) recording, photographing, transmitting, viewing or distributing intimate or sexual images without the knowledge and consent of all parties involved.

b. What is Sexual Assault?
Sexual Assault is an act described in Section 3.a.1 accomplished by use of (i) force, violence, duress or menace; or (ii) inducement of incapacitation or knowingly taking advantage of an incapacitated person.

Definitions of force, violence, duress or menace
The following definitions (drawn from California law) inform whether an act was accomplished by force, violence, duress or menace:

  • An act is accomplished by force if a person overcomes the other person’s will by use of physical force or induces reasonable fear of immediate bodily injury.
  • Violence means the use of physical force to cause harm or injury.
  • Duress means a direct or implied threat of force, violence, danger, hardship, or retribution that is enough to cause a reasonable person of ordinary sensitivity to do or submit to something that he or she would not otherwise do or submit to. When deciding whether the act was accomplished by duress, all the circumstances, including the age of the impacted party and his or her relationship to the responding party, are relevant factors.
  • Menace means a threat, statement, or act showing intent to injure someone.

c. What is Consent?
Consent is an affirmative act or statement by each person that is informed, freely given and mutually understood. It is the responsibility of each person involved in a sexual activity to ensure that he or she has the affirmative consent of the other or others to engage in the sexual activity. Affirmative consent must be ongoing throughout a sexual activity and can be revoked at any time. Lack of protest or resistance does not mean consent, nor does silence mean consent. Consent to one act by itself does not constitute consent to another act. The existence of a dating relationship between the persons involved, or the fact of past sexual relations, should never by itself be assumed to be an indicator of consent. Whether one has taken advantage of a position of influence over another may be a factor in determining consent.

d. What is Incapacitation?
Incapacitationmeans that a person lacks the ability to voluntarily agree to sexual activity because the person is asleep, unconscious, under the influence of an anesthetizing or intoxicating substance such that the person does not have control over his/her body, is otherwise unaware that sexual activity is occurring, or is unable to appreciate the nature and quality of the act.  Incapacitation is not the same as legal intoxication.

A party who engages in sexual conduct with a person who is incapacitated under circumstances in which a reasonable sober person in similar circumstances would have known the person to be incapacitated is responsible for sexual misconduct.  It is not a defense that the responding party’s belief in affirmative consent arose from his or her intoxication.

d. Stranger Assault and Nonstranger Assault
For the purposes of this policy, a nonstranger is someone known to the impacted party, whether through a casual meeting or through a longstanding relationship, including a dating or domestic relationship. A stranger is someone unknown to the impacted party at the time of the assault. While California law requires universities to describe how a school will respond to instances of stranger and nonstranger assaults, Stanford applies the same policies for both stranger and nonstranger assaults.

f. Sexual Harassment
The above examples of conduct of a sexual nature may also violate the University’s sexual harassment policy. In addition, unwelcome conduct of a sexual nature involving less severe acts still may violate the University’s sexual harassment policy. See Guide Memo 1.7.1: Sexual Harassment.

Back to top

4. What is Stalking?

Stalking is the repeated following, watching or harassing of a specific person that would cause a reasonable person to (a) fear for his or her safety or the safety of others, or (b) suffer substantial emotional distress.

Back to top

5. What is Relationship Violence?

Relationship violence, including dating and domestic violence, is physical violence relating to a current or former romantic or intimate relationship regardless of the length of the relationship or gender/gender identity of the individuals in the relationship, including conduct that would cause a reasonable person to be fearful for his or her safety.

Back to top

6. Getting Immediate Help

If you or someone you know has experienced Prohibited Sexual Conduct, here are some steps to consider:

a. If you are in immediate danger, or if you believe there could be an ongoing threat to the community, please call 911 or 9-911 from a campus phone.

b. Get to a safe place and speak to a confidential resource.  Confidential resources have special legal protection and will not share your name or personal information with anyone.  They are able to provide for your immediate mental well-being and to discuss your options with you.  A complete list of confidential resources is provided in Section 16.

  1. For students, Stanford University Confidential Sexual Assault Counselors are available 24 hours a day: Office: (650) 736-6933. After Hours Hotline: (650) 725-9955.
  2. Counseling and Psychological Services (CAPS) at (650) 723-3785.
  3. For all University community members, the YWCA Rape Crisis Hotline is available 24 hours a day at (650) 493-7273 or (408) 287-3000.

c. You are encouraged to seek medical attention and a medical-legal examination for evidence collection purposes. Please see Section 11 for information about medical resources.

d. You are encouraged to contact the police, although you are not required to make a report to the police. Stanford has its own Department of Public Safety, which you can reach at (650) 723-9633, for assistance and support.  University officials also will assist you in contacting local law enforcement authorities, if you request assistance.  If you believe that there is an ongoing threat to your safety from a particular individual, you may request an Emergency Protective Restraining Order from a California police officer. Please see Section 16 for more information about restraining order options.

e. If you are able, you are encouraged to write down what you remember about the incident. (You might also ask a friend to help you.) If possible, record information in a chronological order including details, such as names of the accused and witnesses, time-estimates and locations. This record will assist you in recalling the event later and might assist you in any further process, such as speaking to the police, doctors or University staff.

f. Students in need of immediate University assistance or interim accommodations should contact the resources listed here; Stanford provides 24-hour assistance.  Please note that requesting interim safety measures or accommodations (e.g., housing or academic) will result in a formal notification to the University. For an immediate No Contact Order, a temporary housing accommodation or similar urgent assistance, contact:

During business hours:
Catherine Criswell, Title IX Coordinator, 2nd Floor, Mariposa House, 585 Capistrano Way, Stanford, (650) 497-4955, titleix@stanford.edu. The Title IX Coordinator will coordinate with appropriate staff.

Undergraduate students during regular business hours call:
(650) 725-2800, for Residence Deans or other residential house staff. If there is no answer or if you have an urgent, after-hours issue, contact the campus operator at (650) 723-2300 and ask to be connected to the undergraduate Residence Dean on call.

Graduate students during regular business hours call:
(650) 736-7078, for a Graduate Life Office Dean.  If there is no answer or if you have an urgent, after-hours issue, call the 24-hour pager: (650) 723-8222, pager ID 25085.

g. Employees in need of University assistance relating to employment responsibilities or interim accommodations should contact the Sexual Harassment Policy Office at (650) 724-2120, harass@stanford.edu, a Human Resources Representative or a Sexual Harassment Adviser at harass.stanford.edu/help/advisers. Please note that requesting interim measures or accommodations will result in a formal notification to the University.

Back to top

7. Reporting Acts of Prohibited Sexual Conduct to the University

a.  Where to Report
Reports of Prohibited Sexual Conduct relating to students, either as the Impacted Party or as the accused party, should be reported to:

  • Catherine Criswell, Title IX Coordinator, titleix@stanford.edu, (650) 497-4955
  • All other reports should be made to the Sexual Harassment Policy Office:
    Sexual Harassment Policy Office, harass@stanford.edu, (650) 724-2120

b.  What to Report
For University staff members who are required to report Prohibited Sexual Conduct, the following information (if known) should be provided:
• Name of Impacted Party
• Name of Responding Party (if known)
• Date of the incident
• Date of report
• To whom report was made
• Location of the incident (be specific: not "Responding Party’s room" but “RP’s room in Stern Hall" or "off-campus in downtown Palo Alto")
• Time of the incident
• Nature of the conduct (be as specific as possible, identify the category(ies) of Prohibited Sexual Conduct - sexual misconduct, sexual assault, stalking, relationship violence; and also specific allegations: e.g., sexual misconduct, IP awoke to RP touching her breasts without permission.)

c.  Who Must Report
Except for University-recognized confidential resources, the following University staff members (including student staff members) with knowledge of unreported concerns relating to Prohibited Sexual Conduct are required to report such allegations to the Title IX Coordinator (for students) or the Sexual Harassment Policy Office (for all other reports): (i) supervisors; (ii) staff within: (a) Residential Education; (b) Vice Provost for Student Affairs; (c) Vice Provost for Undergraduate Education; (d) Vice Provost for Graduate Education; and (iii) staff who have responsibility for working with students in the following capacities: teaching; advising; coaching or mentoring. Reporting by these individuals is required regardless of whether impacted party has or has indicated they will contact the appropriate office.

The University urges an individual who has been subjected to Prohibited Sexual Conduct to make an official report, whether or not he/she intends at that time to seek criminal or civil redress or pursue internal disciplinary measures. A report of the matter will be dealt with promptly and equitably. The University will not discipline reporting parties or witnesses for drug and alcohol violations (relating to voluntary ingestion) or similar Fundamental Standard (not Honor Code) offenses that do not place the health or safety of any other person at risk.

Back to top

8. University Response to Allegations of Prohibited Sexual Conduct

a.  Administrative (Non-Disciplinary) Response & Investigation
Upon notice of any concern regarding Prohibited Sexual Conduct, the University will promptly assess the situation and respond, including instituting any interim safety measures or accommodations necessary to ensure the safety of the Impacted Party and the Stanford Community.  The University will first assess whether an investigation will be conducted; that is, whether the allegation(s), if true, would rise to the level of Prohibited Sexual Conduct and, if so, whether a formal investigation is appropriate under the circumstances, taking into account the Impacted Party’s request for confidentiality.  The decision-makers to assess whether to move forward to an investigation are:  for all matters in which a student is either an Impacted Party or respondent, the Title IX Coordinator; for matters in which no student is involved and the respondent is faculty, the cognizant dean or program director; for matters in which no student is involved and the respondent is staff, Human Resources; faculty and staff decision-makers should confer with the Sexual Harassment Policy Office.

In instances in which the University determines to move forward to an investigation, each party will have the same opportunities within the process including: written notice of the concern, an opportunity to respond and be interviewed, and an opportunity to identify relevant witnesses and evidence.  Investigations of Prohibited Sexual Conduct will be timely and equitable.  The University will review relevant information.  While corroborating evidence of accounts is helpful, it is not always available and the credible account of one party can be sufficient to establish a fact. The University makes good faith efforts to complete investigations under Title IX in a 60 day timeframe, although extensions may be appropriate in some matters.  Investigations of allegations of Prohibited Sexual Conduct may be conducted by the Title IX Coordinator or her trained designee, by a Human Resources or trained Sexual Harassment Adviser in consultation with the Sexual Harassment Policy Office and the Title IX Office, or by outside resources, depending upon who the parties are and the nature of the conduct alleged. All cases involving students will be investigated in consultation with the Title IX Office. The standard of proof for all determinations of Prohibited Sexual Conduct during an administrative review process is preponderance of the evidence, that is, the conduct more likely than not occurred. Appeal rights are as provided in specifically applicable policies:

  • Student-Related Matters. Student-related Prohibited Sexual Conduct will be investigated under the Title IX Sexual Harassment, Sexual Assault, Sexual Misconduct, Relationship (Dating) Violence and Stalking Administrative Policy and Procedures, whether the accused (Responding Party) is a student, faculty or staff member, post-doctoral scholar or third party. Both parties have the right to appeal. 
  • Staff Investigations. Following an investigation, a staff member may file a grievance under Guide Memo 2.1.11: Grievance Policy.
  • Senior Staff. Following an investigation, a staff member may seek administrative review as provided in Guide Memo 2.1.14: Senior Staff.
  • Employees covered by collective bargaining agreements. Please refer to Labor Relations & Collective Bargaining.
  • Trial period, casual or temporary employees. Following an investigation, an employee may seek administrative review under Guide Memo 2.1.19:  Administrative Review Policy.
  • Academic Staff–Librarians and Academic Staff–Research Associates. Following an investigation, please refer to the Research Policy Handbook at Grievance Procedure: Academic Staff.
  • Faculty. Please refer to the Faculty Handbook.

b. Administrative (Non-Disciplinary) Accommodations and Safety Measures

1. Administrative measures available to the University
The University will take steps to prevent the recurrence of Prohibited Sexual Conduct through safety measures and will redress its effects through appropriate accommodations. The University in implementing such measures and accommodations will seek to minimize the impact and burden on the involved parties consistent with protecting the well-being of the involved parties and the community. To the extent reasonable and feasible, the University will consult with the Impacted Party and the Responding Party in determining accommodations and safety measures. Appropriate interim or permanent measures may include:
i.     Housing accommodations
ii.    Counseling services
iii.   Academic accommodations
iv.   No contact directives, stay-away letters, or campus bans
v.    Escorts
vi.   Limitation on extracurricular or athletic activities
vii.  Removal from University community
viii. Referral to University disciplinary process
ix.   Review or revision of University policies or practices
x.    Training
xi.   Climate surveys

2. Obtaining Interim Measures
When the University has notice of an allegation of Prohibited Sexual Conduct, a qualified University staff member (such as a Graduate Life Dean, Residence Dean, Residence Fellow, Dean of Student Life, HR Manager, cognizant Dean, Title IX Coordinator or Deputy Title IX Coordinator) may impose interim accommodations or safety measures, which will generally remain in effect throughout the duration of the University investigation. In imposing interim measures, a qualified University staff member should consult with the Title IX Coordinator (for students) or the Sexual Harassment Policy Office (for staff or faculty). Interim Measures may include the same safety measures or accommodations provided above in section b.1. 

3.  Potential Accommodations in the Event of No Investigation
Even if the University decides not to confront the Responding Party because of the Impacted Party’s request for confidentiality, the University may pursue other reasonable steps to limit the effects of the Prohibited Sexual Conduct as feasible and reasonable in light of the Impacted Party’s request for confidentiality. The University’s response may be limited, however, by a request for confidentiality.

c.  Disciplinary & Corrective Action Processes
The University has processes that focus on the imposition of discipline (students and faculty) or corrective action (staff) for individuals found responsible for violating the Fundamental Standard or a University Policy.

1. Student Discipline
Alternate Review Process, Office of Community Standards. An act of Prohibited Sexual Conduct is a violation of the Fundamental Standard governing student behavior.

The Office of Community Standards (650-725-2485) investigates all formal disciplinary complaints of student misconduct, including allegations of Prohibited Sexual Conduct, and files formal charges if the evidence supports the allegation. The Alternate Review Process is the disciplinary process at Stanford designed specifically to consider allegations of Prohibited Sexual Conduct with specially trained reviewers. Sanctions, for students found responsible for such a violation, range from a formal written warning, suspension for a period of time, or expulsion from the University. Mediation between parties is not available for cases of sexual assault or misconduct.

Stanford processes guarantee that the rights of students, including those of the Responding Party, are protected. The Impacted Party and the Responding Party may each choose to be accompanied by a person of his or her choice (a support person) at all stages of the disciplinary process. Both parties have the right to an appeal. The standard of review is preponderance of the evidence (i.e., more likely than not the alleged misconduct occurred) and both parties will be notified of the outcome in disciplinary matters.  For more information, please see the process and procedures governing student disciplinary cases involving Prohibited Sexual Conduct.

2. Faculty & Staff Discipline/Corrective Action
For faculty and staff, violations of this policy are addressed according to applicable faculty and staff personnel policies. Employees in a collective bargaining unit are covered by policies in the applicable agreement.  When violations are found, possible sanctions range from censure to dismissal from the University.  For more specific information, please see the following resources:

Back to top

9. Confidentiality of Information

The University will make reasonable and appropriate efforts to preserve an individual's privacy and to protect the confidentiality of information. However, because of laws relating to reporting and other state and federal laws, the University cannot guarantee confidentiality relating to incidents of Prohibited Sexual Conduct except where those reports are privileged communications to Confidential Resources. (See below.) Exceptions to maintaining confidentiality are set by law; for example, physicians and nurses who treat any physical injury sustained during a sexual assault are required to report it to law enforcement. Also, physicians, nurses, psychologists, psychiatrists, teachers and social workers must report a sexual assault committed against a person under age 18.

Except for Confidential Resources, information shared with other individuals is not legally protected from being disclosed. If the individual requests confidentiality, the University’s ability to respond may be limited, including pursuing discipline or administrative remedies against the accused, although, where feasible, the University will take reasonable steps to prevent Prohibited Sexual Conduct and limit its effects. It is not always possible to provide confidentiality depending on the seriousness of the allegation and other factors, which will be weighed by the University in conjunction with an individual’s request for confidentiality. These factors include circumstances that suggest an increased risk of the accused committing additional acts of Prohibited Sexual Conduct or other violence, whether the Prohibited Sexual Conduct was perpetrated with a weapon, the age of the student, and the ability of the University to obtain evidence by other means. The University takes requests for confidentiality seriously while at the same time considering its responsibility to provide a safe and nondiscriminatory environment for all students and the University community. The University in such circumstances will make sure the Impacted Party is aware they are protected from retaliation.

As required by the Clery Act, all disclosures to any University employee of an on-campus sexual assault must be reported for statistical purposes only (without personal identifiers) to the Stanford University Department of Public Safety, which has the responsibility for tabulating and annually publishing sexual assault and other crime statistics. Such reports are for statistical purposes and do not include individual identities or other personally identifiable information.

In California, a police officer is required to ask a victim of sexual assault and domestic violence (specifically section 273.5 Penal Code) if he or she wants his or her name to remain confidential (Penal Code 293(a)). If a victim elects to have his or her name remain confidential, the police will not list the victim's name in a crime log or release it to university officials without permission (Penal Code 293(d)). If the District Attorney elects to prosecute a sexual assault, the name of an adult victim may be subject to disclosure. 

If a formal complaint against a student is filed with the Title IX Coordinator (administrative process) or the Office of Community Standards (disciplinary process) then the Responding Party must be provided with the name of the Impacted Party and advised of the specific allegations.

Back to top

10. Retaliation

It is a violation of Stanford University policy to retaliate against any person making a complaint of Prohibited Sexual Conduct or against any person participating in the investigation of (including testifying as a witness to) any such allegation of Prohibited Sexual Conduct. Retaliation should be reported promptly to the Title IX Coordinator. Individuals engaging in retaliation are subject to discipline (for students and faculty) and employment action (for employees). Retaliation includes direct or indirect intimidation, threats, coercion, harassment or other forms of discrimination against any individual who has brought forward a concern or participated in the University’s Title IX process. Both parties are prohibited from engaging in intimidating actions directly or through support persons that reasonably could deter either a party or a witness from participating in a Title IX investigation.

Back to top

Individuals who have experienced a sexual assault are encouraged but not required to have a medical-legal exam performed by a trained medical professional as soon as possible (i.e., within 72 hours) after the assault. The medical professional will address an individual’s medical needs related to the assault as well as collect evidence in accordance with established protocols for evidence collection.

In order to preserve evidence, individuals are advised not to shower, wash, urinate, wipe, change clothes, eat, drink or brush their teeth prior to the exam, if possible.  

Even if an individual is uncertain about whether he or she wants to pursue criminal or other remedies, participating in the exam allows for the collection and preservation of evidence that might be useful should the individual decide he or she wants to pursue some type of action at a later date.

In Santa Clara County, medical-legal exams are performed at the Santa Clara Valley Medical Center (SCVMC) in San Jose. Medical-legal exams will be performed at no cost to a victim of sexual assault. A victim does not need to file a report in order to obtain a medical-legal exam; however, hospitals are required to notify the police if a physical injury has been sustained, so the hospital will notify the police agency that has jurisdictional responsibility where the assault took place. Victims have the option to speak with the police or not. The ability to have a medical-legal exam performed is not dependent upon speaking with the police or filing a police report.  

If a victim needs assistance traveling to the SCVMC, a University staff person or a member of DPS will provide assistance. 

For assistance in receiving a medical-legal exam, contact:
YWCA Rape Crisis Hotline:  (650) 493-7273 or (408) 287-3000
Department of Public Safety:  9-1-1 or  (650) 723-9633
SCVMC Emergency Department:  (408) 885-5000

To collect and preserve evidence of Prohibited Sexual Conduct Impacted Parties are encouraged to photograph injuries; retain emails, text messages, phone records and other similar evidence; and maintain a journal or other means to document incidents.

Back to top

12. Reporting to the Police

For a sexual assault that occurs on the Stanford campus, contact the Stanford Department of Public Safety at (650) 723-9633 or, in case of an emergency, 9-1-1 or 9-911 from a campus phone.

For an off-campus incident, call the local police jurisdiction:
Palo Alto, call 911 or (650) 329-2307
Menlo Park, call 911 or (650) 325-4424

Back to top

13. University Action in Conjunction with Civil & Criminal Processes

In addition to University disciplinary actions, a person who engages in Prohibited Sexual Conduct may be the subject of criminal prosecution and/or civil litigation.

Individuals experiencing Prohibited Sexual Conduct have the option to notify law enforcement or not to notify law enforcement. Impacted Parties do not need to report matters to the police to be eligible to receive accommodations from the University under Section 8.b. University officials will assist individuals wishing to report a matter to the police.  A police report must be made before a criminal prosecution can be considered by the local District Attorney's Office. The chances of successful prosecution are greater if the report to the police is timely and is supported by the collection of medical-legal evidence (See Section 11, above, Medical Legal Evidence Collection).  Victims have the right to request that law enforcement implement emergency protective restraining orders. Victims who receive emergency or permanent protective or restraining orders through a criminal or civil process should notify the University’s Title IX Coordinator, titleix@stanford.edu. The University will work with the victim and the person who is the subject of the restraining order to manage compliance with the order on Stanford’s campus.

Because the requirements and standards for finding a violation of criminal law are different from the standards for finding a violation of this Policy, criminal investigations or reports are not determinative of whether Prohibited Sexual Conduct, for purposes of this Policy, has occurred. In other words, conduct may constitute a violation under this Policy even if law enforcement agencies lack sufficient evidence of a crime and therefore decline to prosecute. Moreover, the filing of a complaint of Prohibited Sexual Conduct with the University is independent of any criminal investigation or proceeding. The University will not wait for the conclusion of any criminal investigation proceeding to commence its own investigation and/or to take interim measures to protect the Impacted Party and University community. Both a criminal investigation and a University investigation involving the same incident(s) may occur simultaneously.

A person who wishes specific information about legal options should consult a private attorney or advocacy organization. Please see Section 16: Resources at the end of this policy.

Back to top

14. Education and Prevention

a. Bystander Intervention
Stanford University expects all members of the Stanford Community to be Active Bystanders against sexual violence. The following information is based on Bystander Intervention research being done at the University of New Hampshire and the guidelines developed by UNH. ("Bringing in the Bystander® is a registered trademark of the University of New Hampshire on behalf of Prevention Innovations. Learn to recognize the signs of danger and learn how to intervene safely. Commit to being an Active Bystander.

1. Some simple steps to becoming an Active Bystander:

  • Notice the situation: Be aware of your surroundings.
  • Interpret it as a problem: Do I recognize that someone needs help?
  • Feel responsible to act: See yourself as being part of the solution to help.
  • Know what to do: Educate yourself on what to do.
  • Intervene safely: Take action but be sure to keep yourself safe (see next step).

2. How to Intervene Safely:

  • Tell another person. Being with others is a good idea when a situation looks dangerous.
  • Ask a person you are worried about if he/she is okay. Provide options and a listening ear.
  • Distract or redirect individuals in unsafe situations.
  • Ask the person if he/she wants to leave. Make sure that he/she gets home safely.
  • Call the police (911) or someone else in authority or yell for help.

3. What can my friends and I do to be safe?

  • Take care of each other.  Remember these tips when you are out.
  • Have a plan.
    Talk with your friends about your plans BEFORE you go out. Do you feel like drinking? Are you interested in hooking up? Where do you want to go? Having a clear plan ahead of time helps friends look after one another.
  • Go out together.
    Go out as a group and come home as a group; never separate and never leave your friend(s) behind.
  • Watch out for others.
  • If you are walking at night with friends and notice a woman walking by herself in the same direction, ask her to join you so she doesn’t have to walk alone.
  • Diffuse situations.
  • If you see a friend coming on too strong to someone who may be too drunk to make a consensual decision, interrupt, distract, or redirect the situation.  If you are too embarrassed or shy to speak out, get someone else to step in.
  • Trust your instincts.
  • If a situation or person doesn’t seem “right” to you, trust your gut and remove yourself, if possible, from the situation.

b. Education Resources
Stanford University provides resources for education about and prevention of Prohibited Sexual Conduct. Incoming students participate in online training before arriving at Stanford and undergraduates participate in a series of educational events during New Student Orientation. Throughout the year both undergraduates and graduates are invited to participate in programming on the prevention of Prohibited Sexual Conduct. Students, faculty and staff are urged to take advantage of on-campus prevention and education resources (both University-supported and student-led) and are encouraged to participate actively in prevention and risk reduction efforts.

  • Office of Sexual Assault & Relationship Abuse Education & Response (SARA) (650-725-1056) provides comprehensive and consistent response to incidents of sexual and relationship violence to the campus community. SARA provides case consultation to students and staff, case management for reported assaults and information and referrals to services on and off campus. The office also assists with educational outreach and training to increase awareness, sensitivity, and community accountability in the prevention of these acts. Online information is available at the SARA Office.
  • Sexual Harassment Policy Office (650-724-2120) provides training programs regarding sexual harassment for the campus community. Some programs are required for faculty, staff supervisors, instructors and newly hired staff. Information is available at http://harass.stanford.edu.
  • Stanford University Department of Public Safety (650-723-9633) conducts educational programs and distributes educational literature to students, faculty and staff.
  • Students United for Risk Elimination (SURE) (650-725-SURE) is an evening golf cart escort service for students, faculty and staff designed to enhance safety for the campus community.

Back to top

15. Public Release of Information

a. Public Information
Requests for information concerning an incident of Prohibited Sexual Conduct should be directed to the Stanford University News Service (650-723-2558) or the Stanford University Department of Public Safety (650-723-9633).

b. Public Notification of Incidents
As required by state and federal law, the Stanford Department of Public Safety must collect and report annually statistical information concerning sexual assaults occurring in its jurisdiction. To promote public safety, the Department also alerts the campus community to incidents and trends of immediate concern.

Back to top

16. Resources

The University is committed to providing information regarding on- and off-campus services and resources to all parties involved. A comprehensive website dedicated to Prohibited Sexual Conduct awareness, prevention and support can be found at NotAlone.Stanford.edu.

Confidential Campus Resources
The following resources have the ability to keep a victim's name confidential and anonymous. Reporting an incident of Prohibited Sexual Conduct to one of these resources will not lead to a university or police investigation.1

• Stanford University Confidential Sexual Assault Counselors:
• YWCA Rape Crisis Hotline:  
• Counseling and Psychological Services (CAPS)--students only:
• Faculty Staff Help Center (faculty and staff only):
• Office for Religious Life:
• University Ombuds:
• School of Medicine Ombuds:   
(650) 725-9955 or (650) 736-6933
(650) 493-7273 or (408) 287-3000
(650) 723-3785
(650) 723-4577
(650) 723-1762
(650) 723-3682
(650) 498-5744

1 Pursuant to California Penal Code 11165.7, 11166, 11167, persons who meet the definition of a mandated reporter must report incidents of child abuse and neglect. A person under the age of 18 years of age is considered to be a child.
 

Medical Resources2

• Vaden Health Center:
• Stanford Health Care Emergency Department:
• Santa Clara Valley Medical Center (medical-legal exam): 
• Planned Parenthood Mountain View:             
(650) 498-2336, ext 1
(650) 723-5111
(408) 885-5000
(650) 948-0807

2 Pursuant to California Penal Code 11160, medical clinicians are required to notify the police if they observe physical injuries they believe were caused by assaultive conduct, including sexual assault.
 

Campus Resources3

Title IX Office/Title IX Coordinator:
   titleix@stanford.edu
SARA Office:
  saraoffice@stanford.edu
(650) 497-4955

(650) 725-1056 or
(650) 725-9129
 Residential Education/House Staff:
(Residence Deans, Resident Assistants,
Peer Health Educators, Residence Fellows).
If there is no answer or if you have an urgent, after-hours issue,
contact the campus operator at (650) 723-2300 and ask to be
connected to the Undergraduate Residence Dean on call.
(650) 725-2800
Graduate Life Office Deans:
If there is no answer or if you have an urgent, after-hours issue,
call the 24-hour pager: (650) 723-8222, pager ID 25085.
(650) 736-7078
OCS Alternate Review Process (ARP):
Office of the General Counsel: 
Sexual Harassment and Policy Office:
(650) 725-2485
(650) 723-9611
(650) 724-2120
Human Resources:
General:
School of Medicine:
SLAC:

(650) 725-8356
(650) 725-8607
(650) 926-2358

 3 These resources are obligated to report Prohibited Sexual Conduct to the Title IX Office when the Impacted Party or the Responding Party is a student.
 

Legal and Advocacy Resources

• YWCA Rape Crisis Hotline:

• YWCA Silicon Valley Domestic Violence:
• Next Door Solutions to Domestic Violence: 
• Community Solutions:

• Santa Clara County District Attorney's Office
Sexual Assault  Investigations Team:
• Santa Clara County District Attorney's Office
Domestic Violence Investigations Team:
• National Domestic Violence Hotline:
• Rape, Abuse & Incest National Network Hotline:
• Bay Area Legal Aid:

(650) 493-7273 or
(408) 287-3000
(800) 572-2782
(408) 279-2962
(877) 363-7238

(408) 792-2516

(408) 792-2551

(800) 799-SAFE
(800) 656-HOPE
(650) 358-0745

Restraining Order Information for San Mateo County, including additional referrals
Restraining Order Information for Santa Clara County, including additional referrals

 

Back to top

1.8.1 Protection of Minors

Last updated on:
05/29/2015
Authority: 

This Guide Memo is approved by the President.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to all University departments and organizations. Athletic camps, academic camps, licensed childcare facilities, instructional programs, and other organized programs and activities intended for Minors are within the scope of this policy, whether they are limited to daily activities, involve the housing of Minors in residence halls, or take place off campus as part of a program directed or sponsored by Stanford (“Covered Programs”).

1. Definitions

“Minor”: any person under the age of 18.

“Covered Program” is any activity directed or sponsored by Stanford and intended for minors. Covered Programs also include programs and activities intended for minors that are operated by a third party organization on Stanford’s campus. Covered Programs do not include: single performances or events open to the general public not targeted toward children, social functions that may be attended by Minors who are accompanied by their parents/guardians, or organized school field trips or tours  where Minors are under the supervision of an authorized adult or adults.

“Program Staff”:  Administrators, faculty, staff, students, and volunteers who work directly with, supervise, chaperone or otherwise oversee Minors in Covered Programs.

“Live Scan”: The required method of criminal background check for Program Staff working with Minors; the method uses a fingerprinting device. For information on conducting a Live Scan check, contact University Risk Management.

Back to top

2. Purpose and Scope of Policy

  1. Stanford University is dedicated to the welfare and safety of all persons who participate in University-sponsored events. However, because they are a particularly vulnerable population, Stanford takes extra precautions to protect children under the age of 18 (“Minors”) who participate in activities and programs taking place on Stanford’s campus or under the authority and direction of the University at other locations. Stanford expects all members of the University community to adhere to and act in accordance with this policy.
  2. This policy describes the responsibilities of administrators, faculty, staff, students, and volunteers who work directly with, supervise, chaperone or otherwise oversee Minors in these activities (“Program Staff”), and informs all members of the University community of their obligation to report any instances of known or suspected abuse or neglect of Minors. Failure to comply with the requirements set forth in this policy may lead to disciplinary action (up to and including termination) and/or revocation of the opportunity to use Stanford facilities and land.
  3. Although Stanford is committed to the welfare and appropriate treatment of all Minors, the administrative requirements of this policy do not apply to programs or activities involving:
  • Matriculated Stanford students who are Minors.
  • Minors who are employed at Stanford. However, if a Minor employee will be working in a Covered Program, he/she will be required to complete a background check and training as required by this policy. 
  • Minors participating in Institutional Review Board approved research.
  • Patient care-related activities pertaining to Minors at Stanford Hospital or Lucile Packard Children’s Hospital. These activities are addressed in relevant health care policies.

Back to top

3. Minors not Participating in University-sponsored Activities

  1. Stanford, as a research university, is generally not a proper environment for Minors unless they are participating in an authorized program or activity and adequately supervised by adults who have the appropriate training and credentials. Accordingly:

1. Stanford students who have a Minor relative, friend or other guest stay with them on campus must comply with the Guest Policy in their Residence Agreement. Minor guests must be accompanied in the residence by their host, and must be registered with the Housing Front Desk when required under the Guest Policy.

2. Daycare or babysitting services are not permitted except if provided by one of Stanford’s NAEYC-accredited Early Education and Childcare centers, or by a licensed vendor who complies with all state licensing requirements and is authorized by Stanford to offer the services.  In-home childcare arrangements in private residences located on Stanford lands are permitted.

3. Pursuant to other University policies and/or Federal and/or State laws and regulations, Minors should not be present in certain facilities and environments. If a parent or guardian brings his or her Minor child to work, the parent or guardian is responsible for the Minor’s welfare and must ensure that the Minor child does not visit such restricted locations.

  1. In general, Minors should not be left unsupervised on Stanford’s campus. It is the responsibility of those who bring Minors to campus (including Covered Program Sponsors or Third Party Program Directors) to ensure appropriate supervision. Certain Covered Programs for high school age students do allow limited unsupervised time on campus, with parental authorization and subject to any program rules and restrictions.

Back to top

4. Requirements for Sponsoring Covered Programs

  1. Register the Program

Each Covered Program, whether operated by the University or a third party, must have an identified Stanford department or other organization serving as the Program Sponsor, represented by a faculty or staff member from the sponsoring organization.

1. The Program Sponsor must register the program with Stanford Conferences and complete and sign a registration form that outlines the requirements associated with Covered Programs and the responsibilities of Program Sponsors. The registration form will require Program Sponsors to provide a description of the program, the expected age range and estimated number of attendees, and, for programs operated by a third party, the name and contact information for the director of that program (“Third Party Program Director”).

2. After the program is registered, the Program Sponsor or Third Party Program Director will be required to provide the names and contact information for planned Program Staff sufficiently in advance of the Covered Program start date to allow time for Program Staff to complete background checks and training as required by this policy.

3. The Program Sponsor or Third Party Program director is also responsible for obtaining required medical and emergency contact information and liability waivers from the parent/guardian of each participating Minor before they may participate in a Covered Program. Assistance with the registration process is available at http://protectminors.stanford.edu.

  1. Background Check Requirements for Program Staff Working with Minors

  1. Unless specifically excluded under this policy, all Program Staff must undergo a criminal background check before working with Minors in a Covered Program. For Covered Programs operated by a third party, the Third Party Program Director must certify in writing that a current criminal background check has been completed on all individuals who will be assisting with the Covered Program, and inform Stanford of any criminal history that was identified for any of these individuals. In the event that a prior criminal history is revealed for any proposed Program Staff, a review committee including Human Resources and Risk Management representatives will assess the information that has been obtained and, in consultation with the Program Sponsor, make a determination as to whether the individual should be allowed to work in the Covered Program.
  2. Volunteers at Covered Programs who have not undergone a Live Scan background check may be allowed to work in a Covered Program under the direct supervision of Program Staff members who have current background checks on file, but may not have unsupervised contact with any Minor. If the proposed volunteer has been confirmed as a sex offender in the National Sex Offender registry, the individual may not work in any Covered Program. 
  1. Required Training

  1. In recognition of the imperative of protecting Minors, unless specifically excluded under this policy, all Covered Program staff should receive training regarding the following prior to the program start date:

  • Recognizing sexual abuse, child abuse and neglect and obligation and avenues to report suspected incidents

  • Obligation to report certain criminal activity as required by the Clery Act

  • Appropriate ratio of adults to minors

  • Appropriate behavior with minors

  1. Training materials may be obtained from University Human Resources, or at http://protectminors.stanford.edu. If a sponsoring department or organization chooses to design and conduct its own training, the training at a minimum must cover the topics listed above and incorporate the materials provided by Human Resources. For Covered Programs operated by third parties, the Third Party Program Director will be required to provide written confirmation that all adults who will interact with Minors in the Program have undergone training on these topics and have signed an acknowledgment their understanding of their obligations and agreement to comply.

  2. The Program Staff background check and training requirements of this policy do not apply for individual events lasting one day or less.  However, these events still must still be registered with Stanford Conferences and have adequate adult supervision, and Program Staff must abide by Stanford’s guidelines for appropriate behavior with Minors. In addition, Program Staff for these events must include at least one identified adult staff person present at all times who has a current background check on file.

Back to top

5. Minimum Appropriate Staffing Ratio of Adults to Minors

Staffing needs for Covered Programs may vary depending on the type of program, the activities involved, and requirements imposed by the Program Sponsor. However, all Covered Programs must meet the following minimum staffing ratios:

Appropriate Staffing Ratio of Adults to Minors
Participant Age Number of Staff Number of Overnight Participants Number of Day-Only Participants
6-8 years 1 6 8
9-13 years 1 8 10
14-17 years 1 10 12

 

Back to top

6. Appropriate Behavior with Minors

Adults should be positive role models for Minors, and act in a caring, honest, respectful and responsible manner that is consistent with the mission and guiding principles of the University. The behavior of all members of the Stanford community is expected to align at all times with the University’s Code of Conduct. In addition, all members must abide by the University’s Guidelines for Appropriate Behavior with Minors, at http://ProtectMinors.stanford.edu.

Back to top

7. Report Allegations of Inappropriate Behavior

"If you see something, say something." Every member of the University community has an obligation to report immediately instances or suspected instances of the abuse of or inappropriate interactions with Minors. This includes information about suspected abuse, neglect, or inadequate care provided by any Program Staff or by a parent, guardian, or custodian/caretaker. Individuals making a report in good faith will be protected from criminal and civil liability for making the report. Further, it is the policy of the University that no person making a good faith report of suspected abuse or neglect will be retaliated against in the terms and conditions of employment or educational program.

Back to top

2.1.1 Staff Personnel Policies

Last updated on:
09/01/2011
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
22

This policy describes general information on the development of, administration of, and decisions about personnel policies at Stanford University.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources.

1. Purpose

Staff personnel policies and procedures have been developed on topics that are:

  • Required to comply with applicable laws and regulations, and/or
  • Considered essential in an organization the size and scope of Stanford.

The policies and procedures are intended for supervisors and administrators to:

  • Provide guidance for consistent personnel actions and decisions, and
  • Establish generally applicable performance and behavior expectations in the workplace.

For employees, violation of any policy or procedure described in Chapter 2 (or any other applicable University policy or procedure) may result in disciplinary action up to and including termination.

Many of these policies extend to students and others who work for, or provide services to Stanford. Disciplinary action for these community members are delegated to the appropriate authority.

Back to top

2. Policy Authority

a. Policy Development
Personnel policies are approved and authorized by the Vice President of Human Resources, in consultation with Vice Presidents, Vice Provosts and other University officials.

b. Policy Revisions
Send proposals for policy changes to the Vice President of Human Resources for study and recommendation. Approved changes are published in the Administrative Guide and may be communicated in the Stanford Report or by written notice to officers and administrators. Changes in policies for benefit plans (e.g., health, life insurance, disability, and retirement) are reflected in the summary plan descriptions and brochures of the individual plans.

c. Policy Interpretation
Questions regarding policy interpretation should be brought to the attention of senior management and/or your local Human Resources office.

d. Alleged Policy Violations
Suspected policy violation information should be brought to the attention of local senior management and/or local Human Resources office.

Back to top

3. Administration of Staff Personnel Policies

University officers and administrators, both academic and nonacademic, are responsible for the administration of University policies and procedures including those applicable to staff. Supervisors who work for officers and administrators are responsible for ensuring that individual employees receive information about personnel policies and procedures as well as providing policy interpretations and/or referrals to appropriate resources.

Back to top

4. Exceptions to Personnel Policies

In the event an exception to established policy appears to be necessary, the unique facts of the situation should be discussed in advance with an appropriate representative from Human Resources, usually an Employee Relations Representative. When necessary, cognizant Vice Presidents, Vice Provosts or University officers will be included in the decision-making of proposed exceptions. Exceptions to personnel policies must be approved by the Vice President of Human Resources, or his/her designee.

Back to top

2.1.2 Recruiting and Hiring of Regular Staff

Last updated on:
03/13/2015
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
22.1

This policy reviews all phases of the recruiting and hiring process and the corresponding areas of responsibility.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources.

Applicability: 

All regular staff of the University and SLAC (as defined in Admin Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions), with some limitations:

  • Bargaining Unit—For policies specific to employees covered by collective bargaining agreements, see agreements at Labor Relations & Collective Bargaining
  • SLAC National Accelerator Laboratory (SLAC)—Some procedures in this policy do not apply at SLAC. For procedures specific to SLAC, contact SLAC's Human Resources Department.
  • Hospital—"Hospital" refers to both Stanford Health Care (SHC) and Lucile Packard Children's Hospital (LPCH). The hospitals are separate employers, each with its own policies and procedures. Contact SHC or LPCH Human Resources.
Purpose: 

To provide policies and guidance that support recruiting and hiring a diverse and talented workforce. To accomplish this, Stanford strongly encourages hiring supervisors to develop the broadest possible applicant pool allowing the best and the brightest candidates—internal and external—to fairly compete for all open positions. Through fair and open competition and application of equitable evaluation criteria, Stanford hires the best available candidates. To meet University policies and practices and comply with federal and state regulations.

1. General Recruiting and Hiring Responsibilities

a. University Human Resources
University Human Resources is responsible for developing, monitoring and overseeing employment policies and providing the University with support services necessary to attain staffing objectives.

b. Local Human Resources Manager
Local Human Resources Manager is the person responsible for administering recruiting and hiring policy for each organization.

c. Hiring Supervisors
Hiring Supervisors are those faculty and staff designated to make staff hiring decisions. Hiring supervisors are responsible for making such decisions in accordance with the policies and procedures established by the University and set forth in this Guide Memo. Each hiring supervisor is accountable for his/her actions in matters relating to applicable sections of this policy, compliance with federal and state regulations governing employment and performance in achieving affirmative action program goals. Questions on these policies that cannot be resolved at the local level should be referred to the Vice President of Human Resources.

Guide to Supervisors

Typical responsibilities for University Human Resources

  • Conducts full-service recruiting and recruitment programs
  • Develops recruitment and hiring-related programs
  • Consults on recruitment strategies, compliance, diversity, selection and on-boarding
  • Administers online recruiting systems and websites
  • Ensures regulatory compliance; administers recruiting and hiring policy
  • Oversees contingent staffing, international hiring, background checks, third party management (including executive search firms)

Typical responsibilities for Local Human Resources Managers

  • Represents needs of the unit to University HR
  • Develops programs to support local recruiting needs
  • Consults on, and facilitates, recruiting process within the local unit and between the local unit and University HR
  • Conducts and coordinates position searches, including selection and use of employment search firms
  • Emphasizes the need to ensure affirmative action goals are considered by hiring supervisor
  • Implements and administers recruitment and hiring policies

Typical responsibilities for Hiring Supervisors

  • Makes selection and hiring decisions within the stipulated policies and parameters, including reviewing resumes, interviewing candidates, conducting reference checks, and documenting process and decisions
  • Implements recruiting and staffing policies, programs and processes locally
  • Contributes toward the achievement of affirmative action goals

 

Back to top

2. Recruiting and Hiring Policies

a. Equal Employment Opportunity & Affirmative Action
In accordance with all applicable law, it is the policy of University to:

  • Comply with all affirmative action requirements, and
  • Provide equal employment opportunities for all applicants and employees.

Guide to Supervisors

All employees in a position to make hiring decisions (“hiring supervisors”) are expected to comply with the “Equal Employment Opportunity Statement” distributed annually by the University’s Diversity & Access Office and Guide Memo 2.2.1: General Personnel Policies' provision on “Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action Policy.”

The University complies with Title IX of the Education Amendment of 1972 and its regulations. The Title IX Compliance Officer is the Director of Diversity & Access Office. If you believe the University is not in compliance with Title IX and its regulations, contact the Title IX Coordinator at 585 Capistrano Way, Stanford, CA 94305-8230. Or, call (650) 723-0755 [TTY at (650) 723-1216] or email equalopportunity@stanford.edu.

b. Employment Rights and Preferences of Former and Current Regular Staff
The University gives current and former regular staff certain reemployment rights and preferences described below:

(1) Right to Reemployment or Return to Active Employment
(a) Definition
The right of a former regular staff to reemployment or return to active employment in his/her former University position to the extent required by law.
(b) Who Qualifies
Reemployment rights extend to former regular staff who:

  • Terminated employment to serve in the military. A department that receives an inquiry about reemployment of a former employee returning from the Armed Services should consult with an Employee Relations Representative.
  • Returns from a leave of absence on or before the agreed upon return date (e.g., military, childbirth, family, medical) when the leave was formally requested and granted in accordance with University policy.

(2) Hiring Preference
The University is committed to hiring the best qualified candidate for the job. When the qualifications stated in the job listing and predetermined job-related selection criteria are used to determine each candidate's qualifications, and more than one qualified candidate competes for a job, the employment offer must be extended first to the candidate who has preference according to 3 below.

(3) Order of preference
Follow this order when considering substantially equal candidates:

(a) First Preference:
Regular staff who have been given written notice of permanent layoff or who are permanently laid off under the policies in Guide Memo 2.1.17: Layoffs. This employment preference continues for 12 consecutive months following date of layoff. Layoff preference also applies to regular staff whose positions are being eliminated and who has been informed that they will be laid off if they do not obtain alternative employment in the same department/administrative unit.
(b) Second Preference:
Current regular staff who meet the qualifications for the position and for whom placement in this job would constitute a promotion, or who have successfully completed a formal training program for the specific job.
(c) Third Preference:
Current temporary or casual employees on the Stanford payroll applying for a position in the same work group reporting to the same supervisor where the employee currently works in a temporary or casual role.

Guide to Supervisors

Policy conflicts may occur between consideration of the hiring preferences and consideration of affirmative action goals. In these circumstances, consult with the local Human Resources Office before making an offer of employment.

c. Employment of Related Persons
Employment by a related person in any position (e.g. regular staff, faculty, other teaching, temporary, casual, third party, etc.) within an organizational unit can occur only with the approval of the responsible Vice Provost, Vice President (or similar level equivalent to the highest administrative person within the organizational unit), or his/her designee. Under no circumstances may a supervisor hire or approve any compensation action for any employee to whom the supervisor is related. An individual may not supervise, evaluate the job performance, or approve compensation for any individual with whom the supervisor is related.

Even when the criteria discussed here are met, employment of a related person in any position within the organization must have the approval of the local human resources office, in addition to the approval of the hiring manager's supervisor, including faculty supervisors. 

Guide to Supervisors

Employment by a related person in any position (e.g. regular staff, faculty, other teaching, temporary, casual, third party, etc.) within an organizational unit can result in an actual or perceived conflict of interest and is strongly discouraged.

The university recognizes that relationships may develop in the workplace. The university expects its employees to disclose relationships as appropriate, and specifically in the case of direct reporting relationships and/or potential conflict of interest situations. Failure to properly disclose a relationship or family connection may lead to corrective action measures being taken.

All of the above requirements also apply to employing and hiring those with consensual sexual or romantic relationships. In addition, consensual sexual or romantic relationships must also be disclosed in compliance with section 4 in Guide Memo 1.7.2: Consensual Sexual or Romantic Relationships In the Workplace and Educational Setting.

Definition of Related Person—The employee’s spouse; same-sex domestic partner; children of the employee, spouse or same-sex domestic partner; parents and parents-in-law; parent surrogate; brothers and sisters of the employee; grandparents and grandchildren of the employee; and, any other dependent family member who lived in the employee’s residence.

d. Rehiring Former Staff
Regardless of the reason for rehire, all former staff must serve a new Trial Period, including those former staff who meet the reinstatement criteria set forth below.

(1) Reinstating the Hire Date:
Former regular staff will have their hire date reinstated if they left the University in good standing and meet these timelines:
(a) Former regular staff that has been laid off and is reemployed by the University within 24 months following the date of layoff will have the most recent hire date prior to layoff reinstated.
(b) Former regular staff whose employment was terminated for reasons other than layoff will have the most recent date of hire prior to termination reinstated if reemployment occurs within 12 months following the date of termination. Reinstatement includes all of the following:

  • Bridging of service by restoring the most recent hire date in a benefits-eligible position before termination,
  • Restoration of any sick leave balance at the time of termination, and
  • Vacation accrual rate based on the reinstated hire date.

(2) Rehire After Involuntary Discharge
If a regular staff member was terminated from the University for cause, supervisors must consult their local HR Office and Employee Relations Representative before rehire or reinstatement. An individual who was terminated for gross misconduct is not eligible for rehire.

Guide to Supervisors

For information on how rehire or reinstatement affects benefits, go to the Benefits website at http://benefits.stanford.edu or call (650) 736-2985 and press option 9.

Hiring Hospital Employees—See Guide Memo 2.1.4 for information on applicability of University employment policies and eligibility for University benefits when hiring regular staff who was previously employed by Stanford Health Care (or its predecessor companies) or Lucile Packard Children’s Hospital.

e. Age as a Hiring Factor
Age (except for persons under 18 who have not graduated from high school) may not be used as a factor in hiring unless it can be shown as a necessary job qualification.

f. Employment of Minors
Before an offer of employment is made, the hiring department must obtain a work permit for applicants under age 18 years who have not graduated from high school. A permit is obtained from the applicant's school district and is retained in the department file.

Guide to Supervisors

The Fair Labor Standards Act (FLSA) and California law restricts the hours and conditions of employment for minors. Because restrictions on the employment of minors can be complex, supervisors should consult with their local Human Resources Office about specific cases. General restrictions include:

Except as part of approved University programs (e.g., Take Our Children to Work Day), minors are not permitted to visit in areas where they would not be permitted to work as employees.

  • Minors ages 16-17: In addition to the above, prohibited from working on hazardous jobs. No other restrictions.
  • Minors ages 14-15: In addition to all the above, during school session, cannot work more than 3 hours/day, 18 hours/ week. During school vacation, cannot work more than 8 hours/day, 40 hours /week.
  • Minors under age 14: In addition to all the above, prohibited from most non-agricultural work.

 

Back to top

3. Policies And Practices—Search Phase

a. Job Descriptions
Before a job description is entered into the HRMS Applicant system:

(1) Hiring supervisor's responsibilities: Identify the functions of the job, define and describe the duties and responsibilities of the position, include required regulatory training, develop and document objective criteria for the selection process, and obtain local Human Resources Office's confirmation of position level and salary range. For guidance, go to Additional Base Pay Compensation. Qualifications cannot unnecessarily prevent or lessen the employment opportunities for any class of applicants or potential applicants, as identified in Section 2.b.
(2) Local Human Resources Office's responsibilities: Reviews the Position Summary for clarity and content, classification and salary range, and ensures that the job description is entered into the HR Applicant Tracking System. The job requisition is also reviewed for appropriateness of posting.

Guide to Supervisors

Selection Criteria—Use the job description and other relevant criteria established by the hiring supervisor (including education, experience, essential skills, abilities and competencies) to screen applicants and aid in the selection process.

b. Announcing Job Openings
(1) Local Human Resources Offices
All regular staff vacancies must be listed with the appropriate Human Resource office.

  • For SLAC, SLAC Human Resources Department.
  • For campus and School of Medicine, Staffing Services in University Human Resources. Staffing Services announces all openings on Stanford Careers and may use other media as appropriate.

(2) Temporary Employment
Non-regular staff vacancies that do not lend themselves to employment of Stanford students due to the nature of the work and work schedule, may be listed with commercial temporary employment services and/or StanfordTemps.

(3) Text of Advertisements
Advertising and other notification of vacancies must be non-discriminatory and must include reference to the University's commitment to affirmative action and equal opportunity: “Stanford is an equal opportunity employer and all qualified applicants will receive consideration without regard to race, color, religion, sex, sexual orientation, gender identity, national origin, disability, veteran status, or any other characteristic protected by law.”

c. Posting Period
(1) Definition
A posting period is the period during which information about the job opening is made available and applications are accepted. Generally, postings should not exceed six months except where the hiring supervisor is actively seeking and reviewing applications for the position.
(2) Length of Posting Period
All vacant positions except those filled through an approved posting period waiver (see Section 3.d for information on waivers) are posted online for a minimum of 10 calendar days. The posting period begins when the approved online requisition updates the Applicant Tracking System. Applications are accepted through the full posting period.
(3) Changes in Posting Period
Posting periods may not be shortened or eliminated except through the waiver process (see Section 3.d). Posting periods may be extended at the hiring supervisor's discretion and applications may be accepted beyond the posting period at the supervisor's discretion.
(4) Timing of Employment Offer
Offers of employment may not be made until after the expiration of the posting period or an approved waiver of posting (see Section 3.d).

d. Waiver of Posting
All regular staff vacancies not posted for the minimum posting period must have an approved waiver of posting before an employment offer can be made. The local Human Resources Office may approve waiver requests. However, waiver requests for positions falling within job groups with affirmative action goals for the University must also be approved by the Diversity and Access Office.

Guide to Supervisors

For a list of considerations to help determine if a waiver is appropriate, go to the Staffing Services website.

The local Human Resources Office (HRO) is responsible for following the waiver policy. Every job posting should be reviewed to determine if it is within an EEO job category which is currently underutilized with respect to women and/or minorities for which the University has an affirmative action goal. In addition, approved waivers should meet the approval criteria outlined below. The HRO also ensures that waiver requests do not unduly restrict consideration of individuals with employment preferences, and that Staffing Services receives the waiver documentation in writing (preferably in the applicant tracking system).

The Diversity and Access Office will approve or deny waiver requests for positions that fall within EEO job categories for which Stanford has an affirmative action goal.

Approval Criteria—The hiring department must have consulted with Staffing Services to determine if qualified layoff candidates are available. The hiring department must document the reason for requesting the waiver. The local Human Resources Office may approve the waiver request if:

  • The department documents critical operational need, or
  • Affirmative action goals are not negatively impacted, or
  • There is a uniquely qualified/skilled applicant and it is unlikely a better qualified candidate would apply, or
  • The department can reuse a recent (within past six months) applicant pool for a comparable job likely to result in a similar pool.

Denial Criteria—The local Human Resources Office may deny a waiver request if it is determined that the requested action would be inconsistent with the University’s waiver or affirmative action policies.

e. Recruitment of Applicants

(1) Definition of an Applicant
Currently Stanford requires resumes for regular staff positions to be submitted through the Stanford Careers (or Jobs@SLAC) website. Consistent with this requirement, an applicant is defined as any person who meets all of these criteria:

(a) The individual submits a resume for a specific position through the Stanford Careers (or Jobs@SLAC) website,
(b) Stanford considers the individual for employment in a particular position,
(c) The individual's resume indicates the individual possesses the basic qualifications for the position, and
(d) The individual at no time during the selection process prior to receiving an offer of employment removes him/herself from further consideration or otherwise indicates that he/she is no longer interested in the position.

 (2) Equal Opportunity Policy 
With the assistance of Staffing Services and local Human Resources Office, departments must make every effort to recruit qualified individuals for job openings, keeping in mind the University's commitment to equal opportunity and affirmative action, and any specific affirmative action goals (as opposed to quotas or preferences, which may not be used) established for specific classifications and departments.

(3) International Recruitment
Please review Section 6, International Hiring, before recruiting or hiring outside of the United States.

(4) Search Firms
In general, Stanford makes limited use of the services of executive search firms or employment agencies. In the instances where it is necessary to use such services (e.g., senior level vacancies), departments must consult with the local Human Resources Office before making any arrangement with an outside firm or agency.

Guide to Supervisors

The hiring supervisor is accountable for assuring that the firm or agency is fully informed with regard to its responsibility for meeting the University’s institutional affirmative action and record keeping responsibilities. Consultation on search firms is available from Staffing Services.

For a checklist on how to choose a search firm that meets Stanford’s requirements to provide a widely diverse selection of applicants and the ability to track the applicant pool, go to the Staffing Services website.

Receiving Electronic Resumes—Electronic resumes are submitted to the Office of Staff Employment, using Stanford Careers. Staffing Services will send applications a written acknowledgement that his/her resume has been received. Electronic resumes are submitted to SLAC using Careers at SLAC.  

 

Back to top

4. Policies and Practices—Selection Phase

a. Employment Application Form

  • All interviewed applicants must complete and sign a Stanford University application form.
  • Stanford does not accept incomplete application forms.
  • Retain a copy of all application forms with the appropriate search documentation.
  • The successful candidate's application form must be retained in the personnel file (see Guide Memo 2.1.3: Personnel Files and Data.)

b. International Candidates
Please review Section 6, International Hiring, before selecting an international candidate.

c. Interviews

  • Standard Administration
    Hiring supervisors must ensure standard administration of the interview process, including the equivalent treatment of candidates, avoidance of discriminatory questions and uniform interview content.
  • Accommodation
    At the request of a disabled candidate, accommodation during the interview process may be required.

d. Testing

  • Prior Approval
    All testing or screening devices used in the employment process must be approved by the AVP, Recruitment & Talent Management in consultation with the Diversity & Access Office, as appropriate. Only standardized, validated test instruments may be considered.
  • Accommodations
    At the request of a disabled applicant, accommodation to enable testing may be required.
  • Applicability of Test
    When used, approved tests must directly relate to essential job functions and be given to all applicants or finalists under the same or equivalent conditions. The test must be scored, evaluated and used as a selection factor equally for all applicants or finalists and maintained with other applications and selection materials.

e. Reference Checks
The hiring supervisor is required to obtain a minimum of two reference checks from previous employers. Reference checks must be part of the candidate's evaluation and may be used as a factor in the hiring decision if the information is job-related. No offer of employment can be made before completing the hiring process, including reference checks.

Guide to Supervisors

The hiring supervisor must exercise caution to assure that:

  • The names of those contacted for references are retained in the search documentation with any unsolicited written references provided by the candidate,
  • Inconsistent or negative information obtained in a reference check is corroborated, if possible, before it is used in making a hiring decision, and
  • Reference information used in the hiring decision is job-related and can be shown to be a predictor of job performance.

Local Human Resources Offices may provide consultation.

f. Background Checks
Stanford may conduct background checks on final candidates, as required. Additional background checking may be required in some job classifications (e.g., Deputy Sheriffs). Local Human Resources Offices will provide information on specific requirements. No offer of employment can be made before completing the hiring process, including a background check, if applicable.

g. Criminal Records
A criminal record will not automatically disqualify a job applicant. An applicant with a criminal record can only be barred from employment if the circumstances are reviewed by the local Human Resources Office and Employee and Labor Relations.

h. False and/or Misleading Statements
Withdraw from consideration any applicant found to have misleading and/or false statements on the employment application or other documents.

i. Review of Personnel Files
Hiring supervisors have access to personnel files of current and former University employees who are finalists for the position. No offer of employment can be made before the hiring supervisor or Human Resources reviews the personnel files.

Guide to Supervisors

Contact the local Human Resources Office for details and assistance (see Guide Memo 2.1.3: Personnel Files and Data).

 

Back to top

5. Employment Decisions, Offers and Documentation

a. Hiring Decisions
Hiring decisions for regular University staff positions are based on the relative job-related qualifications of the applicants for the positions, with full consideration of the employment rights and preferences specified in Section 2.b.

  • The hiring supervisor is responsible for judging the relative qualifications of each applicant and for making the hiring decision, consistent with University policy and applicable governmental laws and regulations.
  • The local Human Resources Office is responsible for reviewing proposed hiring decisions and for ensuring compliance with regulations, laws, and/or University employment policies.
  • The Diversity & Access Office, if notified by an applicant or administrator regarding a particular opening, may delay a proposed hiring action for further review if it appears inconsistent with the University's Affirmative Action Program.

b. Employment Offers

(1) Timing of Offer
Employment offers should be made after:

  • The expiration of the posting period (or, after approval of a waiver request),
  • The employment action (including in-hire salary) has received all required approvals, and
  • Successful completion of the background check, where applicable.

(2) Offer Letter

  • An offer letter must be issued by the hiring department to the successful applicant using an approved offer letter template. Approved templates include those for standard hires, promotions and out-of-country hires.

Guide to Supervisors

Workplace Accommodation—At the request of a candidate or applicant who has a disability, workplace accommodation may be needed. The hiring supervisor should refer to Guide Memo 2.2.7: Requesting Workplace Accommodations for Employees with Disabilities. 
 
Out-of-Country—If this is an offer of employment for the applicant to work in a primary site outside the U.S., Staffing Services will assist the local Human Resources Office with arrangements. See Section 6 for details on International Hiring.

c. Documentation and Record Keeping

(1) Pre-Employment
New, transferred, rehired or promoted employees may not start work in the new position until all appropriate forms have been signed and processed.

(2) Non-Selected Applicants

  • The hiring supervisor is responsible for oral or written notification to all non-selected applicants who were interviewed.
  • The hiring supervisor must ensure that all search summary records are completed, including indication of all applicants' status (disposition data) in PeopleSoft HRMS (Taleo). For more information, see the Staffing Services website.

(3) Completeness
Records must include the resume and application materials of all applicants for a position, as well as documents pertaining to individuals considered for the position.

(4) Patent and Copyright Agreement
All employees must complete a Patent and Copyright Agreement Form (SU18) as a condition of employment.

(5) Retention Time
The hiring department must retain records relating to a search, selection and employment decision for a minimum of three years following the decision. Should there be a dispute (grievance/litigation), the documents must be retained until the matter is resolved, if not resolved by the conclusion of the three-year period.

(7) More Information
For more information, see the Staffing Services website.

Back to top

6. International Hiring

Hiring, transfer or assignment of regular staff outside of the United States must be supported by a demonstrable University business purpose, and approved in writing by cognizant School Dean or VP. Copies of such approvals should be forwarded to the Global HR Programs Manager in University Human Resources and the Global Business Director in Business Affairs.

Employees assigned or working outside of the United States are subject to local law as well as University policy and procedures when not in conflict with local law.

Guide to Supervisors

Employment Options—Employment regulations in other countries may be very different than the U.S. In light of operational and regulatory complexities, careful consideration should be given to the various employment options in satisfaction of programmatic requirements, before considering an international hire, transfer or assignment. 
  • Consult with your HR Manager, and ask for a copy of the International Human Resources Checklist for Stanford University Human Resources Managers.
  • See Foreign Activity Operations Guide.  
  • For additional guidance consult the Global Business Infrastructure Group (GlobalBIG), representing cognizant central oversight offices. See Global Roles and Responsibilities
  • See Administrative Guide Memo 2.2.13: International Employees.
Administrative Costs—Assignments outside of the United States typically involve significant additional administrative costs in light of the regulatory and operational complexity involved in such assignments. Accordingly the supervisor hiring or assigning the employee outside of the United States is responsible for ensuring that the added administrative expense of such an assignment is covered by the applicable budget for the duration of the assignment.
 
Work Authorization—Work authorization and immigration issues may require significant lead-time, and HR managers are responsible for ensuring that appropriate documents are secured prior to foreign employment. The local Human Resources Office cannot process an assignment until the proper work authorization is obtained. All offer letters must be approved by the local Human Resources Office in consultation with the Global HR Programs Manager.
 
Consulting Arrangements—It should be noted with caution that what may appear to be a consulting arrangement by U.S. standards, could in fact constitute an employment relationship in a foreign country, potentially triggering employment, tax and other regulatory considerations.

In general, the same policies and practices are required for international hires as detailed in the ensuing guidelines for U.S. employment. However, local country norms and requirements take precedence, and it is the responsibility of local HR managers and the supervisor to ensure that the employee is apprised of such requirements prior to the effective date of the assignment. Assignments should be of a limited duration for the purpose of addressing tax, expatriate status and visa considerations.

Additional guidance may be obtained from the Global HR Programs Manager at globalhrprograms@stanford.edu. in University Human Resources and/or the Global Business Director in Business Affairs.

Back to top

2.1.3 Personnel Files and Data

Last updated on:
04/30/2012
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
22.2

The University maintains personnel information for each employee in order to have a complete, accurate and current record of the employee's salary and job history at the University. This guide memo sets forth policies and procedures to facilitate the establishment, use and maintenance of personnel data, in whatever form maintained.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of University Human Resources.

Applicability: 

Applies to regular employees (as defined in Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions), Academic Staff - Research, and Academic Staff - Libraries. For policies that apply to employees covered by collective bargaining agreements, refer to the agreements between Stanford University and SEIU Higher Education Workers Local 2007 and the Stanford University and the Stanford Deputy Sheriffs' Association. Agreements can be found at Labor Relations & Collective Bargaining

While these policy statements are applicable to all University staff, the SLAC University Human Resources Department maintains its own centralized personnel files and should becontacted for specific procedural information relating to personnel files for SLAC employees.

1. Definition

Employee Personnel Files are defined to include the application for employment, and records which are used or have been used to determine an employee's qualifications for promotion, compensation, termination, or disciplinary action. A detailed list of appropriate contents is provided in Section 3.

Back to top

2. Location

Because of the decentralized personnel function at Stanford, the documents which form an employee's personnel file can be found (1) on computerized record-keeping systems and/or digital imaging systems, (2) locally in the Dean's, Director's, Vice Provost's or Vice President's office, (3) in the department head's or supervisor's office, (4) in the Payroll office, and/or (5) at the Personnel Records area at SLAC. All such documents comprise the personnel file.

Back to top

3. Contents

Employee personnel files should contain only that information which is directly related to the employee's job duties, salary, performance and general employment history. Medical files, where applicable, must be maintained separately from other files (see Guide to Supervisors on next page). Listed in the three following subsections are many types of documents which, if they exist, are appropriate for retention in employee personnel files. Documents that have not been shared with the employee and the supervisor do not belong in the file(s).

a. Personnel Files and Data Maintained by the Department/Division:

  • Attendance and Absence Records (Note: At SLAC, these items are located in Payroll)
  • For areas that do not use PeopleSoft HRMS, and for periods of time that predate the implementation of PeopleSoft HRMS:
    • Leave of absence correspondence (includes vacation and PTO)
    • Time sheets: TTR, RHT, Hours Worked Record (SU-28); at SLAC, located in Payroll
    • Vacation and sick leave records; at SLAC, located in Payroll
    • Yearly leave records; at SLAC, located in Payroll
  • Offer and/or confirmation of employment letters
  • Classification review letters addressed to employee
  • Correspondence between employee and supervisor that relates to employment
  • Copies of compliance agreements and other University-required agreements, such as HIPAA and those related to use of patents or confidential personnel information/data
  • Disciplinary memos issued to employee
  • I-9 documents and supporting documentation (SLAC)
  • Job application and any attachments (resume, etc.)
  • Job descriptions
  • Job requisitions
  • Layoff notice issued to employee
  • Performance evaluations issued to employee; employee responses thereto
  • Personnel action forms (PAF)
  • Photo ID where required (SLAC)
  • Resignation letter
  • STAP forms and related documents
  • Termination notice issued to employee
  • Transfer or promotion requests
  • Years of applicable experience calculation

b. Payroll and Other Forms Maintained by Payroll:

  • Automatic bank deposit form
  • Disability insurance adjustment forms (DIA)
  • Long term disability vouchers
  • I-9 documents and supporting documentation
  • One-time payment and reduction forms
  • Time sheets (RHTs)
  • Special salary processing form
  • Wage attachments or garnishment notices (completed)
  • W-4 form

Guide to Supervisors—Supervisors are cautioned that “notes to the file” and other documentation not addressed to the employee do not belong in the employee personnel file. The following list provides some examples of the types of documents that should be retained, but separate from the personnel file.

Contact your local University Human Resources manager if you are ever in doubt of what to retain and/or where to retain it.

  • Auxiliary medical files:
    -Disability Claim Forms; SU-17: Accident/Injury Report
    -Physician evaluations
  • Communications from or to University attorneys
  • Employee settlement agreements
  • Employee lawsuits
  • Employee charges to outside agencies (EEOC, DFEH, OFCCP)
  • Employee Relations advice
  • Grievances, grievance responses, and grievance-related documents
  • Memos between management and the Compensation office
  • Personal financial information (loan applications)
  • Records relating to the investigation of a possible criminal offense

Back to top

4. Access and Use

Personnel files are confidential and access is limited to protect employee privacy. See:
Guide Memo 1.1.1: University Code of Conduct, section 3
Guide Memo 1.5.2: Staff Policy on Conflict of Commitment and Interest, section 2.b and 2.e
Guide Memo 6.1.1: Administrative Computing Systems, section 3.c
Guide Memo 6.2.1: Computer and Network Usage Policy
Guide Memo 6.4.1: Identification and Authentication Systems, section 5

a. Access by the Employee
Each employee may review his/her own local personnel files by requesting an appointment with the University Human Resources manager during regular business hours. An employee may review his/her own central personnel file by making an appointment with and presenting appropriate identification to the Payroll Office. At SLAC, make an appointment with Personnel Records group in University Human Resources.

A University Human Resources or Payroll staff member will remain present during the time the file is reviewed, allowing sufficient inspection time commensurate with the volume of the file. The employee is permitted to take notes during the inspection. When requested by the employee, Stanford must provide copies of any document signed by the employee relating to the obtaining or holding of employment (i.e. performance evaluation or employment application). Copies of documents may be provided at the employee's expense.

b. Access by a Former Employee
A former employee of the University may have access to his/her file for up to two years after termination. Copies of documents may be provided at the former employee's expense.

c. Access by University Officials
University officers, managers, deans, department heads, University Human Resources professionals, representatives of the General Counsel's office, and other University officials with a business need to do so may review individual files. This access is also extended to hiring officers within the University when the employee is a finalist for promotion or transfer.

d. Access by Summons/Subpoenas
Process servers with summons or subpoenas for documents contained in an individual employee's personnel file should be directed to Payroll, or to the Manager of Employee & Labor Relations at SLAC. Departments are not authorized to accept service of summons or subpoenas.

e. Outside Employment Verification Requests (Former and Current Employees)
Stanford does not respond directly to any employment verification requests. Stanford contracts with a third party service supplier to provide employment, salary, and immigration verification services. Employees should follow the instructions at Stanford's Gateway to Financial Activities for employment verification. Requests for information on SLAC employees should be referred to the SLAC University Human Resources Department.

f. Access by Agents of the University
Agents of the University are required by contract to certify that University personnel data will be treated confidentially and only used for the purposes specified in the contract.

g. Requests for Employment References (Former & Current Employees)
Requests from outsidethe University for employment references should be directed to the local human resource manager. Requests for information about SLAC employees should be referred to the SLAC University Human Resources Department. Information other than the dates of employment and job classification requires the employee's written consent before the release of information.

Back to top

5. Maintenance and Retention

a. Current Employees
An employee's work history at Stanford may include service with many different departments. To streamline recordkeeping, the local personnel files should follow the employee from one department to the next, thereby creating a consolidated personnel file containing the employee's complete job history. Local personnel files must be kept in a secure location to prevent unauthorized access.

No one should be responsible for maintenance of his/her own personnel file or data. For example, the personnel file of a department or school's file administrator should be maintained by that individual's supervisor or manager, as appropriate.

b. Terminated Employees
The final department where a former employee worked is responsible for ensuring that appropriate records are retained for the requisite length of time. Records of former Stanford employees should be retained until the later of eight years following the date of termination or, if a claim is brought (e.g., grievance, lawsuit, or charge with state or federal agency), until the disposition of the claim is final.

c. Destruction of Outdated Information
Personnel files contain confidential information and must be destroyed by shredding, incinerating or, in the case of digital records, purged by the system administrator. When the requisite period of data retention has passed, the records should be destroyed. Contact Employee and Labor Relations or SLAC's University Human Resources before the destruction or purging of any personnel information.

Back to top

2.1.4 Hiring Employees from Stanford Health Care or its Predecessor Companies

Last updated on:
09/01/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
22.3

This policy sets out the applicability of University employment policies and eligibility for University benefits in situations where an SHC employee becomes a University employee.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources.

Applicability: 

Applies to Stanford Health Care (SHC) employees who become University employees.

1. Overview

a. Background and Purpose
The University is separate and independent of Stanford Health Care (SHC). Each entity maintains its own Human Resources department, employment policies and employee benefits.

This Guide Memo explains when the hire date from Stanford Health Services (SHS), Lucile Packard Children's Hospital (LPCH), UCSF Stanford Health Care (USHC), or SHC will be used instead of the new University hire date for certain University benefits for eligible employees.

b. Definitions
For purposes of this Guide Memo, the following definitions apply:

  • Employed—earning wages or on an approved leave of absence from a regular position eligible for health and welfare benefits with the applicable employer.
  • SHS Hire Date—the actual date of hire at SHS.
  • LPCH Hire Date—the later of January 17, 1997, or the actual date of hire at LPCH.
  • USHC Hire Date—the actual date of hire at USHC.
  • SHC Hire Date—the actual date of hire at SHC.

Back to top

2. Eligibility Requirements

a. Eligible Employee
An eligible employee must have been employed by SHS, LPCH or the Stanford University School of Medicine on or before October 31, 1997, or must have been employed on or after April 1, 2000, by SHC (including employment by LPCH). The Tuition Grant Program benefits described in section 8 uses its own definition of Eligible Employee.

b. Direct Change
An eligible employee must "change directly" to employment with the University. For purposes of this policy, a direct change occurs when the employee ceases employment with SHC on one business day and commences employment with the University on the next University business day.

Back to top

3. Pay Rate

An eligible employee who becomes a University employee receives a rate of pay consistent with the guidelines that apply to internal University transfers and promotions.

Back to top

4. Voluntary Change

An eligible employee who at his/her own discretion applies for and accepts University employment is considered to have made a voluntary change of employers. In such situations, the following criteria apply for benefits eligibility:

a. The most recent University hire date will be used to determine the period of continuous University employment for:

  • Layoff and severance
  • Tuition Grant Program eligibility, except as provided in section 8
  • Staff Development Program — Guide Memo 2.1.12: Staff Development Program

b. The SHS, LPCH, USHC or SHC hire date as defined in 1.b will be used to determine:

  • Vacation accrual rate
  • Eligibility for participation and vesting in any University retirement plans
  • Eligibility for and participation in any University-sponsored retiree medical plans

c. Verification Required
Where the SHS, LPCH, USHC or SHC hire date is to be used for purposes specified in section 4.b., the hiring supervisor must verify that hire date with Human Resources Management at SHC.

d. Previous University Employment
Where the SHS, LPCH, or SHC hire date occurred upon a direct change of employment from the University, the preceding University hire date plus service while employed at SHC or its predecessors will be used for purposes specified in section 4.b.

Back to top

5. Involuntary Change

Occasionally management of SHC may determine that a function performed by a staff member will no longer be provided. If the University offers such an employee the option of continuing his/her position as a University employee, it is considered an involuntary change of employer and the following policies will apply if the employee is eligible:

a. The most recent University hire date will be used to determine the period of continuous University employment for:

  • Tuition Grant Program eligibility, except as provided in section 8, below
  • Staff Development Program — Guide Memo 2.1.12: Staff Development Program

b. The SHS, LPCH, USHC or SHC hire date as defined above in 1.b will be used to determine the period of continuous University employment for:

  • Layoff and severance
  • Vacation accrual rate
  • Eligibility for participation and vesting in any University retirement plans
  • Eligibility for and participation in any University-sponsored retiree medical plans

c. Verification Required
Where the SHS, LPCH, USHC or SHC hire date is to be used for purposes specified in section 5.b., the hiring supervisor must verify that hire date with Human Resources Management at SHC.

d. Previous University Employment
Where the SHS, LPCH, or SHC hire date occurred upon a direct change of employment from the University, the preceding University hire date plus service while employed at SHC or its predecessors will be used for purposes specified in section 5.b.

Back to top

6. Layoff from USHC OR SHC

An employee who accepts layoff and severance from USHC or SHC and subsequently hired by the University will be considered a new employee and the SHS, LPCH, USHC or SHC hire date shall not be used for any purpose.

Back to top

7. Trial Period

All employees who become University employees will serve a new trial period with the University, even if they have completed a trial period at SHS, LPCH, USHC or SHC or in previous positions at the University.

Back to top

8. Tuition Grant Program (TGP)

a. Eligible Employee
For purposes of this section, an eligible employee is a person whose job transferred from the University to SHC, USHC, or SHS because of one of the business transactions specified below, and who was actively employed by the University on the Applicable Date related to the specific transaction, as shown in the chart below. To be eligible, an employee must have had living dependent children on the Applicable Date.

Tuition Grant Program (TGP) Eligibility

 

Applicable Date

Business Transaction Description

August 31, 1994 SHS created
August 31, 1996 Cowell clinical employees transferred from SU to SHS
October 31, 1997 USHC created

 

 The Vice President of Human Resources may determine that other business transactions involving the involuntary transfer of positions and persons in those positions to SHC from the University may result in eligibility of those persons for reinstatement of TGP benefits upon their return to the University.

b. TGP Eligibility
When an eligible employee is re-hired by the University, he/she will have:

  • Prior years of service reinstated and counted towards TGP eligibility under the TGP Guidelines, and
  • Years of service with SHC, USHC, or SHS counted towards TGP eligibility in accordance with the TGP Guidelines.

If, at the time of reinstatement, prior years of service with the University plus years of service with SHC, USHC, or SHS equal 5 or more years of benefits-eligible service, then the employee will be immediately eligible for TGP benefits, assuming all other TGP criteria as stated in the TGP Guidelines, are met.

Back to top

2.1.5 Compensation of Staff Employees

Last updated on:
07/12/2013
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
22.4

This Guide Memo outlines Stanford University's compensation policies.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources.

Applicability: 

Applies to regular employees not covered by a collective bargaining agreement and Academic Staff-Libraries as defined in Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions. For policies that apply to employees covered by a collective bargaining agreement refer to the agreements at Labor Relations & Collective Bargaining for details. This policy also applies to:

  • Temporary and casual employees, where specified.
  • SLAC, but implementation procedures may differ.

1. Policy Statement

It is Stanford University's policy to pay salaries that are market equitable and reflect the duties and responsibilities of the position and the amount and quality of the work performed in comparison with other University employees, regardless of the funds sources. It is also the intention of the University to set salary ranges that provide competitive pay opportunities comparable with relevant labor markets.

Back to top

2. Information Sources

University compensation policies and procedures for staff employees are described in this Guide Memo and these publications and memoranda:

a. Annual memoranda that describe the salary program, issued by the Provost and the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer. These memoranda include current policies and procedures that are reviewed and approved each year.

b. To find specific administrative information on the staff compensation program, see the Compensation website (secure site).

Back to top

3. Hours of Work and Work Records

a. Work Week
The basic full-time work week is 40 hours of work on five consecutive 8-hour days. The standard week is a 7-day period commencing at 12:01 a.m. Monday and ending at midnight the following Sunday. Salaried staff employed for a work week of less than the basic 40-hour week receive reduced salary based on the ratio of hours worked to 40 hours. Staff employees who are employed at an hourly rate are paid for the actual time worked.

Straight time is time worked up to eight hours a day and 40 hours a week unless the employee is on an alternative work schedule (see section 6, Alternative Work Schedule).

b. Nonstandard Work week
Departments may establish other work week schedules or work arrangements to meet their requirements, including a work week that begins and ends on other days or hours than the basic work week (outlined in section 3.a), if approved in advance by a Human Resources Manager. See guidelines at Flexible Work Options.

c. Make-Up Time
At the written request of the employee, and with the approval of the supervisor, a non-exempt employee may reduce his/her work hours on one day and make up the hours not worked on another day during the same work week. The employee may do this by working more than eight hours but not more than 11 hours in one day, with the understanding that no overtime premium will be paid unless the total number of hours worked in any one day exceeds 11 hours or the total number of hours worked in any one work week exceeds 40.

If the supervisor compels the employee to work more than eight hours in a day, beyond any request for flexible schedule by the employee, then the employee is due the overtime premium.

d. Day of Rest
Non-exempt employees working more than 30 hours a week are entitled to have at least one day off in seven in compliance with California state law.

e. Rest Periods
The University provides non-exempt employees a 15-minute paid rest period for each four hours of work or "major fraction" of four hours of work, provided the employees work at least three and a half hours per day. As far as practicable, rest periods should be scheduled in the middle of each work period. Rest periods should also be arranged so that disruptions of work and services are held to a minimum. Employees are not permitted to use their rest periods to shorten the workday or to extend the meal break.

f. Meal Periods
Meal periods normally are for one hour and are unpaid. Time taken for meal periods is not part of the work day, provided the employee is relieved of all duty. A non-exempt employee must be provided with an unpaid meal period of at least 30 minutes after no more than five hours of work, and a second meal period of at least 30 minutes after no more than ten hours of work, unless the employee waives the right to the second meal period. A non-exempt employee who works no more than six hours in the workday may also waive the right a meal period if the supervisor approves.

If a non-exempt employee is not provided with a meal break and/or is not relieved of all duty during a meal break, then the time must be recorded as work hours. Additionally, a penalty of one hour of the employee's straight time hourly rate must be paid to the employee.

g. Note to Supervisors
Unpaid meal breaks, including actual start and stop times, must be recorded in Axess/People Soft HMRS. If a meal break is not provided, a one hour penalty must also be recorded.

h. Work Records

  1. Records for Non-Exempt Employees
    Federal and state laws require non-exempt employees to keep an accurate daily record of hours actually worked, including actual start and stop times and meal breaks. The human resources management system (Axess/PeopleSoft HRMS) is the system of record to indicate hours worked, overtime hours, vacations, sick time, holidays and other time off by each non-exempt employee. In that system, records must be updated by the end of each pay period, but it is recommended that employees update their actual work hours each work day. Supervisors (or their departmental designees) must approve non-exempt employees' time records and must approve any variance from the employees' normally scheduled work hours.
  2. Records for Exempt Employees
    Records of vacation and sick leave accumulation, vacation and sick leave taken, and other leave time off must be maintained for all exempt regular employees. For exempt employees it is not necessary to report any vacation, PTO or Floating Holiday time less than four hours. For reporting purposes of four or more hours, record a minimum of four hours or the actual time taken if over four hours. Sick time may be taken in any increment. In the case of intermittent Family and Medical Leave, the local Human Resources Manager must be consulted to insure that (a) accurate records are maintained of time used for Family and Medical Leave, and (b) the employee's sick leave balance is properly reduced for time charged to intermittent Family and Medical Leave.
    The human resources management system (Axess/PeopleSoft HRMS) is the system of record and entries in that system must be updated by the end of each pay period. Supervisors must approve leave usage records for exempt employees. Also see Guide Memo 2.1.6: Vacations, Guide Memo 2.1.7: Sick Time, and Guide Memo 2.1.8: Miscellaneous Authorized Absences.
  3. Records for Non-Employees
    Stanford is not required to keep a record of hours for consultants or employees of another employer with whom the University has a contract for service.

Back to top

4. Establishing Salary Ranges

The Vice President of Human Resources recommends to the President compensation levels for different classifications and minimum and maximum rates for various salary ranges. The President establishes the official compensation levels and pay ranges. The Vice President of Human Resources is responsible for administering the overall salary program. The Vice Presidents, Vice Provosts, Deans or Directors are responsible for administering the pay and classification actions in their area(s).

a. Minimum Wage
In compliance with federal and state laws, employees must be paid the current minimum wage or higher unless a request for a specific exception is allowable under the law and approved by the Vice President of Human Resources. Information on the current minimum wage rate is available from University Compensation.

b. Non-Cash Compensation
When the University provides perquisites such as room, apartment, or meals, their value (as determined under tax laws) is added to cash compensation to establish total base pay for computation of insured benefits. When required to be taken as a condition of employment, perquisites are not subject to federal income tax.

c. Performance Increases
Increases in salaries recommended for staff employees shall be based on performance and contributions are not automatic. Internal pay relationships and relevant market information should be considered.

Back to top

5. Overtime Compensation

a. Employees Exempt from Overtime Compensation

(1) Definition of Exempt Employee
Certain employees are exempt from governmental regulations regarding compensation for overtime work. In general, employees are exempt when employed in executive, administrative or professional positions as defined by the Fair Labor Standards Act. Exempt University employees are not entitled to receive overtime pay.

The Vice President of Human Resources or his/her designee determines the exempt or non-exempt status of University classifications. Special circumstances, such as an employee working in more than one job (also referred to as a dual appointment) that may affect his/her exempt status, must be discussed with the local Human Resources Manager for the area before hiring employees into additional jobs.

Normal Expectations—Because of the many activities required to keep the University functioning, full-time members of the academic staff and regular exempt staff may be called upon to perform a variety of services for the institution apart from those normally considered to be their regular job duties. These staff members may be assigned these tasks either within their department or for another area within the University.

Further, it is understood that regular academic and exempt staff may often be expected to work in excess of 40 hours a week. Because these situations are considered to fall within the normal expectations for these staff, they would not constitute grounds for payment of additional compensation. And, the staff member would not receive payment in excess of 100% of the  FTE salary.

If an employee receives a request to perform additional work for a department other than the employee's home department assignment (whether related or unrelated to the employee's current responsibilities), the employee must receive formal approval in advance from his/her supervisor or provide notification to the supervisor, depending on the duties:

  • For non-teaching duties, the employee must receive prior written approval from his/her current supervisor and the local Human Resources Office.
  • For teaching duties:
    - If the teaching duties occur outside the employee's normal work schedule, the employee must give prior written notification to his/her current supervisor and the local Human Resources Office.
    - If preparation and/or teaching duties occur during the employee's normal work schedule, the employee must receive prior written approval from his/her current supervisor and the local Human Resources Office.

(2) Further Information
For regular non-bargaining unit staff and academic staff-libraries, contact your Human Resources Manager.

b. Overtime Entitlement
Any non-exempt employee required to work more than eight hours in a day, or more than 40 hours in a week, is entitled to compensation in accordance with (1) below. The total hours worked for one or more departments of the University are to be counted in determining overtime even though employment in any one department does not exceed the standard 8-hour day or 40-hour week. University policy provides for overtime payment for hours worked in excess of eight in one day in accordance with state regulations. University policy provides overtime payment for hours worked in excess of 40 in one week in accordance with state and federal regulations. Overtime policies are applicable to non-exempt temporary and/or casual employees as well as to regular non-exempt employees. University requirements and government regulations make it mandatory that overtime hours worked by non-exempt employees be recorded and compensated.

(1) Overtime Rate
The University's policy is to compensate non-exempt employees at a premium rate of one-and-one-half times the hourly rate of pay. Shift premiums are added to the straight-time rate to compute the overtime premium. For employees working a 40-hour week, the hourly rate is the monthly salary divided by 173.33 hours.

  • Non-exempt employees who work in excess of 12 hours per workday or in excess of eight hours on the seventh consecutive day of work in a single work week will be compensated for those excess hours at the rate of twice their regular hourly pay.
  • Overtime Rates:

a. Time and one-half: hours eight through 12
b. Double-time: hours after 12
c. Time and one-half: first eight hours on seventh consecutive workday
d. Double-time: after eight hours on seventh consecutive workday
e. Time and one-half: after 40 hours in one work week, unless a double-time premium applies

(2) Overtime Hours
Authorized paid time off (e.g., vacation, sick leave, personal time off, holidays, etc.) counts as time worked in determining if a non-exempt employee is entitled to overtime compensation. Leave without pay does not count as time worked.

(3) Overtime Limitations
Overtime work is to be kept to a minimum because of costs. Departments should permit overtime work by non-exempt employees only when it is essential to the operation of the department. State law prohibits persons under age 18 from working more than eight hours per day under any circumstances.

(4) Approval of Overtime Work
Overtime work by non-exempt employees requires approval in advance by the department head or a designated representative who has the authority to schedule work and approve overtime compensation. Non-exempt employees cannot be authorized to schedule or approve overtime work for themselves. Non-exempt employees cannot be authorized to work unpaid overtime. In circumstances where a part-time employee plans to work in more than one job for the same or other department(s), the employee’s supervisors should contact the Human Resources Managers for both areas before implementation.

(5) Approval of Extended Overtime
Departments finding it necessary to schedule overtime for one or more employees on a regular basis for six months or longer as the only means of meeting work requirements, must obtain approval in advance from the appropriate Vice President or Vice Provost.

Back to top

6. Alternative Work Schedule

a. Definition
"Alternative work week" refers to a standard work week (40 hours) that is condensed into fewer than five full days. A common alternative work week schedule is four 10-hour days.

b. Guidelines
Guidelines for Flexible Work Options.

c. Administrative Considerations
Managers should consider their operational needs before implementing an alternative work schedule. For example, an alternative work schedule may be used in the academic departments where expanded service hours are needed to accommodate client needs during irregular hours (e.g., students or clients in other time zones), but may be impractical when 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. coverage is the priority.

d. Alternative Work Schedule Election
Upon secret ballot election by affected employees conducted in strict compliance with applicable laws, and with the concurrence of management, non-exempt employees may work an "alternative work week," such as four 10-hour work days, with the understanding that no overtime premium will be due unless the employee works more than 40 hours in any one week, or the supervisor compels the employee to work more than the agreed upon hours in any work day. No alternative work schedule for non-exempt employees may be implemented unless it meets all legal requirements and prerequisites and is reviewed in advance by Employee & Labor Relations. Contact your local Human Resources Office if you are interested in exploring the option of implementing an alternative work schedule, and read the guidelines about Flexible Work Options

Back to top

7. Special Compensation Situations For Non-Exempt Employees

a. Call-Back Time
"Call-back" time occurs when a non-exempt employee responds to an emergency call and returns to work outside his/her normal working hours without advance notice. The minimum compensation for "call-back" time is two hours pay. Compensation for "call-back" time includes the actual time spent traveling to and from the "call-back" duty.

b. Standby and Beeper Pay
Employees away from work may be required to remain accessible for consultation or to return to work. Non-exempt employees assigned such duties are eligible to receive partial salary for the duration of the assignment if that assignment restricts their personal activities.
(1) Beeper Pay
If that restriction is to carry an electronic "beeper" (or similar device) and remain within range of the device, andbe within 15 minutes travel time to a telephone from which to return a beeper page, the partial salary is 5% of the employee's base pay for hours assigned to beeper duty, but not at work (called "beeper pay"). See Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions. However, should an affected employee fail to respond to the page, he/she will forfeit reimbursement of the beeper pay provision.
(2) Standby Pay
If the restriction is narrower than discussed in (1) above, and the assignment requires the employee to remain at a specific telephone within a specific distance from work to permit being called instantly to return to work, the partial salary is 50% of the employee's base pay for hours assigned to standby duty, but not at work (called "standby pay"). See Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions.

c. Shift Pay
Shift premiums are paid to non-exempt full-time employees assigned to shifts other than daytime schedules. Non-exempt employees working full-time and assigned to swing shifts (shifts starting between 2 p.m. and 10 p.m.) will be paid a 10% shift premium. Non-exempt employees working full-time and assigned to owl/night shifts (shifts starting between 10 p.m. and 3 a.m.) will be paid a 15% shift premium.

Back to top

8. Temporary compensation for work in a higher classification

Temporary additional compensation may be appropriate when an employee temporarily fills a position at a job level with a higher pay range maximum than his/her own for two or more months, but typically no longer than six consecutive months. The employee retains his/her classification during the temporary assignment. In addition, non-exempt employees remain non-exempt during the temporary assignment and receive overtime premiums for hours worked in excess of the overtime threshold. For details, go to the Compensation website.

Back to top

2.1.6 Vacations

Last updated on:
08/08/2013
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
22.5

This Guide Memo describes University policy and procedures on accrual and use of vacation leave.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources.

Applicability: 

Applies to regular employees (as defined in Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions), Academic Staff - Research, and Academic Staff - Libraries, except Instructors and Clinician Educators in the School of Medicine. For policies that apply to employees covered by collective bargaining agreements, refer to the agreements between Stanford University and SEIU Higher Education Workers Local 2007 and Stanford University and the Stanford Deputy Sheriffs' Association. Agreements can be found at Labor Relations & Collective Bargaining. Procedures for SLAC employees may vary.

1. Accrual of Vacation

a. Definition of "Period of Service"
"Period of service" means years of service counted from the employee's initial hire date as a "regular employee," as defined in Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions. Months which count as service are (1) those for which some pay is received, and, for the purpose of establishing the vacation accrual rate only, and (2) those following layoff when rehire occurs within 24 months. One month of service is counted whenever any service occurs during the month.

b. Accrual Rate Change Dates
Changes in vacation rate accruals (both increases and decreases) are effective on the first day of the employee's anniversary or status change month. The accrual change is credited in the system by the last day of that month.

c. Vacation Accrual Amounts

(1) For Full-time Employment
Vacation leave accrues according to the following tables:

Vacation Leave Accruals, Non-exempt Staff

Years of Qualifying Status
Non-Exempt Staff
Per Hour on Pay Status Approximate Days per Year
During first year 0.038470 10
Beginning year 2 through end of year 4 0.057700 15
Beginning year 5 through end of year 9 0.065390 17
Beginning year 10 through end of year 14 0.084620 22
Beginning year 15 and thereafter 0.092310 24

 

Vacation Leave Accruals, Exempt Staff

Years of Qualifying Status
Exempt Staff (Do not track hours worked)
Hours per Calendar Month Approximate Days per Year
During first year 10 15
Beginning year 2 through end of year 9 13.33 20
Beginning year 10 and thereafter 16 24

(2) For Part-time and Part-month Employment
Vacation is credited on a prorated basis for any month an eligible employee receives any straight time (that is, not overtime) pay. "Straight-time pay" for the purpose of vacation accrual includes both straight-time pay for work performed and pay for holidays, vacation, and sick. (For more information, see Guide Memo 2.1.5: Compensation of Staff Employees.) Accrual for exempt employees is based on the proportion of the employee's FTE.

d. Method of Accruing Vacation

(1) Vacation Does Accrue
Vacation accrues from the first month of employment during non- overtime periods of work, sick time, and vacation. During seasonal layoff, vacation accrues as if the employee were continuing to work regular time. Vacation is credited by the end of each month of service.

(2) Vacation Does Not Accrue
No vacation accrues:

  • For any period of terminal vacation taken by a terminating employee after the employee's last day of actual work.
  • For periods of leave with or without pay, including periods of short-term disability, long-term disability, Workers' Compensation, or when using Family Temporary Disability wage replacement (FTD).

e. Maximum Vacation Accumulation

(1) Accrual Limits
Unused vacation accumulates from year to year, but the maximum amount of vacation that can be accrued is stated in the chart below. If the employee has accrued the maximum amount or is in excess of the maximum amount due to the annual reduction of the maximum, no additional vacation time may be accrued until vacation time is used and the balance falls below the maximum.

Accrual Limits

 
Accrual Rate (days/year) 2009 Maximum Accrual (days/hours) Effective 01/01/2010 Maximum Accrual (days/hours) Effective 01/01/2011 Maximum Accrual (days/hours) Effective 01/01/2012 Maximum Accrual (days/hours)
15 37.5/300 37.5/300 37.5/300 30/240
17 42.5/340 42.5/340 40/320 30/240
20 50/400 50/400 40/320 30/240
22 55/440 50/400 40/320 30/240
24 60/480 50/400 40/320 30/240

(2) For Part-time Employment
The maximum allowable accrual is prorated based on the eligible employee's FTE.

(3) Approval for Exceptions
Any exception to the maximum allowable accrual must be requested in writing in advance by the employee's department, must identify the unique operational requirements that warrant the exception, and must be directed to the Vice President of Human Resources. Exception is not granted unless approved by the Vice President of Human Resources.

(4) Change in Status
When a change in employment status (e.g., from full-time to part-time or from exempt to non-exempt) results in an employee's vacation accumulation exceeding the employee's new maximum, the employee is paid for the excess at the time of the status change unless the employee and the employee's department mutually agree upon arrangements for the excess to be taken within a short period of time. Such arrangements can provide for a combination of payment and vacation. Payment is based on the pay rate immediately before the status change.

Back to top

2. Use of Vacation

a. No Advance on Vacation
Employees may not use vacation before it has been credited, except for borrowing up to the amount the employee would normally accrue in one month to cover time that would otherwise be unpaid during Winter Closure.

b. Scheduling of Vacations
Departments are responsible for providing opportunities for employees to take vacations each year. Vacation should normally be taken in the fiscal year when it is accrued. Specific arrangements are subject to supervisory approval and scheduling compatible with depart-mental requirements, and should consider the employee's preferences. If an employee has not scheduled vacation, he/she may be required to use accrued vacation time before the close of the fiscal year in which it was accrued, or before the close of a grant or contract that supports the employee's salary.

c. Reporting Vacation Time

  • ­ Non-Exempt Employees
    Record all vacation time taken during a pay period in the human resources management system (Axess/PeopleSoft HRMS).
  • Exempt Employees
    It is not necessary to report any vacation time less than four hours. For reporting purposes of four or more hours, record a minimum of four hours or the actual time taken if over four hours.

d. Use of Vacation for Non-vacation Absences
Vacation can be used for other absences (e.g., disability, personal, Winter Closure) when requested by the employee and approved by the supervisor.

e. Advance Pay for Vacations
See Guide Memo 2.2.3: University Payroll.

f. Pay in Lieu of Vacation
Vacation cannot be converted to cash except when employment terminates or when a change in employment status results in an employee's accumulation exceeding the maximum allowable (see 1.e. above).

g. Terminal Vacation Payment
Employees who terminate regular staff employment receive a lump sum payment at their current rate of pay for their accumulated vacation. An employee who is retiring or an employee who is being permanently laid off may request to remain on the payroll after the last day of work by using accumulated vacation leave and PTO (called "terminal vacation"). An employee request for terminal vacation must be submitted in writing to the local Human Resources Office. However, in these cases sick leave, vacation, and PTO will not accrue or be credited after the actual last day of paid work and no holidays will be paid or credited. Sick leave cannot be utilized when on terminal vacation.

h. Leaves of Absence
A leave of absence without pay is not a termination of employment and lump-sum payment of accumulated vacation is not provided when an employee takes leave without pay.

i. Transfer of Vacation
When an employee transfers from one department to another within the University, accumulated vacation as of September 1, 2003, is transferred with an online expense transfer to the central vacation accrual account. Please refer to Vacation Balance Funding for guidance on how to account for transferred vacation.

j. Fixed-Term Appointees and Employees on Fixed Funding
Employees on fixed-term appointments and continuing employees paid from fixed funding sources may be required to use all accrued vacation before the end of the fixed-term appointment period or the expiration of the funding source.

k. Non-exempt Employees Working Premium Shifts
Employees who regularly work swing or owl/night shifts (see Guide Memo 2.1.5: Compensation of Staff Employees, Section 7.c) so that they normally receive shift premium pay continue to receive shift premium pay for hours charged to vacation leave.

Back to top

3. Guide to Supervisors

a. Records and Reports of Vacation
Leave records must be updated at the end of each pay period for all regular employees. When an employee terminates, go to HR PeopleSoft Overview and look in the Termination section. When an employee transfers to another department, accumulated vacation as of September 1, 2003, is transferred with an online expense transfer to the central vacation accrual account. See  Vacation Balance Funding for procedures. To compute the monetary value of vacation, see How to: Calculate Vacation Accrual. For more information, see Guide Memo 2.1.5: Compensation of Staff Employees.

b. Reporting Vacation Accumulation to Employees
Departments not currently using Axess should provide employees with written statements at the end of each fiscal quarter showing current vacation accumulation, current accrual rate, and the effective date of the current accrual rate. Departments are encouraged to provide accumulation reports on a more frequent basis if practical; e.g., monthly after accrual and usage data have been posted. Differences should be resolved promptly by reference to written records of attendance. In the absence of such record, departments normally accept the employee's certification of vacation used.

Back to top

2.1.7 Sick Time

Last updated on:
12/15/2011
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
22.6

This Guide Memo describes accrual and usage policies for paid sick time.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources.

Applicability: 

Applies to regular employees not covered by a collective bargaining agreement, regular Academic Staff-Research, and regular Academic Staff-Libraries, as defined in Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions. For policies that apply to employees covered by a collective bargaining agreement, refer to the agreements at Labor Relations & Collective Bargaining. Procedures for SLAC employees may vary.

1. Accrual

a. Eligibility
University employees delineated in Applicability section above accrue and use sick time as described below.

b. Accrual of Sick Time

  • Eligible employees accrue sick time as follows:
    • Exempt employees accrue sick time at the rate of 8 hours per month of full-time pay.
    • Non-exempt employees accrue sick time at the rate of .046154 hours per hour of straight time. This equates to 96 hours or 12 days a year in an average year of 2,080 straight time hours.
    • For part-time and part-month employment, sick time is credited on a prorated basis for any month an eligible employee receives any straight-time pay. Straight-time pay for this purpose includes both straight-time pay for work performed and pay for holidays, vacation and sick. Accrual for exempt employees is based on the proportion of the employee's FTE.
  • Unused sick time accumulates from year-to-year, with no maximum limit.
  • When Changing Positions: When an employee leaves one position and accepts another one within the University, the employee's sick time balance is transferred to the new department.
  • No Advance: Sick time must be credited to an employee before it can be used.
  • During temporary layoff (see Section 2 of Guide Memo 2.1.17: Layoffs), sick time accrues as if the employee continued to work regular time.

c. No Sick Time Accrues

  • During periods of leave with or without pay beginning 8/1/05 or later, including short-term disability, long-term disability, Worker's Compensation and Family Temporary Disability wage replacement (FTD).
  • During any period of vacation taken by a terminating employee after the employee's last day of actual work.

Back to top

2. Acceptable Uses of Sick Time include:

a. When an employee's illness or injury prevents the employee from working.

b. Medical and Dental Appointments
Time off for all medical and dental appointments, including those associated with a work injury (e.g., physical therapy), is charged to sick time, vacation or PTO. Supervisors are encouraged to explore flexible work schedules to accommodate medical appointments outside regular working hours when possible. However, employees may be asked to schedule appointments at a time convenient for the department.

c. University Holidays and Sick Time
For holidays that occur on days when an employee's absence due to illness/injury is fully charged to sick time, and the employee is not on other leave status, the time off is charged as a paid holiday.

d. During Vacation
When an employee is hospitalized or confined to bed by medical direction while on vacation, the time of hospitalization/confinement should be charged to accumulated sick time. If appropriate, a claim should be filed for disability plan benefits. See Guide Memo 2.3.5: Disability and Family Leaves.

e. During Winter Closure
Accrued sick leave may be used during Winter Closure only in limited circumstances and with the approval of Liberty Mutual, the University's leave administrator. All requirements for using sick leave remain the same.
(1) If the employee had been on an approved medical leave due to his/her own disability immediately prior to Winter Closure.
(2) If the employee becomes disabled or ill during Winter Closure and receives approval for the disability through Liberty Mutual (see Guide Memo 2.3.5: Disability and Family Leaves, for instructions on filing a disability claim).
(3) If the employee receives approval through Liberty Mutual to care for a sick or disabled family member during Winter Closure.

f. Family and Medical Leave
(1) Family Sick Leave
Employees may use maximum of 15 sick days during a calendar year of service (January 1 to December 31) when illness or injury in the employee's close family requires the employee's absence from work. For the purpose of this policy, close family includes only the employee's:

  • spouse or same-sex domestic partner
  • children, and children of the spouse or same-sex domestic partner
  • parents and parents-in-law
  • brothers and sisters
  • grandparents or grandchildren, or
  • other family member dependent on the employee and living in the employee's household.

(2) Employees may also file for Family Medical Leave (FML). For more information, see Guide Memo 2.3.5: Disability and Family Leaves.

g. Use of Sick Time to Maintain Pay during Disability
Unless the employee applies to his/her department for an exception, which is approved, the University uses an employee's accrued sick time to maintain the employee's base pay during times when the employee is receiving disability benefits payments. See Guide Memo 2.3.5: Disability and Family Leaves.

Unacceptable Use of Sick Time:
Use of Sick Time during Terminal Vacation: Employees may not use sick time while on termination vacation.

Back to top

3. Administration

a. Notification of Absence
The employee reports the absence (or planned absence) to the supervisor. The department is responsible for establishing and communicating rules on how employees notify the department of absences.

b. Recording and Reporting Sick Time Accumulation and Use
The University uses the human resources management system (Axess/PeopleSoft HRMS) to record sick time credited, used and accumulated for all regular employees. Records must be updated each pay period for all employees who used sick time. See Guide Memo 2.1.5: Compensation of Staff Employees, for more information. For information about Axess see this Time & Leave System overview.

c. Sick Time Credit Date
Sick time is credited at the beginning of each month of service. An adjustment is made at the beginning of the following month when the actual accrual is different than anticipated.

d. Tax Status
Sick time is taxable income. Federal, state, and FICA taxes are deducted.

e. Medical Confirmation
Acceptable medical evidence may be required for the use of sick time. The supervisor who approves the use of sick time is responsible for confirming that the conditions for use of sick time are met. Acceptable evidence includes, but is not limited to, personal contact with the employee and a doctor's statement that certifies a medical need for sick time, the expected duration of absence, and any limitations (and duration) when the employee is released to return to work.

f. Applying for Disability
An employee must apply for disability benefits if using sick time for more than 5 consecutive working or 7 consecutive calendar days for the same illness or injury.

Back to top

2.1.8 Miscellaneous Authorized Absences

Last updated on:
03/15/2012
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
22.7

This policy summarizes the leaves of absence, paid and unpaid, approved by the University.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources.

Applicability: 

Applies to all regular employees as defined in Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions, Academic Staf-Research, and Academic Staff-Libraries. For policies that apply to employees covered by a collective bargaining agreement, refer to the agreements at Labor Relations & Collective Bargaining.

Paid absences approved in advance count as hours worked for purposes of calculating overtime payment [refer to Guide Memo 2.1.5: Compensation of Staff Employees, section 5.b(3)]. The University authorizes these absences in Guide Memo 2.1.6: Vacations, in Guide Memo 2.1.7: Sick Time, and in Guide Memo 2.1.13: Paid Holidays. In addition, the following absences with continuation of pay are authorized by the University:

a. Voting
When a regular full-time employee, because of the work schedule, is not able to vote outside of regularly scheduled work hours, supervisors shall authorize necessary time off, but not to exceed two hours with pay. Such time off should be scheduled when least disruptive to the department's work.

b. Jury Duty
A regular employee summoned to jury duty receives time off with pay for the periods of absence from scheduled work as required by the court. The employee retains any payments received from the court. The employee must provide verification from the court or jury commissioner of time spent on required jury duty.

c. Court Appearances
A regular employee subpoenaed as a witness in a non work-related matter receives time off with pay for the periods of absence from scheduled work as required by the court.

Absences to appear as a plaintiff or defendant in a non work-related matter should be charged to personal time off, vacation leave, or personal leave without pay.

d. Personal Time Off
A regular employee may take time off from scheduled work for personal reasons with the supervisor's prior approval. An appropriate use of available PTO is to continue pay during winter closure. A full-time employee may use a maximum of 24 hours of paid time off for his/her personal reasons each year. The maximum allowance per year should be pro-rated for newly hired or rehired employees, and for part-time employees.

Personal Time Off (PTO) is available at the beginning of the calendar year. Employees may "borrow" up to their full amount of PTO before it is credited to cover time that would otherwise be unpaid during winter closure. PTO may not be carried forward from year to year. If the employee is to be terminated and has unused PTO, arrange for the employee to take PTO before termination. Any remaining unused PTO is paid in the employee's final paycheck.

Guide to Supervisors: An employee is not obligated to explain how he/she intends to use personal time off. The supervisor's approval or denial of a request for PTO relates only to whether or not the department/work unit can accommodate the employee's absence.

e. Reporting Personal Time Off

  • Non-Exempt Employees: Record all PTO taken during a pay period in the human resources management system (Axess/PeopleSoft HRMS).
  • Exempt Employees: It is not necessary to report any PTO less than four hours. For reporting purposes of four or more hours, record a minimum of four hours or the actual time taken if over four hours.

f. PTO Augmenting Disability Payments
Unless the employee applies to his/her department for an exception, which is approved, the University uses an employee's accrued time off (sick, PTO for the calendar year, floating holiday and vacation, in that order) to maintain the employee's base pay during times when the employee is receiving disability benefit payments. See Guide Memo 2.3.5: Disability and Family Leaves, section 6.

g. Death in the Family Leave
When there is a death of a close family member of a regular employee, regular pay continues for the necessary period of absence from work, not to exceed five working days. When additional time off is needed, a department may approve use of vacation or personal leave without pay. Definitions of terms used:

  • Close family member: limited to the employee's spouse; same-sex domestic partner; children of the employee, spouse or same-sex domestic partner; parents and parents-in-law; parent surrogate; brothers and sisters of the employee; grandparents and grandchildren of the employee; and, any other dependent family member who lived in the employee's residence.
  • Necessary period of absence: the time required to attend the funeral or memorial service and discharge related responsibilities. This period is subject to approval by the employee's department.

h. Military Training Leave
When required to perform annual military training duty a regular employee receives time off for the period of actual training, up to 17 calendar days a year. The University supplements the employee's military base pay for the scheduled working days of absence, up to the employee's full salary or wage. Employees must complete one year of employment in order to receive supplemental military training pay from the University. (Refer to section 4.f. for procedures.) See your Human Resources Manager for more information.

i. Paid Organ Donor Leave
Under California law, eligible employees are entitled to a paid leave of absence up to 30 days for the purpose of organ donation and up to 5 days for bone marrow donation in any one-year period. Use of accrued time for a portion of the leave will be required to the extent permitted by law. For details, see Guide Memo 2.3.5: Disability & Family Leave, section 4.

Back to top

2. Other Absences

NOTE: These leaves of themselves are unpaid and do not result in the employee receiving pay from the University. Depending on the nature of the leave, however, an employee may be required to use other accrued time off, e.g., accrued vacation, personal time off, or sick time, during the leave or may be eligible to receive disability benefits pursuant to the terms of the University's Voluntary Disability Insurance plan.

a. Types of Leave of Absence Without Pay

  • Personal Leave
    A regular employee may be placed on personal leave without pay at a department's discretion. Extra time off in conjunction with paid vacation or time off to take care of family circumstances are examples of situations that may be the basis for granting personal leave.
  • Disability Leave
    See Guide Memo 2.1.7: Sick Time, and Guide Memo 2.3.5: Disability and Family Leaves, for information relating to leaves necessitated by the employee's own injury or illness or the illness of a family member.
  • Professional or Educational Leave
    A regular employee may be granted a leave of absence by a department to pursue activities or educational courses that will enhance the employee's value to the University. This type of leave should not exceed one year. (Time for participation in training, education, or professional development required and assigned by the department is paid work time. Refer to Guide Memo 2.1.12: Staff Development Program, for policy regarding time off with pay to participate in staff training and development programs.)
  • Public Service Leave
    A department may grant a regular employee a leave of absence for temporary participation in community, state, or national affairs, including elective public office. However, long-term or continuing full-time employment by a public or community agency normally is not a suitable basis for approval of a leave of absence.
  • Military Service Leave
    A regular employee who voluntarily enters military service or is called for active duty for an extended period should contact his/her Human Resources Manager for more information. [For short-time periods of military training duty refer to "military training leave" under 1.f. above; for leave of absence right for spouses of military personnel refer to 2.a.(6)-Other Leaves, below.] Certain leaves for family of members of the armed forces are outlined in Guide Memo 2.1.18: Military Leave.
  • Other Leaves
    The University provides leaves of absence as required by law, such as Volunteer Firefighters Leave, Parent's Leave for School Discipline, Parent's Leave for Children in School, Literacy Leave, time off from work for victims of domestic violence or sexual assault, absence from work for victims of crime and certain persons related to victims for judicial proceedings, and leave of absence right for spouses of military personnel while such personnel are on a leave from deployment. Consult with Employee and Labor Relations for details about any of these leaves.

b. Benefits Continuation During Unpaid Absences

  • Benefits Continuation
    The employee's insurance and health care plans will continue during an unpaid leave of absence if the employee pays his/her portion of the cost of coverage. Exception: An employee on a personal leave of absence must pay the entire cost of coverage (employee and employer portion). The employee will be billed the appropriate amount for their benefits during the unpaid leave of absence.
  • Retirement Contributions
    All retirement plan contributions stop while employees are on an unpaid leave of absence.
  • Benefits Cancellation
    An employee on an unpaid leave may choose to cancel coverage during the leave period. If the coverage is not cancelled within 31 days of the start of the leave, the employee will be billed for coverage. To cancel coverage, the employee must go to the Benefits Web site or call (650) 736-2985 (press option 9). The employee can re-enroll in benefits as soon as he/she returns to work in a benefits-eligible position.

Back to top

3. Policies for Leaves of Absence

a. Length of Leave
Each leave of absence must be for a definite period with specific starting and ending dates. A leave cannot extend beyond the end of a fixed-term appointment. Whenever a proposed leave will result in a total period of absence exceeding 12 months, prior approval is required from local Human Resources Manager and the Vice President of Human Resources (or his/her designee) or the Director of Human Resources at SLAC. Approval of leaves exceeding 12 months should be rare.

b. Reinstatement Requirement
A department granting or recommending a leave of absence is obligated to reinstate the employee in the same or a similar position at the end of the leave. Under special circumstances, the Vice President of Human Resources (or his/her designee) may approve a recommended leave when the employee has waived in writing the reemployment obligation. A leave of absence is not appropriate when the employee cannot provide reasonable assurance of intention to return to University employment at the end of the leave.

c. Termination of Leave by Layoff
When a layoff situation occurs in a department while an employee is on a leave of absence, normal layoff procedures will apply and will include the employee on leave. If a leave is terminated by layoff, the standard provisions for severance pay, reemployment, and benefits continuation are applicable.

d. Failure to Return from Leave
When an employee does not return to work at the end of a leave, or when a department learns that an employee will not return, the department initiates a termination of the leave and of the individual's employee status, citing the reason for the employee's separation.

Back to top

4. Guide to Supervisors

a. Records
PeopleSoft/Axess should reflect both paid and unpaid absences indicating the type of leave and the period of absence. Retain in the department files documentation such as evidence of disability and written request for leave.

b. Advance Approval
When a leave requires advance approval from the Vice President of Human Resources (or the Director of Human Resources at SLAC), the department's request for approval should include the department's written recommendation.

c. Change in Circumstances During Leave Without Pay
When any change in circumstances make it necessary to modify a leave of absence, discuss the situation with the Human Resources Manager before any action is taken.

d. Benefit Plan Arrangements
Employees on an unpaid leave of absence will be billed by Vita Administration Companies for their insurance and health plan premiums on an after-tax basis. Employees must pay the premiums promptly to Vita.

e. Work Schedule Modifications
Supervisors should adhere to University policies and government requirements regarding overtime pay when modifying a nonexempt employee's work schedule to provide the employee with personal time off. (See Guide Memo 2.1.5: Compensation of Staff Employees, for policies on work scheduling.)

f. Procedures for Military Training Pay
The employee should be placed on Leave of Absence Unpaid for reason of Military Service so health and life benefits are not interrupted. When training leave ends, the employee must provide a copy of the pay stub verifying income received from the military. The department then adjusts the employee's pay for the leave period so that the adjusted salary plus military pay equals the usual full-time salary. (See Guide Memo 2.1.18: Military Leave.)

g. Reemployment Rights of Veterans
Any employee who enters military service may have legally guaranteed reemployment rights. When an employee goes into military service, the employee's department should obtain information about these rights from Human Resources.

Back to top

2.1.9 Separation from Employment

Last updated on:
09/01/2011
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
22.8

This Guide Memo outlines Stanford University's policies and procedures for carrying out the separation of employment for regular employees and academic staff.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources.

Applicability: 

Applies to all regular employees and academic staff as defined in Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions. For policies that apply to employees covered by collective bargaining agreements, refer to the agreements at Labor Relations & Collective Bargaining. For additional provisions that may apply to certain members of the academic staff, consult with the appropriate local human resources office. While policy statements apply to the entire University including SLAC, some specific procedures given here do not apply at SLAC. Employees should contact the SLAC Human Resources Department for information on separation procedures at SLAC.

1. Policy Statement

It is the goal of the University to separate regular employees and academic staff from University employment as appropriate and necessary and in conformance with all laws and regulations. To that end, the policies and procedures in this Guide Memo will be followed.

Back to top

2. Resignation

a. Definition
A resignation is a voluntary termination of employment initiated by the employee. Resignations should be confirmed in writing (see Guide to Supervisors below). A confirmed resignation may be withdrawn at the sole discretion and written approval of the supervisor and the local Human Resources office.

b. Guide to Supervisors
For planning purposes the University requests that employees notify their supervisors as soon as possible of any intention to resign. At least two weeks' prior notice of resignation is expected from non-exempt employees. At least four weeks' prior notice is expected from exempt employees. Supervisors should request that the employee submit a written statement of resignation that includes the date of, and reasons for the resignation. If the employee does not provide a written statement, the supervisor should confirm the oral resignation in writing.

At the supervisor's discretion, along with approval from the local Human Resources Manager, the employee's resignation date may be advanced to an earlier date and pay in lieu of notice given for the remainder of the expected notice period (two weeks for non-exempt employees; four weeks for exempt employees). Pay in lieu of notice may not exceed four weeks.

Back to top

3. Retirement

a. Definition
Retirement occurs when an employee who meets the eligibility requirements for an Official University Retiree voluntarily terminates from employment. See Guide Memo 2.1.10: Staff Retirement.

b. Guide to Supervisors
Upon notification of an employee's intended retirement, supervisors should counsel employee to attend a Retirement Workshop presented by the Benefits Department at least 2-3 months before retirement. Find a list of dates and times at the Benefits website in the Events Calendar section.

Back to top

4. Death

In the event of an employee's death, the supervisor should notify Stanford Benefits and the local Human Resources office as soon as possible. All employees in benefits-eligible positions (working at least 50% time) are covered by no less than basic life insurance of one times pay up to a $50,000 maximum. See Guide Memo 2.3.1: Survivor Benefit Plans, and corresponding plan summaries.

Back to top

5. Conclusion of a Fixed-Term Appointment

a. Definition
A fixed-term appointment is an appointment for which a planned termination date is established and recorded at the time the employee is hired or appointed.

b. Policy
An employee hired or appointed for a fixed-term is terminated by the department at the end of the appointment unless an extension or reappointment has been approved.
(1) Notice
At the time of appointment, the department is to notify a fixed-term employee in writing of the planned termination date. Most Academic Staff appointments have additional requirements regarding notice of either non-renewal or renewal. Consult with the policies specific to those appointments for further guidance.
(2) Grievance Procedure not Applicable
A termination occurring because of the expiration of a fixed-term appointment is not considered a discharge for cause and not subject to any grievance procedure.
(3) Separation Prior to Planned Termination Date
A fixed-term employee may be involuntarily terminated for cause or laid off before the planned termination date of his/her fixed-term appointment. See Guide Memo 2.1.17: Layoffs and Guide Memo 2.1.16: Addressing Conduct & Performance Issues.

Back to top

6. Discharge

a. Definition
A discharge is an involuntary termination of employment from the University. See these resources for additional information:

b. Policy
With the exception of Trial Period and Senior Staff, employees cannot be terminated without some form of cause as defined in Guide Memo 2.1.16. A supervisor must consult with the local HR Office before the decision to discharge an employee, and cannot finalize the discharge decision without the concurrence of their next level manager and review and approval by the Office of the Vice President of Human Resources or his/her designee.

(1) Notice
Discharged employees receive two weeks' notice, pay in lieu of notice, or a combination of pay and notice, except in any of these circumstances:

  • Misconduct, e.g., theft, assault, actions that are detrimental to or disrupt the reputation or operations of the University.
  • Facts that lead the University to conclude the employee has abandoned the job.
  • Failure or inability of the employee to return to work at the end of an authorized absence, e.g., temporary layoff, leave of absence or vacation.
  • Other unauthorized absence from work.

(2) Grievance Policy Applies
A termination resulting from conduct and/or performance issue is considered a discharge for cause and subject to Guide Memo 2.1.11: Grievance Policy.

Back to top

2.1.10 Staff Retirement

Last updated on:
06/15/2010
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
22.9

This Guide Memo describes the retirement income plans, health care coverage, and other perquisites available to employees who retire from the University.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to all faculty, academic staff, and regular employees as defined in Administrative Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions. For policies that apply to employees covered by collective bargaining agreements, refer to the applicable agreements between Stanford University and SEIU Higher Education Workers Local 2007 and Stanford University and the Stanford Deputy Sheriffs' Association. Agreements can be found at Labor Relations & Collective Bargaining

1. Retirement Plans

a. University Retirement Plans
Income from University retirement plans is available to all participants who are vested in these plans, whether or not they are Official University Retirees. For detailed information about eligibility, contributions, vesting, and benefits please see each plan's Summary Plan Description, available at the Benefits web site. The Summary Plan Description is the official University communication on these plans and contains a description of how each plan operates and participants' rights under the plan and federal law.

  • Staff Retirement Annuity Plan (SRAP)
    This retirement plan is for certain employees covered by collective bargaining unit agreements. Additionally, due to certain historical Plan provision changes and participant elections, some exempt and nonexempt staff may either:
    (a) Be a current participant in SRAP, or
    (b) Have an accrued SRAP benefit from previous participation while in an active SRAP status.
  • Stanford Contributory Retirement Plan (SCRP)
    This retirement plan is for faculty, academic staff and exempt and non-exempt employees. However, due to certain plan provision changes and participant elections, some employees elected to continue participation in SRAP rather than participate in SCRP. The Summary Plan Description is available on the Benefits web site in the Resource Library.

b. Voluntary Tax-Deferred Annuity Plan (TDA)
This retirement plan is available to all eligible employees immediately upon hire and is intended to supplement the retirement benefits from Social Security and either the SRAP or SCRP plans. For purposes of this plan, "employee" includes faculty and staff; post doctoral scholars; and temporary, casual and contingent employees. Employees make tax-deferred contributions to this supplemental plan and direct where to invest their contributions.

c. Social Security Retirement Benefits 
The Social Security program provides retirement benefits to individuals who have worked long enough in covered employment to become fully insured. Reduced benefits are payable to retirees starting at age 62 and before Social Security normal retirement age based on year of birth. Increased benefits result from deferring retirement beyond normal retirement age. After the start of benefits, amounts earned from gainful employment in excess of limits set by law may reduce Social Security payments. Employees and employers pay the costs of the Social Security program. Local offices of the Social Security Administration will provide additional information and assistance with applications for benefits.

Back to top

2. Official University Retirees

a. Eligibility
Only current employees and former employees who have not been terminated for misconduct (and informed in writing that they are ineligible for rehire by the University) may qualify to become an Official University Retiree if age and service requirements are met

1. Employees Hired Before January 1, 1992
Employees with a benefits-eligible hire date before January 1, 1992 can qualify as an Official University Retiree one of two ways:

  • Complete at least 10 years of benefits-eligible service and are at least age 55 at the time of retirement, or
  • Meet the "Rule of 75" [see (2) below].

2. Employees Hired On or After January 1, 1992
Employees with a benefits-eligible hire date on or after January 1, 1992 qualify as an Official University Retiree when all the following requirements are met:

  • At least 10 years of benefits-eligible service, and
  • Age and years of service total 75 or more.
  • This rule is called "The Rule of 75."

3. Gradual Retirement
A full-time staff member who qualifies for Official Retiree status but wishes to retire gradually by continuing to work part-time may make such arrangements when mutually acceptable to his/her department (including a department to which an employee is redeployed). Retirement benefits will continue to accrue on part-time employment when provided for in the applicable retirement plan.

4. Reemployment of Retirees
If a retiree returns to Stanford employment, he or she should call Stanford Benefits at (650) 736-2985 and press option 9 to discuss the effect, if any, on retiree health benefits.

b. Official University Retiree Benefit Program

  • Medical Benefits
    Official Retirees may participate in a University-provided retiree medical plan. See the Retiree Health & Welfare Summary Plan Description, available at the Benefits web site for detailed information about eligibility, coverage, University contributions, costs and benefits. At age 65, retirees and spouses must apply for and maintain Medicare Parts A and B.
  • Dental Plans
    Official Retirees may participate in the University-provided retiree dental plan. See the Retiree Health and Welfare Summary Plan Description for detailed information.
  • Perquisites
    Official University Retirees may use University libraries and recreation/ athletic facilities and receive staff discounts for certain athletic events, as provided by the rules and policies of the department which provides the services or facilities. Official University Retirees remain eligible to participate in the Tuition Grant Program.

Back to top

3. Guide to Supervisors

a. Arrangements for Retirement
(1) An employee is encouraged to attend a retirement meeting at least 2-3 months prior to his/her potential retirement date.
(2) Retirement is a form of voluntary termination of employment. See Guide Memos 2.1.9: Separation from Employment and 2.2.3: University Payroll.

b. Retirement Gifts
Departments may use University funds to purchase a retirement gift for the retiree. However, a gift of more than nominal value may be taxable to the recipient as additional income. For more information see Guide Memo 2.2.10: Gifts and Awards for University Employees.

c. Reemployment of Retirees
When individuals who have retired from the University are reemployed, the provisions of Guide Memo 2.1.2: Recruiting and Hiring of Regular Staff, and Guide Memo 2.2.3: University Payroll, are applicable.

Health Care: Retirees who are recalled to a benefits-eligible position working between 20-40 hours per week become eligible for the same benefits as an active employee and will need to enroll as such. If a recalled retiree fits these requirements, he/she should call Stanford Benefits at (650) 736-2985 and press option 9. When the recalled retiree terminates employment again, call Stanford Benefits at (650) 736-2985 and press option 9 to re-enroll in retiree medical benefits.

d. Recalled Retiree
If a retiree is receiving payments from SRAP, SCRP or TDA, those benefit payments continue if the retiree is recalled to a benefits-eligible position. In addition, the recalled retiree starts accruing additional retirement benefits based on salary.

Back to top

2.1.11 Grievance Policy

Last updated on:
03/15/2012
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
22.10

This Guide memo outlines the policy to resolve employee complaints at Stanford through a formal grievance process and is designed specifically for regular employees as defined in the "Applicability" section. The Grievance Process is intended to supplement, not replace, routine and informal methods of responding to and resolving employee complaints.

The Grievance Process is located in the Employee and Labor Relations section of the HR website at Labor Relations & Collective Bargaining.

Employee complaints covered by the Grievance Process include written corrective action and involuntary termination (including layoff) only. The Grievance Process does not include other employee complaints such as performance appraisals, compensation/benefits or job classifications.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources.

Applicability: 

Applies to all regular employees as defined in Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions. It does not apply to:

1. Informal Resolution

Regular and effective communication between supervisor and employees reduces the likelihood of misunderstanding and conflict. Stanford University expects and encourages supervisors and employees to communicate openly and regularly so that the interests of the employee and the University are best served. To support this commitment, the University has this Grievance Process and resource offices such as the local Human Resources Office, University Human Resources/ Employee and Labor Relations, the Help Center and the Office of the Ombuds to assist employees in resolving employee complaints.

Before initiating Step 1 of the Grievance Process, the employee must make at least one informal attempt to resolve the complaint. If the employee feels uncomfortable in attempting to do this by him/herself, assistance is available through the local Human Resources Office, University Human Resources/Employee and Labor Relations, the Help Center or the Office of the Ombuds.

Back to top

2. Formal Resolution

If the employee is unsuccessful in resolving his/her complaint informally, he/she may contact the Grievance Coordinator in University Human Resources/Employee and Labor Relations Department to file a formal grievance which typically involves a review by the Vice President of Human Resources (or designee) for resolution of the employee complaint.

Back to top

3. Representation and Support

a. Self-Representation
The employee will act as his/her own representative at each step in the Grievance Process.

b. Support Person
The employee may choose to have a support person accompany him/her to the grievance hearing. The employee may select any one University employee who:

  • is not employed as a lawyer,
  • is both willing and able to work with the employee seeking grievance resolution without impairing his/her own work duties, and
  • receives his/her supervisor's approval.

c. Outside Representation
The Grievance Process does not allow for outside representation of any kind at any step of the process. If at any time before or during the Grievance Process the employee chooses to elect action related to the grievance issue(s) outside of the internal process (such as filing a charge with the EEOC, DFEH, other administrative body, or a lawsuit), the Grievance Process will be terminated without any decision being reached and to avoid the possibility of conflicting determinations.

Back to top

4. Time Frames

All times frames indicated in the Grievance Process are computed in calendar days unless noted otherwise. All parties involved in the Grievance Process must adhere to the time frames specified. Exceptions to this rule will be handled on a case by case basis and must be approved by the Vice President of Human Resources (or designee). The period of the Winter Close is excluded from the time frames.

Back to top

5. Administration

University Human Resources/Employee and Labor Relations have primary responsibility for administering and coordinating the Grievance Process. In addition, University Human Resources/Employee and Labor Relations is the primary source of assistance for employees and supervisors who have questions or concerns pertaining to the Grievance Process.

Back to top

6. Protection Against Retaliation

No adverse action may be taken against any employee because of his/her participation in the Grievance Process.

Back to top

2.1.12 Staff Development Program

Last updated on:
08/30/2012
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
22.11

This program (SDP) supports employee development by providing partial or full reimbursement of the cost of courses, seminars and workshops that enable employees to improve performance in current jobs, prepare for career development, or meet requirements of degree programs related to current performance or planned career development. The SDP consists of two parts: Staff Training Assistance Program (STAP) for job related or career enhancing courses and seminars and Staff Tuition Reimbursement Program (STRP) providing partial to full tuition payment for individuals enrolled in a degree program. See Educational Assistance Programs for additional information.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

1. Eligibility

To be eligible for the Staff Development Program, an employee must meet all the following criteria:

  • Be a continuing regular or fixed-term staff employee (including bargaining unit employees). See Guide Memo 2.2.2 for definition of regular staff or fixed-term employee.
  • Receive no financial assistance from other sources that would duplicate SDP assistance (scholarships, grants, and departmental funds may augment but not duplicate SDP assistance).

Staff Training Assistance Program

  • STAP assistance is available on the first date of employment
  • Academic Staff-Teaching: senior lecturers, lecturers, artists-in-residence who work at least 50% time are also eligible for the Staff Training Assistance Program.
  • Faculty, students, temporary employees, retirees, and other non-staff University affiliates are not eligible for STAP assistance.

Staff Tuition Reimbursement Program

  • Available after an eligible employee has completed one year in a benefits-eligible position
  • Pro-rated if eligible staff works less than full-time.
  • Faculty, students, and other temporary workers are not eligible for STRP assistance.

Back to top

2. Staff Training Assistance Program (STAP)

STAP assistance may be requested for job-related training, career development, STAP approved health improvement courses through the Stanford Health Improvement Program (HIP), and academic pursuit through the Stanford Continuing Studies Program.

a. Job-Related Training
Training must be directly related to performance requirements of the employee's current assignment, including training required to respond to organizational or operational need as defined by the employee's supervisor or the University. Such training may be a formal course given for academic credit or certificate of completion by an accredited college, university, technical/vocational school or institute, special skills school, or adult education school; a seminar, workshop or special emphasis short-duration program presented by an approved provider; or training obtained at a conference or professional organization. The employee's supervisor must approve the training provider.

  • Release Time/Time Off with Pay
    An eligible staff employee must be granted time off with pay to attend job-related training approved by the supervisor. Such time off must be compatible with the work schedule of the department and consistent with requirements of contracts and grants regarding time worked. The department funds time off with pay for training. The employee's supervisor must approve the request only if release time/time off (with or without pay) is requested.
  • Reimbursement
    Requests for reimbursement of allowable expenses through STAP must be made upon satisfactory completion of the training and within the fiscal year the expense is incurred (with the supervisor's approval). Submitted requests will be charged against the STAP funds based on the class start date. When employees are reimbursed in advance of course completion, the employee must provide evidence of satisfactory completion to the supervisor (see Section 5 for procedure).

b. Career Development Training
Training must be related to an identified and planned training objective for career development. Such training may be a formal course given for academic credit or certificate of completion by an accredited college, university, technical/vocational school or institute, special skills school, or adult education school; or be a seminar, workshop or special emphasis short-duration program presented by an approved provider. The employee's supervisor must approve this training.

  • Release Time/Time Off without Pay
    An eligible staff employee may be granted a maximum of 24 hours per month of release time without pay for approved training for career development purposes if no comparable course is offered during non-work hours. Time off for eligible part-time staff should be pro-rated based on the percent time worked. Approval of time off is at the department's discretion and must be compatible with the work schedule of the department and consistent with requirements of contracts and grants regarding time worked.
  • Reimbursement
    Requests for reimbursement of allowable expenses through STAP must be made upon satisfactory completion of the training and within the fiscal year when the expense is incurred (with the supervisor's approval). Submitted requests will be charged against the STAP funds based on the class start date. When employees are reimbursed in advance of course completion, the employee must provide evidence of satisfactory completion to the supervisor (see Section 5 for procedure). For HIP and Continuing Studies courses, the STAP allowance will be deducted from the fee when employees register for classes.

Back to top

3. Staff Tuition Reimbursement Program (STRP)

Eligible employees may request STRP support for courses that fulfill undergraduate or graduate degree requirements at a fully accredited college, university, technical/vocational school or institute, special skills school, or adult education school when the employee is admitted to the degree program (certificate programs excluded). The employee's supervisor must approve the request only if release time/time off (with or without pay) is requested.

a. Release Time/Time Off without Pay
An eligible staff employee may be granted a maximum of 24 hours per month of release time, without pay, for an approved undergraduate or graduate course, if no comparable course is offered during non-work hours. Time off for part-time regular staff should be pro-rated based on the percent time worked. Approval of time off is at the department's discretion and must be compatible with the work schedule of the department and consistent with requirements of contracts and grants regarding time worked.

b. Reimbursement
Reimbursement of allowable expenses through STRP will be made directly to the institution before attendance each quarter or semester.

Back to top

4. Allowable Expenses

An employee may not receive reimbursement under STAP and reimbursement under STRP for the same course or program. For example, you cannot use STRP for tuition and STAP for books, supplies and equipment for the same course or program.

a. STAP Expenses

  • The current maximum STAP reimbursement is:
    - $800 for eligible employees not covered by the SEIU Collective Bargaining Agreement
    - $700 for eligible employees covered by the SEIU Collective Bargaining Agreement
       - $100 of STAP funds are reallocated for a leadership, training and educational program, known as the Apprenticeship Program (For additional information, refer to the 2009 Collective Bargaining Agreement between SEIU Higher Education Workers Local 2007 and The Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University, Side Letter 10: Leadership, Training and Educational Fund).
  • Costs of tuition, registration fees and required textbooks, CDs, eBooks or tapes are allowable for reimbursement up to a maximum determined each fiscal year.
  • Travel expenses, professional memberships, testing fees, reference books and professional subscriptions are not allowable.

b. STRP Expenses

  • The current maximum STRP reimbursement is $5,250. Reimbursements are pro-rated for eligible staff working less than full-time.
  • Costs of tuition fees and required books, supplies and equipment are allowable for reimbursement up to a maximum determined for each fiscal year.
  • STRP course books, supplies and equipment are not eligible for reimbursement using STAP funds.
  • An employee may not receive reimbursement under STAP and reimbursement under STRP for the same course or program.

Back to top

5. Reimbursement

a. Timing of STAP Reimbursement
Requests for reimbursement of allowable expenses through STAP must be made upon satisfactory completion of the training, and within the fiscal year the expense is incurred (with the approval of the supervisor). Reimbursement must be requested within 20 days after completion of the training activity or before the end of the current fiscal year, whichever is sooner. Requests submitted after the close of the fiscal year in which the training is taken will not be approved. Submitted requests will be charged against the STAP funds based on the class start date.

b. Timing of STRP Reimbursement
Payment of allowable expenses through STRP will be made directly to the institution before attendance each quarter or semester. If the employee makes payment directly to the institution, STRP will reimburse the employee for allowable expenses upon receipt of proof of payment.

c. Departmental Reimbursement
When allowable costs exceed the current STAP/STRP limit, the excess cost may be partially or fully reimbursed by the employee's department. Departmental reimbursement is at the department's discretion and is determined based on available departmental funds for training. Documentation of guidelines for locally funded programs should be filed in the Educational Assistance Programs office. Reimbursement for career development training may be taxable if the total exceeds $5,250 in one tax year (see Section 7a), regardless of the source of University funds. Departmental reimbursements have the same tax consequences as STAP/STRP reimbursements.

d. Employee Obligation
When the University reimburses an employee for training costs through STAP prior to completion of the activity, the employee assumes an obligation to complete the supported training in a satisfactory manner. An employee who does not complete University-reimbursed training must repay the University the total amount of the reimbursement.

e. Evidence of Satisfactory Completion
Employees utilizing funds for training expenses through STAP must provide the supervisor with evidence of satisfactory completion as soon as possible—but no later than four weeks after the training activity is completed. For STRP, evidence of satisfactory completion must be provided to both the supervisor (if supervisor approval was required) and to the administrative program assistant in the Educational Assistance Programs office as soon as possible. Such evidence may be an official grade card or transcript from the institution or provider of the course. If that is not possible, written confirmation of course completion from the instructor or institution will be accepted. For academic courses, using STRP funds, a grade C or better, or pass grade in a pass/fail course is required.

Back to top

6. Application Process

a. STAP
An employee planning a training or development activity should discuss development and performance objectives with his/her supervisor before registering for the course or program. Decisions regarding applicability of training and issues regarding release time should be made at this time. The employee and the supervisor should review career development plans before registration. No application form is needed.

b. STRP
Employee must submit a completed/signed STRP application to the Educational Assistance Programs office before the beginning of the designated institution's academic year. The application and instruction can be found on the EAP website. A supervisor's signature is required if release time/time off with pay is requested.

c. Departmental Review
The supervisor should review the staff training assistance reimbursement request and evidence of satisfactory completion, confirming the following:

  • Employee eligibility (see Section 1)
  • Program Applicability (see Section 2 and 3)
  • Allowable Expenses (see Section 4)
  • Course completion (see Section 5c)

d. Procedures
Visit http://hreap.stanford.edu for application information.

e. Educational Assistance Programs Review
The Educational Assistance Programs office monitors and periodically audits all applications for conformance with standards of eligibility, applicability and allowability as outlined in this Guide Memo. The Educational Assistance Programs office has final approval of reimbursements for approved applications. A decision by the Educational Assistance Programs office concerning approval or disapproval of reimbursements is not subject to review under any grievance procedure. Appeal of a decision by the Educational Assistance Programs office may be made in writing to the Manager of Educational Assistance Programs.

Back to top

7. Tax Implications

SDP is intended to provide benefits that are, to the extent possible, excluded from taxation under federal and state laws. Accordingly, this Guide Memo constitutes a separate written plan for the exclusive benefit of employees under section 127 of the Internal Revenue Code and its regulations, to provide such employees with educational assistance.

a. General Rule
In general, an employee may exclude up to $5,250 received for graduate or undergraduate education under STRP and up to $800 received under STAP from his/her gross income each tax year for allowable tuition and expenses.

b. Tax Year
Employees should note that STRP provides reimbursements of up to $5,250 for each Stanford fiscal year. Because Stanford's fiscal year runs from September 1 through August 31, an employee could be eligible to receive reimbursements in excess of $5,250 for the employee's tax year.

c. Other Situations
Amounts paid to an employee in excess of $5,250 may also be excluded if they are payments for certain job-related training, when such training maintains or improves the skills of an employee. However, if the training is necessary for the employee to meet the minimum educational requirements for employment, or if the training will qualify the employee for a new trade or business, the payments will not qualify for this additional exclusion.

d. Getting Help
Employees should consult their personal tax advisor with any questions.

Back to top

8. Status and Duration of Staff Development Program

a. Administration
SDP is administered by the University. The University has the discretionary authority to determine all matters with respect to SDP, including, without limitation, eligibility issues, benefit amounts, evidentiary matters and tax treatment. Its decisions shall be final and binding on all persons.

b. Amendment and Termination
The University reserves the right to modify SDP in any respect, or to discontinue SDP, at any time.

Back to top

2.1.13 Paid Holidays

Last updated on:
09/05/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
22.12

This Guide Memo describes University policy on designation of and payment for holidays. Review current designated holidays on the University Human Resources website.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources.

Applicability: 

Applies to Stanford University employees not covered by collective bargaining agreements. For policies that apply to employees covered by collective bargaining agreements, refer to the agreements between Stanford University and SEIU Higher Education Workers Local 2007 and Stanford University and the Stanford Deputy Sheriffs' Association. Agreements can be found at Labor Relations & Collective Bargaining

1. Eligibility for Paid Holidays

Regular employees (those appointed for six months or longer on a continuing or fixed-term basis and for at least 20 hours a week) are eligible for paid holidays starting with the first day of employment. Temporary and casual employees are not eligible for paid holidays. To receive holiday pay, an employee must be on paid status on his/her regularly-scheduled work days before and after the holiday, except for employees on seasonal/temporary layoff, or approved leave status beginning the day after or ending the day before the holiday.

Back to top

2. Days Designated as Paid Holidays

a. Scheduled Holidays
The days designated by the University for the observance of the following holidays are scheduled each year by the Cabinet. Those dates are normally scheduled as listed below:

Days Designated as Paid Holidays
New Year's Day January 1
Martin Luther King, Jr. Day January - third Monday
Presidents' Day February - third Monday
Memorial Day May - last Monday
Independence Day July 4
Labor Day September - first Monday
Thanksgiving November - fourth Thursday
Friday after Thanksgiving November - as stated
Day before Christmas December 24
Christmas December 25
Floating Holiday See Section 5 below
b.Guide to Supervisors
Supervisors are also encouraged to accommodate staff requests to use vacation, personal time off or floating holiday to observe days of religious or other special significance other than those days designated as University holidays.

 

Back to top

3. Policy When A Holiday Falls on a Saturday or Sunday

A holiday which falls on Saturday is observed by the University on the preceding Friday and a holiday which falls on Sunday is observed on the following Monday. When Christmas falls on Saturday and the holiday is observed on Friday, the "Day before Christmas" holiday is observed on Thursday.

Back to top

4. Policy When a Holiday Falls During Winter Closure

The University may have a winter closure during the work weeks that include the day before Christmas, Christmas or New Year's Day holidays. Employees in operational units that observe winter closure will receive holiday pay for holidays that fall during the closure, and may use available PTO, floating holiday, accrued vacation, unpaid time off, or any combination of these, on the remaining closure days. See Administrative Guide Memo 2.1.8: Miscellaneous Authorized Absences.

Back to top

5. Floating Holiday

a. Floating Holiday Policy
For regular, full-time employees, eight hours of floating holiday are available on January 1 (or date of hire for employees hired after January 1) and can be taken on any day or partial day within that calendar year that is mutually agreed upon by the employee and supervisor. The floating holiday is prorated for employees working less than full time.

b. Reporting Floating Holiday Time

  • Non-Exempt Employees: Record all floating holiday time taken during a pay period in the human resources management system (Axess/PeopleSoft HRMS).
  • Exempt Employees: It is not necessary to report any floating holiday time less than four hours. For reporting purposes of four or more hours, record a minimum of four hours or the actual time taken if over four hours.

c. Floating Holiday and Winter Closure
Employees may "borrow" up to their full amount of floating holiday before it is credited to cover time that would otherwise be unpaid during winter closure.

d. Guide to Supervisors: Floating Holiday in Cases of Termination
If an employee is to be terminated and the earned floating holiday has not been used by the employee, arrangements should be made for the employee to take the floating holiday prior to termination. If this is not possible, report the unused floating holiday on the Termination Web Form. The employee will receive regular pay for the holiday.

e. More information
For more information, contact your local Human Resources Manager (HRM). For a list of HRMs, please see the UHR website's Contacts page.

Back to top

6. Holiday Pay Policy

a. When Day of Holiday Observance Falls on a Scheduled Work Day and Employee Does Not Work on That Day

  • Full-time and Part-time Exempt Salaried Staff
    Full-time and part-time exempt salaried staff receive regular pay for the day.
  • Full-time Non-exempt Regular Employees
    Full-time non-exempt regular employees receive regular pay for the straight-time scheduled hours for the day.
  • Part-time Non-exempt Regular Employees
    Part-time non-exempt regular employees receive pay either for their straight-time hours scheduled for the day, or for the number of hours obtained by dividing their normal number of scheduled weekly work hours by five days, whichever is greater.

b. When Day of Holiday Observance Falls on Employee's Scheduled Day Off and Employee Does Not Work on That Day

  • Full-time Exempt Salaried Employees
    Full-time exempt salaried employees receive another day off with pay in the same calendar year, or when the employee's department determines that another day off is not feasible, eight hours are added to personal time off effective January 1 of the following calendar year.
  • Part-time Exempt Salaried Employees
    (a) When a normal work schedule is the same number of hours daily for five days per week, the employee receives another day off with pay. However, if the employee's department determines that time off on another day is not feasible, the hours are added to personal time off.
    (b) When work schedule is four or fewer days per week or varying numbers of hours daily during each week, the employee receives time off with pay on another work day for the number of hours obtained by dividing the normal number of weekly hours by five days. However, if the employee's department determines time off on another day is not feasible, the hours are added to personal time off.
  • Full-time Non-exempt Regular Employees
    Full-time non-exempt regular employees receive another day off with regular pay, or when the employee's department determines another day off is not feasible; the employee receives an extra day's pay at one and one-half times the straight-time rate.
  • Part-time Non-exempt Regular Employees
    Part-time non-exempt regular employees receive another day off with regular pay on another workday either for the straight-time hours normally scheduled for the alternate day off, or for the number of hours obtained by dividing the normal number of weekly work hours by five days, whichever is greater.

c. When Employee Works on Day of Holiday Observance

  • Full-time and Part-time Exempt Salaried Employees
    Full-time and part-time exempt salaried employees may receive partial or full compensatory time off when authorized by the supervisor as appropriate for the operational circumstances.
  • Full-time Non-exempt Regular Employees
    Full-time non-exempt regular employees receive time and one-half pay for the hours worked on the holiday and either another day off with regular pay in the same pay period, or, when time off cannot be provided, eight hours of extra pay (including shift premium, if applicable).
  • Part-time Non-exempt Regular Employees
    Part-time non-exempt regular employees receive time and one-half pay for the hours worked on the holiday and either time off with pay for the same number of hours within the pay period, or, when time off cannot be provided, extra pay for this number of hours.
  • Temporary or Casual Employees
    Temporary or casual employees, including student employees, receive the established straight-time rate of pay for the time worked or the overtime rate if any time actually worked exceeded eight hours in a day or 40 hours in a work week.

d. When Day of Holiday Observance Occurs While Employee is on Leave

  • When the employee is on vacation, sick leave, or other paid leave from which the employee is expected and scheduled to return to work, the time shall be charged as a paid holiday rather than as vacation, sick leave, or other paid leave.
  • When the employee is receiving Long-Term Disability payments, he or she will not receive holiday pay.
  • When the employee is on a seasonal/temporary layoff period not exceeding 25 calendar days, regular holiday pay for the employee's normally scheduled number of hours will be paid upon the employee's return to work.
  • When the employee is on an unpaid leave of absence, he/she will not receive holiday pay.

Back to top

2.1.14 Senior Staff

Last updated on:
04/01/2015
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
22.13
Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Human Resources.

Applicability: 

Applies to employees designated at level N, O, P, N11 and N 99 in the university classification system. The list of positions designated as Senior Staff is maintained by the Office of the Vice President for Human Resources.

1. Policy Statement

Senior Staff employees have responsibilities and functions that require different policies and conditions governing their employment and termination. These employees are "at-will" employees and may be terminated at any time for any reason, including layoff, or no reason. Guide Memo 2.1.16: Addressing Conduct and Performance Issues, and the grievance procedure in Guide Memo 2.1.11: Grievance Policy, are not applicable to Senior Staff. Senior Staff have access to the Senior Staff Administrative Review described below.

Back to top

2. Purpose

This policy describes the unique employment relationship of Senior Staff to the university. It further sets forth the process for administrative review of Senior Staff employment disputes.

Back to top

3. Definition

Effective July 1, 2015, Senior Staff positions are designated at levels N, O, P, N11, and N99 within the university classification system.  Only employees in positions designated at level N, O, P, N11, or N99 on or after July 1, 2015 are considered Senior Staff.

  1. TGP Eligibility. Employees who were designated as Senior Staff prior to July 1, 2015, but who are designated at classification level A-M on July 1, 2015 will no longer be considered Senior Staff, but will retain the TGP coverage they had prior to July 1, 2015.
  2. Housing Program Eligibility. University staff employed 100% time and matched to classification levels O, P and N11 are eligible for one or more housing assistance programs.  For those staff employees who were eligible for staff housing assistance before this date, but are not in classification levels O, P and N11, they will lose their eligibility for any applicable staff housing assistance unless they are already participating in the program.  For any questions about housing program eligibility or details of the programs, please contact Faculty Staff Housing at FSHousing@stanford.edu or 725-6893.

Back to top

4. Termination of Senior Staff Employees

a. Termination Policy
Senior Staff may be terminated at any time for any reason, including layoff, or no reason upon the approval of the Dean, Vice Provost, Vice President, Provost or the President or his/her designee. Such termination is subject to the appropriate administrative review, but will not be subject to review under any grievance procedure in the University. Senior Staff who are terminated by the university receive notice and severance pay as described in section 4.c, except when the President or the Vice President for Human Resources or his/her designee determines the termination is for misconduct. Senior staff who voluntarily resign are not entitled to notice or severance pay.

b. Policy on Extended Notice
Senior Staff receive at least three months' notice. When pay is given in lieu of notice, the maximum payment period is three months. A combination of notice and pay in lieu of notice may be appropriate at the university's discretion. In such an arrangement, severance pay may be contingent on serving out a specified portion of the notice period.

c. Policy on Payment of Severance Pay
Senior staff will be paid a minimum of three months' salary and a maximum as listed in the following table, provided a General Release of All Claims and Severance Repayment Agreement is executed. Severance is not payable until the expiration of any revocation period in the General Release of All Claims and Severance Repayment Agreement.

Senior Staff Severance Pay

Years of continuous regular University employment

Severance pay eligibility in months of base pay

Less than 10 years 3
10 years but less than 12 4
12 years but less than 14 5
14 years but less than 16 6
16 years but less than 18 7
18 years but less than 20 8
20 years but less than 22 9
22 years but less than 24 10
24 years but less than 26 11
26 years or more 12


d. Policy on Continuation of Benefits
Senior Staff may continue their university medical insurance and receive the university's regular contributions for three months after the date of termination, subject to prompt payment of any required contributions by the employee. Stanford Contributory Retirement Plan (SCRP) Basic contributions continue during the notice period, including any period of pay in lieu of notice. If the Senior Staff member makes employee contributions to the plan during the notice period, matching contributions will also continue.

e. Policy on Repayment of Severance Pay
The months following the termination date comprise the "severance repayment period." This period is equal to the number of months of severance pay received. If a Senior Staff employee is reemployed by the University before the end of the severance repayment period, that portion of the severance pay equal to the base pay he/she would have earned if not terminated may be retained by the employee. The balance must be repaid to the University as stated in the General Release of All Claims and Severance Repayment Agreement.

Back to top

5. Senior Staff Administrative Review

a. Purpose

  • The Senior Staff Administrative Review is a formal guideline for examination by line management of any action that the employee believes constitutes improper treatment and has directly affected him/her.
  • The Administrative Review does not preclude informal discussions with senior university managers in an attempt to resolve problems.

b. Procedure

  • Discussion With Supervisor
    The Senior Staff employee should first discuss the problem with his/her immediate supervisor, indicating the nature of the complaint, the university policies involved, and the desired resolution. The supervisor should respond orally or in writing as expeditiously as possible, but no longer than one week.
  • Written Statement
    If the matter is not resolved by this discussion, the Senior Staff employee may present the problem in writing to the cognizant Dean, Vice President, Vice Provost, or Provost within one week. The Dean, Vice President, Vice Provost, Provost or his/her designee shall consider the issue, make whatever disposition he/she deems appropriate, and respond to the employee in writing within two weeks.
  • Appeal
    The determination of the Dean, Vice President, Vice Provost, or Provost shall be final except in circumstances where he/she had direct and immediate involvement in the decision that gave rise to the complaint in the first instance. In this case, an appeal may be made to the Vice President for Human Resources or his/her designee. Unless the Vice President for Human Resources determines the matter is appropriate for Presidential review, the decision of the Vice President for Human Resources, or his/her designee, shall be final.

Back to top

6. Cognizant Offices

a. Policy Revisions
Send proposals for policy changes to the Vice President for Human Resources for study and recommendation.

b. Policy Interpretations
Address questions of policy interpretation to the Vice President for Human Resources.

c. Records
Send copies of appeals and dispositions to the Vice President for Human Resources.

Back to top

2.1.15 Trial Period

Last updated on:
12/16/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
22.14
Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources.

Applicability: 

Applies to all regular employees as defined in Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions. For policies that apply to employees covered by collective bargaining agreements, refer to the agreements found at Labor Relations & Collective Bargaining

1. Definition and Purpose

The trial period is an initial period of service during which the department assesses the performance of a newly hired regular employee to determine if the employee meets the requirements and expectations of the position.

Back to top

2. Policies

a. Length of Trial Period
The trial period is an employee's first 12 months of service as a regular employee with the University, including service as a trainee.

The trial period is automatically extended for the duration of any approved leave of absence. No other extensions of the trial period are permitted.

b. Salary Increases and Bonuses During Trial Period
Trial period employees are not eligible for a salary increase based on merit.  However, trial period employees may receive equity or retention adjustments, and spot or team bonuses, at any time during their trial period.

c. Additional Trial Periods
An employee who has completed a trial period does not serve an additional trial period when transferred, promoted, or assigned to different duties within the University. However, employees who have been rehired must serve a new trial period, including those employees whose original hire date is reinstated pursuant to Administrative Guide Memo 2.1.2: Recruiting & Hiring of Regular Staff.

d. Completion of Trial Period
The department should notify the employee by the last day of the trial period that the trial period has been completed or extended due to an approved leave of absence. When such notice is not given, the trial period is considered to have been completed. In extenuating circumstances, the Human Resources Manager may determine that the trial period is not completed if timely notice could not be given.

e. Layoff Trial Period
An employee will serve a layoff trial period for the initial six months in the new position when:

  • Hired into another position following permanent layoff, or
  • Given formal notification of permanent layoff, or
  • Given notice that layoff will result if the employee does not obtain alternative employment in the same department or administrative unit.

If the employee does not complete the layoff trial period successfully, then the employee may revert to layoff status and receive any benefits that may accrue to that status. Reversion to layoff during the layoff trial period may be invoked either by the employee or by the department.

An employee may serve only one layoff trial period following any one layoff, and may invoke the option to revert to layoff status only once. If hired into a second job (either a subsequent or a simultaneous job), the employee does not serve a layoff trial period. Extension of layoff trial period or completion of layoff trial period is handled as described for the trial period.

f. Termination During Trial Period or Layoff Trial Period
During the trial period, the employment relationship between the employee and the University is "at-will." This means that it can be terminated by either the employee or the University at any time and for any reason, or no reason, with or without notice. In the event of a trial period termination, the employee may file a request for an administrative review as stated in Guide Memo 2.1.19: Administrative Review Policy. The provisions of Guide Memo 2.1.16: Addressing Conduct & Performance Issues, do not apply. The Vice President of Human Resources or his/her designee must approve such terminations.

Back to top

3. Guide to Supervisors

Planning the Trial Period
Supervisors are expected to establish and communicate performance expectations and try to resolve problems during the trial period. Supervisors should consult with their local human resources office about extending a trial period due to an approved leave of absence, or any problems that could lead to a termination of the employee during or at the end of the trial period.

Please contact your local Human Resources office for any questions related to the trial period.

Back to top

2.1.16 Addressing Conduct and Performance Issues

Last updated on:
03/15/2012
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
22.15

This Guide Memo provides guidance on when and how to use corrective action (including termination of employment) to deal with unsatisfactory performance, misconduct, or a combination of both.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources.

Applicability: 

Applies to all academic staff and regular employees (who have successfully completed the Trial Period) as defined in Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions, except Senior Staff. For policies that apply to employees covered by collective bargaining agreements, refer to the applicable agreements between Stanford University and SEIU Higher Education Workers Local 2007, and Stanford University and the Stanford Deputy Sheriffs' Association. Agreements can be found at Labor Relations & Collective Bargaining.  

1. Policy Statement

It is the policy of the University that employees are expected to carry out their assigned tasks and responsibilities as instructed and to conduct themselves in accordance with reasonable rules and expectations for the work place. University policy is: Employees cannot be terminated without some form of cause. "Cause" is defined broadly as any legitimate business reason, including but not limited to: Failure to satisfactorily perform job duties or meet job requirements, unavailability for work, excessive absences or tardiness, disclosure/misuse of confidential information, damage or misuse of University property, insubordination, failure to follow University policies and procedures, failure to return from an approved leave, failure or refusal to fully cooperate with a university investigation and/or request for information, or any other misconduct or acts detrimental to University operations.

Written corrective action and involuntary termination are subject to Guide Memo 2.1.11: Grievance Policy.

Corrective action is taken when an employee has not conformed to performance or conduct expectations. University policy does not require corrective action be taken in any formal steps or order, and recognizes that the determination of appropriate corrective action will depend on the facts and circumstances of the particular situation. Moreover, some forms of conduct, including any form of misconduct, warrant immediate termination.

Back to top

2. Purpose

The purpose of this policy is to make clear to supervisors and employees when corrective action or termination can be imposed.

Back to top

3. Guide to Supervisors

a. Overview
It is the responsibility of the supervisor to provide honest and constructive performance feedback to his/her direct reports.

b. Notice
Supervisors are normally required to give written notice (e.g., memo, performance evaluation, letter, etc.) that performance or behavior is unsatisfactory and improvement is needed before terminating an employee. Such notice may or may not be preceded by verbal coaching. However, prior notice is not necessary in cases where immediate termination is appropriate (please consult with local Human Resources office).

c. Discharge
As mentioned in section 3.b, supervisors are normally required to provide notice to an employee of performance deficiencies before termination. However, there is no requirement that notice be provided before termination of employment in all cases. A supervisor must consult with the local HR Office before the decision to discharge an employee, and cannot finalize the discharge decision without the concurrence of their next level manager and review and approval by the Office of the Vice President of Human Resources, or his/her designee.

Back to top

2.1.17 Layoffs

Last updated on:
09/01/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
22.16

This Guide Memo outlines Stanford University's policies and procedures for carrying out the temporary or permanent layoff of employees.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources.

Applicability: 

Applies to all academic staff and regular employees as defined in Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions. Lecturers, senior lecturers, and Senior Staff should refer to Guide Memo 2.1.9: Separation from Employment, and Guide Memo 2.1.14: Senior Staff. For policies that apply to employees covered by a collective bargaining agreement, refer to the agreements at Labor Relations & Collective Bargaining. While policy statements apply to the entire University, including SLAC, some of the specific procedures given here do not apply at SLAC. Employees should contact the SLAC Human Resources Department for information relating to the procedural aspects of layoff at SLAC.

1. Policy Statement

The needs of the University for the services of its employees vary over time. Such changes in need for employees can be due to programmatic changes, reorganizations, changes in the ways the University will perform functions or meet its needs, to the cyclic needs for certain services, to needs for economy, to operational needs, to modified plans and/or goals, and/or to reduction and/or reallocation of funding sources, including mandated or discretionary budget reductions. When the University decides to eliminate positions, reduce work force, and/or carry out lesser amounts of particular kinds of work, it may separate employees from the workforce, either temporarily or permanently. Such separations are called layoffs. If a layoff is to be for a period of four months or less, the employee can remain on the payroll in an unpaid "temporary layoff" status. If a layoff is expected to be indefinite, or for a period longer than four months, the employee undergoes "permanent layoff" and is separated from employment with the University. An employee permanently laid off is eligible to apply for employment within the University, and may have an employment preference for hiring purposes (see Guide Memo 2.1.2: Recruiting & Hiring of Regular Staff). This Memo (2.1.17) provides policies and procedures for implementing layoffs.

Back to top

2. Temporary or Seasonal Layoff

a. Definition
A temporary or seasonal layoff is the removal of a regular staff employee from work for a period not exceeding four months. A temporary or seasonal layoff occurs when, in the judgment of the University, a temporary reduction in the workforce or of a particular kind of work is necessary within a particular administrative unit, work group, or department.

b. Selection
Management of the administrative unit, work group, or department decides which employees are to be placed on temporary layoff. (The Dean of Research will review all cases involving senior research associates or research associates.)

c. Notice
Employees to be placed on temporary layoff should be given as much notice as possible. Except in cases of emergency or in circumstances beyond the University's control, employees should be given two weeks' (fourteen calendar days) notice. Oral notice should be followed as soon as possible with confirming written notice (no later than the actual date of layoff). The written notice must include the effective date of layoff and the date the employee is instructed to return to work. Any change in the date to return to work should also be confirmed in writing.

d. Continuity of Service
There is no break in continuity of University service during temporary layoff.

e. Benefits Continuation
An employee on temporary layoff may continue to receive the University contributions toward health insurance and group life insurance, if the employee makes direct and timely payment to the University of the employee's own contributions. Vacation leave and sick leave continue to accrue during the temporary layoff as if the employee continued to work regular time.

f. Holidays
Holiday pay is not continued during periods of temporary layoff unless the period of temporary layoff does not exceed 25 calendar days, in which latter case regular holiday pay for the employee's normally scheduled number of hours will be paid upon the employee's return to work.

g. Failure to Return to Work
If an employee on temporary layoff fails to return to work when scheduled to return to work or when recalled to work, the employee shall be terminated unless a leave of absence is requested and approved. Written notice of termination must be given the employee no later than the termination date and must include the date of termination and notice of the employee's right to apply for unemployment compensation benefits.

Back to top

3. Permanent Layoff

a. Definition
A permanent layoff is the separation from University employment, due to a notice of layoff, of a regular staff employee who has completed the trial period.

b. Position Elimination or Reduction
When in the judgment of the University it becomes necessary within a department, an administrative unit, or a work group either to reduce the workforce or to reduce a particular kind of work, positions may be eliminated or positions may be reduced to lesser percentages of full-time. Whenever a reduction is planned which would result in:

  • the elimination of a position, or
  • the reduction of a position to less than 75% time, or
  • the reduction of a position from regular to non-regular status,

and the position is not currently vacant, a potential for notice of permanent layoff exists. Under these conditions, the following policies for identifying and implementing the layoff apply. The process and implementation must be carried out in coordination with the local human resources manager in consultation with Employee and Labor Relations.

c. Policy on Selection for Permanent Layoff
The University will identify the administrative unit or work group where the permanent layoff(s) will occur. This management decision will not be subject to review.

  • Reduction of Work Force
    Within the administrative unit, department, or work group, the management will determine those functions or job classifications to be affected by the reduction in work force or of a particular kind of work. This management decision will not be subject to review.
  • Selection for Layoff
    Within the functions or job classifications affected, temporary and trial-period employees will be terminated before regular staff employees are selected for layoff, provided the employees remaining in the group possess sufficient skills and abilities to do the work required.
    (a) Management will determine the selection of employees for layoff or retention based on its judgment of the current and prospective operational requirements and the employee's performance, skills, abilities, and competence necessary to meet those requirements.
    (b) When skills, abilities, performance, and competence of employees necessary to meet the current and prospective operations requirements are deemed by the management to be substantially equal, then length of continuous employment with the University and the University's affirmative action commitments will be considered in selecting employees for layoff, reassignment, or retention.

d. Determination of Notice of Layoff
The elimination or reduction of a position as determined above will not result in a notice of layoff if:

  • The position is occupied by an employee still in the trial period in which case the employee undergoes termination during the trial period (Guide Memo 2.1.15: Trial Period), or
  • The position is occupied by a fixed-term employee whose fixed term of employment concludes at the same time as the position eliminated or reduced, or
  • The position is occupied by a temporary employee, in which case the temporary employee will be terminated, or
  • The position is occupied by an employee who prior to notice of layoff elects to remain an employee of the University in the reduced or any other position obtained, full or part time, regular or non-regular.

Except in those three cases, the elimination or reduction of a position may result in a notice of layoff and in that event the sections below apply.

e. Notice or Pay in Lieu of Notice

  • Notice
    In cases of permanent layoff the department must give at least one-month's (e.g., June 15 through July 14) written notice but no more than three months' written notice. When pay is given in lieu of notice, one month is the maximum period for which such payment can be made.
  • Early resignation
    If an employee resigns after having received written notification of permanent layoff, the balance of the notice period will not be converted to pay. However, the employee, if eligible, remains eligible to receive severance pay in accordance with the terms of this policy and the schedule below (see section g.)
  • Layoff of Academic Staff
    When layoffs of research associates or librarians occur for programmatic reasons, the employee must be given at least three months written notice. When pay is given in lieu of notice, three months is the maximum period for which such payment can be made. When layoffs of research associates or librarians occur for non-programmatic reasons, such as lack of available financial support, the employee must be given at least one month written notice, or when pay is given in lieu of notice, a maximum of one month's pay.

f. Change in Layoff Status
A notice of layoff to a regular staff employee may be changed in the following circumstances:

(1) Deferral of Layoff
A regular staff employee who is notified of layoff but has not yet been laid off and who subsequently accepts work that is anticipated to last less than six months will have his/her layoff date deferred to the end of the temporary assignment. A letter deferring the layoff must be issued to the employee with the new layoff date. Work can be within the same department or a different department. Each layoff can be deferred one time only. If the employee resigns after notification of the deferral, he/she can receive severance pay, which will be recalculated to reflect the last day of employment. Severance pay is based on the employee’s rate of pay and percentage of full time in the position from which he/she was laid off.

(2) Rescission of Layoff
A regular staff employee who has received notice of layoff but has not yet been laid off and subsequently is retained by the department either in the same, or a substantially equivalent regular, benefits-eligible position, will have his/her layoff rescinded. Under these circumstances, the department shall inform the employee by letter that his/her layoff has been rescinded. The employee is no longer in "layoff status," and will not receive severance pay if he/she resigns. An employee who resigns after receiving a letter of layoff rescission, but before receiving a new notice of layoff, will be considered a "voluntary resignation." For any future staff reductions, the department should follow the normal notice and layoff procedures of this Guide Memo. Employees who terminate regular staff employment receive a lump-sum payment at their current rate of pay for their accumulated vacation under the terms described in Guide Memo 2.1.6: section 2.f.

g. Policy on Payment of Severance Pay
Each eligible regular employee with one year or more of continuous University employment is eligible to receive a severance allowance on the date of permanent layoff from the University in accordance with the Severance Pay Table, provided a General Release of All Claims and Severance Repayment Agreement is executed. An employee will not receive severance pay more than once for the same period of service with the University. To calculate future severance pay eligibility for an employee who was previous laid off:

  • Determine the severance pay eligibility (in months of base pay) from the table below.
  • Subtract the eligibility corresponding to the number of months of severance pay previously received.
  • Add back in any months or part months of severance pay previously repaid to the University (see paragraph h).

Severance pay is not payable until the expiration of any revocation period in the General Release of All Claims and Severance Repayment Agreement. Severance payment will generally be made on the last day of employment or within five working days after expiration of any revocation period in the General Release of All Claims and Severance Repayment Agreement, whichever is later. See Severance Table below.

Severance Pay Table

Years of Continuous Regular University Employment1

Severance Pay Eligibility in Months of Base Pay2

1 year but less than 2 0.5
2 years but less than 4 1
4 years but less than 7 2
7 years but less than 10 3
10 years but less than 12 4
12 years but less than 14 5
14 years but less than 16 6
16 years but less than 18 7
18 years but less than 20 8
20 years but less than 22 9
22 years but less than 24 10
24 years but less than 26 11
26 years or more 12


 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 



 

1When used in this Guide Memo, continuous University employment is the period of employment beginning with the employee's most recent hire date as a regular staff employee. Reinstatement of hire date after a break in service is described in Section 2.d of Guide Memo 2.1.2: Recruiting & Hiring of Regular Staff.
2Base pay means the monthly salary of record and does not include any premium pay (e.g., shift differential, pay for overtime, or supplemental pay). Severance payment will be calculated on the base monthly pay at the time of separation or the average base monthly pay earned over the preceding twelve months, whichever is greater.

h. Policy on Repayment of Severance Pay

  • If an employee who has received severance allowance is reemployed by the University as a regular benefits-eligible employee before the end of the severance pay eligibility period (see Table in Section g), the employee may retain only that portion of the severance pay equal to the base pay he/she would have earned if not laid off (i.e., only the base pay the employee would have received between the dates of layoff and rehire). The balance of the severance pay is to be repaid in full at the time of reemployment unless a reasonable schedule of repayment and payroll deduction, not to exceed one year in length, is authorized in writing by the employee on a form provided by Employee and Labor Relations.
    Severance repayment will be prorated for an employee rehired into a position with a lower percentage time commitment than the position from which the employee was laid off. An employee may request other arrangements, and, if approved, the schedule of repayment will be established by written agreement between the employee and the Vice President of Human Resources. (In the case of senior research associates, research associates, and all levels of librarians, such other arrangements shall be between the employee and the Provost's Office.)
  • An employee who has received severance pay under the terms of a collective bargaining agreement and is reemployed by the University in a position which is not covered by that collective bargaining agreement shall be considered a new employee with length of continuous service with the University only from the date of reemployment for purposes of any future severance calculation unless the severance allowance is repaid in accordance with h(1).

i. Outplacement Services
Regular employees whose employment terminates due to layoff (and who are outside the new employee trial period of 12 months) will be eligible for three months of outplacement services to be used within six months of the date the employee receives written notification of his or her layoff. The outplacement services shall be provided by an outplacement agency designated by the University, in its sole discretion, and the cost for such services shall be borne by the University in an amount to be determined from time to time, with additional amounts, if any, to be paid by the department from which the employee was laid off, in its sole discretion.

j. Medical Plan Coverage
Stanford will continue its contribution to a laid off employee's medical plan for the employee and his/her enrolled dependents during the first three months of COBRA coverage. To receive Stanford's contribution, the employee must complete the COBRA enrollment form, elect medical coverage, and return the form to the third party administrator within the required timeframe. The laid off employee is required to pay the full cost of the plan coverage, plus the administrative fee for coverage, after the first three months of COBRA coverage.

Dental and Vision Coverage
The laid off employee pays 100 percent of the COBRA coverage, plus administrative fees, for dental and vision beginning with the first day of COBRA eligibility. The university makes no contribution.

k. Terminal Vacation
If the laid off employee elects to take terminal vacation as provided for under Guide Memo 2.1.6: Vacations, the repayment period for severance is based on the date the severance was paid.

l. Grievance
Involuntary termination due to layoff is subject to Guide Memo 2.1.11: Grievance Policy.

Back to top

2.1.18 Military Leave

Last updated on:
01/01/2015
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
22.17

The Uniformed Service Employment and Reemployment Rights Act of 1994 ("USERRA") prohibits employers from discriminating against employees who fulfill non-career military obligations in the Uniformed Services. It also requires employers to provide a leave of absence to allow employees to perform military obligations. Separately, the Family Medical Leave Act ("FMLA") entitles eligible employees to take leave for a "qualifying exigency" when a covered family member is called to active duty or to care for a covered family member who is injured in the line of duty.

This policy provides military leaves as required by these and other laws and complies with the other relevant provisions of USERRA, other related regulations or as approved by Stanford University.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources.

Applicability: 

Applies to all regular staff as defined in Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions, Academic Staff-Research, and Academic Staff-Libraries. For policies that apply to employees covered by a collective bargaining agreement, refer to the agreements at Labor Relations & Collective Bargaining

1. Military Training Leave

a. When required to perform annual military training duty, a regular employee receives time off for the period of actual training, up to 17 calendar days a year. The University supplements the employee's military base pay for the scheduled working days of absence, up to the employee's full salary. Employees must complete one year of employment to receive supplemental military training pay from the University. Contact your local Human Resources Office for more information if needed.

b. Procedures for Military Training Pay
The affected employee should be placed on Leave of Absence Unpaid for reason of Military Service so health and life benefits are not interrupted. Upon conclusion of the training leave, the employee must provide a copy of the pay stub verifying income received from the military. The department then adjusts the employee's pay for the leave period so that the adjusted salary plus military pay equal the usual full salary.

Back to top

2. Military Active Service Leave

An employee who voluntarily enters military service or is called to active duty for an extended period will have reinstatement rights to his/her current position if these requirements are met:

  • The employee ensures Stanford receives advance written or verbal notice of military service,
  • The period of service does not exceed five years,
  • The employee returns to work or applies for reemployment in a timely manner after service ends, and
  • The employee separates from military service under honorable conditions.

Contact your local Human Resources office with any questions about this information.

Back to top

3. Military Spousal Leave

a. Type of Leave
Under California law, up to 10 days of unpaid leave is available to eligible employees who are spouses/domestic partners of deployed members of the military when the military spouse/domestic partner is on leave from deployment during a time of military conflict.

b. Eligibility
To be eligible for this form of leave, an employee must work an average of 20 or more hours per week and be the spouse or domestic partner of a "qualified member" of the United States Armed Forces, National Guard, or Reserves. A "qualified member" is a member of the United States Armed Forces who has been deployed during a period of military conflict. The employee also must provide: 

  • notice of intention to take family military leave within two business days of receiving official notice that the employee's military spouse will be on leave from deployment, and
  • documentation certifying the employee's military spouse will be on leave from deployment during the time that the employee requests leave.

Back to top

4. Leave for Families for Members of the Armed Forces (FMLA)

a. Qualifying Exigency (Emergency) Leave
Qualifying emergency leave allows eligible employees (see 4.c) to use some or all of their 12-week FMLA leave entitlement for an emergency due to a family member's active duty or call to active duty in any branch of the U.S. Armed Forces. Armed Forces include National Guard and Reserves. Qualifying emergencies are defined by regulation and include issues arising from a short-notice deployment, military events, child care, school activities, financial or legal arrangements, counseling, rest and recuperation, post-deployment activities, or any issue the University and employee agree to designate as a qualifying emergency.

b. Military Caregiver Leave
Military caregiver leave allows eligible employees (see 4.c) up to 26 weeks of job-protected FMLA leave in a rolling 12-month period that begins on the verified FMLA start date to care for covered family member who is a member of the Armed Forces and who:

  • suffers serious injury or illness in the line of duty, or
  • undergoes medical treatment, recuperation, or therapy for a serious injury or illness.

Service member means veterans and current members of the U.S. Armed Forces including the National Guard or Reserves.

Eligible employees may request caregiver leave to care for a veteran who:

  • is undergoing medical treatment, recuperation, or therapy for a qualifying serious injury or illness incurred in the line of duty, while on active duty. (A serious illness or injury can include a preexisting injury or illness that was aggravated in the line of duty, while on active duty.), and
  • was a member of the Armed Forces (including the National Guard or Reserves) at some point during the five-year period before undergoing the treatment, recuperation or therapy.

c. Eligibility
(1) Employee must be a spouse, parent, son or daughter of the service member.
(2) Employees are eligible to take this type of leave if employed by the University at least one year and have worked at least 1,250 hours (paid time off, paid leave and unpaid leave not included) during the 12 months before the start of the requested leave.

NOTE: This leave entitlement does not increase the amount of time an employee can be off work for FMLA reasons, except that up to 26 weeks of unpaid leave is available to care for an injured service member during a 12-month period.

For example, if an employee has used 12 weeks of FMLA leave for the birth of a child, the employee is not entitled to an additional 12 weeks of leave within that 12-month period to deal with exigent circumstances arising from a family member call to active duty. But, the employee would be entitled to up to another 12 weeks (for a total of 26 weeks combined) to care for a covered family member who is injured in the line of duty.

Back to top

5. Benefits During Military Leave

a. Health and Life Benefits
Employees on unpaid leave for Military Service (MIL) will have the same University benefit contributions as when actively employed. The employee will be billed for the employee portion of the costs on an after-tax basis on the 7th and 22nd of each month.

b. Retirement Savings Plan (SCRP)
When an employee receives adjusted pay upon return from Military Leave, retirement savings plan benefit accruals and/or contributions will be made, subject to plan provisions.

c. Retiree Medical Eligibility
Time on Leave for Military Services counts toward official retiree medical eligibility.

d. Benefits in Cases of Termination

  • Medical and Dental Coverage
    A regular employee whose University employment is terminated while the employee is on Military Leave may continue medical and dental coverages at the employee's expense through COBRA for 18 months.
  • Life Insurance
    Life insurance portability or conversion to an individual plan is available. The employee should contact Stanford Benefits at the time of termination for the appropriate forms.

Back to top

2.1.19 Administrative Review Policy

Last updated on:
05/08/2012
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
22.18

This Guide Memo outlines the formal process to resolve employee complaints at Stanford and is designed specifically for trial period, casual and temporary employees.

The Administrative Review Process is intended to supplement, not replace, routine and informal methods of responding to and resolving employee complaints. Employee complaints covered by the Administrative Review Process apply to involuntary termination actions only.

The Administrative Review Process is located in the Employee and Labor Relations section of the HR website under Grievance Procedures

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources.

Applicability: 

Applies to all trial period, casual, and temporary employees as defined in Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions. It does not apply to:

1. Informal Resolution

Regular and effective communication between supervisor and employees reduces the likelihood of misunderstanding and conflict. Stanford University expects and encourages supervisors and employees to communicate openly and regularly so that the interests of the employee and the University are best served. To support this commitment, the University has the Administrative Review Process and resource offices such as the local Human Resources Office, University Human Resources/Employee and Labor Relations, the Help Center, and the Office of the Ombuds to assist employees in resolving employee complaints.

Prior to initiating Step 1 of the Administrative Review Process, the employee must make at least one informal attempt to resolve the complaint. If the employee feels uncomfortable in attempting to do this by him/herself, assistance is available through the local Human Resources Office, University Human Resources/Employee and Labor Relations, the Help Center, or the Office of the Ombuds.

Back to top

2. Formal Resolution

If the employee is unsuccessful in resolving his/her complaint informally, he/she may contact the Human Resource Grievance Coordinator in the University Human Resources/Employee and Labor Relations to file a formal request for an Administrative Review which typically involves a review by the Vice President of Human Resources (or designee) for resolution of the employee complaint.

Back to top

3. Representation

The Administrative Review Process does not allow for outside representation of any kind at any step of the process. If at any time before or during the Administrative Review Process the employee chooses to elect action outside of the internal process (such as filing a charge with the EEOC, DFEH, other administrative body, or a lawsuit), the Administrative Review Process will be terminated without any decision being reached and to avoid the possibility of conflicting determinations.

Back to top

4. Time Frames

All time frames indicated in the Administrative Review Process are computed in calendar days unless noted otherwise. All parties involved in the Administrative Review Process must adhere to the time frames specified. Exceptions to this rule will be handled on a case-by-case basis and must be approved by the Vice President of Human Resources (or designee). The period of the Winter Close is excluded from the time frames.

Back to top

5. Administration

University Human Resources/Employee and Labor Relations have primary responsibility for administering and coordinating the Administrative Review Process. Also, University Human Resources/Employee and Labor Relations is the primary source of assistance for employees and supervisors who have questions or concerns pertaining to the Administrative Review Process.

Back to top

6. Retaliation

No adverse action may be taken against any employee because of his/her participation in the Administrative Review Process.

Back to top

2.1.20 Relocation of Faculty and Staff

Last updated on:
03/15/2013
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
36.8

This Guide Memo sets forth policies and procedures to facilitate the moving and reassignment of new or current Stanford faculty and staff, where such action is considered to be in the best interests of the University. The policy is designed to give maximum flexibility to schools, departments and other organizational units while assuring compliance with federal and state regulations. The provisions of this policy apply only when an offer of employment is made. Allowances during the recruitment process are at the discretion of the vice president or vice provost for the area making the hiring decision (see Guide Memo 5.4.2: Travel Expenses, section 13).

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to new and current Stanford faculty and staff except those covered by collective bargaining agreements. For policies that apply to employees covered by collective bargaining agreements, refer to the agreements at Labor Relations & Collective Bargaining. While policy statements are applicable to the entire University, including SLAC, some of the interpretations of policy contained in this Guide Memo may be different at SLAC. Employees should contact the SLAC Travel Office for guidance regarding relocation policy interpretation at SLAC.

1. Tax Implications

a. Reimbursement Reported as Additional Income
When applying this relocation policy, departments should be aware that the Internal Revenue Service (IRS) requires the University to report any reimbursements and advances associated with the move that exceed IRS guidelines as additional compensation income to the employee, subject to payroll taxes.

b. Reimbursement Not Tax-Reported As Additional Income
Reimbursements and advances of “qualified moving expenses” are not tax reportable as additional income. These reimbursements are reported as information only. IRS guidelines identify the following criteria for “qualified moving expenses:”

(1)  The Job is:

  • A new job for the person being moved
  • Full-time
  • Expected to last at least nine months if a new employee, or 12 months if a relocation of an existing employee
  • At least 50 miles farther from the old residence than the old job was from the old residence

(2) The Expense includes reasonable costs for:

  • Moving household goods and personal effects
  • En route travel (for current applicable mileage rates for moving, see Mileage Reimbursement Rates)
  • En route lodging (but not meals)
  • Storage of household goods for up to 30 days

(3) The People whose expenses qualify are:

  • The new employee or a current employee transferring to a qualified job.
  • Members of the employee's household (The IRS does not recognize a domestic partner as a member of the employee's household.)

c. Tax-Reportable Reimbursements
Additional reimbursements and advances allowed by Stanford's relocation policy and reported as additional income to the employee may include, but are not limited to:

  • House-hunting expenses
  • Temporary living expenses
  • Same-sex domestic partner moving expenses
  • En route meals
  • University Vehicle Allowance over IRS Approved mileage rate for moving (see Mileage Reimbursement Rates)
  • An additional 30 days storage of household goods
  • Expenses for return trips to the employee’s former residence

d. More Information
Guidance on tax issues may be obtained from the Controller’s Office. Further information about tax reporting of moving expenses may be obtained from the IRS web site at http://www.irs.gov. Look for Publication 521.

Back to top

2. General Policies

a. Responsibility for Administering Policy
This policy is administered by the appropriate vice president, vice provost, dean or designee. Guidance on policy interpretation and procedural issues may be obtained from the Vice President of Human Resources and from the SLAC Travel Office.

b. Responsibility for Relocation Costs
The unit approving the relocation bears all costs.

(1) Charges to Sponsored Projects
Where costs are to be charged to a sponsored project, the terms of the applicable sponsored project award will take precedence.
(2) Exceeding Relocation Allowances
The appropriate vice president, vice provost, dean or designee may authorize the reimbursement of actual moving expenses in excess of the relocation allowances stated in this policy.

c. Reimbursement Authorization
When an offer is made to pay moving expenses, a letter of authorization must be sent to the new employee at the time employment is offered. It is the responsibility of the department issuing the reimbursement request to be sure it complies with the letter of authorization. The letter of authorization must specify:

  • Reimbursable expenses and the maximum actual expenses that will be paid by the University
  • Any lump sum amounts that would be in excess of actual expenses
  • Any expenses subject to tax reporting and withholding

d. Preferred Carriers
The department or the individual being moved can go to Moving Services for information.

Back to top

3. Eligibility

Relocation allowances should be offered only when the University feels that payment of part or all of relocation expenses is a significant factor in being able to attract a potential employee to Stanford, or in being able to attract an employee to accept a temporary reassignment. Eligibility for relocation allowances does not establish an entitlement. Payment of relocation expenses to an eligible person is at the discretion of the hiring unit.

a. Stanford Employees
Employees eligible for non tax-reportable moving reimbursements and advances per IRS guidelines (see section 1) include:

  • New full-time employees whose new Stanford job location is at least 50 miles farther from their former home than their old job location was from their former home.
  • Current full-time employees temporarily reassigned to a location 50 or more miles away. If such a reassignment is for less than a year, it is a Stanford business expense and not tax-reportable. Travel rules apply; see Guide Memo 5.4.2: Travel Expenses. However, if relocation is for a year or more, relocation rules apply, as covered in this Guide Memo.

Exceptions to the eligibility criteria may be made by the appropriate vice president, vice provost, dean or designee.

Tax Note: Exceptions that do not meet IRS guidelines (for example: full-time employment or 50-mile distance) are tax-reportable to the employee.

b. Spouses/Same-Sex Domestic Partners and Dependents
Relocation costs for spouses/same-sex domestic partners and dependents are reimbursable to the extent described in this Guide Memo.

Tax Note: Domestic partner expense reimbursements are tax-reportable to the employee.

c. Non-employees and Distinguished Visitors
Travel reimbursements for non-employees and distinguished visitors are described in section 11 of this Guide Memo.

Tax Note: Any reimbursement of moving expenses for a part-time appointment is tax reportable.

Back to top

4. House-hunting Expenses

a. Policy
All or part of the expenses associated with a trip to Stanford for the purpose of house-hunting may be reimbursed to a prospective employee. Generally these may include those expenses reimbursable for travel by University employees (see Guide Memo 5.4.2: Travel Expenses), except that the per diem method may not be used. However, the Per Diem Rates may be used as a guideline for defining reasonable costs.

In addition, the vice president, vice provost, dean or designee may authorize the following:

  • Expenses related to bringing a spouse/same-sex domestic partner
  • Expenses for necessary child care
  • Expenses related to a professional relocation service

Reimbursement for house-hunting expenses does not apply to dependents other than to a spouse/same-sex domestic partner.

b. Procedure — In any instance where house-hunting trip expenses are to be reimbursed by the University, the cognizant University officer should specify in writing to the prospective employee the terms and conditions of the reimbursement, including a maximum dollar amount to be reimbursed. It is the responsibility of the department issuing the reimbursement request to be sure it complies with the letter of authorization. Receipts must be submitted for expenses, as required in Guide Memo 5.4.2: Travel Expenses, section 14.

Tax Note: All house-hunting expenses are tax reportable.

Back to top

5. En Route/Travel Expenses

a. Policy
All or part of the actual expenses associated with a new employee's travel to take up a position at Stanford may be reimbursed. This policy also covers spouses/same-sex domestic partners and dependent children living at home. Costs covered include reasonable transportation costs (see Guide Memo 5.4.2: Travel Expenses) and actual and reasonable costs of lodging, meals and gratuities. Mileage reimbursement is at the current Stanford rate (see Mileage Reimbursement Rates).

b. Procedure
See section 4, House-hunting Expenses.

c. Guidelines
The cognizant vice president, vice provost, dean or designee defines reasonable costs. If further guidance is needed the following guidelines are suggested:

  • Transportation Costs — Airline tickets may be reimbursed. If a vehicle is driven, a typical minimum expectation for travel by personal auto is 350 to 400 miles per day.
  • Lodging, Meals and Gratuities — Although the per diem method may not be used for reimbursement, the per diem rates may be used as a guideline for defining reasonable costs.

Tax Note: Tax-reportable items in en route/travel expenses include:

  • All domestic partner expenses
  • Meals and gratuities
  • Vehicle mileage allowance over the IRS approved mileage rate for moving (see Mileage Reimbursement Rates)

Back to top

6. Temporary Living Expenses

a. Policy
A reasonable part (as defined by the cognizant vice president, vice provost, dean or designee) of the actual or incremental expenses associated with temporary living arrangements while relocating near the University may be reimbursed.

b. Procedure
See section 4, House-Hunting Expenses.

Tax Note: All temporary living expenses are tax reportable, except for the day of departure from the old location and day of arrival in the new location.

Back to top

7. Moving of Household and Personal Effects

a. Policy
All or part of the actual and reasonable expenses of moving the household and personal effects of a new employee may be reimbursed. This policy also covers spouses/same-sex domestic partners and dependent children living at home. Where a mobile home is the principal place of residence, the University may reimburse the employee for expenses associated with unblocking, wheel rental, transportation, and resetting at the new location.

b. Procedure
In addition to the procedures outlined in section 4 (House-Hunting Expenses) above, the cognizant officer should specify the appropriate details in the letter of authorization. Unless there are unusual circumstances, a reasonable weight allowance is 15,000 pounds.

(1) Reimbursable Costs
The moving allowance may include:

  • The actual cost of packing, crating, transporting, unpacking, and uncrating household effects
  • Costs incurred for moves to and from storage
  • Storage costs (limited to 60 days)
    Tax Note: Tax-reportable after 30 days.
  • Costs of connecting and disconnecting household equipment
  • “All risk” replacement cost insurance (which should be aranged through the shipping agent or carrier)
  • Household pets

(2) Non-reimbursable Costs
Moving allowances exclude such items as:

  • Animals (except for household pets)
  • Pleasure boats
  • Airplanes
  • Vacation trailers
  • Recreational vehicles
  • Canned, frozen and bulk foodstuffs
  • Building supplies
  • Plants
  • Storage sheds
  • Farm equipment
  • Firewood

Back to top

8. Moving of Laboratories

a. Policy
Moving of laboratory supplies and equipment is a Stanford business expense, not subject to IRS reporting.

b. Procedure
The letter of authorization should instruct the moving company to document the costs of packing, crating, transporting, uncrating, and unpacking laboratory effects separately from the costs of moving household effects.

Back to top

9. Auto Shipment

The vice president, vice provost, dean or designee may authorize all or part of the actual and reasonable expenses of moving two cars per household. The cars may be driven or shipped.

Back to top

10. Expenses for Return Trips to Former Residence

a. Policy
In a case where a new employee must return to his/her former residence to help with a move, or where the new employee is separated from his/her family for more than one month, the cognizant officer may authorize reimbursement for expenses relating to up to two trips to the employee's former residence.

b. Procedure
Any reimbursement should cover transportation costs only and should be confirmed in writing before the travel takes place. Receipts are required (see Guide Memo 5.4.2: Travel Expenses.)

Tax Note: All expenses for return trips are tax reportable.

Back to top

11. Limited Assignment Expenses

a. Policy
The payment of expenses by the University may be authorized for faculty and regular staff with specifically limited assignments and for non-employees and distinguished visitors who perform teaching, research, or other related services. Limited assignments are for one calendar year or less and presuppose no change in permanent residence nor primary affiliation with another organization. All travel expense policies of the University (Guide Memo 5.4.2: Travel Expenses) apply to limited assignments, with these points of clarification:

b. Expenses are reimbursable only to the extent authorized in a formal letter of authorization (invitation). Transportation expenses for dependents may be allowed at the discretion of the vice president, vice provost, dean or designee, but will not be allowed for an assignment of fewer than 30 days.

Tax Note: Limited assignment expenses are tax reportable unless these conditions occur:

  • The person on limited assignment has duplicate expenses (both the home residence and the limited assignment lodging).
  • A member of the person's family continues to live in the home residence.
  • The person retains a primary affiliation to the home institution (i.e., to Stanford for employees on limited assignment elsewhere, to their other employer for visitors to Stanford).
    Tax Note: Dependent expenses for a person on limited assignment are tax reportable.

c. Local transportation costs should be held to a minimum by the use of University vehicles and public transportation, but car rentals and taxi expenses are reimbursable when necessary and reasonable, to the extent authorized in the letter of authorization.

d. Reimbursement
The University will not reimburse expenses except those specifically detailed in the letter of authorization. Expenses reimbursed by other sources may not be included in the reimbursement request.

e. Lodging
While a person is seeking longer term suitable housing, payment by the University of actual and reasonable short term lodging costs or a per diem reimbursement is allowed, consistent with section 5 (En Route/Travel Expenses) of this Guide Memo. After suitable housing is obtained, a lodging allowance may be authorized if deemed necessary. A lodging allowance may be necessary if the employee has actual expenses greater than those incurred living in his/her primary residence. Any income from renting the primary residence while on temporary assignment must be considered in the lodging reimbursement calculation.

Back to top

12. Reassigment Expenses

If reassignment of a faculty or staff member for official University purposes requires relocation, the University may pay the actual, reasonable, and necessary costs incurred, as approved by the cognizant vice president, vice provost, dean, or designee, subject to a maximum agreed upon in writing in advance. Expense incurred in connection with sabbaticals (unless retained on salary by Stanford) and leaves of absence will not be reimbursed.

Back to top

13. Expense Advances

Where appropriate, the University may elect to advance a relocating employee an amount to cover anticipated expenditures. Such advances may cover only expenses reimbursable to the employee and must be made in accordance with Guide Memo 5.4.1, Expense Advances.

Back to top

14. Repayment Provisions

Faculty or staff members who receive relocation assistance to accept a Stanford position will be required to reimburse the University for relocation assistance if they voluntarily leave the University for any reason within 12 months from their date of hire. Reimbursement to the University will be pro-rated according to the number of months the employee has worked at Stanford. (For example, an employee who leaves after six months would be required to repay half the relocation allowance paid.) This repayment provision must be included in the offer letter.

Tax Note: Non-repayment of relocation allowances has tax implications.

Back to top

15. Reimbursement Procedures

a. Oracle Financials Reimbursement Request
To claim reimbursement for relocation expenses the individual should submit an online Expense Report the through the Oracle Financials Expense Requests system. For requirements on receipts and other documentation, see Guide Memo 5.4.2, Travel Expenses, section 14.

b. Accounting
Relocation expenses are coded to moving expense expenditure types. Most such costs are classified as allowable. However, if the employee voluntarily resigns within 12 months of hire, the net moving costs (that is, the portion not repaid) must be transferred to an unallowable moving expense expenditure type.

c. Tax Withholding
For reimbursements on which income tax and Social Security withholding are required at the time of payment, Travel and Reimbursement will arrange with the Payroll Office for payment to be made through the payroll process.

Back to top

2.1.21 Staff Telecommuting

Last updated on:
09/05/2013

Like other organizations in Silicon Valley, Stanford thrives on collaboration; sharing information and ideas is the cornerstone of our work in academics, research, and patient care. In the workplace, telecommuting is available for eligible staff employees at the discretion of the department and supervisors. Though telecommuting might be a viable option for some employees, it is not a right; see eligibility criteria for details. Decisions about the suitability of telecommuting are made within the school or business unit where the employee works. When a telecommuting arrangement is agreed to, a formal Telecommuting Agreement must be signed and then renewed annually, and the “SU Work-at-Home Office Safety Checklist” must be completed to ensure the designated workspace meets safety criteria, including an ergonomic assessment.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

Applicability: 

Applies to all regular employees as defined in Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions. It does not apply to:

  • Casual or temporary employees
  • Employees covered by collective bargaining agreements
  • Faculty
  • Employees at international locations

1. Policy Statement/Philosophy

Departments may consider telecommuting work arrangements that support eligible employees in performing their work at an alternative worksite when it is feasible and meets departmental goals. Telecommuting is available for eligible employees at the discretion of the department and supervisors. The specific procedures for evaluating/approving a telecommuting request are to be determined by the school or unit in a manner consistent with this policy. However, even where a telecommuting arrangement is approved, the employee must maintain a regular presence in the workplace and attend, in person, any meetings or functions.

Telecommuting is a voluntary option that may improve efficiency and productivity in some circumstances. However, while people may be more productive when they are alone, they are more collaborative and innovative when they are together. Like other organizations in Silicon Valley, Stanford thrives on collaboration; sharing information and ideas is the cornerstone of our work in academics, research, and patient care. Our culture values collaboration among members of the university community, particularly during core business hours. As a result of the emphasis placed on collaboration, the vast majority of work time is spent on campus where access to others is easily accomplished.

Though telecommuting might be a viable option for some employees, it is not a right. Many positions do not lend themselves to telecommuting. For non-exempt employees, given the nature of the work, telecommuting arrangements should only be considered in exceptional circumstances. Significant operations needs related to student services, patient care, laboratory/research support, supervision of employees and other work may require employees to be onsite. Decisions about the suitability of telecommuting are made within the school or business unit where the employee works.

Back to top

2. Telecommuting Definitions

Occasional Telecommuting
Approved telecommuting on an infrequent, one-time, or irregular basis, occasional telecommuting requires supervisor approval, and does not require a telecommuting agreement.

Regular Telecommuting
Approved telecommuting (during normal work hours) on a regular basis, whether weekly, bi-monthly, or monthly. Regular telecommuting requires the approval of the supervisor, and HR Manager, as well as a signed telecommuting agreement. Additionally, regular telecommuting that exceeds two days per week requires the approval of the Dean, Vice Provost, or Vice President. Telecommuting agreements must be renewed annually.

Back to top

3. Eligibility Criteria

The determination that a position may or may not be appropriate for a telecommuting arrangement is made on a case-by-case basis at the department level. Departments evaluate whether a position is suitable for telecommuting based on the nature of the work that is being performed.

Generally, requests to telecommute should be considered when:

  • The employee (including those who supervise other employees) has demonstrated sustained high performance, and when the manager believes the employee can maintain the expected quantity and quality of work while telecommuting.
  • The department can maintain quality of service for students, faculty, and other members of the university community.
  • Telecommuting is appropriate considering the nature of the job.

Generally, requests to telecommute should not be considered when:

  • The job requires the employee’s physical presence or telecommuting would harm the school or department’s efficiency.
  • The employee’s current assignment requires frequent supervision, direction or input from others who are onsite or requires that the employee provide frequent supervision, direction or input from other employees who are onsite.
  • The employee’s performance evaluations do not indicate sustained high performance or the ability to work independently.
  • The employee’s observed productivity levels are problematic or tracking and confirming work hours is difficult (as in the case of non-exempt employees).
  • The employee has received disciplinary action or has a demonstrated attendance problem.
  • The employee has less than six months of service in the administrative unit or school.

General Expectations
Telecommuting is not intended to permit staff to have time to work at other jobs, provide dependent care during work hours, or run their own businesses. Employees who telecommute must comply with all Stanford policies and procedures, including safeguarding and securing any restricted or confidential information with which they work. Failure to fulfill normal work requirements, both qualitative and quantitative, on account of other employment or activities, may be cause for disciplinary action or termination of employment. Employees who telecommute are expected to have regularly scheduled work hours, to be fully accessible during those hours, and to attend group meetings and functions in person. Non-exempt employees who telecommute are required to report their work hours and take required rest breaks and meal periods.

Departments will determine, with information supplied by the employee and the supervisor, the appropriate equipment needs for each telecommuting arrangement on a case-by-case basis. The university will maintain equipment supplied to the employee. The employee, if deemed appropriate by the department, will maintain equipment supplied by the employee. The university accepts no responsibility for damage or repairs to employee-owned equipment. The university reserves the right to make determinations as to appropriate equipment, subject to change at any time. Equipment supplied by the university is to be used for business purposes only. The telecommuter should sign an inventory of all office property and agrees to take appropriate action to protect the items from damage or theft. Upon termination of employment, all university property will be returned to the university, unless other arrangements have been made.

Duration of Telecommuting Arrangements
Telecommuting arrangements end at the employee’s termination, including for employees who leave Stanford University for Stanford University Hospital or the Lucile Packard Children’s Hospital at Stanford.

A telecommuting arrangement may be revoked at any time if it is determined to be in the best interest of the department or university.

Back to top

4. Telecommuting Requirements for Alternative Worksites

A. Supervisor responsibilities:

  1. Before telecommuting begins, ensure employees perform a workplace health and safety inspection of their designated workspace (refer to the “SU Work-at-Home Office Safety Checklist”), including an ergonomic self-assessment of their computer workstation.
  • Ensure employees perform periodic workplace health and safety inspections (as described above) after telecommuting begins (for office spaces, recommend on an annual basis).
  1. Maintain inspection and corrections of deficiencies records for a minimum of one year.
  2. Ensure any deficiencies identified from inspections are corrected in a timely manner.

B. Employee responsibilities:

  1. Before telecommuting begins, and on a periodic basis thereafter, perform workplace health and safety inspections of the designated workplace (using the resources described above).
  2. Provide completed inspection documents to their supervisor.
  3. Correct any identified deficiencies in a timely manner.
  4. Maintain the alternative workspace free from workplace health and safety hazards and inform their supervisor of any new workplace health and safety hazards needing correction.
  5. Immediately report to his/her supervisor any work-related illness or injury suffered while telecommuting and complete required forms.

To ensure a safe workplace can be maintained, the telecommuting agreement should clarify safety-related equipment/furniture needs and maintenance (as applicable). For any workplace health and safety-related questions, contact the SU Department of Environmental Health and Safety at 723-0448.

Back to top

5. Out-of-Area and International Telecommuting Considerations

Positions are typically based at a university location at or near the main Stanford campus. Generally, telecommuting should not be used as an alternative to assigning an employee to report to a university location at or near the core campus. However, two exceptions may arise:

a. Employee requests for extended out-of-area or international location: Employee requests to work in an out-of-area or international location for an extended period of time require the approval of Dean, Vice Provost, or Vice President of the school/unit and the school/unit’s Senior Human Resources Manager. The Global HR Office and Global Financial Services must be consulted regarding any international employee requests prior to any decision, as there may be international laws and requirements that must be considered. Work authorization and tax rules in other countries may make such arrangements cost-prohibitive regardless of the level of approval. Any agreement must contain information regarding the university’s right to end the agreement if necessary.

b. Employees hired in an out-of-area location: Employees who are hired into positions assigned to work at non-campus locations are not considered to be telecommuting, as they are not assigned to a specific campus location. Approval for an out-of-area assignment must be obtained from the Dean, Vice Provost, or Vice President of the school/unit and the school/unit’s Senior Human Resources Manager.

Back to top

6. Telecommuting Agreement

An agreement between the telecommuting employee and the employee’s home department is required, and will be placed in the employee’s local personnel file. The telecommuting agreement may be modified or terminated any time, with appropriate notice. As circumstances, business needs, and job requirements evolve over time, adjustments and modifications may become necessary. At least two weeks notice should be provided whenever possible in advance of ending or changing the agreement. In all cases, telecommuting agreements must be renewed annually.

Back to top

2.2.1 General Personnel Policies

Last updated on:
06/27/2013
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
23

The policies in this Guide Memo are fundamental to Stanford University's employment policies.

Authority: 

Approved by the President of the University.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to all employees of the University.

1. Equal Employment Opportunity, Non-Discrimination, and Affirmative Action Policy

a. Equal Employment Opportunity
It is the policy of Stanford University to provide equal employment opportunities for all applicants and employees in compliance with all applicable laws. This policy applies in all aspects of the employment relationship including (but not limited to) recruiting, selection, placement, supervision, working conditions, compensation, training, promotion, demotion, transfer, layoff, and termination. All University personnel policies, procedures, and practices must be administered consistent with the intent of this basic policy.

b. Non-discrimination
(1) Stanford University does not discriminate on the basis of race, religious creed, color, national origin, ancestry, physical or mental disability, medical condition, marital status, sex, age, sexual orientation, gender identity, veteran status, or any other characteristic protected by law, in connection with any aspect of employment at Stanford.
(2) Harassment on the basis of any legally protected characteristic is a form of discrimination and is likewise prohibited by this University policy. Prohibited harassment occurs if a hostile environment has been created that is sufficiently severe, pervasive, or persistent so as to unreasonably interfere with a person's work performance or participation in University activities.

Prohibited harassment may take the form of (but is not limited to) offensive slurs, jokes, and other offensive oral, written, computer-generated, visual or physical conduct which is aimed at an individual or group because of their protected status.

c. Affirmative Action
As a matter of institutional policy and consistent with its obligation as a federal government contractor, Stanford University is committed to principles of diversity and affirmative action, and will comply with all affirmative action requirements in accordance with law.

d. Non-retaliation
Stanford University policy prohibits retaliation against individuals who raise concerns of perceived discrimination or harassment or who participate in the investigation of any claim of discrimination or harassment. Retaliation is an adverse action taken against an individual because that individual has made a good faith complaint of discrimination or harassment or has participated in the investigation of a claim of discrimination or harassment. An adverse action is any action that materially affects that individual's terms and conditions of employment.

e. Complaint procedure
Employees or applicants who believe they have been discriminated against, harassed, or retaliated against in violation of this policy may direct their complaint to their supervisor, to the Director of Employee & Management Services (at 650/723-1743), to the Director of the Office of Diversity and Access (at 650/725-0326), to the Senior Associate Provost for Faculty Affairs (at 650/725-2545), to the School of Medicine Office of Employee Relations (at 650/725-8607), or to the SLAC Manager of Employee Relations and Training (at 650/926-2358). In regard to sexual harassment, employees are referred to Admin Guide Memo 2.2.4 and the resources listed there. Reports of discrimination, harassment, or retaliation should be made in writing and as soon as possible: the earlier the report, the easier it is to investigate and take appropriate remedial action.

Making a false report or providing false information may be grounds for discipline in the absence of a good faith belief that the report/information is true.

The University is committed to investigating and remediating claims of discrimination, harassment and retaliation. All individuals covered by this policy are expected to fully participate and cooperate in the investigation of any claim of discrimination, harassment, or retaliation. Failure to participate and/or cooperate in an investigation when requested is grounds for discipline. Depending upon an individual's category of employment (e.g., faculty, academic staff, regular staff, postdoctoral scholar, etc.) and the nature of the complaint, applicable grievance or other procedures may be used:http://elr.stanford.edu/grievance-procedures. The University Ombuds (at 650/723-3682) and School of Medicine Ombuds (at 650/498-5744) are also available as confidential resources to discuss concerns. Anonymous concerns can be made to the Compliance Hotline.

f. External Reporting
Discrimination, harassment, and retaliation is prohibited by state and federal law. In addition to the internal resources described above, individuals may pursue complaints directly with the government agencies that deal with unlawful harassment, discrimination, and retaliation claims, e.g., the U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC), the State of California Department of Fair Employment and Housing (DFEH), and/or the U.S. Department of Education's Office for Civil Rights (OCR). These agencies are listed in the Government section of the telephone book. A violation of this policy may exist even where the conduct in question does not violate the law.

Back to top

2. Policy of Equitable Compensation

a. Compensation for Work Performed
It is the policy of Stanford University to pay salaries and wages that equitably reflect the duties, responsibilities, value, amount, and quality of the work performed by an employee in comparison with other University employees, regardless of the sources of funds.

b. Compensation Practices
It is the intention of the University to set salary scales that are competitive with those of other employers for similar work under similar working conditions insofar as it is within the financial ability of the University to do so.

Back to top

2.2.2 Definitions

Last updated on:
03/15/2011
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
23.1

This Guide Memo defines various types of academic and non-academic employees, and other groups who have a specified relationship with the University.

Authority: 

Approved by the President.

Applicability: 

Applies to faculty, staff, students and others who have relationships with the University. For policies that apply to employees covered by a collective bargaining agreement, refer to the agreements at Labor Relations & Collective Bargaining

1. Professoriate

The Professoriate consists of the tenure line professoriate, the non-tenure line professoriate, and the Medical Center Line. Appointments to the Professoriate require approval by the department chair, school dean, Provost, Advisory Board of the Academic Council, and the President of the University.

a. Tenure Line Professoriate
Professor, Associate Professor, Assistant Professor. Members of the Tenure Line Professoriate are members of the Academic Council. Professors are normally appointed with tenure; i.e., without limit of time. Associate Professors may be appointed either for a term of years or with tenure. Assistant Professors are appointed for a term of years. Individuals appointed to the rank of Assistant Professor with a "Subject to Ph.D." contingency are not members of the Academic Council until official confirmation of completion of Ph.D. requirements is received.

b. Non-tenure Line Professoriate
Professor or Associate Professor followed by the parenthetical designation (Clinical), (Performance), (Research), or (Teaching); Assistant Professor (Research); and Professor (Applied Research). The "Performance" designation is used in the fine arts, "Clinical" in the Medical School, and "Applied Research" at the SLAC National Accelerator Laboratory (SLAC). Members of the non-tenure line professoriate are members of the Academic Council.

c. Medical Center Line
Professor, Associate Professor, or Assistant Professor of "Subject" at "a specified Medical Center," such as the Stanford University Medical Center or the Lucile Packard Children's Hospital at Stanford. Faculty in the Medical Center Line are voting members of the Faculty Council of the Medical School but are not members of the Academic Council. They are eligible to vote on departmental and school matters according to departmental and school policies, and to serve on faculty committees, except for those specifically reserved for Academic Council members.

Back to top

2. Academic Appointments in Specified Policy Centers and Institutes

a. Senior Fellow
Senior Fellows at specified policy centers and institutes are members of the Academic Council. Their appointments are for a specific period of time or for a continuing term (subject to programmatic need and/or funding) and are not in the tenure line. (Note: Senior Fellows at the Hoover Institution are not members of the Academic Council. Their appointments require different procedures.)

b. Center Fellow
Center Fellows are not members of the Academic Council. Appointments are for a specific period, renewable, and contingent on programmatic need and/or funding.

Back to top

3. Academic Staff

Nonprofessorial academic staff is comprised of the teaching staff (Lecturers, Senior Lecturers, and Artists-in-Residence), research staff (Research Associates, Senior Research Scientists, Senior Research Engineers, Senior Research Scholars) and Professional Librarians (Assistant Librarian, Associate Librarian, Librarian, and Senior Librarian). These appointments are made for a specific period of time, for a continuing term (subject to satisfactory performance, programmatic need, or financial support), or for the duration of an administrative appointment or project. Procedures for Academic Staff-Teaching appointments are established by the Provost's Office. Procedures for Academic Staff-Research are established by the Office of the Dean of Research. Academic staff are not members of the Academic Council.

Back to top

4. Other Teaching Titles

Appointments to the following positions require approval of the department chair and school dean. These appointments may be for a specific period of time or for a continuing term (subject to programmatic need and/or funding), with or without salary, and for various percentages of time. Other Teaching Title appointees are not members of the Academic Council. Individuals in any of the following categories who teach academic courses for credit and who receive compensation from Stanford must be Stanford employees, paid through normal payroll procedures.

a. Acting Professor, Acting Associate Professor, Acting Assistant Professor, Acting Instructor

b. Visiting Professor, Visiting Associate Professor, Visiting Assistant Professor, Visiting Instructor, Visiting Lecturer

c. Consulting Professor, Consulting Associate Professor, Consulting Assistant Professor, Consulting Instructor

d. Adjunct Clinical Professor, Adjunct Clinical Associate Professor, Adjunct Clinical Assistant Professor, Adjunct Clinical Instructor
See Voluntary Clinical Appointments and Faculty Handbook Chapter 6: Adjunct Clinical Faculty

e. (By Courtesy) Appointments

f. Teaching Specialist
 

Back to top

5. Postdoctoral Fellows and Postdoctoral Research Affiliates

Appointees to these postdoctoral training titles are considered to be advanced students. They register as non-matriculated students. If they are employed by the University at least 10 percent time, they receive tuition remission.

Back to top

6. Visiting Scholars

Guests of the University who are pursuing individual research or other scholarly activities. Visiting scholars must hold a doctoral degree (or be a recognized expert in his or her field) and be from an outside institution or organization. "Visiting scholars" do not receive compensation or benefits provided for students, faculty, or staff. They are sponsored by schools or academic departments and have certain courtesy privileges.

Back to top

7. Staff Employees

Individuals on the University payroll who are not Stanford students, faculty, academic staff, other teaching staff or postdoctoral research affiliates. "Staff employees" are subject to appointment procedures and terms set forth in Memos of the Administrative Guide or applicable collective bargaining agreements. Clinician/Educators and Instructors are staff employees subject to the terms set in the Administrative Guide memos except that procedures for appointments, pay and grievance review are established by the Dean of the School of Medicine.

For more information about Clinician/Educators and Instructors, see:
http://med.stanford.edu/academicaffairs/CEs/,
http://med.stanford.edu/academicaffairs/handbook/chapt8.html, and
http://med.stanford.edu/academicaffairs/handbook/chapt5.html.

Back to top

8. Regular Employees

Employees have "regular" status when appointed at 50% FTE or more for at least six consecutive months, or as described in the applicable collective bargaining agreement. Regular status is a requirement for most health and welfare benefit plans and programs. In the Administrative Guide, "benefits-eligible" refers to regular employees who are eligible for University sponsored health and welfare benefits.

Back to top

9. Casual Employees

Employees on the University payroll appointed less than 50% FTE and work no more than 980 hours during the calendar year for all job assignments. [Note: Departments may elect a discretionary limit of less than 980 hours based on their business need.] Once a casual employee reaches the 980-hour limit, the position should be posted and filled as a regular, benefits-eligible employee on the University payroll for any further work in the same calendar year. An individual should not be hired or rehired into a casual position if it can reasonably be anticipated that the assignment will result in the employee working 980 hours or more in a calendar year as a casual (or temporary) employee.

Back to top

10. Temporary Employees

Employees on the University payroll appointed at 50% FTE or more for no longer than six consecutive months and work no more than 980 hours during the six-month period for all job assignments. [Note: Departments may elect a discretionary limit of less than 980 hours based on their business need.] Once a temporary employee reaches the 980-hour limit, the position should be posted and filled as a regular, benefits-eligible employee on the University payroll for any further work in the same calendar year. An individual should not be hired or rehired into a temporary position if it can reasonably be anticipated that the assignment will result in the employee working 980 hours or more in a calendar year as a temporary (or casual) employee.

Important Notes on CASUAL and TEMPORARY Employees:

a. If duties are technical, maintenance, or service, employees may be appointed at 50% FTE or more for no longer than four consecutive months.

b. Temporary and casual employees are not regular employees.

c. An individual may be hired in a regular benefits-eligible position at any time after reaching the 980-hour maximum, as long as he/she meets all employment requirements. Admin Guide Memo 2.1.2: Recruiting and Hiring of Regular Staff, outlines information about employment preference provided to temporary or casual staff.

Back to top

11. Stanford Student Employees

Employees who are registered Stanford students have "student" status excepting those whose employment is totally independent of and unrelated to their Stanford student role. Stanford students who are not currently registered are considered casual or temporary employees.

Back to top

12. Exempt Employees

All University employees, including students, faculty, and staff are subject to federal and state requirements regarding minimum wages, payment for overtime work, and related record keeping. However, employees may be exempt from the overtime pay and record keeping requirements when they occupy bona fide professional, managerial, or executive positions. At Stanford, "exempt" positions normally are executive officers, faculty, academic staff, other teaching staff, and certain professional, administrative, and executive staff. The Vice President of Human Resources, in accordance with provisions of the Fair Labor Standards Act and regulations of the U.S. Department of Labor determines exempt status.

Back to top

13. Non-exempt Employees

These are the employees who are not "exempt" under federal and state overtime regulations. They must receive compensation for overtime work.

Back to top

14. Salary Basis of Compensation

A "salary," as distinguished from an "hourly wage" is compensation established by the month (e.g. $1,000 per month) with the amount remaining the same each month without regard to the variations from month to month in the normal number of working hours (e.g., in 2010 a salaried full-time employee received the same salary for January with 184 working hours and for February with 160 working hours.)

Back to top

15. Hourly Basis of Compensation

Compensation established on an hourly basis, so that pay varies with the actual number of hours worked (or on paid leave) in each pay period.

Back to top

16. Pay Period

Each month has two pay periods: The first day of the month through the 15th and the 16th through the last day of the month. Paychecks are issued on the workday that falls on or immediately prior to the seventh calendar day after the end of each pay period.

Back to top

17. Staff Benefits

Plans and programs made available by the University for the benefit of faculty and staff. Included are legally required programs such as Social Security and short-term disability insurance, as well as University programs such as health plans, personal and life insurance, disability income plans, education and training plans, retirement income plans, and recreation facilities.

Back to top

18. Term (Duration of Employment)

All faculty and staff have one of the following appointment terms:

a. Continuing
Without a specified duration or time limit.

b. Fixed-term
Employees who meet the definition of regular staff employees and appointed for a fixed duration with a specified ending date. Fixed-term employees are subject to University policies applicable to regular staff except as those policies may be modified by the specific terms of their fixed-term offer letters or other written employment contracts or agreements.

Back to top

19. Base Pay

Base Pay is the hourly rate or monthly salary paid for a job performed. It does not include any premium pay, e.g., overtime, shift differentials, supplemental pay, or any pay element other than the base rate.

Back to top

20. Regular Pay

Regular Pay is the hourly rate or monthly salary paid for a job performed, including any premium pay, e.g., shift differentials, supplemental pay, or any pay element other than the base rate.

Back to top

2.2.3 University Payroll

Last updated on:
06/15/2010
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
35

This Guide Memo contains general policies concerning the University payroll. SLAC National Accelerator Laboratory (SLAC) currently applies the applicable policies contained herein. SLAC departments should consult SLAC Business Services Division for SLAC procedures.

Authority: 

Approved by the Controller.

1. Employer/Employee Relationship

Whether an individual is a University employee or an independent contractor is a determination with important practical and legal consequences.

a. General Rule
Federal tax rules define an employee as an individual who performs services subject to control by an employer both as to what services shall be performed and how they shall be performed. If the University has the legal right to control both the method and result of services, that person is considered an employee and therefore subject to income tax withholding. Questions concerning whether an individual is an employee or an independent contractor should be directed to Human Resources or the Stanford Procurement Department. See Section 1.b.

b. Getting Help
In cases of doubt about an individual's status, contact Human Resources or Procurement/Special Contracts for advice. See "Hiring Contractors and Consultants".

Back to top

2. Employment Categories

Employees are categorized within the payroll system according to the length of the appointment, the percentage of time worked, and the type of position they fill. These categories in combination affect eligibility for most employment benefits.

a. Length of Appointment
(1) Continuing
Continuing employees are expected to remain on the payroll for six months or more (four months or more for Bargaining Unit employees).
(2) Temporary
Temporary employees are expected to remain on the payroll for less than six months (less than four months for Bargaining Unit employees). Stanford students working less than 50% time may be appointed for the entire academic year as temporary employees. Temporary employees are not eligible for employment benefits.

b. Scope of Appointment
The percentage of a full-time equivalent position (%FTE) an employee works affects both eligibility and level of benefits. See Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions, for the %FTE of a continuing appointment that grants "regular employee" status and eligibility for most benefit plans and programs.

c. Type of Position
The job classification defines whether the position is:
(1) Salaried or Hourly-Paid

  • Salaried employees are paid the amount of their pay period salary (less authorized deductions) every pay period unless an exception report (such as authorized overtime or pay reduction) is submitted. Subject to exceptions, the gross amount of the paycheck is the same for each pay period, regardless of the number of working days in the period.
  • Hourly-paid employees are paid for actual hours worked (less authorized deductions) as shown on a timecard submitted for the pay period.

(2) Exempt or Non-exempt
See the definitions in Guide Memo 2.2.2. Employees who are exempt from the provisions of the Fair Labor Standards Act are not paid overtime.

Back to top

3. Compliance with Employment Law

a. Documentation of Eligibility for Employment
(1) Completing Form I-9
The department must submit a U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services (USCIS) Form I-9, Employment Eligibility Verification, within three business days of employment for all new and rehired employees, including students. The employee must provide the department with evidence of eligibility to work in the U.S. Failure to comply with this requirement will result in ineligibility for employment and/or immediate termination.
(2) Updating Form I-9
Eligibility to work in the U.S. may expire for certain types of temporary visitors. Documentation of continued eligibility to work must be provided before the work eligibility expiration date. Failure to comply with this requirement will result in ineligibility for employment and/or immediate termination.
(3) Re-verifying Form I-9
A new or re-verified Form I-9 must be completed after any break in employment. Students who are continuously employed, except during normal school break periods, are not subject to the re-verification requirement.

b. Tax Requirements
(1) Withholding Tax Information
New employees must complete a withholding declaration at hire. If the withholding declaration is not received before the deadline of the employee's first pay period, the payroll system will tax the employee as if the employee had claimed "Single" status with no exemption on their W-4 and DE-4.
(2) Tax Treaties
Some employees who are not residents of the U.S. may qualify for full or partial exemption from withholding tax based on tax treaties between the U.S. and their country of residence. Texts of most treaties (in both English and the language of the other country) may be examined at the Government Documents Division of the University Libraries. Assistance is available from Payroll & Records, or for more information go to How to: Claim Tax Treaty for Salary Payments. To obtain an exemption from withholding, eligible employees must complete IRS Form 8233, Exemption from Withholding on Compensation for Independent Personal Services of a Nonresident Alien Individual, and the appropriate country attachment form (CO 8233 series). Forms and attachments are available in departments, Bechtel I-Center and Payroll & Records. Completed forms must be submitted to Payroll & Records.
(3) Social Security Number
Wages or salaries cannot be paid until an employee's Social Security number is in the PeopleSoft HR system. If the employee has submitted an application for a Social Security number to the Social Security Administration, Payroll & Records will accept a copy of that application so pay may begin.

Back to top

4. Payroll Accounting

a. Semimonthly Payroll
University employees are paid semimonthly. Pay periods are the 1st through 15th and the 16th through the last day of the month.

b. Salary Approvals
Department heads or other authorized University officers approve charges of salaries and wages to their projects, tasks and awards (PTAs) in accordance with budgets, compensation policies and collective bargaining agreements. In addition to the department head, certain offices have responsibility for reviewing salaries and wages for specific categories of employees. Salary changes, supplementary compensation, salary during leave of absence and termination of salary require the same authorization and review. Supervisors (or, in their absence, designees with first-hand knowledge of employees work hours) are responsible to approve employee timecards (leave usage for exempt and non-exempt employees and work hours for non-exempt employees).

  • Faculty and Academic Staff: Salaries for faculty and academic staff are reviewed and approved by the cognizant dean and the Provost's Office.
  • Salaried Staff: Salaries for staff employees are established, reviewed and approved by the cognizant dean, director or equivalent University officer. In some cases, review by Human Resources is also required.
  • Hourly-paid Staff: Hourly wages are reviewed and approved by Human Resources.
  • Students: See Undergraduate Student Wage Scales, Guide Memo 10.2.1: Graduate Student Assistantships, and the Graduate Student Assistantship Supplement.

c. Charges to Projects, Tasks and Awards
The Controller's Office charges salary and wage expenditures to PTAs designated by the department. Charges are reported on monthly expenditure or detail reports. Departmental staff provides the charging instructions through "Labor Schedules" in the Oracle Financials Labor Distribution module. This staff is required to take training and to sign a Confidentiality Statement
(1) Multiple Activities/Accounts
If an employee is paid from more than one PTA, the authorized portion of salary or wage is allocated to the appropriate PTA. The paycheck or bank deposit advice delivered to the employee combines all earnings into one check.
(2) Salary Guarantee Activity/Account
Each department designates an unrestricted PTA as an Organization Suspense Account to which salaries of department employees are charged whenever the source of salary funding (such as a grant or contract) runs out and is not immediately replaced by alternative funding. Charges to Organization Suspense Account PTAs, which are charged to the expenditure type 51610, should be reviewed on a timely basis to determine if transfers are needed. See Guide Memo 3.2.2: Cost Transfers.

Back to top

5. Taxes on Salaries and Wages

a. Taxable Earnings
The University withholds Federal, State, and other applicable taxes from all taxable earnings paid to employees. Taxable earnings include regular pay, overtime pay, supplementary compensation and any additional and miscellaneous payments for work performed for the University. At the end of each tax year (January 1 through December 31), Stanford compiles and distributes a W-2 Statement for each employee. As a default, W-2 Statements are mailed to the employee's mailing address listed in the PeopleSoft Human Resources database. Employees may elect to have their W-2 Statement sent to them electronically at https://axess.stanford.edu, enabling download into tax preparation software programs. The University also sends copies of Form W-2 to the Federal and State governments.

b. Tax Exemptions
Employees may not claim more withholding allowances than those allowed by the Internal Revenue Service or Franchise Tax Board. Fewer allowances may be claimed or additional dollar amount of taxes may be withheld if an employee wishes to increase the amount of tax withheld. Information about completing the IRS W-4 form and Franchise Tax Board form DE-4, used to specify withholding allowances, is located at How to: Declare or Change WithHolding Allowances

c. Student Employees
Students who take jobs with the University while pursuing their studies are paid through the University payroll. Stanford student employees do not pay Social Security taxes or Disability Insurance.

d. Scholarships and Fellowships
Scholarship and fellowship payments are not considered payments for work performed and the recipients are not placed in an employer-employee relationship because of receipt of this money from the University.

e. Research and Teaching Assistants
Research and teaching assistantships are taxable, and tax is withheld from the semimonthly check.

f. Non-California Residents
All employees who physically work in California are treated as California residents for California tax purposes.

g. Tax Status of Non-U.S. Residents
Salaries and wages paid to aliens come under the tax laws of the United States and the State of California. The specific provisions of the tax laws, treaties, conventions, and determinations in regard to aliens are handled by the Internal Revenue Service and the California Franchise Tax Board. The Payroll & Records Office can assist aliens in filling out University-required forms and can provide a copy of tax information published by the Federal and State governments.

Back to top

6. Payroll Deductions

a. Deductions for Benefits
Employees eligible for benefits (e.g., regular staff, faculty) may pay the employee's share of the cost of some insurance programs and benefits by payroll deduction. For more information, go to http://benefits.stanford.edu.

b. Other Authorized Deductions
The University has authorized voluntary payroll deductions for payments to certain organizations (such as the Stanford Faculty Club). Employees are sent notices of the availability of this procedure in each case. Any employee who wishes to use this procedure should make arrangements directly with the organization for which the deduction is authorized. That organization will send the authorization to Payroll & Records.

c. Reporting Deductions
Deductions from each paycheck are itemized on the pay statement. The amounts deducted are sent to the designated organizations.

d. Cessation of Deductions
(1) Benefits
Payroll deductions for benefits cease during leaves of absence without pay. If that happens, the employee will receive information from the University's leave administrator on how to pay for the employee's share of the costs for applicable insurance plans. Benefit deductions also stop when an employee's status changes to a non-benefits-eligible position (see Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions) and when employment terminates. At that time, terminated employees may call Stanford Benefits at (650) 736-2985 (press option 3) to determine when they can start the paperwork to receive payment from their retirement savings.
(2) Other Authorized Deductions
Payroll deductions arranged through an organization external to Stanford are available to all employees, and are not affected by a change in employment status. Such deductions cease during leaves of absence without pay, at termination of employment, or on retirement.

Back to top

7. Delivery of Checks and Bank Deposit Advices

a. Direct Deposit of Paychecks
Employees are encouraged to have their paychecks deposited directly into their bank accounts. Employees may use any bank, savings and loan or credit union that is a member of the Automated Clearing House and can accept electronic fund transfers. Direct deposit enrollment instructions are available at How to: Enroll/Update/Cancel Direct Deposit

b. Delivery of Semimonthly Paychecks and Advices
Pay statements are provided for all employees electronically at https://axess.stanford.edu. Payroll & Records distributes live paychecks and paper pay statements for Bargaining Unit employees through interdepartmental mail. Other employees who wish to receive a paper pay statement must select this option at https://axess.stanford.edu.

c. Undelivered Checks
A paycheck for an absent employee may be held by the department until the employee's return, if the absence is for no longer than one pay period. The department can mail the check if requested by the employee. Checks returned by the Post Office should be forwarded to Payroll & Records for handling. Paychecks issued in error must be returned to Payroll & Records for cancellation and reversal of earnings from employee's W-2.

d. Stale-Dated Checks
Paychecks are negotiable for six months from date of issue. Stale-dated checks should be returned to Payroll & Records for reissue. Funds from checks not cashed after one year from date of issue must be remitted to the State of California Unclaimed Property Bureau.

e. Delivery of Final Paycheck
An individual's final paycheck must include the total amount of salary or wages owed as of the date of termination. This includes all payments due, including accumulated, unused vacation leave, PTO and floating holiday, less authorized deductions. The department should contact Employee & Labor Relations in advance if questions arise.
(1) If the University initiates the termination, or if the employee initiates the termination and gives at least 72 hours notice, the final paycheck must be given to the employee on the date of termination.
(2) When an employee initiates the termination and gives less than 72 hours notice, the final paycheck is due to the employee within 72 hours after termination. Departments are responsible for making sure final paychecks are delivered to employees under the time limitations provided by law. A completed Termination Transaction must be submitted to Payroll & Records in order to process the final paycheck. 

Back to top

8. Salary and Wage Calculations

a. Vacation Payment and Vacation Credit
Vacation earned but unused at termination is paid on the basis of the employee’s hourly rate at termination. For salaried employees at 100% FTE, the hourly rate is calculated by dividing the annual salary by 2080 (hours in a working year). If an employee terminates or changes departments, accumulated vacation as of September 1, 2003 is transferred with an online expense transfer to the central vacation accrual account computed in the same manner. (See Guide Memo 2.1.6: Vacations, and Policy Notes: Vacation Balance Funding). For more information about policy on accrual and use of vacation leave; contact Financial Information & Reporting Systems (FIRS) in the Controller's Office. The Vacation Accrual template found at How to: Calculate Vacation Accrual be used to calculate vacation when an employee terminates or transfers.

b. Partial Pay Period Pay Calculation
Pay for less than a full pay period for new or terminating salaried employees is calculated by dividing the annual salary by 2080 (hours in a working year) and multiplying that number by the number of days the employee actually worked, including adjacent holidays, in the pay period times 8 (assume 8 hours/day for a full-time exempt employee.) Holidays are counted as workdays when the employee works or is on paid leave (including vacation) both the day immediately preceding and the day following a holiday.

Back to top

9. Special Situations

a. Salary Advances
Under certain circumstances as described below, salary advances are available to regular staff employees who are not in bargaining units. (Find information on salary advances for Bargaining Unit members in the applicable agreement.)
(1) Vacation Advance
An employee scheduled to take vacation leave of at least 10 consecutive workdays outside San Francisco Bay Area, may request early payment of any regular paychecks that would be issued during that period.
(2) Emergency Advance
Only in an emergency and with the concurrence of his/her department, a regular employee may receive an advance of salary already earned in one pay period prior to the regular payday for that pay period. No more than two emergency advances for the same employee will be processed in a 12-month period.

b. Faculty Terminations
A faculty member leaving after completing the employment obligation but before the designated end date of his/her appointment may receive the balance of salary through a special processing procedure. If this option is exercised, the faculty member's status as an employee ends on the termination date. The termination date must not be later than the date of the final check.

Back to top

2.2.6 Smoke-Free Environment

Last updated on:
04/13/2015
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
23.4
Authority: 

Approved by the President.

Applicability: 

Applies to all academic and administrative units of Stanford University, including SLAC and all campus student housing. This policy does not supersede more restrictive policies that may be in force to comply with federal, state, or local laws or ordinances. The President must approve more restrictive policies not required by law.

1. Policy

It is the policy of Stanford University that all smoking, including but not limited to tobacco products and the use of electronic smoking devices, is prohibited in enclosed buildings and facilities and during indoor or outdoor events on the campus.

Back to top

2. Definition

“Smoke-free” refers to an environment that is free of smoke from, among other things, tobacco products and/or vapors from electronic smoking devices.

Back to top

3. Guidelines

a. Smoking-Prohibited Areas
Specifically, smoking is prohibited in classrooms and offices, all enclosed buildings and facilities, in covered walkways, in University vehicles, during indoor or outdoor athletic events, during other University sponsored or designated indoor or outdoor events and in outdoor areas designated by signage as "smoking prohibited" areas.

  • Ashtrays will not be provided in any enclosed University building or facility.
  • "Smoking Prohibited" signs will be posted.

b. Outdoor Smoking Areas
Except where otherwise posted as a "smoking prohibited area," smoking is generally permitted in outdoor areas, except during organized events. Outdoor smoking in non-prohibited areas must be at least 30 feet away from doorways, open windows, covered walkways, and ventilation systems to prevent smoke from entering enclosed buildings and facilities. To accommodate faculty, staff and students who smoke, Vice Presidents, Vice Provosts and Deans may designate certain areas of existing courtyards and patios as smoking areas, and must provide ashtrays. The specific academic or administrative unit(s) will be responsible for absorbing all costs associated with providing designated smoking areas and ashtrays.

Back to top

4. Enforcement

This policy relies on the consideration and cooperation of smokers and non-smokers. It is the responsibility of all members of the University community to observe and follow this policy and its guidelines.

a. Smoking Cessation Information
Smoking cessation programs are available for faculty and staff through the Center for Research in Disease Prevention, Health Improvement Program (HIP). Students may contact the Health Promotion Program (HPP) through the Student Health Center for smoking cessation information or programs.


b. Repeated Violations
Faculty, staff and students repeatedly violating this policy may be subject to appropriate action to correct any violation(s) and prevent future occurrences.

Back to top

5. Implementation and Distribution

This policy will be disseminated to all faculty, staff and students and to all new members of the University Community.

Back to top

2.2.7 Requesting Workplace Accommodations For Employees With Disabilities

Last updated on:
12/15/2011
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
23.5

This Guide Memo outlines Stanford University's policies and procedures for employee requests for disability-related accommodations.

Authority: 

Approved by the President.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to all University employees, including SLAC. However, some procedures discussed here do not apply at SLAC. Employees should contact the SLAC Human Resources Department for information on how to request workplace accommodations.

1. Policy

Stanford University values diversity and is committed to provide equal employment opportunities to all qualified employees, including those with disabilities. The University follows all state and federal laws and regulations, including the California Fair Employment and Housing Act (CFEHA), the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA) and Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (Section 504). Disability is defined as any physical or mental impairment that limits one or more of an individual's major life activities (e.g., caring for oneself, walking, seeing, hearing, speaking, breathing, learning, sitting, standing). To ensure equality of access for employees with disabilities, the University will provide reasonable accommodations and auxiliary aids to enable the employee to perform the essential functions of his/her job and participate in University programs and activities.

Back to top

2. Implementation and Responsibility

a. Employees: are responsible for initiating requests for any desired disability related workplace accommodations. Requests by non-faculty employees should go to the supervisor or human resources manager; faculty employees should contact their Chair, departmental or school faculty affairs officer, or the ADA/Section 504 Compliance Officer.

b. Supervisors: are responsible for receiving requests for workplace accommodations, informing employees of the process and referring requests to the appropriate human resources manager. Supervisors are responsible for initiating a discussion concerning accommodations when they have reason to believe an employee's disability precludes the employee from initiating a request. Supervisors should inform the local human resources manager of all requests and accommodations.

c. Human Resources Managers: are responsible for evaluating the request, determining what type of documentation is necessary, and determining if the requested accommodation is appropriate and effective. To identify your human resources manager, call the appropriate number: Campus 723-2191; Medical School 725-8607; SLAC 926-2358.

d. Compliance Officer: The ADA/Section 504 Compliance Officer provides information on the employment provisions of the ADA and employer obligations. You can also contact the Compliance Officer for information on campus accessibility, how to get technical and assistive equipment, and funding sources. You can reach the ADA/Section 504 Compliance Officer at the Diversity & Access Office located in Mariposa House, 585 Capistrano Way, (650) 725-0326, FAX (650) 723-1791, TTY (650) 723-1216.

e. Chairs and Faculty Affairs Officers: are responsible for receiving requests for workplace accommodations and referring requests to the ADA/Section 504 Compliance Officer for handling under procedures similar to Section 3.

Back to top

3. Process—Recommended Steps

a. Step One - Request: The employee is responsible for requesting a workplace accommodation for his/her disability. The request shall be made to either the employee's supervisor or the local human resources manager. Requests should be in writing and include:

  • Employee's name, telephone number and address
  • Department
  • Supervisor
  • Physical or mental condition and its duration
  • Nature of request
  • Brief explanation of how the requested accommodation will enable the employee to perform the essential functions of his/her job.

b. Step Two - Discussion: When received, the supervisor or human resources manager will meet with the employee to acknowledge the request and explain the process. The supervisor or human resources manager will also meet with the employee as necessary to discuss the request and accommodation alternatives.

c. Step Three - Documenting the Disability: The supervisor or human resources manager evaluating the requested accommodation will determine what type of documentation is necessary to verify the disability. This may vary depending on the nature and extent of the disability and the accommodation requested. It is the employee's responsibility to provide the requested documentation on his/her disability. If the University determines it is appropriate to get a second professional opinion concerning the nature or impact of a physical or mental disability, the Department will bear the cost of the second opinion. The request for an accommodation will be evaluated once the employee submits all documentation to the human resources manager and/or the supervisor.

d. Step Four - Evaluation: Appropriate accommodations are determined following an individualized assessment of each request. The supervisor or human resources manager will consider the needs and requests for reasonable accommodation to determine whether the necessary equipment or services exist already in a different department or unit before investing in new equipment or additional services. Among the factors considered in determining reasonable accommodations for employees are:

(1) What is the nature of the employee's physical or mental condition and how does it affect his/her needs in the workplace setting?
(2) Does the employee's physical or mental condition limit one or more major life activities?
(3) Will the requested accommodation allow the employee to perform the essential job functions effectively?
(4) Will the requested accommodation alter or remove an essential function of the job?
(5) What impact will the requested accommodation or modification have on the department or unit?

The University is not required to provide an accommodation that will eliminate an essential function of the job in question or to provide an accommodation or service that is personal in nature, such as a hearing aid or wheelchair. Furthermore, the University is not required to lower performance, production or conduct standards, or alter attendance requirements expected of all employees.

e. Step Five - Notification: The supervisor or human resources manager evaluating the request for an accommodation shall provide the employee with written notification of the determination within 15 calendar days of receiving the completed request (including the requested documentation). If the determination includes an accommodation, the notice will also include the expected implementation date. If the supervisor or the human resources manager needs additional time to assess a request or to provide an accommodation, he/she shall provide the employee with written notification of the status of the request and the proposed date of determination.

Back to top

4. Funding

If the accommodation is appropriate and reasonable, then the department bears the initial responsibility for funding the accommodation. If the cost is beyond the department's means, the cost should be shared by higher levels in the department's/office's reporting line. For information on additional funding resources for disability-related accommodations, contact the Diversity & Access Office at (650) 725-0326.

Back to top

5. Resolving Disagreements

In the event an employee disagrees with the determination and/or proposed accommodation, he/she may contact the ADA/Section 504 Compliance Officer at the Diversity & Access Office, Mariposa House, 585 Capistrano Way, telephone 723-0755, FAX 723-1791, for assistance in resolving the disagreement.

Back to top

6. Confidentiality and Records

All University employees have a legal obligation to maintain confidentiality regarding a staff or faculty member's disability-related information. To that end, Supervisors and local human resources managers shall provide information to staff and faculty only when necessary to facilitate accommodations.

Back to top

2.2.8 Controlled Substances and Alcohol

Last updated on:
03/15/2012
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
23.6
Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources.

Applicability: 

Applies to all Stanford employees, certain individuals who are not Stanford employees (as defined in the Policy section) and students.

1. Background and Purpose

a. Health Risks
It is widely recognized that the misuse and abuse of controlled substances, illegal drugs (collectively called controlled substances1 and alcohol are major contributors to serious health problems and social and civic concerns. The health risks associated with the use of illicit drugs and the abuse of controlled substances and alcohol include various physical and mental consequences including addiction, severe disability and death. Information concerning the known effects of alcohol and specific drugs is available from the Office of Alcohol Policy and Education at (650) 723-3429.

b. Federal Legislation
In response to these concerns, the U.S. Congress passed the Drug-Free Workplace Act of 1988, the Drug-Free Schools and Communities Act Amendments of 1989 and the Omnibus Transportation Employee Testing Act of 1991.In accordance with these Acts, Stanford University has enacted the following policy applicable to all employees and students.

1Controlled substances are those defined in 21 U.S.C.812 and include, but are not limited to, such substances as marijuana, heroin, cocaine and amphetamines.

Back to top

2. Policy

It is the policy of Stanford University to maintain a drug-free workplace and campus. The unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensation, possession and/or use of controlled substances or the unlawful possession, use or distribution of alcohol is prohibited on the Stanford campus, in the workplace or as part of any of the University's activities. (For clarification of what activities related to controlled substances and alcohol are unlawful, see the Appendix at the end of this Guide Memo.) The workplace and campus include all Stanford premises where the activities of the University are conducted. Moreover, employees are prohibited from being under the influence of controlled substances or alcohol while at work. Violation of this policy may result in disciplinary sanctions up to and including termination of employment or expulsion. Violations may also be referred to the appropriate authorities for prosecution.


a. Employees
As a condition of employment, all Stanford employees are expected to report to work in a condition that enables them to perform their job duties, with or without reasonable accommodation, in a safe manner that does not jeopardize their own safety or the safety of others.

Employees are prohibited from being under the influence of controlled substances or alcohol while at work. "Under the influence" is a condition where an employee's sensory, cognitive, motor functions or job related capabilities are affected, impaired or diminished and may be exhibited through various behaviors including slurred speech, difficulty walking, red eyes, erratic or threatening behavior, the odor of alcohol, etc. (Note: Lawfully prescribed prescription drugs used in accordance with their instructions are not subject to this policy.)

Employees who unlawfully manufacture, distribute, dispense, possess or use controlled substances or unlawfully use, possess, or distribute alcohol in the workplace, on the campus, or as part of any University activity will be subject to discipline up to and including termination of employment. Employees required to obtain Commercial Drivers Licenses to drive vehicles heavier than 26,000 pounds, vehicles placarded for the transportation of hazardous materials, and/or vehicles designed to carry 16 or more persons are subject to a protocol of testing for the use of drugs and alcohol in accordance with DOT guidelines. Employees at SLAC National Accelerator Laboratory must comply with SLAC's Fitness for Duty policy.

b. Students
Students are bound by this policy and the Stanford Student Alcohol Policy.

c. Others on Campus
Individuals who are not Stanford employees, but who perform work at Stanford for its benefit (e.g., independent contractors, temporary employees provided by agencies, visitors engaged in joint projects at Stanford or volunteers) are required to comply with this policy. Such individuals who violate this policy may be barred from further work for and at Stanford.

d. Rehabilitation
Successful completion of an appropriate rehabilitation program (including participation in aftercare) may be considered evidence of eligibility for continued or future employment or for reinstatement of student status.

e. Reporting of Convictions
An employee who is convicted (including a plea of nolo contendere) of a criminal drug statute violation occurring in the workplace or on Stanford property must, notify Stanford University of the conviction within five days after the conviction. Notification must be in writing to the local human resources office, the Associate Vice President of Employee & Management Services (for staff) or the Dean (for faculty).

Back to top

3. Guide to Supervisors

Responsibility for effective implementation and enforcement of Stanford's Controlled Substances and Alcohol Policy begins with supervisors. Supervisors must be alert to indications or evidence of the use or presence of controlled substances or alcohol in the workplace.

a. Communication
Supervisors must make sure that employees are aware of Stanford's Controlled Substances and Alcohol Policy and understands that violation of this policy is a serious matter and cause for disciplinary action including possible termination.

b. Consultation with Human Resources
If and when an employee is suspected of violating this policy, the supervisor should consult with the local human resources office to plan and carry out an appropriate investigation and resolution of the situation.

c. Impaired Performance on the Job: Under the Influence of Controlled Substances or Alcohol in the Workplace
Performance problems on the job can have many causes. In discussions with an employee concerning any performance problem, the supervisor should offer to help the employee determine the source of the problems and offer guidance on appropriate assistance, counseling or other resources.

When job performance has become impaired, the supervisor should take normal corrective action, beginning with discussion with the employee. When the behavior of an employee on the job raises safety concerns for the employee and/or others in the workplace, the supervisor must take immediate action and prohibit the employee from continuing on the job until it is determined that he/she is fit to return to work and perform safely. Specific actions to be taken depend on the facts of the particular situation. Supervisors should consult with their local human resources office and document any cases of suspected employee impairment while at work.

In a situation when the employee acknowledges to the supervisor that poor performance or unacceptable conduct results from a substance or alcohol abuse problem, the supervisor should urge the employee to seek help from a qualified substance abuse treatment resource. If the employee requests a leave of absence for a rehabilitation program, the supervisor should take normal steps to review the leave request. After a review of the situation, any misconduct, performance issues or policy violations which occur before, or coincident with, a voluntary admission of impairment may form the basis of disciplinary consequences up to and including termination.

d. Testing for Drugs and Alcohol
Supervisors of employees who are required to obtain a Commercial Drivers License to drive vehicles weighing more than 26,000 pounds, vehicles placarded for the transportation of hazardous materials, and/or vehicles designed to carry 16 or more persons are responsible for making sure the appropriate tests for the use of drugs and/or alcohol are administered through a suitable drug testing service provider. The department/ school is responsible for managing the testing process and determining if the use of an outside vendor is needed for this purpose.

Back to top

4. Getting Help

Employees concerned about substance use, abuse, and rehabilitation are strongly encouraged to contact their physician, their medical plan, or the Stanford Faculty & Staff Help Center, which can refer employees to appropriate resources (community or private agencies) that provide complete, confidential substance abuse counseling.

Stanford's medical insurance plans provide coverage for substance abuse programs. Go to the Stanford Benefits Web site for additional information.

Students (including employees who are also Stanford students) are urged to contact the Office of Alcohol Policy and Education at (650) 723-3429.

Back to top

The unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, and/or use of a controlled substance or alcohol is regulated by a number of federal, state and local laws. These laws impose legal sanctions for both misdemeanor and felony convictions. Criminal penalties for convictions can range from fines and probation to denial or revocation of federal benefits (such as student loans) to imprisonment and forfeiture of personal and real property.

This Appendix contains a list of some of the laws pertaining to the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance or alcohol. Because the laws change from time to time, the information provided in the Appendix is illustrative, not exhaustive. More detailed and current information is available from the Stanford Department of Public Safety.

APPENDIX

Generally, as of February 2006 it is a criminal offense:

  • to illegally manufacture, sell, distribute or possess controlled substances (those listed in Schedules I through V of the Controlled Substances Act (21 U.S.C.812) (21 U.S.C. 828, 841, 844, 859, 860)
  • to unlawfully possess or possess for sale controlled substances specified in California Health and Safety Code 11054, 11055, 11056, 11057, 11058
  • to possess, cultivate, sell or possess for sale marijuana (CA Health and Safety Codes 11357, 11358, 11359)
  • to use or be under the influence of a controlled substance (CA Health and Safety Code 11550)
  • to transport, sell, or distribute marijuana to a minor or to use a minor to transport, sell, or distribute marijuana (CA Health and Safety Code 11361)
  • to possess, furnish or manufacture drug paraphernalia (CA Health and Safety Code 11362 et seq.)
  • to provide any alcoholic beverage to a person under 21 or to any obviously intoxicated person (CA Business and Professions Code 25658; 25602)
  • to be under the influence of alcohol in a public place and unable to exercise care for one's own safety or that of others [CA Penal Code 647(f)]
  • for persons under 21 to have any container of alcohol in any public place or any place open to the public (Business and Professions Code 25662)
  • to operate a motor vehicle while under the influence of alcohol or other intoxicants or with a blood alcohol level of .08% or higher (CA Vehicle Code 23152)
  • for any person under the age of 21 to operate a motor vehicle with a blood alcohol level of .05% or higher (CA Vehicle Code 23140)
  • to have an open container of alcohol in a motor vehicle and for persons under 21 to drive a vehicle carrying alcohol or to possess alcohol while in a motor vehicle (CA Vehicle Code 23223; 23224)
  • to have in one's possession or to use false evidence of age and identity to purchase alcohol (CA Business and Professions Code 25661)
  • for any person under age 21 to purchase alcohol (CA Business and Professions Code 25658.5)

Back to top

2.2.9 Employee Training

Last updated on:
08/30/2012
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
23.7

Stanford University is obligated to provide necessary training to employees of the University, and retains the right to identify certain training as required. Where identified as required, training will be considered a job responsibility, as it is integral to the quality of work performed by the employee and contributes to the overall effectiveness of organizational operations.

Authority: 

This policy is established by the Vice President of Human Resources, who determines training requirements upon consultation with the other University officials and groups as appropriate. Additionally, Deans, Vice Presidents or members of the Provost's staff may determine that specialized training is required within their Schools or organizations. Such training will be identified and delivered locally, with support from central training providers as appropriate and available.

Applicability: 

The policy is applicable to all Stanford University employees, including faculty, staff and students.

1. Purpose/Rationale

The increasing complexity of the work environment requires continuing development of competencies and upgrading of knowledge and skills relating directly to the performance of work. In addition, changes in external regulation and Stanford policies, procedures and practices have created risks/liabilities which require the delivery of consistent information to Stanford University employees (faculty, staff and students) with specific responsibilities. The documented delivery of training is in some cases mandated by external agencies and subject to audit review (for example, in areas such as financial management, health and safety practices, and sponsored project administration).

Back to top

2. Actions and Instructions

a. Department Managers are responsible for:

  • Identifying those employees who perform work requiring specific training.
  • Taking necessary actions to enable the delivery of necessary training, including identifying appropriate courses and providing release time as needed for participation.
  • Monitoring job performance, and incorporating ongoing training and development as an element of continuing staff performance appraisal.
  • Providing support after training to maximize application of skills on the job.

b. Departments providing required University-wide training are responsible for:

  • Responding to client needs by developing curriculum to address job requirements; considering the content and delivery of training to maximize value, while minimizing the time needed to achieve proficiency, and considering alternatives to classroom instruction whenever feasible.
  • Continually evaluating the effectiveness of training programs.
  • Recommending to the Vice President of Human Resources specific training for required delivery to University populations. Such recommendations must include definition of:
    - rationale for requiring training
    - populations for which training is a requirement
    - delivery plans (including necessary resources)
    - methods for documenting delivery

Back to top

3. Documentation and Enforcement

Satisfactory completion of required training must be documented within the organization requiring the training. Such documentation is a prerequisite for authorization to perform certain tasks; e.g., for authority to expend University funds or for access to particular information or materials.

Back to top

4. Cognizant Offices

Questions about this policy may be directed to Learning & Organizational Effectiveness at (650) 723-4635 and learningdev@stanford.edu. This office chairs the University Training Advisory Committee.

Back to top

5. Definitions

a. Required Training—Material for which competency must be demonstrated as a condition of employment in certain jobs, or for the assignment of certain tasks.

b. University-wide—Having general applicability to members of the University community, not specific to any School, department or office.

c. Local Training—Having specific applicability to the needs of an individual School, department or office.

d. Release Time—Time away from the job made available for participation in training or other job-related activities. Release time is compensable working time.

Back to top

2.2.10 Gifts and Awards for University Employees

Last updated on:
03/15/2009
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
23.8

This Guide Memo provides specific guidelines for conferring non-taxable gifts or awards upon eligible University employees.

Authority: 

This Guide Memo was jointly approved by the Vice President of Human Resources and the Controller.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to all faculty, academic staff, and regular staff as defined in Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions.

1. Policy Statement

At the discretion of each department or school, gifts or awards may be made to University employees for non-performance related recognition, such as to acknowledge years of service or celebrate retirement. The expense of such gifts or awards must come from appropriate University funds. In addition, the succeeding award guidelines must be followed or all or part of the value of gifts or awards will be reportable to the Internal Revenue Service (IRS) as taxable income to the employee.

This policy does not cover ordinary business expenses in the promotion of employee morale. Examples of such business expenses are: occasional business lunches; office gatherings; or flowers for bereavement, hospitalization, or family crises. Nor does this policy cover performance-based awards or bonuses, which are generally taxable to the recipient and are processed through Payroll. Furthermore, this policy does not preclude individual faculty or staff members from giving personal gifts to their colleagues provided University funds are not used for this purpose.

Back to top

2. Purpose

Stanford University understands the importance of maintaining morale by recognizing employee length-of service, retirement or other special occasions. This guide memo provides specific guidelines regarding the value and type of gifts or awards that are nontaxable income.

Back to top

3. Staff Length of Service/Retirement Rewards

A regular staff employee and an academic staff employee must be in active service on his/her anniversary date to receive the length-of-service award. Length of service is determined by computing the period of service as defined in Guide Memo 2.1.6: Vacations, Section 1.a. The following length-of-service/retirement award guidelines have been developed according to IRS regulations. Awards which adhere to the following parameters and are given to eligible employees are not subject to taxes:

a. Timing
The length-of-service/retirement award may not be made within the employee's first five years of service or more frequently than every five years. Length-of-service and/or retirement awards given within the first five years of service or more frequently than every five years will be taxable in full and must be reported as such to the Controller's Office.

b. Dollar Limit
The value or cost of the award should not exceed $400. Also, it is recommended that the value or cost of the award be commensurate with the number of years of service being recognized (e.g., the 15-year service award is greater than the 10-year service award). Length-of-service or retirement awards with a value or cost over $400 will be taxable to the extent the value or cost exceeds the dollar limit (e.g., if a $450 award is given, then $50 will be taxable).

If the staff employee elects to retire the same year he/she becomes eligible for a length-of-service award, then the maximum value or cost of the award(s) should not exceed $400 for the award(s) to be nontaxable. In rare circumstances the nontaxable amount of the award may be higher than $400. Any exceptions must be approved in advance by the Associate Controller that oversees Disbursements. (See the Financial Management Services Organization Chart. 

c. Form of Awards
In order to avoid tax reporting as income, the award must be in the form of tangible personal property. The IRS does not consider gift certificates to be tangible personal property, and accordingly, they are subject to tax. If the award is in the form of cash, check, or gift certificate, the value of such items is treated as additional wages regardless of cost or value (see Section 5.a. below for an exception for nominal gifts).

d. Meaningful Presentation
The award must be presented as part of a special event or celebration that marks the occasion, such as a departmental meeting, party, or luncheon. Every attempt should be made to give a length-of-service/retirement award during the year the anniversary occurs. To avoid tax liabilities to the attendees, departments or schools should ensure that special presentation events are conducted only on an occasional basis and that the costs of the events are reasonable.

Deans/Directors/Vice Provosts/Vice Presidents are responsible for ensuring that award programs at different levels within their organization comply with all the above IRS requirements for nontaxablegifts.

Back to top

4. Faculty Retirement Awards

Faculty members with more than 5 years of service are eligible to receive an award from the University upon retirement or departure from the University to recognize their service and contribution. (Faculty members do not participate in the staff 5-year incremental length-of-service award.) For retirement awards to be nontaxable to the recipient, they must meet the 5-year service requirement noted in this section as well as the requirements listed under Sections 3.b. to 3.d. of this policy. Any award that does not meet the IRS requirements will be taxable income and must be reported as such to the Controller's Office. For example, if an award is granted prior to 5 years of service or is a gift certificate, the entire award amount is taxable income. Also, if the award value/cost exceeds $400, then any amount over $400 will be taxable (e.g., if a $600 retirement award is given, then the $200 over the dollar limit will be taxable income).

It is the Department Chair's responsibility to ensure that awards comply with the IRS requirements. In rare circumstances the non-taxable amount of the award may be higher than $400. Any exceptions must be approved in advance by the Associate Controller that oversees Disbursements.  (See the Financial Management Services Organization Chart. 

Back to top

5. Nominal Gifts

Each department or school determines who is eligible and what occasions warrant the gift. To ensure these gifts are nontaxable to the recipient(s), departments need to follow the IRS regulations outlined below:

a. Dollar Limit
The aggregate gift value should not exceed $50 per individual. If the value of the gift(s) exceeds $50, then the entire gift will be taxable. Qualifying gift certificates in amounts not exceeding $50 will be considered nominal and not taxable. To qualify, a gift certificate must be one that requires the recipient to exchange the certificate for tangible personal property from the issuing vendor, and cannot be convertible to cash or used to reduce the balance of the recipient's account with the company issuing the gift certificate.

b. Frequency
The gift should be given only on an occasional basis. Gifts given to an employee(s) on a regular or routine basis do not qualify for nontaxable treatment and must be reported as taxable income.

c. Noncash Gift
The gift must be tangible personal property. That is, it may not be a check, or a gift certificate over $50. (see qualifying gift certificate description in 5.a. above).

Back to top

6. Guide to Supervisors

a. Nontaxable Gifts/Awards
The cost of the nontaxable gift and/or award may be paid personally and reimbursed by the University using the Oracle Financials reimbursement application or purchased using a university PCard. The name of the employee and the occasion for the gift (e.g., 10-year service) must be included on the request or included in the PCard verficiation information to ensure timely processing. For more information see Guide Memo 5.4.3: Reimbursement of Expenses.

b. Taxable Gifts/Awards
The cost of gifts or awards that fail to meet one or more of the IRS requirements outlined in this policy may be paid personally and reimbursed by the University using the Oracle Financials reimbursement application or purchased using a University PCard. The name of the employee, his/her employee ID number and occasion for the gift must be included on the request, or included in the PCard verification information, to ensure timely processing of the request. All reimbursements processed for these types of gifts will be sent to the Payroll Department and the amounts will be included in the employee's W2 or 1099 forms. For more information, see Guide Memo 5.4.3: Reimbursement of Expenses. Any gift purchased using the PCard must be clearly identified in the business purpose as being a gift. The PCard verifier must be able to provide tax information to Disbursements upon request in order to properly complete any required tax reporting to the recipient. Failure to do so will result in loss of card privileges.

Back to top

7. Resources

For more information about employee gifts, please contact the appropriate local human resources manager.

Back to top

2.2.11 Violence in the Workplace

Last updated on:
12/15/2010
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
23.9

This policy provides guidelines for responding to violence or threats of violence in the workplace, including all University locations.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources.

Applicability: 

Applies to all Stanford University employees, and to all individuals who, while not Stanford employees, perform work at Stanford for its benefit.

1. Policy

Stanford University strives to provide employees a safe environment in which to work; therefore, the University will not tolerate violence or threats of violence in the workplace. All weapons, as defined by California Penal Code, are banned from University premises unless written permission is given by Stanford Department of Public Safety. Employees who violate this policy will be subject to corrective action, including termination. Employees who intentionally bring false charges will also be subject to corrective action, including termination. Non-employee violations of this policy will be handled in accordance with applicable laws.

Back to top

2. Definitions

a. Acts of violence include any physical action, whether intentional or reckless, that harms or threatens the safety of another individual in the workplace.

b. A threat of violence includes any behavior that by its very nature could be interpreted by a reasonable person as an intent to cause physical harm to another individual.

c. Workplace includes all University locations and off-campus locations where faculty, staff, or student employees are engaged in University business.

Back to top

3. Procedures

a. General Roles and Responsibilities

(1) In general:

(a) Any person experiencing or observing imminent violence should call emergency services at 9-911 immediately.
(b) Any employee who believes a crime has been committed against him/her has the right to report that to the proper law enforcement agency.

(2) Employee:
Each employee:

(a) Should report any acts or threats of violence to his/her immediate supervisor, human resources manager (see the online directory of school/unit HR Managers), to Employee & Labor Relations (650) 723-2191 at SLAC (650) 926-5555, or to the nearest member of management. Such reports will be promptly and thoroughly investigated.
(b) Should notify his/her supervisor of any restraining orders against individuals that include the workplace.

(3) Supervisor:
The immediate supervisor's responsibilities are:

(a) To respond promptly to issues related to workplace safety.
(b) In the event of a potential or actual incident, contact the appropriate personnel including the local Human Resources Office/Employee and Labor Relations (650) 723-2191 and the Stanford Department of Public Safety (650) 723-9633, Medical Center Security (650) 723-7222, or SLAC Site Security (650) 926-5555.
(c) To promptly inform his/her supervisor, the local Human Resources Office/Employee and Labor Relations about any acts or threats of violence even if the situation has been addressed.
(d) In the event he/she is advised of a restraining order, contact the local Human Resources Office/Employee and Labor Relations.

(4) Human Resources Managers (HRMs)
Human resources managers are responsible to:

(a) Contact the appropriate Employee and Labor Relations Representative/Specialist as soon as possible when made aware of a violent act or threat of violence.
(b) Conduct investigations of situations as directed by the Employee and Labor Relations Representative/Specialist.

(5) Employee and Labor Relations staff

(a) Consult and advise management regarding concerns about violent and potentially violent employees or others.
(b) In the event of an act or threat of violence, determine the investigation process and coordinate with the assigned investigator. Work with management, legal counsel, and police/security to determine the appropriate action to be taken as needed.
(c) Gather and maintain University-wide information on workplace acts or threats of violence.

(6) Help Center Counselors [or (650) 723-4577]

(a) Provide confidential counseling services to any employee desiring assistance with situations relating to anger or threats or violence in the workplace.
(b) Provide educational, emotional support and consultation to groups and individuals who are victims, observers, or otherwise adversely affected by a violent incident or threat.
(c) Provide consultation to management on evaluating the potential for violence by employees.
(d) Provide initial assessment of violent or threatening employees and make an appropriate referral for clinical evaluation or treatment as needed.

(7) Police/Security

(a) The Stanford Department of Public Safety takes appropriate law enforcement actions.
(b) SLAC Site Security and Medical School Security notify and cooperate with all law enforcement agencies as appropriate.

(8) Threat Assessment Team

The University's Threat Assessment Team, (typically consisting of representatives from the Ombuds office, Human Resources, Office of the General Counsel, President's Office, CAPS, the Faculty and Staff Help Center, Vaden Health Center and the Department of Public Safety). This Team may coordinate the assessment of any situation where there is a concern for risk of potential threat or violence, and may provide additional assessment of situations to determine if further resources and actions are needed.

b. Threats of Violence: Responsibilities

(1) Any individual who experiences or observes a threat of violence should immediately report the incident to his/her supervisor, local Human Resources office, or the police.
(2) The supervisor or other person notified calls the appropriate local Human Resources Office or Employee and Labor Relations Representative as soon as possible.
(3) Local management should attempt to ensure the safety of other employees.
(4) Employee and Management Services, along with the supervisor, conduct an investigation of the alleged threat, including interviewing any witnesses.
(5) Based on the finding of the investigation, appropriate action, disciplinary or otherwise, is taken.

c. Acts of Violence Not Involving Injuries or Weapons: Responsibilities

(1) The employee should report the incident immediately to his/her supervisor, the local Human Resources Office, or the police.
(2) The supervisor or other person notified calls the local Human Resources Office HRM or Employee and Labor Relations Representative as soon as possible.
(3) Employee and Management Services or its designee coordinates, if appropriate, with the Help Center counselors for intervention, consultation, or referral for clinical evaluation or treatment.
(4) Employee and Management Services or its designee conducts an independent University investigation of the incident and, in conjunction with management, takes appropriate action, disciplinary or otherwise.

d. Acts of Violence Involving Injuries or Weapons: Responsibilities

(1) Any person observing an incident should call 9-911 first, then, if at the Medical School call Medical School Security (650) 723-7222, and if at SLAC call the SLAC Main Gate Security Officer (650) 926-5555, and then notify local management.
(2) Local management should attempt to ensure the safety of other employees.
(3) Management or employees should not intervene unless, in their best judgment, (a) the situation is too critical to wait for law enforcement officials and, (b) they believe intervention would be successful.
(4) Once Medical School Security, SLAC Site Security, or Stanford Department of Public Safety are notified, they coordinate with the appropriate law-enforcement agencies and assist in controlling the situation.
(5) Separate from any criminal investigation that the police may conduct, Employee and Management Services or its designee takes the lead for the University in conducting an independent investigation into the incident and, in conjunction with management, takes appropriate action, disciplinary or otherwise.
(6) If necessary, the Help Center counselors arrange to work with victims and observers of the incident.

Back to top

2.2.12 Out-of-State Employees

Last updated on:
12/14/2012
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
23.11

This Guide Memo presents policy for hiring and/or reassigning out-of-state employees. 

Authority: 

This Guide Memo was approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to all Stanford University employees, including SLAC and employees covered by collective bargaining unit agreements.

1. Definition

An "out-of-state employee" is defined as an employee of Stanford University whose primary work site is located outside the state of California. All individuals defined in Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions, are considered employees for the purpose of this Guide Memo. Consultants and contractors are not covered by this Memo.

Back to top

2. Policy

a. Applicable laws
Employees outside the state of California and Stanford University as their employer are subject to all employment-related laws of the state or foreign nation in which they work.

State taxes, employment tax, and workers compensation provisions vary from state to state. University Payroll is primarily responsible for compliance with these various rules. Therefore, departments must notify Payroll immediately of any prospective arrangements involving Stanford employees outside the state of California by submitting a HelpSU ticket (Category: Financial Management, Request Type: Payroll).

The existence of Stanford University employees in a state outside California may trigger additional compliance requirements besides those relating to employment. Therefore, the hiring or reassignment of employees to positions outside California must be supported by an important University business purpose and not be merely an accommodation to the employee.

b. Approval
Approval of the hire or reassignment must be obtained in advance in writing from the responsible Vice Provost, Vice President (or similar level equivalent to the highest administrative person within the organizational unit), or his/her designee, identifying the key University business reasons for the assignment.

c. Payroll
Notify University Payroll of the out-of-state assignment in advance of the start of work outside of California by sending a completed Approval of Out-of-State Employee Approval form to the Payroll Office. 

d. Administrative costs
Administrative costs per capita for out-of-state employees are high due to the extraordinary costs to assure compliance and, in some cases, liability for unemployment and disability benefits. Therefore, a one-time $500 fee is charged to the assigning department for each new out-of-state employee on payroll, to be assessed when the assignment begins. Departments are also charged $200 each year for each out-of-state employee. Failure to report out-of-state employees to University Payroll in a timely manner may result in compliance penalties, which will be assessed to the assigning department.

e. Benefits
The choices of health and welfare benefits plans may be more limited for employees who work outside of the Bay Area. You can find more information at http://benefits.stanford.edu.

f. When Employee Works in California
Notify University Payroll of any days that the out-of state employee is present in California on Stanford business. Compensation earned on such days is considered California-sourced taxable income regardless of employee’s state of residence and is subject to all California tax provisions. Use the Out-of-State Employee Days Worked in California form to report annually the number of days an out-of-state worker works in California.

Back to top

3. For More Information

Contact University Payroll by submitting a HelpSU ticket (Category: Financial Management, Request Type: Payroll).

Back to top

2.3.1 Survivor Benefit Plans

Last updated on:
02/10/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
27.1
Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources.

Applicability: 

All faculty and staff are subject to this policy if appointed 50% time or more for a period of at least six consecutive months. For specific questions, contact Stanford Benefits at (650) 736-2985 and press option 9. For policies that apply to employees covered by collective bargaining agreements, refer to the agreements between Stanford University and SEIU Higher Education Workers Local 2007 and Stanford University and the Stanford Deputy Sheriffs' Association. Agreements can be found at Labor Relations & Collective Bargaining

1. Group Life and Accidental Death & Dismemberment Insurance

For information about coverage, eligibility, enrollment, benefits and costs, go to Stanford Benefits

Back to top

2. Business Travel Accident Insurance

a. Brochure
The plan brochure for this insurance is available in the Benefits Resource Library online; just type "BTA" in the Keywords or Title search box of the webpage.

b. Guide to Supervisors
In the event of the accidental death, dismemberment or permanent total disability of any employee while engaged in the performance of authorized travel for the University, the employee's department should immediately contact Stanford Benefits at (650) 736-2985, Option #9. An affidavit will be required from the University certifying that the travel was undertaken for an official University purpose. In processing expense reimbursement vouchers for official travel, supervisors should remind employees that individually purchased "trip life insurance" is not a reimbursable expense because the University provides this automatic blanket travel accident insurance.

Back to top

3. Social Security Survivor Payments

Under some circumstances the Social Security program, which covers all regular Stanford employees, provides payments upon the death of an employee. Information about these benefits is available at http://www.ssa.gov/ or at a local office of the Social Security Administration.

Back to top

4. Stanford Retirement Plan Survivor Benefits

Under some circumstances, the University's retirement plans include benefits for survivors or beneficiaries when the employee dies before retirement. Refer to the applicable Summary Plan Description available at http://benefits.stanford.edu/ or call (650) 736-2985 and press option 9.

Back to top

5. Workers' Compensation Survivor Payments

Death benefits will be paid to surviving dependents if an injury results in death. Death benefits paid to survivors are set by State law according to the number of dependents. Contact the Risk Management Officeat (650) 723-7400 for assistance.

Back to top

2.3.2 Health Plans

Last updated on:
03/15/2010
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
27.2

The University provides Health Plans for eligible employees. This Guide Memo provides details on eligibility and links to further information.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to regular employees (as defined in Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions. For policies that apply to employees covered by collective bargaining agreements, refer to the agreements between Stanford University and SEIU Higher Education Workers Local 2007 and Stanford University and the Stanford Deputy Sheriffs' Association. Agreements can be found at Labor Relations & Collective Bargaining. While these policy statements are applicable to all University staff, the SLAC Human Resources Department should be contacted for specific information relating to SLAC employees.

1. Eligibility

All faculty and staff are eligible to enroll if hired/appointed to a 50% time or more position for a period of at least six consecutive months (four months or more for bargaining unit employees). Eligible dependentsmay also be enrolled. Additional information is available at Stanford Benefits. Exceptions (not eligible): Temporary employees, employees working less than 50% time, Stanford students, visiting scholars and postdoctoral fellows.

Back to top

2. Coverage Available to Faculty and Staff

a. Medical Plan
The University makes available to each eligible employee and official University retiree several medical plan choices. These medical plan choices are described in the Summary Plan Descriptions (SPD) and the Evidence of Coverage (EOC) at Stanford Benefits or by calling (650) 736-2985 (press option 9). The SPD is the official University communication on the plan and contains information on eligibility, enrollment and participants' rights under the plan and federal law, and certain other subjects. Each carrier's EOC describes the carrier's benefits and how the plan operates.

b. Dental Plan
The University offers a choice of dental plans, covering certain expenses for necessary dental coverage for enrolled employees. The Summary Plan Description is available at Stanford Benefits or by calling (650) 736-2985 (press option 9). It includes information on eligibility, benefits and participants' rights under each plan and federal law, and certain other subjects.

Back to top

3. Enrollment

a. New Hire
Faculty and staff may enroll themselves and dependents in a medical and/or dental plan by completing the online enrollment at Stanford Benefits during the first 31 calendar days after their hire/appointment date.

b. Change in family status
Mid-year enrollments and changes are allowed (as defined by federal law) within 31 calendar days of a qualified family status change. For more information, go to Stanford Benefits and click on Life Event.

c. Open Enrollment
Stanford has an annual open enrollment period, usually in November, to enable employees to review and/or change their benefit options. Elections are effective at the beginning of the new plan year, January 1.

Back to top

4. Stanford Contributions to Health Plans

For the current University contributions to medical and dental plans go to Stanford Benefits and click on Resource Library.

Back to top

5. Privacy

Stanford's ERISA (Employee Retirement Income Security Act) benefits plans operate in compliance with the Privacy Rule under the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996 (HIPAA), which governs the treatment of individually identifiable health information.

Back to top

2.3.3 Tuition Privileges

Last updated on:
12/15/2009
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
27.4

This Guide Memo describes a tuition grant program for children of faculty and staff and auditing privileges for Stanford University courses.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice Provost for Student Affairs and the Vice President of Human Resources.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to all Stanford employees except those covered by collective bargaining agreements. For benefits applicable to employees covered by collective bargaining agreements, refer to the applicable agreement at Labor Relations & Collective Bargaining.  

1. Tuition Grant Program for Children of Faculty or Staff

Stanford University has a program under which eligible faculty and staff may receive financial assistance toward the cost of post-high school education for their children. "Tuition Grant Program (TGP) Guidelines" provides information about eligibility, coverage, benefits, and application procedures. It is available from http://hreap.stanford.edu/tgp.html, or call (650) 736-2985 (local) or (877) 905-2985 (toll-free) and press the option for TGP. Schools and divisions at their discretion may provide tuition assistance to other staff (not to exceed the benefit provided by the tuition grant program). That tuition assistance is taxable and will be reported as income to the employee.

Back to top

2. Auditing Stanford Courses

a. Courses Available
It is necessary to limit the audit privilege to lecture courses. Auditing is not feasible and will not be authorized for courses which involve individual instruction such as creative writing, acting, studio art, music practice, language practice (grammar or conversation), seminars, and courses with laboratories.

b. Eligibility to Audit With Waiver of Fees
The usual fee for auditing will be waived for faculty members and for spouses and same-sex domestic partners of faculty and regular employees, and also for regular employees when the course will improve the employee's efficiency on the job.The children of faculty and staff are not eligible to audit classes with a waiver of fees.

c. Procedures
Registration forms for auditing are available at the Student Services Center in Tresidder Memorial Union. All auditors must obtain the course instructor's permission to audit. Staff employees must also obtain written permission from the department head stating that the course will improve the employee's effectiveness and that time off is approved if needed. All persons requesting to audit will be required to present their Stanford I.D. card at the time they register.

Back to top

3. Staff Development and Training

Information about tuition assistance and other training and development programs for regular employees is provided in Guide Memo 2.1.12: Staff Development Program.

Back to top

2.3.4 University Housing Programs

Last updated on:
03/15/2010
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
27.5

This Guide Memo provides information on University housing programs available to eligible faculty (and certain executive staff positions as designated by the Provost's Office).

Authority: 

Approved by the Provost.

Applicability: 

Information about eligibility for University Housing Programs can be found on the Faculty Staff Housing website or by calling (650) 725-6893.

1. Purpose

The purpose of the University's housing programs is to further Stanford's objectives of teaching and research. Access to affordable housing is essential if the University is to recruit and retain outstanding faculty. University housing programs available to faculty (and certain senior staff positions as designated by the Provost's Office) are designed to mitigate the effect of the high cost of local housing in a cost effective manner with available financial, administrative and land resources.

Back to top

2. Responsibility

Faculty Staff Housing (FSH) administers the University's housing programs, and monitors eligibility requirements and guidelines for the programs.

Back to top

3. Policies and Procedures

To qualify for University housing programs, one must meet the criteria for an Eligible Person. Information about current housing programs and eligibility criteria is available from the FSH website. You may contact FSH by calling (650) 725-6893 or emailing fshousing@stanford.edu. The Faculty Staff Housing office is located at Owen House, 552 Lane A, Stanford, CA 94305-8630. Programs and eligibility requirements are subject to modification or discontinuation without notice by the University.

Back to top

2.3.5 Disability and Family Leaves

Last updated on:
01/01/2015
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
27.7

This Guide Memo describes medical and other disability-type leaves, and the coordination of these types of leave with University benefit plans.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources.

Applicability: 

Applies to regular Stanford University employees not covered by collective bargaining agreements, regular Academic Staff - Research, and regular Academic Staff - Libraries. (The term "regular employee" is defined in Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions.) For policies that apply to employees covered by a collective bargaining agreement, refer to the agreements at Labor Relations & Collective Bargaining.  

Notes:

  • Procedures for SLAC employees may vary.
  • Faculty may consult the Faculty Handbook, chapter 3.
  • See information on each disability plan for specific details about plan eligibility.

1. Overview

Eligible University employees can participate in a variety of family and medical leaves (also known as Family and Medical Leave Act, and referred to in this document as FMLA) and disability benefit plans. Policies are described in this document. Before you go out, consult your local Human Resources Office and Stanford Benefits or (650) 736-2985, option 4. Important information regarding the scope and use of the disability benefit plans is included in the relevant plan brochures available on the Stanford Benefits website.

a. Specific Process for a filing a disability claim:
(1) The employee reports the absence (or planned absence) to his/her immediate supervisor.
(2) The employee calls Liberty Mutual's toll-free number, (800) 896-9375, or uses www.mylibertyclaim.com to initiate a claim. Liberty Mutual will inform the employee if there are any forms to submit.
(3) If the employee does not call Liberty Mutual, it is the department's responsibility to notify Liberty Mutual.
(4) Continue steps per general process for all disabilities in section 1.b.

b. General Process:

(1) Timeliness
Employees must give notice of anticipated family or medical leaves and file claims for disability plan benefits as soon as feasible. Notice should be given to the immediate supervisor, the HR Disability Leave Administrator and Liberty Mutual. For work-related leaves, refer to section 4, Workers' Compensation. For example, an employee who will be hospitalized on a pre-determined date should contact Liberty Mutual before entering the hospital. In addition, the employee must submit the signed Authorization to Release Information card to his/her physician's office as soon as possible. No disability benefits can be paid until Liberty Mutual has received the completed physician's form with appropriate verification of the disability. If not hospitalized, the employee still needs to report the absence to Liberty Mutual and his/her supervisor.

(2) Workers' Compensation
When the employee's disability is, or may be, work-related, the department should report the circumstances to the Risk Management Office within 24 hours of the employee's injury. See section 4, Workers' Compensation. SLAC employees should refer to SLAC Human Resources for the relevant reporting requirements.

(3) The HR Disability Leave Administrator
The local HR Disability Leave Administrator notifies and coordinates with Disability and Leave Services (DLS) in Human Resources. The local HR Disability Leave Administrator works with the employee, his/her supervisor and DLS to ensure that information is communicated in a timely manner.

(4) DLS
DLS updates the employee's Axess/PeopleSoft record and works with Stanford's benefits vendors and the local Disability Leave HR Contact. For more information see the HR Data Services website.

(5) Supervisor's Ongoing Communication
The supervisor (or local Human Resources Office on the supervisor's behalf) should routinely check the determination made on the employee's claim for short-term (VDI/SDI) disability benefit or Workers' Compensation benefit payments. The supervisor should arrange with the employee to be kept informed about the estimated return to work date for an employee who is absent for an extended period. If the employee is unable to advise the supervisor personally about his/her inability to return to work, the supervisor should make other arrangements to be kept advised of the status of the employee's return to work.

(6) Medical Certification
The employee must call Liberty Mutual to initiate a leave request and open a disability or FTD claim. Liberty Mutual will work with the employee to obtain the necessary certification from a health care provider. The employee must provide certification within 15 days to Liberty Mutual. Certification is also required to request a leave extension.

(7) Length of Leave

  • Maximum Duration
    Except as otherwise required by law, the maximum duration that a regular employee is eligible to be on an approved medical leave of absence due to a non-work-related injury or illness is no more than 12 consecutive months, inclusive of any periods of full- or part-time leave, Family Medical leave, pregnancy disability leave, or leave for personal reasons. If an employee is unable to return to work at the end of an approved medical leave, the employee will be terminated. Twelve months of leave is not guaranteed. The maximum duration of leave will be determined based on the particular circumstances of the situation, including the operational needs of the department, the number of times extensions of leave have been previously granted, and any disability accommodation leave that may have been granted.
  • Exceptions
    If a proposed leave will result in a total period of absence exceeding 12 months, prior approval is required from the local Human Resources Office and in concurrence with the Vice President of Human Resources (or his/her designee). Requests for exceptions must be submitted in writing to the local Human Resources Office. Such exceptions are likely to be approved only in limited circumstances.

Back to top

2. Family and Medical Leaves

a. Introduction
Family Medical Leave is leave authorized by the federal Family and Medical Leave Act (FMLA) and/or the California Family Rights Act (CFRA). Certain leaves for members of the armed forces and their families are outlined in Guide Memo 2.1.18. In most cases, FMLA and CFRA run concurrently with each other and with Short-Term Disability Leave, including leave due to work-related illness or injury, and with Family Temporary Disability Leave (FTD). Eligible employees are assured up to 12 weeks unpaid leave during a rolling 12-month period that begins on the verified FMLA start date. "Assured" means the department cannot refuse the leave when any one of the following situations is appropriately verified:

  • The birth of a child or the placement of a child with the employee for adoption or foster care.
    Limitations: Leave for birth or placement of a child for adoption or foster care should generally be taken in blocks of time (two weeks minimum) and must be concluded within the first 12 months after the birth or placement. A request for baby bonding leave in less than two weeks' duration may be granted on any two occasions.
  • A serious health condition that makes the employee unable to perform his or her job.
  • The serious health condition of a spouse, same-sex domestic partner, parent or child that requires the employee's absence from work to care for the ill family member.

Definition of "Serious Health Condition"
Serious health condition (as defined by the Dept. of Labor) means an illness, injury, impairment, or physical or mental condition that involves either:

  • Inpatient care (i.e., an overnight stay) in a hospital, hospice, or residential medical-care facility, including any period of incapacity (i.e., inability to work, attend school, or perform other regular daily activities) or subsequent treatment in connection with such inpatient care; or
  • Continuing treatment by a health care provider, which includes: 

1. A period of incapacity lasting more than three consecutive, full calendar days, and any subsequent treatment or period of incapacity relating to the same condition that also includes:

a. treatment two or more times by or under the supervision of a health care provider (i.e., in-person visits, the first within 7 days and both within 30 days of the first day of incapacity); or
b. one treatment by a health care provider (i.e., an in-person visit within 7 days of the first day of incapacity) with a continuing regimen of treatment (e.g., prescription medication, physical therapy); or

2. Any period of incapacity related to pregnancy or for prenatal care. A visit to the health care provider is not necessary for each absence; or
3. Any period of incapacity or treatment for a chronic serious health condition that continues over an extended period, requires periodic visits (at least twice a year) to a health care provider, and may involve occasional episodes of incapacity. A visit to a health care provider is not necessary for each absence; or
4. A period of incapacity that is permanent or long-term due to a condition for which treatment may not be effective. Only supervision by a health care provider is required, rather than active treatment; or
5. Any absences to receive multiple treatments for restorative surgery or for a condition that would likely result in a period of incapacity of more than three days if not treated.

b. Eligibility
Employees working in the U.S. are eligible if employed by Stanford at least one year and have worked at least 1,250 hours (paid time off, paid leave and unpaid leave not included) during the 12 months before the start of the requested leave.

c. Notification
Employees are expected to provide 30 days advance notice to their manager when the need for leave is foreseeable (i.e., anticipated date of birth, adoption or planned medical treatment). When advance notice is not possible, employees should give as much advance notice as feasible. If advance notice is not provided when the employee had sufficient prior knowledge of the need for leave, the department may deny leave until 30 days have elapsed. Such denial should be made only when operationally necessary, and always in consultation with the local Human Resources Office. Employees are required to give a minimum of two days notice if the return to work will be later or earlier than the expected return date.

d. Medical Certification
The employee must call Liberty Mutual to request FML/CFRA leave. Liberty Mutual will work with the employee to obtain certification from a health care provider that the employee, his/her child, parent, spouse, or same-sex domestic partner in fact has a serious health condition, the condition's expected duration, and the need for the employee to attend to the family member. The employee must provide certification within 15 days to Liberty Mutual. Certification is also required to request a leave extension.

e. Intermittent Leave
Under some circumstances, employees may take FMLA leave intermittently (taking leave in separate blocks of time for a single qualifying reason) or on a reduced schedule (reducing the employee's usual weekly or daily work schedule). When leave is needed for planned medical treatment, the employee must make a reasonable effort to schedule treatment to avoid unduly disrupting department operations.

For birth and care of a child or "baby bonding" under California (CFRA) law, an employee may use intermittent leave in segments of two weeks. A request for baby bonding leave of less than two weeks duration may be granted on any two occasions.

Back to top

3. Pregnancy and Disability Leave

California law currently provides eligible employees up to four months off for pregnancy disability leave (PDL). The first three months of PDL run concurrently with the employee's federal FMLA entitlement. Following PDL, the employee may be eligible to use up to 12 weeks of California Family Rights Act (CFRA) leave. Verified pregnancy disability leave does not count against an employee's California Family Rights Act (CFRA) leave entitlement unless the employee has exhausted the maximum pregnancy disability leave permitted by law.

Back to top

a. Introduction
Under California law, eligible employees are entitled to a paid leave of absence up to 30 days for the purpose organ donation and up to 5 days for bone marrow donation. The leave may be taken in increments during any one-year period. The one-year period starts on the first day of leave. Use of accrued time for a portion of the leave will be required (see section 4.d). Periods of authorized Paid Organ Donor leave do not run concurrently with either FMLA or CFRA leave and are not counted against an employee's annual FMLA/CFRA entitlement.

b. Eligibility
The employee must complete at least 90 days of service with the University before requesting Paid Organ Donor leave.

c. Medical Certification
The employee must call Liberty Mutual to request a Paid Organ Donor leave and provide written medical verification that he /she is an organ or bone marrow donor and the medical necessity for the donation. Liberty Mutual must receive the certification within 15 days of the Paid Organ Donor leave request.

d. Pay During Leave
During the period of Paid Organ Donor leave, employees will be required to use 5 days of accrued time for bone marrow donation and 10 days for organ donation. Once the amount of required accrued time is used, the employee will be on paid leave of absence for the remainder of the Paid Organ Donor leave.

Back to top

5. Workers' Compensation

a. Introduction
The purpose of this coverage is to provide partial income continuation during absences resulting from work-related injuries or illnesses, and payment of necessary medical, surgical, and hospital services for such injuries and illnesses. The University pays the full cost of Workers' Compensation coverage. Workers' Compensation payments are a non-taxable benefit paid directly to the employee by Zurich North America, a third party administrator.

b. Eligibility
All employees of the University, including student employees, staff, and faculty, are covered by Workers' Compensation. Work-related disability provisions are applicable to temporary, student and casual employees; however, the charging (or not charging) of vacation and/or sick time is not applicable.

c. Reporting and Recording Work Injuries and Related Absences From Work
Departments have additional requirements for reporting all work-related injuries and illnesses. See Guide Memo 7.6.1: Accident and Incident Reporting.

d. Payments
The Workers' Compensation administrator (Zurich) normally pays benefits from the fourth day of the disability period or the first day of hospitalization, whichever occurs first. If the employee is out of work more than 14 days (need not be consecutive) with a doctor's authorization, the three-day waiting period is waived and retroactive payments will be made so that payments start with the first day of disability. For Workers' Compensation, Stanford charges up to the initial five full work days of absence (days need not be consecutive) of an accepted claim to work-related disability paid leave. The University will augment the Workers' Compensation benefit with salary during this period. An employee's sick time or vacation is not charged for these days of absence. By state law, an employee may not receive both Workers' Compensation benefits and full pay. Therefore, employees are required to reimburse the University for any Workers' Compensation benefits paid for the first five days including any associated holidays, because the University has already paid the employee for the time. For part-time employees, the full day is prorated based on the employee's normal work schedule.

e. Delayed Claims
If acceptance of a claim is delayed, the initial five full days of absence (need not be consecutive) are charged to accumulated sick time and the claim is handled as a short-term non-work-related disability. If accumulated sick time is exhausted, the time is charged to accrued PTO, floating holiday and vacation, in that order. If the employee does not have enough accrued time, the remaining hours are unpaid. If the claim is then accepted under Workers' Compensation, any sick, PTO, floating holiday, and /or vacation taken during the first five days will be restored.

f. Supplementing Workers' Compensation Payments
Employees may receive both paid leave and disability plan benefits concurrently, not to exceed the employee's base pay. After the initial five work days of disability, accumulated sick, PTO, floating holiday and vacation time will be used, in that order, to supplement Workers' Compensation benefits. Thus, the employee continues to receive income equivalent to full pay.

g. Role of Disability and Leave Services
Disability and Leave Services (DLS) updates Axess/PeopleSoft HRMS records each pay period for all employees on absences due to work-related disability. DLS makes certain that combined income from disability payments and Stanford does not exceed pre-disability pay and keeps accurate records of leave time used.

h. More Information
Details regarding claims procedures, accident reports, and related matters may be obtained from the Risk Management Office, (650) 723-7400, Workers' Compensation Benefits. Also, Guide Memo 7.6.1: Accident and Incident Reporting, has additional information about Workers' Compensation. SLAC employees should refer to SLAC Human Resources

Back to top

6. Income During Family and Medical Leaves

a. Use of Accrued Time
Accrued time consists of sick time, PTO for the calendar year, floating holiday for the calendar year and vacation, to be used in that order. During medical leaves (including Workers' Compensation, FMLA, CFRA and PDL), the University will use an employee's accrued time to maintain the employee's base pay. For FTD leaves, please see section 6.d. When the employee is also receiving disability benefits, DLS ensures that combined income from both the disability vendor and the University does not exceed pre-disability pay. Accrued time is used until the employee goes off disability, including Worker's Compensation, or until all balances are exhausted. The use of some forms of accrued time is at the employee's option during certain FMLA leaves. If an employee chooses not to use accrued time during a medical leave, the employee must contact the department's HR Disability Leave Administrator or HR department to complete the Disability/Leave Request Form. An employee's request to opt out of the payment practice can only be for future pay cycles and not retroactively. Disability and Leave Services (DLS) administers the employee's records in the Human Resources Management System (Axess/PeopleSoft HRMS). Procedures at SLAC will differ.

Thus, if the employee has accrued time and is also receiving disability benefits, the employee will receive disability checks from Liberty Mutual and/or Zurich and reduced paychecks from the University until his/her accrued time has been exhausted. Once the accrued time is exhausted, the employee will only receive disability checks from the disability vendor for the duration of the approved leave.

b. Overpayment
If an employee has been overpaid, the employee must reimburse the University for the overpayment either by direct payment or through payroll deduction.

c. Voluntary Disability Insurance / Short-Term Disability
(1) Introduction
The University's VDI plan is state-approved to take the place of SDI by providing benefits that are better than those of the state's plan. The VDI plan provides partial income continuation for periods of disability of up to 52 weeks or a maximum dollar amount. This plan is described in the Statement of Coverage available on the Stanford Benefits website or by calling (650) 736-2985, press option 9. For information on SDI, go to the Employment Development Department's website at www.edd.ca.gov.
(2) Eligibility
Faculty and staff based in California are covered for short-term disabilities by either the University's voluntary disability insurance plan (VDI) or State Disability Insurance (SDI) if the employee opted out of VDI. Non-California employees are covered under a separate 13-week short-term disability plan (STD).
(3) Benefit Waiting Period
Refer to the Voluntary Disability Insurance Statement of Coverage on the Benefits website at http://benefits.stanford.edu, or call (650) 736-2985, press option 9.
(4) Taxability
Short-term disability (VDI/SDI) payments are non-taxable benefits. These non-taxable benefits are paid directly to the employee by Liberty Mutual.

d. Family Temporary Disability (FTD)
(1) Introduction
This California state program provides partial income replacement during absences from work to care for seriously ill family members (parent, child, spouse, registered domestic partner, grandparent, grandchild, sibling, or parent-in-law) or to bond with a new child.
(2) Eligibility Faculty and staff based in California contribute to a Family Temporary Disability Insurance Benefit (FTD) according to state law as part of the VDI deduction.
(3) Vacation usage
Employees must take two weeks of earned but unused vacation leave before receiving FTD insurance benefits. One of these vacation weeks can be used during the seven-day waiting period. If an employee does not have two weeks accrued vacation time, vacation time will be used to the nearest full day increment up to the two-week requirement. If less than one week of vacation is available, PTO or floating holiday will be used for the remaining portion of the waiting period. If no PTO or floating holiday is available, the remaining portion of the waiting period will be without pay. For a new mother who has received pregnancy disability benefits due to pregnancy/maternity disability the two-week vacation period will apply, however, there is no additional waiting period for bonding.
(4) Supplementing FTD Payments
During Family Temporary Disability Leaves the University will use an employee's accrued time to maintain the employee's base pay during times when the employee is receiving FTD benefit payments as described below: 

  • In cases of FTD Bonding Leaves, eligible accrued time consists of PTO for the calendar year, floating holiday and vacation, in that order.
  • In cases of FTD Family Care Leaves, eligible accrued time consists of Family Sick Leave, as restricted by the FSL policy, PTO for the calendar year, floating holiday and vacation, in that order.

This accrued time is used until the employee goes off approved Family Temporary Disability Wage Replacement (FTD), or until all balances are exhausted. Disability and Leave Services (DLS) administers the employee's records in the human resources management system (Axess/PeopleSoft HRMS). DLS ensures that combined income from both the disability vendor and the University does not exceed pre-disability pay. Procedures at SLAC will differ.
Thus, if the employee has accrued time, the employee will receive FTD benefit checks from Liberty Mutual, and a reduced paycheck from the University while on approved FTD until the employee's applicable accrued time has been exhausted. Once the applicable accrued time is exhausted, the employee will only receive the FTD benefit checks from Liberty Mutual for the duration of the approved leave.
(5) Overpayment
If an employee has been overpaid, the employee must reimburse the University for the overpayment either by direct payment or through payroll deduction.
(6) Taxability
FTD is a non-taxable benefit for state and FICA, but is a taxable benefit for Federal tax purposes.
(7) More Information
The benefit is described at http://benefits.stanford.edu/ Forms are available on this website in the Resource Library.

e. Long-Term Disability (LTD)
(1) Introduction
This plan provides partial income continuation during longer periods of disability. LTD benefits could start after a disability period of 90 consecutive days. After a disability period of 15 months, the plan's benefits are more restricted because a more stringent definition of "disability" is used.
(2) Eligibility
Employees whose approved disability continues past 90 consecutive days may be eligible for Long-Term Disability. The disability vendor provides the employee with the appropriate information when the employee's disability period approaches 90 days.
(3) Taxability
Long-term disability benefits are taxable for federal and state, non-taxable for FICA.
(4) More Information
The Summary Plan Description for the Long-Term Disability Plan provides information about coverage, definition of disability, and benefits. It is available in the Resource Library of the Stanford Benefits website.

Back to top

7. Benefits During Disability Periods

a. Health and Life Benefits
(1) Paid Leave
There will be no change in benefit deductions. Employees on paid FMLA, FTD, VDI or Workers' Compensation will have their applicable benefit contributions deducted from their reduced paychecks. See (3) for LTD.
(2) Unpaid Leave
Employees on unpaid FTD, VDI, Workers' Compensation, and all LTD participants (paid or unpaid) will have the same University benefit contributions as when actively employed. The employee will be billed for the employee portion of the costs on an after-tax basis on the 7th and 22nd
(3) LTD and Part-Time Work
If an employee continues to receive LTD benefits, but is able to work part-time, there will be no change in benefit contributions. Employees will have applicable benefit contributions deducted from their reduced paychecks. of each month.

b. Retirement Savings Plan (SCRP)
(1) Paid Leave
When an employee continues to receive pay for accrued sick, PTO, floating holiday and vacation, retirement savings plan benefit accruals and/or contributions continue, subject to plan provisions.
(2) LTD Plus Paid Leave
Employees who supplement LTD benefits with accrued time (e.g., sick, vacation, PTO, floating holiday) will have that paid time counted as earnings for University retirement savings plans, subject to plan provisions.

c. Retiree Medical Eligibility
During the first 90 days on Short-Term Disability or Workers' Compensation, time is counted toward official retiree medical eligibility. After 90 days on LTD, the time does not count toward official retiree medical eligibility.

d. Benefits in Cases of Termination
(1) Medical and Dental Coverage
A regular employee whose University employment is terminated while the employee is receiving benefit payments from a Short-Term Disability plan or Workers' Compensation plan may continue medical and dental coverages at the employee's expense through COBRA for 18 months, or until LTD is approved. If LTD is approved, the employee may contact Stanford Benefits, for information on their eligibility for medical and life insurance plans.
(2) Life Insurance
Life insurance portability or conversion to an individual plan is available. The employee should contact Stanford Benefits at the time of termination for the appropriate forms.

Back to top

8. For More Information

Consult with your local Human Resources Office or the Stanford Benefits website. General questions about State Disability Insurance (SDI) and Workers' Compensation should be referred to the appropriate government office.

Back to top

2.3.6 University Resources

Last updated on:
06/15/2007
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
27.8

This Guide Memo lists some of the services and resources available for faculty, staff and students, and gives references for obtaining additional information.

Authority: 

Approved by the President.

1. Policy Statement

Stanford University provides resources and services to support employees and students in balancing their work/family/personal lives.

Back to top

2. Applicability

The services and resources are available to Stanford faculty, staff and students; some services are also available to the families of faculty, students and staff.

Back to top

3. Family Support

The WorkLife Center supports Stanford community members in all the stages of family life, providing information on education, campus and community programs and services for a variety of issues. See WorkLife Center for more information.

Back to top

4. Child Care

a. Policy
All matters regarding the provision of child care services on the Stanford University campus must have the concurrence of the Director of the WorkLife Center. On the Stanford campus child care is permitted only in designated Stanford University academic or administrative buildings which are licensed by the State of California, Department of Social Services, Community Care Licensing.

b. Services, Resources and Referrals
Information on campus programs, community child care centers and home-based child care is available from the WorkLife Center, or 650/723-2660.

c. Child Care Grant Program
Information is available from the WorkLife Center, or 650/723-2660.

d. Adoption Expense Reimbursement
Information is available from the WorkLife Center, or 650/723-2660.

Back to top

5. Counseling and Dispute Resolution

a. Human Resources Managers (HRMs)
Human resources managers in each academic school or functional area are responsible for the implementation of Stanford's personnel policies and can also help and advise on personnel matters. To find the human resources manager in your School or area, visit http://uhr.stanford.edu/directors-managers-and-administrators-schools-and-units or call 650/725-8356. If you are in the School of Medicine, call 650/725-8607; if you work at SLAC, call 650/926-2358.

b. Employee & Labor Relations
Employee and Labor Relations provides resources for solving workplace problems, and offers policy interpretation and advice. Your area may also have an Employee Relations Specialist you can contact. See http://elr.stanford.edu/contact-elr or call 650/723-2191. If you are in the School of Medicine, please call 650/725-8607. If you work at SLAC, contact SLAC Employee/Labor Relations at 650/926-2358.

c. The Help Center
Free, confidential counseling, workshops and groups are offered for Stanford faculty, staff and their families. See the Help Center website or call 650/723-4577 for more information

d. Ombuds
Contact the Ombuds' Office and Mediation Center for impartial dispute resolution. See the Office of Ombuds website or call 650/723-3682. If you are in the School of Medicine, please call 650/498-5802.

e. Dispute Resolution
Formal Grievance, Appeal, and Disciplinary Processes are listed at the University Human Resources website, or can be obtained from the Sexual Harassment Policy Office.

Back to top

6. Sexual Harassment and Assault

See Administrative Guide Memos 2.2.4: Sexual Harassment and Consensual Sexual or Romantic Relationships, and 2.2.5: Sexual Misconduct and Sexual Assault, for policy and resources.

Back to top

7. University Privacy Officer

The University Privacy Officer is responsible for Stanford's compliance with the Privacy Rule under the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996 (HIPAA), which governs the treatment of individually identifiable health information.

Back to top

8. Additional Resources

a. Diversity & Access Office
For information about Cultural Centers, Disability Access, Staff Groups, and the University's Affirmative Action plans, see the Diversity & Access Office call 650/725-0326.

b. Public Safety
Stanford's Department of Public Safety is a multi-service agency providing law enforcement, security, safety, crime prevention and emergency services on the Stanford campus 24 hours a day. See the Stanford's Department of Public Safety or call 650/723-9633. At the School of Medicine, contact the Stanford Medical Center Security Services at 650/723-7222.

c. Recreation
Consult the Stanford University Home Page, for further information.

d. Other Resources
Consult http://www.stanford.edu/about/administration/ for a complete listing of University centers, services and programs.

Back to top

2.4.1 Visas for and Employment of Foreign Nationals

Last updated on:
06/15/2009
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
28.1

This Guide Memo contains policies on obtaining entry visas for foreign nationals visiting Stanford and links to web pages detailing procedural information.

Authority: 

Approved by the President.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to Stanford faculty, academic and regular staff, and non-matriculated students, including the SLAC National Accelerator Laboratory, except where SLAC maintains its own services. Consult SLAC Human Resources for information about SLAC.

1. Responsibilities

a. Departments responsible for filing a visa petition on behalf of a prospective foreign national seeking employment with the University. The host department will gather the necessary information, complete the required forms and secure the necessary departmental/school approvals in order to submit the completed petition to the Bechtel International Center (I-Center). See Working with the I-Center for detailed procedures for each type of application and petition.

NOTE: Appointments or employment must be approved and confirmed before visa petitions or certificates will be prepared. See Guide Memo 2.1.2: Recruiting & Hiring of Regular Staff Employment of Regular Staff, for hiring information. Immigration status is not to be used as a means to discriminate against foreign nationals.

Information can be found at the following websites:

b. Foreign Scholar Services
Coordinates procedures and provides specific instructions for departments seeking to host or employ foreign faculty, staff or researchers (internationalscholars@stanford.edu)

c. Foreign Student Advisor
Assists students with immigration, social, cultural and adjustment issues. The office is located at Bechtel International Center (internationalstudents@stanford.edu)

d. Local Human Resources Office
Responsible for providing guidance, reviewing and verifying materials prepared by departments for non-academic staff for H-1B visas and submitting completed petitions to Foreign Scholar Services at Bechtel Center. Guidance will also be provided on the processing of a visa petition for academic staff, post docs or faculty.

e. Legal Representation
In the event that, in the opinion of the Foreign Scholar Services Office, an issue requires legal interpretation or advice, the Office of the General Counsel will review the matter and determine whether or how it should be pursued. Departments or individuals may not engage private attorneys to represent the University to government agencies. This policy, however, does not prevent an individual foreign national from retaining legal counsel (and paying for any legal fees incurred as a result) for the purpose of obtaining his or her own legal advice or pursuing a self-sponsored immigrant petition, provided the University is not named as a petitioning employer.

f. Office for International Visitors
Arranges meetings and coordinates programs for short-term visits (usually one day) by international scholars, scientists, University and public delegations, and other official visitors to Stanford University. See http://icenter.stanford.edu/ 

Back to top

2. Special Situations in the Immigration Area

a. Physicians
A physician who is to have patient contact requires a California Medical License or exemption or review letter. Contact the Director of House Staff, Stanford University Hospital, (650) 723-5948, for more information.

b. Volunteers
A foreign national who is not authorized to work in the U.S. cannot volunteer at Stanford in a position for which wages would normally be paid.

c. Dependents
Dependents are the responsibility of the foreign national.

d. Clinical Fellows
Clinical fellows must hold a California license/exemption or review letter.

f. Postdoctoral scholars

g. Green Card/Permanent Residence: The University may sponsor faculty and certain academic and other staff for permanent residence only with the approval of the cognizant dean or vice president. The USCIS processing fees and any legal fees associated with the permanent residence process are the sole responsibility of the foreign national petitioner or applicant unless otherwise agreed in writing by the sponsoring department and the individual with the approval of the cognizant dean or vice president, or his or her designee; provided, however, that, pursuant to Department of Labor regulations, the legal fees and costs associated with any labor certification application submitted in connection with the permanent residency process must be paid by the sponsoring department.

  • Faculty: Tenure-line and tenured faculty are eligible for sponsorship.
  • Academic Staff-Research: Research Associates must hold a continuing appointment ofat least 75% of full-time effort in order to qualify internally for sponsorship for permanentresidence. The individual must meet applicable USCIS criteria to establish a reasonable likelihood of success on the merits. Research Associates with fixed term appointments, or appointments that are continuing but less than 75% FTE will not be sponsored for permanent residence by the University.
  • Regular Staff/Academic Staff-Teaching/Academic Staff-Librarians: The University will not sponsor non-exempt staff or staff with fixed term appointments for permanent residency. Exempt, regular staff, Academic Staff-Teaching and Academic Staff -Librarians are also noteligible for sponsorship of permanent residence except in instances where it is determined by the cognizant dean or vice president, or his or her designee, in consultation with the Office of the General Counsel, that the University has an important business interest in pursuing the petition and the petition has a reasonable chance of succeeding on the merits. Such instances are expected to be rare.

h. Validity of Temporary Petitions: Employment-based nonimmigrant visa petitions such as H-1or O-1 should not exceed the term of the individual's appointment at Stanford. The legal fees and USCIS processing fees associated with these petitions are the sole responsibility of the individual foreign national unless otherwise agreed in writing by the sponsoring department and the foreignnational, with the exception that the $500 USCIS fraud fee associated with H-1B petitions, whichmust be paid by the sponsoring department.

i. Two-year Residence Requirement: Bechtel International Center does not support, administers or review waivers of section 212(e) of the Immigration and Nationality Act (two-year residence requirement).

Back to top

2.4.2 Directories and Distribution Lists

Last updated on:
12/15/2008
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
28.3

The University maintains lists of names, addresses, telephone numbers and electronic mail accounts of individuals and organizations of importance to the University. This Guide Memo sets forth policies concerning use of such University data and describes the major lists used to conduct the University's business.

Authority: 

Approved by the President.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to all Stanford University employees and students.

1. Use of University Distribution Lists and Directories

a. Publicly Available Information

(1) Privacy
Students have rights with respect to their educational records under the Family Educational Rights & Privacy Act (FERPA); see the Student Bulletin, for more information. Additionally, students, affiliates, faculty and staff may have rights to privacy under California Law with regard to certain information used in distribution lists and directories. StanfordYou allows faculty, staff and students to change, protect and preview information published about them in Stanford directories.

(2) Printed Stanford Directory
Contains information about Stanford employees, and students registered for autumn term. It is available free of charge to all continuing Stanford employees and registered students, and for purchase by the general public. By making this information publicly available, the University relinquishes control over the use to which it may be put. Therefore, particular care is taken to carry out individuals' wishes regarding the confidentiality of their home address and telephone number information. See 1.a (1) above.

(3) StanfordWho
Official online directory of Stanford University at http://stanfordwho.stanford.edu/, contains directory information for and about current Stanford students, faculty and staff, including people affiliated with the University, the Hospital and SLAC National Accelerator Laboratory (SLAC). Stanford community members may choose to keep some or all of their contact information private in the public and Stanford-only versions of the directory. See 1.a (1) above.

b. Alumni Directory
The Stanford Alumni Association and other school alumni associations publish an online and print directory that is available to alumni, current students and some University departments for the user's personal use only. It may not be used for commercial purposes.

c. Lists for University Purposes
Distribution lists not publicly available may be used only for University purposes. Such lists include both mailing lists and electronic mail distribution lists including those created by members of the Stanford community from University sources. Use of the distribution lists (including production of listings of file contents, production of mailing labels and online use of electronic mail distribution lists) is authorized only when all of the criteria below are met:

  • The organization is responsible to the President of the University;
  • The use is for official University business; and
  • When such use is consistent with the University responsibilities of the individual requesting or using the list.

University distribution lists may not, for example:

  • Be used for personal, partisan political, or commercial purposes
  • Be provided to persons or entities outside the University
  • Be used for promotional purposes or solicitations by other than Stanford University

d. Department Responsibilities
Departments are responsible for ensuring that any lists they maintain are used in conformity with University policies. In addition to this Guide memo, the following contain applicable policies:

e. Exceptions
Any request for University data for use other than in accordance with this policy must have the approval of the President of the University or his/her designee.

Back to top

2. Person Registry

a. Contents
The Person Registry contains basic identifying information for all faculty, staff, students and affiliates.

b. Original Sources of Information
The Person Registry brings together student information from Student Administration, faculty and staff information from the Human Resources Management System, (HRMS) and sponsored affiliates' information from the SUNet ID system.

c. How Changes are Made
Faculty, staff, students and recent graduates may change their own information using Axess on the web (https://axess.stanford.edu) or by using StanfordYou for service related information (e.g., email settings). See StanfordYou for details. Faculty and staff may change their own personal demographic information in StanfordYou; work-related changes are made in PeopleSoft HRMS by human resources administrators.

d. Outputs
(1) Stanford.Who: See 1.a (3) above.
(2) Listings in the Printed Stanford Directory: See 1.a(2) above.
(3) Axess: A web service that faculty, staff and students use to complete many administrative tasks.
(4) Corrections to Source Systems: Changes made through StanfordYou and Axess go to the Person Registry and then to PeopleSoft Student Administration and HRMS.
(5) Other authorized uses: Data is available to other official University business systems, e.g., the ID Card system and the Library system.

e. More Information
See http://www.stanford.edu/dept/itss/infrastructure/registry/project/ for more details.

Back to top

3. Human Resources Management System

a. Contents
The Human Resources Management System (HRMS) contains detailed demographic and work data on all University employees and retirees.

b. Sources of Information
Information on current employees and retirees comes from PeopleSoft HRMS and is submitted by the employee or retiree's department.

c. How Changes are Made
(1) Employees' Address and Phone Information
StanfordYou allows employees to change and/or keep private information published in Stanford directories. See StanfordYou for more information.
(2) Work-Related Changes
Changes other than the employee's address and telephone information are generated by the department's human resources administrator online in PeopleSoft HRMS.
(3) Retirees
Changes to retiree information are entered by the Benefits Office, on receipt of written instructions from the retiree. Only emeriti are included in StanfordWho.

d. Outputs
(1) Person Registry
PeopleSoft HRMS feeds data to the Person Registry.
(2) Mailing Labels
PeopleSoft HRMS can generate mailing labels for specific populations. For advice on options available, departments should consult with Mail and Delivery Services.

Back to top

4. Student Administration

a. Contents
The PeopleSoft Student Administration database includes student and applicant demographic information, including physical and email addresses.

b. Sources of Information
(1) Central Offices
Including: Bursar's Office, Office of the Registrar, Financial Aid, and Undergraduate Admissions
(2) Academic Departments
Department administrators with appropriate access enter advisors, graduate degree support information, graduate financial support information, and admissions data.

c. How Data Changes are Made
Central offices and academic departments can, in most cases, update data they have originally entered. Students can update personal information through Axess, https://axess.stanford.edu, and StanfordYou.

d. Outputs
(1) Person Registry
PeopleSoft Student Administration sends data to the Person Registry.
(2) Student Records
PeopleSoft and ReportMart Student Administration contain detailed student information including personal addresses. Access to this data requires approval by the appropriate School Dean for academic departments or the Registrar's Office for central office staff, and access to private information is set up only on a "need-to-know" basis. Address rosters, mailing labels, and personal reports can be generated from ReportMart for business purposes.
(3) Applicant Information
Undergraduate and graduate applicant demographic information is contained in PeopleSoft, ReportMars and Stanford's web application vendor's database. Access to this data requires approval by the appropriate School Dean for academic departments or the Registrar's Office for central office staff, and is set up only on a "need-to-know" basis. Mailing labels and personal reports can be generated from the application vendor, ReportMart, and PeopleSoft Student Administration.

Back to top

5. Alumni Information

a. Contents

(1) PostGRADS
The PostGRADS alumni information database includes basic demographic data for Stanford alumni, parents of students, and University friends, including corporations and foundations. This file is used to create mailing lists for the Stanford Magazine and various mailings and solicitations sent by the Office of Development, the Stanford Alumni Association, and the University. The data in this file may be selected according to particular purposes, such as those alumni who received law degrees in 1980. The Office of Development maintains and controls PostGRADS.

(2) Department and School Databases
Some departments and schools keep records of their own alumni and friends. The following restrictions apply to such databases:

  • Schools and departments may receive data changes as a result of their mailings. The datachanges should be sent to alumni.information@stanford.edu for updating in PostGRADS.
  • Any use of PostGRADS information for gift solicitations outside of the Office of Developmentmust be approved in advance by the Senior Director of the Stanford Fund and Operations.
  • Any use of records must be consistent with the purpose communicated to the persons providing such information.

b. Sources of Information
(1) Alumni
Data on current and graduated students is downloaded to PostGRADS from PeopleSoft Student Administration. Although recent graduates can update information in Axess, information is not currently shared between Axess and PostGRADS.
(2) Parents
Data on parents of Stanford students is forwarded to Development Operations and PostGRADS by the Stanford Parents section of the Development Office, which receives the information from the New Undergraduate Student Information Project, administered by the Housing Center.

(3) Stanford Friends
Data on Stanford friends is forwarded to Development Operations by various other sections of the Development Office.

c. How Data Changes are Made
Development Operations enters changes into PostGRADS. Sources of information for changes are returned mail, postal change of address cards, correspondence with individuals on the list, changes made by the individual via their online profile, and notification from a University department with which the individual is associated. Information needed includes:

  • The individual's University ID number
  • The individual's name
  • Change information
  • Name, Stanford department, and phone number of the information source, when the information is not directly from the individual

d. Outputs from File
(1) Lists for Directories
Directories of specific populations published by schools use PostGRADS as source data.
(2) Labels and Address Lists

Departments and schools needing output from PostGRADS should contact their School's Development Office for assistance, after obtaining approval from the Senior Director of the Stanford Fund and Operations. Mailing information will be prepared only for University departments. If an outside vendor provides mailing services, the department is responsible for assuring that the vendor will protect the confidentiality of the data and will gain no rights over the data.

e. Control of File
Only Development Operations may make changes to PostGRADS biographic and gift information. The Managing Director of Development Operations acts as coordinator in resolving questions that may arise in application of University policies on use of PostGRADS.

Back to top

2.4.3 Stanford Identification Cards

Last updated on:
12/14/2012
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
28.4

This Guide Memo lists identification cards used at Stanford University and indicates their uses.

Authority: 

Approved by the President.

1. Purpose of Identification Cards

a. Association with the University
Stanford University makes available a machine-readable photo identification card ("Identification Card" or "ID Card") for Stanford students, faculty, staff and other classes of individuals with a close association to the University, as specified in this policy or by the Provost or the Vice President of Human Resources. The primary purpose of the Identification Card is to identify and document these relationships.

b. Privileges
Access to certain of Stanford's facilities, resources, benefits and services (together referred to as "Privileges") are available only to Stanford's faculty, staff and students with valid ID Cards. Other individuals with ID Cards may also access certain of these Privileges if permitted under this policy, or with the approval of either the Provost or the Vice President of Human Resources.

Back to top

2. Types of Identification Cards

The following types of ID Cards are issued by the Stanford Card Office. A more detailed description of eligibility criteria for and the privileges granted by ID Cards may be found at Stanford IT Services.  This list may be updated from time to time with the approval of the Provost with respect to faculty, students and academic visitors to campus, and by the Vice President of Human Resources with respect to staff and other campus visitors.

a. Student Card: issued to registered students (undergraduates, graduate students, terminal graduates, and Visiting Researchers and Master of Liberal Arts (MLA) students in Continuing Studies).

b. Postdoctoral Card: issued to postdoctoral scholars.

c. Faculty/Staff Card: issued to Stanford professoriate, academic staff, holders of academic appointments in specified policy centers and institutes, non-affiliated Clinician/Educators, Hoover Institution Senior Fellows, "regular" staff, as defined in Admin Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions, and retired and emeritus faculty and staff.

d. Temp/Casual Card: issued to staff and holders of "other teaching titles" who qualify as "casual" or "temporary" as defined in Admin Guide Memo 2.2.2.

e. SLAC Faculty/Staff Card: issued to faculty and regular staff with current appointments at SLAC.

f. SLAC Temp/Casual Card: issued to SLAC staff who qualify as "casual" or "temporary" as defined in Admin Guide Memo 2.2.2.

g. Fellow Card: issued to fellows, interns and other individuals who are invited to participate in a recognized full-time, campus-based Stanford non-degree program of scholarship or learning. Knight, Stegner, CASBS and Stanford Humanities Center Fellows are entitled to Fellow Cards. A Fellow Card will be issued to an individual who provides evidence of admission to a recognized Stanford program.

h. Visiting Scholar Card: issued to academic and research visitors who:
(1) are not considered to be Stanford students; (2) are invited by a school, department or other Stanford entity to visit the University without being paid as faculty members or employees; and (3) either holds a doctoral degree or are recognized experts in their field. Individuals entitled to Visiting Scholar Cards must be resident at Stanford for a minimum of one quarter and contribute to Stanford's academic and research mission either by lecturing or actively collaborating with Stanford faculty or students on current Stanford research. A Visiting Scholar Card will be issued to an individual who provides an invitation that is (1) signed by the appropriate dean or program, institute or center director; (2) includes dates of residency at Stanford; and (3) identifies the sponsoring Stanford individual or entity.

i. Courtesy Card: issued to:
(1) Spouses and domestic partners of students and postdoctoral scholars.
(2) Spouses and same-sex domestic partners of qualified holders of a valid Faculty/Staff or Fellow Card.
(3) Adjunct Clinical Faculty.
(4) Holders of "other teaching titles" who are not on Stanford's payroll.
(5) Staff of the Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching located on Stanford campus.
(6) Chaplain Affiliates.
(7) Staffs of organizations located on Stanford's campus and which, as determined by the Provost, either provide academic or research support to Stanford's faculty, or engage in other activities to support Stanford's academic and research mission. Examples include the Stanford-based staffs of the Department of Plant Biology at the Carnegie Institution for Science and Howard Hughes Medical Institute.

Back to top

3. Management of Identification Cards

a. Issuance
Identification Cards may be issued only by the Student Services Center (for students) or Information Technology Services (all others). For the purposes of this policy, the Student Services Center and Information Technology Services will be individually and collectively referred to as the Stanford Card Office.
(1) The ID Card photo should show the full face of the applicant, without hat or dark glasses. Head coverings may be permitted due to religious beliefs, provided the head covering does not obscure the face.
(2) For students, postdoctoral scholars, faculty and staff, the name on the Identification Card must match the official name contained in the official student or employment records maintained by the University unless an exception has been granted by either the Office of the Registrar or Human Resources.
(3) The ID Card will be issued only when the recipient shows a valid government-issued picture ID (i.e., driver's license or passport) containing a recognizable photo and the same name as the:

  • official or preferred name in Stanford's student or employment record (for students, postdoctoral students, faculty and staff),
  • name on the appointment letter (for faculty, academic staff, Chaplain Affiliates, and members of the Board of Trustees),
  • name on the evidence of admission of a Fellow, or
  • name on the invitation to a Visiting Scholar.

(4) Courtesy cards will be issued to spouses and eligible domestic partners only when the related Student, Postdoctoral, Faculty/Staff, SLAC Faculty/Staff, or Fellow Card shows acceptable proof of marriage or qualifying domestic partnership.
(5) Initial Student, Postdoctoral, Faculty/Staff, Temp/Casual, SLAC Faculty/Staff, SLAC Temp/Casual, and Fellow Cards will be issued without fee. Courtesy Cards, Visiting Scholar Cards and all replacement cards will be issued after payment of the fee established by the Stanford Card Office. Fees are subject to change at any time.
(6) If an ID Card is lost or stolen, the cardholder must immediately report this loss/theft to the appropriate Stanford Card Office. The lost or stolen card will then be invalidated.

b. Distribution of Identification Cards
The Stanford Card Office may authorize distribution of Identification Cards to other Stanford offices or departments so long as the authorization is in writing and signed by the Director of Card Services, or for student ID cards, the Director of the Student Services Center. This authorization may not be delegated, and may be revoked at any time by the Stanford Card Office. An authorized party at the Stanford office or department accepting responsibility for Identification Cards distribution during that academic term or distribution period, must indicate in writing (before taking possession of the cards) its agreement to adhere to requirements of 3.a(3). To ensure compliance with 3.a(3) the department will provide training to any staff (including hired students and contractors) who will participate in Identification Card distribution.

c. Expiration Date
Identification cards expire as follows:
(1) Student Card: Student Cards are valid only while the cardholder is enrolled as a student at Stanford. These ID Cards will expire on the sooner of (a) the last day of the quarter in which a student graduates or in which their registration at Stanford ends and (b) a change in status such that the student is no longer enrolled at Stanford. If a student is not registered during summer quarter, the ID Card will remain active during that quarter provided the student is registered for the following fall quarter. No expiration date will be placed on the Student Card.
(2) Postdoctoral Card: Postdoctoral Cards are valid only while the cardholder is a postdoctoral scholar at Stanford. These ID Cards will expire on the sooner of (a) the last day of the quarter in which the scholar's registration at Stanford ends and (b) a change in status such that the scholar is no longer enrolled at Stanford. No expiration date will be placed on the Postdoctoral Card.
(3) Faculty/Staff and SLAC Faculty/Staff Cards: Faculty/Staff and SLAC Faculty/Staff Cards are valid only during either the cardholder's faculty appointment, employment, or retired or emeritus status. These ID Cards will expire on the sooner of (a) the last day of a fixed term, (b) the last day of association with the University for a continuing appointment (other than for retirement), or (c) a change in status such that the cardholder is no longer entitled to Privileges. No expiration date will be placed on the Faculty/Staff and SLAC Faculty/Staff Cards.
(4) Temp/Casual and SLAC Casual/Temp: Temp/Casual and SLAC Temp/Casual cards are valid only while the cardholder remains employed by Stanford. These ID Cards will expire on the sooner of (a) the last day of a fixed term, (b) the last day of association with the University for a continuing appointment, or (c) a change in status such that the cardholder is no longer entitled to Privileges. No expiration date will be placed on the ID Card for casual employees. ID Cards for temporary employees will specify the expiration of their fixed service term.
(5) Fellow and Visiting Scholar Cards: Fellow and Visiting Scholar Cards are valid only for the period specified in the Fellow's evidence of admission or the Visiting Scholar's invitation (in either case, unless terminated sooner). Fellow and Visiting Scholar Cards respectively will specify the expiration date contained in the Fellow's evidence of admission or the Visiting Scholar's invitation.
(6) Courtesy Card: Courtesy Cards expire on the sooner of (a) the date identified in an appointment letter, (b) the last day of association with the University for a continuing appointment, or (c) a change in status such that the cardholder is no longer entitled to Privileges. If the Courtesy Card is issued to a spouse or domestic partner, the card expires on the same day that their spouse or domestic partner's ID Card expires. No expiration date will be placed on the Courtesy Cards.
(7) When a holder's designated association with the University ends or changes prior to ID Card expiration, the ID Card will become invalid, even if the expiration date has not passed.

d. Surrender of Cards
The Stanford Card is the property of Stanford University and must be surrendered at the earlier of:
(1) expiration, if not renewed
(2) termination of association with the University or
(3) request by a supervisor or other appropriate University official.
The appropriate manager, program director, dean or HR manager will request surrender of all Faculty/Staff, SLAC Faculty/Staff, Temp/Casual, SLAC Temp/Casual, Fellow, Visiting Scholar and Courtesy Cards, including Courtesy Cards for spouses and domestic partners, upon expiration (if not renewed) or termination of affiliation with Stanford. Surrendered cards will be destroyed.

e. Stanford Card Office
The Stanford Card Office oversees the production of new and replacement cards. Additional information on eligibility for ID Cards, and the process for obtaining an ID Card, may be found at Stanford IT Services.  

Back to top

4. Use of Facilities and Services

The privileges enabled through use each type of ID Card vary widely. In this section, certain privileges are detailed for reference purposes only, and no reliance should be placed on these descriptions to detail all University facilities and services for which ID Cards grant access, or the eligibility criteria established for their use. Established eligibility criteria are subject to change without notice, and access to facilities and services may be denied at any time. In addition, management of each facility may limit or prohibit use of a facility by an individual card holder who, in the facility management's sole discretion, violates the rules governing use of the facility or other policies established by the University or facility management.

a. Department of Athletics, Physical Education, and Recreation (DAPER): Holders of Student, Postdoctoral, Faculty/Staff, SLAC Faculty/Staff, Temp/Casual, SLAC Temp/Casual, Fellow, Visiting Scholar and Courtesy Cards have access to certain facilities and events specified by DAPER, subject to payment of established amounts, if any, for tickets or use fees. Access to Stanford's Golf Course is available only to Stanford professoriate, academic appointments in specified policy centers and institutes, academic staff, non-affiliated Clinician/Educators, regular staff, students, post-doctoral scholars, fellows in official Stanford programs, retirees, emeriti, Trustees, and those of their spouses and domestic partners with a valid Courtesy Card. Non-holders of ID Cards may be able to access certain DAPER facilities by purchasing a guest card. Information about guest cards is located on the DAPER Physical Education, Recreation and Wellness website. 

b. Libraries: The Stanford University Libraries and Academic Information Resources ("SULAIR") has written regulations governing the use of its libraries. Access to many of these libraries, and borrowing privileges at all of them, are through use of either the ID Card or library-issued cards. Access to the collections of Lane Medical, Jackson Business, Hoover Institution, Robert Crown Law, and Stanford Linear Accelerator Center Libraries (each a "Coordinate Library") is determined by each Coordinate Library. While a Stanford Identification Card may be necessary to gain access to campus library resources, the possession of an ID Card does not assure access to any library. If an individual does not have an ID Card, or their ID Card does not allow the library access or borrowing privileges required in order to complete their Stanford-related work, instructions for requesting such access or borrowing privileges may be found at Stanford University Libraries web site. 

Back to top

5. Other Cards

The Stanford Card Office, and certain other departments at Stanford, issue cards which are not considered to be Stanford Identification Cards and do not carry the same Privileges as an ID Card. A partial list of these cards includes:

a. Conference Identification Card
A paper card issued by the Conference Office for a specified period to individuals who are participating in summer conferences and institutes but who are not registered as students.

b. Continuing Studies Student Card
A paper card issued quarterly to registrants in Continuing Studies courses, except for those pursuing the Master of Liberal Arts degree, who receives a Student Card.

c. Dependent Card
A paper card issued annually or for a specified period, to the children of faculty and staff. Before issuing a Dependent Card, DAPER must verify the parent's "Faculty/Staff" Stanford Card.

d. Library Cards
Issued by SULAIR and Coordinate Libraries to provide library access and/or borrowing privileges.

e. Meal Cards
A card issued for use by certain non-student holders of meal plans at the University, such as children of Resident Fellows and summer conference attendees. These cards are valid only for meals in the Dining Halls.

f. Temp Access Card
A non-photo card which provides access to campus buildings. Policies and procedures related to the issuance and use of these cards are established by the issuing department.

Back to top

2.4.4 Property and Liability Insurance

Last updated on:
08/11/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
28.5

This Guide Memo describes the University's property and liability insurance coverage.

For information on other insurance coverage, see:

  • Business travel accident insurance: Guide Memo 2.3.1: Survivor Benefit Plans.
  • University, government, and personal vehicle collision insurance: Guide Memo 8.4.2: Vehicle Use.
  • Rental vehicle collision insurance: Guide Memo 5.4.2: Travel Expenses.
Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

1. General Information

a. Administration of Insurance
The Risk Management Office is responsible for obtaining insurance and self-insurance coverage and processing all claims.

b. Who Pays for Insurance
Risk Management charges income-producing operations, formula schools, auxiliaries and general funds for their Aggregate Annual Insurance Premiums.

c. Special Insurance Coverage
Any department having special risks that it feels should be insured should discuss the issue with Risk Management. If insurance does appear to be the best way of managing a risk, Risk Management will negotiate a policy with the insurance carrier and rebill the cost to the requesting department.

d. What to do in the Event of an Accident
(1) Emergency Action
Take whatever steps are immediately necessary to render emergency medical care, salvage property, or reduce the further extent of the loss. If anyone is injured, see Guide Memo 7.2.1: Emergency/Accident Procedures, for emergency procedures, and Guide Memo 7.6.1: Accident and Incident Reporting, for reporting requirements. Report injuries promptly to comply with state law.
(2) Evidence for Insurance Claim
If possible, do not disturb the evidence or hazard which caused the claim until the area can be inspected, pictures taken, and conditions recorded. Obtain the names and addresses of parties involved, witnesses, etc. Under no circumstances should one admit liability; to do so could jeopardize the insurance coverage. As soon as possible record the details of the accident. The report should include: date, time, place, who or what was involved, how it happened, names, addresses, and estimated ages of persons involved; description of injury, loss or damage; and action that was or will be taken to prevent a recurrence. All claims must be reported immediately to Risk Management.

Back to top

2. Property Insurance

a. General Property Insurance 

(1) Situations Covered
Stanford's insurance and self-insurance on buildings and their contents includes coverage for fire, smoke, windstorm, explosion, riot, civil commotion, vandalism, malicious mischief, falling aircraft, and theft.

(2) Situations not Covered
The University does not provide insurance coverage for the following situations:

  • Damage caused by rough wear and tear, rust, dust, mechanical failure, maintenance problems, breakage, scratching, marring and staining
  • Items identified as lost as a result of inventory
  • Failed experiments, or lost or damaged research efforts
  • Management errors, financial decisions, or lost income or opportunities
  • Government-owned property
  • Personal property of faculty, staff, or students
  • Damage caused by earthquake, or natural disaster flood
  • Damage caused by terrorism or bioterrorism, except damage due to terrorism as defined by TRIA (Terrorism Risk Insurance Act) is covered.
  • In any country where trade relations are unlawful, as determined by the Government of the United States of America or its agencies, are not covered. In addition other countries may be excluded from time to time. Please see the Risk Management website for a current list of excluded countries.

(3) Deductible
The first $1,000,000 of each claim is self-insured by the University. The department that suffered the loss or damage of property pays for the first $1,000 of each claim. See Guide Memo 2.4.5: Protection of Property, for information on possible waivers of the $1,000 deductible through the Police Department's STOPP program.

(4) Claim Processing
Risk Management processes all claims for the replacement value or repair of University property that has been stolen, destroyed or damaged. Depending upon the type, size and location of the loss, Procurement or Land, Buildings and Real Estate (LBRE) will be directly involved in the repairs or reconstruction. The preparation of specifications and a bidding process may be necessary. Risk Management must receive copies of all contracts, work orders, and purchase requisitions.

In the event a claim exceeds $1000, insurance or self-insurance may pay for repair or replacement value (whichever is less). "Replacement value" means the cost to repair or replace (not book value). Loss settlements are based on the cost to repair or replace with like kind and quality. Any upgrading will be at the cost of the department that suffers the loss. If property is not to be replaced (due to obsolescence or no continuing need or use for the property) insurance proceeds will not be based on the actual cash or depreciated value.

b. Boilers, Pressure Vessels and Heavy Machinery
(1) Situations Covered
Insurance covers explosion, burning, bulging, and cracking of insured objects; machinery and equipment are covered for sudden and accidental breakdown.
(2) Deductible
There is a $25,000 deductible per occurrence, except $50,000 for medical diagnostic equipment, the full amount of which is coordinated with LBRE/Buildings and Grounds Maintenance (or the department if it is a service center, an income-producing operation, or an auxiliary).

c. Budgeting Total Property Insurance Expense
(1) Total Property Insurance Expense includes General Property Insurance and Boilers, Pressure Vessels and Heavy Machinery Insurance. Following the end of each fiscal year, the Risk Management department will secure an actuarial study of claims under the Property Insurance Program. The actuarial study will provide two key figures that will be used to budget future property insurance expenses:

(a) Self-insurance reserve required to fund claims (and related expenses) that have occurred prior to the end of the recently completed fiscal year but have not yet been settled/completed. (This can be an accumulation of several years of claims estimates, net of settlements). This actuarial required reserve may be higher or lower than the actual reserve balance at Fiscal Year End.
(b) Actuarial projected self-insurance funding levels, or cost of claims and expenses that will be incurred in the next fiscal year. This will be the amount added to the reserve balance each year to cover claims incurred in that year.

(2) During the budget planning cycle (and no later than February 1), Risk Management will provide the Budget Office with the Aggregate Annual Premium to be charged internally for Property Insurance during the next fiscal year. At the same time, Risk Management will also provide the income-producing operations, formula schools, and auxiliaries with their respective property premium allocation to be charged during the next fiscal year. The Aggregate Premium will be composed of the following five elements:

(a) Actuarial Projection of self-insurance funding for the cost of claims and expenses that will be incurred in the budget year.
(b) A reserve for future catastrophic events.
(c) Risk Management's estimate of premiums to be paid to outside insurers for excess coverage insurance during the next fiscal year.
(d) Risk Management's estimate of other direct expenses (e.g., actuarial studies, legal expenses, brokerage fees, operating expenses) associated with the Property Insurance Program.
(e) 30% of the surplus or deficit in the self-insurance reserve to the actuarial required reserve balance at the prior year-end. The application of a portion of the surplus or deficit (vs. 100%) is intended to provide a smoothing effect to avoid large year-to-year changes in the Aggregate Premium.

(3) The Aggregate Annual Premium is allocated to income-producing operations, formula schools, auxiliaries, and general funds based on property replacement values.

Back to top

3. Transit Insurance

a. Situations Covered
Stanford's insurance on transit covers all goods shipped inland to or by Stanford when the transit agreement assigns the risk to Stanford. For large (over 75 lbs.) or complicated shipments, including packing and crating, departments are encouraged to use American Overseas Air Freight.

b. Situations Not Covered
(1) Situations described in section 2.a (c).
(2) Waterborne shipments, unless by inland water, by roll-on/roll-off ferries operating between European ports, or by coastal shipments
(3) Shipments to any country where trade relations are unlawful as determined by the Government of the United States of America or its agencies are not covered. In addition other countries may be excluded from time to time. Please see the Risk Management website for a current list of excluded countries.

c. Deductible
The first $50,000 of each claim is self-insured by the University. The first $1,000 of each claim loss is the responsibility of the department.

d. Claim Processing
Immediate notification of loss to Risk Management is required for losses greater than $1,000. Risk Management must receive copies of contracts, purchase orders, bills of lading or any transit agreements, shipping documents and/or invoices.

Back to top

4. Liability Insurance

a. Situations Covered
Liability insurance covers all locations and activities including University and government-owned vehicles. (For information on coverage for vehicles, including personal vehicles used on University business, see Guide Memo 8.4.2: Vehicle Use. Liability insurance also covers non-owned aircraft, watercraft, professional liability, employers' liability, products liability, etc. University trustees, officers, faculty, and staff are included as additional insureds for activities arising out of and in the scope of their employment.

b. Situations Not Covered
Stanford and insurers do not cover employees or others for their following personal acts:

  • Criminal acts (including assault, battery, homicide, manslaughter, etc.)
  • Fraudulent/dishonest acts (including theft, plagiarism, false testimony, etc.)
  • Acts in which there is a conflict of interest (including personal gain)
  • Acts not connected with or arising out of or related to Stanford employment or Stanford activities (e.g., personal gain, etc.)
  • Fines, penalties or punishment which government authorities or law places on an individual (includes traffic fines, jail sentences, etc.)

c. Deductible
(1) Public Liability
The first $1,000,000 of each claim for public liability is self-insured by theUniversity.
(2) Employee and/or Student Relations
The first $1,000,000 of each claim for liability claims involving student and/or employee relations is self-insured by the University.

d. Claim Processing
Upon becoming aware of an incident, which could lead to a liability claim or when a claim for liability is received, the department should immediately notify Risk Management.

e. Budgeting Liability Insurance Expense
(1) Liability Insurance includes General Liability, Educators Legal Liability, Automotive, Non-owned Aviation, and Crime Insurance. Following the end of each fiscal year, the Risk Management department will secure an actuarial study of claims under the Liability Insurance Program. The actuarial study will provide two key figures that will be used to budget future liability insurance expenses:

(a) Self-insurance reserve required to fund claims (and related expenses) that have occurred prior to the end of the recently completed fiscal year but have not yet been settled/completed. (This can be an accumulation of many years of claims estimates, net of settlements) This actuarial required reserve may be higher or lower than the actual reserve balance at Fiscal Year End.
(b) Actuarial projected self-insurance funding levels, or cost of claims and expenses that will be incurred in the next fiscal year. (This will be the amount added to the reserve balance each year to cover claims incurred in that year.)

(2) During the budget planning cycle (and no later than February 1), Risk Management will provide the Budget Office with the Aggregate Annual Premium to be charged internally for Liability Insurance during the next fiscal year. At the same time, Risk Management will also provide the income-producing operations, formula schools, and auxiliaries with their respective liability premium allocation to be charged during the next fiscal year. The Aggregate Premium will be composed of the following four elements:

(a) Actuarial Projection of self-insurance funding for the cost of claims and expenses that will be incurred in the budget year
(b) Risk Management's estimate of premiums to be paid to outside insurers for excess coverage insurance during the next fiscal year
(c) Risk Management's estimate of other direct expenses (e.g., actuarial studies, legal expenses, brokerage fees, operating expenses) associated with the Liability Insurance Program
(d) 30% of the surplus or deficit in the self-insurance reserve to the actuarial required reserve balance at the prior year-end. The application of a portion of the surplus or deficit (vs. 100%) is intended to provide a smoothing effect to avoid large year-to-year changes in the Aggregate Premium.

(3) Allocation of Liability Insurance Expense
A portion of the Aggregate Annual Premium will be carved out and allocated to certain income-producing operations, formula schools and auxiliaries based on use, attendance, occupancy and square footage measures. The balance of the Aggregate Annual Premium after carve outs is then allocated to all income-producing operations, formula schools, auxiliaries, and general funds based on the prior year's actual payroll and headcount data.

Vehicle insurance premiums are allocated on a per vehicle basis and are not included in the Liability Aggregate Annual Premium calculations.

(4) Allocation of Settlement Costs
Following the end of each fiscal year, Risk Management will provide an analysis of the cost of settling all liability claims paid during the year (regardless of the year the claim was incurred). To the extent settlement costs for a particular income-producing operation, Formula School, or auxiliary exceeds the liability insurance premium paid by that unit over the same time period, the unit will be responsible for paying eighty percent (80%) of the excess cost back to the self-insurance reserve account over a three year period. To the extent that these settlement costs are less than the liability insurance premium paid by that unit over the same period, 50% of the surplus will be credited to the unit over a three-year period. To the extent that these settlements result in over funding of the reserve account, the surplus will be applied to lower the Aggregate Annual Premium charged across the University as described in the budget section above.

Back to top

5. Crime Insurance

a. Situations Covered
Crime insurance covers loss of monies and securities due to robbery, burglary, theft, or employee dishonesty.

b. Situations Not Covered
Once a loss due to the dishonesty of an employee becomes known, the insurance company will not pay for any future losses caused by that employee. Departments must report claims promptly and take action to prevent or reduce further loss.

c. Deductible
The first $1,000,000 of each claim is self-insured by the University.

d. Claim Processing
(1) Police Report
The department must notify the Police Department immediately (see Guide Memo 2.4.5: Protection of Property.
(2) Internal Audit Report
The department must notify the Internal Audit department, which will conduct an audit of procedures and policies and make recommendations to strengthen internal controls to help prevent a recurrence of losses.
(3) Insurance Claim
The department must contact the Risk Management office for assistance and instructions on processing a claim.

e. Budgeting Crime Insurance
Included in General Liability Budgeting Process section above.

Back to top

6. Other Property and Liability Insurances

a. Bonds
Notary and other miscellaneous bonds are arranged through Risk Management. The premium is charged to the requesting department.

b. Property Leased or Loaned to Stanford
Arrangements must be made through Procurement for any property, which is to be received or accepted as a loan or a lease. It is important that an authorized official sign the agreement. The agreement must indicate the description and value of the property, the party responsible for insurance, the perils to be covered, the party responsible for transportation insurance (both coming and going), etc. Copies of such agreements must be sent to Risk Management.

Forms for loan of artwork are available from Risk Management. 

c. Aircraft and Watercraft
If aircraft (other than scheduled airlines) or watercraft (25 H.P. or more and/or 26 feet in length or more) are to be used on University business, call Risk Management, as special insurance arrangements may be necessary to protect both the University, faculty, and staff.

d. Medical Malpractice Insurance
Contact Risk Management for additional information.

Back to top

2.4.5 Protection of Property

Last updated on:
12/15/2005
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
28.6

This Guide Memo outlines departmental responsibilities for safeguarding University property.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

1. Security of Facilities

a. Arrangements
Each department is responsible for making whatever arrangements are necessary to secure University facilities when they are not in use.

b. Instructions to Employees
All employees should be instructed to lock all windows, doors, and storage facilities when they leave an area unattended and at the close of normal work. Employees who work outside of regular hours should relock doors upon entering as well as when leaving a building.

Back to top

2. Protective Measures Against Theft and Vandalism

a. Keys
The number of people given keys to buildings, offices, labs, and storerooms should be kept to a minimum. A list of people with keys should be kept by each department. Keys must be returned upon termination of employment. Arrangements should be made to change keys and locks from time to time.

b. Safeguarding Equipment
Each department is responsible for the inventory and safeguard of all valuable equipment. If equipment is loaned, a record should be kept of each temporary assignment. Portable equipment of value should be kept in locked storage when not in use if this can be arranged. Consideration should be given to bolting or chaining computers, microscopes, and similar equipment to the working surface. Contact the Police Department at 650/723-9633, or see http://police.stanford.edu for advice concerning security of property through the STOPP program. Monetary losses to the department may be reduced by implementation of the program and the $1,000 insurance deductible may be waived.

c. Valuable Papers and Records
Special arrangements should be made for protecting valuable, irreplaceable, and confidential papers and records. Desks, file cabinets, and safes containing confidential or valuable documents must be locked whenever they are unattended, even for a short time. Consideration should be given to maintaining duplicate records, disks, tapes, or microfilms. Off-site storage should be arranged for valuable records. Such records should be kept current.

d. Safe Deposit Boxes
If items are to be kept in a safe deposit box, the box should be rented in the name of Stanford University and fees billed to the University (not to an individual). Notification of the box location and authorized signatures should be sent to the Risk Management Office and the Accounting Officer, Controller's Office.

e. Money and Personal Property
Employees should be reminded periodically not to leave cash, wallets, pocketbooks, or personal possessions of value in accessible locations. Personal automobiles should be locked.

f. Works of Art, Precious Metals, and Stones
Whenever works of art, precious metals (such as gold, silver, platinum, rhodium, and rhenium), or valuable stones (diamonds, opals, sapphires, etc.), whose total value is significant are acquired by purchase, donation, or loan to the University, the departmentis responsible for providing an adequate security and accountability system. The Police Department and the Risk Management Office are available for assistance in developing an auditable system for the receipt, inventory, storage, and accountability of the precious items. A written description of procedures should be filed in the department. Departments accepting loans or gifts of such property should send a copy of the inventory to the Risk Management Office for insurance coverage.

g. Vandalism
Adequate protection against theft should provide equal protection against acts of vandalism. If physical facilities are such that unauthorized access is possible, departments may ask the advice of the Stanford Police for methods of obtaining adequate protection.

Back to top

3. Reports of Theft or Vandalism

a. Immediate Reports to the Police
Thefts, evidence of attempted theft, and acts of vandalism must be reported to the Stanford Police as soon as the discovery is made.

b. Investigation of Theft or Vandalism
Only the police are authorized to conduct an investigation of a theft or act of vandalism. Everyone else is cautioned to refrain from disturbing the evidence and from taking action in the matter except under the direction of the investigating officer.

c. Insurance
The Risk Management Office processes all claims for the replacement value or repair of University property that has been stolen, destroyed or damaged. For more information, see Guide Memo 2.4.4.

Back to top

4. Theft by University Employees

a. Staff
A staff employee determined to have participated, as perpetrator or accomplice, in theft of University property or property for which the University is responsible is subject to discharge and legal action.

b. Faculty
Members of the Academic Council are governed by the Statement on Faculty Discipline, which can be found in the Faculty Handbook.

Back to top

5. Use of University Property

University property may not be used for personal purposes or for personal gain. See Guide Memo 8.2.1: University Events, and the Public Events Policy and Practice Manual for policy on use of University property for public events.

Back to top

2.4.6 Indemnification

Last updated on:
09/01/2005
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
15.7

This policy covers indemnification of employees.

Authority: 

Approved by the President.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to all employees of the University.

1. Indemnification Policy

Stanford's policy is to indemnify and defend its faculty and staff in compliance with California Labor Code Section 2802.

Back to top

2. Sources For More Information

Any questions regarding indemnification should be referred to either the Office of the General Counsel or the Office of Risk Management.

Back to top

3.1.1 Responsibility for University Financial Assets

Last updated on:
08/11/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
34.

This Guide Memo outlines the roles and responsibilities of various University officers and organizations in managing the University's financial assets.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

By the terms of the Founding Grant and subsequent legislation and court decrees, the properties of Stanford University are held in trust by the University's trustees for the founding, endowment, maintenance and benefit of the University. The trustees have corporate powers and privileges; that is, they may organize and act as a Board of Trustees, elect officers, and adopt by-laws. For more information about the University's founding and the Board of Trustees, see Guide Memo 1.2.1: University Organization.

Back to top

2. Delegated Responsibility

a. President
The Board of Trustees has assigned responsibility to the President for the management of the University's business activities. For more information, see Guide Memo 1.2.1: University Organization.

b. University Officers
The Board of Trustees has delegated responsibility to individual University officers for management of funds in their accounts. For more information, and for information on further delegation of authority, see Guide Memo 3.2.1: Authorizing Expenditures. University officers also exercise responsibility for financial management decisions through the University's governance structure, which is described in Guide Memo 1.2.1: University Organization, and accompanying organization charts.

c. Schools and Departments
Schools and departments are responsible for appropriateness of expenditures and for recording transactions correctly. For information on mandatory training for all faculty and staff members before signature authority for expenditures is granted, see Guide Memo 3.2.1: Authorizing Expenditures. A person must be given authority through Stanford's online Authority Manager to approve transactions or view financial information online. Access to online financial reports requires the signing of a Confidentiality Statement. For step-by-step instructions, see Quick Steps: Grant Authority for Oracle Financial Reporting.

d. Business Affairs
Business Affairs, headed by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer, plays a central role in assuring that the Trustees meet their fiduciary responsibility to donors, government officials, employees, students, and the general public. For more information on Business Affairs organization and responsibilities, see the Business Affairs and CFO website.
(1) Financial Management Services (FMS)
Financial Management Services, including the Controller's Office, Office of the Treasurer, Procurement, Global Services, and Consulting & Support, promotes the academic health of the University by delivering financial and accounting services to the Stanford community. FMS exercises legal and fiduciary responsibility over funds entrusted to the University by maintaining systems of internal control and financial reporting. The organization supports decision making by providing financial information and consulting. FMS is responsible for establishing a sound business environment so that various funding sources (such as government agencies, donors, students, and bondholders) can confidently provide resources to support Stanford's academic mission.
(2) Controller's Office
The Controller's Office is responsible for ensuring proper internal controls and safeguarding of University assets and properly recording the University's assets, liabilities, funds, revenues and expenses in compliance with applicable laws, regulations, University policies and donor requirements. The Controller's Office also provides financial information and analyses to support senior administration decisions and meet reporting requirements such as the annual report and tax return. In addition, the Controller's Office manages the timely and accurate production of payroll for the University community while ensuring compliance with all applicable laws and regulations.
(3) The Office of the Treasurer
The Office of the Treasurer oversees the University's debt program, directs capital market borrowings and communicates with rating agencies and investors in Stanford's debt securities. The office manages the University's operating liquidity, cash management operations and Ecommerce, The Treasurer or specific designees are the only individuals authorized to open bank accounts on behalf of the University.
(4) Procurement
Longer retention times apply to certain documents retained by central offices. For information on a specific document or category of documents, the office responsible for the type of transaction should consult the Office of Sponsored Research (OSR) or Financial Management Services (FMS) consisting of the Controller's Office, Office of the Treasurer, Procurement (including Accounts Payable, Travel & Reimbursements), Global Services, and Financial Management Consulting & Support.
The Board of Trustees has authorized Procurement to handle purchases of goods and services for the University. For more information, see Guide Memo 5.1.1, Procurement Policies.
(5) Global Services
Global Services provides services to enable University activities outside of the United States to be conducted efficiently and in compliance with U.S. and foreign regulatory requirements.
(6) Consulting and Support
Consulting and Support facilitates effective management of university financial assets by providing services to schools, departments and central offices in business process improvement; financial information and reporting systems design and implementation; and ongoing education and communication.
(7) Research Administration
The Board of Trustees has authorized the Office of Sponsored Research to commit the University to the legal terms and conditions of grant or contract agreements. For more information, see the Research Policy Handbook. In addition to administering sponsored projects, the Office of Research Administration assists the University in complying with its regulatory obligations to the federal government in the areas of indirect cost recovery, fringe benefits, service centers, capital equipment, space use, and cost studies. Information can be found on the DoResearch website.  The Office of Research Administration is also responsible for negotiating both indirect cost and fringe benefits rates on behalf of the University. Detailed information on rates is found on the DoResearch website.
(8) Information Technology Systems & Services
The Information Systems Delivery & Support division of ITS provides the primary business information systems support for Business Affairs. Business systems applications also support administrative functions of schools and departments.
(9) Internal Audit
The mission of the Internal Audit Department is to assist University management and the Stanford Board of Trustees in identifying, avoiding and, where necessary, mitigating risks. The Department is responsible for examining and evaluating the adequacy and effectiveness of (1) the systems of internal control and their related accounting, financial, and operational policies and (2) procedures for financial and compliance monitoring and reporting. The Institutional Compliance Program is online.
(10) Office of Risk Management
The Risk Management Office is responsible for obtaining insurance from third parties, determining appropriate self-insurance coverage levels, and processing all insurance claims. Risk Management's overall goals are to ensure that the University's resources are expended wisely, that risks within a department's area of responsibility are managed effectively and efficiently, and that the University is protected against catastrophic losses.

e. Land, Buildings and Real Estate (LBRE)
The role of LBRE is to provide and sustain the facilities and infrastructure in support of the academic campus. LBRE also manages the real estate that the Board of Trustees has designated for the production of income (e.g., Stanford Shopping Center, Stanford Research Park, certain commercial properties, housing developments, and gift real estate).

f. Office of Development
The Office of Development solicits and processes gifts to the University. For more information, see Chapter 4: Giving to Stanford.

g. Stanford Management Company
The Stanford Management Company (SMC) is a separate division of the University formed in 1991 to manage financial and real estate investment assets. Effective 2006, LBRE assumed responsibility for real estate investments.  SMC manages the investments of the endowment, the expendable funds pool, and life income trusts.

h. Office of the General Counsel
The Office of the General Counsel provides legal advice to the Board of Trustees, the University and its officers concerning the University's legal rights and duties in its financial dealings.

Back to top

3. Annual Audit and Annual Report

At fiscal year end, the Controller's Office closes the accounting records for the year and prepares reports on the year's financial activity.

a. Annual Audit
To assure that the University's assets are protected and that transactions and events are recorded properly, an independent auditor selected by the Board of Trustees audits the annual financial statements in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards. The auditor's procedures include obtaining an understanding of University systems, procedures and internal accounting controls, and performing tests and other auditing procedures to provide reasonable assurance that the financial statements neither are materially misleading nor contain material errors.

b. Annual Report
The Office of University Communications publishes the auditor's report, the audited summary statements and accompanying notes to the financial statements as the University's Annual Financial Report. Departments and individuals may obtain copies from Office of University Communications, Bldg. 170 (650) 725-8396.

c. Annual Report Detail
The Controller's Office publishes the financial schedules from which the audited statements are derived in a document distributed to school financial officers.

Back to top

3.1.2 University Funds

Last updated on:
03/17/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
34.1

This Guide Memo describes the University's funds and budgets.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

1. Basis of Accounting

a. Fund Accounting
The University maintains its accounts in accordance with the principles of fund accounting. Because the University receives funding from a variety of sources, with different types of terms and restrictions, each source must be tracked as a separate accounting entity in a unique fund.

b. Restrictions on Use of Funds
Fund restrictions are classified differently for internal and external reporting purposes.  While some of the terms overlap, they have different meanings depending on the reporting context.  For external reporting purposes, the definitions are based on generally accepted accounting principles.  For internal reporting purposes, the definitions are based on the use of the funds.

(1) Internal Reporting Definitions

  • Restricted: When a donor makes a gift to the University, the donor may provide terms for the use of that gift.  If the terms specify a particular purpose, the funds are restricted to that purpose.  Income and appreciation produced by restricted endowments is also restricted as per the terms of the endowment.  Funding provided by sponsored agencies or corporations for specific grant or contract work is also considered restricted.
  • Unrestricted: Funds without donor terms or with terms that allow the funds to be used anywhere at the University.  If donor terms allow a gift to be used broadly within a school or unit, it is deemed Unrestricted at the unit level, but Restricted by central University administration.
  • Designated: These are unrestricted funds that have been designated for a specific purpose by the Board of Trustees or senior management.  Internal units in the University can designate unrestricted resources to any number of specific purposes, but from a broader analytical perspective those funds are unrestricted for purposes of internal reporting.

(2) External Reporting Definitions

  • Permanently Restricted: The University classifies as Permanently Restricted (a) the original value of gifts donated to the Endowment and (b) accumulations to the Endowment made in accordance with the direction of the applicable donor gift instrument.
  • Temporarily Restricted: Temporarily Restricted assets include gifts and pledges that are subject to donor-imposed restrictions that expire with the passage of time, payment of pledges, or specific actions to be undertaken by the University or the Hospitals; these assets are then released and reclassified as Unrestricted.  In addition, appreciation and income on certain donor-restricted endowments funds are classified as Temporarily Restricted until authorized for spending.  Donor-restricted resources intended for capital projects are initially recorded as Temporarily Restricted and released from their temporary restrictions and reclassified as Unrestricted when the asset is placed in service.  Also included in this category is the University’s net equity in split interest agreements, expendable at maturity.
  • Unrestricted: Funds that are not Permanently Restricted or Temporarily Restricted are treated as Unrestricted for external reporting purposes.  This includes expendable gifts that have donor restrictions, so long as the University is free to spend the gift.  Funds Functioning as Endowment, or FFE, are University resources designated by the Board or internal University units to be held as endowment.  FFE is usually considered Unrestricted per accounting rules, as are most other expendable resources in the University.

c. Chart of Accounts
Stanford’s accounting system uses an alphanumeric code, or chart of accounts. The fund number, also referred to as the award number, is included in the chart of accounts.  The University accounting system also records attributes assigned to each fund that further define the fund purpose and restrictions.  For a detailed explanation of its structure, please see Stanford's Gateway to Financial Activities

The Controller's Office, a unit in Financial Management Services (FMS), and the departments and individuals authorized to spend funds in an account share responsibility for using the chart of accounts appropriately. The Controller's Office is responsible for maintaining the integrity of the chart of accounts and for assigning fund and other account numbers. Schools and departments are responsible for communicating any restrictions on use of funds so that Controller's Office staff can set up the account correctly. Find information on the various kinds of expenditure accounts in Guide Memo 3.1.3: Expenditure Accounts (PTAs).

Back to top

2. Fund Groups

The University combines funds with similar characteristics into fund groups for budgeting, planning, and reporting purposes.

a. Expendable Resources
Expendable resources are available for the current operation of the University; balancescan be built for future expenditure. Sources of funds include, but are not limited to, the following:

(1) Contracts and Grants
Funds provided by sponsors to reimburse the direct costs of contracts and grants are restricted per internal reporting definitions. The terms of the award and applicable regulations determine how the money may be spent. To apply for a contract or grant the principal investigator for the project submits a proposal through the Office of Sponsored Research (OSR) or its delegate to the sponsor. OSR negotiates the award with the sponsor. For more information, see the OSR website.
(2) Tuition and Fees
The Board of Trustees sets tuition and fee rates. The Student Financial Services Office collects tuition and fee payments from registered students each quarter. Income from tuition and fees is unrestricted per internal reporting definitions.
(3) Gifts
Donor gifts that are not ultimately directed to the endowment are usually considered expendable; exceptions include cases where the funds are not available for the current operation of the University, such as Pending funds and Donor Advised Funds.  Donors typically specify the purpose of gifts, which will determine whether the gifts are assigned to expendable, capital, or endowed purposes. The Office of Development solicits and processes gifts to the University. For more information, see Chapter 4: Giving to Stanford.
(4) Reimbursement of Facilities and Administrative Costs (Indirect Costs)
The Cost and Management Analysis Office calculates  rates that are charged to each contract and grant to pay for facilities and administrative overhead costs associated with sponsored research. These costs include utilities, building maintenance, and administrative support.  The responsible agency for the federal government, which for Stanford is the Office of Naval Research (ONR), approves the rates. Indirect cost reimbursements are unrestricted funds per internal reporting definitions. Information on rate calculations and policy is available on the DoResearch website. 
(5) Reimbursement of Facilities Costs (Infrastructure and Utilities Charges)
Designated Funds and Restricted Funds that do not otherwise pay facilities-related costs (both Sponsored and Non-sponsored) are charged an infrastructure fee to offset operations, maintenance, and utilities costs paid by University unrestricted funds. The fee is a percentage of certain types of expenditures, and these reimbursements are unrestricted funds per internal reporting definitions. More information is available in Guide Memo 3.3.1: Infrastructure Charges.
(6) Auxiliary Activities
Auxiliaries are self-contained financial entities (see Guide Memo 3.1.3: Expenditure Accounts (PTAs)). Income is used to support operations, including overhead, and all income is considered unrestricted per internal reporting definitions.
(7) Special Program Fees & Other Income
Income from outside sources related to programs, patents and royalties, activities, affiliations, ticket income and the like are collected throughout the institution.  Much of this income is subject to the Infrastructure and Utilities Charge.  All of it is considered unrestricted per internal reporting definitions.

b. Endowment Funds
Funds in the Endowment include:

(1) True Endowment:
Endowment funds created pursuant to the terms of a donor’s gift.  These funds are generally intended to last in perpetuity.  Funds established with gifts directed to the endowment are typically used to purchase “pure” shares in the Merged Pool, and in rare circumstances are held in assets specifically directed by the donor.  True Endowment and payout from True Endowment are considered restricted per internal reporting definitions if the donor terms specify a particular purpose.

The Board of Trustees establishes an annual payout rate for distributions from the University’s endowment funds.  Payout may be made from True Endowment without limitation to income as long as the payout rate is prudently established and the gift terms do not provide otherwise. There is a group of funds referred to as “Pool A” funds that are established by gifts with terms that specify something like the following: “income but no appreciation” may be paid out of the fund. These types of funds are typically no longer established by the University. There are also funds that contain what are known as “Pool B Limited” shares. This situation arises where the donor specifies something like the following: only income and appreciation above the original gift value may be paid out. These types of funds are also typically no longer established by the University. Funds without such terms of limitation are referred to in the University accounting system as “Unlimited."

Payout generated by a true endowment fund that cannot be used for operational purposes can be redirected back to the principal of the fund for investment if provided for in the donor's gift agreement, or at the request of an internal University unit.  When the funds are reinvested pursuant to a provision in the donor’s gift agreement, they add “pure” shares to the Endowment; when they are reinvested at the request of an internal unit they add “quasi” shares to the Endowment. In both cases, reinvestment takes place at year end unless the provision in the donor's gift agreement specifically provides that all payout be reinvested until the True Endowment fund reaches a certain level, in which case reinvestment is made monthly.  All such reinvestment is subject to the same donor terms as the original Endowment gift, and is restricted per internal reporting definitions if the donor terms specify a particular purpose. Any reinvestment of unused payout by an internal University unit must be requested by July 31 for the given fiscal year.

For True Endowment funds that contain Pool B Limited shares, payout is limited to income and appreciation in any year. Withdrawals in excess of income and appreciation are only permitted if that fund also contains quasi shares, in which case up to the full value of all quasi shares can be sold to make the full regular payout for that year (or as much of the full regular payout as possible).  Requests for such withdrawals must be made by July 31 for the given fiscal year; refer to the form Withdrawal Guidelines for True Endowment.

(2) Funds Functioning as Endowment (or Quasi-Endowment Funds):
Expendable resources (both restricted and unrestricted per internal reporting definitions) that are invested in the Merged Pool are usually considered part of the University’s Endowment. These are created at the request of an internal University unit (department, school, etc.).  In order to create FFE, the unit must invest $100,000 or more. These investments are used to purchase “quasi” shares in the Merged Pool.  Requests to create FFE must be approved by both the Dean or Chair, and the school’s Senior Financial Officer.

Requests to approve the creation of FFE involving gift funding must be reviewed by the Office of Planned Giving. Typically, FFE should not be created using a combination of gift and other funding sources.

Because of the market risk, these funds must remain in the Endowment for the following periods:

  • FFE created with $500,000 or more: five years or more
  • FFE created with $100,000–$500,000: twenty years or more

FFE can then be withdrawn under the following conditions:

  • Withdrawals of more than $5,000,000 may be transferred out of the Endowment only by action of the Board of Trustees.  Requests must be made to the Office of the CFO by the first week in October for approval at the December board meeting; the first week in December for approval at the February board meeting; the first week in April for approval at the June board meeting; and the first week in August for approval at the October board meeting.
  • Withdrawals between $500,000 and $5,000,000 may be transferred out of the endowment with the approval of the school financial officer, the Provost and the University Chief Financial Officer. Smaller amounts may be withdrawn only if the remaining balance is being withdrawn.  In order to provide the Stanford Management Company with sufficient time to divest assets, requests for withdrawals must be received by Fund Accounting no later than two months before the anticipated month of withdrawal.

Please refer to the forms "Investment and Withdrawal Guidelines for Funds Functioning as Endowment Greater than $500,000" and "Investment and Withdrawal Guidelines for Funds Functioning as Endowment Between $100,000 and $500,000" for further details.

At the request of the creating entity, all unused payout from FFE may automatically be reinvested back in to the principal of the fund at year end; this election can only be made upon the formation of the fund or when additions of $500,000 or more are made to the fund. If a unit chooses not to request the automatic year end reinvestment, they may contact the Controller’s Office by July 31 to specify the amount that should be reinvested for the given fiscal year.

(3) Term Endowments (FFE): Endowment created at the request of a donor, but intended to be fully spent down on a timeline established by the donor.  These monies are used to purchase “quasi” shares in the Endowment.  Regular withdrawals are made as per the donor terms.

c.  Non-Endowment Funds invested in the Merged Pool
Funds in this group include, but are not limited to:
(1) Life Income Gifts: A life income gift allows donors to give assets to Stanford while providing themselves or others with income for a period of time before Stanford is permitted to use the gift; until that period has ended, the gift is not counted as part of the University Endowment. The university, as trustee, manages the investment of the assets and pays an income to the donor, the donor’s designated beneficiaries, or both. Income payments continue for the beneficiaries' lives or, in some cases, for a term of up to 20 years.
(2) Donor Advised Funds: Stanford has Donor Advised Funds.  For more information on the size and type of gifts required to create a Donor Advised Fund at Stanford, and the amount of the fund that must ultimately be designated for the use of the University, please refer to the Office of Development’s website. In cases where all or part of a Donor Advised Fund is later used to establish or add to an Endowment fund, it is not counted as part of the Endowment until the funds are explicitly transferred to the endowed fund for use per the terms of the donor’s request.
(3) Pending Funds: These are gifts where the purpose is pending final designation by the donor and the university. In cases where all or part of a Pending Fund is later used to establish or add to an Endowment fund, it is not counted as part of the Endowment until the funds are explicitly transferred to the endowed fund for use per the terms of the donor’s request.

d. Student Loan Funds
Student Loan Funds are not meant to be expensed, but rather are loaned to students as a portion of the financial aid package. As these loans are repaid, the principal and accumulated interest become available for new student loans.
Note: Scholarships to students are expensed within the expendable resources.

e. Plant Funds
Plant Funds are funds that have been received or designated by the Trustees for facilities and retirement of indebtedness. They also include all of the University's investments in long-lived capital assets and related liabilities.

f. Agency Funds
These are funds held for others, with Stanford acting as the custodian. Funds in this group represent liabilities owed by the University.

Back to top

3. Budgeting

Each year the University prepares a consolidated budget based on estimates of income and expenses. Budgeting enables the University to verify fund availability when processing expenditures. Stanford University uses the Oracle Hyperion Planning system for budgeting.

a. Responsibilities
(1) The Provost is the University's chief academic officer and chief budget officer. The development of the University's Consolidated Budget is a principal responsibility of this officer.
(2) The Vice Provost for Budget and Auxiliaries Management directs and manages, on behalf of the Provost, the process leading to the development of the Consolidated Budget.
(3) Budget Officers in schools and departments coordinate all budget activities within their respective organizations in collaboration with the University Budget Office in the Provost's Office and the Controller's Office.
(4) The University Budget Office in the Provost's Office maintains the budget system, approves the budget submissions of all schools and departments, and monitors and reports on variances from the approved budget.

b. Annual Budget Process/Cycle
The budget process is directed by the University Budget Office.
(1) Forecasts
In the spring, budget officers prepare high-level income and expense forecasts for the following year. The University Budget Office uses these forecasts to prepare the University consolidated budget forecast that they present, via the Stanford University Budget Plan, to the Board of Trustees for approval.
(2) Consolidated Budget
Following the approval of the Stanford University Budget Plan (Consolidated Forecast) by the Board of Trustees, budget officers record the final, detailed, account-by-account budget for both revenues and expenses (salary and non-salary) in the budgeting system. As of September 1, it is the official University Consolidated Budget.
(3) Variance Reporting
Periodically through the year, as determined by University management, budget officers provide analysis and explanation of the variance between actual income and expense (or projected income and expense) and the Consolidated Budget in accordance with the guidelines provided by the University Budget Office. As necessary, analysis and explanation of changes from the previous fiscal year to the current fiscal year are also provided by the budget units. The University Budget Office uses this information to prepare high-level variance analysis for the Board of Trustees and University management.

Back to top

4. Fund Transfers

Fund transfers are accounting entries that move all, or a portion of, a fund's balance to another fund. The appropriateness of a fund transfer is dependent on the characteristics of the source and destination funds, including the type of fund, the restrictions of the fund, whether the source and destination fund share the same infrastructure and EFP (Expendable Funds Pool) treatment, etc. Generally, fund transfers are allowed when the characteristics of the source and destination funds conform to one another and the terms of each fund does not preclude such a transfer. These transfers are used to:

  • Move money between designated funds or between restricted funds (generally transfers between a restricted fund and a designated fund are not allowed, nor are transfers to/from a sponsored project fund)
  • Transfer money into or between plant funds
  • Allocate and reallocate general (unrestricted) funds among budget units
  • Increase or decrease restricted funds’ support of an Operating Budget account

Authorized central office staff typically performs fund transfers.

As transfer of funding creates an initial disconnect between where the funds were collected and where they were used (appropriated), strong controls and audit trails of fund transfers are required by the University and is responsible business practice.

Back to top

5. Fiduciary Responsibility for Fund Balances

Individual fund balances are controlled by the fund owner. This may be a faculty member or principal investigator, a department head, a university officer, or the university as a whole. The owner of the fund has the fiduciary responsibility for prudent management of fund balances. While at any time during the fiscal year a fund may go into deficit, by the end of the fiscal year, any fund with a deficit equal to or in excess of $1,000 in cash must be made whole by some other appropriate funding source. Exceptions to this policy must be approved by the University Budget Office and the Office of the CFO.

Back to top

3.1.3 Expenditure Accounts (PTAs)

Last updated on:
08/11/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
34.2

The University's Oracle Financial system has two core accounting applications: Grants Accounting (GA) and General Ledger (GL). The GA subledger records all detailed expenditure transactions and then summarizes them in the GL. The GA module has five segments: Project (P), Task (T), Award (A), Expenditure types (E) and Organization. A Project (P) is an activity or event with a single purpose. A Task (T) is a further breakdown of the project; every project has at least one task. An Award (A) is a funding source for a particular project or task. Find further information on the University's Chart of Accounts at Stanford's Gateway to Financial Activities.  This Guide Memo describes the various kinds of expenditure accounts or PTAs (the intersection of Project, Task, and Award) within the University's accounting system.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

1. Operating Budget PTA

a. Purpose
Operating Budget PTAs are the primary PTAs for the University's core academic programs and support services. Operating Budget PTAs are used to record accounting transactions for these core activities.

b. Source of Funds
At the beginning of the fiscal year, Operating Budget PTAs receive money only from University unrestricted funds and from appropriate departmental designated funds, gift funds, and endowment income funds (see Guide Memo 3.1.2: University Funds). Changes in funding during the year may be made online by authorized budget officers.

c. Setting Up
The Fund Accounting department of the Controller's Office sets up and maintains PTAs funded from the University's Operating Budget. To request a new Operating Budget P, T, and/or A, a person who has organizational authority submits the Fund Accounting PTA Request form via email to Fund Accounting in the Controller's Office. The form is located at Stanford's Gateway to Financial Activities
For step-by-step instructions, see Quick Steps: Request New PTA

d. Fiscal Year End
At fiscal year end (August 31), all unused restricted funds that are held in an Operating Budget Award must be returned to their original source fund. If expenditures have exceeded the Expense Control, other sources of funding must be identified to cover the deficit. If there are still budgeted funds available, work with the University's Budget Office to determine how to handle these funds.

e. Closing an Operating Budget PTA
At any time, a department may send a memo to Fund Accounting in the Controller's Office requesting that an Operating Budget P, T, and/or A be closed to expense. The P, T, and/or A will be closed as of the first of the month following the month in which the memo is received, unless otherwise stipulated.

Back to top

2. Grant and Contract PTA

a. Purpose
A grant or contract fund and related expenditure PTA(s) are used to record accounting transactions for a sponsored project. The Research Policy Handbook 13.1, sets out criteria for determining if external support for a project should be handled as a sponsored project. Note that external support that does not meet these criteria is handled as a gift.

b. Source of Funds
A grant or contract fund receives money from the agency sponsoring the research, instruction, or other sponsored activity at the University. Proposals for grants and contracts are processed through the Office of Sponsored Research (OSR) or its delegates. Additional information is available at the DoResearch website. 

c. Setting Up
When a grant or contract has been awarded, OSR assigns a fund (award) number for the sponsored project, and sets up related Project(s) and Task(s) as requested. OSR handles any subsequent accounting system maintenance during the life of the award. OSR also receives awards for student aid directly from a school or from the Graduate Financial Aids Office. The form used to request a PTA is located here

d. Early Accounts
For the effective and economical conduct of a sponsored project, it is sometimes necessary for costs to be incurred before the award document has been received. In such cases, departments should request that OSR set up an early PTA. The "Authorization for Early Project Task and Award Request" form is available online at http://doresearch.stanford.edu/research-administration/pta-initiation-and-setup.
The early PTA becomes the permanent PTA when the award is effective; no cost transfers are needed. Pre-award costs must be charged to a pre-award account and may not be placed on an unrelated award and later transferred to the benefiting PTA.

e. Ongoing PTA Management
(1) Allowability of Expenditures
The Principal Investigator (PI) is accountable for the accuracy, allowability, allocability, appropriateness and timely review of charges to a grant or contract PTA (or a related cost sharing PTA) and for ensuring that expenditures do not exceed the level authorized by the award. See Guide Memos:

  • 3.1.4: Cost Policy
  • 3.2.1: Authorizing Expenditures
  • 3.2.2: Cost Transfers
  • 3.2.3: Allocations and Offsets

(2) Approvals
The terms of the award and governing cost principles may require approval from the agency for such actions as rebudgeting funds, travel, or purchasing capital equipment. OSR processes approval requests.
(3) Review
The PI or someone else knowledgeable about the sponsored project must review the PTA each month, bringing any questionable items to the PI for decision on any needed action. Review guidance and tools are available at DoResearch. The review is evidenced by a signature on the monthly expenditure report.
(4) Suballocations
A suballocation of a grant or contract may be set up to handle accounting for:

  • A subcontract
  • Separate portions of the work
  • Fabrication of capital equipment
  • A conference associated with the project: This is usually accomplished by setting up additional Tasks within the Project, linked to the appropriate award(s).

f. Fiscal Year End
Accounting records for grant and contract PTAs are closed for reporting purposes at fiscal year end. The entire budget and all expenditures for the period of the award are carried forward to the new fiscal year expenditure reports.

g. Closing a Grant or Contract PTA
(1) Definition
Closeout is the administrative process whereby sponsors determine whether all technical and administrative requirements of the grant or contract have been completed. Sponsored projects are considered completed or "closed out" only after the sponsor receives and approves all technical, financial, invention and property reports as required by the terms and conditions of the award and notifies Stanford of its acceptance and signoff.
(2) Principal Investigator's Responsibilities
At the close of a grant or contract, the Principal Investigator is accountable for ensuring that the expenses recorded are complete, allowable, allocable, and without overdrafts. For more information, see Guide Memo 3.2.2: Cost Transfers, and the Research Policy Handbook 15.8 Cost Transfer Policy for Sponsored Projects.
(3) Office of Sponsored Research Responsibilities
OSR prepares the final financial reports and performs a review. Generally, the final financial report is due 90 days after the end of the award.

Back to top

3. Cost-Sharing PTA

a. Purpose
Cost sharing represents that portion of the total project costs of a sponsored agreement borne by the University, rather than the sponsor. The Research Policy Handbook 15.3 states the University's policy on cost sharing. Separate PTAs must be established to track committed cost sharing. This is usually accomplished by setting up a cost sharing Task in the Project that holds the sponsored project, and linking it to a cost-sharing award.

b. Source of Funds
The Principal Investigator must identify and provide resources to fund the cost-sharing PTA. Funds from other federal awards may not be used as the source of cost sharing except as authorized by statute. Funds generally come from unrestricted, gift, endowment income, or designated funds.

c. Setting Up
The notice of award prepared by OSR and the signed award document indicate if the project involves cost sharing. OSR will not open the sponsored PTA until the related cost-sharing PTA is opened. When a cost-sharing PTA is required, a person with signature authority over the fund from which the cost-sharing PTA will be funded or guaranteed sends a copy of the cost-sharing budget and the Cost-Sharing Authorization form to OSR requesting the PTA be opened. For information on how to set up a sponsored PTA, see the DoResearch website.

d. Ongoing PTA Management
Cost-sharing PTAs are subject to the same PTA management procedures as described above for grant and contract PTAs.

e. Fiscal Year End
Cost-sharing PTAs must be fully funded at the end of the University's fiscal year. Cost-sharing budgets and expenditures carry over to the new fiscal year, as described above for grant and contract PTAs.

f. Closing a Cost Sharing PTA
The cost-sharing PTA is closed at the same time as the related grant or contract account, as described above.

Back to top

4. Gift PTA

a. Purpose
A gift PTA is used to record the expenditures that execute the purpose of the gift.

b. Source of Funds
The source of money for a gift fund may be a single gift or multiple gifts that have a common purpose and any related income generated by the gift itself or its associated endowment.

c. Setting Up
When a gift is received whose terms require the opening of a separate fund, the Department submits the Fund Accounting PTA Request form via email to their school/department Fund Accountant in the Controller's Office. They must also fax copies of the donor documentation and a Gift Transmittal Form to their fund accountant. The original donor correspondence regarding the restricted purpose of the gift and the original Gift Transmittal along with the donor check should be sent to Gift Processing. Never hold a donor check while waiting for a PTA. Fund Accounting, in consultation with the school, assigns a fund/award number and sets up the related expenditure Project and Task(s). Fund Accounting creates the Fund Authorization document that describes the purpose of the fund. If the gift creates a new endowment fund, Fund Accounting sets up a related expendable endowment income fund to receive the endowment income. The form used to request a new Gift PTA is located at here.

For step-by-step instructions, see Quick Steps: Request New PTA .

d. Fiscal Year End
At fiscal year end the balance of the gift fund automatically carries over into the new year. If expenditures exceed available funds in an expendable gift fund or an endowment income fund, a transfer from another appropriate fund restricted to departmental use must cover the overdraft. Consult with your fund accountant for the appropriate account to use.

e. Closing a Gift PTA
(1) Endowment

Endowment gift funds and their related endowment income funds are very seldom closed. In the event that a PTA funded by an endowment income fund needs to be closed, the department should contact Fund Accounting. The account will be closed the first of the next month.
(2) Expendable Gift PTAs
At any time during the year, departments may send a memo to Fund Accounting requesting that a PTA for an expendable gift fund be closed to expense. The memo should include the reason for closing the PTA. The PTA will be closed as of the first of the month following the month in which the memo is received, unless otherwise stipulated.

Back to top

a. Purpose
Designated funds generally contain unrestricted funds that the University (rather than a donor or sponsoring agency) has decided to use for a specific purpose.

b. Source of Funds
There are two sorts of designated funds:
(1) General funds that have been transferred to a department for a specific purpose, such as departmental research support.
(2) Income that has been generated by the department and designated for departmental use. Examples are fees from professional services and conferences.

c. Setting Up
To open a designated fund and related expenditure account, the department sends an email and Fund Accounting PTA Request Form to their school/department Fund Accounting. The form used to request a new PTA is located here.  Fund Accounting, in consultation with the school, assigns a fund (award) number and sets up the related Project and Task(s) with the Fund Authorization information. For step-by-step instructions, see Quick Steps: Request New PTA.

d. Changes to Fund Balances
(1) Designated funds funded by general funds transfers are increased only by transfers from other University designated or unrestricted funds. That is, income cannot be deposited to this kind of fund.
(2) Designated funds holding income are increased as cash receipts are deposited or transferred from other University designated or unrestricted funds.

e. Fiscal Year End
At fiscal year end the balance of the designated fund automatically carries over into the new year. If expenditures exceed available funds in a designated fund, a transfer from another appropriate fund must cover the overdraft. Consult with your fund accountant for the appropriate account to use.

f. Closing a Designated Fund PTA
At any time during the year, the department may send an email to Fund Accounting requesting that a P, T, and/or A for a designated fund be closed to expense. The memo should include the reason for closing the PTA. The PTA will be closed as of the first of the month following the month in which the memo is received, unless otherwise stipulated.

Back to top

6. Capital Asset Projects

a. Purpose
Capital Asset projects capture expenditures related to facilities and infrastructure projects or computer hardware or software systems that require capitalization. They allow the University to categorize expenditures as capital assets or expenses and to collect expenditures in a way that supports indirect cost recovery, service center rate development and financial reporting.

b. Source of Funds
Multiple sources of funding may support a specific capital project. Examples are gifts, departmental funds, University unrestricted funds, University facilities reserves, debt, and Stanford Infrastructure Program funds.

c. Setting Up
A department planning a facilities construction or renovation project works with  Land, Buildings and Real Estate (LBRE)/Department of Capital Planning to initiate the project via the Facilities Form 1 System. When the project receives approval, a copy of the Facilities Form I and PTA set-up form is submitted to the Capital Accounting section of the Controller's Office. Capital Accounting reviews the Form 1 for necessary approvals, appropriateness of sources of funding and fund availability. It also sets up the PTA and sends out an Authorization memo, which includes the appropriate capital PTA, authorized budget, and applicable asset code for the project, notifying the appropriate individuals so they can grant signature authority on the PTA, as needed. For step-by-step instructions, see Quick Steps: Request New PTA.

For capital asset projects that do not involve facilities (e.g., computer hardware or software systems) the Capital Projects PTA Request Form should be completed and sent to Capital Accounting. The form is located here.   

d. Mid-Project Changes
If changes are needed to source of funds, the department informs Capital Accounting. Once funds are committed via the Form I, the department may not withdraw the funding commitment. However, a substitution of one fund source for another can be made.

e. Fiscal Year End
At fiscal year end the entire budget and expenditures for the project are carried forward to the new fiscal year expenditure statements. Expenditures must be fully funded. The department must work with Capital Accounting throughout the year to cover overdrafts.

f. Closing a Capital Project
The project manager informs Capital Accounting that a project has been completed. Capital Accounting reconciles outstanding commitments, closes the project and award, and returns any unexpended funds to their original source.

Back to top

7. Student Aid PTA

A student aid PTA is a special kind of PTA used to record departmental expenditures for student aid from current funds. Student aid PTAs are set up and managed in the same way as Operating Budget, gift, or designated PTAs, depending on the source of funds. See Quick Steps: Request New PTA.

Note: Salaries to student employees and graduate research and teaching assistant tuition allowance are not student aid.

Back to top

8. Auxiliary PTA

a. Purpose
Auxiliary enterprises are self-supporting entities that support the University's teaching and research mission. They service principally faculty, students, staff and the Stanford community. Major University auxiliaries include Housing and Dining Services, Stanford University Press, and the Department of Athletics.

b. Source of Funds
The source of funds for auxiliary PTAs is the income generated by the auxiliary activity. The amount budgeted for the fiscal year is based on a forecast of expected income and expenses for the year.

c. Setting Up
To set up a new auxiliary account, the department sends a memo to Fund Accounting with the appropriate information. The Fund Accounting PTA Request form is located here

d. PTA Management
Auxiliaries are managed similarly to a business enterprise. In addition to income and expense activities, they may have assets, liabilities, and reserve (fund) PTAs.

e. Fiscal Year End
Any surplus or deficit is transferred at year-end to a reserve PTA of the auxiliary.

f. Closing an Auxiliary P, T, and / or A
At any time during the year, the auxiliary may send a memo to Fund Accounting requesting that a P, T, and/or A for the auxiliary be closed. The memo should include the reason for closing the account. The PTA will be closed as of the first of the month following the month in which the memo is received, unless otherwise stipulated.

Back to top

9. Service Center PTA

a. Purpose
A service center is an organizational unit of the University that provides a specific service, group of services, or products to users principally within the University. Large service centers include Information Technology Services (ITS), Land, Buildings and Real Estate (LBRE), and the Medical School's Veterinary Service Center. Smaller service centers are typically found within academic departments. Detailed information on Service Centers is available at DoResearch.

b. Authorization
Proposals for a new service center must have the approval of the department chair and school dean, or their equivalent for nonacademic areas. The Office of Research Administration Policy and Compliance (RAPC) is responsible for setting service center policy and reviewing annual budget submissions which should include the volume projection for services, and ensure the costs are compliant with Federal as well as University regulations. Review the Service Center Manual for additional information.

c. Annual Breakeven
All service centers must annually break even, unless ONR has granted an exception. Twelve months of operational expense should be allocated to users via twelve months of allocation journals. If the year-end under-recovery exceeds 5% of expenses including the prior year balance for administrative service centers or 15% for academic service centers then either the users are charged the under-recovered amount or the service center's department will need to subsidize the entire loss. If the year-end over-recovery exceeds the 5% or 15% limit, a rebate must be allocated to all users of the service center. The breakeven calculation is fully explained here

d. Source of Funds
The costs of service center services or products are charged directly to all users based on the actual level of activity using a nondiscriminatory rate schedule. This rate schedule (the service center rate) must be calculated to recover no more or no less than the estimated aggregate cost of the service or product over a fiscal year unless otherwise agreed upon by the federal government.

e. Setting Up
When a new service center is reviewed and approved by RAPC, RAPC will open a new PTA. Some of the information required to open a new service center includes the purpose of the service center, anticipated usage, list of anticipated internal and external users, estimated initial budget, list of capital assets that will be required for the service center operation and a valid Guarantee PTA account. All academic service centers must have a guarantee account, which can be an operating budget, Dean's Executive fund, or unrestricted gift PTA designated by the school dean or department head. See the "Request for Establishing a New Service Center" PTA setup document.

f. Mid-Year Changes
Requests to change a service center rate should be made as soon as it appears an administrative service center will not break even within +/-5% at year-end or an academic service center will not break even within +/-15% at year-end using the previously approved rates. Such requests much be routed to the appropriate service center analyst for review and approval before the new rate can be used. A list of service center analysts is available online.

g. Fiscal Year End
Service center balances at fiscal year end must be within +/- 5% of an administrative service center's annual expenditures, including the prior year balance and +/- 15% of an academic service center's annual expenditures, including prior year balances. When any over-recovery exceeds break-even percentage, the entire surplus balance must be refunded to all users in an equitable manner. When any under-recovery exceeds the applicable percentage, the entire deficit balance must be cleared either by either charging the service center's Guarantee PTA or by allocating a yearend assessment of the entire loss to all users on a prorated usage basis. Service centers that operate under special long-term break-even or pricing agreements with the government will not be required to break even at year-end.

h. Closing a Service Center PTA
The department will need to clear any remaining balance before RAPC can close the service center PTA.

Back to top

10. Expenditure Allocation PTA

a. Purpose
An expenditure allocation (expense clearing) PTA is a departmental expenditure PTA used to accumulate specific costs as a means of expediting the processing of accounting transactions. Expenditure allocation PTAs are used when the final distribution of expenses is unknown at the time the expenses are incurred. Expenditure allocation PTAs are cleared via iJournals or Labor Distribution adjustments. Labor and material costs cannot be combined in the same expenditure allocation PTA. If labor and material expenses must be combined, the department should establish a service center PTA (see section 9). For related information, see AGM 3.2.3: Allocation and Offsets. Please refer to the DoResearch site for additional guidance on the use of expenditure allocation PTAs.

b. Authorization
Expenditure allocation PTAs must have the approval of the requesting department's Administrative Service Manager and an individual with financial authority over the guarantee PTA.

c. Source of Funds
The requesting department must identify and provide resources to guarantee the expenditure allocation PTA. Funds from sponsored awards may not be used as the guarantee. Guarantees generally come from unrestricted, gift, endowment income, or designated funds. The fund source will be used to guarantee any uncleared expenses at the end of the fiscal year.

d. Setting Up
When a department needs a new expenditure allocation PTA it requests Research Administration Policy and Compliance (RAPC) to set it up by submitting the Request For Expenditure Allocation PTA form. RAPC will review the allocation method(s) to be used by the account administrator and maintain records to support the establishment of the PTA.

Back to top

11. Receivables PTA

A department that administers a program such as a conference or professional journal sponsored by an organization outside the University must use a receivables PTA for expenses incurred on campus. Operating budgets, designated funds and restricted funds cannot be used for such activities. To open a receivables account, contact the Receivables Accounting section of the Controller's Office.

Back to top

12. Account Maintenance

Certain information gathered at the time the account is established may change over time. The information includes the Owner, Manager and Owning-Organization of the Project, Task and Award. This information is crucial to reporting on and analyzing financial activity and may impact authority and approvals. When a change occurs due to turnover or business reorganization the department must update PTA roles and owning, as described at Stanford's Gateway to Financial Activities

 

Back to top

3.1.4 Cost Policy

Last updated on:
06/15/2011
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
34.5

This Guide Memo outlines general policies on expense reimbursement by the federal government and discusses the importance of assigning the correct Project, Task and Award (PTA) and Expenditure Type to expenses and credits. For more detailed information, see Proper Coding of Allowable and Unallowable University Expenditures on the Gateway to Financial Activities website.  

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

1. Background

One-third of all funding for University expenditures comes from the federal government. Most of this funding comes in the form of direct support for sponsored projects, but a substantial portion comes in the form of reimbursement for indirect costs of federally sponsored grants and contracts. Stanford tracks whether University activities are allowable for reimbursement using the Project, Task and Award (PTA) to which transactions are charged, and tracks allowable and unallowable cost objects through the Expenditure Type used to record transactions.

Employees must pass ORA-1101: Cost Policy and FIN-0103: Approving Financial Transactions training in order to be granted signature authority in the Oracle Financial system. For more information visit Stanford's Gateway to Financial Activities.  

Back to top

2. Definitions

Direct Costs are expenses that can be identified specifically with a particular sponsored project or other direct cost objective, such as Auxiliary Activities or Instruction, or expenses that can be directly assigned to such activities relatively easily with a high degree of accuracy.

Example: cost of materials used on a project

Indirect Costs are those incurred for common or joint objectives and therefore cannot be identified readily with a particular sponsored project. Indirect costs are sometimes called Facility & Administrative (F&A) or overhead costs.

Example: costs of buildings or utilities

Back to top

3. General Rules

Rules for allowability are covered in the government document OMB Circular A-21 and federal regulations. In many cases, the issue of whether a particular cost is allowable is a complex one. When in doubt, consult with your local financial or research administrator, the Office of Sponsored Research or Research Financial Compliance and Services (RFCS). All unallowable activities and objects (line items) must be coded as such. In general, expenses are chargeable to the federal government only if they are:

  • Reasonable
    A prudent person would have purchased this item and paid this price.
  • Allocable
    Expenses can be allocated to the government activity based on benefit derived, cause and effect, or other equitable relationship.
  • Consistently Treated
    Like expenses must be treated the same in like circumstances.
  • Allowable
    Allowable for reimbursement as specified by government regulations.

If an expense cannot meet the above criteria, it is not eligible to be charged to a federal grant or contract no matter what its purpose.

Note: Agencies that sponsor grants and contracts use the term allowable to mean permitted as a direct cost under the terms of a specific grant or contract. Expenses that are generally allowable for federal reimbursement may not necessarily be permitted under the terms of a specific grant or contract.

Back to top

4. Unallowable Costs

Expenses that are unallowable for federal reimbursement as a direct or indirect cost may still be reasonable and necessary business expenses permitted by the University, as outlined in the Administrative Guide. Departments may incur these expenses, but they must be coded as unallowable so they can be readily identified and excluded from the indirect cost calculation. A detailed list of specifically unallowable activities (Tasks) and objects (Expenditure Types) is provided in the Cost Policy Tutorial

Back to top

3.1.5 Retention of Financial Records

Last updated on:
06/15/2012
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
34.4

This Guide Memo covers time requirements for retaining financial records and security requirements for disposing of old records.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

1. Purpose of Record Retention

Retaining records serves two purposes. In the short-term, it provides those responsible for the management of accounts with the means to monitor transactions and resolve problems. In the long-term, it enables the University to comply with Federal Acquisition Regulations, the Internal Revenue Service regulations, and other federal, state and local regulations governing auditability and retention of records.

Back to top

2. Responsibility

a. Online Transactions
When the source documentation for a transaction is online, the central administrative office responsible for maintaining the online application is responsible for retaining the online transaction record.

b. Paper Documents
When the source documentation for a transaction is paper, the office that receives the original document is responsible for retaining it. The submitting department is responsible for retaining the support until the transaction has posted to the monthly expenditure report. Originating departments have the responsibility to destroy any paper backup once central administration has successfully processed the reimbursement request, has a copy of the scanned supporting documentation and the transaction has posted to the monthly expenditure report.

Exceptions:
1) For Federal contracts, a copy of the original paper copy must be retained for one year past the date it was scanned;
2) either a paper copy or scanned copy of the monthly grant and contract expenditure statements or quarterly certification statement signed by the principal investigator and task manager should be retained by the department in accordance with the "Direct Charges and Revenues to Contracts and Grants" retention policy.

Back to top

3. Retention Times

a. Minimum Paper and Electronic Record Retention Times
Legal and Audit Requirements

When requirements for long-term retention of records overlap, the responsible office should retain records for the maximum period needed to meet legal and audit requirements. In special cases retention times may be extended by request of the central offices. In such a situation the affected will be notified in writing. General rules:

  • Tax-Exempt Debt Related Records: Life of the bond issue, plus the life of any issue that refunds the issue, plus six years. Records related to tax-exempt debt include but are not limited to documentation of the use of the debt proceeds (project costs), how debt financed property is used, relevant sponsored research contracts and grants in facilities financed with tax-exempt debt, relevant third party leases of space, etc. Detailed information can be found under the Compliance Guidelines for Tax-Exempt Bonds
  • Direct Charges and Revenues to Contracts and Grants: Four years following the end date of the award (longer if circumstances related to tax-exempt financing require it, see Tax-Exempt Debt Related Records above).
  • Transactions involving depreciable assets:
    • Moveable equipment records (not financed with tax-exempt debt) will becentrally retained three years beyond the disposal of the asset.
    • Transaction records involving other depreciable assets will be retained six years beyond the asset becoming fully depreciated (longer if circumstances related to tax-exempt financing require it, see Tax-Exempt Debt Related Records above.)
  • Business Transaction Records (not contract or grant-related): Four years.
  • Employee Payroll Information: Six years from retirement or termination.
  • Taxable Income (Cash receipt information and billings, and all documents for activities considered unrelated business income. See Guide Memo 1.5.3: Unrelated Business Activity). Four years following the end of the fiscal year. Longer retention times apply to certain documents retained by central offices. For information on a specific document or category of documents, the office responsible for the type of transaction should consult the Office of Sponsored Research (OSR), Research Financial Compliance and Services, or Financial Management Services (FMS) consisting of the Controller's Office, Office of the Treasurer, Procurement (including Accounts Payable, Travel & Reimbursements), Global Services, and Consulting & Support.

b. Management Information
When a central office has retention responsibility, the department initiating a transaction may discard copies of documentation supporting the transaction when it is no longer needed for management purposes. For example, when the transaction is complete and the expenditure statement containing the transaction has been reviewed. At its discretion, a department may keep copies of documents for longer periods.

Back to top

4. Disposal of Old Documents

To safeguard the privacy of individuals, documents that contain salary information must be shredded, incinerated, or otherwise disposed of securely. Departments may arrange for service from a business record destruction vendor.

Back to top

3.1.6 Charitable Donations by Stanford University to Other Charitable Organizations

Last updated on:
12/05/2014

This memo describes the limited circumstances when a charitable donation may be made by Stanford to an outside organization.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

1. Policy Statement

Stanford University is a non-profit public charity that receives its funds from sponsors, donors,  parents/students and others in furtherance of our educational, research and patient care missions. Accordingly, provision of University funds to other charitable institutions as donations is highly restricted. When considering support of another charitable organization, Stanford personnel should first consider whether the objective can be achieved through a contractual arrangement or other form of written understanding with the potential recipient institution, spelling out services and deliverables that align with Stanford’s purposes. In any case, such donations are limited to US charities. No donor funds or sponsor-restricted funds may be used in support of other charitable organizations.

Back to top

2. When Donations to Other Charitable Organizations Are Permissible

a. A donation may be made at the direction of the President, the Provost or the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

b. A donation may be made to the charity of family’s choice in the case of the death of an employee or a member of his/her immediate family, in lieu of customary flowers (Limit: $100).

c. Upon recommendation by a donor, a donation may be made from the portion of his/her donor-advised fund available for such designation. Recipient charities must be vetted by senior management of the Office of Development.

Back to top

3. Exceptions to Policy

Exceptions to the policy are rare. Requests for exception must be approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer. Requests should state:

a. How and over what period Stanford-provided funds would be spent by the intended recipient.
b. What  Stanford goals would be achieved by the donation.
c. Why such goals could not be achieved through any other form of relationship with the charity.
d. That the recipient will provide written acknowledgement of the funding, certify that the funds were used for Stanford’s intended purpose and detail what results were achieved.
e. A description of the intended recipient charity, proof of its tax-exempt status and a documented vetting of the charity.

Back to top

3.2.1 Authorizing Expenditures

Last updated on:
06/16/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
36

This Guide Memo describes responsibilities for the management of funds in University Projects, Tasks and Awards (PTAs).

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

1. Responsibility for University Funds

a. University Officers' Responsibility
The Board of Trustees has delegated to deans, department chairs, directors, principal investigators and other University officers the responsibility for management of funds in their PTAs. See Guide Memo 1.2.1: University Organization. These officers have the authority to expend these funds to accomplish their assigned responsibilities, and are responsible for assuring that expenditures charged to their PTAs are:

  • Reasonable and necessary
  • Consistent with established University policies and practices applicable to the work of the University, including instruction, research, and public service
  • Consistent with sponsor or donor expenditure restrictions

For more information on cost policy, see Guide Memo 3.1.4: Cost Policy.

b. Delegation of Authority
Authority to sign expenditure documents for the purchase of services and materials on a PTA may be delegated and the University officer may authorize the person to whom authority is delegated to further delegate signature authority. The University officer retains accountability for prudent control of the PTA. The University officer may place limits on the dollar level and the types of expenditures for which signature authority is delegated. For more information, see the Financial Authority section of the Gateway to Financial Activities website. 

Back to top

2. Authorization Procedures

a. Training
To be granted signature authority in the Oracle Financial system, employees must complete required training, ORA-1101: Cost Policy and FIN-0103: Approving Financial Transactions. For more information, see the Overview: About Financial Authority At Stanford

b. Delegation of Signature Authority
(1) University Officers
A letter from University officers indicating the organization for which they are responsible and the administrator to whom they have delegated the ability to manage authority must be on file in the Controller's Office.
(2) Delegation of Signature Authority
To delegate authority for both electronic and paper form transactions, the person responsible for the organization or PTA must delegate such authority via the Authority Manager.

c. Electronic Signature
Users of campus financial systems identify themselves to these systems using approved, secure authentication methods. See Guide Memo 6.4.1: Identification and Authentication Systems, for details on these methods. In addition to these system-independent authentication methods, financial systems may have system-specific authentication methods (e.g., a username and password for a particular system). Regardless of the authentication method, authentication using any of the approved methods is the electronic equivalent of an employee's hand-written signature, and may be used as an "electronic signature" in electronic applications.

d. Signature Security
Only the person to whom authority is delegated may authorize a transaction either manually or electronically. Disciplinary steps will be taken against individuals who are found to have fraudulently signed the name of another person, used the authentication information of another person, or divulged their authentication information to another person. The possible disciplinary actions for violations, which can include termination of employment or student status, will depend on the facts and circumstances of each case. User responsibilities for handling authentication information are described in Guide Memo 6.4.1: Identification and Authentication Systems.

e. Limitations on Signature Authority
(1) Expense Reimbursement
No person may approve his or her own expense reimbursement, or the expense reimbursement of an individual to whom he or she reports either directly or indirectly. Expense reimbursements, which require two signatures, must have the signatures of the person incurring the expense and the person responsible for the management of the PTA or a properly delegated agent.
(2) Independent Review
Business expenses incurred by or on behalf of the President, the Provost, a direct report to the President or the Provost, or the senior financial officer of the academic units must be approved by an independent reviewer designated by the CFO. Expenses for ordinary supplies, customarily available for all employees in an office, should be approved by a local business officer and need not be routed for independent review.
(3) Salaries
No person may sign any payroll/personnel form that affects his or her own salary, or payroll/personnel forms that affect the salary of an individual to whom he or she reports either directly or indirectly.
(4) Conflict of Interest
No person may authorize payment to any individual or business where there is a conflict of interest. See Guide Memo 1.5.2: Staff Policy on Conflict of Commitment and Interest.

f. Revoking Signature Authority

The University officer who delegated authority (or the person who currently holds that position) is responsible to ensure granted authority reflects the unit's current needs. When a person with signature authority transfers to another department or leaves the University, his/her authority is automatically revoked. Changes for other operational reasons can be made at any time through the Authority Manager. For more information, see Quick Steps: Grant, Change, Revoke or Restore Financial Authority to Others. 

Back to top

3. Review and Error Correction

a. Departmental Review
The deans, department chairs, directors, principal investigators and other University officers to whom funds are allocated are responsible for reviewing their expense transactions and monthly expenditure/operating statements to assure that:

  • Any expenditure is necessary and for University purposes.
  • Charges are correct.
  • Charges are allowable for the PTA.
  • Charges are correctly coded as allowable or unallowable for inclusion in the University's indirect cost rate calculations.
  • Charges are allocable to the PTA.
  • Any allocation of costs is reasonable and equitable.
  • Charges are appropriately documented, and are recorded in a consistent manner within departmental accounts.

b. Evidence of Review
Review of transactions is evidenced by a manual or electronic signature in the appropriate field of the form.

c. Responsibility for Error Correction
The department is responsible for correction of errors. Time limits for error correction are outlined in Guide Memo 3.2.2: Cost Transfers, and the Research Policy Handbook 15.3,  Cost Sharing Policy. Occasionally errors are found after the regular time limits for correction. Regardless of when the error is found, the University officer whose PTA used the good or service must pay for it, either from the same or another appropriate PTA.

d. Central Office Review
To supplement (but not replace) the University officer's basic review responsibility, Financial Management Services (including Procurement and the Controller's Office) and the Office of Sponsored Research review University selected expense transactions. If incorrect or improper charges are found, the reviewing office directs the person responsible for the expenditures to correct the error. If necessary, the reviewing office may correct the department's error and will provide the department with a copy of the accounting entry.

Back to top

4. Expenditures of Restricted Funds

a. Conformity to External Restrictions
Expenditures of restricted funds, such as organized research or gift funds, whether from federal or non-federal sources, must conform to any limitations or exclusions set forth in the agreement or gift document. Expenditures of funds for federally sponsored projects are subject to the allowability, allocability, and reasonableness standards of the Office of Management and Budget (OMB) Circular A-21, Cost Principles for Educational Institutions, and to negotiated agreements between the University and the federal government. Cost-sharing tasks are subject to the same standards as the sponsored project that they support.

b. Monthly Review of Charges
For sponsored projects and related cost-sharing tasks, the expenditure statements must be reviewed each month, as noted in Guide Memo 3.1.3: Expenditure Accounts (PTA). The review should include areas such as those covered by the Monthly Review Guidance and Monthly Reconciliation tools. The review is evidenced by a signature on the monthly expenditure statement. The review must be completed within two months of the end of the month of the statement (e.g., October expenditures must be reviewed no later than December 31).

c. Quarterly Certification of Charges
The following certification of direct costs is preprinted on expenditure statements for sponsored projects and cost-sharing tasks each month:


"TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEDGE, SALARY AND WAGES CHARGED TO THIS PROJECT ARE APPROPRIATE IN RELATION TO WORK PERFORMED ON THIS PROJECT. ALL OTHER COSTS CHARGED TO THIS PROJECT ARE, TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEDGE, APPROPRIATE. WHERE REQUIRED, CORRECTIONS HAVE BEEN OR WILL BE MADE THROUGH THE ACCOUNTING SYSTEM.PRINCIPAL INVESTIGATOR'S
Signature___________________________Date_____________"

This certification statement must be signed by the principal investigator. Quarterly certification is the responsibility of the project Principal Investigator (or Co-PI). A PI may delegate the monthly review of statements for accuracy, but may not delegate certification of the appropriateness of the charges. Only the last expenditure statement for the academic quarter must be signed by the principal investigator. The quarterly certification must be completed within two months of the end of the academic quarter being certified, as described in the Monthly Review and Quarterly PI Review Certification. This signature means that the principal investigator has reviewed all direct charges to the project and that either the charges on the expenditure statement are reasonably accurate as shown, or that the appropriate individual in the department has initiated accounting entries to correct any differences. Review and correction of differences must be completed within the deadlines outlined on the DoResearch site.

d. Record Retention
The certified expenditure statements must be retained in the department files for future review by government and University auditors in accordance with University record retention requirements for sponsored projects (see Guide Memo 3.1.5: Retention of Financial Records.

Back to top

5. Sources for More Information

Cognizant Office
Financial Management Services (including Procurement and the Controller's Office) and the Research Financial Compliance and Services (RFCS) Office are available to answer questions about expenditure authorization. For contact information, see the Gateway to Financial Activities website or the DoResearch website.  

Back to top

3.2.2 Cost Transfers

Last updated on:
06/15/2009
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
38

This Guide Memo sets out policies and procedures for transferring already incurred costs from one expenditure account (Project-Task-Award) to another. Cost transfers may also be called transfers of expense.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to all Stanford employees responsible for accounting transactions.

1. Cost Transfer Policies

A cost transfer is an after-the-fact reallocation of the cost associated with a transaction from one Project-Task-Award (PTA) to another. Although costs should always be charged to the correct PTA, cost transfers are sometimes necessary. To be allowable, cost transfers must be timely, be fully documented, conform to University and sponsor allowability standards (that is, allowable under the terms of the sponsored agreement), and have appropriate authorizing signatures. See Guide Memo 3.2.1: Authorizing Expenditures.

a. Error Correction
Correction of errors is required on all PTAs. Errors may include clerical errors (such as typographical errors or transposition of digits in the PTA and expenditure types). Other errors may be detected upon review or certification of monthly expenditure reports. It may be that an employee's Labor Schedule was not updated, an individual's effort was redirected, or a purchase was charged to a PTA other than the one that ultimately benefited from the use of the items purchased. All errors should be corrected as soon as they are detected.

b. Active Sponsored Project PTAs
Refer to Understanding Cost Policy in the Research Policy Handbook. In addition to deadlines, it addresses:

  • Documentation
  • Sponsor requirements
  • Pre-award costs
  • Costs benefiting more than one project
  • Overdrafts

c. Documentation
Online cost transfer documentation must clearly show:

  • The expense directly benefits the receiving PTA
  • The expense is allowable on the receiving PTA
  • The reason the expense was charged incorrectly to the first PTA
  • That any systematic reasons which might cause this problem to be repeated have been addressed
  • The reason for any delay in the timely processing of the transfer

d. Cost Transfer Deadlines
Cost transfers should be prepared and submitted as soon as the need for a transfer is identified, and should be completed no later than six months after the cost is posted. Transfers submitted after the deadline must include a valid reason for the delay, and will generally not be allowed to be transferred onto a sponsored project. When transfers are delayed, a correction to the original source of an entry (e.g., an update to a Labor Schedule) may not be made timely. Therefore, care should also be taken to ensure that subsequent charges are either appropriate to the original PTA or also transferred.

Back to top

2. Cost Transfer Procedures

a. Getting Started
Cost transfers are submitted using the University's online Oracle Financials system iJournals and Labor Distribution modules. Information about accessing and using the Oracle iJournals and Labor Distribution modules are available from the Month-End/Year-End Close section of the Gateway to Financial Activities web site.

  • New iJournals are used to transfer all costs with the exception of salary or student aid expenses that were originally posted on or after September 1, 2003
  • Historical iJournals are used to transfer any expenses (including salary and student aid expenses) that were originally posted before September 1, 2003
  • Salary iJournals are used to transfer salary expenses originally incurred (determined by the expenditure item date) on or after September 1, 2003 and before April 1, 2005.
  • Labor Distribution Adjustments are used to transfer salary expenses originally incurred after March 31, 2005
  • Allocation iJournals are used to distribute costs based on proportional benefit to a project. Allocations are used when it is difficult to determine in advance how much to charge each PTA for a shared supply or service. Allocations are often used to distribute costs from Service Centers, Auxiliaries, or expenditure allocation PTAs. Often allocations are repetitive, or are required on a repetitive basis.

b. Identification Needed
All users of the University's online financial system must have a SUNetID and password. Approvers must also have:
(1) Been given authority in the "Stanford Authority Manager" and
(2) Passed the online test in the Cost Policy and Chart of Accounts class with 100%.  See Guide Memo 3.2.1: Authorizing Expenditures, for additional information.
Users of the Labor Distribution Adjustments module must also be granted access through the "Stanford Authority Manager," complete training and sign a confidentiality agreement. See Getting Access to Labor Distribution Module of Oracle Financials System

c. Signatures
Online signature of the person responsible for approving the Project-Task/Award to be debited is required for most iJournal types. Online signature for the Project-Task/Award to be credited is required for Allocation iJournals. In all cases, the department initiating the transfer should make sure all individuals responsible for affected PTAs are informed of the entry.

Back to top

3.2.3 Allocations and Offsets

Last updated on:
03/15/2008
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
38.1

This Guide Memo sets out policies and procedures for expense allocations and salary distribution offsets, which are a form of cost transfer.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to all Stanford employees responsible for accounting transactions.

1. Expense Allocation Policies

An expense allocation is a method that enables apportionment of a particular expense or expenses to Projects-Tasks-Awards (PTAs) that specifically benefit from those charges. Allocations are used in situations where it is difficult to determine in advance how much to charge each PTA for a shared supply or service. They are used to distribute expenses to PTAs receiving the benefit of the good or service. Allocations are often used to distribute costs from expenditure allocation PTAs (formerly knows as "clearing accounts") or service centers. They may also be used to distribute costs between benefiting PTAs when a purchase was originally charged to one PTA and one or more other PTAs also benefited from the purchase. Allocations are also used to distribute charges from independent systems (known as "feeders") into the financial system. Often allocations are repetitive or are required on a regular basis.

a. Expenditure Allocation PTA Definition
An expenditure allocation PTA, as described in Guide Memo 3.1.3: Expenditure Accounts (PTAs) is a special PTA in which charges for materials, supplies, services, or salaries are accumulated, and then allocated each month to PTAs receiving the benefit of the good or service. Salary and material costs cannot be combined in the same expenditure allocation PTA. If salary and material expenses must be combined, a service center must be used. Sponsored project PTAs may not be used as expenditure allocation PTAs.

b. Allocation Basis
The basis of allocation/distribution (e.g., effort, square footage, headcount) must logically relate to the type of costs being allocated. It must produce an allocation to each activity/account in reasonable proportion to the benefits received. The allocation methodology must produce a result that is allowable, allocable, reasonable and consistent. Feeder systems typically charge other departments based on usage or services provided at specified rates. Administrative expenses may not be distributed or rotated among sponsored agreements. Departments shall not use any type of pooled allocation method to charge expenses to federal sponsored agreements except from a service center with approved rates, or as described in the Research Policy Handbook. Training is provided in the Understanding Cost Policy class.

c. Documentation
Online expense allocation documentation must clearly show the nature of the cost being allocated. The originator of the journal must include comments about the distribution basis in the online documentation and retain documentation of the allocation methodology and calculation resultsin accordance with the government and University's record retention requirements. Feeder systems track the charges and maintain documentation in their own systems.

d. Approvals
Before an allocation journal or feeder is submitted to the financial system, the department processing the journal/feeder must have received approval from an authorized individual for each PTA charged. Certain feeder transactions, such as utility charges, are approved implicitly as part of the annual budget process. Approval for other allocations and feeders can be a "blanket" approval for regular ongoing costs allocated in a consistent manner. Approval can be evidenced in writing in a memo, on a request form (e.g., SU-13 or similar form) or via electronic means. The department originating the journal/feeder must maintain documentation of written approval. For allocation journals, written approval must be on file from individuals with signature authority over the PTAs being charged, while online approval is required for the PTA or Project-Fund-Object being credited. The originator of the journal attests to the following when creating the allocation journal:

  • This allocation is being processed in accordance with policy
  • The cost is an appropriate charge to the PTAs sharing the expense
  • The PTA actually benefited from the cost of the goods and services
  • The transaction is documented according to policy

Feeder transactions are not routed for online approval, nor does the originator make the above attestation in the financial system. The ability to act as a feeder into the financial system is granted by the Controller's Office with the understanding that the transactions follow University policy. Feeder owners must sign an annual attestation that they understand and accept their responsibilities and have followed the policies, and must pass Cost Policy Training as described in Guide Memos 3.1.4: Cost Policy, and 3.2.1: Authorizing Expenditures.

e. Deadlines
Allocation journals should be prepared and submitted before the end of the month following the month the expense was posted.
Example: A cost that appears on an expenditure allocation PTA's March expenditure or operating statement should be allocated to the PTAs that benefited from the service by the last working day in April. Allocations submitted after the deadlines must include a valid reason for the delay.

Back to top

2. Salary Distribution Offset Policies

The federal government and some nongovernment sponsors require that the University charge salaries and wages to sponsored projects as they are earned. However, many faculty members who are on 9-, 10-, or 11-month appointments choose to have a reduced salary amount paid over all 12 months of the year. To correctly charge sponsored project PTAs or the related cost sharing PTAs in such situations, departments may use the Labor Distribution Schedule method or the Salary Distribution Offset method. The Labor Distribution Schedule method is preferred, as it requires fewer accounting transactions to accomplish the result. In the employee's Oracle Labor Distribution Schedule sponsored or cost sharing PTAs are charged the appropriate percentage of the faculty member's 9-month salary (subject to any regulatory caps) for the academic period. The remainder of the amount to be PAID over 12 months is charged to an operating budget or other unrestricted PTA. For templates to aid in the calculation, see Faculty Labor Distribution Entry Templates.  When following the Salary Distribution Offset (using after-the-fact Labor Distribution Adjustments for salary expenses originally incurred after March 31, 2005, or Salary Journals for salary expenses originally incurred before April 1, 2005) method the department must:

  • Charge the faculty member's entire salary to the operating budget PTA paying for the nonresearch portion of salary. (For more information on payroll processing see Guide Memo 2.2.3: University Payroll, and Faculty Specific Payroll Administration
  • Record a transfer to allocate the amount of earned salary to the sponsored project(s).
    The salary actually paid will show as a charge on the expenditure detail report for the operating budget PTA. The salary earned will show as a charge on the sponsored project expenditure detail report and as a credit on the operating budget expenditure detail report.

a. Approvals
Online signature of the person responsible for the PTA to be debited is required. Signature for the PTA to be credited is not required.

b. Deadlines
Salary Distribution Offset transfers should be prepared and submitted in the month the salary is earned.
Example: Salary earned during April should be recorded during April.
A Salary Distribution Offset transfer submitted after the deadline must include a valid reason for the delay.

Back to top

3. Allocation and Offset Procedures

a. Getting Started
Allocations and offsets, including feeders, are submitted using iJournals or Labor Distribution Adjustments in the University's online financial system. Guidance on using the University's online accounting system, including procedures for using Allocation and Salary Journals, Uploads, Templates, and Labor Distribution Adjustments, is available from the Month-End/Year-End Close section of the Gateway to Financial Activities website.

b. Nonsalary Charges
Allocations from expenditure allocation PTAs, service centers or other PTAs may be made by the following methods:

  • Allocation Journals are used for submitting a new allocation, a transaction containing repetitive transfers where charges have been previously authorized. Journal transactions entered using this form are limited to non-salary/student-aid expenditure types.
  • Allocation Templates may be set up to save time in processing repetitive allocations each month.
  • Upload Allocation and Feeder Journals may be used to upload an allocation created in another system.

c. Salary Charges
Allocations from expenditure allocation PTAs or offsets are made by using a Labor Distribution Adjustment or a Salary Journal. See Guide Memo 3.2.2: Cost Transfers, for further guidance.

d. Identification Needed
All users of the University's online financial system must have a SUNet ID and password. Approvers must also have received appropriate delegated authority through the Authority Manager system (tutorial available online here) and passed the online test in the Cost Policy and Chart of Accounts class with 100% (available online here).  See Guide Memo 3.2.1: Authorizing Expenditures.

e. Review
To ensure compliance with this Guide Memo, the Office of Sponsored Research will periodically sample and review the supporting documentation. Originators may contact the Office of Sponsored Research for further guidance, see the DoResearch website.

Back to top

3.3.1 Infrastructure Charges

Last updated on:
06/15/2009
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
37.3

The Board of Trustees of Stanford University approved a revised infrastructure policy in October 2004. The revised policy, effective September 1, 2005, increases the infrastructure charge (ISC) from 6% to 8% for both new and existing funds. For designated funds, the infrastructure charge will be applied at the time funds are received from all external revenue sources. For restricted funds (expendable gift funds, endowment income funds and sponsored project funds that carry an F&A rate of 0%), the infrastructure charge will be applied at the time funds are expended or transferred.

Gifts for building projects are exempt from the infrastructure charge. The infrastructure charge collected from funds owned by non formula schools will be credited75% to a central University PFOO (project/fund/object code/org code) (controlled by the budget office) and 25% to a central PFOO owned by the budget unit involved in the transaction. The infrastructure charge collected from funds owned by formula schools and auxiliaries will be credited directly to a central PFOO belonging to the formula school or auxiliary.

Any exceptions to the policy require approval of both the Provost and the CFO and are to occur rarely, if at all.

Authority: 

Approved by the Provost and the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer (CFO).

Applicability: 

This policy applies to restricted funds and designated funds effective September 1, 2005.

1. Purpose

If Stanford is to maintain long-term financial stability, restricted and designated funds must contribute to the cost of the University's infrastructure. Activities supported by designated and restricted funds represent a significant percentage of the University's total activity. General funds, alone, cannot bear the full burden of the infrastructure and administrative costs required to support these activities. The purpose of this policy is to recover a portion of these costs.

Back to top

2. Assessment on Designated Revenue

The infrastructure charge is applied to all external designated revenue at the time it is received. Once the designated revenue is deposited in a fund, no infrastructure charge will be applied to either expenditures against the fund or transfers out of the fund.

Back to top

3. Assessment on Restricted Expendable Funds (Gifts)

The infrastructure charge is applied at the time the funds are expended or transferred. All expenditure types are subject to the charge.

Back to top

4. Assessment on Restricted Endowment Income

The infrastructure charge is applied at the time the funds are expended or transferred. Endowment funds whose purpose is restricted by the donor to academic-year tenure line salaries (professorships), undergraduate and graduate student financial aid, or undergraduate research opportunities are not subject to the infrastructure charge. Restricted endowments that are not specifically restricted to these purposes but are used to support these activities will incur the charge.

Back to top

5. Assessment on Sponsored Projects

Sponsored project awards that carry an F&A rate (indirect cost rate) of 0% are subject to the infrastructure charge as follows:

a. Sponsored project awards with start dates prior to September 1, 2005, are subject to the previous infrastructure policy and rate of 6%. Sponsored project awards with start dates on or afterSeptember 1, 2005, are subject to the revised policy unless they meet the exception in 5.d (2) below.

b. Sponsored project awards made in response to proposals submitted using the previous infrastructure policy and rate of 6% will be subject to the previous policy and rate until the end of their competitive segment. A new competitive segment will be subject to the revised infrastructure policy.

c. Proposals submitted on or after September 1, 2005, are subject to the revised infrastructure policy.

d. The revised infrastructure policy applies to sponsored projects as follows:
(1) No sponsored project award is assessed the infrastructure charge if the award is already paying indirect costs (IDC). Awards paying less than 8% indirect costs are not charged ISC but instead are charged their applicable IDC rates.
(2) The infrastructure charge is assessed on non-government sponsored project awards and awards sponsored by foreign governments. U.S. Government awards (federal, state and local government agencies) are excluded from infrastructure.
(3) The infrastructure charge is automatically exempted, but not waived (an alternate PTA must be provided by the principal investigator/ department to pay the infrastructure charge) on all non-government and foreign government awards where the sponsor has a written policy stating it does not pay indirects and the sponsor/program is on OSR's (Office of Sponsored Research) pre-approved IDC waiver list. A request to exempt the award from the infrastructure charge is not required.

For all other sponsors who will not pay indirect costs, a request to exempt the award from the infrastructure charge must be submitted and approved by the Provost and the CFO before an institutional official approves the proposal for submission to the funding agency.

e. All cost-sharing is exempt.

f. Institutional allowances for federally-sponsored projects are exempt.

Back to top

6. Exceptions to the Policy

Any exceptions to the policy require approval of both the Provost and the CFO and are to occur rarely, if at all. If a donor/sponsor will not allow the infrastructure charge to be applied to a restricted fund, then either the gift/award will have to be refused or the Provost and the CFO may grant an exemption. If an exemption is granted, then the unit receiving the funds must identify an alternative source of funding to pay the infrastructure charge. To request an exemption, complete the "Request for Infrastructure Exemption" form, following the guidelines posted with the form. 

Back to top

7. ISC Implementation Guide

The ISC Implementation Guide provides additional detail about how the revised ISC policy is implemented. The guide can be found at the DoResearch website.  

Back to top

8. Additional Sources of Information

A list of expenditure types subject to infrastructure can be found on the Burden Expenditure Type Mapping Schedule.

For sponsored project awards subject to the previous infrastructure policy, the prior implementation guideline can be found here.

For policy clarification contact appropriate members of the Budget Office, Controller's Office Fund Accounting or Office of Sponsored Research described at the DoResearch website.

Back to top

3.3.2 Expendable Funds Investment and Payout

Last updated on:
08/30/2012
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
37.4

The policy became effective September 1, 2009 (FY 2010).

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

1. Background

Expendable Funds include all University funds that are not endowment funds. They represent a significant component of University investment capital and had an average total balance of $3.1 billion in FY2011. Expendable Funds include a diverse collection of approximately 15,000 separate funds including several different types of funds:

  • Endowment Income Funds: Unexpended payout from pure endowment funds and funds functioning as endowment ("FFE").
  • Recycling Pool: Proceeds from internal debt amortization available to lend to projects.
  • Insurance and Benefit Program Reserves: Reserves held for claims within self-insurance programs.
  • Student Loan Funds: Funds available to lend for student loans.
  • Plant Funds: Gifts designated for facilities, not yet expended.
  • Agency Funds: Funds held by Stanford University on behalf of third parties (e.g., Stanford Health Care, Lucile Packard Children's Hospital).
  • Gifts Pending Designation: Gift funds received for which the purpose has not yet been designated and which are not invested in the Merged Pool.
  • Restricted Funds: Gifts or other restricted expendable funds not yet expended.
  • Designated Funds: Funds designated for a specific school, department, faculty or purpose, not yet expended.
  • Unrestricted Funds: University, school, department, auxiliary or faculty funds held in reserve or pending expenditure.

Back to top

2. Expendable Funds Investment Policy

a. Endowment Income Funds
Endowment Income Funds holding unspent prior years' payout from pure endowments (but not from FFE) will have that payout invested in the "Endowment Income Funds Pool (EIFP)." One hundred percent of the assets in the EIFP are to be invested by Stanford Management Company (SMC) in cash vehicles.1

b. Expendable Funds Pool
All other Expendable Funds will be invested in a single, merged investment pool, the "Expendable Funds Pool" ("EFP"). A minimum of approximately $100 million of the EFP is to be invested by SMC in cash vehicles, rebalanced periodically at the discretion of the Chief Financial Officer and the Treasurer's Office. A higher minimum target level for cash vehicles may be established by the University's President or Chief Financial Officer as deemed appropriate. The remainder of the EFP is to be cross-invested in the Merged Pool ("MP"). 2

Back to top

3. Expendable Funds Interest Allocation Policy

a. Endowment Income Funds
Each endowment income fund holding unspent prior years' payout on pure endowments will receive an allocation equal to the return on cash vehicles, less any management expenses.

b. Money-Market Accounts
The following types of Expendable Funds will be treated as "Money-Market Accounts" and will receive an allocation equal to the return on cash vehicles, less any management expenses:

  • Recycling Pool
  • Insurance and Benefit Program Reserves
  • Student Loan Funds
  • Plant Funds, only for gift funds exceeding $1 million
  • Agency Funds
  • Gifts Pending Designation, excluding class gift funds and donor funds of less than $100,000
  • Restricted Funds, only when stipulated by donor requirement

c. Zero-Interest Accounts
All other Expendable Funds will be treated as "Zero-Interest Accounts" and receive no allocation to the individual fund.

Back to top

4. General Funds Interest Allocation Policy

Each of the Provost’s General Fund, School of Medicine (“SoM”) Dean’s Unrestricted Fund and Graduate School of Business (“GSB”) Dean’s Unrestricted Fund will receive an allocation related to the zero-interest account balances.

  • SoM Dean's Unrestricted Fund will receive an allocation related to zero-interest account balances controlled by the SoM Dean's office, departments and faculty.
  • GSB Dean's Unrestricted Fund will receive an allocation related to zero-interest account balances controlled by the GSB dean's office, departments and faculty.
  • Provost's General Fund will receive an allocation related to all other zero-interest account balances.

The allocation shall vary between 0% and 5.5% of the zero-interest account average monthly balances during the prior fiscal year:

  • The allocation shall be 0% if the prior year's return of the EFP is less than or equal to 0%
  • The allocation shall be 5.5% if the prior year's return of the EFP is greater than or equal to 5.5%
  • The allocation shall be equal to the prior year's return of the EFP if the actual return is greater than 0% and less than 5.5%

To the extent the allocation on zero-interest account balances is less than 5.5% in any year, the Provost and Deans may, at their individual discretion, elect to offset the shortfall by reducing an equivalent amount of the contribution in that year from general funds and deans' funds to the Capital Facilities Fund ("CFF").

Back to top

5. Buffer Policy

The total allocation to Money-Market Accounts, General Fund and Dean's Unrestricted Funds will differ from the investment returns of the EFP. These differences will be buffered by the "Tier I Buffer" and the "Tier II Buffer."

  • The Tier I Buffer is a group of unrestricted FFE funds. These funds are fully invested in the MP and receive a regular MP-based payout used to support Provost's General Fund.
  • The Tier II Buffer is a single unrestricted FFE fund. This fund is also fully invested in the MP, and it receives a regular MP-based payout that is distributed at the President's discretion ("President's Funds"). In addition, the President is authorized to withdraw up to $30 million in principal each year to be used at his/her discretion.

To the extent there is a shortfall in EFP investment returns relative to stipulated allocations, principal will be withdrawn from the Tier I and Tier II Buffers to make up such shortfall, as follows:

  • First, from the Tier I Buffer up to a limit of 20% of the year-end value of the Tier I Buffer in any fiscal year
  • Second, from the Tier II Buffer until fully depleted
  • Third, from the remainder of the Tier I Buffer

To the extent there is a surplus of EFP investment returns relative to stipulated allocations, excess returns will be added to the Tier I and Tier II Buffers as follows:

  • First, to the Tier I Buffer until such time as the value of the Tier I Buffer, in total, equals 35% of the total value of the EFP ("the target threshold")
  • Second, to the Tier II Buffer

Back to top

6. Annual Trustee Review

Once each year, the Trustee Committee on Finance will review the status of the EFP, including fund balances, asset allocation, investment returns, payout and buffer balances.

Back to top

Footnote(s): 

1 Cash vehicles may include cash, money market funds rated Aaa by Moody's or AAA by Standard and Poors, primary US government and Aaa/AAA rated agency securities with maturities ranging from 1 to 30 years that can liquidate on a same-day cash basis, bank deposits, other investment vehicles that have strong liquidity characteristics, and security repurchase agreements.

2 There are some de minimus historical investments outside of the Merged Pool.

3.4.1 Revenue Recognition

Last updated on:
12/15/2008
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
39

This Guide Memo describes revenue recognition policy.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to auxiliaries, service centers and sponsored research.

1. Revenue Recognition

Revenue recognition should be based on accrual accounting in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP). Revenues should be recognized when earned, and expenses should be recognized when incurred. Revenue is considered earned when the University has substantially met its obligation to be entitled to the benefits represented by the revenue. Revenue should be recorded when earned, regardless of the timing of cash receipts. In the event a project stipulates performance measures, revenue is considered earned when the performance measures have been completed. Deposits (whether refundable or non-refundable), early payments and progress payments should not be recognized as revenue until the revenue producing event has occurred.

Back to top

2. Sources of More Information

More information about revenue recognition for auxiliaries, service centers and sponsored research is available on the Gateway to Financial Activities website:

Revenue Recognition - Auxiliaries and Service Centers
http://fingate.stanford.edu/staff/fundsmgmt/policy_notes/rev_recog_aux_serv_ctr.html

Revenue Recognition - Sponsored Research
http://fingate.stanford.edu/staff/fundsmgmt/policy_notes/rev_recog_sponsor_research.html

Back to top

3.4.2 Card and Payment Account Acceptance and Processing

Last updated on:
06/23/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
84

This policy provides guidelines on acceptance and processing of credit and debit card, account number, or third party account numbers at Stanford.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs & Chief Financial Officer.

Applicability: 

Applies to all Stanford entities that accept payments via credit or debit card accounts or financial account numbers or third party account numbers either directly into a Stanford owned merchant account; or indirectly where a third party company accepts card or payment account payments on behalf of the University and then remits payment to a Stanford owned bank account. Section 5 of this policy applies to all third-party vendors or service providers that conduct business at Stanford.

1. Definition

The term "card or payment account" as used in this policy includes the use of credit or debit card accounts or account numbers (such as a bank account) or third party account numbers (such as a PayPal or Google accounts). For purposes of this policy, card or payment account acceptance and processing is defined as using any application or device for accepting a card or payment account as payment for goods or services sold by a Stanford University entity. This policy does not apply to the Stanford Card Plan, Cardinal Dollars or to the University's PCard or Travel credit card programs.

Back to top

2. Purpose

A card or payment account provides a convenient way to handle business transactions such as conference registration, the purchase of course materials, or the purchase of meals at a campus dining facility. In order to accept card or payment account payments it is the University's best interest that the acceptance and processing is compliant with Payment Card Industry Data Security Standards for safeguarding card numbers, account numbers, and other prohibited or restricted data as listed in Administrative Guide Memo 6.3.1: Information Security. In addition, funds from payments must be securely transferred to the University's financial systems. This policy is to establish guidelines for card or payment account acceptance and processing.

Back to top

3. Policy

a. Relation to University Mission
Any use of card or payment account acceptance and processing methods at Stanford must be consistent with Administrative Guide Memo 1.5.3, Unrelated Business Activity, which prohibits the use of Stanford resources for any activity not related to the University's mission.

b. Authorized Vendors and Service Providers
Departments must use a Stanford authorized payment application, payment mechanism, point of sale terminal hardware vendor (if applicable). These are listed at http://treasurer.stanford.edu/merchants/.

A service provider that stores, processes, or transmits cardholder data on behalf of the University must be validated as a Level 1 service provider by a Qualified Security Assessor (QSA) and listed on Visa’s Global Registry of Service Providers. The company listing must be current and the service being provided to the University must match the service listed on Visa’s website.

A company providing a service that can affect the security of an eCommerce transaction (eTransaction) must be validated by a QSA as a service provider and the service being provided to the University must match the services validated as compliant during the QSA assessment.

c. University Card and Payment Account User Agreement
Departments wishing to engage in accepting card or payment accounts for the sale of goods or services must obtain approval from the Office of the Treasurer and comply with all terms of the University's Card and Payment Account User Agreement.

d. Information Security
Card and payment account numbers are classified as Prohibited Data. Departments must comply with Administrative Guide Memo 6.3.1: Information Security, and safeguard the confidentiality of Prohibited Data related to purchases of goods or services. They may not store any Prohibited card or payment account information. They must only use equipment authorized by the Office of the Treasurer to process payment information and are required to use secure and approved, or PCI DSS certified, encrypted connections to transmit payment information.

e. For departments operating electronic commerce websites:
(1) Departments must post a privacy policy on their website that is approved by the University Privacy Officer or the Office of the General Counsel. Vendors and/or Service Providers who independently collect card or third party account information must have privacy and terms of use policies on their websites. These policies must conform to applicable federal and state laws, as well as the University's privacy policies.
(2) Third-party advertising is not allowed on any web pages which are hosted on the stanford.edu domain, or which use Stanford's name or emblems. Exceptions to this policy may be granted by the Vice President for Business Affairs and CFO. Advertising does not include mentioning the name of third parties that are co-sponsoring events with Stanford.

Back to top

4. Implementation Guidelines

a. Departments accepting card or payment accounts are responsible for complying with Payment Card Industry Data Security Standards (PCI DSS) and all card brand rules and regulations if applicable, or using secure standard financial industry practices, if PCI DSS standards are not applicable.

b. Information about requesting a merchant account for payment acceptance is available at the Office of the Treasurer's website. Departments must work with representatives from the Treasurer's Office and the Procurement Office to establish and manage card and payment account acceptance and processing.

Back to top

5. Third Party Vendors/Service Providers Operating on Stanford's Campus

Third party vendors and service providers operating on Stanford's campus must handle data and other information generated from financial transactions involving the Stanford community ("Data") according to the Third Party Security Requirements listed on the Information Security Office’s website.

Back to top

6. Sources of More Information

Back to top

3.4.3 Student Billing

Last updated on:
06/15/2011
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
34.6

To define the categories of fees and charges to the University's student billing and how items are added.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs & Chief Financial Officer and the Vice Provost for Budget & Auxiliaries Management

Applicability: 

All matriculated students including undergraduate, graduate, and the professional schools of Law, Medical, and Graduate School of Business.

Responsibility: 

The Board of Trustees sets tuition, room and board rates. See section 2.a(2) of Guide Memo 3.1.2: University Funds.

The Vice Provost for Budget & Auxiliaries Management approves the Health Insurance, Campus Health Service Fee, Telecommunications Fee, and the Document Fees.

ASSU fees are approved by the Vice Provost for Student Affairs on behalf of the President.

All other fee categories are approved by the Student Financial Policy Advisory Committee. Members of the Student Financial Policy Advisory Committee include the Senior Associate Vice President for Finance, Controller, Associate Vice Provost for Student Affairs and University Registrar, Vice Provost for Student Affairs, Vice Provost for Undergraduate Education, Director of Financial Aid, Senior Associate Vice Provost for Residential & Dining Enterprises, Vice Provost for Graduate Education, and Director of Student Financial Services.

The Student Financial Services Office is responsible for managing the billing and collection of tuition and fees from students.

1. Mandatory Fees

Definition: Mandatory fees are required for all students or for an identifiable population of students. Categories of mandatory fees include:

MANDATORY FEES

 

Category

Responsibility for Charging the Item

Tuition Office of the University Registrar
Room Residential & Dining Enterprises
Board Residential & Dining Enterprises
Row Houses Board Residential & Dining Enterprises
Health Insurance Vaden Health Center
Campus Health Service Fee Vaden Health Center
Telecommunications Fee IT Services/Residential Computing
Documents Fees Office of the University Registrar
ASSU Fees Associated Students of Stanford University
Course Materials Fees Academic Dean of Department
P.O. Boxes: Freshmen Student Services Center

 

Back to top

2. Voluntary Charges

Definition: Voluntary charges are not mandated and the students elect to have these charges. Categories of voluntary charges include:

VOLUNTARY CHARGES

 

Category

Responsibility for Charging the Item

Cardinal Dollars Residential & Dining Enterprises
IT Services (in-room Cable TV, software purchases, etc.) IT Services
P.O. Box rentals (non-Freshmen) Student Services Center
Stanford Card Purchases (bookstore supplies, printing, copying, etc.) Student Financial Services on behalf of merchants
International mailing and shipping fee Bechtel International Center

Back to top

3. Penalties

Definition: Penalties are assessed to students who fail to comply with policy and guidelines. Categories of penalties include:

PENALTIES
 

Category

Responsibility for Assessing the Penalty

Housing room damage Residential & Dining Enterprises
Late fees for late payment of University bill Student Financial Services
Late fees for late submission of study list Office of the University Registrar
Network reconnection fee (DMCA violation) Information Security Office
Student ID Card replacement Student Services Center

Back to top

4. Adding Fees to the University Bill

Process: To request an item to the University bill, the Dean or Director of the requesting department will complete a service request document and submit it to the Student Financial Services.

The Student Financial Services office will review the request and make a recommendation to the Student Financial Policy Advisory Committee (SFPAC). Once approved by the SFPAC, Student Financial Services will work with the requesting department to place the item on the bill. This will include developing and implementing appropriate internal controls and processes for the appropriate funds transfers for the billable item.

Back to top

3.5.1 Financial Irregularities

Last updated on:
07/12/2013
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
15.4

Procedures to follow when an alleged financial irregularity (including embezzlement, theft, fraud, bribery or kickbacks, or financial conflict(s) of interest) is suspected or discovered. Departments should not confront or initiate any disciplinary actions with respect to the individual(s) involved without specific direction from the Office of General Counsel, the Associate Vice President for Audit, Compliance and Privacy or the Director of Institutional Compliance.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

1. Notification

The department where the alleged misconduct is suspected or discovered must immediately notify the Director of Institutional Compliance or the Compliance helpline, at (650)-721-2667 or helpline.stanford.edu. The Director will promptly notify the Associate Vice President for Audit, Compliance, and Privacy, the Office of General Counsel and the Chief Financial Officer, and will complete preliminary fact-finding regarding the allegations to determine if an investigation is warranted.   In general, there must be an adequate basis for suspecting a possible illegal or improper act and sufficient information available to commence an investigation.

Back to top

2. Investigation Process

When warranted by information obtained during preliminary fact-finding, the Director of Institutional Compliance will commence an investigation into the allegations.   Depending on the circumstances, the Office of General Counsel may decide to direct the investigation.  If an investigation is commenced, the Director of Institutional Compliance will promptly notify all appropriate stakeholders. Depending on the circumstances of each situation, these may include representatives of some or all of these offices:

  • Human Resources
  • Financial Management Services, including the Controller's Office, Office of the Treasurer, Procurement, Global Services, and Financial Management Consulting and Support
  • Department of Public Safety (if the report involves allegations of criminal activity)
  • Department where the alleged financial irregularity is suspected or discovered, unless department senior management is alleged to be involved or there is concern that informing department management could compromise the outcome of the investigation.
  • Dean's, Vice Provost's or Vice President's Office to which the department reports
  • Provost's Office (when a faculty member is involved)
  • Student Affairs (when a student is involved)
  • Risk Management

The Director of Institutional Compliance will plan and coordinate the investigation and will consult with the Office of General Counsel as appropriate. The Director of Institutional Compliance will be responsible for providing a final report(s) to the appropriate University office(s), which summarizes findings on the alleged financial irregularity and makes recommendations for improvement of related internal controls.

Back to top

4.1.1 Gifts to the University

Last updated on:
06/15/2008
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
41

Stanford University relies upon gifts from alumni, parents of students, friends, corporations, associations, and foundations to meet a substantial portion of its operating costs. This Guide Memo outlines policies on procurement, classification, management, and use of gifts.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Development.

1. Definition

A gift is any item of value given to the University by a donor who expects nothing of value in return, other than recognition (for example, being listed on an honor roll or naming a building, fund, professorship, etc. in the donor's honor).

a. "Quid Pro Quo" Situations
If the University has given something of value in return for a gift, the donor's tax deduction is reduced by the fair market value of the benefit received. All "quid pro quo" gifts or gift solicitations must be reported to and cleared with the Office of Development. Contact Gift Processing, (650) 725-4360, or the Office of Planned Giving, (650) 725-4358, in the Office of Development for further information.

b. Non-Gifts
(1) Sponsored Projects
Consult the Research Policy Handbook 13.1 for the distinction between gifts and sponsored projects.

(2) Income
Payment received for goods or services must be handled as income. See Guide Memo 1.5.3: Unrelated Business Activities.

(3) Non-Gift Financial Aid for a Named Student
Support received from an outside individual or institution for the purpose of paying the tuition or other educational expenses of a specifically named student, where the University has no discretion in the assignment of the funds for any other student(s), is actually a gift to the specifically-named individual rather than to the University, and is accounted for by Stanford as Student Financial Aid. Such checks are to be sent, along with all accompanying documentation, to the Financial Aid Office, which will appropriately account for the payment.

Back to top

2. General Information

a. Designation of Gifts to Stanford
All gifts, regardless of value, form, or designated use, should be made payable to, or title should be transferred in the name of, Stanford University or the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University. However, donors of securities can facilitate Stanford's gift processing effort by not re-registering the securities before giving them to the University.

b. Recording of Gifts
All gifts of cash, securities, real estate, and capital equipment are recorded at market value as of the date of the gift by the Gift Processing section of the Office of Development and/or the Controller's Office. (See Guide Memos 4.2.2: Acknowledgement of Gifts and 4.2.3: Records of Donated Equipment.) Gifts of tangible personal property (other than capital equipment covered under Guide Memo 4.2.3) are not recorded, however, any sales proceeds will be recorded as a gift of an amount equal to the net proceeds of the sale.

c. Information About Gifts
Questions about methods of giving, assignment, acknowledgment, recording, restrictions on, or purpose of a gift should be directed to the Office of Development. Questions about legal documentation, tax benefits, or requirements for gifts should be directed to a staff attorney in the Office of Planned Giving, Office of Development, 326 Galvez Street, (650) 725-4358.

Back to top

3. Responsibilities

a. Board of Trustees
The Board of Trustees is the legal entity to which all gifts to the University are made and has responsibility for ensuring that gifts are properly accepted (or refused), processed, acknowledged, and used according to their terms and restrictions and in accordance with applicable local, state, and federal laws.

b. University President and Provost
The President and Provost have ultimate administrative responsibility for determining the use of both unrestricted and restricted gifts, setting priorities for gift fundraising, and reviewing and setting policies concerning gifts, in consultation with the Board of Trustees.

c. Vice President for Development
The Vice President is responsible for managing the University's gift procurement and processing operations, for coordinating the fundraising operations of all Schools and Institutes, and for implementing policies set by the Board of Trustees, the Provost, and the President.

Back to top

4. Affiliated Organizations

Certain groups affiliated with Stanford that raise funds for University purposes may derive tax-deductible status for donors' contributions if gifts are made to and processed through the University. Such groups are encouraged to contact and consult with a staff attorney at the Office of Planned Giving, (650) 725-4358, prior to conducting any fundraising effort or event to ensure compliance with local, state, and federal laws as well as with University policy.

a. Stanford Associates
This group of Stanford alumni and friends was formed in 1935 to encourage financial support of the University and recognize those donors who make important contributions, either in terms of money or time. For information please contact Stanford Associates at 326 Galvez, (650) 725-4340.

b. Student Organizations
Student organizations must apply to the ASSU Office of Student Activities at Stanford University as well as the Office of Development prior to soliciting potential donors, and work in conjunction with the Office of Development to plan and implement their fundraising efforts. Student organizations registered with the Office of Student Activities that receive gifts should contact the ASSU administrator to arrange for processing of those gifts through the University's gift processing system.

Back to top

5. Gift Procurement Policies

a. Gift Classification

(1) Cash and Checks (preferably made payable to Stanford University).

(2) Noncash Gifts
Besides cash and checks, Stanford receives noncash gifts described below. Donors should be aware that tax laws distinguish between certain types of gifts for purposes of determining their charitable contribution deduction (see Section 5).

  • Marketable Property — Gifts that are readily sold such as securities (e.g., stocks and bonds), real estate, and salable personal property.
  • Gifts in Kind — Gifts to be used in the form in which they are given, such as art objects, books, equipment, etc.
  • Rights and Insurance — Gifts which assign to the University the right to receive payments such as royalties or licensing fees, or that vest ownership in copyrights or trademark rights, and insurance policies that name the University as a beneficiary.

b. Donor Designation of Gift Use

(1) Expendable and Endowment Gifts
A gift may be designated by the donor as expendable (i.e., immediately usable for current purposes), or as endowment (i.e., to be invested and held in perpetuity, with only the investment returns available to support University purposes). While donor intent is usually clear, certain types of gifts, such as bequests, may need additional research. Gifts will be recorded as expendable unless there is specific indication otherwise. Expendable gifts are invested in the Expendable Funds Pool; see Guide Memo 3.3.2: Expendable Funds Investment and Payout, for more information. Endowment gifts are invested in one of the University's Merged Pools depending on the donor's terms; contact Fund Accounting at (650) 723-3013 for more information. For further advice concerning donor designation of expendable and endowment gifts, contact the Office of Planned Giving in the Office of Development, (650) 725-4358.

(2) Purpose
Absent stipulations of purpose from the donor, gifts will be recorded as unrestricted expendable funds to support University purposes. If the donor designates a specific purpose for use of the gift (e.g., scholarships, student housing, a particular department, etc.) then the gift is considered to be restricted and the University is responsible for assuring that restrictions on use are honored unless (i) the donor specifically waives the restriction or (ii) court approval to changeor void the restriction is granted. Approval to seek changes in the purpose of a gift fund by the above means can only be granted by the Provost; contact Planned Giving for instructions.

(3) Establishing a Fund
The department is responsible for instructing Gift Processing whether an existing fund should be credited with a gift (in which case, the fund number must be supplied), or whether a new fund should be established. Gifts with different restrictions may not be commingled in a common fund. If the donor designates a specific purpose and/or named fund,and no appropriate fund already exists, the department should forward the gift and all relevant original documentation to Gift Processing. Gift Processing will then coordinate with the Fund Accounting section of the Controller's Office, which establishes funds and records restrictions. Contact Fund Accounting for questions relating to a particular fund.

Back to top

6. Tax Considerations

The Internal Revenue Service has several requirements that relate to donor tax deductions for cash and noncash gifts to charities.

a. Receipts
It is Stanford's policy to issue receipts for all gifts (see Guide Memo 4.2.2: Acknowledgement of Gifts). The IRS requires a receipt to substantiate most charitable contribution deductions. The donor should retain the receipt in his/her records; it need not be filed with the tax return.

b. Deductibility
Gifts to Stanford University are usually deductible at their full fair market value as of the date of the gift for both state and federal tax purposes. One important exception to this rule is that for gifts of tangible personal property that are intended to be resold by the University, the donor is entitled to an income tax deduction that is the lesser of the item's fair market value or the donor's cost basis. Contact the Office of Planned Giving, (650) 725-4358 for more information. Tax laws governing charitable gifts are complex; the University encourages donors to seek professional advice on tax issues.

c. Noncash Charitable Contributions (IRS Form 8283)
(1) Noncash Gifts Over $500
If a donors wishes to claim an income tax deduction of $500 or more in any year for gifts to charity which are not cash, then the donor must file IRS Form 8283 (Noncash Charitable Contributions) with his or her federal income tax return. Form 8283 is available from Planned Giving.

(2) Noncash Gifts Over $5,000
In addition, if a donor wishes to claim charitable income tax deductions totaling $5,000 or more in any tax year for gifts that are not cash or publicly traded securities, then the donor needs to obtain qualified appraisals of the property donated and Stanford must acknowledge receipt by signing the IRS Form 8283, which the donor then files with his or her federal income taxes. Normally Stanford cannot provide or pay for an appraisal for a donor's tax purposes, nor will the University attempt to estimate the fair market value of any real or personal property gift.

Form 8283 is processed either through the Property Management Office (PMO) (for gifts of capital equipment) or the Office of Development (for all other noncash gifts) and signed by the Accounting Officer in the Controller's Office. The individual accepting the gift should make sure that the donor's name and Social Security number are on the Form 8283, and that the Accounting Officer is provided with the donor's address. It is the donor's responsibility to notify the University that they will require Stanford's acknowledgment on Form 8283.

(3) Gifts of Securities

  • Securities Not Publicly Traded
    A qualified appraisal and Stanford's acknowledgment of receipt on IRS Form 8283 are required for gifts of securities that are not publicly traded if their total value is more than $10,000.
  • Publicly Traded Securities
    Additional documentation is not required for gifts of publicly traded securities (regardless of their value).

d. Donee Information Return (IRS Form 8282)
Under certain circumstances described below, if Stanford sells, transfers, exchanges or otherwise disposes of donated property within two years of the date of receipt of the property, Stanford must file Form 8282 (Donee Information Return) with the IRS reporting such action. A department that becomes aware of such a disposition should immediately notify the Property Management Office (for capital equipment) or the Accounting Officer in theController's Office (for all other property). Among the information required is the name of the donor, their address and tax ID or Social Security number, and any amount received upon disposition. If the transfer is made to a successor donee (that is, another nonprofit entity), information concerning that donee must be included as well. Form 8282 must be filed with the IRS within 125 days of the date ofdisposition (except as noted in 5.d.(3) below), with a copy to the donor. The Accounting Officer is responsible for preparation of the Form 8282 and its transmittal to the IRS and to the donor. This filing requirement applies only to the following items of donated property or equipment:

(1) Property for which Stanford has completed the donee acknowledgment section of the donor's IRS Form 8283 (see above section 5.c.(2)).

(2) Property that is considered a restricted donation under Section 170 (e)(4) of the Internal Revenue Code. This consists of donated equipment where Stanford has committed 80 percent of its use for research, experimentation, or research training conducted in the United States, in the physical or biological sciences.

(3) Property for which Stanford has not completed the donee acknowledgment section of the donor's IRS Form 8283 but which the University later becomes aware should have been so substantiated, e.g. where such property had a fair market value of more than $5,000 as of the date of donation and the donor failed to submit Form 8283 to Stanford for acknowledgment. In this case Form 8282 must be filed within 60 days from the date that the University becomes aware of the omission.

Back to top

7. Getting Help

Questions about deductibility of gifts, IRS Forms 8282 and 8283, and other tax questions should be referred to a staff attorney in the Office of Planned Giving, Office of Development, 326 Galvez, (650) 725-4358.

Back to top

4.2.1 Receiving and Processing Gifts

Last updated on:
07/12/2013
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
42

This Guide Memo describes the various types of gifts accepted by Stanford University and procedures for handling them.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Development.

1. General Procedures

a. Prompt Delivery of Gifts
All gifts arriving at or transferred to any part of the University should be initiated in the Gift Transmittal system by a trained user, and then be sent on the same day the gift is received to the Development Services department in the Office of Development, 326 Galvez Street, mail code 5018. Alternately, gifts may be sent to the local development offices in the schools and departments across campus. Gifts to the School of Medicine should always be sent directly to Medical Center Development. Gifts should never be sent to the Controller's Office, Fund Accounting, or the Cashier's Office.

For gifts of equipment, see Guide Memo 4.2.3: Records of Donated Equipment.

b. Required Documentation
In all cases, the University unit that has received the gift must follow these steps:

  • Scan all original correspondence pertaining to a gift, including the envelope and/or shipping label. The postmarked envelope will ensure the proper gift date is verified and recorded by Development Services.
  • Initiative a Gift Transmittal. An authorized Gift User may go to the system and login using SUNet ID and password. Instructions are available on Fingate.
  • Complete the Gift Transmittal form as appropriate. Instructions for authorized users are on Fingate.
    The office forwarding the gift can save the scanned documents for their records through the fiscal year, but please note that this is optional, and that once posted to PostGrads, documents should be deleted from local files.
  • Any questions should be directed to Development Services, (650) 725-4360 or development_services@lists.stanford.edu.

c. Donor Record Files
The Office of Development maintains complete donor records, including all University alumni and friends, as well as corporations and foundations that support the University. Original donor correspondence and copies of all University correspondence pertaining to gifts should be sent to the Office of Development, Development Services. The Office of Development will forward gift documents to the Fund Accounting section of the Controller's Office as appropriate.

Back to top

2. Types of Gifts

a. Cash
Do not send cash through interdepartmental or other mail service. Call Development Services (650) 725-4360 for instructions.

b. Checks
Checks should be forwarded to Development Services (326 Galvez Street, mail code: 5018) immediately for prompt deposit after initiating the Gift Transmittal (see above). Holding checks results in lost interest earnings for the University and, if not cashed in a reasonable amount of time, may eventually result in invalidation.

c. Securities
Stock certificates received by a school or department should be forwarded to Development Services immediately for prompt processing. If stock certificates are received in the mail the postmarked envelope must be included so that Development Services can determine the correct date for valuing the shares and dating the gift receipt. If stock certificates are received via private courier (e.g., UPS, Federal Express, DHL), the department must include a memo stating when the envelope was received in the department. The University (via Stanford Management Company) will, in almost all cases, sell the securities through its brokers as soon as they are received.
(1) Delivery of Securities
The transfer of securities to Stanford may be accomplished in several ways:
(i) Broker-to-Broker Transfer: Donors should instruct their broker to transfer securities intended for Stanford to the University by contacting the Gifts and Distributions Administrator at the Stanford Management Company (650) 926-0244, fax (650) 854-9267), who will then issue instructions to the broker for handling and processing. A copy of any gift transmittal letter or other related correspondence should be sent immediately to the Administrator.
(ii) Mail: Endorsed certificates naming Stanford University (or the Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University) as transferee may be sent by regular mail (certified mail recommended) to the Office of Development, 326 Galvez Street, Stanford University, Stanford, CA 94305-6105.
(iii) Hand Delivery: Endorsed certificates naming Stanford University (or the Board...) as transferee may be delivered by hand to any of the following locations:

Office of Development
Frances C. Arrillaga Alumni Center
326 Galvez Street
Stanford University
Stanford, California 94305-6105

Stanford Management Company
Gifts and Distributions Administrator
635 Knight Way
Stanford, California 94305-7297

(2) Certificate in Excess of Gift
If a donor's stock certificate is for a greater number of shares than he or she plans to give the University, the certificate may be endorsed to Stanford with instructions to keep a specified number of shares as a gift and to have a new certificate for the balance issued to the donor. The donor or the University office forwarding the certificate should include clear written instructions in this regard.

d. Credit Cards
Donors may charge gifts to their Mastercard, Visa, DiscoverCard or American Express credit cards by indicating in writing the amount of the gift, their credit card number, the date of its expiration, and their signature (as the name appears on the credit card). This written information should be forwarded to Development Services, 326 Galvez Street, 94305-6105, or secure fax (650) 723-0020. Donors may also call Development Services at (650) 725-4360 to make a credit card gift. If a Stanford employee receives credit card information intended for a gift, they should send it to Development Services via the Office of Development courier service, fax it via the secure fax number, put the information in the one of the two gift drop boxes on campus (located at the Alumni Center and the Edwards building) or hand-carry it to the Development Services office. DO NOT email credit card information or send it via campus mail as both of these options have serious potential for security risks.

e. Electronic Transfers
Donors may make gifts to the University through three types of electronic transfer.
(1) Wire Transfer
A donor who wishes to make a gift via wire transfer into a Stanford account must contact Development Services to obtain current instructions and to make sure the appropriate University personnel are alerted to the transaction.
(2) Payroll Deduction
Stanford employees may authorize a set amount to be deducted from their paychecks as a gift to Stanford. To arrange for payroll deduction gifts Stanford employees should contact Development Services, which will make arrangements with the Payroll Department. Employees wishing to change, renew, or cancel payroll deduction gifts should send a written request to Development Services.
(3) Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT) or Direct Deposit
Donors may authorize a set amount to be automatically withdrawn from their checking or savings accounts as a gift to Stanford. To arrange for EFT gifts donors should contact Development Services.

f. Memorial and Honorarium Gifts
In most cases, the University uses memorial gifts (i.e., contributions made in memory of someone who has passed away) to purchase and maintain books for its library system; honorarium gifts made in honor of a special event or living person are handled in the same way. If an alternative purpose is preferred, a separate memorial or named fund may be established through the Office of Development.

g. Gifts of Real or Personal Property
If a gift of real estate or an item of personal property is offered to Stanford it is important that the proper University department or official determine whether the University is able to accept it. Such decisions are made according to established University policies and guidelines according to the type of gift.
(1) Real Estate Gifts
The staff counsel in the Office of Planned Giving, (650) 725-4358, and the Manager of Gift Real Estate at the Stanford Management Company should be notified of a donor's intent to make a gift of real property to the University. The Manager of Gift Real Estate must first inspect the property and determine that the property may be accepted by the University. The staff counsel will then obtain any necessary Board of Trustees approval, draft requisite documents, make arrangements for title to be transferred to the University and for the gift to be credited in Development Services, and provide the donor with IRS Form 8283. The staff counsel is available to respond to donors' tax and other related questions.
(2) Gifts in Kind (Tangible Personal Property)
(i) Categories

  • Equipment: See Guide Memo 4.2.3: Records of Donated Equipment.
  • Artifacts, specimens, and historical objects for departmental special collections: see Guide Memo 4.2.4: Departmental Special Collections.
  • Gifts of Personal Property for Resale: Gifts of personal property intended for resale should not be accepted unless it is determined that the item is appropriate for the University to resell. Examples include gifts made for the Committee for Art's Treasure Market or for a rummage sale to benefit a particular department or project. Questions about salability of items not earmarked for a specific sales event may be directed to the Property Management Office.

(ii) Prior Consultation
The staff counsel in the Office of Planned Giving should be contacted prior to accepting gifts in kind to make sure that the donor has been apprised of tax deductibility and IRS substantiation requirements, and to assist in drafting any agreements with the donor relating to the gift. Development Services must then be notified in order for the donor to obtain a gift receipt, unless previously arranged procedures have been established for the unit (e.g., University Libraries, Treasure Market) to issue its own receipt.
(iii) Delivery Arrangements
Gifts in kind that Stanford plans to keep and use are usually delivered directly to the relevant school, department, laboratory, library, or museum that has previously approved the item's acceptance and is where the item will be housed. Preliminary arrangements may also include agreements regarding costs of packing and freight charges, which are usually the responsibility of the donor.
(iv) Recording
Except for donated capital equipment, gifts in kind are not normally recorded in the donor's gift record nor in the University's accounting system; contact Planned Giving, (650) 725-4358, for information about exceptions for crediting gifts in kind to a donor's record.

h. Special Types of Gifts
(1) Life Income Gifts

Donors may arrange to make a gift to Stanford that will pay them and/or a designated beneficiary an income for life or for a term of years. After the death of the last beneficiary or expiration of the term of years, the gift remainder is used by the University as specified by the donor. Contact the Office of Planned Giving for further information and/or to arrange for consultation with a donor and their advisor(s).
(2) Bargain Sales
Under some circumstances, the University may provide some cash consideration below market value to a donor in exchange for a gift of real or personal property. Offers to sell art objects, equipment, securities, real estate, etc. to Stanford at a substantially discounted price should be referred to the staff counsel in the Office of Planned Giving. The amount of the gift recorded by Development Services will be the difference between the fair market value and the discounted price.
(3) Life Insurance
Donors may make life insurance gifts in a number of ways:
(i) by naming the University as the beneficiary of the policy;
(ii) by transferring ownership of a paid-up policy to the University; or
(iii) by transferring ownership of a policy to the University and making periodic gifts to the University to cover payment of the policy premiums. Stanford does not make premium payments from sources other than gifts intended for such purposes. The tax ramifications of life insurance gifts are complicated; questions should be referred to the staff counsel in the Office of Planned Giving.
(4) Bequests
Since its founding, Stanford has derived significant and ongoing support from bequest gifts. Names of donors who have confirmed that a bequest for Stanford is included in their will or trust should be forwarded to the Office of Planned Giving along with any known details of the gift. The Office of Planned Giving operates The Founding Grant Society, which recognizes and honors those who have made life income gifts or who have indicated that a bequest to the University is included in their estate plans. Staff counsel in the Office of Planned Giving are available to consult with donors and their advisors in the drafting of bequests to the University. Information about or questions concerning any bequest gift that has matured should be immediately referred to the Manager of Trusts and Bequests in the Office of Planned Giving (650) 725-4358.
(5) Corporate Matching Gifts
Donors or their spouses may work for, serve on the board of, or be retired from, a company that will match their gifts to Stanford. Donors should follow their company's procedures, which usually involve filling out a form and sending it to Stanford with their gift. Departments or other units that receive any corporate matching forms MUST forward the forms to Development Services in the Office of Development, 326 Galvez Street, mail code 5018, and should NOT sign the forms themselves or return them to the company. Only Development Services is authorized to verify to a company that a gift qualifies for matching funds.

Back to top

3. Year-end Gifts

a. Tax-Year End
During the month of December the volume of gifts to be processed increases sharply. Departments or other units receiving gifts during this very busy time of year should expedite delivery of gifts to Development Services and should take steps (described below) to verify the date of the gift so that the receipt issued by Development Services to the donor will reflect the proper date for the donor's tax purposes. The gift receipt will bear a December date even when the gift is processed in January if the gift is received in Development Services on or before December 31 or if the date is verified in one of the following ways:
(1) Hand Delivery
Gifts may be delivered to any Stanford representative on or before December 31 in order to be treated as a gift made during that tax year. The Stanford representative should provide the donor with a signed and dated memo acknowledging receipt for securities or cash, keeping a copy to send to Development Services, 326 Galvez Street, mail code 5018, with the gift. In addition, the Stanford representative should sign or initial a notation of the date the gift was delivered directly on the check, or on the remit or any correspondence accompanying the gift.
(2) Postmarks
The date of receipt for gifts received by mail is the postmark date that appears on the envelope. Therefore during December and early January it is especially important to include the postmarked envelope along with the gift when forwarding it to Develpment Services.
(3) Transfers
Broker to broker transfers of securities and wire transfers of cash must be completed and the transferred property must be in Stanford's account by December 31 to count as a gift for that tax year.

b. Fiscal Year-End
The University fiscal year ends August 31. To be reflected in the University's record for a given fiscal year, gifts must be received in Development Services by 2:00 p.m. on the last working day of the fiscal year. Gifts processed later, even if dated before August 31, will be entered in the University's records in the following fiscal year. After the end of the fiscal year, requests for corrections to gift records should be made to Development Services at development_services@lists.stanford.edu, who will in turn coordinate the necessary journal entries with Fund Accounting.

Back to top

4.2.2 Acknowledgment of Gifts

Last updated on:
07/12/2013
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
42.1

This Guide Memo states responsibilities and procedures for acknowledging gifts to the University.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Development.

1. Gift Receipts

All gifts to Stanford of cash, checks, and securities, as well as most other types of gifts, are officially acknowledged by the University through the Office of Development. It is the Office of Development's goal to issue a receipt to the donor within 10 working days after Development Services has been notified and received relevant documentation for each gift. Receipts issued by Development Servicesg conform to certain government mandated format requirements, including a statement as to whether the donor has received anything of value in return for the gift and, where applicable, a reference to the University's charge on restricted funds (see Guide Memo 3.3.1: Infrastructure Charges). Under Federal law donors must possess a conforming gift receipt in order to claim a tax deduction for most charitable contributions.

a. Monetary Gifts
Receipts state the dollar value of the gift.

b. Securities Gifts
Receipts describe the number and type of securities donated, and as a courtesy to the donor will generally state the value of any publicly-traded securities credited to the donor's gift record. The value claimed by the donor for tax purposes is the donor's responsibility.

c. Other Nonmonetary Gifts
Receipts describe the gift in reasonably specific terms, including number and type of property involved, but do not include a valuation. The value claimed by the donor for tax purposes is the donor's responsibility. For equipment gifts, see Guide Memo 4.2.3: Records of Donated Equipment. Receipts for gifts of real estate are issued by the Office of Development in coordination with the Gift Real Estate section of the Stanford Management Company.

d. "Quid Pro Quo" Gifts
Under federal law, receipts for gifts made to Stanford where the University has given the donor something of value in return must state this fact on the University's gift receipt and must include a valuation of the benefit received by the donor. The donor's tax deduction is reduced by this amount. These requirements do not apply to certain narrowly defined nominal items given in return for a gift (contact Development Services, (650) 725-4360, or Planned Giving, (650) 725-4358, for information).

e. Life Income Gifts
Planned Giving in the Office of Development is responsible for preparing and issuing receipts for life income gifts.

Back to top

2. Acknowledgment Letters

In addition to the University's official gift receipt, certain gifts are acknowledged by a letter signed by the President of the University and/or the Vice President for Development, a School Dean, a Director of a Center, or the Chair of the Board of Trustees. Stewardship Officers throughout the University have the responsibility for tracking gifts that meet certain criteria (which vary slightly from area to area and by signer) and drafting letters for the appropriate signature.

Back to top

4.2.3 Records of Donated Equipment

Last updated on:
06/15/2007
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
42.2

This Guide Memo covers policy on recording and processing donations of equipment. Detailed procedures may be found in the Stanford University Property Management Manual, available from the Property Management Office.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Development and the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to all Stanford faculty and staff who are involved with the receipt of gifts of equipment and related material.

1. Purpose

The purpose of this policy is to ensure that Stanford complies with all of its contractual and legal obligations with regard to recording donations of equipment.

Back to top

2. Applicability

This policy applies to all Stanford faculty and staff who are involved with the receipt of gifts of equipment and related material.

Back to top

3. Recording Policy

a. Gifts for University Purposes
A donation of capital equipment such as a computer, laboratory equipment, vehicle, or machine tool that is to be used for University purposes must be recorded as a donation in the University accounting system at the Controller's Office and in the University's Sunflower Assets system (SFA) and in Oracle Fixed Assets. The items are recorded at fair market value as of the date of donation.

b. Gifts for Resale
A donation of equipment that is given with the understanding that the University intends to resell it upon receipt should not be entered into the University's accounting system or in Sunflower Assets. However any sale proceeds should be recorded as a gift of cash in the Controller's Office and reported to the Office of Development for inclusion in its gift records. If sale action is not initiated within 60 days of receipt, the donated item must be recorded in the Sunflower Assets system and in Oracle Fixed Assets.

Back to top

4. Definitions

a. Capital Equipment is equipment that individually at the time of donation has (i) a minimum market value of $5,000 or more and (ii) a useful life of more than one year.

b. Fair Market Value for various circumstances:

(1) Educational Discount
If an educational discount is normally available to Stanford for purchase of the equipment, its recorded value should be net of the applicable educational discount; i.e., the fair market value is the price at which the vendor (donor) will sell the equipment to Stanford.

(2) New Equipment From Private Individuals
Equipment purchased for the purpose of a donation is valued at the invoice price to the donor. Donation must occur within 60 days of purchase.

(3) Used Equipment
Fair market value is obtained from backup paperwork or appraisal (at the donor's expense) verifying the value at the time of the donation. At the discretion of the University Property Management Office (PMO) and at the cost of the receiving fund (school/department), an independent or a second appraisal may be requested.

(4) Additional Costs
Any third party installation or modification costs, attachments, accessories or auxiliary apparatus that are paid for by the department to make the donation usable for the purpose that it was given are not included in the equipment valuation. However, they are included in the acquisition cost when the item is entered into Sunflower Assets and Oracle Fixed Assets.

Back to top

5. Responsibilities

a. The donor is responsible for:

  • Bearing the cost of the appraisal if an appraisal is required for the donor's tax purposes (see Guide Memo 4.1.1: Gifts to the University).

b. The School/Department receiving or benefiting from the donation is responsible for:

  • Bearing the cost of an independent or second appraisal if needed to establish the University's record of fair market value.
  • Bearing any other cost incurred for or by the donation.

c. The faculty member or department official receiving notice that a donation was received is responsible for:

  • Informing the Department Property Administrator (DPA).
  • Providing the DPA with a legible copy of all documentation received.
  • Notifying the University Property Management Office (PMO) if they know that the estimated/appraised value of the donation is more than what would be an acceptable value.
  • Ensuring that the equipment is used for the purpose for which it was donated.

d. The Department Property Administrator (DPA) is responsible for:

  • Gathering all supporting documentation.
  • Establishing a no-cost Rapid Purchase Order (RPO) in the Oracle iProcurement system.
  • Establishing a record within the Sunflower Assets System (SFA).
  • Providing a legible copy of all documents to the PMO office.

e. University Property Management Office (PMO) is responsible for:

  • Verifying that the donation is appropriately recorded into the Sunflower Assets (SFA) and Oracle Fixed Assets systems.
  • Verifying that all documentation is in order.
  • Providing appropriate documentation to Accounts Payable to initiate a journal entry of equipment donation value into the accounting system.
  • Processing required IRS forms through the Accounting Officer. IRS Forms 8283 and 8282 must be routed through PMO prior to signature by the Accounting Officer.

f. Accounts Payable is responsible for:

  • Preparing journals to initiate entry of equipment donation values into the accounting system.

g. Accounting Officer (Controller's Office) is responsible for:

  • Signing IRS Forms 8283, Noncash Charitable Contributions and IRS Form 8282, Donee Information Return (see Guide Memo 4.1.1: Gifts to the University). The Accounting Officer (or authorized designee) is the only individual within the University with authority to do so.

h. Fund Accounting (Controller's Office) is responsible for:

  • Recording the value of the donation in the University accounting system.

i. The Office of Development (OOD) is responsible for:

  • Ensuring that Noncash Charitable Contributions forms (IRS Form 8283) and any other documents received from a donor with respect to gifts of donated capital equipment are sent to the Property Management Office (PMO).
  • Informing the PMO office of prospective donations and notifying PMO of acknowledged donations.

Back to top

6. Disposal of Donated Equipment

a. PMO Involvement
Disposal requests must be cleared through the PMO office before disposal of equipment occurs.

b. IRS Filing Requirements
See Guide Memo 4.1.1: Gifts to the University, for circumstances under which the IRS requires submittal of IRS Form 8282.

c. Sale of Equipment Claimed as a Tax Deduction
(1) Unrestricted Donations
Resale or cannibalization, within two years of the date of receipt, of equipment that is donated with no utilization restrictions may reduce the donor's tax deduction, and should be done only by mutual written agreement between Stanford and the donor.

(2) Restricted Donations
Equipment donated to Stanford and claimed as a tax deduction under Internal Revenue Code Sec. 170(e)(4) (which restricts its use to research experimentation, or research training in the United States, in physical or biological sciences) must be held in Stanford's possession for at least two years from the date of receipt, after which disposition must be cleared through PMO. Restricted donations may not be sold.

d. Successor Donees
If property is transferred to another organization, external to Stanford, within two years of receipt, an IRS Form 8282 must be filed. Contact the University Property Management Office (PMO) for more information.

e. Sale Proceeds
All proceeds from the sale of unrestricted donated equipment are credited in accordance with the terms stated by the donor or as defined in the donation agreement. If no terms are specified then all proceeds are credited to the fund that originally recorded the gift.

f. Source for More Information
Policy on sale of surplus property may be found in Guide Memo 5.2.4: Surplus Property Sales. Detailed information on disposal procedures may be found in the Stanford University Property Administration Manual available from the PMO office.

Back to top

7. Getting Help

Additional information or assistance in addressing issues regarding donations of equipment or materials is available from the Property Management Office (PMO), and Property Manual chapter 2.5.

Back to top

4.2.4 Departmental Special Collections

Last updated on:
07/12/2013
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
42.3

Over the years, many Stanford departments have acquired valuable special collections of artifacts, specimens, and historical objects. These departmental acquisitions have reflected the interests of a particular faculty member, concerns growing out of a specific research project or departmental initiative, or the sense that an available collection could enhance the pursuit of an academic discipline. However, such acquisitions carry with them institutional obligations. This Guide Memo provides administrative guidelines to assist departmental managers with such collections.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Development.

1. Planning Policies

a. Cost-Benefit Considerations
When deciding whether to acquire or deaccession1 collections, departments should consider the short- and long-term benefits of the items for research, teaching, and historical significance in relation to the short- and long-term costs of maintaining the collection. Obligations to the donor must be considered and any written restrictions placed on the donated collection by the donor must also be honored in deaccession decisions.

Costs for personnel; space, security, and environmental needs; preservation; insurance; and use of the collection (for display, loan, research, or teaching aids) should be estimated in relation to departmental priorities for teaching and research as well as the current and prospective availability of funding. These funding estimates should take into account:

  • Current available monies for personnel, and facilities that could be employed, without increased costs, for the management and protection of the collection
  • Additional monies needed to cover current estimated costs
  • Projected changes in costs for the future
  • Sources of future internal funding
  • Sources of external support (grants, gifts)

b. Administrative Structure
To facilitate ongoing management, departments should:

  • Establish procedures for periodically reviewing benefits of the collection in relation to its cost
  • Clarify lines of authority for making decisions to deaccession collections
  • Establish policies on the reuse of funds gained from selling a collection

 1"Deaccession" is a technical term used by librarians and museum curators. It means to remove an object permanently from a collection.
 

Back to top

2. Management Policies

a. Responsibility
When a school or department makes a decision to accept as a gift or loan or otherwise develop or acquire a collection of artifacts or other materials, it takes on the responsibility to fund, house, manage, preserve, and, if appropriate, dispose of these items. Before entering into a written agreement with a prospective donor that carries restrictions on the use, care, or disposition of a collection, the school or department may wish to consult with the Office of Planned Giving in the Office of Development and/or the Cantor Arts Center, Libraries and Archives.

b. Inventory and Control
(1) Record-keeping

Departments should have an inventory system for current and new acquisitions of collections and on-going record-keeping practices for controlling their use and protection. See also Guide Memo 4.2.3: Records of Donated Equipment, for policies on recording gifts of capital equipment.
(2) Cataloging
To facilitate the use of a departmental collection, departments may want to prepare a catalog, either manual (such as a card catalog) or computerized (such as a data base file).
(3) Security
Guide Memo 2.4.5: Protection of Property, outlines departmental responsibilities for safeguarding precious and high value items.
(4) Control of Access/Facilitation of Use
Departments should develop access and lending policies (where applicable), information about the availability and display of the collection, and a system for tracking the collection over time which will serve to increase and facilitate the use of the collection, and at the same time provide appropriate protection and security for the contents. Departments have the discretionary authority to restrict the use of a collection; any such restrictions should be noted in the publicity.

c. Care of Collections
(1) Preservation

Collections should be stored, used, lent out, and displayed in a manner that will minimize the risk of loss, theft and damage (see Guide Memo 2.4.5: Protection of Property. All policies for preservation should be developed to maximize the enhancement of the collections for their present and future use. Policies developed for the preservation of collections in the Cantor Arts Center, the Libraries and Archives can be referred to as useful models in the development of departmental policies.
(2) Space Allocation and Use
The space used to store and display collections should be environmentally appropriate and secure.
(3) Personnel
Departmental collections must be supervised by an assigned individual. When the advice of curators is needed, departments should utilize the expertise of curators in Green Library, the Hoover Archives and the Cantor Arts Center.
(4) Budget
Funding for personnel and other costs of the care, display, and use of the collections is a departmental responsibility.

d. Disposition of Deaccessioned Collections
(1) Considerations

Deaccessioned collections must be disposed of in a manner that respects the intentions of the donor and does not diminish the assets of the institution. If there are written restrictions pertaining to the gift they must be honored unless waived by the donor.
(2) Consultation
If necessary, departments should seek legal counsel, including staff counsel in the Office of Development, and independent expert opinion. If possible, they should also inform the donors and/or their heirs of the proposed action. If the collection was a gift, the Office of Development should be notified of the department's plans.
(3) Means of Disposal
The department should develop policies on appropriate means of disposal, such as sale, transfer to another institution, or destruction. Policies developed for the deaccessioning of collections in the Cantor Arts Center, the Libraries and Archives can be referred to as useful models.
(4) Further Information
Departments considering selling a collection should consult Guide Memo 5.2.4: Surplus Property Sales.

Back to top

4.2.5 Naming Facilities and Land Features

Last updated on:
08/11/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
42.4

This Guide Memo covers approval procedures and policies for naming Stanford University facilities and land features.

Authority: 

Approved by the President.

1. Approval Procedures

a. New Facilities and Land Features
Names proposed for Stanford University facilities and land features require the review of the Office of Development and Land, Buildings and Real Estate (LBRE)/ University Architect/Campus Planning  and Design (UA/CPD) for possible conflicts and other University-wide implications before submission to the President for approval. Facilities and land features covered by this requirement include: buildings and the components of buildings (classrooms, laboratories, auditoria, conference and seminar rooms); ornamental structures; streets; fountains; courts; plazas; gardens; etc.

b. Renamed Facilities and Land Features
In cases of renaming, the senior line officer(s) in whose jurisdiction the facility or land feature is located should have the sponsorship of the Provost in submitting the recommended name change for the approval procedure described in paragraph

c. Plaques, Trees, and Other Similar Memorials
While Stanford gratefully accepts gifts in memory of someone, the University is not able to accommodate requests for plaques, trees, benches, or other similar memorials. Donors who wish to make a gift and receive the appropriate recognition should consult with the Office of Development.

Back to top

2. Naming Policies

a. Names of Faculty and Staff
Names of Stanford faculty and staff bestowed on Stanford University facilities and land features should be selected from individuals who have been emeritus or retired for at least 10 years.

b. Streets
Street names should be historically or geographically significant to the campus. Streets may be named for living individuals, but the use of individuals' names should be minimized.

c. Donor Names
(1) Buildings

Donor names proposed for buildings or portions of buildings are reviewed on a case-by-case basis. The "name" gift will normally cover between 35 and 70 percent of total project costs.
(2) Other Features
Donor names proposed for fountains, ornamental buildings, landscaping, and similar features will normally require a gift to cover the full cost of the project and a maintenance fund.

Back to top

3. Records of Names

The Stanford University Archives receives and preserves the official record of all Stanford University names. In addition, notification of the appropriate information and long-term maintenance of the gift goes to LBRE/Buildings and Grounds Maintenance (BGM) and/or the appropriate Stanford department or auxiliary organization.

Back to top

4.3.1 Operating Policies for Development

Last updated on:
07/12/2013
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
43

The Vice President for Development is entrusted with the overall management of Stanford's fundraising programs in order to maximize gift support from alumni, parents, friends, corporations, associations, and foundations. This Guide Memo outlines principles, policies, and procedures that will help assure the wise deployment of University resources, consistency in written communications, and coordination of access to volunteers and prospects.

Authority: 

Approved by the President.

Applicability: 

These policies apply to all gift procurement activities of the University and/or its schools and units. Gifts are defined in Guide Memo 4.1.1: Gifts to the University.

1. Background

For more than five decades, the Office of Development has represented all of Stanford, conveying to alumni, parents, friends and institutions the needs and aspirations of the entire University. Our volunteers, in particular, have responded by working enthusiastically for the University as a whole although they may individually affiliate with and support one or more schools or units. This cooperative and collegial relationship has set Stanford apart from most of its peers.

During the 1990s, we encouraged intensified fundraising programs within the schools/units, many of which conducted individual campaigns. These successful specific initiatives culminated in the Campaign for Undergraduate Education —the largest capital campaign ever launched specifically for undergraduate education. While these individual efforts have been quite successful in developing new and more engaged donors, it is imperative that we continue to nurture a broad understanding and commitment to Stanford University.

Because the majority of the University's most generous donors have multiple interests, the advent of unit based campaigns also has created more intense pressure on the prospect population. We need to reinforce the spirit of cooperation that has characterized Stanford's development activities for more than 50 years. That cooperation is based upon open and regular communication between the schools/units and the University development office, and among the schools/units.

The ultimate responsibility for securing new gifts for the University rests with the Board of Trustees. The trustees have delegated those responsibilities to the Office of the Development through the President of the University. The Vice President for Development is entrusted with the overall management of Stanford's fundraising programs. Obviously, while many of the fundraising activities may be delegated and carried out at the school/unit level, major development activities, decisions, and solicitations are ultimately managed and coordinated by the Office of the Vice President for Development.

Back to top

2. Operating Policies

a. Prospects with Multiple Affiliations
All activities with any Stanford prospect with multiple affiliations must be coordinated with all the interested parties. This is especially true for all major rated prospects—$250,000 or more. All prospects rated at this level or higher will be given a primary staff assignment. Any and all solicitation activity on these prospects must be coordinated through the primary staff person.

b. Prospects Rated at $1,000,000 and Above
All prospects with a rating of $1,000,000 and above are by definition University prospects. All solicitation activity on such prospects—even if the solicitation is significantly less than $1,000,000—must be specifically approved through the Office of the Vice President for Development.

c. Authority of the Vice President for Development
If an agreement cannot be reached on assigning or approaching multiple-interest or "University" prospects, then the Vice President for Development will determine prospect assignment and access by taking into account priorities set by the President and Provost. The dean or director of a school or unit may appeal the Vice President's decision to the Provost.

d. Sharing and Storage of Information
It is imperative that all pertinent information regarding major gift prospect activity be available across the development enterprise. This is particularly true for $1-million-plus rated prospects. University development staff and school/unit development officers share a responsibility to keep others informed of prospect activity, both formally (by updating the prospect tracking system and sending written communications to Post Grads) and informally (through regular communication). These updates should be entered in a timely fashion to ensure real-time quality to the prospect information.

e. Volunteers
Schools and units may form volunteer organizations to support major fundraising initiatives with the approval of the Vice President for Development. Chairs of volunteer groups supporting major fundraising programs will be asked to coordinate their activities through the Board of Trustees' Committee on Development and to work together with University-wide volunteer groups. Enlistment of volunteers, whether for fundraising or for advisory boards, must be coordinated through the Office of the Vice President for Development.

f. Written Communications
To assure consistency and coordination among various fundraising efforts, final drafts of written communications describing major fundraising initiatives must be shared with the Vice President for Development or designee. Additionally, the Office of Planned Giving must review all agreements of $100,000 or more (and all agreements establishing new endowments) prior to submission to the donor and/or acceptance by the University.

g. Staffing
School and unit staff and budget plans for fundraising must be reviewed and approved by the Provost. Decisions regarding classification and compensation of development staff rest with the dean/director and the Vice President for Development who share responsibility for assuring that fairness is maintained across the University. In addition, the Vice President for Development must review and approve any requests to hire external fundraising consultants.

h. Priority Setting Process
Development priorities will be established in accordance with Guide Memo 4.4.1: Fundraising Approval and Priority-Setting.

i. Annual Giving
The following policies govern annual giving at Stanford:
(1) Stanford Fund
The Stanford Fund exists to provide the President and Provost with sustained, discretionary gift support for undergraduate education and undergraduate student life. All undergraduate degree holders, including those with a Stanford graduate degree, professional school degree, or credits earned toward such degrees, are solicited by the fund. The Stanford Fund also solicits non-degree holders with credits earned toward a Stanford undergraduate degree and parents of current undergraduates and non-alumni ("friends") with a prior history of giving to the fund.
(2) School Funds
The school funds may solicit their graduate and professional degree holders, including those who also have an undergraduate degree from Stanford. The school funds are also able to solicit non-undergraduate degree holders with credits earned toward a Stanford graduate or professional degree. Departments and programs may not solicit their graduates. Other solicitable populations include non-alumni ("friends") with a prior history of giving to the school and parents of Stanford professional or graduate degree holders.
(3) Athletics
The Department of Athletics may solicit any current or former annual donors to athletics, former student-athletes, and Stanford season ticket holders.
(4) Medical
Subject to any applicable restrictions imposed by law, alumni who are treated as patients at Stanford Medical Center may be solicited by medical development.

Back to top

4.4.1 Fundraising Approval and Priority-Setting

Last updated on:
06/10/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
44

This Guide Memo sets forth University fundraising policy, outlines the procedure for requesting fundraising approval and priority, and describes the procedures by which fundraising requests are reviewed for academic merit, evaluated for fundraising potential, and, if approved, assigned priorities for fundraising. The aim of this Guide Memo is to establish a systematic and orderly approach to private funding sources, to maximize support from them, and to assure that support is directed toward University priorities.

Authority: 

Approved by the President.

Applicability: 

These policies apply to all gift procurement activities of the University and/or its schools and units. Gifts are defined in Guide Memo 4.1.1: Gifts to the University.

1. Policy

Requests to raise gift funds are subject to review and approval under the procedures set forth in this Guide Memo. The procedure for obtaining clearance to approach and solicit specific prospective donors is set forth in Guide Memo 4.3.1: Operating Policies for Development.

Back to top

2. Applicability

a. Applicability
The procedures detailed in this Guide Memo apply whenever approval is sought to raise gifts from individuals, foundations, associations or corporations to support a project. Projects are defined broadly to include any program or activity of the University and/or its schools and units. Gifts are defined in Guide Memo 4.1.1: Gifts to the University. These procedures do not apply to the following:

(1) Certain small projects
Projects for which the total fundraising requirement over the life of the project is less than $1,000,000 require only decanal or directorial approval if all of the fundraising will be handled within the school or unit by the faculty and/or school's or unit's development staff without assistance sought from the central Office of Development. However, clearance to approach each specific prospect is still required under Guide Memo 4.3.1: Operating Policies for Development.
(2) Facilities
Requests for approval to raise funds for facilities projects are handled as part of the Provost's Capital Plan process. Approval of a facilities project, including new construction and renovation projects, will include a careful consideration of potential funding sources. Facilities projects will be assigned a fundraising priority by the Provost after consultation with the Office of Development about those sources. Clearance to approach each specific prospect is still required under Guide Memo 4.3.1: Operating Policies for Development.
(3) Sponsored Projects
Policy and procedures with respect to the preparation, review, and submission of sponsored project proposals are set forth in the Research Policy Handbook 14.1. Consult Research Policy Handbook Document 13.1 for the distinction between gifts and sponsored projects.
(4) Industrial Affiliates Programs
Principles, guidelines, and procedures for the establishment and operation of industrial affiliates and related membership-supported programs are set forth in the Research Policy Handbook 13.4.

b. Specific Requirements for Certain Activities
Gift solicitations for activities involving human subjects, laboratory animals, radiological hazards, biologically infectious agents, or recombinant DNA techniques are also subject to review by the Sponsored Projects Office for compliance with University policies and external requirements.

Back to top

3. Application and Review Procedures

a. Request
The Requestor initiates the process by completing the on-line Request for Fundraising Approval and Priority Form. Once the Requestor has completed the Form, it is automatically routed to the cognizant Development Officer.

b. Development Officer Review
Based on the information provided by the Requestor, the cognizant Development Officer completes the next section of the Form, including an assessment of fundraising feasibility and a recommendation regarding fundraising priority. When the Development Officer has completed the Form, it is automatically routed to the Office of the Vice President for Development.

c. School Dean/Cognizant Cabinet Officer Review
Based on the information provided by the Requestor, cognizant Development Officer, and Office of the Vice President for Development, the School Dean or cognizant Cabinet officer completes the next section of the Form. At this point, the School Dean or cognizant Cabinet officer may (1) approve the Request and provide a recommendation regarding fundraising priority, (2) return the Request and ask for additional information, or (3) deny the Request. If the Request is approved, the Form will be automatically routed to the Office of the Provost. If the Request is denied or returned for additional information, the Form will be automatically routed back to the Requestor.

d. Office of the Vice President for Development Review
Based on the information provided by the Requestor and the cognizant Development Officer, the Vice President for Development (or his or her designee) completes the next section of the Form, including his or her own assessment of fundraising feasibility and recommendation regarding fundraising priority. When the Office of the Vice President for Development has completed the Form, it is automatically routed to the School Dean or cognizant Cabinet member.

e. Provostial Review
After a Request has been approved by the School Dean or cognizant Cabinet officer and forwarded to the Office of the Provost, the Provost or the Provost's designee, in consultation with such individuals and/or committees as the Provost may designate, will review the Request using the following criteria:
(1) Academic justification
How closely does the project relate to the academic plans of the department, the school, and the University?
(2) Budgetary impact
Would funding the project by means of gifts offset existing demands on general funds budgets? Would the project require general funds support, cost sharing, or other immediate financial obligations? Would the project place future financial obligations on the University once the gift or grant funds have expired?
(3) Fundraising potential
How many prospective donors exist for the project and to what extent would it compete with other projects of interest to such donors?

f. Provostial Decision
After weighing these factors the Provost or the Provost's designee will (1) approve the Request with an assigned priority, (2) return the Request and ask for additional information, or (3) deny the Request. The designation of a priority determine the level of effort expected from the Development staff. Such priority designations will also assure that donors are presented with the University's most important projects.
(1) Approved with High Priority
Funds for projects awarded this priority will be actively sought, both by school and unit development staff and by the central Office of Development. The Office of Development will work with school and unit development staff to identify and solicit prospects for high priority projects and will enlist volunteers and faculty support as needed, taking into account other project(s) in which prospects may also be interested. Clearance to approach specific prospects is required under Guide Memo 4.3.1: Operating Policies for Development.
(2) Approved with Standard Priority
Fundraising for projects with this priority must be in the form of specific proposals to particular prospective donors or on a noncompetitive "target of opportunity" basis. Fundraising, including identification and solicitation of prospects, will primarily be handled within the school or unit, subject to clearance of prospect access under Guide Memo 4.3.1: Operating Policies for Development. The central Office of Development may, at the discretion of the Vice President for Development, initiate further activity and provide assistance in identifying additional prospective donors.
(3) Approved with Minimum Priority
Fundraising projects with this priority must not compete with fundraising for other projects. In most cases, this will mean that fundraising will be limited to corporations and foundations that have an identifiedprogrammatic interest in the project, and except in the most unusual cases must not include approaches to alumni, parents, and friends. Fundraising must be handled exclusively by the school or unit, without any assistance from the central Office of Development. As always, clearance to approach any specific prospect is required under Guide Memo 4.3.1: Operating Policies for Development.
(4) Denied
No gifts may be solicited for projects for which fundraising approval has been denied. Requestors may wish to consider other funding sources as outlined in Guide Memo 4.5.1: Funding New Programs.

g. Development Action
After a project has been approved and assigned a priority, the Provost will send the Request for Fundraising Approval and Priority form describing the project to the Office of the Vice President for Development for distribution to the fundraising staff. At the discretion of the Vice President for Development, a fundraising coordinator for the project may be appointed. The Development Office will periodically review its list of approved and rated projects in order to recommend changes to the Provost based on fundraising results.

Back to top

4.5.1 Funding New Programs

Last updated on:
09/05/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
45

Proposals for new programs, projects, or activities should take into account the feasibility of obtaining required funding as well as the budgetary and other impacts the proposals may have on Stanford University. This Guide Memo is intended to provide a checklist that may be useful to faculty members and others in developing such proposals.

Authority: 

Approved by the President.

Applicability: 

These policies apply to all new programs, projects or activities of the University and/or its schools and units for which external or internal funding is required.

1. Funding Requirements

There are a variety of funding sources and strategies that may be considered depending on the nature of the proposed new program, project, or activity.

a. External Funding — External funding sources include gifts, sponsored projects, and affiliate programs. All required approvals should be secured before seeking external funding.

(1) Gifts from Individuals, Foundations, Associations, or Corporations — Approval under Administrative Guide Memo 4.4.1: Fundraising Approval and Priority-Setting, is required before any gifts are solicited.

(2) Sponsored Project — Approval under Research Policy Handbook Document 14.1, Preparation, Review, and Submission of Sponsored Project Proposals, is required before submitting any sponsored project proposal.

(3) Affiliate Program — Approval under Research Policy Handbook Document 13.4, Establishment of Industrial Affiliates and Related Membership-Supported Programs, is required before submitting any sponsored project proposal.

b. Internal Funding — Internal funding may also be available, subject to the requirements and processes required by the funding sources(s).

(1) Department, school, or University resources — All requirements associated with obtaining funding from the applicable source must be fulfilled.

(2) Existing Gift Funds — Stanford must comply with the terms and conditions of the applicable gift agreement(s) with donor(s) for any existing gift funds proposed to be used to support a program, project, or activity. See Guide Memo 4.1.1: Gifts to the University, Section 5.b(2). Questions should be directed to a staff attorney in the Office of Planned Giving, Office of Development, 326 Galvez Street, (650) 725-4358.

Back to top

2. Budget and Institutional Impacts

Proposals should take into account not only the budget required for the project itself, but also its institutional impacts on Stanford University. Given budget, General Use Permit (GUP), and other constraints, Stanford cannot commit itself to support a project unless all such impacts have been considered and approved in advance.

a. Incremental Faculty Billets — New billets cannot be created and filled unless authorized by the President/Provost's Office.

b. Incremental Staff Positions — New billets cannot be created and filled unless authorized by Deans, Directors or Vice Presidents, or their designees.

c. Incremental Graduate Students and Post-docs — New billets cannot be created and filled unless authorized by a member of the Executive Cabinet.

d. Space and Facilities Needs — All requests for new space or reallocations of existing spaces at Stanford are required to be submitted on the  Space Management and Planning - Online Space Request Form. If the project cannot be housed within pre-identified existing available departmental or laboratory space, approval to use other existing space must be sought and obtained under Research Policy Handbook, Document 14.3, Section 2. If the project requires new construction (including temporary structures), building or interior space demolitions, building renovations, and/or other infrastructure projects as described in the Form 1 Policy, approval must be sought and obtained via the electronic Facilities Initiation Form 1.

e. Other Impacts — Approvals may also be necessary in the following areas:

  • Library resources
  • Information Technology resources
  • Operating and maintenance costs
  • Specialized equipment or start-up funds

Back to top

5.1.1 Procurement Policies

Last updated on:
09/21/2012
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
51

This Guide Memo serves as an introduction to Chapter 5. It covers general policies for the purchase of major and minor construction, equipment, supplies and services by Stanford. The policies in this chapter do not apply to the SLAC National Accelerator Laboratory (SLAC).

Authority: 

Approved by the Senior Associate Vice President for Finance.

1. Authority to Commit University Funds

The Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University, which has responsibility for all University funds, including those received under grants and contracts and those originating with other outside sources, has delegated authority for the acquisition and disposition of property and the expenditure of University monies to various University officers and officials (see Guide Memo 3.2.1: Authorizing Expenditures).

a. Department Administrators
Department administrators in Schools and Departments have the authority to approve the commitment and expenditure of funds for a given purpose and against specific accounts for which they have been officially delegated authority (see Guide Memo 3.2.1: Authorizing Expenditures). For the purposes of this Guide Memo, this action usually takes the form of a Purchase Requisition.

b. Procurement
Procurement, part of Stanford's Financial Management Services organization, is authorized to execute contracts and place orders for goods and services, subject to the receipt of an approved Purchase Requisition (see [1.a.] above). With the exception of certain delegations, Procurement is the sole holder of this authority at the University.

c. Purchases by University Departments
Procurement has delegated authority to departments to approve the acquisition of goods or services when the total dollar value of the transaction is less than $25,000 per transaction and does not require a contract or is less than $5,000 on a Purchasing Card transaction. (See Guide Memo 5.3.3: Purchasing Cards.)

d. Unauthorized Purchases
No person not authorized in writing by Stanford may commit Stanford funds to purchase goods or services. If an unauthorized person attempts to commit University funds, Stanford may consider the acquisition effort null and void and decline to pay any invoice that might be issued. Stanford officers, including the Chief Financial Officer, the Chief Procurement Officer, and those to whom the Chief Procurement Officer has delegated authority, including operations managers, supervisors and buyers, may refuse to ratify such transactions. In such a case, the supplier may look to the individual placing the order for payment or reimbursement.

Purchases made without an approved Oracle purchase order number will be flagged and Procurement will contact the requestor for review. Further non-compliance will result in written notice to requester, approver, and the appropriate school or department financial manager. A third instance of non-compliance will result in written notice to the Head of the Administrative Department or the Senior Associate Dean of Finance and Academic Dean of the School, and may result in suspension of Oracle privileges and Purchasing Card use.

e. Personal Expenses
Personal expenses and purchases that are not made on behalf of the University or for use by the University are not permitted. These may be considered fraudulent transactions. Purchases must be for the use and benefit of Stanford University, regardless of intent to reimburse Stanford. If any Stanford user associated with the purchase commits purposeful fraudulent or other inappropriate behavior regarding the proper use of the requisitioning and purchasing process, it will be considered serious misconduct and will result in disciplinary action.

Back to top

2. Competition

The University's policy is that acquisition of products or services will be by competition between potential suppliers, to the maximum practical extent subject to the requirements of quality, price and performance. Attestation of price reasonableness should be acquired prior to submitting any requisition for approval. This is the responsibility of the requestor. Therefore, individuals that request goods and services are responsible for attaining and documenting their efforts related to purchases requests. Requestors may elect to do one or more of the following to ensure and/or document price reasonableness:
a. Solicit competitive bids
b. Compare pricing across suppliers
c. Document justification for a single source or sole source (a single source is a supplier specifically selected amongst others, due to superior compatibility, quality, service, support, continuity, etc.; a sole source supplies a product or service for which there is no alternative supplier). The source justification should include the following information:
1) A specific description of the supplies or services required to meet the needs, and a statement of facts that show the unique qualifications of the services or items selected to satisfy those needs.
2) A description of efforts made to locate other sources of supply.
3) Documentation that the anticipated cost is fair and reasonable. This can be a comparison of prices when the item is generally available or, when the item is to be specially fabricated, an analysis of the manufacturer's cost.
4) Any other information supporting the use of other than full and open competition.

Back to top

3. Conflict of Interest or Ethics

a. Policies
All procurement activities must conform to the University Code of Conduct (Guide Memo 1.1.1), Staff Policy on Conflict of Commitment and Interest (GuideMemo 1.5.2), and Faculty Policy on Conflict of Commitment and Interest (Research Policy Handbook 4.1). Any known or apparent violation of these policies, whether by an employee or a supplier, must be immediately reported as directed in these policies.

b. Personal Purchases
Procurement does not arrange personal purchases for Stanford faculty, staff or students. The Buyer can render assistance to such individuals only by informing callers of the names of known suppliers. The buyer will spend no time locating suppliers or securing quotations. Similarly, a department may not place an order for an individual employee or student and then have that person reimburse the department.

Back to top

4. On-Campus Sources of Goods and Services

Stanford provides many goods and services on campus for less than an individual order placed off-campus would cost. A department needing a product or service provided by a Stanford source should order from a Stanford organization that provides it. If Procurement receives a requisition from a department for an item available at Stanford, the buyer may forward the requisition to the appropriate Stanford organization or require the department to place an order that can be processed without the assistance of a buyer.

Back to top

5. Purchases on Government Grants and Contracts

Stanford University receives many government grants and contracts for academic research. In carrying out its sponsored projects, Stanford fulfills the agreement's conditions, some of which are stated in the sponsored project agreement, others in statutes, regulations and policy statements.

a. Terms and Conditions
A grant or contract often requires Stanford to include certain contractual clauses in purchase orders or subcontracts issued under the award. Procurement determines which contractual clauses are appropriate for inclusion in individual contracts.Purchase orders should be placed through the Procurement department to ensure compliance with Stanford's purchasing policies and legal requirements.

b. Prior Approval
If a government sponsored project agreement is a funding source, a government representative may be required to approve a proposed purchase of capital equipment or complex goods or services before the buyer places the order. See the Property Administration Manual for prior approval procedures.

(1) Offices Needing Documentation
The requesting department is responsible for maintaining records of approval documentation. When required, Purchasing or Accounts Payable may request copies of such documents.
(2) Subcontracts
If the purchase requires government approval of subcontract provisions, the buyer will obtain necessary approval and keep it in the Procurement Office files.

c. Pre-Acquisition Screening
The U.S. Government Office of Management and Budget Circular A-110 and other government regulations that cover the administration of agreements with federal government agencies require that Stanford screen the existing inventory of capital equipment for availability before ordering capital equipment to avoid purchasing "unnecessary or duplicative items."

(1) Screening Levels
The department making the purchase must screen for items of equipment costing between $5,000 and $24,999 at the departmental level before purchase, and items at $25,000 and above at the University level. Equipment costing less than $5,000 need not be screened.
(2) Loans and Transfers
Government policy encourages loans or transfers of equipment from other government projects.
(3) Where to Get Help
For information on screening procedures, see the Property Administration Manual.

Back to top

6. Government-Required Licenses and Permits

Certain transactions require permits or licenses from the federal government. Stanford's customs broker and preferred vendor for outside logistics services provide consultation and assistance as necessary. Procurement will provide contact information for current vendors on request. The permits or licenses most frequently required to transact business are:

a. Agriculture Permits
The Department of Agriculture issues permits for import of certain organisms and biological vectors. The requesting department is responsible for obtaining a permit for each shipment or group of related shipments. The form required by the USDA is VS 16-3.

b. Import or Export Licenses
The Department of Commerce or the U.S. Department of State issues licenses for either export or the importation of equipment or technical data. The requesting department is responsible for obtaining and/or signing the required license.

c. Duty Free Entry of Scientific Equipment
The U.S. Department of Commerce may exempt payment of import duties for scientific equipment. Each department requesting such exemption is responsible for filling out the appropriate paperwork. The form required is ITA-338P.

d. Radioactive Materials
A requisition for radioactive materials must contain a Controlled Radiation Authorization (CRA) number (obtainable from Health Physics) before Purchasing processes the order.

Back to top

7. Shipping of Biological and Hazardous Materials

The United States Department of Transportation and the Federal Aviation Administration enforce strict and detailed regulations to assure the safety of aircraft and other modes of transportation for hazardous materials or "Dangerous Goods." Dangerous Goods include, but are not limited to those that are flammable, combustible, corrosive, reactive, oxidizing, toxic, radioactive, infectious, elevated in temperature, highly magnetic, or compressed gasses. Aerosol cans and Dry Ice are also regulated. Violations may result in monetary penalties.

a. Training
The person(s) packing the material and/or signing the shipping papers must be trained and certified in the shipping of Dangerous Goods. The training and certification must be repeated within every two year period.

b. Where to Get Help
The Environmental, Health and Safety Department offers training and has a certified shipper on staff. EH&S personnel are available and ready to help prepare any Dangerous Good for shipment. For web-based information, see Shipping of Hazardous Materials

Back to top

5.1.2 Procurement Relationships

Last updated on:
08/11/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
52

This Guide Memo describes the organization of the Procurement Department and its relationships with other administrative departments, both within and external to Stanford.

Authority: 

Approved by the Senior Associate Vice President for Finance.

1. Procurement Organization

The Procurement Department is part of the Financial Management Services organization and reports to the Senior Associate Vice President for Finance. Component groups are described below.

a. Strategic Purchasing Services
Strategic Purchasing is responsible for acquisition of a wide variety of products and services. Procurement buyers' responsibilities include maintaining lists of prospective and approved vendors, soliciting bids or proposals, negotiating price and terms and conditions of purchase, selecting suppliers and issuing purchase orders.

Contract Specialists are responsible for negotiating, writing and executing written contracts. Contract specialists negotiate and write consulting agreements, sponsored project subcontracts, repair and construction agreements, architectural, engineering and other services agreements and service order agreements.

b. Strategic Payment Services
Strategic Payment Services is responsible for ensuring payment procedures have been followed and suppliers of products or services are paid. Strategic Payment Services also establishes policy regarding sales and use taxes and ensures their collection and remittance.

c. Procurement Systems
The University has implemented Oracle Financials systems to manage its financial transactions. All acquisition transactions, including purchase requisitions, reimbursement requests, purchase orders, invoices, and payments must be entered in the Oracle Financials system. This system is referred to simply as "Oracle Financials" elsewhere in this and other Guide Memos.

Back to top

2. Other Central Offices

a. Internal Audit
Internal Audit conducts periodic reviews of the Procurement organization and facilitates external audits, as required. Staff of both offices work together to implement Internal Audit's recommendations. Procurement may participate in audits of other departments if the audit involves one of Procurement's functions.

b. Office of Sponsored Research (OSR)
OSR has primary responsibility for negotiation and administration of contracts and grants between Stanford and outside sponsoring agencies, including the federal government. OSR's responsibilities include signing, on behalf of the University, various certifications required by federal or state agencies, including the Certification of Compliance form from suppliers or vendors. Procurement and OSR confer on award document provisions that affect either the contracting process, subcontracting under private or federal prime contracts, or University compliance with federal regulations, such as Public Law 95-507 or other socio-economic provisions.

c. Property Management Office (PMO)
The Property Management Office is responsible for developing, implementing and maintaining the equipment inventory system. PMO reviews capital equipment acquisitions and surplus property sales requests for conformance with University property procedures.

Surplus Property Sales sells surplus equipment and material to Stanford departments, employees, students and the general public. See Guide Memo 5.2.4: Surplus Property Sales, for more information.

d. Land, Buildings and Real Estate (LBRE).
Multiple LBRE departments provide a range of services, including:

(1) Department of Project Management (DPM)
DPM is responsible for major construction project management and project administration within LBRE.  Procurement is responsible for the commercial aspects of contract negotiation, contract execution and contract administration for DPM.
(2) Buildings and Grounds Maintenance (BGM)
The Contracts Group negotiates Service Order Agreements for BGM, which enables the Buildings Operations Group to deal directly with contractors for repairs, maintenance, and minor construction for Stanford structures, systems, and grounds.  For contracted facilities renewal and planned maintenance, Zone Management coordinates with Procurement to bid, negotiate, and award maintenance, design, studies, and construction contracts on a per project basis.
(3) Other LBRE Departments
In addition to DPM and BGM, other LBRE departments, including Sustainability and Energy Management (SEM), Land Use and Environmental Planning (LUEP), and University Architect/Campus Planning and Design (UA/CPD) have responsibility for undertaking and/or providing studies, projects and services related to campus utilities and transportation, land use and environmental issues, as well as building and landscape design.   

g. Risk Management
Risk Management assists departments with claims over $1,000 for damaged or lost goods.

Back to top

3. School and Department Administration

a. Planning
To facilitate negotiation with vendors on price agreements, Procurement encourages schools and administrative areas to provide the Director of Strategic Purchasing Services with a long-range forecast of anticipated acquisitions during annual budget formulation.

b. Order Management
The University department initiating an order is responsible for the following:

  • Timely acknowledgment of receipt or acceptance of goods or services, including entry of receiving information in Oracle Financials.
  • Timely notification of Accounts Payable in cases of disputes which might require withholding of payments from a supplier.
  • Monitoring department and supplier performance in accordance with the terms of the contract or order.
  • Notifying Procurement in the event of inadequate performance or nonperformance by a supplier.

c. Permits and Licenses
The department is primarily responsible for signing or obtaining necessary permits or licenses in support of the acquisition of products, i.e., import licenses, U.S. Department of Agriculture permits for importation of a biohazard, etc. (see Guide Memo 5.1.1: Procurement Policies).

d. Logistics
(1) Packing and Shipping Off-Campus
The department is responsible for packing items for shipment. The person(s) packing and/or signing the shipping papers for any "Dangerous Goods" including Dry Ice, must be trained and certified. The training and certification must be repeated every two years. For further information and assistance, see Shipping of Hazardous Materials
(2) Loss or Damage Claims
The department is responsible for asserting any claim for damaged or lost goods. (Procurement and Risk Management may be available to assist; see Guide Memo 2.4.4: Property and Liability Insurance, and Guide Memo 5.3.1: Requisition Processing.

Back to top

4. U.S. Government

a. Office of Naval Research (ONR)
The Office of Naval Research has cognizance for administration of most Department of Defense and NASA contracts at Stanford. Procurement works closely with ONR for any necessary approvals on government subcontracts. ONR conducts a periodic review of Stanford's Procurement system and Procurement works with ONR to implement recommendations made.

b. Defense Contract Audit Agency (DCAA)
The Defense Contract Audit Agency conducts periodic audits of Stanford's Procurement system. As with ONR's annual audits, Procurement works with DCAA to implement any recommendations.

c. Small Business Administration (SBA)
The SBA has responsibility for reviewing Stanford's activities under government regulations for doing business with small business and other targeted concerns (see Guide Memo 5.5.1: External Affirmative Action). SBA visits Stanford periodically and examines supplier selection and subcontract award practices, particularly under government contracts for which Stanford has submitted subcontracting plans.

Back to top

5.2.1 Financing of Purchases

Last updated on:
09/05/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
53

This Guide Memo describes arrangements by which the University advances loans that are repaid over time to schools and departments to finance capital projects, programs or purchase equipment.

Authority: 

Approved by the Senior Associate Vice President for Finance.

1. Definitions

a. "University financing" is an internal mechanism whereby the University makes an unsecured loan ("Internal Loan") to a school or department to finance capital projects, programs or purchase equipment and recovers the loan principal, plus interest, over the useful life of the asset by system generated journal entries from a PTA (Project/Task/Award) or PTAs identified by the department. The authorization to borrow is documented in a Funding Agreement for projects that are approved by the Board of Trustees (BOT) and in a Form 1 for other projects. While the asset is owned by the University, the school/department retains all ownership responsibilities, including recording the equipment purchase into the Sunflower Assets System as soon as it is received and in service.

b. "Amortization" also referred to as debt service, is the repayment of principal and/or interest over the term of an Internal Loan. For service centers, the principal component of debt amortization payments on a project is treated as a proxy for asset depreciation expense charges and is included in the service centers' rates as such. Interest is charged and principal balances are amortized based on the prior period's ending principal balance.

c. "Religious Use" means any use including services, meetings and any other activity conducted by or for a religious group or organization in a University facility.

d. "Private Use" generally means the use of tax-exempt-financed property in a trade or business by any person or entity other than the borrower, a 501(c)(3) affiliate of the borrower, or a state or local government entity, and use by the borrower [or any other 501 (c)(3) organization] in an "unrelated trade or business." The use does not have to result in unrelated business income to be considered private use. Private use examples may include but are not limited to: lease of university property to non-university entities; non-compliant management or service contracts (e.g., food servicecontracts); non-compliant corporate sponsored research agreements; naming rights arrangements with a private user.

e. "Substantial Completion" occurs when an asset is "placed-in-service." An asset is placed in service when one of the following conditions is met (in order of availability and importance):
(1) issuance of a Temporary Certificate of Occupancy (TCO)
(2) signed-off Permit,
or
(3) certification by a Project Manager

Back to top

2. Purchases Eligible for Debt Financing

Schools and departments may obtain Internal Loans for academic capital projects, capital equipment purchases, service center capital projects and capital equipment purchases, auxiliary projects and capital equipment purchases, bridge financing the receipt of gift pledges and receivables, and other University programs such as the Faculty Staff Housing Program.

Once an Internal Loan is approved, the Treasurer's Office and Capital Accounting determine whether the project is eligible for taxable, tax-exempt, or a mix of taxable and tax_exempt debt. If the Funding Agreement or Form 1 indicates that a capital project is designated for academic purposes and tax-exempt debt is allocated to the project, it is implied that there will not be a change in use throughout the life of the project. Penalties may be incurred if religious and/or private use take place in facilities financed with tax-exempt debt. The Treasurer's Office, the Tax Director or the Capital Accounting Bond/Tax Compliance Analyst in the Controllers' Office should be notified if religious and/or private use in a tax-exempt financed facility is contemplated at any time. Questions regarding Private Use or Religious Use can be directed to the Capital Accounting Bond/Tax Compliance Analyst.

Back to top

3. Approvals

a. University Approvals
The Chief Financial Officer (CFO) or his/her designee is advised on debt allocations by a group consisting of representatives from the Provost's Office, Land, Buildings and Real Estate (LBRE), and the Controller's Office. Certain allocations of debt may be subject to completion of a debt affordability analysis conducted by the Treasurer's Office and approval by the CFO. Financing of all capital projects requires an authorized Form 1 or, approval from the Board of Trustees (BOT) and an executed Funding Agreement. Form 1 approval procedures are outlined on the LBRE/Department of Capital Planning website. Guide Memo 8.3.1: Capital Projects, provides guidance on capital projects.

The BOT must review and approve increases in budgeted project costs for BOT level projects, including new building construction, projects with a total cost of $10 million and above, use of 5,000 or more new square feet within the academic growth boundary, changes in land use, and projects with major exterior design changes.

Bridge financing of gift pledges for capital projects requires prior approval from the Provost and the CFO and must be documented in a Funding Agreement. The Funding Agreement addresses financial responsibility during and after construction. See Section 4.f for information on the repayment of Internal Loans, which bridge finance the receipt of gifts.

The Capital Accounting department in the Controller's Office is responsible for processing approval for all capital projects and capital equipment loans.

b. Capital Equipment Approvals
Schools may require approval from the School Dean's Office before committing to finance a capital equipment purchase.

Back to top

4. Internal Loan Terms

The BOT approves University debt issuances and delegates responsibility to the CFO to issue debt in the capital markets and to advance Internal Loans to schools and departments. The organization responsible for servicing Internal Loans (Paying Organization) and funding sources must be identified at the time of approval and documented in a Form 1 or in a Funding Agreement. The Paying Organization will be responsible for monthly amortization payments (interest and principal) on an Internal Loan over the remaining useful life of the asset being financed. The Treasurer's Office is responsible for the repayment of external debt.

a. Budgeted Interest Rate (BIR)
The University accumulates, by project, in a single fund (Single Interest Fund) all interest expense and bond issuance costs ("Interest") from notes and bonds issued to finance capital projects and programs that support the academic mission of the University. The BIR is the weighted average rate of all Interest related expenditures, including administrative costs, over the projected outstanding debt of the University available for project/program loans during the same accounting period (generally the University's fiscal year). The BIR is charged to the outstanding unamortized Internal Loan principal balance. Notes and bonds or other debt issued to finance activities unrelated to the academic not for profit mission of the University, or issued to finance a specific asset are excluded from the BIR calculation.

b. Taxable Debt Premium
If, as a result of management decisions, the project funding structure requires taxable debt when tax-exempt debt would have otherwise been permitted, a 1% interest "Premium" will be assessed. The Premium will be calculated on the Internal Loan principal balance outstanding, it cannot be capitalized and will be charged directly to an operating account until the taxable debt is fully amortized. The Premium is subject to change throughout the internal amortization period. The 1% Premium will be published along with the BIR.

c. Prepayment Penalty
The borrower may incur a prepayment penalty ("Penalty") if debt requested for the project is reduced after the Form 1 or Funding Agreement has been executed. The Premium will be equivalent to (1) interest expense on the corresponding bond obligation until such time as proceeds have been redeployed, or (2) premiums and fees incurred to repurchase the corresponding bond obligation in the open market.

d. Exceptions to the BIR
The BIR is not charged to projects for which construction is in progress (CIP). During CIP and until Substantial Completion, interest on Internal Loans is added to the loan principal balance outstanding and capitalized. During CIP, the interest rate charge is the effective monthly weighted average interest rate computed by Capital Accounting. The intent is to make the capitalized interest expense included in the cost of construction, an accurate component of the total cost of the building, which is then used to calculate depreciation expense for financial reporting.

e. BIR Calculation
Each year in December, or as needed for the general funds forecast, the Treasurer's Office in collaboration with the Capital Accounting group develop a BIR forecast for next fiscal year's budget.

During the course of the fiscal year, the Capital Accounting group compares the effective BIR with the approved BIR. The CFO determines if the variance between effective and approved BIR requires an interim adjustment. In the event of a mid-year reset, the prior months' interest expense will not be restated.

f. Amortization of Internal Loans
In the month following Substantial Completion of a capital project, installation of capital equipment, or the draw down of an Internal Loan for a program, the Capital Accounting group assesses the BIR on Internal Loans principal balances outstanding and collects principal amortization. Amortization proceeds are deposited in the recycling pool and used for certain Internal Loans.

  • Debt service on projects financed with tax-exempt debt must be funded with current operating revenue. The Paying Organization must provide an operating account PTA to be included in the Form 1 or Funding Agreement.
  • Projects that are assets for academic facilities and auxiliary programs amortize on monthly level payments (principal payments increase and interest decrease) over the remaining life of the asset or program. Monthly payments are adjusted to reflect changes in the BIR.
  • Service Center fixed assets and capital equipment purchases amortize on a fixed principal payment schedule (straight-line amortization) over the remaining useful life of the asset. Straight-line amortization is used because the principal amortization component matches the asset's financial depreciation expense, which is included in service center rates. Monthly payments are adjusted to reflect changes in the BIR.
  • Internal Loans bridge financing the receipt of gift pledges are charged interest monthly on the outstanding balance, and the balance is reduced as gifts are received. Interest payments are adjusted to reflect changes in the BIR. If, after Substantial Completion of a project, gifts have not been identified, do not have signed pledge agreements, or will not be received, the CFO will determine whether the school or department financially responsible for the Internal Loan must:
    (1) Immediately repay the funds
    or
    (2) Pay interest only for the first 12 months after the project's Substantial Completion, and amortize the Internal Loan principal balance outstanding on a level payment schedule over 24 months starting in month thirteen.

If 36 months have elapsed since the project's Substantial Completion and it is determined that pledges will not be received, the Internal Loan principal balance is immediately due and payable.

Back to top

5. Amortization Schedule

a. Payment
Debt service payments start one month following Substantial Completion. For example, if a project is completed during May, the debt service payment will start in June. The project will be charged capitalized interest in May based on April's ending balance. In June, the project will begin amortizing based on May's ending balance. For purchased equipment (not included in a capital project), the debt service payment starts in the month following the payment for that equipment.

b. Interest
The BIR is used to calculate the interest portion of the debt service payments. The BIR may change during a fiscal year. Prior months' interest expense will not be restated. The University reserves the right to make retroactive adjustments to the BIR if required.

c. Schedules
There are two amortization schedules: level payment and fixed principal.

  • Level payment
    Internal Loans for academic and auxiliary capital projects are amortized on a monthly level payment schedule over the useful life of the asset being financed. Payments are adjusted to reflect changes in the BIR. The principal component increases over time as the interest component decreases.
  • Fixed principal
    Service Center capital projects and all capital equipment purchases are amortized on a fixed principal payment schedule over the life of the asset. Payments are adjusted to reflect changes in the BIR. The interest component fluctuates with the BIR, but the principal component remains the same and is charged straight line, over the useful life of the asset.

Back to top

6. Asset Categories and Lives

Amortization of Internal Loans is based on the lesser of the estimated useful life of the asset category orthe actual useful life of the asset (e.g., asset disposal or sale). The following are amortization lives (amortization periods) listed by asset category:

Asset Categories and Lives

 

Asset Category

Life

Computer Equipment 3 years
Vehicles 4 years
Data Handling Equipment 5 years
Scientific/Technical Equipment 5 years
Standard Telecommunications Equipment 5 years
IT (Information Technology) Systems 7 years
General Purpose Equipment 10 years
Complex Telecommunications Equipment 10 years
Furniture 10 years
Modular Furniture 10 years
Shop Machinery and Tools 10 years
Dedicated Special Purpose Building Space 15 years
Electrical and Utility Control System 15 years
Storm Drains 15 years
Building Renovations, including component Replacements 20 years
Steam and Chilled Water Utility Distribution Systems 22 years
Domestic Water and Sanitary Sewer Pipelines 30 years
New Building Constructions 30 years
Parking Structures and Lots 30 years
Steam and Chilled Water Utility Production Equipment 30 years
Electric and Signal Ducts 40 years
Major Structures (dams and reservoirs) 40 years

 

Capital Improvements to a Leased space; lesser of the initial lease term or the asset's estimated useful life.

These amortization periods reflect specific assets' expected useful life and are generally consistent with the University's depreciable lives used for financial statements reporting. For indirect cost recovery and financial statement reporting, academic buildings and land improvements are depreciated by components, but for the amortization of Internal Loans, composite lives are used.

For assets not shown, or if asset life does not fall within the guidelines, please contact Capital Accounting.

Back to top

7. Capital Equipment Financing Procedures

a. PTA (Project/Task/Award)
The department contacts Capital Accounting to obtain the financing PTA to which the purchase is initially charged.

b. Purchasing Standard Requisition (STD)
The department completes a Purchase Requisition.

c. Repayment
Internal Loan principal balances are amortized in equal installments, plus interest, on the remaining balance. Interest on the loan is charged in the month following the invoice for the purchase is paid. Amortization of principal starts the first month after the equipment is purchased. Debt service payments, including both principal and interest, are automatically charged monthly to the PTA(s) designated by the department (in the requisition).

d. Reports
Interest and principal charges can be viewed on expenditure statement(s) for the applicable PTA(s).

e. Loan Closeout
Charges to a departmental PTA(s) stop when an Internal Loan is paid off.

Back to top

5.2.2 Equipment and Real Estate Leases

Last updated on:
06/15/2011
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
54.3

This Guide Memo describes policies that apply to equipment and real estate leases. Capital and operating lease liabilities utilize the University's debt capacity. All uses of debt must comply with the University's debt policy and require prior approval. The only parties authorized to execute documents that commit Stanford to a lease obligation are: the Director of Procurement and the CFO for equipment leases; the Vice President for Land, Buildings & Real Estate; the Managing Director, Real Estate; and, the Provost for real estate leases. For relevant policies, see section 1 in Administrative Guide Memo 5.1.1: Procurement Policies. Approvals, requisition processes and reporting requirements are included.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

1. Definitions and Terms

a. Leases
Leases are contracts under which a lessee has committed to pay stipulated cash payments for the use of an asset (either equipment or real estate) for a specific period of time. For the purposes of this Memo, a lease is considered the commitment to pay for the use of an asset for longer than one year, with total contracted cash payments over the term of the lease of $5,000 or greater.

Capital and operating leases are considered long-term financial obligations of the University. Therefore, all new leases and lease renewals, either equipment or real estate, are considered a use of the University's debt capacity.

b. Rentals
Commitments not meeting these qualifications should be considered rentals that are not subject to this policy.

c. Capital Lease
An equipment lease is capitalized if the total anticipated contracted cash payments over the term of the lease, excluding any transportation costs, are greater than or equal to $200,000, on a per contract basis, and at least one of the following criteria is met:

  • By the end of the lease term, ownership of the leased property is transferred to Stanford
  • The lease contains a bargain purchase option that Stanford reasonably expects to exercise
  • The lease term is substantially (75% of more) equal to the estimated useful life of the leased property
  • At the inception of the lease, the value of the minimum lease payments is 90% or more of the fair value of the leased property.

Capital leases are reported as an asset and a liability on Stanford's financial statements and interest and depreciation are expensed.

d. Operating Lease
When an operating lease does not meet the definition of a capital lease in 1.c above, the operating lease payments are expensed as incurred.

Back to top

2. Equipment Leases

a. Approvals and Thresholds
Equipment leases with total anticipated contracted cash payments over the term of the lease of $200,000 and above must be approved by the CFO. Equipment leases with total contracted cash payments over the term of the lease under $200,000 can be approved by managers with requisite expenditure authority in relationship to total contracted cash payments.

b. Approval Forms
The Equipment Lease Approval form can be downloaded from the Gateway to Financial Activities website. 

c. Board of Trustees Approval
Equipment leases with total anticipated contracted cash payments of $5,000,000 and above require approval by the Board of Trustees.

d. Requisition
Following budget approval, departments must submit an online requisition for the total contracted cash payments over the term of the lease to Procurement in Oracle Financials using the Standard Lease category.

e. Lease Terms
Procurement is responsible for negotiating equipment lease terms. Equipment leases must be signed and executed by the Director of Procurement or the CFO.

f. Reporting Requirements
Departmental Property Administrators are responsible for establishing and maintaining property records for leased equipment in the Sunflower Asset Management System. Leased equipment must be tagged and tracked according to the policies of the Property Management Office

By September 30 each year, departments must provide the Controller's Office with a certificate and a schedule of all equipment lease obligations to assist with the preparation of the University's financial statements and the property tax-exemption application. Reporting forms for equipment lease obligations can be downloaded from the Gateway to Financial Activities website.

g. Return of Equipment
Unless the department wishes to buy the equipment, a memo to Procurement is sufficient to return the item at the end of the lease. Procurement will notify the lessor.

h. Equipment Purchase at the End of the Agreement
To buy equipment at the end of a lease, the department must submit a new online requisition, using the Standard Capital Equipment category and referencing the original lease purchase order number.

i. Receiving Equipment
The department must inspect, verify and document the condition of leased equipment when received. Online receiving in Oracle Financials is required for leased equipment. A record for each asset must be entered into the Sunflower Asset Management System within 30 days of receipt.

j. Insurance
Stanford's high deductible insurance coverage makes it unlikely that the University's insurance carrier would pay for any loss or damage. Therefore, lessor's insurance for equipment should cover all aspects of damage and injury. For more information, contact the Assistant Vice President of Risk Management.

k. Change of Terms
Departments must observe the start and stop dates of the lease. Using the equipment outside the terms of the agreement has significant contractual implications and may subject Stanford to additional rental charges, early termination charges, and other liabilities. The lessor's insurance may be valid only during the stated period. To terminate an equipment lease early, the department must contact the assigned buyer in Procurement.

l. Renewals and Extensions
Departments must submit an online requisition to Procurement to extend the duration or renew the term of a lease.

Back to top

3. Real Estate Leases

a. Approval Process and Thresholds
All real estate leases must be included as a capital request in the Capital Planning Process. The Capital Planning Process is managed by the Vice President for Land, Buildings & Real Estate and occurs in conjunction with the annual budgeting process for the University. Departments are required to submit their capital plans and requests for debt to the Vice President for Land, Buildings & Real Estate for approval.

Real estate lease searches and/or negotiations initiated outside the Capital Planning Process must be approved by the Vice President for Land, Buildings & Real Estate.

Any real estate leases, not included in the Trustee-approved Capital Budget, require separate approval from (1) the Vice President for Land, Buildings & Real Estate if the total anticipated contracted cash payments over the term of the lease are under $1,000,000, or (2) the Provost if the total anticipated contracted cash payments are $1,000,000 or above.

b. Approval Forms
Real estate lease approval forms can be downloaded from the Land, Buildings & Real Estate website.

c. Board of Trustees Approval
Real estate leases with total contracted cash payments of $5,000,000 and above require approval by the Board of Trustees.

d. Requisition
Following approval and prior to negotiating lease terms, departments must submit an off-campus lease requisition form to the Vice President for Land, Buildings & Real Estate. The form can be downloaded from the Land, Buildings & Real Estate website. The Vice President will direct the request to the Managing Director, Real Estate for target locations within the Stanford Research Park or the Welch Road corridor. The Vice President will advise in the search, or direct the requestor to an approved real estate advisor for other target locations.

e. Lease Terms
The Vice President for Land, Buildings & Real Estate and/or the Managing Director, Real Estate will assist departments in negotiating lease terms. Real estate leases must be executed by the Vice President for Land, Buildings & Real Estate or the Managing Director, Real Estate.

The Office of the General Counsel must review and approve material exceptions to standard terms.

Upon execution of the lease, departments must request a Purchase Order or BU number from Procurement for the total contracted cash payments over the term of the lease, to ensure proper recording of the transaction and to enable payments.

f. Reporting Requirements
Departments must provide the Controller's Office and Land, Buildings & Real Estate by September 30 each year, a certificate and a schedule of all real estate lease obligations to assist with the preparation of the University's financial statements and the property tax-exemption application. Reporting forms for real estate lease obligations can be downloaded from the Gateway to Financial Activities website. 

g. Insurance
Lessor's insurance for real estate leases should cover damage to the building and premises and injury occurring in the building's common areas. For more information, contact the Assistant Vice President of Risk Management.

h. Change of Terms
Departments must observe the start and stop dates of the lease. Occupying the real estate property outside the terms of the agreement has significant contractual implications and may subject Stanford to additional rental charges, early termination charges, and other liabilities. The lessor's insurance may be valid only during the stated period. To terminate a real estate lease early, the department must contact the Vice President for Land, Buildings & Real Estate.

i. Renewals and Extensions
Departments must follow the approval process to extend the duration of the original contract, exercise options included in the original contract, or renew a real estate lease.

Back to top

5.2.3 Equipment Loans to Stanford

Last updated on:
07/12/2013
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
54.6

This Memo describes the policies that apply to equipment loans. Only Procurement and the CFO are authorized to execute documents that commit Stanford to a loan obligation.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

1. Definition of Terms

a. Loans of Equipment
A loan occurs when Stanford receives free use of equipment. For example, a manufacturer may lend Stanford experimental or prototype equipment that needs testing under regular operating conditions. Even though no payment is involved, other liabilities, such as insurance coverage and repair costs, need to be covered by a loan agreement negotiated, signed and executed by Procurement.

b. Sponsor-Furnished Property
Sponsor-furnished property is a loan of property from a sponsor and managed under the terms and conditions of an existing sponsored award or bailment agreement. The Property Management Office, in conjunction with Office of Sponsored Research, is responsible for ensuring the terms and conditions of the award are followed. Find more information about Sponsor-furnished property at Acquisition chapter, Section 2.4 Loans, Transfers and Leases, in the Property Management Manual.

c. Leases
For policy regarding equipment leases, consult Administrative Guide Memo 5.2.2: Equipment and Real Estate Leases.

Back to top

2. Requisitions

a. Initiating the Loan
Following departmental approval, departments must submit an online requisition to Procurement in Oracle Financials using the Standard Capital Equipment category. Forward any agreement forms or other documentation to Procurement.

b. Equipment Purchase at the End of the Agreement
To buy equipment at the end of a loan, the department must submit a new online requisition using the Standard Capital Equipment category and referencing the original purchase order number.

Back to top

3. Receiving & Recording

The department must inspect, verify and document the condition of loaned equipment when received. Online receiving in Oracle Financials is required for loaned equipment as it is for purchased equipment.

Departmental Property Administrators are responsible for establishing and maintaining property records for loaned equipment in the Sunflower asset management system. Within 30 days of receipt, loaned equipment must be tagged and tracked according to the polices in the Property Management Manual.

Back to top

4. Insurance Coverage

Stanford's goal is for the lender's insurance to cover all aspects of damage and injury related to an equipment loan. Contact the Assistant Vice President of Risk Management or the Director of Procurement if there is any question of Stanford assuming any liability for the loan or that appropriate coverage is provided.

If the lender is not providing insurance, note this on the requisition.

Back to top

5. Change of Terms

Departments must observe the start and stop dates of the loan. Using the item outside the terms of the agreement has significant contractual implications and may subject Stanford to rental charges, early termination charges, and other liabilities. The lender's insurance may be valid only during the stated period.

Back to top

6. Return of Equipment

Unless the department wishes to buy the equipment, a memo or email to the assigned buyer in Procurement is sufficient to return the item at the end of loan. Procurement will notify the lender.

To terminate an equipment loan early, the department must contact the assigned buyer in Procurement. An online requisition to Procurement is required to extend the duration or renew the term of a loan.

Back to top

5.2.4 Surplus Property Sales

Last updated on:
07/12/2013
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
56

This Guide Memo covers sale of surplus University property.

Authority: 

Approved by the Associate Vice President for Research Financial Compliance and Services.

1. Authority to Transact Sales

a. Surplus Property Sales Office
The mission of the Surplus Property Sales office (SPS) is to sell University property for the best possible price while ensuring responsible handling of excess assets and contributing to campus-wide sustainability initiatives. The Board of Trustees has authorized only SPS to perform this function (Resolution Number 3 September 13, 1983). Therefore, the only entity authorized to sell tangible personal property (hereafter referred to as "property") to non-Stanford entities is SPS.

For the purpose of this document "property" is defined as capital and non-capital movable assets including, but not limited to, equipment and accessories, furniture, vehicles, or supplies.

Specialized sales may include significant involvement by departments, including the identification of a potential buyer. In such cases, the sale must be pre-approved and processed by SPS.  The check from the buyer is to be made payable to Stanford University Surplus Sales, and include sales tax, where applicable. All payments must be deposited by Surplus Property Sales.

b. University Departments
Departments may not give, sell or donate property to individuals, including Stanford employees and students, or to non-Stanford entities, including non-profits. If a department arranges a buyer to purchase property, the sale amount must be approved by SPS.  All sale transactions must go through SPS. Departments may transfer property to other departments, either for no charge or for credit to departmental accounts. The property must be used for University business purposes. The ReUse website is available to facilitate viewing and posting items available for interdepartmental transfer. The transferring and receiving departments must notify the Department Property Administrator (DPA) and Property Service Representative (PSR) of a transfer to ensure asset records reflect the change. Refer to the Property Management Manual for transfer procedures.

Back to top

2. Sales Tax

a. Transfer Between University Departments
Because title to the item remains in the University, there is no sales tax incurred.

b. External Sales
Sales tax will be applied, as required, to all external transactions.

Back to top

3. Basic Sale Policies

a. Disposition Requests
The Department Property Administrator (DPA) initiates an excess request upon notification of excess property.  Surplus Sales will determine optimum disposition method for the assets, including potential sale.  For specific information refer to Section 4.2, Disposition and Transfers in the Property Management Office (PMO) Property Management Manual.

b. Sales Terms and Conditions
Established terms and conditions apply to all sale transactions. Full description of these is available in Section 4.3, Surplus Property Sales, in the Property Management Manual.

c. Sales Commission
As a self-funded department, SPS retains a percentage of all sales based on the SPS Fee Structure, for purposes of offsetting operating expenses. The SPS Fee Structure is reviewed and approved annually as part of the University's budget process.  Refer to Section 4.3, Surplus Property Sales, in the Property Management Manual for additional details.

d. Sales Expense
Any expenses related to the sale of an item will be deducted from the proceeds of the sale or charged to the department if no sale occurs. Sales expenses may include, but are not limited to: appraisal, advertising, brokerage, or auction fees; diagnostic, registration, smog and repair costs; moving, handling, transportation, and disposal expenses.

e. Proceeds
The proceeds from sales of any University-owned property belong to the University. Sales revenues are distributed in accordance with the approved SPS fee structure.

f. Delivery
Buyers are responsible for timely packaging, removal and transport of the items they buy.

g. Sale Records
The buyer may not take possession until payment has been received by SPS. Records of all sale transactions are retained by SPS per University Policy as stated in Guide Memo 3.1.5: Retention of Financial Records.

h. Equipment Inventory Update
Property records are updated by PMO as appropriate, to reflect the final disposition transaction.

i. Non-Marketable Property
Items that are broken, inoperable or otherwise deemed unsellable will be disposed or recycled per University policies via the prescribed excess process by Surplus Sales. For equipment items there is no additional cost to departments for this service. For furniture items, such items may be disposed of by departments at their cost with prior approval from PMO.

j. Right of Refusal
Surplus Sales may refuse items that are deemed to be in non-marketable condition. Delivery will be diverted to PSSI for disposal at the originating department's expense.

Back to top

4. Sales Requiring Particular Caution

a. Property owned or funded by Federal or other Sponsors
Authorization from the Sponsor may be required prior to disposal or sale. The DPA must work closely with the Property Management Office in handling such transactions. Contact your Property Service Representative (PSR) for further instructions.

b. Donated Equipment
Internal Revenue Service requirements may restrict or prohibit sale of donated equipment. See Guide Memo 4.2.3: Records of Donated Equipment, for more information.

c. Hazardous Equipment

  1. Contamination Risk
    Prior to release from the department, property must be decontaminated per Environmental Health & Safety guidelines.  A list of items that must be sanitized is available at the Environmental Health & Safety website. 
    Items that require sanitization must have a letter confirming sanitization attached to the unit prior to being picked up or delivered to SPS.
  2. Injury Potential
    For property with the potential to cause injury, SPS and the department will discuss whether the property should remain with the department pending final disposition, so that only people familiar with the equipment will handle it.

d. Software and Sensitive Data
Before delivery to SPS, departments must take steps to permanently remove University proprietary information from any computer or computer peripheral device. See Secure Computing for a complete description of University policy regarding data sanitization. Special care should be taken with licensed application software to ensure that the terms of the licensing agreement regarding sale or transfer have been observed.

Back to top

5.3.1 Requisition Processing

Last updated on:
09/21/2012
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
54

This Guide Memo provides an overview of the procurement process. University departments are encouraged to contact Procurement early in the acquisition process. Procurement buyers and Contracts Specialists can help develop technical specifications and provide product descriptions, estimates of cost or price and lists of suppliers.

Authority: 

Approved by the Senior Associate Vice President for Finance.

1. Purchasing Systems

The University has implemented the Oracle Financials systems to record its financial transactions. All acquisition transactions, including purchase requisitions, reimbursement requests, purchase orders, invoices, and payments must be entered in the Oracle Financials system. Administrative staff typically use the Oracle iProcurement system for requisition entry and lookup, and the ReportMart system for general financial reporting needs. This system is referred to simply as "Oracle Financials" elsewhere in this and other Guide Memos.

a. Preparing Transactions
Online transactions must be prepared by a person with a SUNet ID and appropriate authority to access the online systems. Stanford faculty, staff, and students acting in an administrative capacity all have access to the online acquisition systems.

b. Approvals
Every requisition is electronically stored and routed on the computer system to a designated person who is an authorized approver for the account to be charged for the acquisition of products or services.

c. Transaction Processing
Business transactions are processed through Oracle Financials electronically, which includes forwarding or returning purchase requisitions to personnel with signature authority, obtaining authorized approvals electronically, sending appropriate notifications to users, transmission of orders and related documents to suppliers, and payment for products and services.

d. Personal Expenses
Personal expenses and purchases that are not made on behalf of the University or for use by the University are not permitted. These may be considered fraudulent transactions. Purchases must be for the use and benefit of Stanford University, regardless of intent to reimburse Stanford. If any Stanford user associated with the purchase commits purposeful fraudulent or other inappropriate behavior regarding the proper use of the requisitioning and purchasing process, it will be considered serious misconduct and will result in disciplinary action.

e. Getting Started
To help employees gain familiarity with the system, classes are offered periodically. Online tutorials are also available.

Back to top

2. Requisition Routing

a. Approvals
In addition to departmental approval, schools may require Dean's Office approval for purchases. A requisition will also be automatically routed to other offices if their approval is needed.

b. Attachments
Attachments for requisitions are normally electronically attached to the Oracle iProcurement requisition.

Back to top

3. Vendor Selection

a. Information Source
Departments may obtain information about vendors through lookup in the Oracle iProcurement system, or by contacting Procurement directly.

b. Soliciting Suppliers
After an online requisition of $25,000 or above is made available to Procurement, the assigned buyer works with the requesting department in considering potential suppliers. If written bids, quotations or proposals are appropriate; the buyer prepares and communicates solicitations to prospective suppliers. The buyer and the department select the supplier based on Stanford's policies.

c. External Affirmative Action
The University is committed to doing business with small businesses and other targeted concerns when they can supply products or services that meet the University's needs; see Guide Memo 5.5.1: External Affirmative Action.

Back to top

4. Purchase Orders and Contracts

Procurement is authorized to assign a contract number to formal contracts. Unless otherwise authorized by the Board of Trustees or delegated authority from the Chief Purchasing Officer, no other University department may assign contract or purchase order numbers in acquisition of products or services.

a. Contracts
A written contract may be appropriate in the following circumstances:

  • The nature of the work and obligations of the parties must be set out in detail and specificity.
  • Payment terms are complicated and require special handling.
  • Equipment being acquired is unusual, unique or special. Examples include situations where design, engineering, testing or other special factors might be risks of the transaction.
  • For consulting services.
  • For research.
  • For construction or installation of fixtures which may expose Stanford to liability to third parties.
  • For blanket orders (see Guide Memo 5.3.2: Blanket Purchase Orders.
  • For license agreements, rentals and leases; see Guide Memo 5.2.2: Equipment and Real Estate Leases.

b. Modifications
When the product, service or terms of acquisition must be changed for the acquisition to meet the University's needs, the department is responsible for initiating an online requisition to authorize the change. Requisitions for change or modification should be promptly processed by University departments. A failure to do so may result in no delivery of the product or service or nonpayment of the supplier.

Back to top

5. Delivery and Receiving

a. Delivery Points
(1) General Shipments
Most campus shipments are delivered directly to the ordering department by the supplier or shipper. If there are questions or special requirements concerning a delivery, a Procurement buyer can advise on the appropriate manner, place and terms of delivery to be included in an order.
(2) Radioactive Shipments
Radioactive materials may not be delivered directly to any department. All shipments of radioactive material go to the Health Physics Inspection Station at 820 Quarry Road for examination by Health Physics and verification of a CRA (Controlled Radiation Authorization) number. After examination by Health Physics, delivery is made or the materials may be picked up by the requesting department. Refer to Guide Memo 5.1.1: Procurement Policies.
(3) Biohazard Shipments
Bio hazardous material may be delivered directly to University departments; however, each department is responsible for ensuring that a department representative is available to receive the shipment and for ensuring that safe handling of such products occurs upon delivery. Refer to Guide Memo 5.1.1: Procurement Policies.

b. Certification of Receipt or Acceptance
Receipt of goods or services is entered into the online systems. Receiving transactions are used by Accounts Payable to determine eligibility of a particular invoice for payment. Special circumstances may occasionally require more complex procedures. Requestors should work with the cognizant buyer and Accounts Payable representative to accommodate any special needs.

c. Expediting
Procurement can expedite orders when notified by a department or supplier that an order needs special attention, i.e., a delivery failed to come in as expected, etc.

d. Claims
The University department is primarily responsible for administering shipping claims. If Procurement was involved in the transaction, the buyer can, upon request, assist departments in handling damage claims, return or repair of defective items, and/or return of the item delivered when the wrong product was shipped. For losses or damage over $1,000, the Risk Management Office may be contacted for assistance.

e. U.S. Customs
The buyer assists departments in complying with U.S. Customs, filling out, signing and submitting applications for duty-free entry of scientific instruments, and permits for importation of organisms and biological vectors.
Note: Procurement uses the services of Stanford's exclusive customs broker and preferred vendor for logistics services, and encourages University departments to do the same. Contact Procurement for more information.

Back to top

5.3.2 Blanket Purchase Orders

Last updated on:
09/21/2012
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
54.2

This Guide Memo contains policies on Blanket Purchase Orders.

Authority: 

Approved by the Senior Associate Vice President for Finance.

1. Purpose of Blanket Purchase Orders

If a department frequently needs supplies or services from the same supplier, Procurement may establish a blanket purchase order. Blanket purchase orders are established for varying periods, and allow the department to order directly from the supplier. The blanket purchase order contains ordering and billing instructions, a price agreement, and a description of the goods or services that can be ordered.

Back to top

2. Departmental Blanket Purchase Orders

a. Audit Trail
The ordering department is responsible for maintaining a complete audit trail of transactions under a blanket purchase order. This includes administering and documenting the authority for issuing orders and maintaining records of transactions.

b. Releases
Individual releases under Blanket Purchase Orders are not entered online in Oracle Financials. The ordering department is responsible for tracking releases independently of online systems. All releases must carry the Blanket Purchase Order Number, and any invoices presented must also carry the Blanket Purchase Order Number.

Back to top

3. University-Wide Purchase Agreements

The Procurement Department may determine that the interests of productive business dictate a consolidation of business activity. If many departments use one supplier, then Procurement may establish a University-wide Purchase Agreement with that vendor.

a. Releases
University departments should enter a requisition, for each transaction released against a University-Wide Purchase Agreement.

b. Temporary Service
Agency Agreements are established on a University-wide basis every two years. For information about approved agencies, call Procurement. To obtain temporary service help from an agency on the approved list, the department enters an appropriate requisition online. The Agency in turn references the approved Purchase Order Number on its invoice. The invoice and a copy of the temporary employee's time sheet (previously approved and signed by the department representative at the end of the employee's work) are sent to Accounts Payable for payment.

Back to top

5.3.3 Purchasing Cards

Last updated on:
09/21/2012
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
54.5

This Guide Memo contains policies on use of Purchasing Cards to purchase goods or services made directly by departments. Purchasing Cards are a tool for individuals making purchases on behalf of the University for which Stanford is financially liable. There are two types of Purchasing Cards: an individual Purchasing Card and a Department Purchasing Card. The individual Purchasing Card is issued to a specific person. The Department Purchasing Card is issued to a department and assigned to a custodian. The policies are the same for both types of Purchasing Cards, unless specifically noted.

Authority: 

Approved by the Senior Associate Vice President for Finance.

1. Authority to Purchase

a. Delegation of Authority
The Chief Purchasing Officer delegates to University departments signature authorization for ordering supplies and services (except for transactions noted in 2.b) directly from vendors with a Purchasing Card when the total cost of the purchase is less than $4,999.99 subject to the limitations contained in this Guide Memo.
[Note: The item cost includes tax, shipping, handling and installation, if applicable. Together the item and all taxes, etc. cannot exceed $4,999.99.]

A department may delegate such authority to those persons authorized to approve departmental expenditures in accordance with Guide Memo 3.2.1: Authorizing Expenditures, or to a selected subsection of that group.

b. Department Responsibility
This delegation of authority comes with the responsibility for departments to observe all University policies and procedures related to purchases, and to observe all government laws and regulations (state and federal) that apply to the commercial transactions placed via the Purchasing Card.

c. Audit
All Stanford transactions, including those using this procedure, are subject to review by the Controller's Office as well as internal and external auditors for compliance with sound business practices, institutional policies and procedures, and any applicable laws and regulations.

d. Assistance
The Financial Support Center (FSC) at (650) 723- 2772 is available to consult with departments on the application process, training, and use of the Purchasing Card. For more information, see the Purchasing Card website. 

Back to top

2. Criteria for Use

a. Basic Criteria
Stanford faculty, staff and student employees are eligible to obtain a Purchasing Card or Departmental Purchasing Card provided they:

  • Have support and approval of their supervisor and department finance/budget officer
  • Complete a brief training session
  • Follow the Purchasing Card Program policies and procedures, see the Purchasing Card web site. 
  • Follow additional guidelines, if any, as defined and supported by their School or local business unit

b. Uses Not Allowed
Because of tax reporting, inventory, and regulatory requirements, and to simplify reconciliation, the Purchasing Card cannot be used in the following circumstances:

  • Personal Expenses: Personal expenses and purchases that are not made on behalf of the University or for use by the University are not permitted. These may be considered fraudulent transactions. Purchases must be for the use and benefit of Stanford University, regardless of intent to reimburse Stanford. If any Stanford user associated with the purchase commits purposeful fraudulent or other inappropriate behavior regarding the proper use of the requisitioning and purchasing process, it will be considered serious misconduct and will result in disciplinary action.
  • Fabrications: A fabrication is a unique item that cannot be acquired off-the-shelf, has a useful life of more than one year, and is made of components that cumulatively cost $5,000 or more. Do not use the Purchasing Card to acquire components of an item regarded as a fabrication.
    Note: Putting together a computer system does not meet the definition of a fabrication since a computer system is not unique.
  • Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials may include chemicals, compressed gases, radioactive materials, nucleotides, peptides, growth media, controlled substances, restriction enzymes, or biological organisms, as defined by federal, state, and University regulations.
  • Travel: Travel expenses include airline tickets, hotel costs, car rentals, meals, and telephone usage while traveling. Continue to use travel cards for these expenses. For more information, see Guide Memo 5.4.2: Travel Expenses.
  • Student Conference Registration
  • Cash Advances
  • Laboratory Animals: For more information, call Comparative Medicine at 3-3876.
  • Any Purchase Over $4,999.99, unless specifically authorized by the Associate Controller for School and Department Operations.
    [Note: The item cost includes tax, shipping, handling and installation, if applicable.]

Back to top

3. Responsibilities

a. Cardholder Responsibilities
Purchasing Card cardholders act as purchasing agents of Stanford University and are issued a Card associated with their department. Cardholders should not lend or share their Card. They must keep their Card secure and the Card number confidential. A detailed description of all cardholder responsibilities is available at Fingate Buying and Paying

b. Verifier Responsibilities
Purchasing Card verifiers have the responsibility to review each transaction in the PCard module, including a complete and accurate business purpose, an appropriate account to be charged, completion of all required verification fields, and route to an appropriate approver(s) as soon as practicable within 60 days of the transaction.

Purchases of $75 or more require transmission of an electronic image of receipt with the PCard module transaction. Retention of receipts after successful transmission of electronic image is at the discretion of the department.

Failure to complete verification and approvals within 60 days of transactions may result in card suspension and/or expenditures reported as taxable income to the card user or the cardholder. Cardholders may verify their own transactions but must route transactions to an approver who has authority over the account charged, does not report directly or indirectly to the cardholder, and is not the beneficiary of the transaction. A detailed description of all verifier responsibilities is available at Fingate Buying and Paying

c. Custodian Responsibilities
Departmental Purchasing Cards are issued to a department and assigned to a custodian. The custodian must be identified on the card application. Custodians control the distribution of the Card to designated individuals, track the use and location of the Card, and must ensure the Card is kept secure. A custodian may not be the approver and must route all transactions to someone with financial authority over the account charged, who does not report to the individual who made the purchase or on whose behalf the purchase was made (beneficiary). A detailed description of all custodian responsibilities is available at Fingate Buying and Paying

Charges incurred on a Department Purchasing Card are not disputable with JPMorgan. Consequently, the Department is ultimately liable for any fraudulent and erroneous charges not resolved directly with the merchant.

d. Approver Responsibilities
Purchasing Card approvers have the responsibility to examine trans-actions to ensure that charges are appropriate and comply with university policies and purchasing card policies. In addition to reviewing transaction details in the PCard module, approvers must review the electronic image of receipts for purchases of $75 or more, and investigate cases where receipts are not available. Transactions should be approved in a timely manner; failure to complete approvals within 60 days of transaction may result in card suspension and/or expenditures being reported as taxable income to the card user or cardholder. An approver may not be the verifier, and cannot report to the individual who made the purchase or be the beneficiary of the purchase/ transaction.
Note: Approvers should not be an attendee at a business meal for which they are approving. A detailed description of approver responsibilities is available at How to: Review, Approve, or Reject PCard Verifications

e. School and Department Management Responsibilities
Managers have the responsibility of approving who can be a cardholder, verifier, and/or custodian. Furthermore, managers are responsible for disseminating local business rules and monitoring Purchasing Card transactions to ensure compliance with the Purchasing Card Program policies and any local business rules. Additional information regarding School and Department management responsibilities and tools for monitoring Purchasing Card transactions is available at Fingate Buying and Paying

f. Strategic Purchasing & Payment Services Responsibilities
To supplement (but not replace) the University officer's basic review responsibility, Strategic Purchasing & Payment Services reviews Purchasing Card and Department Purchasing Card transactions on a sample basis. If Strategic Purchasing & Payment Services finds incorrect or improper charges, they direct the person responsible for the expenditures to correct the error. If necessary, Strategic Purchasing & Payment Services may correct the department's error and will provide the department with a copy of the accounting entry. If excessive or repeated errors occur, additional training may be required or the card revoked.

Back to top

4. Alternatives to the Purchasing Card

Several methods are used to purchase items. In order to choose the most effective and cost-efficient purchasing method, please refer to the decision tree

Back to top

5.3.4 Books, Periodicals and Membership Dues

Last updated on:
09/21/2012
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
57.1

This Guide Memo describes policies on making purchases from the Stanford Bookstore or directly from publishers.

Authority: 

Approved by the Senior Associate Vice President for Finance.

1. Stanford Bookstore Purchases

a. Stanford Bookstore
Departments order books and supplies from the Bookstore using a PurchasingCard ("P-card") or standard purchase order.

b. Books not Stocked in Bookstore
When books are not available in stock, the Bookstore will order from a book wholesaler or publisher. Books will be shipped directly from the wholesaler or publisher to the department.

c. Purchasing with Grant or Contract Funds
When grant or contract funds are used for Bookstore purchases, the department requesting the purchase is responsible for ensuring that the purchases are authorized by the funding source. In some cases, low-cost items such as calculators are viewed in grants or contracts as general purpose equipment and may not be purchased without advance approval by the funding source. Contact the Office of Sponsored Research for more information.

Back to top

2. Direct Orders for Books

Direct orders for books should be placed via a standard requisition in iProcurement.

Back to top

3. Subscriptions and Membership Dues

Periodical subscriptions and membership dues should be paid via a Non-PO Payment Request in the Expense Requests system.

Back to top

4. Reimbursements for Cash Purchases

a. Requesting Reimbursement
Reimbursement of an individual's personal expenditure for books, subscriptions or membership dues with subscriptions can be made through petty cash if the items are within current petty cash dollar limits. All other reimbursement requests must be made via an Expense Report in the Expense Requests system.

b. Receipt Required
The individual is responsible for providing an original receipt showing proof of payment with the request for reimbursement. A copy of the personal check after processing by the bank can serve as a receipt if none is provided by the supplier.

Back to top

5.3.5 Payment Policies

Last updated on:
09/21/2012
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
54.1

This Guide Memo describes Stanford's policies on payments to vendors for materials or services ordered.

Authority: 

Approved by the Senior Associate Vice President for Finance.

1. Products or Services

Accounts Payable pays invoices in accordance with payment terms negotiated or secured by Procurement. Departments must ensure that all purchase commitments (those appropriately executed through iProcurement) are made only with approved, Oracle-generated purchase orders.

  • Invoices that do not reference an approved Oracle-generated purchase order number will initiate an audit.
  • To correct invoices without a valid purchase order number, requesters must instruct suppliers to resubmit invoices referencing an approved Oracle-generated purchase order number.

Accounts Payable may, at its discretion, verify receipt or acceptance of products or services before paying any invoice.

a. Purchase Orders
Marking the item as received in Oracle Financials indicates to Accounts Payable that the invoice may be paid.
(1) Items Requiring Certification of Receipt or Acceptance
Accounts Payable does not pay the invoice until evaluation has been completed and the item has been accepted (see Guide Memo 5.3.1: Requisition Processing).
Note: The department should not mark the item as received in Oracle Financials until it is accepted.
(2) Capital Equipment and High Value Noncapital Purchases
For capital equipment and noncapital purchases of $5,000 or more, Accounts Payable requires approval through Oracle Financials before paying the invoice.
(3) Low Value Noncapital Purchases
For noncapital purchases over $5,000, Payment Services requires department approval. This approval can be made with a signature on the invoice, by receiving in Oracle Financials, or by email response to Accounts Payable's hold notification.

b. Blanket Purchase Orders
(1) Verification
Accounts Payable will start the payment process for the transaction upon receiving an invoice listing the blanket order number.
(2) Void Transactions
Accounts Payable will not pay any invoice that exceeds the not-to-exceed total of the blanket purchase order.

c. Price Differences Between Invoice and Purchase Order
For a number of reasons, the invoiced amount may differ from the dollar amount approved on the purchase order or service contract. If the invoice amount exceeds the amount on the purchase document, the Accounts Payable processor is authorized to pay the invoice amount without a written change order only on a standard purchase order where the difference is not more than 10% of the purchase order amount and the total difference does not exceed $250.

d. Periodic Payment Orders
(1) Purpose
A Periodic Payment Order authorizes Accounts Payable to make a fixed payment at fixed intervals for a specific period of time. This method is useful for equipment rental or maintenance, where the charge remains constant unless something unusual occurs.
(2) Schedule
A Periodic Payment Schedule is established by Procurement in consultation with the requesting department and supplier. Under a periodic payment order the requesting department's responsibilities include:

  • Verifying that Accounts Payable pays only valid charges for services or goods the department receives.
  • Maintaining records for audit purposes.

Back to top

2. Freight Bills

a. Prompt Payment Required
Federal and state regulations require Stanford to pay all freight bills within 7 days of receipt. Accordingly, departments must send the freight bill to Accounts Payable as soon as received.

b. Terms
Procurement attempts to negotiate standard terms of Free on Board ("FOB") Destination. That means the title and risk of loss of the item are passed to Stanford upon delivery of an item at Stanford or any other specified destination. If those terms are not acceptable to the vendor, Procurement negotiates to have the vendor prepay transportation charges and add them as a separate charge on the invoice. However, if shipping charges are not known and not included on the issued purchase order, the vendor may prepay freight and separately invoice for shipping costs.
(1) Payment for Freight Delivery Under a Purchase Order
If any department receives a freight invoice for a product obtained under an issued purchase order, a department representative should forward it promptly to Accounts Payable for payment, ensuring that the purchase order number is clearly noted on the invoice.

Back to top

5.3.6 Payments to Nonemployees

Last updated on:
03/15/2013
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
36.5

This Guide Memo describes or references procedures for authorizing payment for services to the University by individuals who are not University employees. SLAC National Accelerator Laboratory (SLAC) currently applies the applicable policies contained herein. SLAC departments should consult the SLAC Office of the Chief Financial Officer website for SLAC procedures which differ from those set forth below. For information about faculty honoraria, please see Chapter 5 of the Faculty Handbook.

Authority: 

Approved by the Senior Associate Vice President for Finance.

1. Classification of Work Performed

Whether an individual is an employee or an independent contractor is determined by the facts in each case.

For information about how the University determines whether an individual is an employee or an independent contractor, see Guide Memo 2.2.3: University Payroll, Section 1.

Back to top

2. Tax Reporting

Stanford reports all payments to applicable tax authorities as required by law. Tax reportable payments are reported annually to the:

  • Internal Revenue Service on IRS Form 1099-Misc. and on IRS Form 1042S for Nonresident Aliens
  • California Franchise Tax Board (FTB) on CA FTB Form 592B

Back to top

3. Payment Methods

a. General Rules

  • For payments to corporations, suppliers requiring a signed agreement, individuals on contract, or individuals performing services, initiate a Standard Requisition in Oracle Financials iProcurement.
  • For honoraria payments to speakers or participants in workshops, use Oracle Financials Expense Requests Non-PO Payment requests. Honoraria payments are considered "gratuitous" payments and are subject to income tax reporting (see Section 2).
  • For payments to caterers not requiring a signed agreement, use Oracle Financials Expense Requests Non-PO Payment requests or the Purchasing Card. The Purchasing Card has a limit of $4,999. Payments to caterers are subject to income tax reporting (see Section 2).

Note: Payments for services rendered may not be processed through petty cash.

b. Use of Purchasing Requisitions
A Purchasing Requisition is used to set up contracts with vendors of services to the University. For more information see Guide Memo 5.3.1Requisition Processing.
(1) Timing of Request
The purchase requisition should be processed before the services are performed.
(2) Required Information

  • Payee name and address
  • Time period
  • Amount to be paid
  • Statement of work to be performed
  • Location of work performed
  • Payment schedule
  • A completed W-9, which will include information regarding:
    • Social Security number or business tax identification number
    • Citizenship status
    • California residency status
      Note:The W-9 and all banking or otherwise confidential data should be be submitted via the secure Supplier Request Portal.

Back to top

4. Temporary Help Agencies

If the individual's compensation for work performed at the University is paid by a temporary help agency, the person is employed by the agency, and is not put on the University payroll. The University pays the agency, which is then responsible for tax deductions, Social Security payments, and Worker's Compensation insurance.

a. Approved Agencies
Procurement seeks competitive bids every two years from temporary help agencies, and enters into contracts with selected agencies, which are placed on an approved list. Only agencies on the approved list should be used.

Back to top

5. Payments to Nonresident Aliens

For detailed information, see Inviting and Paying Foreign Visitors.

a. Visa Requirements
All offers of reimbursements, travel payments or honoraria to foreign visitors are contingent on the visitor entering the United States on a visa that allows the visitor to receive payments (see Guide Memo 2.4.1: Visas for and Employment of Foreign Nationals.

(1) Honoraria
Visitors with J-1 visa status may be paid honoraria but visitors with non-Stanford sponsored visas must have written permission from their sponsoring officer for payment. Visitors with B-1, B-2, WB or WT status may be paid honoraria if:

  • The event lasts no more than nine days, and
  • Services are a direct benefit to Stanford, and
  • The visitor has not received payment from more than five institutions in the past six months.

(2) Travel Expenses
Visitors from countries that have agreements with the U.S. to waive visitor visas (WB and WT) and visitors with J-1, H-1, B-1 or B-2, or A-1/A-2 visa status may be reimbursed for business travel expenses. Visitors with B-2 visas or WT status must conform to the restrictions listed in (1) above.

b. Tax Information
(1) All Visitors
For non-payroll payments to foreign visitors holding valid visas, the department must submit a Declaration of Tax Status (Stanford Form LA-6), and copies of passport, visa and I-94 card with the Oracle Financials reimbursement request. See Requesting Payment section of Inviting and Paying Foreign Visitors.
Note: all confidential documents and data, including that listed above, should be submitted via the secure Supplier Request Portal.

(2) Visitors from Treaty Countries
If the visitor's country of residence has a treaty with the U.S. ,the following forms may also be required, depending on what type of payment is proposed:

  • Internal Revenue Service Form 8233: Exemption From Withholding on Compensation for Independent Services of a Nonresident Alien Individual for honoraria or services.
  • Certificate of California Residence, if applicable. Note that a tax treaty applies only to Federal taxes and does not exempt an individual from California withholding taxes.

The Travel section of the Gateway to Financial Activities website contains links to printable versions of most of these forms.
Note: Form 8233 and all banking or otherwise confidential data should be submitted via the secure Supplier Request Portal.

c. Tax Identification Number
An Individual Tax Identification Number (ITIN) or Social Security Number (SSN) is necessary if the payment is for an honorarium and the visitor is claiming a tax treaty by submitting the appropriate exemption form (see Section 5.b.(2) above).
Note: Tax Identification Numbers, Social Security Numbers and all baning or otherwise confidential data should be submitted via the secure Supplier Request Portal.

d. Withholdings
If there is no Social Security Number (SSN) or Individual Tax Identification Number (ITIN), 30% taxes will be withheld from honoraria payments. If there is no tax treaty, 30% taxes will be withheld from honoraria payments (see Section 5.b.(2) above).

Back to top

6. Payments to Non-California Residents

a. California Withholding at Source
Payments to an individual who is not a California resident are subject to California withholding at source tax. California law requires that Stanford (the "source" of the payment) withhold 7 percent from payments for non-employee personal services made to an individual who is not a California resident, if the aggregate total of such payments to that individual during a calendar year is greater than $1,500 and services were performed in California.

b. California Residency Status
In general, non-employee, non-corporate individuals without a California address, DMV driver's license, or other sufficient evidence of California residency, who will perform their services over a period of fewer than nine consecutive months, will be presumed to be non-California residents unless they submit a Certificate of California Residence (see below).

c. Certificate of California Residence
If an individual claims exemption from California withholding at source on the grounds that he or she is a California resident, no California withholding will be taken from payments that are made after the following procedure has been completed:

  • The individual claiming to be a resident must complete California Form 590 (Certificate of California Residence).
  • The original must be submitted with the invoice.

Form 590 is valid for one year; a new form must be completed for a subsequent year.

d. Mandatory Communication
The host department administrator must advise any out-of-state visitor in writing and in advance of the requirements in this section.

Back to top

7. Supplemental Research Support to Visiting Scholars

a. Definition
Supplemental Research Support is payment for research support made by a department to an individual who is not a Stanford employee. Such payments must meet the following criteria:

  • Purpose of the payment is to assist the individual in the accomplishment of research for the individual's own purposes.
  • The University has no direct interest in the research (other than its general interest in the advancement of knowledge in all fields).
  • The payment in no way represents compensation for the past, present, or future services rendered by the individual to the University.

b. Tax Status
Supplemental research support is treated in all respects as a fellowship for tax purposes. Fellowships paid to non-degree seeking individuals are taxable.

c. Procedure
Supplemental research support payments to visiting scholars are authorized through the Payroll Office (725-5351).

Note: Supplemental research support to a Stanford faculty or staff member must be processed as supplemental salary. See Quick Steps: Request Recurring Payment.

Back to top

5.4.1 Expense Advances

Last updated on:
06/15/2011
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
36.3

This Guide Memo outlines policy on advancing funds for University activities.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

1. Funds Advanced for Business Expenses

a. Purpose of Expense Advances
Under certain circumstances it may be appropriate to request a cash advance to pay for travel (e.g., airfare or pre-paid lodging) for students or staff members who travel infrequently on University business, or to pay human subjects. All advances for travel must include supporting documentation such as an air ticket receipt showing proof of payment. Any other advance request not implicitly listed above, is considered an exception and requires advance approval by the Director of Strategic Payment Services in Procurement (or designee). The University does not allow expense advances for personal reasons or registration fees. See Guide Memo 5.4.2: Travel Expenses, section 10.

As a preferred alternative to an expense advance, the University has a travel card program described in section 2 of Guide Memo 5.4.2: Travel Expenses.

b. Authorizing and Issuing Funds
Expense advances are authorized by departments, and are issued to the individual who will be incurring expenses. Responsibility for the University funds remains with the individual until an accounting is made of expenditures through an expense report in the Expense Requests system.

c. Amount of Expense Advances
The amount advanced may not exceed the estimated cash required for the activity.

d. Commitment of Funds
Funds authorized for an expense advance are committed against the account specified by the department. However, the account is charged after expenses are recorded.

e. Expense Reports
An Expense Requests expense report covering the full amount of the advance must be submitted in a timely manner. Absent exceptional circumstances, expenses submitted more than 60 days after the date of completion will be reported as taxable income to the individual, in accordance with Internal Revenue Service guidance.

f. Return of Unused Funds
If the business need for an outstanding advance ceases to exist, the funds advanced must be returned immediately. Funds not used for expenses must be returned to the University. See Quick Steps: Return Unused Advance Funds.

Advances not cleared within a reasonable time will be withheld from subsequent reimbursements until the advance has been fully cleared. If it is not possible to recover the advance through reimbursement withholding and it has not been repaid within 60 days, the advance will be reported as taxable income to the individual to whom the advance was intended, in accordance with Internal Revenue Service guidance.

Any advance reported as personal income will be expensed to the specified guarantee account. If the specified account is for a restricted fund, the department responsible for the restricted account is also responsible for transferring the expense to an unrestricted account.

The advance recipient will not be eligible to receive any future advances if the advance was not properly cleared.

Back to top

2. Requesting an Expense Advance

a. Initiating a Request
The department initiates a request for an advance online using the Advance module in the Expense Requests system. See Quick Steps: Request a Travel Advance.

b. Timing of request
Approved expense advances must be received by the Travel & Reimbursement department of Strategic Payment Services at least 10 working days before the date the funds are needed. If a Rush advance is needed, or if pickup at the "Will Call" window is requested, a fee will be charged to cover the extra cost involved in preparing and handling the specially processed check (see paragraph 2.c).

c. Check Delivery
Checks for expense advances may be delivered by interdepartmental mail to the department, sent via U.S. Mail, deposited directly to the payee's bank account, or picked up at the Payroll & Payments Services "Will Call" window on the second floor or Tresidder Memorial Union (459 Lagunita Drive, Suite 7). A special handling fee will be charged for all pickups at Tressider and rush requests sent via U.S. Mail.

Back to top

5.4.2 Travel Expenses

Last updated on:
03/05/2015
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
36.7

This Guide Memo outlines policy on travel undertaken for University business.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to employees and non-employees traveling on authorized University business, and to all travel expenses reimbursed by the University or paid for on the University Travel Card, regardless of the source of funds.

While policy statements are applicable to the entire University, including the SLAC National Accelerator Laboratory (SLAC), some of the specific procedures listed here do not apply at SLAC. SLAC travelers should contact the SLAC Travel Office for procedural information.

1. General Policy

a. Travel Expense Policy
The University's policy is to pay for necessary and reasonable travel expenses incurred for authorized University business by employees and approved non-employees. The intent of this policy is that such payments be fair and equitable to both the traveler and the University and consistent with federal regulations. Individuals traveling on business are responsible for complying with University travel policy as described in this Guide Memo, and should exercise the same care in incurring expenses as they would in personal travel. Expenses should be submitted in a timely manner. Absent exceptional circumstances, expenses submitted more than 60 days after completion of travel will be reported as additional income to the individual, in accordance with Internal Revenue Service guidance.

b. Approval Authority
Authority and responsibility for approving travel by employees and guests of the University rests with the person responsible for the account (PTA) to which the expense will be charged. Travel expenses are payable only when all required approvals, including approval from government agencies or other project sponsors, are obtained before incurring the expense. Expenses incurred during sabbatical leave are payable when the expenses are incurred for reasonable and necessary University business and have the advance written approval of the department Chair. Employees may not authorize travel or approve expense payments for themselves, or for a person to whom they report directly or indirectly.

c. Economical Transportation Required
To be fully paid by the University, the traveler must use the most economical mode of transportation available, consistent with the authorized purpose of the trip. This includes charging no more than the rate for the most direct and usually traveled route and measuring such costs as subsistence and lost work time in addition to actual transportation costs. More expensive transportation may be used if the traveler pays the incremental cost.

GUIDELINE: Automobile transportation is generally most appropriate for round trips up to 200 miles. Commercial air travel is generally the most economical and practical for longer trips. For ground transportation, rental or privately-owned vehicles and taxis should be used only if other means of transportation are unavailable, more costly, impractical, or if the time saved is advantageous to the conduct of the University's business.

d. Limitation on Group Travel
Travel by a group of employees in the same aircraft, automobile or other means of transportation is discouraged when an accident could seriously affect the functioning of a University activity. Maximum coverage under the University's travel insurance also limits the number of employees traveling together at five.

e. Charges to Sponsored Projects
When travel costs will be charged to a sponsored project, the terms of the applicable award take precedence. Some awards may require the sponsor to pre-approve each trip, or each trip to or from a destination outside of the United States.

f. School and Department Guidelines
At their discretion, schools, departments, laboratories and institutes may impose more restrictive guidelines for budgetary or control reasons. They may not be less restrictive than guidelines stated in this policy.

g. Preferred Travel Agency and Online Booking Tool
The University has a "preferred" travel agency and has negotiated contracts to provide services for Stanford employees and their families as well as students and guests of the University. The University will pay travelers for the service fee charged by its preferred agency for Stanford business travel. The University will not pay travel costs that exceed the cost of substantially similar travel available through its preferred agency or negotiated contracts. See the Gateway to Financial Activities website for more information.  

Back to top

2. University-Provided Travel Card

Purpose
The University has a travel card program to facilitate payment of travel-related expenses (i.e., airfare, lodging, car rental, travel meals, etc.) incurred in furtherance of University business. The program is available to regular faculty, staff and post-doctoral fellows. Individual and department cards are included in the program. See the Gateway to Financial Activities website for more information. 

Back to top

3. Commercial Air Travel

a. Lowest Available Airfare
All Stanford staff, faculty members, students and University visitors traveling on business are expected to travel at the lowest available airfare and to take advantage of Stanford's negotiated fares that are available through the University's "preferred" travel agency. Federal regulations require that only the cost of the lowest available airfare may be charged directly or indirectly to government sponsored projects. Criteria used to determine the lowest available airfare are:

  • Leaves or arrives within a 1-hour window on each side of the traveler's desired departure or arrival time
  • Allows the traveler to choose airports
  • Is a nonstop flight if requested by the traveler
  • Does not include charter flights (see section 7.b)
  • Does not require staying over Saturday night unless requested by the traveler
  • Does not include circuitous routing when a stopover is required
  • The class is reasonably adequate for the medical needs of the traveler

b. Stanford Reimbursement
Stanford reimburses fares up to:

  • Coach class for domestic flights and international flights of less than eight hours total.
  • Business class for international flights of eight hours or more total. This includes connecting domestic legs, provided there are no layovers.

c. Accounting for Fares Over Lowest Available
If a traveler incurs charges in excess of the lowest available airfare (as defined in 3.a. above), the difference, up to the fare authorized for Stanford reimbursement (see 3.b.), must be charged to an unallowable expenditure type and a non-government sponsored account/activity. If documentation of the lowest available airfare is not available for a business class trip, the department charges one-third of the cost to an allowable expenditure type and the remaining two-thirds to an unallowable expenditure type and an unrestricted account/activity. For more information on allowability, see Guide Memo 3.1.4: Cost Policy.

d. Charges in Excess of Authorized Airfare
When a traveler prefers a higher class than that authorized, the traveler must pay the incremental difference.

e. Change Penalties
If a ticket has to be changed and a penalty is incurred, the traveler may claim payment from Stanford for the penalty. The penalty may be an allowable charge to a sponsored project. When trips must be cancelled, travelers are encouraged to rebook tickets for travel at a later date whenever possible. Travelers may wish to request payment for tickets to be used later by requesting an Advance in the Expense Requests system. See How To: Create Advance Request.

f. Unused Airline Tickets
Travelers are encouraged to rebook unused tickets whenever possible (see 3.d.). If it is not possible to use the ticket through rebooking, then it may be payable with proper documentation. An unused ticket affidavit must be completed and submitted in Expense Requests with an expense report. Go here to obtain a copy. Unused tickets should be charged to an unrestricted account (PTA).

g. U.S. Government Sponsor
If air travel will be paid by a federally-sponsored project, flying on a U.S. airline is usually required (Fly America Act). In some cases, the sponsor's written prior approval may be required before each trip or each foreign trip. For more information on the Fly America Act, see Policy Notes: Fly America Act (U.S. Air Carrier Requirement).

Back to top

4. Meals and Lodging

a. Lodging Choice
University business travelers are expected to use lodging accommodations that are necessary and reasonable. The lowest standard room rates are generally available through:

  • Conference listings
  • Stanford's negotiated academic rates
  • "Preferred" travel agency corporate rates

b. Options
The traveler may use one of four methods for expenses incurred in connection with official University travel of more than one day. The method selected must be used for the entire trip.

  • Actual Expenses
    The traveler may be paid for the actual costs of reasonable and necessary meals, lodging, and gratuities. See Expense Guidance for Business Meals. Tips for meals must not exceed 20% of the cost of meals. Any tip charges in excess of that amount will not be paid. When there is no overnight travel, meals will only be paid when the meal has a defined University business purpose (see One-Day Travel, 4.c.). In any case, payments for alcohol and related taxes and tips may not be charged to a government sponsored account (PTA).
  • Actual Lodging Expenses Plus Per Diem for Meals
    The traveler may be paid for actual lodging cost plus the applicable meals per diem rate. This rate varies by geographic area. See domestic and foreign per diem rates
  • Per Diem Lodging Plus Actual Expenses for Meals
    The traveler may be paid for the applicable lodging per diem rate plus the actual meal costs. The per diem rate varies by geographic area. See domestic and foreign per diem rates. 
  • Per Diem for Lodging and Meals
    The traveler may be paid for lodging, meals and incidental expenses on the basis of per diem for both lodging and meals. See Travel Rates.

c. Local Travel
Local travel is defined as less than 50 miles one way from Stanford or the traveler's residence, whichever is greater. Barring exceptional business reasons, local travel does not qualify for an overnight stay or payment of personal meals. If a trip exceeds the local travel limit, but the traveler chooses not to stay overnight, personal meals will be eligible for payment. Per diem rates may not be used for local travel. A bona fide business meal is generally eligible for payment [see section 10.b.(6)].

d. Departmental Discretion
Departments may elect to pay per diem for fewer days than the actual stay and may decrease the amount of per diem to reflect actual expenses.

e. Per Diem Applications
Stanford follows U.S. Government General Services Administration travel rates. Current Per Diem rates can be located at the Gateway to Financial Activities
(1) Per Diem for Days of Departure and Return
Per diem for the first and last days of the trip are payable at 75% of the Meals and Incidental Expense rate applicable for the city visited. The location where lodgings are obtained for the first night determines the rate for the departure day. The location of lodging on the last night determines the rate for the last day of travel.
(2) Multiple Stops
When a trip includes more than one University business stop and the cities involved have different per diem rates, the per diem rate for each calendar day (beginning at 12:01 a.m.) is determined by the location where the lodgings are obtained for that night.
(3) Deduction for Meals Included in Registration Fees
When a meal has been paid for as part of a registration fee or included in the hotel rate, a deduction must be made from the applicable per diem rate. The deductible amount varies based on the rate for the applicable city and may be found at the U.S. GSA website. Select the "Meals and Incidental Expense Breakdown" tab.
(4) Trips Over 30 Days
When estimated travel is for more than 30 consecutive days in one location, or when the circumstances of the travel are such that the traveler can reasonably be expected to incur expenses comparable to those arising from the use of establishments catering to the long-term visitor or from the use of noncommercial facilities (e.g., house-trailers or camping equipment), the traveler may choose to be paid either for the actual and reasonable cost of lodging and meals or a basic per diem allowance of 55% of the standard rate for the appropriate geographic area. The rate begins with the first day of travel.
(5) Extension of Travel
If, while on travel status, the traveler is granted an extension to the original estimated travel which then results in a total of more than 30 consecutive days in one location, the per diem allowance will be calculated at the regular rate from the first day up to and including the 30th day. After the 30th day the long-term rate is applicable if the per diem method is chosen.

f. Non-business Days
Weekends, holidays, and other necessary standby days may be counted as business days only if they fall between business travel days. If they are at the end of a traveler's business activity and the traveler remains at the business destination for non-business reasons, payment is not allowed for the additional days. The only exception is when travel is at a lower total cost if the traveler stays over a weekend or holiday, with department approval. The traveler must document the total cost savings in order to support the non-business day payment. This must be documented at the time of booking of the actual flight, comparing the actual flight to the cost of the airfare for business days only. A printout from Stanford's online booking tool must be included with the iOU expense report. If post-travel dated airfare comparison is submitted as backup, Disbursements will calculate an on-line comparison at the time of processing, and will pay based on the lower of the two equivalent airfares.

g. Foreign Travel
Foreign travel expenses are payable by the same methods as domestic travel. To obtain per diem rates for travel outside the contiguous United States, see website link

h. Sabbatical Lodging
Sabbatical lodging expenses are paid only if the faculty member incurs two sets of living expenses simultaneously and there is a stated Stanford business purpose for the expenses incurred during the sabbatical. If the primary home is rented out, the faculty member may not be paid for lodging expenses at a location away from Stanford.

Back to top

5. Private Automobiles

a. Expenses Allowed
The University will pay a standard rate per mile (see Travel Rates) for official travel by private automobile based on the actual driving distance by the most direct route (not more than 105% of the mileage listed on the Google Maps.
(1) Standard Mileage Allowance
The standard mileage allowance is in lieu of all actual automobile expenses such as fuel and lubrication, towing charges, physical damage to the vehicle, repairs, replacements, tires, depreciation, insurance, etc.
(2) Automobile-related Expenses
In addition to the standard mileage allowance, necessary and reasonable charges for the following automobile-related expenses are allowed: tolls, ferries, parking, bridges, tunnels, and liability and physical damage insurance coverage for driving in foreign countries or Hawaii [see paragraph 6.e.(2)]. Traffic ticket and parking ticket expenses must be paid personally, not by the University.

b. Local Travel
(1) Common Destination Points
One-way distances from the University to the following common destination points are shown below.

San Francisco International Airport, 25 miles
San Francisco, 40 miles
Asilomar, 92 miles
Berkeley, 42 miles
San Jose Airport, 20 miles
Monterey/Pacific Grove, 90 miles

(2) Computation Starting Point
Mileage may be computed from the traveler's home when travel occurs during weekends, holidays, or outside normal business hours (usually 8 a.m. to 5 p.m.). Mileage must be computed from home whenever the trip does not involve a business stop at Stanford and the distance from home is less than the distance from Stanford.

c. Auto in Lieu of Airport Shuttle
Travelers should use the most economical means for travel to the airport, including parking costs. Shuttle services usually provide the most economical means.

d. Automobile in Lieu of Commercial Air
When use of a personal automobile has been authorized in accordance with Guide Memo 8.4.2: Vehicle Use, and the automobile is used in travel for which air is generally most appropriate, payment may not exceed actual miles the automobile is driven at the standard rate per mile, and may not exceed the allowable cost that would have been incurred had travel been by air. For calculating the equivalent airfare to replace more expensive mileage charges, the coach fare plus ground transportation costs are applicable. Equivalent airfare is coach class, seven-day advance purchase. A printout from Stanford's online booking tool must be included with the expense report. The printout should be dated seven days before the actual travel date to accurately document equivalent airfare. If post-travel dated airfare comparison is submitted as backup, Disbursements will calculate an online comparison at the time of processing, and will pay based on the lower of the two equivalent airfares. If two or more people travel together by automobile for a business purpose, the equivalent airfare calculation is the sum of airfare plus ground transportation costs for all of the travelers.

e. Trips of More Than One Day
The University will pay the mileage allowance, meals, lodging, and automobile-related expenses if travel by automobile is the most economical mode of transporta-tion available. Otherwise the University will pay the cost of the least expensive alternate method of travel. The University will calculate an en-route per diem based on an average driving distance of 400 miles a day by the most direct route, or actual number of days taken, whichever is less. Each passenger claiming payment for meals and lodging must prepare a separate expense report.

f. Two or More People Traveling Together
Because payment for private automobile is to reimburse the owner for use of the car, mileage and related expenses are payable only to one of the two or more persons traveling together in the same vehicle.

g. Temporary Off-Campus Assignment
If the employee has a temporary assignment away from campus, reimbursement will be made for mileage between campus and the assignment location, or home and the assignment location, whichever is less.

h. Insurance and Accidents
See Guide Memo 8.4.2: Vehicle Use.

i. Commuting Expenses
The University will not pay employees for commuting expenses between home and campus. See section 13.d for remote worker policy.

Back to top

6. Rental Cars

a. Economical Alternatives
The University will pay the traveler for the cost of renting a compact or standard size car and for the automobile-related expenses, if use of the rental vehicle is the most economical mode of transportation. Before renting a car, the traveler should consider shuttle services and taxis, particularly for transportation between airport and lodging.

b. University Name on Rental Agreement
Car rental agreements for both employees and non-employees renting for University business should, for insurance reasons, whenever possible include "Stanford University" with the name of an individual. Use of the University-provided travel card serves this purpose for employees.

c. Driver and Location Limitations
For the traveler to be covered by the rental agency's basic insurance, the rental vehicle may not be driven by persons other than the renter, or leave the state in which it is rented, without the agency's permission.

d. Accident Notification
If a rented vehicle is involved in an accident, the Stanford Assistant Vice President of Risk Management should be notified promptly. See Guide Memo 8.4.2: Vehicle Use.

e. Additional Insurance Needed?
(1) Within the continental United States: NO: Since the University's insurance policy provides coverage in excess of the rental agencies' within the United States, travelers should not buy and will not be reimbursed for extra insurance from a car rental agency. Visitors to the University should be advised that additional insurance is unnecessary.
(2) Within Hawaii: YES: A traveler planning to drive a rental vehicle in Hawaii must purchase the rental agency's insurance. The University will pay the cost of such insurance.
(3) Outside United States: YES: A traveler planning to drive a rental vehicle in any foreign country must purchase the rental agency's insurance. The University will pay the cost of such insurance.

Back to top

7. Other Forms of Transportation

a. Piloting a Private Plane
The University officers listed below, or their designees, may authorize faculty and employees to pilot aircraft for travel on University business provided the documents listed in (1) through (4) are on file with Risk Management:

  • Deans of the seven schools
  • Vice Provost and Dean of Research
  • Vice Provost for Graduate Education
  • Vice Provost for Undergraduate Education
  • Director of the Stanford Linear Accelerator Center
  • Director of the Hoover Institution
  • Vice President of the administrative area

(1) The following information annually: Plane identification by year, make and model; hours flown in the past 12 months; and pilot certification type. See Risk Management Department for an online form to complete.
(2) A signed Release from Liability Agreement
(3) A current Certificate of Insurance evidencing aircraft liability coverage with minimum liability limits of $5,000,000 combined single limit with no sub-limit for bodily injury liability and no sub-limit for passenger liability. The Certificate of Insurance must also contain the following:

  • The Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University and its affiliates are named as additional insureds.
  • A Waiver of Subrogation from the aircraft insurer in favor of the University and indicating that coverage is primary.
  • A provision giving the University a minimum of 30 days written notice of cancellation or material change in coverage.

(4) Reimbursement will be based on the actual operating expense, rental fee for the aircraft, or the private aircraft mileage rate (see Travel Rates), up to a maximum amount not to exceed the commercial airfare that would be payable for the same trip. Equivalent airfare is coach class, seven-day advance purchase. A printout from Stanford's online booking tool must be included with the expense report. The printout should be dated seven days before the actual travel date to accurately document equivalent airfare. If post-travel dated airfare comparison is submitted as backup, Disbursements will calculate an on-line comparison at the time of processing, and will reimburse based on the lower of the two equivalent airfares.

Ground transportation costs that were not actually incurred will not be considered. However, actual ground transportation expenses remain payable. Any additional flight expenses, such as tie down fees, will not be paid, as those costs are part of the airplane reimbursement rates and are included in the maximum equivalent airfare calculation. Expense reports for use of private aircraft must show the type of aircraft and number of hours flown. When more than one person is carried on University business on the same flight, reimbursement is payable only to the pilot.

b. Charter Planes
Stanford business trips using chartered aircraft services are to be purchased through the Purchasing and Contracts Department by submitting a requisition for products or services. Before using the chartered aircraft service, the agreement must be reviewed and approved by the Stanford Purchasing and Contracts Department.

c. Railroads, Non-local Buses, Commercial Vessels
The University will pay the cost of the lowest first-class accommodations available for the trip. Payment will not exceed the equivalent commercial airfare for the same trip. Equivalent airfare is coach class, seven-day advance purchase. A printout from Stanford's online booking tool must be included with the expense report. The printout should be dated seven days before the actual travel date to accurately document equivalent airfare. If post-travel dated airfare comparison is submitted as backup, Disbursements will calculate an on-line comparison at the time of processing, and will pay based on the lower of the two equivalent airfares.
(1) Rail or Bus: For each night that railroad or bus accommodation is used, an amount equal to the lodging allowance will be deducted from the per diem rate, if applicable.
(2) Ship: Payment of per diem will not be allowed for the period of travel aboard a ship where the cost of subsistence is included in the fare for passage and stateroom.

Back to top

8. Combinations of Travel with University Travel

a. Expenses Payable by Others
Travelers are encouraged to combine University travel with other business so that travel expenses can be shared with other organizations, and are responsible for seeking reimbursement for expenses payable by others. If a traveler is taking a trip payable jointly by the University and another entity, the University will pay for its share of the actual fare necessary for University business. Fares greater than coach fare (first class, business class, etc.) cannot be used as the basis for prorating air travel costs. When an outside organization pays for lodging or meals, the traveler may not claim per diem from Stanford. In no case may the amount paid for the trip from all sources exceed the total expenses incurred.

b. Non-business Expenses
The University does not pay travel expenses that are not required for official University travel.

c. Indirect Routes
If, for other than University business, the traveler takes an indirect route or interrupts a direct route, payment for air fare will be at either the actual charge or the charge that would have been incurred by traveling the direct route by the most economical means, whichever is less. The charge that would have been incurred for a direct route must be documented, at the time of booking the actual flight, with a printout from Stanford's online booking tool and a copy of the printout included with the expense report.

d. Rental Cars
(1) Payment: Any personal portion of the cost of a rental car must be subtracted from the total rental bill before requesting payment. The personal portion is calculated by prorating the cost of the rental over the number of days for personal use and number of days for business use.
(2) Insurance: If the traveler accepts extra insurance cost for a domestic, mainland car rental in order to be covered during the personal portion, the entire cost of the insurance coverage for the entire rental period will be a personal expense. However, if the rental occurs in a foreign country or Hawaii, the cost may be prorated.

Back to top

9. Travel Expenses of Spouse and Others

a. Non-business Expenses
In general, the expenses of a spouse, family member, or other person accompanying the business traveler are not payable. Such expenses are only payable if the accompanying person has a position with the University and is traveling to make a significant contribution in furtherance of University business.

b. Exceptions
It is expected that there will be no exceptions to this policy, which is designed to assure compliance with legal requirements. Any request for an exception in truly extraordinary circumstances must be approved, in advance of the travel, by the Provost.

c. Hotel Rates
When a double hotel room is occupied by the business traveler and others whose attendance does not constitute a business purpose, the University will pay the single room rate. The single vs. double room rate must be provided in the notes section in the expense report or backup documentation. If the single room rate is not available or provided, the amount paid will be 85% of the double rate. In all cases, only reasonable and necessary accommodations will be paid (see section 4.a.).

Back to top

10. Miscellaneous Travel Expenses

a. Registration Fees
Registration fees may be expensed at the time of registration by requesting payment using a Non-PO Payment request in the Expense Requests system or seeking reimbursement for a personally paid registration. For conferences and events requiring travel, the University Travel Card can be charged. If registration is for a student, see section 11 for additional requirements.

b. Miscellaneous Expenses
Miscellaneous expenses essential to the purpose of the authorized travel must be submitted for payment on the same expense report as other travel expenses.
(1) Meeting Expenses
Registration (if not prepaid), costs of presentations, published proceedings, rental of meeting rooms and other actual expenses in connection with professional meetings, conferences, and seminars will be paid.
(2) Telephone, Fax and Computer Connections
Actual costs of necessary and reasonable business telephone calls, faxes and computer connections are allowable. Single telephone calls that cost $75 and above must be itemized by business purpose and name of person called, even if the call is to a Stanford number.
(3) Checked Baggage
Stanford reimburses fees associated with checked baggage. Baggage requirements should be reasonable and necessary to support the business need. A justification should be included in the expense report business purpose when more than two pieces of baggage are checked.
(4) Foreign Travel Costs
Actual costs of acquiring passports, visas, tourist cards, necessary photographs, birth certificates, required inoculations, immunizations, health cards, and fees for the conversion of funds to foreign currencies will be paid.
(5) Insurance
Insurance costs such as life insurance, flight insurance, personal automobile insurance, rental car insurance (except for foreign countries or Hawaii as noted in paragraph 6.e.(2) and (3)), and baggage insurance will not be paid by the University. (See Guide Memos 2.3.1: Survivor Benefit Plans, and 8.4.2: Vehicle Use.)
(6) Expenses on Behalf of Others
Ordinary and necessary business expenses incurred on behalf of others, including but not limited to food, beverages, refreshments and social or recreational activities will be paid. Expenses for personal entertainment are not payable.

  • Business Purpose Required
    To be considered nontaxable, the Internal Revenue Service requires that the business purpose and the names of persons entertained be shown on the iOU expense report. Individual names are not required if a group is involved and it can be identified as a single body.
  • Unallowable Expenditure Type
    Business entertainment and alcohol must be charged to the appropriate expenditure type for unallowable expenses.
  • Per Diem and Entertaining or Business Meals
    When a traveler who is paid at the full per diem rate furnishes a meal to others, either as entertainment or during a business discussion, the traveler must prorate the cost of the meal and seek additional payment only for the guest(s) meals. See Expense Guidance for Business Meals, If multiple multiple business or entertainment meals occur during a trip, or such a meal occurs during a trip of four days or less, the use of per diem for meals is not appropriate. Payment for actual meal expenses with appropriate receipts should be requested for the entire trip. Entertainment/fund raising meals may not be paid when they occur during a trip charged to a government grant or contract unless the actual meal expense option is chosen for the entire trip. In this way, the correct amount can be charged to an unrestricted account (PTA) and unallowable expenditure type.

  • Personal Expenses
    Expenses that are not directly related to and required for official University travel but that are incurred for the personal use or convenience of the traveler will not be paid. Except for unusual circumstances, laundry costs will not be paid unless a trip exceeds six days.

Back to top

11. Student Travel and Tax Issues

Any student reimbursement, graduate or undergraduate, which does not meet the criteria for University travel (see Section a. below), including required documentation, will be tax reportable and should be submitted and paid through Graduate Financial Services (GFS) for graduate students and through the Financial Aid Office for undergraduates.

a.   Undergraduate and Graduate Students
Students may be reimbursed for business travel whether or not they are employees, or for degree-related educational travel such as to attend a conference or visit a field site or laboratory facility. In most cases, such reimbursements are not tax-reportable to the Internal Revenue Service as income to the student, provided documentation is available showing that the travel:

  • Directly supports a faculty member’s project or research program, or
  • Is related to presenting at a conference (a photocopy of the conference program indicating the traveler is a speaker/presenter is required), or
  • Is an integral part of the student’s degree work (Faculty Certification required), or
  • Is directly related to the student’s employment at the University, or
  • Is official University business.

Any reimbursement to a post-doctoral student that does not meet the criteria for university travel (see Section b. below), including required documentation, will be tax reportable and should be submitted and paid through Graduate Financial Services (GFS) as a fellowship payment.

b.  Post-Doctoral Students
(1)   Attending
a conference, field site, or off-campus laboratory
Documentation: Along with appropriate receipts, the department should send to Travel & Reimbursement a signed statement from a faculty member certifying that the travel directly supports the faculty research or academic program, or attendance is to officially represent Stanford.
(2)   Speaking/Presenting a paper, poster, or serving on a panel
Documentation: Along with appropriate receipts, the department should send to Travel & Reimbursement a photocopy of the conference program indicating the traveler is a speaker/ presenter. No certification is necessary.

Back to top

12. Foreign Visitor Travel

a.   Documentation Required
Payments to foreign visitors, or on behalf of foreign visitors (direct payments to hotels, etc.), may be made only if the visitor enters the United States on an appropriate visa (see Guide Memo 2.4.1: Visas for and Employment of Foreign Nationals. In addition to the documentation required for all travel payments, requests for payment to nonresident aliens must include a signed Form LA-6 (Declaration of Tax Status), photocopies of the traveler's passport, visa, I-94 card, and, for J-visas, a copy of Form DS-2019 (Certificate Of Eligibility For Exchange Visitor (J-1) Status). All sensitive personal information should only be submitted through the secure Supplier Request Portal

b.  Advances
Foreign visitors who will be present here for longer than two weeks may request an advance for the amount of the air ticket. Required documentation must be included (copy of airlines invoice/itinerary showing proof of payment, and documentation listed in 12.a). If the expense will be subject to withholding taxes, deductions will be made from the advance payment unless appropriate tax exemption forms are included (IRS Form 8233 or W8-BEN). All sensitive personal information should only be submitted through the secure portal.

c.   Accounting
Note that if a trip either originates or terminates in a foreign country, the entire cost of the trip is coded to a foreign travel expenditure type. This includes any costs for meals and lodging in the United States when the trip originated outside the United States.

d.  Further Information
For more information on travel arrangements for foreign visitors, see:

Back to top

13. Special Travel

a.   Interview Travel
Travel expenses in connection with employment interviews are authorized when necessary to acquire key personnel for employment at the University. Travel expenses are allowed to the extent authorized in a formal written invitation to the prospective employee, as long as they do not exceed the limits and are consistent with the policies and procedures in this Guide Memo. Travel expenses of spouses accompanying prospective employees are also allowed to the extent authorized in the invitation. Requirements and limitations in specific sponsored project awards apply.

b.  Postdoctoral Employment Expenses
Postdoctoral employment interviews and recruitment are business expenses. Postdoctoral employee moving expenses can be considered business expenses if the postdoc’s position is a regular 100% FTE payroll position of 39 weeks or longer.

c.   Moving and Reassignment Expenses
See Guide Memo 2.1.20: Relocation of Faculty and Staff.

d.  Remote Workers
Stanford may hire employees who work remotely. These employees do not work in a regular Stanford office, but work from their homes or other location as their principal place of business. If the employee works remotely 100% of the time, occasional trips to campus for department meetings, special projects, peak-time work, etc. may be paid by the department at the manager’s discretion. Such payments are generally not considered to be commuting expenses and therefore are not taxable income to the employee. Each situation of 100% remote work may be very different and the manager and the employee should reach an agreement about the work plan, access protocols and need for on-site visits and any payment that may be appropriate.

Please see Flexible Work Options for more information and guidance.

Back to top

14. Records and Payment Procedures

a.  Receipts
Dated original receipts or invoices for expenses of $75 or more must be provided to the originator for electronic submission to Travel & Reimbursement as backup to a properly completed expense report. In accordance with IRS rules, the backup must support the cost and business character of the transaction, and, for a reimbursement, must show evidence of payment. Credit card statements are proof of payment, but are not considered to be itemized receipts, and are generally not enough documentation standing alone. If proof of payment by check is required, a copy of the cancelled check or bank statement is sufficient.

The electronic image attached to the expense report is considered the document of record, and the preparer should destroy the original paper receipts once T&R has completed processing and the expense report has been paid.

  • Meals: The cardholder’s copy of the charge form obtained at the time the charge is made will be accepted as documentation for meals. Payments for alcohol and related taxes and tips may not be charged to a government sponsored account (PTA) and must be charged to an unallow-able expenditure type. If the supporting documentation for a meal is not itemized, then the cardholder must note either “No Alcohol” or state the cost of any alcohol that was included in the purchase.
  • Transportation Tickets: Passenger copies of air, rail, boat, helicopter, and non-local bus tickets. For electronic tickets, provide a detailed invoice/itinerary (which may also be identified by the air carrier as a receipt), as long as it shows all times of departure, flight numbers, class of service, fare basis, ticket number or confirmation number, and cost of ticket, along with proof of payment (i.e., card being charged). Documentation that does not include this information is not acceptable as a receipt.
  • Car Rentals: Original car rental agreements or invoices showing proof of payment.
  • Lodging: Itemized lodging bill, unless a per diem allowance is claimed for the trip. Express checkout itemized receipts are acceptable. The express checkout must show credit card being charged. When the method of per diem for meals is chosen, there will be no payment of meals charged to the lodging bill.
  • Other Expenses: Expenses under $75 may be paid without a receipt. However, the amounts claimed must be accurate. Sponsored projects may have certain more restrictive receipt documentation requirements. The originating department is responsible for complying with these restrictions.

indicate Original Receipt Missing in the expense report with all relevant information. b.  Foreign Exchange Rate
The $U.S. equivalent should be included on receipts for purchases in foreign currencies. A University-approved currency converter is available on the OANDA website. If a copy of the traveler’s credit card statement is included with receipts, payment will be for the amount shown for the item on the statement.

c.   Missing Original Receipts
The traveler must seek a duplicate of a missing original receipt from the billing agency. When submitting an expense report, include the duplicate receipt showing proof of payment and indicate Original Receipt Missing in the expense report with all relevant information. 

d.  Expense Requests Expense Report
The University requires preparation of an expense report to account for any travel expenses that are to be charged to a University account (PTA). The properly completed and approved expense report must be submitted in a timely manner after returning from a trip. Absent exceptional circumstances, expenses submitted more than 60 days after completion of travel will be reported as additional income to the individual, in accordance with Internal Revenue Service guidance. If all expenses cannot be submitted on one expense report, subsequent reports must reference the initial iOU expense report.

(1)   Purpose: The expense report must include a statement of the purpose of the travel that shows the direct relationship of the travel to an official University function. The purpose for any stopover en route must also be included. If conference expenses are charged to a sponsored project, the conference must directly support the purpose of the sponsored project. A copy of the conference agenda or program should be included electronically with the submitted backup documentation.

(2)   Dates: All days from day of departure to the return date must be included on the expense report. Days for personal use must be shown as such.

(3)   Expenses: Costs of transportation, meals, lodging, and miscellaneous expenses must be listed by date and location on the expense report.

(4)   Approvals: The expense report must be approved online by the appropriate person authorized to approve expenses for the account(s) (PTAs) charged. No one may approve expenses for himself/herself or for an individual to whom he or she reports either directly or indirectly. Additionally, the person who incurred the expenses is encouraged to electronically approve the expense report whenever possible to confirm that the expense report complies with University policy (see Reimbursement of Expenses, section 1.a). Regardless of electronic approval confirmation, by initiating an expense report, the individual incurring a charge is attesting that the expenses relate to University business and comply with the policies stated in Guide Memo 5.4.3: Reimbursement of Expenses.

 (5)  Improperly Completed Forms: The traveler is responsible for the accuracy and completeness of the expense report and electronically submitted backup receipts. If the report is not completed properly, it will be returned online. Travel & Reimbursement needs to receive all required backup documents before an expense report can be processed.

e.   Special Explanations Required
Written explanations for the following must be submitted with the expense report:

(1)   Reimbursement from Other Sources: The traveler must report, including all pertinent details, if expenses for any part of the trip were or will be reimbursed by any source other than the University. Source name, address, and amount must be included on the expense report, even though Stanford will pay only the portion attributable to Stanford.

(2)   Expenses not Expressly Allowed: Expenses that are not expressly allowed in this Guide Memo must be fully explained in order to support an exception request.

(3)   Unusual Travel Arrangements: If the cost of business class or first-class rates, private or rental air transportation, or travel by private automobile is claimed, an explanation with the request is required. Approval of payment is contingent upon meeting the guidelines, pre-approval requirements and limitations established in this Guide Memo.

(4)   Expenses for Others: If reported expenses include entertainment, meals, lodging, or transportation provided for others, the requirements of paragraph 10.b.(6) must be met and the request referenced to other expense reports associated with the trip.

(5)   Prior Approval: Whenever travel policy states that prior written approval is necessary, a copy of such must be submitted electronically with the iOU expense report. The same is true for any approved deviation from this Guide Memo.

(6)   Unusual Charges: An explanation should be given for any unusually large amount that would normally be viewed as excessive, or any other unusual charges.

f.   Travel Expenses as Income

(1)   Moving Costs: The University is required to report as additional income to the individual certain payments for moving allowances and travel costs associated with initial employment or termination. See Guide Memo 2.1.20: Relocation of Faculty and Staff.

(2)   Unsubstantiated Cost: In accordance with the regulations of the Internal Revenue Service, the University will report, as additional income, the payment of any expense not substantiated by an appropriate itemized receipt or adequate explanation.

(3)   Non-timely Submission: Absent exceptional circumstances, expenses submitted more than 60 days after completion of travel will be reported as additional income to the individual, in accordance with Internal Revenue Service guidance.

g.     Reimbursement
Payment for reimbursements may be made via the following delivery options:

  • Payroll direct deposit
  • Check
  • Wire
  • Foreign draft

A fee will be charged to cover the extra cost of preparing and handling “Rush” payments.For more information on payment types and processing payment times see Resources & Job Aids: Payment and Handling Methods and Processing Times

Back to top

15. Sources of Help

a. University
Questions regarding travel policy and procedures may be directed to the Buying and Paying Support Center.

b. SLAC
SLAC travelers who have questions should contact the SLAC Travel Manager.

c. Online Information

Back to top

5.4.3 Reimbursement of Expenses

Last updated on:
03/27/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
36.4

This Guide Memo outlines policy on reimbursing individuals for expenses incurred on the University's behalf.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

Applicability: 

The policy applies to all individuals who incur expenses in the conduct of official University activities.

1. Reimbursement Policies

a. Reimbursable Expenses
The University authorizes reimbursement of reasonable and necessary expenses incurred by individuals in the conduct of official University activities. Both the person who incurs the expenses and the person who approves reimbursement or University payment of expenses are responsible for ensuring that all requests submitted relate to University business, are eligible for reimbursement, and that the expenses are reasonable and necessary. For purposes of determining economical purchases, the price paid by the individual is compared with the price that would have been paid by the University in a similar situation. When the price paid by the individual exceeds that which would have been paid by the University, the lesser amount will be reimbursed.

The following are reimbursable expenses:
(1) Retail purchases of supplies, books, and other low-cost items. These items are the property of Stanford University, as are any reimbursable purchases. Guidelines for petty cash reimbursable purchases can be found in Administrative Guide Memo 5.4.4: Petty Cash Funds, section 3.
(2) Travel expenses and expense associated with professional meetings are authorized within the policies and limitations established by the University and by specific sponsored project or agency regulations. University travel policies are in Administrative Guide Memo 5.4.2: Travel Expenses.
(3) Business meals may be reimbursed when:

  • There is a bona fide and substantial Stanford business purpose,
  • The participants are actively engaged in Stanford business,
  • Appropriate and permissible funding sources are available,
  • The expense is properly documented (who, what, when, where, why) and the amounts charged reflect good judgment, and
  • The expense has been appropriately approved at a local level in accordance with the requirements of the policy.

Documentation of business meals must include:

  • Receipts for transactions of $75 or more,
  • The date of the expense and name and location of the meal,
  • The business purpose, and
  • The names of the participants and their titles or other information establishing their business relationship with the individual incurring the expense.

Business meal expense guidelines are available at Expense Guidance for Business Meals.  
(4) Expenses incurred by University employees on behalf of others, either employees or non-employees, may be paid from University funds if the expenditures have a direct connection with University functions and purposes.
(5) Expenses for official University purposes incurred at the Stanford Faculty Club and billed to members may be reimbursed, subject to the regular reporting and approval requirements.
(6) Reasonable expenses for improvement of working conditions, employer-employee relations, and employee performance are appropriate. Examples of items in this classification include in-house publications and employee morale activities such as a holiday party, summer picnic, anniversary celebration or retirement party. It is important to identify in the Oracle Financials expense report the purpose of employer-employee relations expenditures and the names of individuals or groups involved.
(7) Materials purchased for the department by a student (where the materials will belong to Stanford, and not to the student) may be reimbursed to the student. Payments to help a graduate student or postdoc pay education-related expenses, other than travel expenses, will normally be considered to be student support, and not a University business expense. As such, these kinds of payments should be processed as a stipend in GFS. This includes money to buy books or other materials that the student will use and keep. For more guidance please refer to Graduate Academic Policies and Procedures Document 7.2, Fellowships and Other Stipend Support

b. Sources of Funds for Expenses
Expenses may be paid personally and reimbursed by the University, or by charging the expense and submitting an invoice for payment. Most minor expenses should be reimbursed from petty cash (see Administrative Guide Memo 5.4.4: Petty Cash Funds. Occasionally, it may be necessary to receive an expense advance for unusual transactions (see Administrative Guide Memo 5.4.1: Expense Advances).

c. Non-reimbursable Expenses
The University does not allow reimbursement for costs incurred for amusement, social activities, or entertainment [however, see sections 1.a(4) through (6)]; Stanford Faculty Club dues for individual members; social or travel club dues; University parking permits for employees or students; traffic citations for either personal or University vehicles; personal services or personal purchases; interest charges for late payment of bills; purchases of carbon offsets or carbon credits; or any costs specifically disallowed by school or department policy.

d. Capital Purchases
There are a number of special requirements for purchasing capital equipment, as well as for recording its purchase, whether or not the equipment is charged to a government grant/contract, a gift fund or general funds. To ensure that these requirements are met, capital equipment must be purchased using a Purchase Requisition (see Administrative Guide Memo 5.3.1: Requisition Processing). No employee or non-employee will be reimbursed for the purchase of a capital item. This includes payments for individual components that together constitute a piece of capital equipment. The only exception is the use of petty cash for small fabricated parts where the Fabrication Number is included on the Petty Cash receipt and on the Petty Cash Reimbursement Request (see Guide Memo 5.4.4: Petty Cash Funds). Any exceptions to this policy must be granted in advance by a director in Procurement (or designee).

Back to top

2. Reporting Expenses

Administrative Guide Memo 5.4.2: Travel Expenses contains basic policy for reporting expenses. Although Guide Memo 5.4.2 is stated in terms of travel and travelers, the policies apply equally to other expenses and those incurring the expenses. Expenses must be reported in a timely manner. Absent exceptional circumstances, expenses submitted more than 60 days after they are incurred will be reported as additional income to the individual, in accordance with Internal Revenue Service guidance.

Back to top

5.4.4 Petty Cash Funds

Last updated on:
09/01/2011
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
36.6

This Guide Memo outlines policy on establishing and managing a petty cash fund.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs & Chief Financial Officer.

1. Overview and Purpose of Petty Cash Funds

The Office of the Treasurer is responsible for approving all Petty Cash Fund account requests. In general, the use of petty cash funds are discouraged and departments are strongly encouraged to use the Department Purchasing Card (P-Card) or the Oracle Financials Expense Requests system whenever possible.

The purpose of a Petty Cash Fund is to allow for the reimbursement or purchase of minor, unanticipated business expenses when the University's present procurement system is not cost effective and when the dollar amount is low.

Back to top

2. Types of Petty Cash Funds and Overall Fund Limits

The University has three types of Petty Cash Funds:

a. Petty Cash Fund
Petty Cash Funds are established for departmental use for incidental and emergency small-dollar purchases where the use of alternative means (e.g. P-Card) is not feasible. Reimbursement for properly approved expenses may be obtained directly from this fund. The size of a Petty Cash Fund will be determined by the business needs of the requesting department, and, unless special written approval is obtained from the Treasurer, a single fund will be limited to no more than $500 in cash on hand.

b. Petty Cash Checking Account
Petty Cash Checking Accounts may be established in departments that make small disbursements by mail (e.g. purchase of subscriptions), or must make immediate payment (e.g. C.O.D. (cash on delivery) payment for goods delivered by UPS). The size of a Petty Cash Checking Account will be determined by the business needs of the requesting department, and, unless special written approval is obtained from the Treasurer, a departmental Petty Cash Checking Account will be limited to no more than $2,500.

c. Change Fund
Change Funds may be established by a department and used to give change to customers when they are paying for goods and/or services and is reconciled daily. The size of a Change Fund will be determined by the business needs of the requesting department. A written request with the details of the business needs must be submitted to and approved by the Treasurer.

Back to top

3. Uses of Petty Cash Funds

a. When Petty Cash May be Used
Reimbursements from petty cash are authorized for purchases and expenditures up to $100 per transaction. Allowable uses:
i. Delivery charges, minor office supplies needed for department operation and postage, totaling less than $100;
ii. Local transportation (e.g. taxi), parking and bridge tolls, totaling less than $100, that may arise as part of a day trip on official University business;
iii. Necessary and reasonable food (such as sandwiches and beverages) brought into the office for business meetings, totaling $100 or less, including tax, delivery and tip.

Special rules apply for the reimbursement of alcoholic beverages:

Alcoholic beverages: Purchases of alcoholic beverages may not be reimbursed by the federal government, either directly on a contract or grant account, or indirectly through the indirect cost rate calculation. When alcohol is served as part of a business meal, the restaurant receipt must identify the amount charged for the alcoholic beverages. List the alcohol amount, plus sales tax and tip, separately on the reimbursement documentation, charging the expenses to the appropriate unallowable expenditure type. If the supporting documentation for a meal is not itemized, then the receipt must note either “No Alcohol” or state the cost of any alcohol that was included in the purchase.

b. When Petty Cash May Not be Used
Petty cash may notbe used for:

  • Payment for services performed by employees or non-employees
  • Advances
  • Gifts
  • Personal loans and cashing personal checks
  • Buying hazardous materials
  • Stanford Faculty Club dues
  • University parking permits (personal expense)
  • Traffic citations
  • Personal expenses
  • Interest charges
  • Social or travel club dues
  • Expenses over 120 days (anything older than 120 days must be reimbursed through the Expense Requests system)
  • Recurring expenses (e.g. employee business-related home internet or cell phone expenses)
  • Amounts over $100, unless a department requests, and the Treasurer approves, a higher limit for the department
  • Transactions involving student(s)

c. Accounting Accuracy
Reimbursement for petty cash must be the exact amount of the expense. Splitting one transaction in excess of $100 into several parts, or requesting reimbursement of less than the full amount of the expense is specifically not allowed.

Back to top

4. Establishing, Changing or Closing a Petty Cash Fund

a. One Petty Cash Fund Per Department
Unless the department is very large or geographically dispersed, a single petty cash fund per department is usually adequate for all its petty cash transactions. Reimbursements from one petty cash fund may be charged to any type of account (PTA) including sponsored projects. If more than one petty cash fund is needed, a written justification must be submitted to and approved by the Treasurer.

b. Size of a Petty Cash Fund
In addition to the fund limits set forth in sections 2 (a), (b) and (c) above, a petty cash fund should be established at a reasonable level based on the department's business needs. The fund level should be reassessed annually and modified as needed based on the volume of activity during the year.

c. Petty Cash Custodian
The department head must appoint an individual to be custodian of the department's petty cash fund. Petty cash custodians must be salaried employees of the University, and may not be undergraduate students, graduate students or temporary personnel. Custodians are required to complete Petty Cash Training and pass the associated certification test. The custodian remains accountable for the petty cash fund until another person is officially designated as the new custodian or the fund is closed.

d. Establishing, Changing or Closing a Petty Cash Fund
Department heads may request a new petty cash fund, an increase or decrease in an existing fund, or cloure of an existing fund by sending a request to the Financial Support Center (finhelp@stanford.edu or 3-2772) and Cash Management (cashmanagement@lists.stanford.edu) in the Office of the Treasurer. Specifics of the request should include:
i. Establishing a New Petty Cash, Petty Cash Checking or Change Fund
The request should include:

  • The department name, location and physical address;
  • The type of fund requested;
  • The reason the fund is needed;
  • The types of transactions that the fund will be used for;
  • Reason that alternative payment methods are not feasible;
  • The amount requested for the fund;
  • The name of the petty cash custodian;
  • The name and contact information for the individual(s) that will have signature authority on the Received of Petty Cash Form;
  • If requesting a Petty Cash Checking Account, the name of the individual(s) that will have signature authority on the account (should not be the petty cash custodian);
  • The department PTA that will be used when replenishing the fund

ii. Requesting an Increase or Decrease to a Petty Cash Fund
The request should include:

  • The Petty Cash Fund number (08XXX)
  • The department and location
  • The custodian name
  • The reason for the increase/decrease in fund size
  • The requested dollar amount of the increase/decrease in fund size
  • If requesting an increase in fund size, a justification for the increase in fund size will need to be provided and approved by the Treasurer

iii. Closing a Petty Cash Fund
The request should include:

  • The Petty Cash Fund number (08XXX);
  • The department and location;
  • The custodian name;
  • The reason for closing the fund

Note: For more information, please refer to sections 7(a) and 7(b).
 

Back to top

5. Custodian Responsibilities

a. Assignment of Petty Cash Funds to Custodian
Following certification that the identified custodian has successfully completed the petty cash training and passed the associated certification test, the Petty Cash Administrator will assign a Petty Cash Fund number to the new fund. This custodian must use this number in all transactions relating to this fund. The custodian remains accountable for the petty cash until another person is officially designated as the new custodian or the fund is closed.

b. Protection of Petty Cash
The petty cash custodian is responsible for managing the department's petty cash fund and should be the only person in the department to have access to the locked petty cash box and to disburse actual cash. To prevent access by anyone but the custodian, petty cash should be kept in a locked box in a desk or cabinet that is locked whenever the custodian is absent. Only the custodian should have access to the keys.

c. Loss or Theft of Petty Cash
In the case of theft or mysterious disappearance, the Stanford Police and the Office of the Treasurer must be notified as soon as the loss is discovered. A copy of the police report should be included with the petty cash receipts when reimbursement is requested.

d. Reconciliation and Replenishment
The custodian is also responsible for the reconciliation and replenishment of the Petty Cash Fund. The frequency of reconciliation depends on the type of fund:
i. Petty Cash Fund
A department Petty Cash Fund must be reconciled and replenished on a monthly basis. The reconciliation should be done at the time of replenishment and a "Petty Cash Reconciliation Form" must be completed and signed by the department head. The department head may designate, in writing, the ability to approve the monthly reconciliations to someone other than him/her self (but it may NOT be the custodian). These monthly reconciliation forms should be kept in departmental files and made available to the Petty Cash Administrator if requested during an on-site audit.
ii. Petty Cash Fund Checking Account
A Petty Cash Fund Checking Account must be reconciled and replenished on a monthly basis and a "Petty Cash Checking Account Reconciliation Form" must be completed and signed by the department head, or an authorized check signer for the account, but not the custodian. These monthly reconciliations, along with a copy of the most recent bank statement, must be submitted to the Petty Cash Administrator each month.
iii. Change Fund
A Change Fund is used exclusively for making change, it must be reconciled on a daily basis. Any records should be kept in a departmental file and made available to the Petty Cash Administrator if requested during an on-site audit.

e. Annual Confirmation of Petty Cash Funds
The Office of the Treasurer conducts an annual confirmation of balances for all Petty Cash Funds and Change Funds. In August of each year, the Petty Cash Administrator will send out the request for the Annual Confirmation of Petty Cash Funds to all custodians, along with the"Annual Petty Cash Reconciliation Form. The custodian must reconcile the account and fill out the form. The department head MUST sign the annual confirmation form, not their designee. The annual reconciliation form will also include an "Ongoing Practices Statement" that must be acknowledged and signed by the custodian. Since monthly reconciliations are submitted for all Petty Cash Checking Accounts, the custodians do not need to complete the annual confirmation request.

f. Periodic On-Site Audits of Petty Cash Funds
The Office of the Treasurer will conduct several on-site audits of selected department Petty Cash Funds, Petty Cash Checking Accounts and Change Funds each year. The funds will be selected randomly and the custodian for the selected fund(s) will be notified and an appointment to conduct the audit must be made within 72 hours. For an audit, the custodian will need to provide the auditor with copies of their monthly reconciliations, reimbursement receipts showing the types of reimbursements being made with the fund, and provide evidence that the fund is being stored securely when not in use.

g. Mishandling of Petty Cash Funds
Failure to properly safeguard, reconcile and administer petty cash funds may lead to revocation of the petty cash fund from the department and/or disciplinary action up to and including termination.

Back to top

6. Managing a Petty Cash Fund

a. Absences of the Custodian:
i. Brief Absence: If the absence will be less than two weeks, the fund should be secured and no reimbursements should be allowed during the absence. During an absence or vacation that will last more than two weeks, a custodian may place the petty cash fund with a temporary, certified custodian. The temporary custodian must complete the petty cash training and pass the associated certification test before assuming the responsibility of the fund. The temporary and regular custodian will need to reconcile the fund at the time of transfer, as well as upon the return of the regular custodian. Both the temporary and regular custodian are required to sign the reconciliation forms.
ii. Absence During Which Fund Needs Replenishing: A temporary custodian may not replenish a petty cash fund. The fund must be replenished before the regular custodian's absence. If a regular petty cash custodian's absence will last more than one month, a new custodian will need to be appointed by the department head, following the steps in 6(b).

b. Change of Custodian
The department head may transfer the petty cash fund to a new custodian at any time. The new custodian must complete petty cash training and pass the associated certification test before assuming responsibility for the fund. The fund must be counted and reconciled prior to transfer. Except on a temporary basis described in paragraph 6 (a) (i) above, one custodian may not transfer a fund to a new custodian. The petty cash fund must be in balance before the new custodian accepts it.

c. Accounting for Petty Cash Transactions
Proper accounting for petty cash requires that custodians make payments for authorized expenditures only, obtain receipts, and record expenditures.
Note: There must be a sales slip, cash register tape, or other receipt attached to a Received of Petty Cash form for each expenditure. The only exception is reimbursement for mileage where a log with odometer readings, date, destination and business purpose serves in lieu of a receipt. When a receipt is not available, it must be indicated when requesting replenishment in the Expense Requests system. The Received of Petty Cash form must be signed by the person being reimbursed and approved by someone who has signature authority for the account (PTA) charged. The approver may be the custodian of the petty cash fund, except that the custodian may not approve his/her own expenses and may not approve expenses for an individual to whom he/she reports either directly or indirectly.

d. Balancing Petty Cash Funds
When reimbursements by the custodian deplete the amount of cash, receipts are totaled to account for the expenditures and keep the petty cash fund in balance. At any time, the total cash on hand plus the total receipts and reimbursement requests in process should equal the original amount of the petty cash fund. If the fund does not balance, contact the Financial Support Center (3-2772) for assistance. A petty cash fund should always be balanced before a request is made for replenishment.

e. Replenishing Petty Cash Funds
i. Approval
The Petty Cash Reimbursement request must be reviewed and approved by a person who has online signature authority for the departmental accounts (PTAs) to be charged (see Guide Memo 3.2.1: Authorizing Expenditures). This person could be the department head and must be someone other than the custodian or someone who reports to the custodian. The approver may not approve his/her own expenses and may not approve expenses for an individual to whom he/she reports either directly or indirectly.
ii. Check Printing
Replenishment checks are sent to the custodian. If special handling or "Will Call" service is requested, a special handling fee will be charged.
iii. Cashing of Replenishment Checks
The preferred bank is Stanford Federal Credit Union and special arrangements have been made with the credit union to cash replenishment checks as long as the payee has a Stanford Identification Card.

f. Reports of Petty Cash Expenditures
Petty cash expenditures are reported to departments on their monthly expenditure statements by account number (PTA) and expense classifications.

Back to top

7. References

This policy should be read in conjunction with the following related policies and procedures:

a. Petty Cash Fund Administration and Procedures
b. Petty Cash Fund Checking Account Administration and Procedures
c. Guide Memo 3.2.1: Authorizing Expenditures
d. Guide Memo 5.4.3: Reimbursement of Expenses

Related Forms:
a. Petty Cash Monthly Reconciliation Form
b. Petty Cash Checking Account Monthly Reconciliation Form

Back to top

5.5.1 External Affirmative Action

Last updated on:
12/15/2008
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
58

This policy statement supports a plan to increase opportunities for minority, women and disabled people, and businesses owned by them, to participate in economic opportunities arising from University business activities.

Authority: 

Approved by the Provost.

1. Stanford Policy

Stanford University is committed to increasing significantly the opportunities for minority, women and disabled people to engage in business with the University.

a. Purpose
This policy statement supports a long-range plan to enhance Stanford's external affirmative action. The plan serves to promote diversity through the judicious use of the University's financial and other resources to increase opportunities for small businesses and businesses owned by targeted concerns to participate in economic opportunities arising from University business activities.

b. Scope
The classes covered by this policy, as defined by the Federal Government, include Asian, Black, Latino/Hispanic and Native American, women of all racial/ethnic background, people who are disabled or physically challenged, veterans, and other targeted concerns.

c. Implementation
The President and Provost will provide the leadership for promulgating this policy; however, responsibility for its implementation rests with individual vice presidents, deans, directors of major institutions and centers, the Chief Executive Officer of the Stanford Management Company, and the heads of other organizations not covered above.

Back to top

2. Federal Contracts

Public Law 95-507 and Executive Order 12138 encourage organizations that receive contracts from federal agencies to do business with small businesses and other targeted concerns regardless of size. The University's responsibilities under these laws are described in detail in the document "Utilization of Small Business Concerns, Small Business Concerns Owned and Controlled by Socially and Economically Disadvantaged Individuals, and Women-Owned Business Concerns," which is published in the Procurement Manual. Specific questions as to applicability to particular situations should be addressed to the Office of Sponsored Research.

a. Definitions

  • "Socially disadvantaged individuals are those who have been subjected to racial or ethnic prejudice or cultural bias because of their identity as a member of a group without regard to their individual qualities. The social disadvantage of individuals must stem from circumstances beyond their control." 13 CFR 124.1-1(c)(3)(i)
  • "Economically disadvantaged individuals are socially disadvantaged individuals whose ability to compete in the free enterprise system has been impaired due to diminished capital and credit opportunities, as compared to others in the same line of business and competitive market area who are not socially disadvantaged." 13 CFR 124.1-1(c)(4)(i)

 

The Small Business Administration (SBA) defines the members of these groups. An updated listing can be found online at the U.S. Small Business Administration website. 

  • Subcontract: "Any agreement (other than one involving an employer-employee relationship) entered into by a Federal Government prime contractor or subcontractor calling for supplies or services required for the performance of the original contract or subcontract." Office of Federal Procurement Policy Letter 80-2.
    Under this definition, subcontracting means every purchase order and agreement, as well as other expenses such as travel.

b. Contracts Affected
(1) Contracts between $25,000 and $499,999
Terms of government contracts over $25,000 in value require the University to have a program to insure business opportunities for small and minority owned businesses. Stanford's External Affirmative Action Program meets that requirement.
(2) Contracts $500,000 and over
For contracts of $500,000 or more, a specific plan must be made and implemented. A Small Business Liaison Officer (a Stanford-designated University official) oversees the operation of the plan. The University is responsible for establishing percentage goals of subcontracting business (expressed as a proportion of total subcontracting dollars) to be awarded to small and small disadvantaged suppliers. For assistance or information on goals required by specific agencies, contact the Office of Sponsored Research (OSR).

c. Procedures
(1) Preparing the Subcontracting Plan
When a request for a subcontracting plan is received froman agency, OSR notifies the cognizant department and Procurement. Procurement and the department meet to review product and service areas with subcontracting opportunities, and based on this review, determine reasonable goals for the plan. Procurement submits data for the plan to OSR. Procurement then writes the subcontracting plan and submits it to the government agency.
(2) Vendor Search
Departments must investigate small and disadvantaged business possibilities prior to submitting a requisition. Departments that wish further searching to be done by Procurement should so specify in the "Remarks" screen of the requisition, and should attach documentation of the department's search efforts and their results.
(3) Reports
The federal government requires periodic reports on progress toward the achievement of goals set in a contract's original subcontracting plan. Procurement prepares reports of purchases under each contract, and notifies departments of progress against goals.

Back to top

3. Sources of Business Information

a. Directories
To help departments, Procurement maintains small business directories and other resources. All the directories are commodity-indexed. Call Procurement for copies and information.

b. Online Access to Supplier Information
Online information about vendor size, ownership status and products offered is available to departments in the Oracle Financials system. Procurement Buyers are also available to assist with sourcing needs.

c. SBA CCR System
The Small Business Administration has developed a computerized, commodity indexed database of small businesses. Call Procurement for more information. Procurement maintains links to this and other resources on the Gateway to Financial Activities website. 

Back to top

6.1.1 Administrative Computing Systems

Last updated on:
06/15/2009
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
61

This Guide Memo describes the policy that governs the Administrative Computing Systems at Stanford University and identifies Administrative Computing System ownership, development and management responsibilities. This policy applies to all computerized systems involved with the creation, updating, processing, outputting, distribution, and other uses of administrative information at Stanford.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

Policy Statement: 

Every Administrative Computing System at Stanford University must have a designated Business Owner who ensures that the system meets the business needs of the University and is appropriately available, secure and sustainable.

Purpose: 

The purpose of this policy is to establish system ownership responsibility and to ensure that each system meets its functional requirements, is appropriately documented, is secure and controlled, has been adequately tested, and is maintainable.

1. Scope and Availability

The specifications in this policy are independent of system architecture and delivery platforms—i.e., it makes no difference whether an application resides in mainframe, web, client/server, peer-to-peer, or other present or future environments. This policy applies to applications developed at Stanford, acquired from external vendors, built from open-source components, as well as those extended from existing or purchased applications, whether the systems are developed in central offices, in schools or in departments. This policy applies to all administrative applications that deal with financial, administrative, or other information that is an integral part of running the business of the University.

The standards in this policy specifically apply to the Business Owner of any Administrative Computing System at Stanford University and to all persons who develop, implement, maintain or use any University Administrative Computing System.

Back to top

2. Definitions

Administrative Computing System
Any computing system that directly or indirectly deals with or supports financial, administrative, or other information that is an integral part of running the business of the University.

Business Owner
The Business Owner of an Administrative Computing System is usually the owner of the primary business functions served by the system, the system's largest stakeholder. When the system serves several different functional business areas of the University, the Vice President of Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer will designate the Business Owner.

Data Owner
The Dean, Director or Department Head of the administrative department having primary responsibility for creation and maintenance of the data content in an Administrative Computing System. In some cases, a single Administrative Computing System may have multiple Data Owners.

System Administrator
Manages the day-to-day operation of the computer system(s) within an organization that supports the Administrative Computing System. These support functions may include any or all of the following functions: database management, software distribution and upgrading, user profile management, version control, backup & recovery, system security and performance and capacity planning.

System Developer
A person who designs and writes software. The term generally refers to designers and programmers in the commercial software field. However, it may also refer to professionals developing internal business applications within an enterprise. With increasing complexity of technology, and organizations' desire for complete solutions to information problems, requiring hardware, software and networking expertise in a multi-vendor environment, System Developers are integral to the implementation of Administrative Computing Systems.

System Integrator
A person who takes responsibility for delivering a system solution which will solve a business problem. Systems Integrators are individuals or organizations that build systems froma variety of diverse components. With increasing complexity of technology, and organizations' desire for complete solutions to information problems, requiring hardware, software and networking expertise in a multi-vendor environment, Systems Integrators are often key in the implementation of Administrative Computing Systems.

System User
Any individual who interacts with the computer at an application level. Programmers, System Administrators and other technical personnel are not considered System Users when working in a professional capacity on the Administrative Computer System.

Back to top

3. Guidelines and Responsibilities

a. Business Owner

(1) General

  • Define the scope and strategic objectives of the Administrative Computing System
  • Oversee the development of a project plan, selection of the project development team, assignment of responsibilities, and management of the project.
  • Plan for the ongoing support and maintenance of the Administrative Computing System, including appropriate technical and functional staffing resources.

A Business Owner who does not use the services of Administrative Systems for design, development, integration or maintenance of an Administrative Computing System must assume Business Owner, System Developer, System Integrator and System Administrator responsibilities.

(2) Development Phase

  • Define the functions, procedures and audit requirements of the Administrative Computing System
  • Ensure the design meets the Administrative Computing System requirements
  • Ensure adequate controls, audit trails, security, backup, recovery and restart procedures are included in the design
  • Ensure the design and development of the Administrative Computing System meet all appropriate business standards
  • Ensure the design and development of the Administrative Computing System meets the Principles of Information Security as stated in Administrative Guide Memo 6.3.1: Information Security.
  • Ensure an adequate test plan is prepared and monitor the testing and review of the Administrative Computing System during development
  • Ensure that the appropriate hardware and software environment is selected for the development and operation of the Administrative Computing System
  • Define and manage data sharing procedures to ensure the integrity of interfacing Administrative Computing Systems
  • Define and ensure compliance with the Administrative Computing System installation procedures
  • Define and ensure compliance with Administrative Computing System acceptance criteria
  • Define and monitor procedures for modifying the Administrative Computing System
  • Define and monitor approval process for all program changes
  • Provide for the completeness and accuracy of all required user and system documentation for the Administrative Computing System
  • Ensure the implementation of an adequate campus readiness plan, which includes system roll-out plans, adequate user communications, the quality of user training and the related training documents and preparedness of help desk support
  • Formally accept the Administrative Computing System as complete and ready for production

(3) Production Phase

  • Ensure and monitor the availability, reliability and security and auditability of the Administrative Computing System
  • Develop the system's upgrade and enhancements plans to integrate the functionality mandated by business requirements and vendor upgrades into the production Administrative Computing System
  • Ensure adequate backup and recovery procedures are implemented, and existence of a tested business continuity plan
  • Ensure a System Administrator is responsible for day-to-day decisions regarding the operation of the Administrative Computing System
  • Ensure the availability and quality of user training and related materials, reliability and the preparedness of help desk and other technical support processes and personnel

b. Data Owner

  • Ensure the availability, reliability and security of the administrative data
  • Oversee the management and control of administrative data, ensuring compliance with existing policies
  • Report all unauthorized use to the Information Security Office, as described in Guide Memo 6.6.1: Information Security Incident Response

c. System Developer

  • Develop the Administrative Computing System to the satisfaction of the Business Owner, translating the design requirements into a viable service
  • Design, code and test the service in compliance with all appropriate standards
  • Design the service with the most effective methods of satisfying the control and auditability requirements established by the Business Owner
  • Design the service with the most appropriate methods of meeting the system security standards, following the Principles of Information Security outlined in Administrative Guide Memo 6.3.1: Information Security.

d. System Integrator

  • Integrate the service to the satisfaction of the Business Owner, translating the system requirements into design requirements
  • Create a design that provides for functionality and ease of use, or select a product that meets System Owner requirements
  • Design, code, install, test and deploy the service in compliance with all appropriate standards
  • Implement the most effective methods of satisfying the control and auditability requirements established by the Business Owner, or resulting from design decision
  • Implement the most appropriate methods of meeting system security standards, following the Principles of Information Security outlined in Guide Memo 6.3.1: Information Security.

e. System Administrator

  • Create and maintain a stable operating platform that supports the service and any related databases and systems
  • Create a secure operating environment that promotes efficient use, including appropriate procedures to protect and recover data and a secure physical environment
  • Protect against, monitor for, and detect unauthorized access to the system or data files and report to the appropriate security officer

System Administrators of distributed computing systems, remote network servers, or small stand alone systems may in fact perform the roles, and have the responsibilities of, Business Owner, Data Owner, System Developer, System User and System Administrators in succession, and on an ongoing basis.

f. System User

  • Use the application in the manner and for the purpose it was designed
  • Comply with all control requirements specified by the Business and Data Owners
  • Comply with security requirements defined in the Administrative Guide and further documented in Computer Security Risks and Mitigations

Back to top

4. Cognizant Office

Back to top

5. Sources of More Information

a. Computer and Network Usage
Guide Memo 6.2.1: Computer and Network Usage

b. Information Security
Guide Memo 6.3.1: Information Security

c. Information Security Incident Response
Guide Memo 6.6.1: Information Security Incident Response

d. Specific security guidelines, procedures, standards, and practices
Information Security Office website, Secure Computing section.

Back to top

6.2.1 Computer and Network Usage Policy

Last updated on:
03/14/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
62

This policy covers the appropriate use of all information resources including computers, networks, and the information contained therein.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

Applicability: 

Applies to all University students, faculty and staff, and all others using computer and communication technologies, including the University's network, whether personally or University owned, which access, transmit or store University or student information.

Policy Statement: 

Use of Stanford's network and computer resources should support the basic missions of the University in teaching, learning and research. Users of Stanford's network and computer resources ("users") are responsible to properly use and protect information resources and to respect the rights of others. This policy provides guidelines for the appropriate use of information resources.

1. Definitions

As used in this policy:
a. "Information resources" are all computer and communication devices and other technologies which access, store or transmit University or student information.
b. "Information" includes both University and student information.
c. "Personally owned resources" are information resources that are under the control of University employees or agents and are not wholly owned by the University.

Back to top

2. Policies

a. General Policy
Users of information resources must protect (i) their online identity from use by another individual, (ii) the integrity of information resources, and (iii) the privacy of electronic information. In addition, users must refrain from seeking to gain unauthorized access, honor all copyrights and licenses and respect the rights of other users of information resources.

b. Access
Users must refrain from seeking to gain unauthorized access to information resources or enabling unauthorized access. Attempts to gain unauthorized access to a system or to another person's information are a violation of University policy and may also violate applicable law, potentially subjecting the user to both civil and criminal liability. However, authorized system administrators may access information resources, but only for a legitimate operational purpose and only the minimum access required to accomplish this legitimate operational purpose.

(1) Prohibition against Sharing Identities
Sharing an online identity (user ID and password or other authenticator such as a token or certificate) violates University policy.
(2) Information Belonging to Others
Users must not intentionally seek or provide information on, obtain copies of, or modify data files, programs, passwords or other digital materials belonging to other users, without the specific permission of those other users.
(3) Abuse of Computing Privileges
Users of information resources must not access computers, computer software, computer data or information, or networks without proper authorization, or intentionally enable others to do so, regardless of whether the computer, software, data, information, or network in question is owned by the University. For example, abuse of the networks to which the University belongs or the computers at other sites connected to those networks will be treated as an abuse of University computing privileges.

c. Usage
The University is a non-profit, tax-exempt organization and, as such, is subject to specific federal, state and local laws regarding sources of income, political activities, use of property and similar matters. It also is a contractor with government and other entities and thus must assure proper use of property under its control and allocation of overhead and similar costs. Use of the University's information resources must comply with University policies and legal obligations (including licenses and contracts), and all federal and state laws.

(1) Prohibited Use
Users must not send, view or download fraudulent, harassing, obscene (i.e., pornographic), threatening, or other messages or material that are a violation of applicable law or University policy. In particular, contributing to the creation of a hostile academic or work environment is prohibited.
(2) Copyrights and Licenses
Users must not violate copyright law and must respect licenses to copyrighted materials. For the avoidance of doubt, unlawful file-sharing using the University's information resources is a violation of this policy.
(3) Social Media
Users must respect the purpose of and abide by the terms of use of online media forums, including social networking websites, mailing lists, chat rooms and blogs.
(4) Political Use
University information resources must not be used for partisan political activities where prohibited by federal, state or other applicable laws, and may be used for other political activities only when in compliance with federal, state and other laws and in compliance with applicable University policies.
(5) Personal Use
University information resources should not be used for activities unrelated to appropriate University functions, except in a purely incidental manner.
(6) Commercial Use
University information resources should not be used for commercial purposes, including advertisements, solicitations, promotions or other commercial messages, except as permitted under University policy. Any such permitted commercial use should be properly related to University activities, take into account proper cost allocations for government and other overhead determinations, and provide for appropriate reimbursement to the University for taxes and other costs the University may incur by reason of the commercial use. The University's Chief Financial Officer and Vice President for Business Affairs will determine permitted commercial uses.
(7) Use of University Information
Users must abide by applicable data storage and transmission policies, including Admin Guide 6.3.1 (Information Security). Consult the University Privacy Officer (privacyofficer@stanford.edu) for more information.

d. Personally Owned Resources
Stanford does not require personnel to use their personally owned resources to conduct University business. Individual units within the University may permit such use, and users may choose to use their own resources accordingly. Any personally owned resources used for University business are subject to this policy and must comply with all Stanford requirements pertaining to that type of resource and to the type of data involved. The resources must also comply with any additional requirements (including security controls for encryption, patching and backup) specific to the particular University functions for which they are used.

e. Integrity of Information Resources
Users must respect the integrity of information and information resources.

(1) Modification or Removal of Information or Information Resources
Unless they have proper authorization, users must not attempt to modify or remove information or information resources that are owned or used by others.
(2) Other Prohibited Activities
Users must not encroach, disrupt or otherwise interfere with access or use of the University's information or information resources. For the avoidance of doubt, without express permission, users must not give away University information or send bulk unsolicited email. In addition, users must not engage in other activities that damage, vandalize or otherwise compromise the integrity of University information or information resources.
(3) Academic Pursuits
The University recognizes the value of legitimate research projects undertaken by faculty and students under faculty supervision. The University may restrict such activities in order to protect University and individual information and information resources, but in doing so will take into account legitimate academic pursuits.

f. Locally Defined and External Conditions of Use
Individual units within the University may define "conditions of use" for information resources under their control. These statements must be consistent with this overall policy but may provide additional detail, guidelines restrictions, and/or enforcement mechanisms. Where such conditions of use exist, the individual units are responsible for publicizing and enforcing both the conditions of use and this policy. Where use of external networks is involved, policies governing such use also are applicable and must be followed.

g. Access for Legal and University Processes
Under some circumstances, as a result of investigations, subpoenas or lawsuits, the University may be required by law to provide electronic or other records, or information related to those records or relating to use of information resources, ("information records") to third parties. Additionally, the University may in its reasonable discretion review information records, e.g., for the proper functioning of the University, in connection with investigations or audits, or to protect the safety of individuals or the Stanford community. The University may also permit reasonable access to data to third-party service providers in order to provide, maintain or improve services to the University. Accordingly, users of University information resources do not have a reasonable expectation of privacy when using the University's information resources.

Back to top

3. Oversight of Information Resources

Responsibility for, and management and operation of, information resources is delegated to the head of a specific subdivision of the University governance structure ("department"), such as a Dean, Department Chair, Administrative Department head, or Principal Investigator ("lead"). This person will be responsible for compliance with all University policies relating to the use of information resources owned, used or otherwise residing in their department.

The lead may designate another person to manage and operate the system, but responsibility for information resources remains with the lead. This designate is the "system administrator."

The system administrator is responsible for managing and operating information resources under their oversight in compliance with University and department policies, including accessing information resources necessary to maintain operation of the systems under the care of the system administrator. (See also section 4.b; system administrators should defer to the Information Security Office for access beyond that necessary to maintain operation of the system.)

a. Responsibilities
The system administrator should:

  • Take all appropriate actions to protect the security of information and information resources. Applicable guidelines are found at http://securecomputing.stanford.edu.
  • Take precautions against theft of or damage to information resources.
  • Faithfully execute all licensing agreements applicable to information resources.
  • Communicate this policy, and other applicable information use, security and privacy policies and procedures to their information resource users.
  • Cooperate with the Information Security Office to find and correct problems caused by the use of the system under their control.

b. Suspension of Privileges
System administrators may temporarily suspend access to information resources if they believe it is necessary or appropriate to maintain the integrity of the information resources under their oversight.

Back to top

4. Reporting or Investigating Violations or University Concerns

a. Reporting Violations
System users will report violations of this policy to the Information Security Office, and will immediately report defects in system accounting, concerns with system security, or suspected unlawful or improper system activities to the Information Security Office during normal business hours and the Office of the General Counsel emergency after-hours phone line at other times.

b. Accessing Information & Systems
Inspecting and monitoring information and information resources may be required for the purposes of enforcing this policy, conducting University investigations or audits, ensuring the safety of an individual or the University community, complying with law or ensuring proper operation of information resources. Only the University's Chief Information Security Officer (or designate) may authorize this inspection and monitoring.

c. Cooperation Expected
Information resource users are expected to cooperate with any investigation of policy abuse. Failure to cooperate may be grounds for cancellation of access privileges, or other disciplinary actions.

Back to top

5. Consequences of Misuse of Information Resources

A user found to have violated this policy may also have violated the University Code of Conduct, the Fundamental Standard, the Student Honor Code, and/or other University policies, and will be subject to appropriate disciplinary action up to and including discharge, dismissal, expulsion, and/or legal action. The Chief Information Security Officer will refer violations to University units, i.e., Student Affairs for students, the supervisor for staff, and the Dean of the relevant School for faculty or other teaching or research personnel, if appropriate.

Back to top

6. Cognizant Office

University's Chief Information Security Officer, or other person designated by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer, shall be the primary contact for the interpretation, monitoring and enforcement of this policy.

Back to top

a. Student Discipline—See Student Life/Codes of Conduct/Fundamental Standard/Honor Code
b. Staff Discipline—See Guide Memo 2.1.16: Addressing Conduct & Performance Issues
c. Faculty Discipline—See the Statement on Faculty Discipline in the Faculty Handbook
d. Patents and Copyrights—See Research Policy Handbook 9.1 and 9.2; see also the Stanford University Copyright Reminder
e. Political Activities—See Guide Memo 1.5.1: Political Activities  
f. Ownership of Documents—See Research Policy Handbook 9.2 and Guide Memo 1.5.5: Ownership of Documents 
g. Incidental Personal Use—See Research Policy Handbook 4.1, and Guide Memo 1.5.2: Staff Policy on Conflict of Commitment and Interest
h. Security of Information—See Guide Memo 6.6.1: Information Security Incident Response
i. Privacy and Security of Health Information (HIPAA)—See Guide Memo 1.6.2: Privacy and Security of Health Information
j. Data Classification, Access and Transmittal and Storage Guidelines—See http://dataclass.stanford.edu.
k. Endpoint Compliance—See http://securecomputing.stanford.edu/endpoint_compliance.html

Back to top

6.3.1 Information Security

Last updated on:
06/15/2009
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
63

The purpose of this policy is to ensure the protection of Stanford's information resources from accidental or intentional unauthorized access or damage while also preserving and nurturing the open, information-sharing requirements of its academic culture. This Guide Memo states requirements for the protection of Stanford's information assets.

Authority: 

Approved by the President.

Applicability: 

This policy is applicable to all University students, faculty and staff and to all others granted use of Stanford University information resources. Every user of any of Stanford's information resources has some responsibility toward the protection of those assets; some offices and individuals have very specific responsibilities. This policy refers to all University information resources whether individually-controlled or shared, stand-alone or networked. It applies to all computer and communication facilities owned, leased, operated, or contracted by the University. This includes networking devices, personal digital assistants, telephones, wireless devices, personal computers, workstations, mainframes, minicomputers, and any associated peripherals and software, regardless of whether used for administration, research, teaching or other purposes.

1. Principles of Information Security

The purpose of information security is to protect the information resources of the University from unauthorized access or damage. The underlying principles followed to achieve that objective are:

a. Information Resource Availability
The information resources of the University, including the network, the hardware, the software, the facilities, the infrastructure, and any other such resources, are available to support the teaching, learning, research, or administrative roles for which they are designated.

b. Information Integrity
The information used in the pursuit of teaching, learning, research, or administration can be trusted to correctly reflect the reality it represents.

c. Information Confidentiality
The ability to access or modify information is provided only to authorized users for authorized purposes.

d. Support of Academic Pursuits
The requirement to safeguard information resources must be balanced with the need to support the pursuit of legitimate academic objectives.

e. Access to Information
The value of information as an institutional resource increases through its appropriate use; its value diminishes through misuse, misinterpretation, or unnecessary restrictions to its access.

Back to top

2. Classification of Information

All University information is classified into one of 4 levels based on sensitivity and risk. These classifications take into account legal protections, contractual agreements, ethical considerations, privacy issues, and strategic or proprietary worth. The classification level determines the security protections and access authorization mechanisms which must be used for the information. Security guidelines can be found in the ISO Secure Computing Guidelines. The information classifications are as follows:

a. Prohibited Information
Information is classified as "Prohibited" if protection of the information is required by law or government regulation, orStanford is required either to provide notice to the individual if information is inappropriately accessed or to report unauthorized access to the government

b. Restricted Information
Information is classified as "Restricted" if (i) it would otherwise qualify as "Prohibited" but it has been determined by the Data Governance Board that prohibiting information storage on Computing Equipment would significantly reduce faculty, staff, or student effectiveness when acting in support of Stanford's mission, or (ii) it is listed as Restricted in the Classification of Common Data Elements

c. Confidential Information
Information is classified as "Confidential" if (i) it is not considered to be Prohibited or Restricted and is not generally available to the public, or (ii) it is listed as Confidential in the Classification of Common Data Elements.

d. Public Information
All information which does not fall into one of these categories is considered to be "public." Please see the Information Security Office for a list of frequently used public information.

Back to top

3. Responsibilities

a. Information Security Officer
The Information Security Officer is responsible for providing interpretation of this and other related policies and disseminating related information.

b. University Privacy Officer
The University Privacy Officer is responsible for developing and implementing policies and procedures governing the privacy of data that the University is required or elects to protect.

c. Data Governance Board
The Data Governance Board is an advisory group charged with oversight of policies and procedures relating to the protection and use of Stanford's non-public information.

d. Business and Data Owners
System Business and Data Owners are responsible for the application of this and related policies to the systems, data, and other information resources under their care or control.

e. System Administrators
System Administrators are responsible for the application of this and related policies to the systems, information, and other information resources in their care at the direction of the Business and Data Owners.

f. System Developers and Integrators
System Developers and Integrators are responsible for the application of this and related policies to the systems, information, and other information resources in their care at the direction of the Business and Data Owners.

g. Users
Every user of Stanford's information resources is responsible for the application of this and related policies to the systems, information, and other information resources which they use, access, transmit or store.

h. Third-party Affiliates
Stanford expects all partners, consultants and vendors to abide by Stanford's information security and privacy policies. If non-public information is to be accessed or shared with these third parties, they should be bound by contract to abide by Stanford's information security and privacy policies.

Back to top

4. Violations of Policy and Misuse of Information

Violations of this policy include, but are not limited to: accessing information to which the individual has no legitimate right; enabling unauthorized individuals to access information; disclosing information in a way that violates applicable policy, procedure, or other relevant regulations or laws; inappropriately modifying or destroying information; inadequately protecting information; or ignoring the explicit requirements of Data Owners for the proper management, use, and protection of information resources.

Violations may result in network removal, access revocation, corrective action, and/or civil or criminal prosecution. Violators may be subject to disciplinary action up to and including dismissal or expulsion, pursuant to campus policies, collective bargaining agreements, codes of conduct, or other instruments governing the individual's relationship with the University. Recourse shall be available under the appropriate section of the employee's personnel policy or contract, or by pursuing applicable legal procedure.

a. Any School or Department found to have violated this policy may be held accountable for the financial penalties and remediation costs associated with a resulting information security incident.

b. Third party vendors found to have violated this policy may incur financial liabilities, in addition to termination of contract.

Back to top

5. Cognizant Office

Information Security Office

Back to top

6. Sources of More Information

Back to top

6.4.1 Identification and Authentication Systems

Last updated on:
10/23/2012
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
64

This Guide Memo states requirements for identifying and authenticating users of Stanford computer systems and networks, and describes centrally-supported identification and authentication facilities.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

1. Identification and Authentication Policy

To ensure the security and integrity of both University data and data belonging to individuals, all owners of Stanford computer systems and networks must develop and implement access control policies. This Memo does not describe possible policies nor specify how to choose one; however, systems with non-public resources to protect should have policies that base access control on user identities.

Authentication is the secure identification of system users. The system owner is responsible for determining which authentication method to use among those that may be available for a particular system. However, system owners are strongly encouraged to rely on the authentication services provided by Stanford's central computing organization rather than using system-specific authentication methods. This service provides secure authentication and consistent campus-wide identification.

It is University policy that all University business for which computer-based forms and actions have been released will be done using those computer-based systems; paper forms are no longer accepted. This policy applies to all aspects of qualifying transactions, including initiation, routing, processing by Schools and VP Area offices, and transmission to and processing by central administrative offices. Secure identification of the participants in all such transactions is crucial to the successful conduct of University business. The centrally-supported authentication service described in this Memo is designed to support University business requirements.

Back to top

2. Identification: General

a. Linked Identifiers
Stanford maintains a set of linked records identifying all employees, students, and others who use the University's computing resources. These records correlate SUNet ID, University ID, and Stanford Identification Card records.

b. Management of Identifiers
(1) Uniqueness.
Each identifier (University ID or SUNet ID) is unique; that is, each identifier is associated with a single person or other entity.
(2) One Identifier per Individual.  An individual may have no more than one University ID number and one personal SUNet ID.
(3) Non-Reassignment. Once an identifier is assigned to a particular person it is always associated with that person. It is never subsequently reassigned to identify another person or entity. Alternative IDs (that is, alternative names registered along with a personal SUNet ID) may be reassigned after a waiting period.

Back to top

3. Identification: SUNet ID

a. Stanford University Network Identifiers
SUNet IDs consist of alphabetic characters and digits, and are chosen by their users. Personal SUNet IDs are from three to eight characters in length. Other SUNet IDs may be up to 256 characters in length.

b. Types of SUNet IDs

(1) University-eligible Personal SUNet IDs
a) Full (University-eligible) Personal SUNet IDs
are available to:

  • Authorized, registered students, as defined by the Registrar; and
  • Regular faculty and staff, and emeritus faculty and staff, including SLAC staff, as defined in Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions.

(b) Base (University-eligible)
Personal SUNet IDs are available to:

  • Temporary and casual faculty and staff, as defined in Guide Memo 2.2.2: Definitions.
  • Recent alumni and current hospital staff.

(2) Sponsored Personal SUNet IDs are available to all others, subject to the following conditions:

  • The ID is to be used by a specific, named individual requiring access to University computing resources in support of legitimate University work.
  • The ID is sponsored by:
  • Full, sponsored Personal SUNet IDs must be sponsored by a member of the University's regular faculty or staff possessing requisitions or financial signature authority.
  • Base, sponsored Personal SUNet IDs may be sponsored by a member of the University's regular faculty or staff.
  • The sponsor accepts responsibility for ensuring that the sponsored ID is used in support of work consistent with the University's mission of instruction, research, and public service, and in a manner consistent with the University's policies.

c. Establishing a SUNet ID
SUNet IDs are established and maintained via online procedures. Note that employees and students must have a University ID number in order to obtain a SUNet ID.

Back to top

4. Identification: University ID

An eight-digit University identification number is automatically assigned to regular, continuing employees by the PeopleSoft HRMS system and to students by the PeopleSoft Student Administration system. This number appears on the printed Stanford Identification Card (see Guide Memo 2.4.3: Stanford Identification Cards).

Back to top

5. Identification: Other ID

IDs are available to identify other kinds of entities such as groups, departments, mailing lists, roles, computer-based services, etc. For more information, submit a HelpSU request or phone the Stanford IT Help Desk at 650-725-4357.

Back to top

6. Authentication: General

a. Authentication Methods
Authentication methods involve presenting both a public identifier (such as a user name or identification number) and private authentication information, such as a Personal Identification Number (PIN), password, or information derived from a cryptographic key. Authentication methods currently supported by Stanford's central computing organization include:

  • Kerberos authentication, which uses SUNet IDs and passwords.

b. Eligibility for Authentication Entry
A user must be associated with an entry in the authentication service to be able to use most centrally-supported systems and services.

(1) University ID and Regular Personal SUNet ID
Eligibility for an entry in the authentication service begins when the individual accepts the offer of student registration or employment. Eligibility ends when a person's active association with the University ends; i.e., when an employee is no longer employed (and does not have emeritus status) or a student is no longer registered. In certain circumstances, a grace period may be allowed as a courtesy after eligibility ends.  See IT Services procedures
(2) Sponsored SUNet ID
A sponsored SUNet ID is sponsored for a specific period of time. The sponsor determines the length of sponsorship; sponsorship must be renewed to keep the ID valid. There is no grace period: the entry becomes invalid immediately at the end of the sponsorship period.
(3) Reactivation
An entry may be reactivated if the individual subsequently rejoins the University, either via regular association or sponsorship.
(4) Suspension
The use of an authentication entry may be revoked if it is used in a manner inconsistent with Stanford policies or if an individual is subject to other administrative action that denies them University privileges.

c. User Responsibilities
(1) Official Actions
Use of the authentication service to identify oneself to an on-line system constitutes an official identification of the user to the University, in the same way that presenting an ID Card does. Users can be held responsible for all actions taken during authenticated sessions.
(2) Integrity
Regardless of the authentication method used, users must use only the authentication information that they have been authorized to use; i.e., must never identify themselves falsely as another person or entity.
(3) Confidentiality
Regardless of the authentication method used, users must keep their authentication information confidential; i.e., must not knowingly or negligently make it available for use by an unauthorized person.
(4) Reporting Problems
Anyone suspecting that their authentication information has been compromised should contact the information security office at security@stanford.edu or by entering a HelpSU request or by phoning the Stanford IT Help Desk at 650-725-4357.
(5) Security Precautions
Users are strongly encouraged to change their password regularly (at least once every three months), to limit possible abuse of passwords that may have been compromised without the user's knowledge. Passwords should be chosen so that they are not easily guessable; e.g., not be based on the user's name or birth date.
(6) Disciplinary Action
Individuals who are found to have knowingly violated one of these provisions will be subject to disciplinary action. The possible disciplinary actions for violations, which can include termination of employment or student status, will depend on the facts and circumstances of each case.

Back to top

7. Authentication: Kerberos

Kerberos, a sophisticated cryptographic authentication system, is the preferred authentication method for use with centrally-supported systems and services at Stanford.

a. Identifiers
Stanford's Kerberos system uses personal SUNet IDs to name its entries for people. Other entities, such as network-based services, also have Kerberos entries.

b. Use
Each Kerberos entry is associated with a srvtab or keytab based on a password hash maintained by the user. Kerberos software, installed on end-user computers, allows users to authenticate to network services using their SUNet ID and password.

c. Changing a Password
Password changes may be made using standard Kerberos software or via IT Services. The Kerberos system checks proposed new passwords and rejects those that are likely to be easily guessable.

d. Reissuing Passwords
When a SUNet ID holder forgets the password associated with a Kerberos entry, or if it is compromised and no longer private, he or she should immediately try to reset it themselves at https://accounts.stanford.edu/ or contact the Stanford IT Help Desk at (650) 725-HELP [725-4357] for assistance in having a new password issued.

Back to top

8. Identification and Authentication: Local Systems

This section contains recommendations and requirements for systems and services that use local identification and authentication methods rather than the centrally-supported methods.

a. Use SUNet IDs
Systems should use personal SUNet IDs to identify their users. This will be less confusing for users, and will ease future transition to centrally-supported authentication.

b. Avoid Clear-Text Passwords
Systems may not transmit reusable passwords across the network unencrypted. Such passwords are vulnerable to capture and abuse.

c. Support Password Quality
Systems should check proposed passwords and reject those that are likely to be easily guessable.

Back to top

9. Sources for More Information

a. SUNet IDs
(1) Cognizant Office
The office responsible for implementing policy on SUNet ID system is IT Services.
(2) Support
Support information is available at http://www.stanford.edu/services/sunetid or submit a HelpSU request or phone the Stanford IT Help Desk at (650) 725-4357.

b. Kerberos
(1) Cognizant Office
The office responsible for implementing policy on the Kerberos authentication system is IT Services.
(2) Support
Support information is available by submitting a HelpSU request or phone the Stanford IT Help Desk at (650) 725-4357.

c. University IDs
(1) Cognizant Office
The offices responsible for implementing policy on University IDs are Human Resources (for employees) and Registrar (for students).

Back to top

6.5.1 Chat Rooms and Other Forums Using Stanford Domains or Computer Services

Last updated on:
12/01/2000
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
66

Establishes policy for use of electronic communication forums at Stanford.

Authority: 

Approved by the President.

1. Definition

From time to time, University departments, faculty, students and others may host electronic communication forums, such as chat rooms, news groups, bulletin boards or websites, whereby various parties may contribute their thoughts on various subjects and where such communication is made available for others to read and comment upon. For purposes of this policy, these sites are collectively referred to as "forums."

Back to top

2. Establishment of Forums

a. Connection With University Activities
Forums that either use the Stanford.edu, Stanford.org or other Stanford domains or use University computing facilities should be established only in connection with legitimate activities of the University.

b. University Role
Unless specifically sponsored by an academic or administrative unit of the University, the University's role in connection with these forums will be solely as a passive Internet service provider.

c. Terms of Use
In all cases, as a condition to establishing a forum, forum homepages (where they exist) and each individual forum page should contain a header that states: "Subject to Terms of Use" and all pages should include a link to the page maintained by the University entitled Terms of Use.

Back to top

3. Operation of Forums

All forums shall be operated in compliance with the Terms of Use, as modified from time to time, and the University's various policies regarding computer facilities and services.

Back to top

6.6.1 Information Security Incident Response

Last updated on:
03/15/2013
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
67

This Guide Memo describes the procedures to be followed when a computer security incident is discovered to have occurred involving an Academic or Administrative Computing System operated by Stanford University, its faculty, students, employees, consultants, vendors or others operating such systems on behalf of Stanford. It also describes the procedures to be followed when Prohibited or Restricted Information residing on any computing or information storage device is, or may have been, inappropriately accessed, whether or not such device is owned by Stanford. This policy outlines the procedures for decision making regarding emergency actions taken for the protection of Stanford's information resources from accidental or intentional unauthorized access, disclosure or damage.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

Applicability: 

This policy is applicable to all University students, faculty, staff, and to all others granted use or custodianship of Stanford University information resources ("University Community").

1. Purpose

The purpose of information security incident response is to:

a. mitigate the effects caused by such an incident,
b. protect the information resources of the University from future unauthorized access, use or damage, and
c. ensure that Stanford fulfills all of its obligations under University policy, and federal and state laws and regulations with respect to such incident.

Stanford recognizes the need to follow established procedures to address situations that could indicate the security of the University's information assets may have been compromised. Such procedures include ensuring the appropriate level of University management becomes involved in the determination of actions implemented in response to an information technology security incident.

A standard University-wide approach to information security is important in order to protect the security of Stanford's intellectual capital and to ensure that Information Security Incidents are handled properly, effectively and in a manner that minimizes the adverse impact to the University. Every user of any of Stanford's information resources has responsibility toward the protection of the University's information assets; certain offices and individuals have very specific responsibilities.

Back to top

2. Definitions

a. Academic Computing System
Any application, or information system, that directly or indirectly deals with or supports the University's primary mission of teaching, learning and research.

b. Administrative Computing System
Any application, or information system, that directly or indirectly deals with or supports financial, administrative, or other information that is an integral part of running the business of the University (as defined in Guide Memo 6.1.1: Administrative Computing Systems).

c. Electronic Information Security Incident
An Electronic Information Security Incident is defined as any real or suspected adverse event in relation to the security of computer systems, computer networks, electronic Prohibited information or electronic Restricted Information. Examples of incidents include:

  • Attempts (either failed or successful) to gain unauthorized access to a system or its data.
  • Theft or other loss of a laptop, desktop, PDA, or other device that contains Prohibited or Restricted Information, whether or not such device is owned by Stanford.
  • Unwanted disruption or denial of service.
  • The unauthorized use of a system for the processing or storage of data.
  • Changes to system hardware, firmware, or software characteristics without the owner's knowledge, instruction, or consent.

d. Information Security Incident
An Electronic Information Security Incident or a Non-electronic Information Security Incident.

e. Non-electronic Information Security Incident
Real or suspected theft, loss or other inappropriate access of physical content, such as printed documents and files.

f. Prohibited Information
Information defined as Prohibited.

g. Restricted Information
Information defined as Restricted.

Back to top

3. Notification

A member of the University Community who becomes aware of an Information Security Incident should immediately:

a. Disconnect the compromised system and equipment from Stanford's network.

b. Avoid making any updates or other modifications to software, data, or equipment involved or suspected of involvement with an Information Security Incident until after the Information Security Office has completed its investigation and authorizes such activity.

c. Contact the University's Information Security Office via HelpSU or by calling (650) 723-2911.

Back to top

4. Investigation

When an Information Security Incident is reported, the University’s Chief Information Security Officer (CISO) will do the following:

a.  The CISO will investigate the Information Security Incident. In order to minimize the impact of the Information Security Incident on the University and in order to complete a proper investigation, the CISO has the authority to restrict information system access or operations to protect against unauthorized information disclosures. In order to complete the investigation, the CISO may convene a preliminary fact-finding working group comprised of relevant business and technical personnel.

b. If the CISO concludes that applicable federal or state laws or regulations may have been violated, the CISO will notify the Office of the General Counsel, which will, in turn, notify law enforcement agencies if appropriate.

c. If the CISO concludes that there is a possibility of unauthorized access to Restricted or Prohibited Information, or other sensitive information, the CISO will notify the University Privacy Officer, who will convene an Information Security Incident Response Team.

d. If appropriate, the CISO will notify offices of the Deans, Vice Provosts and Vice Presidents with responsibility for areas affected by the Information Security Incident.

e. If the CISO determines that an employee may not have carried out their assigned tasks as instructed or in accordance with University rules and policies, the CISO will notify the employee’s manager and the Vice President for Business Affairs and CFO. If the University opens an investigation into the situation, the CISO will cooperate with the employee’s manager and/or Stanford’s Human Resources Group in its investigation of the incident to determine appropriate corrective or disciplinary action, if any. The office conducting the investigation and making the recommendation will complete and submit to the appropriate parties all supporting documentation related to the investigation and recommended action.

Back to top

5. Information Security Incident Response Team

Based on information provided by the CISO and in consultation with the Office of the General Counsel, the University’s Privacy Officer will convene an Information Security Incident Response Team (ISIRT) to develop an appropriate Information Security Incident Response Plan (Plan). Depending on the circumstances of each situation, the Privacy Officer shall include in the ISIRT representatives of some or all of the following offices:

  • Information Security Office
  • Office of the General Counsel
  • Internal Audit and Institutional Compliance Department
  • Office of the Vice President for Public Affairs
  • Administrative Systems
  • IT Services
  • Departments or schools directly affected by the Information Security Incident (including both the appropriate business and technical personnel)
  • Other constituencies, as appropriate.

The ISIRT, led by the University Privacy Officer, will develop and execute communication and other action plans to ensure:

a. Appropriate action is taken in a timely manner, including reporting, notification and other communication of the Information Security Incident, as required by law or otherwise deemed appropriate.

b. Appropriate progress reports are made on the Information Security Incident and execution of the Plan, including to:

  • Office of the President and Provost
  • Board of Trustees
  • Alumni Association
  • Office of Student Affairs
  • Office of Development
  • Other impacted constituencies, as warranted by the situation

In carrying out this responsibility, the ISIRT will ensure that important operational decisions are elevated to the appropriate levels to protect the fundamental interests of the University and others impacted by the incident.

The University Privacy Officer will also be responsible for documenting the deliberations and decisions of the ISIRT as well as all actions taken pursuant to ISIRT deliberations.

Back to top

6. Report Preparation

The Information Security Office, jointly with the Internal Audit Department, will be responsible for writing a final report on the incident and the ensuing investigation (Report), which summarizes findings regarding the Information Security Incident and, if appropriate, makes recommendations for improvement of related information security practices and controls. The Report will be distributed to the Vice President for Business Affairs and CFO, and other appropriate University office(s), if any.

Back to top

7. Additional Information

Specific guidelines, procedures, standards, and best practices for secure computing can be found at: http://securecomputing.stanford.edu.

Additional information can be found at:

Back to top

7.1.1 Health and Safety Services

Last updated on:
08/11/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
25.1

This Memo lists the main offices, departments and groups that provide various health and safety services at Stanford.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice Provost and Dean of Research.

1. Environmental Health and Safety

The Department of Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) is the principal health and safety office at Stanford. EH&S works closely with the University Safety Partners (the designated safety officers in the laboratory schools, Land, Buildings and Real Estate [LBRE], and in Residential and Dining Enterprises [R&DE]) and the safety coordinators, safety committees, administrators and faculty in the departments. If you need help or information about health and safety, call EH&S at 723-0448.

Back to top

2. Administrative Panels

Stanford University's five Administrative Panels on research compliance assure the institution's compliance with federal regulation of research activities by reviewing those research activities which involve the use of human subjects, laboratory animals, biohazardous agents, recombinant DNA or radiological hazards.

Back to top

3. Health and Safety Committee

The University Committee on Health and Safety exercises oversight of health and safety programs at Stanford and SLAC, advises the President on the adequacy of Stanford's health and safety programs, policies and organization, recommends priorities and strategies to promote good health and safety on campus, and fosters coordination among those units at Stanford having operational responsibility for health and safety. This committee also reviews and recommends to the President University-wide policies regarding health and safety matters not addressed by the existing administrative panels.

Back to top

4. Other Departments

Other departments play important health and safety roles.

  • Department of Public Safety (Campus Police), 723-9633.
    Primary responsibility for traffic safety, earthquake and emergency planning and police services.
  • Department of Risk Management, 723-4554
    - Administers Stanford's property, liability and vehicle insurance, Workers' Compensation, and self-insured programs and claims
    - Evaluates and identifies financial risks in order to protect the University's assets and resources
    - Provides risk consultation to departments
  • Palo Alto Fire Department 9-911
    Fire suppression services.
  • Santa Clara County Fire Marshal's Office, 917-0767
    Fire inspection services.
  • Stanford Fire Marshal at EH&S 723-0609
    Other fire prevention and code consultation services.
  • 24-Hour Emergency Response Team at EH&S 725-9999
    Emergency services for incidents involving hazardous materials.
  • Other University departments such as LBRE (Buildings and Grounds Maintenance and the Department of Project Management) also have important health and safety functions such as preventive maintenance, repairs, and inspections.
  • Stanford University Medical Center (Stanford Health Care, Lucile Packard Children's Hospital and School of Medicine) has its own security service and facilities operations group that respond to emergencies through their "286" alarm or by calling Security Services at 723-7222.

Back to top

7.2.1 Emergency/Accident Procedures

Last updated on:
06/15/2008
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
25.2

This Guide Memo is a general compilation of Stanford's emergency procedures, including those for injuries and accidents, fires, earthquakes, and hazardous materials releases and spills. For more detailed information on disaster preparedness, please see the Department Emergency Planning Guidelines published by Environmental Health & Safety or contact Emergency Preparedness, 725-1409. 

Authority: 

This Guide Memo was approved by the Vice Provost and Dean of Research.

1. If an Employee is Injured at Work or a Student is Injured

a. Emergency First Aid
The Palo Alto Fire Department provides emergency first aid and resuscitation. From campus phones dial 911 or 9-911 for assistance.

b. Medical Assistance
(1) Employees (including student employees)
In case of an injury requiring medical attention, medical services designated by Stanford University Risk Management must be used for the first 30 days unless the injured person has previously predesignated* a personal physician in writing.

For serious illness/injury, Stanford Hospital Emergency Room (24-hour service: phone 723-5111) or Prompt Care Unit (8 a.m. to 9 p.m. weekdays; phone 723-2568) may be used if needed. For other medical services, the providers are subject to change with the most recent updates and information available at the Risk Management website or the Occupational Health Center website.

*Predesignation forms may be obtained here or by calling Risk Management at 723-7400.

(2) Students (who are not Stanford employees)
Vaden Health Center, located at 870 Campus Drive. Phone number is 724-2273 (4-CARE), ext. 4. Hours are 8 a.m. to 8 p.m. Monday through Friday and 10 a.m. to 5:30 p.m. Saturday and Sunday from mid September through mid June.
From mid June to mid September hours are 9 a.m. to 5 p.m. Monday through Friday. A physician and a mental health counselor are available on call when the health service is closed.

c. Transportation
The Palo Alto Fire Department or Stanford Police Department will arrange for ambulance service if required.

d. Reporting Serious Work-Related Injuries and Illnesses
(1) All Injuries
All injuries must be reported to the Department of Risk Management. See Guide Memo 7.6.1 for information on how to report injuries.
(2) Serious Work-Related Injuries and Illnesses
A serious injury or illness is defined as any accident resulting in:

  • 24 hours or more of inpatient hospitalization
  • loss of any member of the body
  • permanent disfigurement
  • death

After emergency treatment has been administered to the victim, a serious occupational injury or illness must be reported immediately by the supervisor by telephone to the Environmental Health and Safety Department at 723-0448. In the event that the victim is not hospitalized immediately following the accident, but is later hospitalized and the stay is 24 hours or longer, the supervisor must notify the Environmental Health and Safety Department immediately after learning of this change in status. This will enable Environmental Health and Safety to contact the California Occupational Safety and Health Administration (Cal/OSHA). Serious accidents may be investigated by both Environmental Health and Safety and Cal/OSHA.

Back to top

2. Preparedness

Supervisors have the specific responsibility to see that individuals for whom they are responsible are trained in proper emergency response procedures and that the work areas for which they are responsible are properly posted with emergency response procedures. Department administrators or building managers are responsible for working with the University Fire Marshall (at EH&S 723-0609) to designate an Emergency Assembly Point (EAP) for each department and for arranging departmental emergency response procedures and training.

Back to top

3. Fires

Call 9-911 from University phones (911 from pay phones or 286 from the Medical Center) and activate the nearest fire alarm to alert all building occupants. Exit the building according to building evacuation procedures. Gather at the Emergency Assembly Point for your area and wait for the fire department to arrive and to assume command of the scene. Assembled evacuees should try to determine if there is anyone missing, and the department administrator or building manager should advise the fire department if someone is believed to be still inside the building.

Back to top

4. Emergency Definitions

Emergency: An unforeseen event that calls for immediate action to protect individuals, the environment, or property.

Health-Threatening Emergency: An emergency in which there is a clear potential for serious injury to a person or release of contaminants to the environment if immediate action is not taken. (If in doubt, consider the emergency health-threatening.)

Non Health-Threatening Emergency:  An emergency in which there is not a clear potential for serious injury to any person. (If unsure whether an emergency is health-threatening or non health-threatening, assume it is health-threatening.)

Back to top

5. Procedures for Emergencies Involving Hazardous Materials

In all cases, when any person becomes aware of an emergency involving hazardous materials, regardless of its location:

a. If Health-Threatening
Call 9-911 from University phones (911 from other phones or 286 from the Medical School) and activate the nearest fire alarm if the building needs to be evacuated or if a telephone is unavailable.

  • If involving radiation or radioactive materials call Health Physics at 723-3201.
  • If unsure of the health-threatening nature of the emergency, assume it is health threatening and proceed accordingly.
  • If the emergency is a chemical spill or hazardous material release, in addition to contacting emergency personnel, notify the Principal Investigator responsible for that area as soon as it is practical to do so. If the Principal Investigator is unknown or unavailable then notify the Department or Building Administrator, Safety Committee Chairperson, or Department Chairperson. When possible, leave appropriate messages in each case. (The work and home phone numbers of these people should be posted near every room containing hazardous materials.)

When 9-911 (Police/Fire Communications) or 286 (Stanford University Medical Center Security Office) receives a report of an emergency involving hazardous materials they will notify the Department of Environmental Health and Safety immediately. 9-911 will notify the Health Physics Office in the event of an emergency involving radiation or radioactive materials.

b. If Not Health-Threatening
C
all Environmental Health and Safety at 5-9999 for consulting and clean-up assistance.

Back to top

6. Earthquakes and Disasters

Department administrators or building managers should draw up disaster plans for their department or building. This includes establishing an Emergency Assembly Point (EAP) for each building, posting evacuation maps, securing building contents, distributing emergency contact information, purchasing or preparing emergency kits, and creating a plan for emergency recovery. For help in drawing up these plans, contact the Environmental Health and Safety Department at 723-0448. Handouts can also be obtained from the Department of Public Safety at 723-0569.

When an earthquake occurs, stay calm. If indoors seek protection under a desk or table; stay away from glass. When the shaking has stopped completely, carefully exit the building according to emergency evacuation procedures for your building. Gather at the Emergency Assembly Point for your area and start to implement your department's emergency plans. (If outdoors, move away from buildings and utility wires. After the shaking stops, report to the Emergency Assembly Point (EAP) in your area.)

Back to top

7.3.1 Identifying and Correcting Workplace Hazards

Last updated on:
06/15/2007
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
25.3

This Guide Memo describes supervisory duties mandated by California Senate Bill 198, the Occupational Injury and Illness Prevention Act. These responsibilities for identifying and correcting workplace hazards apply to all supervisors, both faculty and staff, and to all workplaces, including laboratories, classrooms, shops, and offices.

Authority: 

This Guide Memo was approved by the Vice Provost & Dean of Research.

1. Inspections

a. Policy
Supervisors, both faculty and staff, have the specific responsibility to ensure that scheduled, periodic inspections of workplaces are conducted to identify and evaluate workplace hazards and unsafe work practices.

b. Procedures
(1) When to inspect
The frequency of inspections should be proportional to the magnitude of risk posed in the particular workplace. Inspections are also required whenever new substances, processes, procedures, or equipment presenting new, categorically different health and safety hazards are introduced into the workplace. The Department of Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) will assist supervisors in inspectional responsibilities and will conduct independent inspections as necessary.
(2) Keeping Records
Supervisors are responsible for ensuring that records of inspections are kept, including who conducted the inspections, dates, any unsafe conditions or practices found, and corrective actions taken. These records must be maintained for at least one year and available to EH&S or to the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) on request. Self inspection checklists and guides and standard forms for inspection record-keeping may be obtained from EH&S (723-0448).

Back to top

2. Hazard Correction and Reporting

(Note: this policy is for non-emergency situations only. In case of an emergency or serious health threatening situation, follow the Emergency Response procedures outlined in Guide Memo 7.2.1: Emergency and Accident Procedures.

a. Policies
Means of correcting discovered hazards and/or protecting individuals from hazards are to be implemented promptly. Unsafe conditions that cannot be corrected with resources available to the supervisor or manager must be reported by that supervisor or manager to the next higher level of management.

Any supervisor or manager who becomes aware of a serious concealed danger to the health or safety of individuals shall report this danger promptly to EH&S and to the individuals who may be affected.

Stanford University encourages employees and students to report health and safety hazards to their supervisors, managers, or EH&S. Employees and students shall not be discharged or discriminated against in any manner for bona fide reporting of health and safety hazards to Stanford or to appropriate governmental agencies. Supervisors shall inform employees and students of this policy and encourage reporting of workplace hazards.

b. Procedures
Follow Stanford University procedures for maintenance and repairs and see that work is properly done.

Back to top

7.4.1 Health and Safety Training and Communication

Last updated on:
06/15/2009
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
25.4

This Guide Memo describes supervisory duties mandated by California Senate Bill 198, the Occupational Injury and Illness Prevention Act. These responsibilities for health and safety training and communication apply to all supervisors, both faculty and staff, and to all workplaces, including laboratories, classrooms, shops, and offices.

Authority: 

This Guide Memo was approved by the Vice Provost & Dean of Research.

1. Training Responsibilities

Supervisors, both faculty and staff, have the specific responsibility to see that systems for communicating with employees and students about health and safety matters in their jurisdiction are implemented and maintained. Information must be presented in a manner readily understandable to the affected employees and students. Due attention must be paid to levels of literacy and to language barriers. Oral communications should be supplemented with written materials or postings. Whenever appropriate, regulations, statutes and policies affecting employees and students should be available in their workplaces.

Back to top

2. When to Train

Employees and students must be trained:

  • When an employee or student first begins work.
  • When an employee or student is given a new assignment for which training has not previously been received.
  • Whenever new hazards are introduced into the workplace by new substances, processes or equipment. (Training is required when a new and different category of hazards is introduced, for example, radiological materials or corrosives, or when a new piece of equipment presents substantially different hazards than already exist.)
  • Whenever the supervisor is made aware of a new or previously unrecognized hazard.

Back to top

3. Content of Training

Stanford's training takes place in three tiers:

  • Tier 1 is a general University orientation provided by the Human Resources staff for all new University employees. It includes information on Stanford's health and safety policies and practices, employee health and safety rights and responsibilities, health and safety services at Stanford, and what the employee should generally expect in terms of further training and information from their supervisor or management.
  • Tier 2 training is provided by the school, department or building safety representatives in conjunction with the Department of Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) for employees and students in labs, shops, kitchens, or other workplaces where special hazards may be encountered. Tier 2 includes general information applicable to the school, department, building, service shop, kitchen, or office about safety administration, programs, and procedures.
  • Tier 3 training is provided by the principal investigators, lab directors, shop/kitchen supervisors and class instructors for laboratory researchers and assistants, lab class students, and shop and food service workers. Tier 3 consists of information specific to labs, research groups, and shops regarding the special hazards of their work and the specific protocols and procedures to be performed by the individual.

See the Stanford Safety Manual for more specific information on tier training contents.

Back to top

4. Training Resources

EH&S has a safety video library, a collection of safety publications, and technical staff to assist supervisors and departments in implementing training programs. EH&S's Office of Health Physics provides special programs for training in radiological safety. EH&S assists schools and departments, in collaboration with the University Safety Partners, in providing general laboratory safety training to students, staff and faculty. Call EH&S's Communications Office (725-1470) with any questions about training or training materials, or talk to the relevant University Safety Partner about establishing a training program for a particular department.

Back to top

5. Keeping Records

Supervisors must document health and safety training and communications, whether conducted in classroom-style, safety meetings, or one-on-one job safety training sessions. Records must be kept of who was trained, who did the training, when the training occurred, and what was taught. Documentation should include safety meeting or training session agendas, sign-up sheets with signatures of attendees, and copies of any written communications. Records of training must be kept for at least one year and be readily available for the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) for inspection. For guidance on records retention, refer to the Environmental Health and Safety website.

Back to top

7.5.1 Health and Safety Performance Standards and Discipline

Last updated on:
06/15/2007
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
25.5

This Guide Memo describes supervisory duties mandated by California Senate Bill 198, the Occupational Injury and Illness Prevention Act. These responsibilities for health and safety performance standards and discipline apply to all supervisors, both faculty and staff, and to all workplaces, including laboratories, classrooms, shops, and offices.

Authority: 

This Guide Memo was approved by the Vice Provost & Dean of Research.

1. Policy

It is the policy of Stanford University to maintain a safe and healthy work environment. Managers and supervisors are responsible for the establishment and maintenance of good health and safety practices. Work rules to assure good health and safety practices are to be promulgated and enforced including through the disciplinary process if necessary.

Back to top

2. Guide to Supervisors

To be most effective, rules on health and safety practices should be clearly communicated to all employees: through postings, meetings, training sessions, etc. Job descriptions and performance criteria should clearly state that good health and safety practices are part of the employees' job expectations. Performance appraisals should evaluate the employees' conformance to health and safety rules and recognize good health and safety practices.

Furthermore, each employee should be made to understand from the outset that failure to observe good health and safety practices may subject the employees to disciplinary action up to and including possible termination.

The role of discipline is to impress upon the employees the seriousness and importance of following instructions including the utilization of good health and safety practices.

Back to top

7.6.1 Accident and Incident Reporting

Last updated on:
03/15/2013
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
25.6

This Guide Memo lists forms needed to fulfill federal and state requirements concerning accidents, incidents, or exposures to employees in the workplace. It does not cover mental stress claims; contact your local Human Resources office immediately for guidelines on such claims. These policies also apply at SLAC National Accelerator Laboratory (SLAC). SLAC employees must report accidents, incidents or exposures to SLAC Medical Department.

Authority: 

Approved by the Assistant Vice President of Risk Management.

1. Benefits Brochure

Detailed information about Stanford University Workers' Compensation benefits is available at the Stanford Risk Management website. 

Back to top

3. Report Required for Every Injury

In the event of an employee accident, incident or exposure, the injured or exposed person's supervisor must complete and submit an Accident/Incident/Exposure Report (Form SU-17). In addition, the supervisor must comply with state and federal reporting requirements, including prompt submission of Form SU-17. This form enables Environmental Health and Safety to implement thorough accident investigations to remedy work-related hazards.

Nonemployee accidents require an SU 17-B.

a. Time Limit
The SU-17 must be submitted within 24 hours of the occurrence.

b. Applicability
The SU-17 applies to all employees (full-time, part-time and temporary), as well as to all students, contractors and visitors on campus, whether or not the injured or exposed person received medical attention.

c. Who Signs
The SU-17 must be completed accurately and signed by both the injured or exposed party and his/her supervisor. If the injured or exposed party is not a Stanford employee, the supervisor or manager responsible for the area where the injury, incident, or exposure occurred should sign the SU-17. If it is difficult to obtain the injured or exposed party's signed portion, departments should submit the supervisor's statement immediately, and the injured or exposed party's statement as soon as it is available.

d. Where to Submit
Mail or deliver the original and two copies along with Cal-OSHA Form 5020, if needed (see section 5) to Risk Management, 215 Panama Street, Bldg D, Mail Code 6207. Retain one copy for department files.

Back to top

4. Report Required When a Doctor is Seen

An Employee's Claim for Workers' Compensation Benefits (DWC Form 1) must be given immediately to the employee along with the current year Workers' Compensation benefits sheet when a doctor is seen concerning the injury, incident or exposure. Failure to comply with the state requirements may impose significant fines and penalties, charged to the appropriate department. The DWC Form-1 and a detailed instruction sheet are available from Risk Management, 425 Arguello Way, Encina Modular A mailcode 6207, phone 650/723-7400.

a. Time Limit
The DWC Form-1 must be signed by a University representative, and then given or mailed to the employee within 24 hours of the accident, incident or exposure.

b. Applicability
The DWC Form-1 applies to all employees (full-time, part-time and temporary) when the injured or exposed person receives medical attention.

c. Who Signs?
The employer/supervisor/administrator signs the employer section. The injured person is not required to sign.

d. Where to Submit
A copy of the form must be sent to Risk Management for verification of employer obligation.

Back to top

5. Additional Report When Medical Assistance Is Needed or One or More Days Are Lost From Work

State law requires that an Employer's Report of Industrial Injury (Cal-OSHA Form 5020) be submitted when an industrial injury or occupational disease results in:

  • lost time beyond the day of injury, or
  • medical treatment by a physician in a clinic, hospital, emergency room, or medical office.

Cal-OSHA Form 5020 is required for payment for medical services and is the basis for any disability claim under Workers' Compensation Insurance. See Guide Memo 2.1.7: Sick Time, concerning absences due to work-related disabilities and medical coverage under Workers' Compensation Insurance.

a. Typed Entry Required
The Cal-OSHA Form 5020 must be typed.

b. Time Limit
The Cal-OSHA Form 5020 must be submitted within 24 hours of the occurrence.

c. Applicability
The Cal-OSHA Form 5020 applies to Stanford employees only. This includes part-time and temporary Stanford employees, but does not include independent contractors; persons employed by temporary help/employment agencies or vendors; or employees of other employers on campus, such as Stanford Bookstore.

d. Who Signs?
The injured employee's supervisor or acting supervisor signs the Cal-OSHA Form 5020.

e. Where to Submit
Mail or deliver the original and two copies of Cal-OSHA Form 5020, accompanied by the original and two copies of the SU-17, and the DWC Form-1 signed by a University representative, to Risk Management, 215 Panama Street, Building D, Mail Code 6207.

Back to top

6. Workers' Compensation Lost Time Report

A Workers' Compensation Lost Time Report (Form SU-16) must be submitted by the supervisor or administrator to Risk Management when an employee has lost one full day or more following the day of an accident, or the first day of a work-related illness. Its purpose is to comply with Federal/State OSHA log requirements and to stop temporary disability payment for workers' compensation. The form includes detailed instructions for completion. Submit form SU-16 online when the employee returns to work.

 

Back to top

7.7.1 Medical Examinations

Last updated on:
03/15/2008
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
25.7

This Guide Memo serves as an overview of Stanford's medical evaluation procedures.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice Provost & Dean for Research.

Applicability: 

The California Occupational Health and Safety Act and California Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and other federal regulations require that employers provide programs of medical surveillance for employees in certain positions. These programs, which may include examinations and testing before a new employee starts work as well as periodic medical evaluations, for employees engaged in certain occupations or working under certain conditions. While Stanford is required to make such examinations available, only certain employees—e.g., asbestos workers, employees required to use respirators, and hazardous materials Emergency Response Team members—are required by regulations to be provided and undergo medical examinations.

1. Policy

Stanford University evaluates and monitors, through its programs of medical surveillance, the health of Stanford University faculty, staff, and students who are exposed to certain hazardous materials and situations as defined by law and University policy.

Back to top

2. Criteria for Participation

Medical examinations of various kinds are available to employees working in conditions outlined below. Examinations may be recommended for other personnel based on job duties, exposures, individual medical histories, departmental accident and injury experience, and other safety standards.

a. Asbestos Exposure
Examinations before a new employee starts work and periodic examinations thereafter are required for employees assigned to work with asbestos.

b. Biohazardous Agents
Those working with biohazardous agents at biosafety level 2 or 3, those working with potentially infectious materials, or those working with animals possibly carrying zoonotic diseases may need to participate in a medical surveillance program.

c. Clinic Personnel
University Clinic personnel are required to have physical examinations when they are hired and yearly tuberculosis tests. Clinic employees working with chemotherapeutic drugs also receive yearly examinations.

d. Hazardous Chemical Exposure
Those exposed to certain levels of carcinogens or other hazardous chemicals in laboratories or to specific toxic and hazardous substances as specified in OSHA regulations may require medical monitoring under certain conditions. For updated, specific information on requirements for monitoring and participation in the medical surveillance program, please call the Department of Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) at 723-0448.

e. Hazardous Materials Emergency Response Team
Examinations are required before a new hazardous material emergency response team member, expected to perform work in response to the release of hazardous materials, including leaks or spills, starts work and annually thereafter.

f. Laser Exposure
Eye examinations are provided to those who will be exposed to class 3b or 4 laser beams prior to beginning their assignment. Call Health Physics for information at 723-3201.

g. Noise Exposure
Audiometric tests, consisting of baseline medical examinations and annual examinations thereafter, are available to those who may be exposed to noise levels equal to or exceeding an 8 hour time-weighted average of 85 decibels.

h. Police Officers
Examinations before a new police officer begins work are required by the Stanford University Department of Public Safety (SUDPS).

i. Respirator Users
Examinations before a new employee starts work and annual medical evaluations thereafter are required for those who will be using a respirator as part of their work.

j. Other Recommendations
In addition to the regulated occupations outlined above, examinations are recommended for employees whose work requires strenuous physical activity, including laborers, athletic instructors, equipment and machine operators, delivery persons, freight handlers, and truck drivers. Also included are jobs requiring acute hearing, sustained visual acuity, and any other work situation in which physical condition is critical. Supervisors or employees needing assistance in determining the applicability of criteria should ask their departmental safety representative or call EH&S at 723-0448.

Back to top

3. Who Administers the Program

a. The Department of Environmental Health and Safety
EH&S implements University-wide policies and procedures, and operates an on-site Occupational Health Center for employees which provides consultation and assistance to departments upon request.

b. Schools/Departments
Each University school/department administers the program for those faculty, staff and students covered by this policy. This includes scheduling the examinations, processing the papers, and keeping records.

c. Supervisors
Supervisors in each department determine which of their employees are within the criteria for participation, and ensure that those employees receive the appropriate medical examinations. EH&S can assist supervisors in determining if a medical examination is appropriate.

Back to top

4. Procedures

a. Payment for Services
Medical examination expenses are charged to the employing department or project, unless previous arrangements have been made with The Stanford University Occupational Health Center (SUOHC). SUOHC will perform journal transfers for the costs of medical examinationsof Stanford employees and prospective employees. All departments must arrange medical examinations with the SUOHC.

b. Making Appointments
The department schedules the medical appointment with the SUOHC (650-725-5308). If an appointment cannot be kept, it is the responsibility of the department or individual to notify SUOHC and reschedule the appointment. If SUOHC is not notified at least 24 hours in advance, the department may be charged for the missed appointment.

c. New Employees
Employees entering certain jobs, (e.g., respirator users, asbestos workers, police officers, hazardous materials emergency response team members, etc.) may be required to successfully complete a job-related physical examination before starting work. Employment in these positions is conditional upon satisfactory completion of the medical evaluation, and candidates for these positions should be so advised.

d. Record-keeping
Currently, all records of medical examinations conducted under this policy are maintained at the SUOHC for the duration of an individual's participation in the Medical Surveillance Program and in accordance with State and Federal requirements.

The examining clinician is expected to review the results of the examination with each program participant and provide appropriate referral(s) for abnormal findings.

SUOHC will mail or email one copy of the medical clearance form to EH&S. The clearance form outlines the participant's ability to perform a particular job, work in a potentially hazardous environment, and/or wear a respirator. SUOHC also sends a copy of the clearance form directly to the employing department/laboratory. If there are restrictions in an individual's ability to perform his/herjob, the supervisor should contact EH&S to determine the proper course of action. If necessary, Human Resources may be consulted.

Each department with employees participating in the medical surveillance program must maintain a Medical Surveillance Program file which contains the clearance forms for all program participants. An additional copy is also kept at SUOHC.

Back to top

5. Employee Access to Records

Employees or their designated representatives may obtain access to or a copy of medical records within 15 days of a request, without cost.

Back to top

7.8.1 Health and Safety Reference Guide

Last updated on:
03/15/2008
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
25.8

This Guide Memo contains lists of reference materials and phone numbers departments can call for specific health and safety questions.

1. Policy Statements

Back to top

4. Contact Numbers and Sites

Department of Environmental Health & Safety, 723-0448.

Stanford U. Medical Center Security (servicing the School of Medicine), 723-7222

School of Medicine (24 hour emergency response), 286 (dialing from SOM)

Department of Public Safety Police/Fire/Medical Response:

Office of Risk Management: 723-4554

School/Department Safety Partners

Back to top

8.1.1 Telecommunication Services

Last updated on:
08/11/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
81.1

This Guide Memo describes policies and responsibilities for the University's telecommunication systems. They apply only to relations among University departments and are inapplicable to transactions with outside communications suppliers and other entities and persons outside the University. The services described are available to all University and Hospital buildings on the campus, but exclude SLAC.

1. Administrative Responsibilities

a. Communication Services
Information Technology Services/Shared Services has responsibility for the design, operation, and maintenance of telecommunication services for all Stanford University and Hospital facilities.

(1) Telephone System
Shared Services operates the University-owned telephone system, providing service from the user's telephone jack (also called a telecommunication service outlet) up to the public network. Telephone services from any source, including SBC, are provided through the facilities of Shared Services.

(2) Network Systems
Shared Services operates the University backbone network, providing access to the University network (SUNET) and off-campus network services. Shared Services may also provide facilities and installation for local departmental networks through the Net-to-Jack program.

(3) Scope of Service
The University telephone system and network operate 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, providing continuous service for the campus. Shared Services maintains these systems at the highest level of private branch exchange (PBX) service continuity. Departments that require total uninterrupted telephone or data communication services are responsible for working with Shared Services to plan, install, and maintain separate emergency backup services.

(4) Consulting
Shared Services provides consulting service to advise departments about the best use of telecommunication services and on-campus facilities, and to assist departments in ordering new services, changes to current configurations, or moves of existing service.

b. Departmental Responsibilities
Deans, department heads, project directors, and other administrative officers are responsible for managing telephone expenditures (see Guide Memo 3.2.1: Authorizing Expenditures. Each department should appoint a responsible individual to act as a liaison with Shared Services. This person is the department's contact.

(1) Contact Responsibilities
The contact is responsible for:

  • Reviewing the monthly ITSS statement to validate all charges made to the department's accounts. Copies of the ITSS statement are sent online to the contact and may be reviewed online using the IT Services web site.
  • Ordering new service or any service changes for the department. The contact should have signature authority for committing telecommunication expenditures for the department.

(2) Support for Contact
Shared Services maintains departmental assigned contacts online. These individuals receive regular information mailings from Shared Services and notification of potential outages affecting service to their department. Regular training is provided for individuals newly appointed to be the contact for their department. For information on contact training, or to notify Shared Services of a change in the named contact, call Shared Services at 5-HELP.

Back to top

2. Facilities and Equipment

a. System Equipment
The telephone and network and associated peripheral equipment are maintained by Shared Services. All maintenance on the telephone line or switched data line is performed by Shared Services up to the end user's jack. Installation of new telephone or switched data lines as well as repairs or extensions to current lines may be performed only by Shared Services authorized personnel.

b. Departmental Equipment Ownership
The end users' telecommunications equipment from the jackout is the responsibility of end users and their departments. This equipment includes line cords, telephone sets, modems, or other telecommunication terminals. This equipment is selected and owned by the end user's department. Shared Services recommends a number of telephones and other telecommunication terminals that work well in the University and Hospital environments. Uniformity in telephone equipment is desirable to provide the end user with ease of use from one telephone to another, quick access to services and easy training in equipment usage.

c. Departmental Equipment Maintenance
Shared Services provides:

  • Installation service for telephone sets
  • End user training for the sets it recommends
  • Maintenance for its supported telephone sets (on a cost recovery basis)

Departments may make arrangements to purchase telephone sets from Shared Services, or may purchase any compatible equipment from other sources. Each department is responsible for securing its own set maintenance, whether from Shared Services for its supported telephone sets, or from other sources.

d. Conduit and Cable Facilities
The conduit and cable system for all telecommunications on the campus is managed by Shared Services. Shared Services maintains records of all telephone and other telecommunication services on the campus, including outside cable and conduit as well as in-building wiring up to the individual jack. Requests for the use of any of these facilities must be made through Shared Services and associated costs for installation, service activation, and continuing use paid by the requesting department.

e. Building Wiring Facilities
The University has adopted a standard for communications wiring to support current and future communication requirements within its buildings. (Refer to Facilities Design Guide Division 17–Communication Services.  All new and remodeled structures must use this standard as a minimum. Shared Services reviews all plans for communication wiring and must approve installation of wire (or other communication media) up to the jack. Departments may choose to install their own communication facilities within buildings, but such installation is incremental to the standard inside wiring managed by Shared Services. No department may use the University's inside wire plant without the consent of Shared Services, and payment of appropriate fees for maintaining records of this use, and for any installation or activation charges.

Back to top

3. Privacy and Usage Policies

a. Intended Telephone Usage
Business telephone facilities are provided for conducting the official business of the University. The system is designed for this purpose. All costs are charged to the department authorizing usage.

b. Personal Telephone Usage
Each department or organization should set guidelines as to personal telephone calls. The department must be reimbursed for the cost of all personal toll calls and long distance calls on the University's business telephone lines. Public telephones are generally available for personal calls.

c. Information About Phone Usage
Any department may, through its appointed contact, request information about billable calls placed on its telephone lines. Information about these calls, including call destination, telephone line used, call duration, and authorization code used, is supplied only to the contact or to the department head. When a department suspects abuse of its telephone lines or authorization codes, it may request that information about such usage be supplied to appropriate Stanford disciplinary and review bodies and persons.

d. Call Tracing
If a department receives threatening or abusive telephone calls, the contact for that department may request that Shared Services trace the source of incoming calls. Such a trace can provide information about calls placed from other campus telephones. Any trace is reported to the Stanford Public Safety Department and the information from a trace is provided only to the Public Safety Department. To request a trace of calls placed from off-campus requires a court order delivered to SBC, which must be arranged through the Stanford Public Safety Department.

e. Monitoring Call Activity
If patterns of telephone usage on any line indicate the possibility of system abuse (such as multiple attempts to discover an active authorization code), Shared Services monitors and reports on the activity of that line, including call destination, in an attempt to discover the individual making such calls.

f. Recording Conversations
Shared Services does not place a recording on any telephone line conversation, unless under court order. Any department that wishes to record telephone conversations must follow California State law relating to recording conversations.

Back to top

4. Financial Responsibility

a. Departmental Phone Lines
The ordering department is responsible for all charges associated with the telephone line, including:

  • Activation costs for the line
  • Monthly service charges for the line and its associated features
  • Maintenance of any equipment attached at the jack
  • Charges for any user-caused damage to the jack or line or telephone system (such might be caused by faulty equipment or other electronic equipment connected to the jack)
  • Incoming collect calls accepted at the telephone set
  • Local area calling charges, if applicable to the line
  • Charges for calls placed from the line and not validly charged to either a departmental or a residential authorization code. Any billable call placed using an authorization code for which the owner of the authorization code disputes the validity of the charges becomes the liability first of the account that ordered the authorization code, and second of the account paying the charges for the line from which the call was placed. Where line activity cannot be controlled, departments should select calling ability on the sets that will disallow billable calls.

b. Departmental Authorization Codes
Authorization codes are randomly assigned numbers issued to individuals through their departments in order for departments to authorize long distance calls as well as track charges for billable calls. The department is liable for all charges for any calls placed using that code. The individual to whom the authorization code is issued is responsible for the confidentiality of that code and should not share the code with any other person, nor use the code to place unauthorized calls.

c. Departmental Calling Cards
Calling cards from long-distance carriers are issued to individuals through their departments for placing calls when off the campus and charging them directly to the University. Calling cards are available from Shared Services, with all charges incurred from their usage billed to the requesting department on the monthly ITSS statement.

The requesting department is liable for all charges for any calls placed using that calling card. The individual to whom the calling card is issued is responsible for the security of the card.

d. Departmental Data Lines
The ordering department is responsible for all charges associated with the data line, including:

  • Activation costs for the line
  • Monthly service charges for switched data lines
  • Monthly maintenance charges for point-to-point circuits; or the department may elect to maintain these circuits itself
  • Responsible care for any line driver equipment connected to the circuit that is provided to the department by Shared Services

Back to top

5. Ordering and Billing Procedures

a. Telephone or Data lines
(1) Communication Services Order Form
Contacts may order new telephone or data lines, or changes to existing lines on the online Communication Service Order (CSO) form or using the IT Services web site.
(2) Consultation on Orders
Shared Services provides consulting assistance in ordering new or changed service. Basic consulting is available 9:00 a.m.–noon and 1:00 p.m. –4:00 p.m. on workdays by calling 5-HELP. For large project moves, a communication system analyst is assigned to work with the contact to order service.
(3) Order Queries
For update status on submitted CSOs, contact the Communication Services Order Processing Center at 5-HELP.

b. Authorization Codes and Calling Cards
Contacts may request authorization codes and calling cards for individuals in the department. Contacts must request cancellation of codes and calling cards if the individual leaves the department.

Requests for new codes or cards, cancellations, or account number changes for codes and cards should be made via the online CSO. For further assistance, call 5-HELP.

c. Billing
All ITSS charges to departments appear on a monthly online statement. Contacts should review monthly ITSS statements to ensure that authorization codes are being used for approved calls and that all other charges are correct. Questions about items that appear on an ITSS statement should be directed to the Shared Services Account Center at 5-HELP. Resolution of billing disputes requires submission of an online HelpSU request no more than 21 days after the statement is available online.

d. Payment Policy
Statement balances for students, on-site vendors, Stanford West, and General Accounts Receivable collections are due upon receipt; payments must be received by the 19th of the month in order to be reflected on the next month's statement. Non-payment of balances is treated as any other University debt and could result in:

  • Loss of service: Stanford can and will disconnect service when payment is more than 60 days late.Any past-due charges and fees must be paid in full before ITSS will reactive service; additional reactivation charges will also apply.
  • Hold placement: Stanford can and will withhold student registration privileges, diplomas, and transcripts for overdue accounts.
  • Collection actions: Stanford can and will initiate collection actions when payment is more than 60 days late for all except active students. This can adversely affect credit rating.
  • Active students' unpaid balances will be assigned to a collection agency within 60 days after the student has left the University.
  • Resolutions of billing disputes require submission of an online HelpSU request no more than 21 days after the statement with the disputed charges was mailed.

Back to top

8.1.2 Mail Services

Last updated on:
09/05/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
81.2

This Guide Memo describes mail services provided to the University by both the U. S. Post Office and internal interdepartmental mail services.

Authority: 

This Guide Memo was approved by the Vice President for Land, Buildings & Real Estate.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to all Stanford University employees and students.

1. U.S. Mail Service

a. Incoming Mail
(1) Campus Mail—U. S. Mail for campus departments is received and sorted at the U. S. Post Office, Palo Alto. Mail carriers deliver mail once a day to departmental building delivery points.
(2) Medical Center—U. S. Mail for the Hospital, patients, and the School of Medicine is received and sorted at Stanford Health Care mail services and delivered on the same schedule as Interdepartmental (ID) Mail (see 2.b(2)).
(3) SLAC—A U.S. Postal Service (USPS) carrier delivers mail to the SLAC National Accelerator Laboratory (SLAC) once a day.
(4) Post Office Boxes—Mailbox rentals at the Post Office are serviced Monday through Saturday.

b. Outgoing Mail
(1) Pickup Point—
Carriers pick up mail at delivery points as a courtesy to customers. Because of limited capacity by the mail carrier, large outgoing mailings may not be picked up. U.S. Post Office mailboxes are provided throughout the campus for outgoing mail. Collection hours are posted on each box.
(2) Preparation of Materials—Departments can save on delivery time by separating stamped material from metered material and by further sorting the material into letters, big envelopes and packages. Metered mail must be bundled by separate classes of mail with all addresses facing the same way. Medical Center metered mail to be picked up by Stanford Health Care mail services must also have the mail metering reference number marked on the top piece of each bundle. For more information about mail metering reference numbers, contact Stanford Health Care mail services.
(3) Hazardous Materials/Dangerous Goods—Departments must not use U.S. Mail for shipment of biological or other hazardous materials, including dry ice. All shipments of hazardous materials/dangerous goods must be prepared and shipped only by trained and certified individuals. Additional information and assistance are at http://hazmatshipping.stanford.edu.
(4) Postal Information—Information about postage rates, classes of mail, and general regulations for domestic and foreign mail may be obtained at the Post Office and at https://www.usps.com/.

c. Format for Stanford Addresses
A complete return address must be given for all correspondence. The electronic equipment for sorting mail scans the last two lines of the address. For fastest delivery, the preferred format for campus address information is:

Line 1. Person's Name
Line 2. Stanford University
Line 3. Department, Building and Room Number
Line 4. Street Address
Line 5. Stanford, CA 94305-nnnn (Zip+4)

Avoid putting "Stanford University" in the last two lines. If Stanford University appears in either of the last two lines, the mail is delivered in bulk tothe Stanford Post Office, where it is sorted by hand. The USPS Zip Code+4 is not the same as the “ID” mail code. Use “StanfordWho” to look up correct information for individuals.

d. Misaddressed Mail
Stanford Post Office carriers take undeliverable first-class mail with incorrect or insufficient addresses to the Information Section in the Registrar's Office, h were efforts are made to locate the addresses. If located, the mail is forwarded in ID mail by Mail and Delivery Services (MDS). If not located, the mail is returned to the Post Office. Stanford Health Care mail services returns undeliverable mail to the Postal Carrier. Departments that receive mail for a person who has left should make a notation to that effect on the mail and return it to the sender.

e. U.S. Mail Bulk Mailing
(1) Permit 28—
To send bulk mail via USPS, it is economical to use the Stanford nonprofit mail Permit #28. Minimum requirements to qualify for nonprofit bulk mail postage rates are 500 pieces for First Class and 250 pieces or 50 pounds for Standard mail service. Contact an external mail preparation service to make arrangements for the mailing.  The mail preparation service vendor will take care of the required USPS paperwork and obtain the necessary signature from MDS. The selected vendor must have an approved service request (see below*) for use of the permit. The department requesting the service pays the postage via the PTA provided to MDS. There is an additional processing fee charged for this service.

*To utilize Permit #28, submit a Service Request:
1) Go to https://bgm.stanford.edu/
2) Select “Mailing Services”
3) Select “Request for Mailing and Delivery Services”
4) Follow instructions provided
5) Give the generated request number to the appropriate mail preparation service vendor.                 

(2) Advance Planning—Departments are encouraged to call MDS for consultation early in the planning stages of a bulk mailing of U.S. Mail. Mailing requirements and cost estimates should be reviewed with MDS before the material is printed. Postal regulations and automation capabilities may affect the printing specifications and costs.
(3) Mail Preparation Services—Contact MDS for help in selecting a mailing preparation services vendor directly for mailing services such as folding, inserting, metering, etc. The department or the vendor should deliver the prepared materials respective postage statements to MDS for signature authorization before presenting the materials to the USPS for processing.
(4) Mailing Permit—Postal regulations require that the use of nonprofit postage permits must be reviewed and authorized by MDS.

Back to top

2. Interdepartmental Mail Services

a. Eligibility to Use Services
ID Mail Services are provided primarily for conveyance of messages concerning the University's official business. ID mail may be used between the various University departments and administrative units. All organizations with responsibility to the University may use Campus ID mail services, including Associated Students of Stanford University (ASSU).

ID mail may be used to deliver general flyers concerning Stanford-related events or information.

ID mail may not beused to distribute commercial or partisan political advertising.

b. Distribution of Interdepartmental Mail
Three primary ID mail services are utilized at Stanford. Each mail room functions independently of each other.
(1) Campus Mail—Stanford ID Mail and Delivery Services (MDS) is located at 340 Bonair Siding, Stanford University.  Campus ID mail services delivers mail to the Stanford campus Monday through Friday. Primary daily delivery is between the hours of 8 am-12 pm. Afternoon service is available at an additional cost. “Will call” requests can also be accommodated through MDS.  All requests will be prioritized by the MDS Supervisor.  All questions should be directed to the Campus Mail Room at (650) 723-2261 or mailroom@bonair.stanford.edu.
(2) Medical Center Mail—All campus mail addressed to Medical Center departments is presorted by MDS. Mail is then picked up once a day by a courier from Stanford Health Care and re-sorted. Stanford Health Care mail services collects and delivers Campus ID mail at the Medical Center and Stanford Clinics twice a day. There is one delivery a day at the Hospital and the School of Medicine. Stanford Health Care mail services also delivers U.S. Mail. Mail for patients is delivered once a day. Medical inter-office mail is separate from Campus ID mail. All questions should be directed to the Medical Center Mail Room at (650) 723-5130.
(3) SLAC Mail—All mail that is addressed for delivery to SLAC is presorted at Campus MDS. At that point, mail is picked up once a day by a SLAC employee, re-sorted and delivered to SLAC departments. All questions should be directed to the SLAC Mail Room at (650) 926-2380.

c. Package Guidelines
All
mail rooms follow the same packaging guidelines. The maximum size limit for packages is 50 lbs. or 2 cubic feet. For larger pickups and deliveries, MDS services will accommodate most mailing needs if the respective mail room is contacted at least one day in advance.

d. Inspection of Interdepartmental Mail
(1) Regular ID Mail—The MDS supervisor may open ID mail for inspection when the addressee cannot be determined.
(2) Mail Marked "Confidential"—ID mail marked "Confidential" may be opened only by the person to whom the mail is addressed. In cases where neither the intended addressee nor a return address can be determined, the MDS superviso ris authorized to open the mail with the intent to locate information for proper delivery.

e. ID Bulk Mailing
Mailings of 50 pieces fall into the category of a "bulk mailing." Envelopes, flyers, postcards and pamphlets received in mail code order qualify for delivery service that is free of charge. Mailing that are not in mail code order will require a PTA number to cover service charges for sorting.
(1) Lead Time Required—Turnaround time is 5 working days for mailings received in mail code order and 7 working days when not in mail code order. Departments should consider these turnaround times when preparing time sensitive or dated material.
(2) ID Bulk Mail Preparation—To send bulk mail via ID mail, MDS can provide the most recent mailing code information for faculty and staff. The listing is updated each month. Departments should prepare bulk items and the request a mail code listing from mailroom@bonair.stanford.edu. Arrange with an external mail preparation service to deliver the bulk mailing to the MDS loading dock at 340 Bonair Siding.

f. Properly Addressing Interdepartmental Mail
Address all mail completely and properly.
(1) Campus ID Mail: Include full name and mail code. Also include a return address.
(2) Medical Center: Full name, department, room number and mail code.
(3) SLAC: Full name and mail stop.

The “ID” mail code is not the same as USPS Zip Code+4. Use “StanfordWho” to look up correct information.

g. Department Moves
When a department is planning a move, the appropriate mail room should be contacted at least two weeks in advance to provide the department’s previous address, new location and the date the move goes in to effect, as well as any other pertinent details.
-Mail and Delivery Services - (650) 723-2261
-Medical Center Mail Room - (650) 723-5130
-SLAC Mail Room - (650) 926-2380
-Maps and Records - (650) 725-8472

Newly organized departments (or departments relocating to another area) should contact MDS for changes and information on campus mail delivery and mail code assignment.  A change in location might require a new mail code.  Additionally, listings in “StanfordYou” must be updated with the correct mail code to ensure proper delivery and to prevent delays.

The department also needs to submit a Change of Address form to the Post Office. The Post Office might assign a new Zip+4 to the department. For questions regarding USPS Zip Code+4 codes and street addresses for newly activated buildings, contact Maps and Records. ID mail codes are not the same as USPS ZIP+4. If changes are anticipated, contact MDS.

h. Individual Moves
Change in work location for individuals should be entered by the department through PeopleSoft HRMS.

I. Mailing List Corrections
(1) MDS labels are generated from PeopleSoft HRMS and should be updated in “StanfordYou” by the individual. MDS is not authorized to make these changes.
(2) To “opt out” of a particular mailing, please contact the originator of the mailing.

 

Back to top

8.1.3 Provision of Mobile Equipment and Related Services

Last updated on:
08/30/2012
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
81.3

This guide memo outlines policy on the provision of Equipment/Services. The policy requires that the employee's supervisor approve the Stanford business need for Equipment/Services. The policy establishes the responsibilities of the employee and the department regarding any personal use of Equipment/Services. Schools and departments may adopt stricter provisions. The policy sets further requirements regarding the use and maintenance of Equipment/Services.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to all individuals who are provided with or are reimbursed for expenses relating to mobile phones, tablets (iPad), and like equipment ("Equipment"), and communications services (e.g., cellular and data services and Internet services) in support of such equipment ("Services") by Stanford. The policy also applies to supervisors and managers who approve these arrangements.

Group or shared Equipment/Services such as those used for rotating on-call contact are exempt from this policy.

Mobile equipment expenses are not normally chargeable to federally-funded sponsored projects or to state-funded projects subject to OMB Circular A-21 (Research Policy Handbook 15.4, Section A2, A3). The Office of Sponsored Research must approve exceptions when a proposal is submitted.

1. Background

The use of mobile phones, tablets, and similar devices, and related communication services by Stanford employees in the course of their work is common. Stanford often provides these devices to employees to improve communication, productivity and work efficiency, to facilitate telework, working between multiple campus locations and to otherwise enhance the contributions of employees. Stanford policies generally require University property to be used only for Stanford business use. However, this policy recognizes that a portion of the use of Equipment/Services may be for non-business use, such as personal phone calls or emails.

As Internet service is a nearly ubiquitous household utility, similar to basic telephone service and electricity, the University does not provide reimbursement for home Internet connectivity. Employees who are required to have home Internet service to fulfill job requirements and for whom purchasing the service is a significant financial hardship may request an exception to this policy. Exceptions must be approved by the responsible Vice Provost, Vice President, Dean, or his/her designee based on business necessity and demonstrated financial hardship.

Back to top

2. Stanford Business Use

a. Stanford Business Use Required
Stanford's resources are constrained by donor, sponsor and budgetary restrictions. Expenditures for Equipment/Services must follow a strict approval process, tied to demonstrated business need, rather than as compensation in the form of the latest technological gadget. Frequent turnover of such Equipment is discouraged. The employee's supervisor will determine and approve the Stanford business necessity for providing Equipment/ Services to the employee, based upon the employee's job duties, budget availability and local policy, custom and practice. Simple convenience is not a criterion for a cell phone allowance. The approval process will include a review of all aspects of the Equipment/Services insuring that they are provided at a minimum cost to Stanford consistent with the Stanford business requirements of the employee. The supervisor will determine the minimum cost Stanford IT plan available, and the appropriate level of Equipment to be provided, considering the features needed for the business use. When a Stanford IT plan is not appropriate, the department may provide a tax-free stipend in the employee's paycheck to support the business use of employee-provided Equipment/Services. The "other recurring pay" should be no higher than the approximate cost of the anticipated Stanford business use of Equipment/Services with the maximum stipend being $25 per month.

b. Supervisory Approval
The supervisor (or school designee) must approve the provision of the Equipment/ Services, following their normal School or Department practice for documentation of pre-approval of a business expense. A template that may be used for documentation is available at Stanford's Gateway to Financial Activities. Annual review of the necessity of Equipment/Services provided to a supervisor's staff is strongly encouraged.

c. Business Necessity
Stanford business necessity occurs when one of these factors is present:

  • It is vital for the mobile employee to be in constant touch with the office, lab or medical facility.
  • The employee is responsible for emergency preparedness and must be available and on-call around-the-clock for a specific business period.
  • A group of employees has the need for group or shared Equipment/Services such as rotating on-call contact.
  • The employee does not have access to a landline or other communication device when doing a substantial portion of his or her job and communication with the supervisor or other Stanford business parties is required.
  • The employee's job effectiveness will show a significant increase through the use of Equipment/Services.
  • The Equipment/Services eliminate or reduce the need for the employee to go back and forth to the office, consistent with University goals to reduce traffic, benefit the environment and increase employee productivity.
  • Provision of Equipment/Services is the most cost-effective way to meet the business communication requirements of the mobile employee.
  • The Equipment/Services are necessary to support an off-site office, which is the employee's principal office for their Stanford work.

d. Personal Use of Equipment and Services
Provided that the Stanford business need for the service is significant and consistent over a substantial period of time, the personal use of Equipment/Services is not otherwise limited. However, the department and the employee's supervisor reserve the right to suspend provision of Equipment/Services in the case of excessive personal use.

Back to top

3. Proper Use and Selection

a. Mobile Equipment and Service Selection
The supervisor will determine the minimum cost Stanford IT plan available, and the appropriate level of Equipment to be provided, considering the features needed for business use. When a Stanford IT mobile program plan is not appropriate, the department may provide a stipend in the employee's paycheck to support the business use of the employee-provided Equipment/Services.

b. Use and Protection of University Provided Equipment and Services
Equipment paid for by Stanford is the property of the Stanford department that paid for it. When an employee leaves Stanford or transfers from one department to another, Equipment furnished to the employee must be returned to the issuing department. It is expected that Equipment paid for by Stanford, where appropriate and feasible, will be in the possession of the employee at all times and be functional during the employee's business day. Employees must take all necessary measures to protect the Equipment from theft or damage.

c. Laws and Policies Regulating Use of Equipment
The employee will be solely responsible for understanding and complying with all applicable laws and University policies relating to the use of Equipment/Services, including highway safety laws relating to cell phone and PDA usage, copyright laws, ergonomic use guidelines, privacy and security protocols and University export control and data security policies. See Guide Memo 6.3.1: Information Security.

d. Preference for Stanford IT-provided Equipment/Services
It is the responsibility of employees and their supervisors to make sure that Equipment purchased is appropriate for the technical support capabilities of the School or Department. Stanford IT-provided Equipment/Services should be used in nearly every case. The accumulation of campus-wide purchases enhances the buying power of Stanford IT and generally provides the lowest prices possible. A large common pool of Equipment is also easier for the University to maintain and account for.

e. Further Requirements of Particular Schools and Departments
Schools and Departments may establish local policies and procedures to further regulate or restrict the provision of Equipment/Services in their own units, if the University-wide policy is also followed.

Back to top

4. Implementation and Exceptions

a. Mobile Equipment and Services
If the supervisor has determined that the Stanford IT mobile program plan is not appropriate for the Equipment/Services required by an employee based on business necessity, the department may provide a stipend in the employee's paycheck to support the business use of employee-provided mobile Equipment/Services.

b. Administration of the Mobile Equipment/Services Paycheck Stipend
To receive a paycheck stipend, the Department HR Administrator may enter an employee cell phone supplement using the Supplemental Pay Webform with the Earnings Code of 'CEL'. The supplement may be entered to continue indefinitely, however, the business need for mobile Equipment/Services should be reviewed periodically by each employee's manager, or other financial staff in the business unit. Employees may be approved to receive a stipend of up to $25 monthly.

c. Internet Services
If the supervisor has determined that the employee is required to have home internet service to fulfill job requirements, and it has been determined that it is a financial hardship for the employee to do so, the department may provide a stipend in the employee's paycheck to support the business use of home internet services.

d. Administration of the Home Internet Equipment/Services Paycheck Stipend
With approval from the responsible Vice Provost, Vice President, Dean, or his/her designee, an employee who is required to have home Internet service to fulfill job requirements and who has demonstrated financial hardship may receive a paycheck supplement. A template that may be used for documentation is available here

Upon approval, the paycheck supplement may be requested by contacting HR Transaction Services at hractions@stanford.edu. The request should include the employees name, employee ID number and evidence of approval. Supplements must be reauthorized each fiscal year, following the same request process. Employees may be approved to receive a supplement of up to $35 monthly.

Back to top

8.2.1 University Events

Last updated on:
09/01/2002
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
82.1

This Guide Memo summarizes policy on University events held on University property. More detailed information is located at the Office of Special Events & Protocol.  

Authority: 

This Guide Memo was approved by the President.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to all University faculty, staff and students.

1. Definition

A University event is an event, other than academic classes scheduled as part of the curriculum, that is held in a University building or outdoor space on the University campus. All such events that take place on the Stanford campus are considered University events. A University event must also be sponsored by an officially recognized Stanford department or organization and must be in keeping with the University's mission (i.e., the creation, preservation, and dissemination of knowledge).

Back to top

2. Types of University Events

NOTE: Some types of events may overlap. If you have questions, please contact the Stanford Events Office at: (650) 723-2551. Events must be consistent with the University's mission and must relate directly to the educational goals of the sponsoring department or organization.

  • Academic-related Event
    An academic-related activity that is NOT included in the established curriculum of quarterly classes listed at Stanford (e.g., special guest lecture series, panel discussion)
  • Administrative Event
    An administrative event, including a daily, weekly or occasional gathering and/or meeting by an official department or registered group that would not be open to the public, (e.g., a department faculty meeting, gathering of department staff, a student group board of directors meeting). The focus of these meetings is generally to discuss department or group business and/or do administrative planning. It may include professional training. These gatherings may also be social in nature (e.g., department luncheon, picnic, reception or holiday party).
  • High Impact Event
    An event that is large in scope, usually with an expected attendance of 500 people or more. Such events generally require coordination and review by several University departments and organizations (e.g., Stanford Events, Public Safety and Risk Management)
  • Campus Community Event
    An event open only to Stanford students, faculty and staff. This may also qualify as a High Impact, Invitation-only, Administrative or Academic-related event.
  • Public Event
    An event open to Stanford students, faculty, staff, and members of the public. A Public Event can also be considered an Academic-related Event and/or a High Impact Event.
  • Invitation-only Event
    An event open only to invited guests (e.g., University donor or alumni events, administrative or special-program events).

Back to top

3. Scheduling and Approval Process

The process of scheduling and seeking approval for University events must be started in advance. Those approving and planning events must follow all Stanford policies listed in this Guide Memo and at the Stanford Events website.

a. Organizations that May Request Use of Facilities
Organizations that may request use of University indoor and outdoor spaces and facilities for University events are:

  • Academic departments
  • Administrative offices
  • The Associated Students of Stanford University (ASSU)
  • Voluntary student organizations that are registered with the University through the Office of Student Activities (OSA)
  • Student living groups
  • Any other organizations officially recognized by the President's Office

b. Most Facilities Usage Approvals
University events at all locations except those noted in section 3.c below must be scheduled and approved in advance by the Registrar's Scheduling Office, which will determine the availability of spaces and facilities and coordinate any necessary event approvals with the Stanford Events Director of Public Events.

c. Facilities Usage Requiring Other Approvals
To use the following facilities/spaces, follow the local approval process:

  • Administrative or Academic-related Events with a Department—Those department Administrative or Academic-related Events utilizing the already-established building space of that sponsoring department (e.g., GSB administrative staff having a weekly planning meeting in one of the Business School's classrooms, a special History Department panel discussion utilizing a History Department classroom) should follow the department's internal process.
  • Cantor Arts Center—Contact the Center directly to discuss use of interior and exterior museum spaces and docent tour arrangements for events.
  • DAPER Facilities—For an official athletic event sponsored by the Department of Athletics, Physical Education and Recreation (DAPER) (e.g., football, basketball, baseball season games or special DAPER sponsored tournaments) contact DAPER and follow its approval process.
  • Student Residences Events—Events conducted in student residences by students residing in those residences are subject to the policies and procedures put forth by the Office of Student Activities (OSA).
  • Summer Conferences—The procedure for initiating requests for summer conference use of facilities is described in Guide Memo 8.2.2: Conferences.
  • (Applicable if the event is to be held between the conclusion of spring quarter and prior to the beginning of the following fall quarter.)
  • Tresidder Memorial Union—For the use of space located in the Tresidder Memorial Union buildingfor conferences and special events for the campus community (and, in some cases, outside organizations), contact Tresidder Meeting Services.
  • Schwab Residential Center—Contact the Center directly for event reservations.
  • Frances C. Arrillaga Alumni Center—See the Alumni Center website for information.

Back to top

4. Other Information Sources

Back to top

8.2.2 Conferences

Last updated on:
12/01/2000
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
82.2

This Guide Memo offers guidance to departments considering sponsoring a conference at Stanford.

Authority: 

This Guide Memo was approved by the President.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to all conferences held on University property.

1. Conference Policy

a. Approval
Policies concerning conferences are the responsibility of the offices of the President and Provost. The President has delegated approval for specific events as indicated in Guide Memo 8.2.1: University Events, and in the Public Events Policy and Practice Manual described in Guide Memo 8.2.1.

b. Relationship to University Program
University facilities may be used for conferences that are closely related to the University program. The University officer approving the event (either the Conference Services Manager or the Director of Stanford Events, as described in Guide Memo 8.2.1) determines whether the event is related to the University program. Conferences may be arranged by schools, departments, and other University organizations. Outside academic organizations such as professional societies, faculty groups, and certain student groups may hold conferences at Stanford. Business and professional organizations may hold conferences at Stanford if their programs relate to the academic activities of the University. Conference participants usually must be affiliated with the sponsoring organization or be invited by the organization to register and attend.

c. Sponsorship
Conferences must be sponsored by a school or department of the University. Outside organizations must obtain the sponsorship of an appropriate University dean or department head before requesting a conference.

d. Coordination Responsibility
Coordination of conferences is divided between two offices, depending on the date of the event:
(1) Summer conferences (June 16 through September 14): Conference Office
(2) Academic year conferences (September 15 through June 15): Stanford Events

Back to top

2. Conference Arrangements

a. Departmental Sponsor
The dean or department head of the school or department sponsoring a conference designates a faculty or staff member to represent the school or department as sponsor of the event. The initiation of the conference proposal, and all transactions with the conference organizers concerning arrangements, fees and curriculum are handled through the individual designated as departmental sponsor.

b. Conference Request
Sponsoring departments submit requests for approval through the office coordinating the conference (see 1.d above). A conference request should provide as much information as is known at the time the request is made, and should include the name of the sponsoring organization, its conference chair-person, proposed dates, length of the conference, estimated number of participants and, for summer conferences only, desired housing and food service.

c. Review Process
The Manager of Conference Services or the Director of Stanford Events reviews requests for open dates and available facilities, as well as to determine that meetings are consistent with the University's fundamental mission of teaching, research and public service.

d. Notifications
After a conference has been approved, the coordinating office notifies the department and sponsor and informs other University organizations as necessary.

e. Planning Session
The coordinating office arranges a planning session with the department sponsor and the organization's conference chairperson. Specific arrangements for meeting rooms, equipment, housing, food and related services are discussed at this meeting.

f. Conference Accounting
The sponsoring department identifies the need for opening any new accounts to record conference income and expense, and makes arrangements with the appropriate office to have these accounts set up.

Back to top

3. Conference Facilities

The coordinating office provides detailed information about meeting rooms, catering, equipment and other University services and facilities.

Back to top

4. Summer Housing

Summer housing in Stanford student residences is available to conferees, visitors and guests on the Sunday following commencement until approximately August 31. Accommodations include residence buildings with food service and one-, two-, and three-bedroom student apartments. Contact the Conference Office for detailed descriptions and information regarding restrictions, available space and current rates.

Back to top

8.3.1 Capital Projects

Last updated on:
03/15/2009
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
83

This Guide Memo describes Stanford University policy on initiating facilities and infrastructure projects under the authority of Land and Buildings, including specific information on the allocation, siting and management of modular buildings, trailers and storage containers on campus. This Guide Memo also addresses University funding of capital projects, including the application of the Stanford Infrastructure Program (SIP) assessment and the General Use Permit (GUP) Entitlement Fee to fund mitigation costs arising from the approval of the December 2000 Community Plan and the General Use Permit.

Authority: 

This Guide Memo was approved by the Provost.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to all University capital projects.

1. Facilities Project Initiation

a. Form 1 Required for Capital Projects
All requests for academic facilities and infrastructure projects on the Stanford University campus and/or in Stanford off-campus properties are required to be submitted electronically on a Form 1 prior to the project's start. Stanford Management Company's off-campus projects, Hospital projects, and SLAC National Accelerator Laboratory projects do not require a Form 1 unless University funding or facilities are involved. Projects requiring a jurisdictional permit and plan check generally will require a Form 1. Projects requiring only over-the-counter permits may not require a Form 1.

The Form 1 is required for the following, regardless of project size, cost or funding source:

  • New construction,
  • Renovation,
  • Demolitions,
  • Interior building changes,
  • Projects that affect building exteriors,
  • Landscape projects,
  • Land use projects,
  • Capital Utilities Program (CUP),
  • Stanford Infrastructure Projects (SIP), and
  • General Use Permit (GUP) projects.

A detailed list of project types requiring a Form 1 is found at the Land, Buildings and Real Estate website. The Form 1 request process enables Land and Buildings to:

  • Evaluate program scope, justification and priority;
  • Assess and confirm the resources that are available (through the Controller's Office);
  • Ensure that campus planning, code, architectural and aesthetic considerations are reviewed;
  • Ensure that Stanford's Project Delivery Process is followed (see Capital Planning for detailed information on the process); and
  • Request a PTA (Project/Task/Award) setup in Oracle allowing contracts and expenditures to commence.

b. Process
The Form 1 process is initiated by local facilities representatives before a project begins, is then approved within the School/Department, and is finally submitted electronically on the Land and Buildings website. Detailed approval guidelines, at various project cost levels, are outlined in detail on the Form 1 website.

Back to top

2. Modular Buildings and Trailers

a. New Modulars and Trailers
For reasons of cost effectiveness, sustainability and campus aesthetics, modulars and trailers are generally discouraged as a Stanford University building type. However, there are times when modulars are appropriate for temporary use on campus.

b. Process
Proposals to install new modulars and trailers need to be submitted using Capital Planning's Space Request Form and approved by the Provost. This form is required prior to initiating the Form 1 process, regardless of modular or trailer size, proposed length of use, purpose, cost, location, or source of funding. The cost and installation of new modulars and trailers generally are the responsibility of the local area.

Siting of all modulars and trailers must be approved by the Stanford University Architect/Planning Office.

Detailed policies on modular buildings and trailers can be found on the Capital Planning website.

Back to top

3. Storage Containers

a. Definition
Storage containers are freestanding metal boxes used for a variety of stored materials. They are centrally located in the storage container yard and adjacent area on Stockfarm Road. Locating containers in other areas of the campus must be approved in advance by the Stanford University Architect/Planning Office.

b. Process
Proposals for the installation of new containers and moving existing storage containers need to be submitted on Capital Planning's Space Request Form for approval by the Provost. This form is required prior to initiating the Form 1 process, regardless of container size, cost, proposed length of use or source of funding. The cost and installation of new containers is the responsibility of the local area. Units wishing to relinquish or move containers also must inform Capital Planning in advance. The cost and removal of containers is the responsibility of the local area.

Siting of all storage containers must be approved by the Stanford University Architect/Planning Office.

Detailed policies on storage containers can be found on the Capital Planning website.

Back to top

4. Stanford Infrastructure Program (SIP) Assessment

The Stanford Infrastructure Program (SIP) consists of projects and programs proposed and developed for the betterment and general support of the University's academic community and its physical plant. The infrastructure system directly supports the academic missions of teaching and research and the overall vitality of the institution. This infrastructure will be developed as necessary to improve public safety and service and to promote conservation in land use and resources.

a. Assessment
A 4.6% Stanford Infrastructure Program assessment is applied to all expenditures within capital projects (including new buildings, renovations, deferred maintenance projects and the Capital Utilities Program), regardless of size, funding or management. No assessments will be taken on SIP-funded or GUP Entitlement Fee funded projects, or software application programs.

b. Project Eligibility
Any academic or auxiliary program may identify a need for a potential SIP project and seek SIP funding by submitting a project request to either the Planning Office (SIP-C) or the Transportation Office (SIP-T) as appropriate. Each request must represent a project that will provide benefits to more than a single campus user, group, or building and each will be evaluated against the following general criteria:

  • Improves the overall quality of the campus environment,
  • Satisfies a particular academic or auxiliary program need,
  • Reduces total capital and operating budget expenses,
  • Fulfills a safety and/or security need,
  • Relates to and supports campus planning objectives,
  • Provides a renewal of a deteriorating infrastructure asset(s),
  • Responds to governmental agency requirements.

c. More information
See the resources listed at the end of this Memo.

Back to top

5. General Use Permit (GUP) Entitlement Fee

The GUP Entitlement Fee provides funding for the mitigation of projects and programs (Conditions of Approval) required by Santa Clara County as a result of the December 2000 Community Plan and GUP approval. The projects and programs required include infrastructure and environmental resource studies, a comprehensive water conservation program, transportation demand management, habitat conservation, and consultant monitoring of mitigation compliance. Additionally, GUP Entitlement Fees fund the cost of roadway expansions, new parking, and expanded childcare facilities.

a. Assessment
A General Use Permit (GUP) Entitlement Fee is assessed on increases in School/Department gross square footage regardless of total project value. Housing units are required as a component of the GUP and are thus excluded from the GUP Entitlement Fee.

The entitlement fee structure is based upon the present net value of projected mitigation costs, as described above. The fee will be set on a rolling three-year basis consistent with the Capital Plan and may be revised periodically. The GUP Entitlement Fees for fiscal years 2004, 2005, and 2006 are $70, $72, and $74, respectively.

b. Space Audit
Although increases in School/Department square footage typically result from the construction of a new building, a variety of other factors may impact the square footage calculation to derive net incremental program growth. Any project that results in additional square footage will be subject to a space audit to determine the total amount of growth. The audit will consider a combination of space movements, including, but not limited to, space demolitions, vacated and reassigned space, and inherited space.

All space changes are subject to the approval of the Provost.

Back to top

6. Funding Policy

All capital projects, regardless of total project budget, must have funding in hand or an approved backstopping plan prior to commencing construction.

a. Projects under $3 million
Project funding is identified via the Form 1 process and is transferred to an account established by the Controller's Office. Funding is provided according to the level of project approval.

b. Projects over $3 million
Capital projects with total value of $3 million or greater must obtain several levels of approval from the Committee on Land and Buildings of the Board of Trustees. A percentage increment of the total project budget is transferred to the account by the Controller's Office at each Board-required approval level. Approval levels include Concept, Project, and Construction for building renovations; and Concept/Site, Design, Project, and Construction for new buildings. All projects presented to the Committee on Land and Buildings must have an executed Funding Plan prior to the request for Concept Approval, and an executed Funding Agreement no later than the request for Construction Approval.

Infrastructure programs with program funding identified (e.g., the Capital Utilities Program, Stanford Infrastructure Program, GUP Entitlement Fee program) generally do not need separate funding plans and agreements; however, individual projects exceeding $3 million may require approval from the Board of Trustees.

The Funding Plan outlines the benchmarked project budget, the planned funding sources, and the estimated amounts from each funding source. Funding Plans are subject to revision if the project experiences significant changes in project scope or budget during the design phase. The Funding Plan addresses the budget responsibility for finance charges during construction, as well as debt servicing or gift backstopping provisions after construction completion. The Funding Plan also addresses restrictions on the use of tax-exempt debt. The Funding Plan stipulates if a project is subject to a GUP Entitlement Fee.

Back to top

7. Sources of More Information

Back to top

8.4.1 Vehicle Acquisition, Ownership and Disposition

Last updated on:
08/11/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
85.1

This Guide Memo discusses the administrative procedures for acquisition, ownership and disposition of University vehicles. Additional information is available at vehicles.stanford.edu.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer, and the Vice President for Land, Buildings and Real Estate.

Applicability: 

Applies to all motor vehicles, boats, golf cart-type vehicles and trailers owned, leased or otherwise acquired by the University ("University vehicles").

Exception: Government-owned SLAC National Accelerator Laboratory (SLAC) vehicles are covered under a separate SLAC policy. Except for Section 6, "Insurance," SLAC vehicles are exempt from this policy.

1. Use of University Vehicles

University vehicles may be used only in connection with official University activities. See Guide Memo 8.4.2: Vehicle Use.

Back to top

2. Administrative Responsibilities

a. Academic or Administrative Organization
The academic or administrative organization ("organization") acquiring the vehicle is responsible for:

  • All charges associated with the vehicle, including loan or lease payments, maintenance, repairs, fuel, insurance, DMV fees, fines and penalties. Exception: Fines and penalties for infractions of the law are the personal responsibility of the driver. See Guide Memo 8.4.2: Vehicle Use.
  • Identifying a fleet manager in the organization ("local fleet manager") who will ensure compliance with this Guide Memo and with Guide Memo 8.4.2: Vehicle Use.

b. Local Fleet Manager
The local fleet manager is responsible for:

  • Ensuring that the vehicle is properly operated and maintained.
  • Keeping the vehicle and its keys secure and accounted for.
  • Maintaining the correct inventory record in the Sunflower Assets System.
  • Providing current vehicle information and contact information to the Fleet Garage for entry into the Land, Buildings and Real Estate (LBRE) maintenance management record-keeping system (see Section 2.b below).

c. Fleet Garage
The Supervisor of the Fleet Garage ("Garage Supervisor") is responsible for:

  • Developing and maintaining a list of vehicle-selection criteria, including minimum standard safety features, prohibited luxury features and sustainability considerations, and making the list readily available to local fleet managers and other Stanford community members. This list is maintained at vehicles.stanford.edu.
  • Developing specifications for each vehicle procurement request (see Section 4.c).
  • Processing Department of Motor Vehicles Registration Certificates for all street-legal vehicles.
  • Performing or supervising the maintenance and repair of vehicles, including recall notices (see Section 7).
  • Notifying the organization of charges for maintenance, repairs, fuel, insurance, DMV fees, fines and penalties.
  • Keeping accurate records in the LBRE maintenance management record-keeping system of vehicle inventory information, contact information, preventive maintenance schedules, repairs, recalls and all vehicle-related charges to academic and administrative organizations.
  • Assisting in the vehicle disposal process (see Section 9).

d. Purchasing
The Purchasing Office negotiates prices for, issues purchase orders for and purchases vehicles costing more than $25,000 on receipt of an organization's requisition that meets the requirements of Section 4.

e. Risk Management
Risk Management handles insurance matters for University vehicles.

f. Controller's Office
The Controller's Office administers University financing for vehicles.

g. Property Management Office (PMO)
PMO provides inventory tools and assists with vehicle disposal.

Back to top

3. Vehicles Acquisition Methods

A University organization may acquire a new or used vehicle using any of the following methods:

a. Acquisition with University Funds
Vehicles may be purchased or leased with regularly budgeted general funds, as with any purchase of capital equipment. If a purchase is financed, University policy requires that the purchase price be amortized over the useful life of the vehicle. See Guide Memo 5.2.1: Financing of Purchases.

b. Acquisition with Government Funds
Vehicles may be acquired with funds provided by a U.S. government contract or grant if its terms permit. The procedures in Section 4 apply.

c. Acquisition by Gift
Vehicles may be given to the University. The organization must record the donation in the Sunflower Assets System. See Guide Memo 4.2.3: Records of Donated Equipment.

d. Acquisition through Surplus Property Sales
Vehicles may be acquired through Surplus Property Sales using the procedures in Section 4.

e. Transfer
Transfers within or between academic and administrative organizations are at the discretion of the organization(s) involved. They may also occur when one organization releases a vehicle to the Fleet Garage that meets another organization's needs (see Section 9.b.1).

Back to top

4. Vehicle Acquisition Process

a. Business Purpose for Vehicle
Each vehicle acquired shall meet a valid University business purpose. Valid University business purpose for acquiring golf cart-type vehicles is limited to: 1) transporting personnel, equipment or supplies on campus for University purposes; 2) transporting employees or students with temporary or permanent disability-related needs; or 3) transporting members of the Stanford community using 5-SURE Security Escorts.

b. Replacement Schedule
As a general guide, a vehicle should be considered for replacement on a seven-year or 60,000-mile basis, whichever comes first. Medium- and heavy-duty vehicles, as defined by the California Health & Safety Code, may be retained over a longer term.

c. Development of Specifications
Each organization considering the acquisition of a vehicle must provide the valid business purpose for the vehicle to the Garage Supervisor. The Garage Supervisor provides mechanical specifications based on the business purpose and provides a cost estimate.

d. Requisition
To purchase or lease a vehicle not owned by the University, the requesting organization prepares an online requisition that includes the following approvers: 1) the Garage Supervisor; and 2) the appropriate dean, department head or other authorized signer. If the total cost of the vehicle exceeds $25,000, the requesting organization forwards the specifications and price estimates prepared by the Garage Supervisor to Purchasing, which issues a purchase order for the vehicle. See Guide Memo 5.3.1: Requisition Processing.

e. Suitability of Surplus Vehicles
If an organization is contemplating acquiring a University vehicle from Surplus Property Sales, the organization should consult with the previous local fleet manager and the Garage Supervisor for information on the vehicle's condition, and should have the consent of the Garage Supervisor before acquiring the vehicle. If the vehicle is suitable for use, an interdepartmental transfer takes place. The acquiring organization compensates Surplus Property Sales for any expenses it has incurred.

f. Preference for Electric and Alternative-Fuel Vehicles
The Fleet Garage recommends electric and alternative-fuel vehicles whenever possible. Before purchasing an electric vehicle, the organization should contact LBRE/Parking & Transportation Services (PTS) and University Architect/Campus Planning & Design (UA/CPD) to determine the location of the nearest charging station.

g. Reducing Number of Vehicles
Organizations with multiple vehicles should explore the feasibility of placing them in an organization-wide motor pool to reduce their number of vehicles. Organizations with limited need for vehicles may establish an account with the car-sharing company on campus or may collaborate with neighboring organizations to establish regional motor pools. The Fleet Garage can assist with the establishment of motor pools.

Back to top

5. Placing a Vehicle Into Service

Every vehicle acquired by any organization must be delivered to the Fleet Garage before the organization uses it.

a. Registration
All street-legal vehicles, including street-legal golf cart-type vehicles, must be registered with the DMV. Vehicles are registered at the dealership in the name of The Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University and using the address of the Fleet Garage. The Fleet Garage will assist in registering vehicles purchased outside of California. Exception: Vehicles purchased with government funds and for which the sponsor retains title are registered in the name of the government agency that supplied the funds, in care of the Board of Trustees.

b. Inspection
The Garage Supervisor inspects the vehicle to ensure specifications are met. If the vehicle is used, the Garage Supervisor determines whether it needs any immediate maintenance.

c. Inventory
The Garage Supervisor assigns the vehicle a University fleet number and tags the vehicle with a Stanford University property tag. The Garage Supervisor enters the fleet number and property tag number into the LBRE maintenance management record-keeping system. When the organization receives the vehicle, it enters the fleet number and property tag number into the Sunflower Assets system. If the vehicle is transferred to another organization within the University, the fleet number and property tag number do not change. The organization receiving a transferred vehicle updates the numbers in the Sunflower Assets system. The numbers are retired when the vehicle is disposed of.

d. Sign
The Garage Supervisor instructs the Sign Shop to apply a Stanford University logo and, where applicable, the name of the organization on the vehicle. This is the only sign permitted on the vehicle; others will be removed at the organization's expense. Exceptions: Specialized markings are permitted on Marguerite shuttles and Department of Public Safety vehicles. The Garage Supervisor may authorize additional exceptions.

Back to top

6. Insurance

Risk Management immediately obtains public liability insurance on all newly acquired University vehicles, including those where title is in the name of a government agency, in care of the Board of Trustees. Exception: Stanford's Marguerite shuttle buses are insured by the shuttle service provider. Insurance policies are renewed for all vehicles owned at the beginning of the fiscal year (September 1), and the organization is billed accordingly.

Back to top

7. Maintenance

a. Role of Fleet Garage
The Fleet Garage performs or approves all maintenance and repairs for University vehicles that are regularly housed within 15 miles of campus. The organization must get written approval in advance from the Fleet Garage to use another service provider. When approved to use another service provider, the organization must ensure the maintenance is performed in a timely manner and provide the Fleet Garage with written records of the maintenance within one week of its completion. The Fleet Garage provides maintenance guidelines for vehicles serviced off campus, including all vehicles housed more than 15 miles from campus.

b. Preventive Maintenance
Organizations must ensure that internal combustion vehicles receive preventive maintenance inspections every four months. Organizations must make electric vehicles available in the field for monthly inspections and ensure that they receive annual preventive maintenance inspections at the Fleet Garage. The Fleet Garage notifies the organization of required periodic preventive maintenance appointments.

c. Other Maintenance
The organization must keep its vehicles clean. Body damage must be repaired promptly by making arrangements with the Fleet Garage.

d. Disabled Vehicles
If a vehicle becomes disabled, the organization must notify the Fleet Garage immediately.

e. Recalls
The Fleet Garage receives manufacturers' recall notices and notifies the organization of recalls. The organization must make arrangements with the Fleet Garage to have recalls addressed.

f. Consequences of Failure to Maintain
If the organization fails to have maintenance or repairs performed on a vehicle after a second notice from the Fleet Garage, the Fleet Garage may retrieve the vehicle from the organization to perform the maintenance or repairs.

Back to top

8. Fuel

a. Gas and Oil
Whenever possible, organizations should obtain gas and oil for University vehicles at the University's service station at the rear of Bonair Siding. If a University vehicle is taken on an extended business trip, gasoline credit cards may be issued on the authorization of the Director of  Operations (Buildings and Grounds Maintenance).

b. Electric Vehicle Charging Stations
PTS, in coordination with the UA/CPD,  is responsible for identifying appropriate locations for charging stations and their installation. New facilities should identify locations for vehicle-charging stations during planning.

Back to top

9. Disposition of Vehicles

a. Disposition Process
An organization disposing of a vehicle must process an Excess Request in the Sunflower Assets System and deliver the vehicle to the Fleet Garage. PMO processes the Excess Request and the Fleet Garage updates the LBRE maintenance management record-keeping system according to the ultimate disposition method for the vehicle.

b. Disposition Methods

1) Transfer Within the University
If the vehicle is roadworthy and is expected to have sufficient useful life remaining to benefit another organization, the Garage Supervisor examines vehicle acquisition requests to see if the vehicle meets another organization's needs. If the Garage Supervisor is able to arrange a transfer of the vehicle, he or she notifies PMO, which ensures that the appropriate Department Property Administrator(s) are notified and the property records updated. PMO also terminates the Excess Request. If the vehicle is leased, the organization must notify the Department of Capital Accounting in the Controller's Office, which ensures that the remaining lease payments are properly charged.

2) Disposition Through Surplus Property Sales
If the vehicle is roadworthy and is not being transferred within the University, the Fleet Garage retires the vehicle from the University fleet, sends it to Surplus Property Sales to be sold and, upon sale, notifies DMV. The portion of the proceeds representing return of capital is credited to the University account that financed the purchase. Any gain realized by the organization from the sale is credited to the account used in the acquisition of the replacement vehicle, or to the general organization operating account if the vehicle is not replaced.

If an organization acquires a vehicle from Surplus Property Sales, the vehicle is returned to the Fleet Garage to have a University logo and the old fleet number reaffixed. The original property tag remains intact.

3) Scrap
If the vehicle is not roadworthy, the Fleet Garage arranges for it to be scrapped, forwards the appropriate junk slips to DMV and notifies PMO to ensure proper record retirements can take place.

c. Special Cases

1) Government-owned Vehicles
If title to the vehicle is held by a government agency in care of the Board of Trustees, the organization must contact PMO for information on disposal options. See Guide Memo 5.2.4: Surplus Property Sales.

2) Donated Vehicles
If the vehicle was donated to the University, the organization must contact PMO for information on disposal options. See Guide Memo 4.2.3: Records of Donated Equipment.

3) Leased Vehicles
Unless a leased vehicle is being transferred within the University, the Fleet Garage returns the vehicle to the lessor and notifies PMO to have the records retired. The organization must satisfy the lease contract terms, including all remaining payments.

4) Vehicles with Active Loans
If the vehicle is under the terms of a University financial loan, the organization must notify the Department of Capital Accounting in the Controller's Office of the disposition. The Department of Capital Accounting ensures that the remaining loan payments are properly charged.

Back to top

8.4.2 Vehicle Use

Last updated on:
12/20/2012
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
85.2

This Guide Memo outlines policies on the authorized use and operation of vehicles in connection with official University activities. Additional information is available at vehicles.stanford.edu.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs & Chief Financial Officer.

Applicability: 

Applies to all faculty, staff, students, volunteers and others authorized to drive in connection with official University activities ("authorized drivers").

Exceptions:

  1. The use of government-owned SLAC National Accelerator Laboratory (SLAC) vehicles is covered under a separate SLAC policy. SLAC vehicles may not be used for official University activities and are therefore exempt from this policy. This policy does apply to the use of University, personal or rented vehicles on SLAC business.
  2. The use of Stanford University Golf Course golf carts on the golf course is exempt from this policy.

1. Driver Authorization

a. Requirements
A driver may operate a vehicle in connection with official University activities only if he or she meets all of the following criteria:

  • Is using the vehicle for a valid business purpose.
  • Meets the driver's license requirements of Section 1.b below.
  • Has signed all applicable agreements described in Section 1.d below.
  • Is 21 years of age or older. If there is no alternative driver, an individual who is age 18 or over may drive a vehicle in connection with an official University activity with the approval of the applicable academic or administrative organization ("organization").
  • Completes the vehicle sign-out records described in Section 3.c below when driving University vehicles as defined in Guide Memo 8.4.1: Vehicle Acquisition, Ownership and Disposition.
  • Meets the insurance requirements described in Section 7.b below when driving personal vehicles.

b. Driver's License
(1) License Requirement

Each person who drives a vehicle in connection with official University activities must have a valid California driver's license.
Exceptions:
a) An authorized driver who is conducting official University activities outside of California may have a driver's license from that jurisdiction.
b) Enrolled students with a valid driver's license from their state or other jurisdiction of residence and any other driver with a valid driver's license from other jurisdictions who is permitted to drive using such license under California laws.

(2) Loss of License/Change in Status
Authorized drivers are prohibited from driving in connection with official University activities if their license is revoked, suspended or expired, or their driving privileges are otherwise restricted. Employees who drive in connection with official University activities are required to report a change in driver's license status immediately to their supervisors. Non-employees must report a change in driver's license status to the organization on whose behalf they are authorized to drive.

c. Driving as a Job Requirement
(1) Include Driving in Job Descriptions

Jobs that require driving University vehicles shall include in the job description: a) the driving requirement, and b) the necessity to possess and maintain the appropriate driver's license.
(2) Employees Who Are Unable to Drive
If an employee's job requires the employee to drive a University vehicle as part of his/her duties and the employee's license is suspended or restricted in a way that prevents the performance of driving duties, the employee will be subject to termination and the University will have no obligation to transfer the employee to another position. Exception: The University will meet any obligation to reasonably accommodate a disability.

d. Signed Agreements
Employees who drive University vehicles and employees who drive personal vehicles in connection with official University activities more than 20 hours per month, must complete and sign all of the following before driving in connection with official University activities:
(1) A written agreement to comply with all provisions of this policy and all provisions of Guide Memo 2.2.8: Controlled Substances and Alcohol, available here.  
(2) Risk Management's Driver Authorization Forms and the DMV's Employer Pull Notice Program Authorization for Release of Driver Record Information. These forms are available at the Risk Management Department
(3) The organization's vehicle use procedures.

Back to top

2. Local Fleet Manager

a. Designation
Each organization that uses vehicles in connection with official University activities will identify a local fleet manager. The local fleet manager will ensure compliance with the organization's vehicle use procedures, this Guide Memo and Guide Memo 8.4.1: Vehicle Acquisition, Ownership and Disposition for all vehicles used by the organization.

b. Establishing Vehicle Use Procedures
The local fleet manager will establish a written procedure for the organization that describes who may drive vehicles in connection with the organization's official University activities and under what circumstances. This procedure may be more restrictive than this Guide Memo, but may not be less restrictive.

c. Maintaining Drivers' Records
The local fleet manager will obtain and maintain copies of all signed agreements listed under Section 1.d above. Driver's license numbers are Prohibited Information under Stanford's data classification guidelines, and must be stored in a secure, locked location.

d. Confirming Status of Driver's Licenses
Unless the University has enrolled a driver in the DMV's Employer Pull Notice Program, the local fleet manager will confirm annually that
employees who drive University vehicles and employees who drive personal vehicles in connection with official University activities more than 20 hours per month do not have expired, revoked, suspended or restricted drivers licenses.

e. Monitoring Sign-out Records
At least monthly, the local fleet manager will review the organization's sign-out records described in Section 3.c to ensure that University vehicles are being used only for business purposes.

Back to top

3. Use of University Vehicles

a. Official Trips Only
University vehicles may be used only in connection with official University activities. Except for authorized overnight trips as described in Section 3.b, University vehicles may not be used for personal or other incidental trips at any time.

b. Overnight Trips
University vehicles may only be taken home at night or used on overnight trips with prior written approval by the head of the organization or his/her designee, including approval of the specific business purpose for such use of the vehicle.

c. Sign-out Records
Each organization will maintain records that track University vehicle usage, and each driver must complete the records each time he/she checks out a vehicle. The records shall include the name of the driver, the times the vehicle was checked out and returned, and the specific business purpose for using the vehicle. Exception: The organization may use a different procedure to maintain appropriate records of University vehicles assigned to a single employee for his or her exclusive use.

d. Maintenance Needs
Drivers of University vehicles shall report all vehicle damage and problems with the vehicle's operation to the local fleet manager immediately. University policies on maintenance and fuel are set forth in Guide Memo 8.4.1: Vehicle Acquisition, Ownership and Disposition.

e. Smoking Prohibited
Smoking is not allowed in University vehicles at any time.

Back to top

4. Use of Golf Cart-Type Vehicles

In addition to the other provisions in this Guide Memo, the following provisions apply to the use of golf cart-type vehicles.

a. Valid Business Purpose
Valid business purpose for golf cart-type vehicles is limited to:

  • Transporting personnel/equipment/supplies for University purposes.
  • Transporting employees/students with temporary or permanent disability-related needs.
  • Transporting members of the Stanford community using 5-SURE Security Escorts.

Student use of golf cart-type vehicles for personal transportation, other than for disability-related need or 5-SURE Security Escorts, is prohibited on campus.

b. Approved Areas on Campus
Operation of golf cart-type vehicles is limited to designated streets and paths on the University campus. See the University's Service and Delivery Map for approved routes. 

c. Prohibited Areas on Campus
Golf cart-type vehicles may not be operated on landscaped or other unpaved surfaces. The following areas are off-limits:

  • Inner quad courtyard of the Main Quad complex.
  • All covered arcades (e.g., in the Main Quad, Green Library, Old Union).

Exception: Use of golf cart-type vehicles in these restricted areas is permitted in cases of medical need and for deliveries if no other access is available. Use of golf cart-type vehicles is also permitted on unpaved surfaces at Jasper Ridge Biological Preserve, as permitted by the Jasper Ridge Administrative Director.

d. Parking
Parking is allowed only on hard, covered surfaces (e.g., asphalt, concrete, brick). The following are prohibited:

  • Parking on soft surfaces such as landscaping, unpaved surfaces, tanbark-covered areas or within the drip line of any tree, unless those areas are specifically marked as golf-cart parking.
  • Blocking entrances to buildings, stairways, disability ramps or main thoroughfares.
  • Chaining vehicles to trees.

If the vehicle becomes disabled and is parked in an improper location, the driver should leave a note on the vehicle indicating its problem to alert Public Safety that the vehicle is receiving attention.

e. Operation off Campus
The local fleet manager must approve the off-campus use of golf cart-type vehicles. The driver must be familiar with the California Vehicle Code provisions governing the operation of golf cart-type vehicles on municipal streets, or contact Public Safety for information.

f. Speed Limits
Drivers shall not exceed speed limits for motorized vehicles, and must reduce speed in pedestrian areas. In crowded pedestrian areas, drivers must park vehicles or proceed at a slow walking pace, if safe.

g. Passenger Limit and Load Capacity
Drivers shall not exceed the passenger limit and load capacity designated by the vehicle's manufacturer.

h. Safety
Drivers and passengers must keep their head, legs and arms within the passenger compartment.

i. Charging
Electric vehicles will be recharged only at locations designated for such use. Use of extension cords from inside buildings to vehicles is prohibited.

j. Enforcement
Public Safety enforces the laws and policies governing operation of golf cart-type vehicles and may cite drivers for violations. Improperly parked vehicles may be ticketed, towed, "booted" or otherwise disabled by Public Safety.

Back to top

5. Safety

a. General
Vehicles may not be operated in a manner that may endanger passengers or other individuals or harm Stanford University.

b. No Operation of Unsafe Vehicles
Vehicles with a known safety-related problem may not be operated in connection with official University activities.

c. Seat Belt Requirement
The driver and all passengers must wear seat belts, except in golf cart-type vehicles that are not equipped with them.

d. Tying Down Tools
All tools being transported in a University vehicle must be secured.

Back to top

6. Accidents

a. Initial Accident Reports
Drivers must report all accidents involving University vehicles or personal or rented vehicles being used in connection with official University activities as soon as possible to local law enforcement and to the driver's supervisor. For on-campus accidents, the Department of Public Safety is the appropriate law enforcement agency. Injuries that need prompt medical attention must be reported to 911.

b. No Admission of Liability
The driver shall not jeopardize the University's position regarding its insurance by admitting fault or liability, nor shall any reimbursement or other payment be offered or made. The driver is expected to cooperate with any internal investigation of the accident.

c. Information to Gather
At the time of the accident, the driver must note the following information and give it to his or her supervisor:

  • Nature and extent of the damage to vehicles and other property.
  • Name and address of the legal owner of the other vehicle or vehicles, if any.
  • Name, address, driver's license number and state, and date of birth of the driver of the other vehicle or vehicles, if any.
  • License number, make and model of the other vehicle or vehicles, if any.
  • Name of the insurance company of any other driver or drivers, policy number and expiration date, and policy holder's name and address.
  • Time, place and date of the accident.
  • Names and addresses of anyone injured and description of injuries.
  • Names and addresses of any passengers and other witnesses.

d. Supervisor's Responsibilities
The driver's supervisor is responsible for reporting the information gathered in Section 6.c to Risk Management. (See Guide Memo 7.6.1: Accident and Incident Reporting.

e. Medical Costs
Faculty and staff who have been authorized to drive in connection with official University activities may be eligible for Workers' Compensation benefits, including costs of medical treatment, hospitalization and partial compensation for time lost from work. (See Guide Memos 2.1.7: Sick Time, and 2.3.5: Disability and Family Leaves.

Back to top

7. Insurance

a. University Vehicles
Stanford's liability insurance program provides protection to authorized drivers of University vehicles. Stanford self-insures for collision, fire, theft and liability. When an accident is due to an authorized driver's negligence, the organization usually pays the first $1,000 in vehicle repair costs. See Guidelines for University Vehicles, Rentals, Accident Reporting and Personal Vehicles

b. Personal Vehicles
(1) Required Insurance

Individuals who drive personal vehicles more than 20 hours per month in connection with official University activities must have the following minimum insurance coverage: bodily injury coverage of $100,000 per person and $300,000 per accident and $100,000 for property damage, or $300,000 combined single limit. (Note: These minimum insurance coverages are strongly recommended for individuals who drive personal vehicles in connection with official University activities less than 20 hours per month.) Any other individual driving a personal vehicle in connection with official University activities must have the minimum insurance coverage required by the jurisdiction in which the vehicle is registered. Proof of insurance must be provided upon request.
(2) Excess Liability Coverage
If an authorized driver has the minimum insurance required in Section 7.b.1, Stanford's liability insurance policy program may provide excess liability insurance protection to the driver while he/she is using a personal vehicle in connection with official University activities. The driver's insurance is primary and must be used before the University's insurance program will defend or pay any claim.
(3) Coverage Limitations
Stanford does not provide any insurance protection for fire, theft, collision or other loss or damage to personal vehicles. Individuals who use their vehicles frequently in connection with official University activities should consult with their insurance agent or broker to make sure their insurance meets their needs. The organization will pay the deductible for damage to a personal vehicle used in connection with official University activities, up to $1,000.

c. Rented Vehicles
For rented vehicles, including vehicles rented from a car-sharing service for local use, drivers must obtain or decline the rental car company's additional insurance according to the requirements of Guide Memo 5.4.2: Travel Expenses. The rental agency's insurance, if obtained, must first be used before Stanford's insurance becomes applicable. Organizations are not required to pay any costs for loss or damage to rented vehicles or for liability.

d. Business Travel Accident Insurance
If an employee is engaged in the performance of authorized travel for the University and the accident results in the employee's death, dismemberment or permanent total disability, the University's business travel accident insurance may apply. (See Guide Memo 2.3.1: Survivor Benefit Plans.

Back to top

8. Compliance with Applicable Laws and Regulations

All parties covered by this policy must comply with and follow all requirements of the California Vehicle Code or other applicable vehicle code, and all other applicable regulations. Fines or penalties for infractions of the law, including parking tickets, are the personal responsibility of the driver for which the University assumes no obligation.

Back to top

9. Violations of this Policy

Failure to follow this policy may result in disciplinary action up to and including termination of employment.

Back to top

a. Guide Memo 8.4.1: Vehicle Acquisition, Ownership and Disposition.

b. Guide Memo 2.2.8: Controlled Substances and Alcohol.

c. Guide Memo 7.6.1: Accident and Incident Reporting.

d. Guide Memo 5.4.2: Travel Expenses.

e. Use of Golf Cart-Type Vehicles at Stanford University

f. Safety Guidelines: Operation of Rented or Personally-Owned Golf Cart-Type Vehicles by Authorized Visitors, Alumni or Contractors

g. The policies identified in Sections 1, 4, 6 and 7 of this Guide Memo 8.4.2.

Back to top

9.1.1 Organization Chart: President

Last updated on:
03/14/2013
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
11.1

The President is responsible for the management of the University and all its departments, including the operation of the physical plant and the administration of the University's business activities. To assist in the performance of these duties, the President, with the approval of the Board of Trustees, appoints a number of officers.

Note: Click each box on the chart (PDF document listed below)  to visit the website of the officer.

9.2.1 Organization Chart: Provost

Last updated on:
06/27/2013
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
11.2

The Provost, as the chief academic and budget officer, administers the academic program (instruction and research in schools and other unaffiliated units) and University services in support of the academic program (student affairs, libraries, information resources, and institutional planning). The following University deans and administrators report to the Provost.

Note: Click each box on the chart (PDF document listed below) to visit the website of the officer.

10.1.1 Undergraduate Student Employment On Campus

Last updated on:
03/15/2009
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
24

This Guide Memo outlines policies and procedures for employment of Stanford undergraduate students on campus. For employment of graduate students in research and teaching assistantships, see Guide Memo 10.2.1.

Authority: 

This Guide Memo was approved by the Vice Provost for Student Affairs.

1. Listing Student Jobs

a. Job Listing Services
Stanford departments wishing to hire undergraduate students as part-time workers may use the Cardinal Careers system administered by the Career Development Center (CDC) to list their job openings. Departments should log onto Cardinal Careers to post a job. Departments may also use their own means of locating student employees.

b. Hours Per Week
Many students on financial aid have an academic-year earnings expectation as part of their financial aid package. Most students will be able to meet the earnings expectation if they work seven to ten hours per week. Students are encouraged to limit their hours of work, so that they may devote sufficient attention to their studies. Therefore, the jobs listed for undergraduates should not require more than 15 hours per week of work.

c. Non-Discrimination
Non-discrimination policies applicable to regular staff, as stated in Guide Memo 2.1.2, section 2.a, also apply to student employees.

Back to top

2. Schedule of Job Categories

The following schedule is used for most jobs on campus. Starting salaries in these categories are based on the requirements of the job and the applicable experience of the student. Although raises are normally scheduled after three quarters of work, an employee may be advanced within the proficiency range anytime it is deemed appropriate by the employer. Range within levels is available to allow employers' flexibility in setting student wage rates as job requirements and student performance vary widely.

a. Level I
The work at this level requires that employees perform tasks characterized by a prescribed standard. Duties typically are repetitive and workers follow simple instructions that require little interpretation or skill. The supervisor determines work priorities and reviews work for accuracy. Typical kinds of work at this level include:

  • Office work requiring minimum skills, such as file clerk, messenger, receptionist
  • Light manual labor such as animal caretaker, driver, tour guide
  • Rudimentary laboratory work such as glassware washer
  • Food service work in the residences
  • Library work such as shelving, checking in materials, completing forms, photocopying, preparing materials for binding

b. Level II
At this level, employees have independent responsibility for the accurate completion of a variety of tasks requiring judgment and interpretation in applying procedures correctly. The supervisor generally reviews the work for correct final results. Typical kinds of work at this level include:

  • Office work requiring basic accounting, knowledge of office machines
  • Strenuous labor such as gardener or storekeeper
  • Technical work requiring specialized skills such as photographer, projectionist
  • Laboratory work requiring a moderate level of scientific knowledge
  • Library work such as answering information questions, basic use of claims and invoices, nonroutine clerical duties

c. Level III
At this level, employees have substantial responsibility for determining work procedures and methods of work and for coordinating phases of work with others. Originality, analysis, and judgment are required to carry out work. The supervisor reviews work when guidance is required. Typical kinds of work include:

  • Computer programmer
  • Administrative assistant
  • Musician, artist
  • Job recruiter
  • Library work that requires extensive use of foreign languages, having responsibility for a branch library or similar unit for long periods of time without supervision, very specialized bibliographic searching including in-depth use of RLIN

Back to top

3. Hiring, Paying, and Supervising Students

a. Hiring
The supervisor notifies the human resources administrator to do the appropriate system entry. 

b. Paying
The suggested hourly wage scale for undergraduate student workers is available online. Departments must pay student workers from their own payroll accounts, except for students who qualify for Federal Work-Study (FWS). Departments wishing to hire Federal Work-Study students should submit the FWS Authorization Request form. More information about the FWS program is available at http://financialaid.stanford.edu/faculty_staff/index.html.

c. Supervision
One person should be named as the student's immediate supervisor and should be directly accountable for overseeing the student's work and ensuring the hours worked are entered into and approved in Axess.

d. Work Schedules
A student is expected to work the agreed hours, be punctual and satisfy all reasonable requirements of the employer with regard to performance and behavior. Most on-campus employers build in some flexibility in hours given students' exam schedules, but that is not always possible and students are expected to carry through if they have agreed to be at work.

Back to top

10.2.1 Graduate Student Assistantships

Last updated on:
09/05/2013
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
24.2

This Guide Memo summarizes the regulations regarding Graduate Student Assistantship appointments at Stanford University. Definition of the Graduate Student Assistantship is followed by the criteria for eligibility to hold an assistantship, a brief description of each type of assistantship, the rules governing Tuition Allowance, and other policy matters. For questions regarding this subject, please call the Financial Aid Office.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice Provost for Graduate Education.

Applicability: 

Applies to the appointment of graduate students to Graduate Student Assistantships.

1. Definitions and Distinctions

a. Graduate Student Assistantships are a form of student employment, earning a compensation package including both salary and tuition allowance (TAL) for the performance of research or teaching services to the University as part of the student's academic and professional training and development.

Distinctions from Assistantships:

  • Fellowships
    Fellowship stipends are financial aid, not salary. No service is expected in return for a fellowship; it is awarded on a merit basis to assist a student in the pursuit of a degree.
  • Hourly Employment through Payroll
    Graduate students may be employed and paid for work unrelated to the student's academic and professional training. Such employment is not considered an assistantship appointment, does not generate tuition, and is not processed in GFS.

b. The Graduate Financial Support (GFS) system is the online application used to enter all graduate student research and teaching assistantship appointments and fellowships. Although they are not matriculated Stanford graduate students, Postdoctoral Scholars' appointments also are entered in GFS. GFS also handles financial support for other non-matriculated graduate students, e.g., Visiting Student Researchers. Non-matriculated students are, however, in general not eligible for assistantships.

Back to top

2. Assistantship Eligibility Criteria

a. Matriculation at Stanford with an active authorization to enroll and an active graduate degree program, or, for Research Assistantships only, enrollment in non-matriculated graduate status as a Student of New Faculty.1

b. Enrollment
All students holding assistantships must be enrolled in each quarter in which the assistantship appointment is held. For autumn, winter and spring quarters, unless the student is on TGR status, the student must be enrolled for 8-9-10 units. Except for Terminal Graduate Registration (TGR) students, the GFS System will not allow payment of TAL unless the graduate student is enrolled full-time during autumn, winter and spring quarters. Exceptions to this enrollment requirement are allowed for Honor Co-op students, and for students with disabilities.

c. Relevancy
The service performed (teaching or research) must be related to the student's academic program in order to qualify for the assistantship appointment.

Note: Entering and approving the assistantship appointment in Graduate Financial Support (GFS)/Worklist Manager constitutes a statement that the work involved is relevant to the student's academic program.

d. English proficiency for teaching assistantships
All international students must be approved for English proficiency before being appointed to any teaching position.

  • The department that plans to appoint an international student as a TA/CA must have the student contact the Language Center at amkopp@stanford.edu or (650)725-5378 to arrange an appointment for a TA screening. Note: Whenever possible, the TA screening should occur at least one full quarter in advance of the assistantship appointment. This allows the student time to take any required or recommended classes to improved communication skills.
  • Upon successful completion of the TA screen and/or required classes, EFS enters the approval of English proficiency (TA OK) in the GFS system, after which the assistantship appointment can be processed.

e. I-9 eligibility to work in the U.S.A.
By federal regulation, all individuals receiving salary through Payroll must demonstrate eligibility to work in the U.S.A. by filing Federal Form I-9. Departments must forward necessary paperwork to Payroll in advance of the student's first paycheck. For more information, see Student Specific Payroll Administration

f. Social Security Number must be on file with Payroll.

g. Alternatives
In the case where no matriculated graduate student is available to fill a need for a Research or Teaching Assistantship, an undergraduate or non-matriculated person may be hired in the categories of Teaching Aide or Research Aide. These are hourly-paid positions, processed through the Human Resources Management System (HRMS), not the GFS system. Individuals appointed to these positions are never eligible for a Tuition Allowance. The appropriate department chair (or program director) and school dean's office should confirm that no matriculated graduate student is available before these alternative appointments are processed.


Footnote:

1 Coterminal students in the Bachelor/Master program who have completed 180 units of undergraduate work are eligible for appointments in assistantship categories.

Back to top

3. Types of Assistantship Appointments: Teaching

Graduate student teaching responsibilities are categorized into the following four appointment levels.

The Office of the Vice Provost for Graduate Education establishes a minimum salary rate for each of these levels. (Mentor Teaching Affiliate and Graduate Teaching Affiliate positions have the same minimum salary.)

Note: No student may be appointed to any of the following positions for a course in which the student is simultaneously enrolled.

a. Course Assistant
Assists a faculty member who has primary responsibility for a course. Duties vary but do not include classroom teaching. Duties may include:

  • Assisting in the preparation of lecture materials and running laboratory sessions.
  • Conducting review sessions and grading exams.
  • Holding office hours.
  • Monitoring or maintaining existing course web sites.

b. Teaching Assistant
Has significantly more independence than a Course Assistant. The Teaching Assistant works with a faculty member who has primary responsibility for a course, or assists a group of students in several courses. Duties vary and may include:

  • Preparing for class sections and/or laboratories where new material may be presented.
  • Presenting material in classroom or lab setting.
  • Marking and/or grading some portion or all of the exams or papers (but not independently assigning the final grade).
  • Holding regular office hours.

c. Graduate Teaching Affiliate
This teaching appointment is limited to graduate students who have had substantial teaching experience. The Graduate Teaching Affiliate will typically be identified as the Instructor in Stanford publications, and will have primary charge and responsibility for the course (with the mentorship of a faculty member). Responsibilities for the class typically include:

  • Preparation, teaching, grading, holding regular office hours, etc., in keeping with the established practices of the department.
  • In some cases Graduate Teaching Affiliates have full responsibility for a course where the content is defined by a faculty coordinator. In other cases, they will develop course materials independently with the guidance of a faculty mentor for a course that has been approved by the department/program in which it is offered.

d. Mentor Teaching Assistant
This teaching appointment is limited to graduate students who have had substantial teaching experience. In addition to the responsibilities of a Teaching Assistant, this student:

  • Serves as a head Teaching Assistant to coordinate the training and guidance of Teaching Assistants in a given course or set of courses.
  • Develops complex materials (including web-based) in support of a course or group of courses.

Back to top

4. Types of Assistantship Appointments: Research

The following research appointments are listed in ascending order of qualifications, responsibility, and compensation.

a. Research Assistant
Works on a research project under the supervision of a faculty member.

b. Predoctoral Research Affiliate
An advanced Ph.D. student in one of these appointment categories:

(1) Engineering and Natural Sciences

  • Performs research or administrative tasks beyond the scope of a typical graduate research assistant's work.
  • This category should not be used to fill a regular staff position.

(2) Humanities and Social Sciences

  • Is engaged in research under the supervision of a faculty member.
  • Makes an original contribution to a research effort that serves the common professional objectives of the student and supervisor.

Back to top

5. Percentage and Period of Assistantship Appointments

a. Full-quarter appointments
Assistantship appointments are made for a full quarter. Standard appointment periods are: October 1–December 31, January 1–March 31, April 1–June 30, and July 1–September 30. An alternate quarter schedule is available for students whose work begins before the start of a standard quarter. Students on an alternate schedule must remain on that schedule throughout the academic year.

b. Fall, Winter and Spring Assistantship Appointments

(1) The minimum assistantship is 10% time. Percentage of appointments must be in increments of 5% time.

(2) 50% Maximum — The typical assistantship appointment is for a maximum of 50% time, to allow students to make expeditious progress toward their degree. Assistantships totaling more than 50% can impede that progress.

(3) An appointment of 40% must be combined with a 10% appointment to total 50%. Appointments of 45% are not allowed.

(4) Approval for Exceptions — Assistantships for more than 50% time during the academic year, two concurrent assistantships totaling more than 50% time, or enrollment in more than 10 units while holding a 50% appointment, require the prior approval of the student's advisor, the Department Chair, and School Dean's office.

  • Recommendations for such assistantship appointments should indicate the academic progress of the student and the anticipated degree completion date; the student must have been admitted to candidacy.
  • Approval will be granted only where such an assistantship appointment will not interfere with progress towards the degree and normally will be granted for no more than one year.

c. Summer Assistantship Appointments

(1) Percentage of Time—In summer quarter, in addition to the standard 10-50% assistantships, appointments at 55-90% time are permitted (see section 5.d).

(2) Number of Units—In summer quarter, graduate students must be enrolled in at least one unit or TGR (Terminal Graduate Registration) to have any size assistantship appointment. Students with appointments totaling more than 50% will have their Tuition Allowance reduced proportionately (see table) in order to accommodate additional employment. Students combining an assistantship with more than 8 hours of hourly employment during the summer should reduce their enrollment in proportion to their total Summer Quarter employment. Students registered TGR must enroll in the TGR course (801 or 802).

For additional information regarding TAL in Summer, see Section 7.d(4).

d. Assistantships Totaling More Than 50%

(1) Whether approved as an exception (5.b.4 above) or permitted as summer employment, the maximum combined assistantships for any student during any quarter is 90%. Appointments totaling more than 36 hours/week may not be processed in GFS, are not considered assistantships, and do not include a tuition allowance; they should instead be processed through HRMS.

(2) Whenever possible, graduate student assistantship appointments totaling more than 50% should be established as a single appointment, rather than a combination of smaller appointments. (This allows GFS to calculate the appropriate TAL; if entered separately, administrators must determine the appropriate TAL cost and split, and coordinate adjustments to GFS.)

Back to top

6. Salary

Stanford University establishes annually the minimum salary levels for Graduate Student Assistantships. No maximum salary level is specified by the University, although individual schools may do so.

Source of Funding

a. Salary for RAs may be paid by an external/sponsored source of funds or school/ departmental funds.

b. Salary for TAs may be paid by a University budget allocation to the schools/departments or by school/departmental funds.

Back to top

7. Tuition Allowance (TAL)

a. Definition
TAL represents a commitment to support a student's educational program through the payment of a portion of the student's tuition bill.

b. Eligibility
All eligibility requirements for assistantship appointments must be met. (See section 2.)

c. Source of Funding
The value of TAL for a 50% assistantship appointment is established as the tuition value for 8-10 units (8-9 units in the Law School, and 8 units in the MED MD program). The value of TAL for assistantship appointments of between 10% and 50% is a proportional amount defined by TAL Tables published each year. 

Tuition charges and TAL are based on the student's home school tuition rate, regardless of the location of the assistantship. The school/department where the student holds the assistantship appointment is responsible for the salary, as well as the tuition based on the student's home school tuition rate.

The University requires that any outside tuition support to which students have access will be used to the full extent before TAL is claimed. Acceptance of a Stanford assistantship appointment obliges a student to inform the department of any other aid received.

The cost of the TAL is shared among Stanford University funds and school, department, and/or sponsored project funds supporting the assistantship.

(1) TAL Funding for Research Assistants
TAL for Research Assistants is divided and funded as follows:

  • Sponsored portion: Except for the School of Medicine, 60% of the TAL amount is charged directly to the sponsored project or other source of funds supporting the assistantship; in the School of Medicine, 81% of the TAL amount is directly charged.
    Stanford portion: 40% of the TAL amount is paid by Stanford University, or by the school in which the assistant is working; the School of Medicine pays 19% of the TAL amount.
  • In the Schools of Earth Sciences, Education, Engineering, Humanities and Sciences, and Law, University general funds are used to pay the Stanford portion of TAL for Research Assistants. The Schools of Business and Medicine cover the Stanford portion of TAL for Research Assistants from their own funds.

(2) TAL Funding for Teaching Assistants

  • In the Schools of Earth Sciences, Education, Engineering, Humanities and Sciences, and Law, TAL is funded by a University budget allocation to the schools/departments.
  • The Schools of Business and Medicine are responsible for covering the cost of TAL for TAs working in their schools.

(3) Federal Work Study (FWS)

  • FWS funds cannot be used to pay TAL.
  • If a student has a research assistantship funded by FWS, the FWS funds pay the student's salary, the school/department pays the "sponsored portion," i.e., 60%, of the tuition, and the University pays the difference, i.e., 40%, from general funds.
  • If a student has a teaching assistantship funded by FWS, the FWS funds pay the student's salary. TAL funding for these students is as described in Section 7.c (2) above.

(4) Students Working in Schools Other Than Where They Are Enrolled
When graduate students are appointed as Teaching or Research Assistants in a school other than the one in which they are enrolled, the school in which the student works is responsible for paying the TAL at the student's home school tuition rate. In the case of Research Assistants, splitting tuition between the sponsored source and the University (either 60%/40% or 81%/19%) is controlled by the school paying the student.

(5) Terminal Graduate Registration (TGR) and Terminal Medical Registration (TMR)

  • TAL cannot be carried forward to pay TGR/TMR tuition in future quarters.
  • TGR/TMR tuition is paid in full by the associated assistantship (see below). The GFS system will not divide TGR/TMR tuition and share the cost with university or school funds.
  • For Research Assistants, the TGR/TMR fee is charged directly to the source of funds paying the student's salary.
  • For Teaching Assistants, the Schools of Earth Sciences, Education, Engineering, Humanities and Sciences, and Law pay the TGR fee from the University budget allocation for TAs. The Schools of Business and Medicine are responsible for covering the TGR/TMR fee from their own funds.

d. Amount of TAL

(1) Percent Time
The amount of TAL earned depends on the percentage of time of the graduate student assistantship appointment(s). See the Tuition Allowance Tables.

  • The minimum assistantship appointment is 10% and provides TAL equal to the value of two units of tuition. (Note: The minimum tuition charged by Stanford is three units, and therefore a 10% assistantship will not provide enough tuition allowance to cover Stanford's minimum unit-based tuition.)
  • The maximum assistantship appointment during autumn, winter and spring quarters is 50%, and provides TAL equal to the 8-10 unit tuition charge, except in the Law School where they earn the 8-9 unit value and in the MED MD program, where they earn the value of 8 units.
  • For assistantship appointments of 50-90%, the total TAL earned decreases as the percentage of time increases. (For example: A student's 70% appointment(s) earns the same TAL as a 30% appointment.) Appointments of 90% provide TAL equal to the value of 1-3 units of tuition. For the rules governing appointments greater than 50%, see section 5.b.4 (required pre-approval for exceptions, fall winter and spring), 5.c (summer), and 5.d. See also Tuition Allowance tables for Summer Quarter.

(2) Length of Assistantships
Appointments are made for a full quarter (see "Percentage and Period of Appointment," Section 5 of this document). Appointments will earn the designated amount of TAL for the full quarter in which the student is appointed.

(3) Multiple Assistantships
Students may hold multiple assistantship appointments, including both RA and TA appointments, simultaneously. At most, the 8-10 unit TAL value may be earned when combining multiple assistantships.

  • Multiple assistantships totaling 50% or less: GFS automatically calculates the total combined percentage of the assistantships that will be the basis for the amount of TAL. For example, two 25% assistantship appointments earn a combined TAL equal to a 50% appointment: 8-10 units. (During the academic year, combined appointments should not total more than 50%; see 5.b, above).
  • Multiple assistantships totaling more than 50% (e.g. in summer): If entered as one appointment with multiple sources of funding, GFS correctly calculates the combined TAL as described in 5.d.1. If entered as separate appointments, GFS cannot do the calculation: administrators must determine both the reduced total TAL and the proportional cost to each appointment, then adjust each appointment's TAL in GFS.

(4) Summer Appointments

  • In summer quarter, some students may enroll in fewer units than the TAL earned by their assistantship appointment(s). In such cases, the TAL for their Summer Quarter Assistantships is reduced by adjusting the TAL amount in GFS to match the actual tuition amount billed.
  • Summer appointments are for three months, even though courses may be scheduled for 8 or 10 weeks. If an appointment ends before the end of the full quarter, salary can be ended on the corresponding date, but students will receive the amount of TAL associated with a full-quarter appointment.

e. Use of TAL
(1)
TAL can be used only in the quarter in which it was generated by an appointment.

(2) TAL may be used only as a credit against tuition charges. It is:

  • Not convertible to cash
  • Not transferable to another student
  • Not usable for any other charges, such as ASSU fees
  • Not applicable to tuition charges for Continuing Studies Program courses

Back to top

8. Work in Addition to Assistantship Appointment

To preserve the focus on the student's academic progress, Stanford University limits the amount of additional employment that any enrolled student may have while holding a 50% assistantship appointment. The paragraphs below reflect both Stanford requirements and U.S. immigration regulations related to student visas. In these paragraphs, the quarter is defined as starting on the first day of classes and ending on the last day of final exams, as defined by the University Calendar or the published calendar of the involved School. The following limits do not apply to the period between quarters, as defined by the appropriate academic calendar. (Note: The quarter period is different from the RA's or TA's pay periods, as the standard "start" and "stop" dates for assistantships are intended to pay the student continuously including breaks between quarters.) Individual schools and departments may have stricter policies related to additional employment.

a. Limit on Hours for U.S. Students
During Autumn, Winter and Spring quarters, students on 50% time assistantships may not be employed more than an additional eight hours a week inside Stanford and/or outside of Stanford; those eight hours cannot be in other assistantship positions.

b. Limit on Hours for International students
Students on F-1 and J-1 visas are limited to a total of 20 hours of employment on campus per week, including their assistantship appointment(s) during any quarter in which they are fully enrolled. For further information regarding regulations for students with F-1 and J-1 visas, contact Bechtel International Center.

Back to top

9. Cancellation or Modification of Assistantship Appointments

a. Cancellation as of the Start Date of the Assistantship
If an appointment is cancelled on or before the start date of the assistantship:

(1) No salary is paid.
(2) No Tuition Allowance is provided.
(3) If Tuition Allowance has been applied to the student's bill, it will be withdrawn.
(4) The student is responsible for any tuition charges for the quarter.

b. Cancellation of Appointment During the Quarter of the Assistantship
(1)
If the school or department terminates the assistantship for any reason during the quarter, other than for cause, salary will end but the student will receive the full quarter TAL. This includes circumstances where sponsored funding for an assistantship ends.

(2) If a graduate student voluntarily terminates an assistantship appointment or is removed for cause during the quarter, salary ends and TAL is withdrawn for the quarter.

(3) Salary ends and TAL will be applied as needed to pay the student's bill for the quarter when an assistantship appointment is terminated because a student has:

  • Completed all of the degree requirements and leaves the University, or
  • Formally withdrawn from a degree program and leaves the University, or
  • Taken an approved Leave of Absence from the University (for emergency/medical needs).

Back to top

10. Taxes and Tax Reporting

a. Salaries and Tuition Allowance

  • All salaries from assistantships awarded after August 16, 1986, are subject to federal and state income tax and tax withholding.
  • Tuition Allowance associated with assistantships for degree-seeking students is not subject to tax.

b. Exemption from FICA and VDI Taxes
Enrollment and regular attendance in courses or fulfillment of other requirements associated with a degree program are required for all students in each quarter of their appointment(s), including summer, in order to qualify for exemption from FICA (Social Security) and VDI (Voluntary Disability Insurance) taxes.

Back to top

11. Benefits

The graduate appointments described in this Guide Memo are designed for and available only to Stanford students.

a. Time Off
No vacation or sick leave benefits are applicable. Arrangements for any variations in work hours, including time off for vacation or illness, should be made individually with the faculty sponsor.

b. Health Insurance
Eligibility for a health insurance benefit is determined quarterly on the basis of assistantship and fellowship appointments approved as of the payroll deadline of each quarter. Graduate students are eligible for a health insurance subsidy as long as they do not waive Cardinal Care insurance or have their insurance paid fully by an outside source of funds. The Health Insurance subsidy will be paid as follows:

  • Students with assistantship appointments for 25% time or more per quarter will receive a subsidy paying approximately 50% of the cost of the single-student Cardinal Care premium.
  • Students with assistantship appointments of less than 25% time per quarter will receive a subsidy paying approximately 25% of the cost of the single-student Cardinal Care premium.

Back to top

12. Resources for Additional Information

  • All graduate student assistantships must be entered online using the Graduate Financial Support (GFS) system in PeopleSoft.
  • For policy questions, refer to the GFS Policy Manual.
  • For entry questions, contact the IT Help Desk at 5-4357 (5-HELP), or http://helpsu.stanford.edu.
  • For graduate student health insurance, contact Vaden Health Center.
  • Salary rates and Tuition Allowance tables — The minimum salary rates for TAs, RAs, and the TAL Tables can be found at http://finaid.stanford.edu/tal_tables.

Back to top

10.2.2 Graduate Student Hourly Employment

Last updated on:
11/18/2014

This Guide Memo outlines policies and procedures for employment of Stanford graduate students on campus in positions other than assistantships. For employment of graduate students in research and teaching assistantships, see Guide Memo 10.2.1. For employment of undergraduate students, see Guide Memo 10.1.1.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice Provost for Graduate Education.

Applicability: 

Applies to the employment of graduate students in positions other than assistantships.

1. Definitions and Distinctions

a. Student hourly employment. Stanford University uses student hourly employment to hire Stanford students into jobs that are specifically earmarked for matriculated students. Student workers are supervised in their work, are hired through the PeopleSoft HR system, and must record and approve their work hours. Compensation is established on an hourly basis, and the amount of pay is based on the actual number of hours worked in each pay period.

These job assignments are incidental to the student’s course of study with reasonable limitations placed during the academic quarter on the nature of the work assignment and the number of hours of employment.

All Stanford University student employment is hourly, with the exception of assistantships, which are limited to graduate students (see Admin Guide 10.2.1). Hourly employment should never be used to pay a graduate student for work that is appropriately treated as an assistantship.

b. Graduate student. This policy applies to students who are enrolled in a graduate degree program (any degree except the BA, BS, or BAS). For purposes of student employment, students enrolled in both undergraduate and graduate degree programs as coterminal students are considered undergraduate students while assessed undergraduate tuition and graduate students while assessed graduate tuition.

c. The Graduate Financial Support (GFS) system is the online application used to enter all research and teaching assistantship appointments, fellowships, and other stipend payments for graduate students and postdoctoral scholars. It is not used to process hourly employment.

d. Job Classification Codes (JCC) are used to categorize all jobs at Stanford. Students should be hired into the appropriate student JCC for the job for which they are employed. Use of the appropriate JCC ensures that the correct expenditure type and fringe benefit rate are applied as wages are paid.

Distinctions from Hourly Employment:

  • Graduate Student Assistantships are a form of student employment, earning a compensation package including both salary and tuition allowance (TAL) for the performance of research or teaching services to the University as part of the student's academic and professional training and development, see Guide Memo 10.2.1. Hourly employment is not a substitute for an assistantship appointment.
  • Honorarium is a stipend payment to recognize a student for an accomplishment or a one-time event or project, such as a recruitment weekend. Honoraria are not used as compensation for employment. Graduate student honorarium payments are processed as stipends in the GFS system.
  • Off-Campus Internships and Off-Campus Employment are not covered by this policy. In both cases, students are encouraged to be mindful that their primary obligation is to their academic program. International students must also adhere to visa requirements.
  • Contingent (Casual or Temporary) Employment is used to hire an individual for a part-time or temporary staff position. Contingent employment must be used for hourly employment assignments for non-matriculated students, such as Visiting Student Researchers, and for matriculated students when on a Leave of Absence. Contingent employment is not normally used for enrolled, matriculated Stanford students, but must be used for any student working more than 36 hours per week.

Back to top

2. Limits on Hours of Employment

Graduate students are expected to limit their hours of employment, so that they may devote sufficient attention to their studies. Therefore, graduate students are expected to coordinate the number of hours of employment with their academic obligations, including course load, number of registered units, and the academic expectations of their program. Additionally, they are expected to coordinate hourly employment with the other forms of financial support that they are receiving. Academic departments/programs, offices employing students, and funding sources may also impose employment limitations.

Limits on hourly employment and related enrollment limitations for graduate students are summarized in Table 1.

a. Limit on Hours
There are formal limits on the number of hours a student may be employed when also financially supported by assistantships or fellowships.

During Autumn, Winter and Spring quarters, enrolled graduate students are limited to 28 hours of student employment, combining hourly employment and assistantship appointments. (International students are subject to additional limitations, see below.) For example, graduate students appointed to 50% (20 hours/week) assistantships may not be employed more than an additional eight hours a week; those additional hours cannot be in other assistantship positions. Graduate students with full fellowship funding are limited to additional employment of 8 hours/week hourly employment or a 25% assistantship, but not both. The source of the fellowship or the student’s academic department/program may impose stricter limits.

During Summer quarter, enrolled graduate students are limited to 36 hours of student employment, combining hourly employment and assistantship appointments. (International students may be subject to additional limitations, see below.) For example, students on 50% time (20 hours/week) assistantships may not be employed more than an additional 16 hours a week; those additional hours can combine either assistantships or hourly employment. In summer, students who are employed more than 8 hours with a 50% assistantship are expected to reduce the number of units of enrollment commensurate with a larger percentage appointment. (This is shown in the TAL table for Summer Quarter. Graduate students with full fellowship funding are limited to additional employment of 16 hours/week hourly employment or a 50% assistantship, but not both. The source of the fellowship or the student’s academic department/program may impose stricter limits.

During break periods between quarters—the period between the last day of final examinations and the first day of classes the subsequent quarter—graduate students may be employed full time. Thanksgiving recess is not a break between quarters.

b. Additional Limits on Hours for International Students on F-1 or J-1 Visas

International students on F-1 or J-1 visas are subject to both University policies on employment and visa requirements that limit employment; in all cases, the more restrictive limitation will apply.

International students are eligible for on-campus employment if they are maintaining F-1 or J-1 status. During the academic year (Autumn, Winter and Spring quarters), students on F-1or J-1 visas are limited to a total of 20 hours of employment per week (except during the break periods between quarters), including both hourly jobs and assistantship appointment(s), and including any off-campus employment that they may have been authorized to perform.

During Summer quarter, most international students are subject to the general University policies for summer graduate student employment, and their F-1 or J-1 visa does not further restrict their hours of employment. However, any graduate student who is required to enroll full time in summer quarter in order to maintain legal visa status—such as newly admitted students who will start their program in the summer, or those students returning from a leave of absence in the summer—may not work more than a combined total of 20 hours per week.

During break periods between quarters—the period between the last day of finals and the first day of classes the subsequent quarter—international graduate students may be employed full time (up to 40 hours per week), provided they are eligible and intend to register for the next academic quarter. Thanksgiving recess is not a break between quarters.

Although federal regulations allow for full-time on-campus employment during break periods, departments/programs may have other restrictions and policies that limit the amount of on-campus employment during break periods. If this is the case, then these policies take precedence. Students must check with their department/program for any restrictions.

Further information regarding employment limits for students on F-1 or J-1 visas is available from the Bechtel International Center.

c. Additional Limits on Hours for International Students with other Visas

International students who have a visa besides an F-1 or J-1 visas should check with the Bechtel International Center to determine if they are in a status that allows employment and, if so, any restrictions on employment.

Table 1: Maximum Number of Hours of Hourly Employment Permitted per Week
 

Funding source or the student’s academic department/program may impose stricter limits. Footnotes describe the related limitations on enrollment.

Other Funding 50% assistantship1 assistantship between 10-40% Full fellowship no other financial support
ACADEMIC YEAR
U.S. student 8 hours 28 hours minus hours of assistantship 8 hours or 25% assistantship, but not both 28 hours
International student on F-1 or J-1 Visa 0 hours 20 hours minus hours of assistantship 8 hours or 25% assistantship, but not both 20 hours
SUMMER
U.S. student;
International student whose visa status permits part-time summer enrollment
16 hours 36 hours minus hours of assistantship2, 3 16 hours or 50% assistantship, but not both 36 hours.
More than 36 hours
requires hiring as a
Contingent (Casual
or Temporary
)
employee through
Human Resources.
International student whose F-1
or J-1 Visa requires full-time enrollment
0 hours 20 hours minus hours of assistantship 16 hours or 50% assistantship, but not both 20 hours
BREAK PERIODS BETWEEN QUARTERS*
U.S. student Full Time
International
student on
F-1 or J-1 Visa
Full Time4

* Break periods do not include holiday days during the quarter (e.g., Memorial Day, President’s day), nor Thanksgiving recess.

1 Students with a 50% appointment are limited to 10 units, TGR, or graduation quarter enrollment.

2 In summer, students who are employed more than 8 hours with an assistantship of 50% or more are expected to reduce the number of units of enrollment commensurate with a larger percentage appointment.

3 The percentage of the assistantship appointment determines the amount of Tuition Allowance (TAL) that is provided and the expectations for the number of units of enrollment. This is shown in the TAL table for Summer Quarter.

4 International graduate students may be employed full time during break periods between quarters provided they are eligible and intend to register for the next academic quarter.

Back to top

3. Hiring, Paying and Supervising Students

a. Hiring
The supervisor notifies the human resources administrator to make the appropriate system entry. The students should be hired into the appropriate Job Classification Code (JCC). The student must be hired into PeopleSoft HR before beginning work. Students who are hired during Summer quarter, but who are not enrolled, must be hired as Student Hourly Employees using the appropriate Summer Student JCC. This step is required even if the student is continuing a work assignment that started during the academic year.

Before hiring a graduate student for hourly employment, a graduate student assistantship, or any other type of appointment through Human Resources the hiring department should contact the student’s academic home department/program to review the appointment (see the GFS School contact list). The hourly appointment must be reviewed for appropriateness taking into account:

  • The student’s academic obligations, including course load, number of registered units, and other expectations.
  • Other forms of financial support that the student is receiving, including fellowships and assistantships. Funding sources may impose limits on hourly employment.
  • Any limits that the student’s home academic department/program imposes (e.g., program may limit hourly student employment).
  • Limitations placed on international students.

b. Wage rates
There is no suggested wage scale for hourly employment for graduate students. When setting the hourly wage rate for a graduate student, the following may be taken into consideration:

  • The tasks required of the student, including the level of independence, judgment and expertise;
  • The student’s experience in similar work assignments;
  • Wage rate paid to other graduate students in department for comparable work.

c. Payment
Departments pay student workers from their own sources of funding.

Hourly student workers must record actual hours worked in Axess Timecard each pay period. Each month has two pay periods: The first day of the month through the 15th and the 16th through the last day of the month. Paychecks are issued on the workday that falls on or immediately prior to the seventh calendar day after the end of each pay period.

d. Supervision
One person should be named as the student’s immediate supervisor and should be directly accountable for overseeing the student’s work and approving the hours worked in Axess.

e. Work Schedules and Requirements
A student is expected to work the agreed hours, be punctual, and satisfy all reasonable requirements of the employer with regard to performance and behavior. Most on-campus employers build in some flexibility in hours given students’ exam schedules, but that is not always possible and students are expected to carry through if they have agreed to be at work.

f. Job Listing
Stanford departments wishing to hire graduate students may use the Cardinal Careers system administered by the Career Development Center (CDC) to list their job openings. Departments should log onto Cardinal Careers to post a job. Departments may also use their own means of locating student employees.

g. Non-Discrimination
Non-discrimination policies applicable to regular staff, as stated in Guide Memo 2.1.2, section 2.a., also apply to student employees.

Back to top

12.1.1 Code of Conduct

Last updated on:
12/06/2013

The policies and principles set out in Chapter 1 of the Administrative Guide relating to university code of conduct, organization, academic governance, academic and business relationships with third parties, conflict of interest and privacy policies apply to the global activities of Stanford University and its affiliates.

Authority: 

President.

12.1.2 Anti-Bribery

Last updated on:
12/06/2013

Members of the Stanford community are required to act with honesty and integrity and comply with applicable laws at all times when transacting University business. This guide memo clarifies that all forms of bribery and corruption are absolutely prohibited, provides guidance regarding what constitutes bribery and corruption, and requires reporting of actual or suspected incidents of bribery and corruption.

Authority: 

President.

Applicability: 

Applies to these members of the Stanford community:

  • Faculty, Staff, employees of Stanford affiliates and Students
  • Members of the Board of Trustees
  • Consultants, vendors, and contractors doing business with the University; and
  • Volunteers who assert an association with the University

Additional Stanford University guide memos may provide guidance on issues addressed in this guide memo. In particular, please refer to Guide Memos 1.1.1: Code of Conduct, 1.5.1: Political Activities, 1.5.2: Staff Policy on Conflict of Commitment and Interest, and the Fundamental Standard.

1. Purpose

Members of the Stanford community are required to act with honesty and integrity and comply with applicable laws at all times when transacting University business. This guide memo clarifies that all forms of bribery and corruption are absolutely prohibited, provides guidance regarding what constitutes bribery and corruption, and requires reporting of actual or suspected incidents of bribery and corruption. This guide memo has been drafted to comply with the requirements of the U.S. Foreign Corrupt Practices Act and the United Kingdom Bribery Act. Many countries also have local laws prohibiting bribery which must be followed by members of the Stanford community when conducting activities in or involving those countries, including contracting with third parties whose acts can pose liability for the University under the FCPA and local laws. Bribery does not need to take place in the foreign country to fall within the purview of FCPA or local anti-bribery laws. For example, entertainment provided in the United States for the purpose of influencing decisions and related activities could violate the FCPA and local anti-bribery laws. In addition to institutional consequences to the University, individuals who violate anti-bribery laws may be subject to personal fines or criminal prosecution.

Back to top

2. Definitions

a. Bribery

(1) To offer, give, or promise to another person any financial or other advantage with the intention to induce or reward that person or another person to perform his or her responsibilities or duties improperly or to give an improper advantage.

(2) To request, agree to receive, accept, or direct a financial or other advantage for oneself or others if such advantage is intended to induce or reward improper performance of one’s responsibilities or duties or to gain an improper advantage.

(3) To do either (1) or (2) without the intention to induce or reward improper performance of duties or responsibilities or gain an improper advantage, but which nonetheless could reasonably be interpreted as such an inducement or reward.

b. Facilitation Payments
Facilitation or “grease” payments are any payments, no matter how small, given to a government official to increase the speed at which they do their job. Such payments are not permitted under this policy. Only a payment to speed up a governmental act that is not discretionary in nature would potentially be considered a permissible payment. For example, this could include speeding up a business registration license or permit approval or customs processing, only if such government acts simply involved the payment of a standard fee and the permit or registration was automatically issued.

c. Public Official
Public officials include not only employees working in government departments, but also may include employees of government owned or controlled commercial enterprises, universities and research institutions, international organizations, political parties and political candidates. Public officials also include the family members of any of the employee groups listed above.

Back to top

3. Policy

a. Bribery Prohibited
Stanford University has a zero tolerance policy towards bribery and corruption. All forms of bribery are prohibited. A bribe does not actually have to take place or be accepted; offering or agreeing to accept a bribe is itself a violation of the Policy. Facilitation payments are not permitted under this guide memo, even where such payments may be allowable under U.S. law.

b. Forms of Bribery
A bribe is defined as anything of value. Bribery can take many forms in addition to cash, for example:

  • Cash equivalent such as stock shares;
  • Unreasonable gifts, entertainment, travel expenses or other hospitality;
  • Unwarranted rebates or excessive commissions (e.g. to sales or marketing agents);
  • Unwarranted allowances or expense reimbursements;
  • Political/charitable contributions;
  • Uncompensated use of University services or facilities;
  • Kickbacks; or
  • Anything else of value

c. Prevention of Bribery
Members of the Stanford community should assess the risk of bribery in the activities under their purview and take appropriate care to prevent and detect bribery. Certain countries have a high incidence of corruption, and particular care should be taken when undertaking activities in or involving those countries. For information regarding high risk countries, see the Transparency International Corruption Perceptions Index. Appropriate steps could involve training of employees concerning this guide memo and reporting requirements, requiring due diligence before engaging third party service providers, ensuring that contracts contain anti-bribery provisions, and requesting guidance from the Director of Compliance and Ethics or the Office of the General Counsel before expanding operations into a new geographic location. Failure to take such steps to prevent and detect bribery creates legal risk for the University and potential personal liability for individuals involved.

d. Dealing with Government Officials
While this Policy applies to both the public and private sectors, dealing with public officials poses a particularly high risk related to bribery and corruption. Members of the Stanford community should be especially cautious when dealing with public employees, including faculty and staff at public universities or workers at state-owned enterprises. Local laws often severely limit what a public employee may receive and there can be greater legal liability for giving inappropriate advantages to a public employee.

e. Dealing with Third Parties
Stanford could be liable for improper payments made by a third party acting on its behalf, such as a contractor, consultant, agent, or research partner, even if the University did not authorize the payment. When entering into a relationship with a third party, members of the Stanford community should complete sufficient due diligence to ensure that the retained individual or organization does not have a history of corrupt payments, and understands and agrees that they are not authorized to engage in bribery on Stanford’s behalf.  The level of due diligence required may vary depending on the level of risk involved in the transaction, e.g. whether the third party will be interacting with government officials on behalf of the University or whether the services will occur in a country that involves a high risk of corruption. Care should be taken to ensure vendors’ understanding of and commitment to compliance with anti-bribery laws when entering into engagements with expeditors to provide logistical support for international activities such as air and ocean freight consolidation and forwarding, vendor consolidation, customs clearance, and distribution activities. Faculty and staff intending to retain firms for freight forwarding or customs services should first consult with Procurement (www.stanford.edu/group/fms/fingate/finsystem/iprocure/howto/create_standard_req.html).

f. At a minimum, members of the Stanford community should ensure that third parties do not have a history of violations of anti-bribery laws, provide them a copy of this guide memo, which can be located at acp.stanford.edu/compliance/anti-bribery, and regularly audit their activities to ensure ongoing compliance. Any agreements with third parties must include provisions that they will comply with the FCPA and any applicable local anti-bribery laws.

Back to top

4. Reporting Concerns and Non-Retaliation Policy

a. Questions regarding this Policy and Reporting Suspected Violations
For further information regarding this Policy, contact the University’s Director of Compliance and Ethics (650-723-3267), the Office of the General Counsel (650-723-9611), or the Office of International Affairs (650-725-0076). Known or suspected violations of this guide memo must be reported to the Compliance Helpline (650-721-2667) or online at helpline.stanford.edu, the Director of Compliance and Ethics, or the Office of the General Counsel.

b. Consequences
Violations of this guide memo could result in criminal or civil penalties against both the University and involved individuals in the United States and abroad. Some countries take broad jurisdiction over bribery and corruption offenses, so violations in one country could result in extradition to and prosecution in another country. Violations of this Policy could also result in appropriate disciplinary action up to and including termination from employment or other relationships with the University.

c. Non-Retaliation Policy
The University is committed to ensuring that members of the Stanford community can speak up with confidence if they have any concerns or need to ask for guidance. If any person suspects or observes anything that they believe might be a violation of this guide memo, they are obligated to report it and cooperate in any investigation if requested. Stanford will not tolerate retaliation against any person who makes a good faith report or participates in an investigation of a suspected violation.

Back to top

12.2.1 Global Staff Personnel Policies

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

These policies describe the development of, administration of, and decisions about policies affecting personnel of Stanford University, a university entity and/or its affiliates, whose primarily work location is outside of the United States.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

 

 

1. Purpose

Global staffing policies and procedures are intended for supervisors and administrators with current or anticipated ongoing operations outside of the US.

Back to top

2. Policy Authority

 a. Policy Development
Global personnel policies are approved and authorized by the Vice President of Human Resources (VP of HR), in consultation with other University officials.

b. Policy Revisions
Send proposals for policy changes to the VP of HR for study and recommendation. Approved changes are published in the Administrative Guide and may be communicated in the Stanford Report or by written notice to officers and administrators. Changes in policies for global benefits plans are reflected on the University Human Resources website for International Staff Employees, and brochures of the individual plans.

c. Policy Interpretation
Questions regarding policy interpretation should be brought to the attention of the Human Resources Manager responsible for the employee’s unit and/or Global HR Programs.

d. Alleged Policy Violations
Suspected policy violation information should be brought to the attention of management, Human Resources Manager responsible for the unit and/or Global HR Programs.

Back to top

3. Administration of Global Staff Personnel Policies

University officers and administrators, both academic and nonacademic, are responsible for the administration of University policies and procedures including those applicable to staff supporting Stanford global operations.

Back to top

4. Exceptions to Global Personnel Policies

In the event an exception to established policy appears to be necessary, the unique facts of the situation should be discussed in advance with an appropriate representative from Human Resources, usually the Global HR Manager. When necessary, cognizant Vice Presidents, Vice Provosts or University officers will be included in the decision-making of proposed exceptions. Exceptions to personnel policies must be approved by the VP of HR, or his/her designee.

Back to top

12.2.2 Recruiting and Hiring of Global Staff

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

This policy covers all phases of the recruiting and hiring process outside of the US and the corresponding areas of responsibility. The policy applies to all individuals who are paid by Stanford University, a university entity and/or its affiliates outside of the US.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

Purpose: 

To provide policies and guidance that support recruiting and hiring a diverse and talented workforce to support Stanford operations outside of the US. To accomplish this, Stanford strongly encourages hiring supervisors to develop the broadest possible applicant pool allowing the best and the brightest candidates - internal and external - to fairly compete for all open positions. Through fair and open competition and application of equitable evaluation criteria, Stanford hires the best available candidates.

1. General Recruiting and Hiring Responsibilities

a. Global HR Programs
University Human Resources and Global HR Programs are responsible for developing, monitoring and overseeing employment policies and providing the University with support services necessary to attain staffing objectives outside of the US.

b. Human Resources Manager
Human Resources Manager is the person responsible for administering recruiting and hiring policy for each unit or organization, in consultation with Global HR Programs.

c. Hiring Supervisors
Hiring Supervisors are those faculty and staff designated to make staff hiring decisions. Hiring supervisors are responsible for making such decisions in accordance with the policies and procedures established by the University and set forth in this Guide Memo. Each hiring supervisor is accountable for his/her actions in matters relating to applicable sections of this policy and compliance with regulations governing employment and performance in the country of hire. Questions on these policies should be referred to the Human Resources Manager and/or Global HR Programs.

Back to top

2. Recruiting and Hiring Policies

a. Compliance with Laws in Country of Hire
Employees assigned or working outside of the US are subject to applicable law in the country of hire as well as University policy and procedures when not in conflict with in-country law.

b. Business Purpose
Hiring, transfer or assignment of regular staff outside of the US must be supported by a demonstrable University business purpose, and approved in writing by the cognizant School Dean or VP. Copies of such approvals should be forwarded to Global HR Programs and FMS/Global Business Services.

c. Administrative Costs
Employing workers outside of the US typically involves significant additional costs in light of the regulatory and operational complexity involved in such assignments. Accordingly the supervisor hiring or assigning the employee outside of the US is responsible for ensuring that the added expense of such an assignment is covered by the applicable budget for the duration of the expected employment.

d. Work Authorization
Work authorization and immigration issues may require significant lead time. HR Managers are responsible for ensuring that appropriate documents are secured prior to employment outside of the US. Human Resources cannot process a hire until the proper work authorization is obtained. Candidates who are citizens or hold on-going work authorization for the country in which the project is located are considered “in-country” hires. These employees may be paid in the country’s currency by a University-approved payroll provider.

e. Consulting Arrangements
It should be noted with caution what may appear to be a consulting arrangement by US standards could in fact constitute an employment relationship in another country, potentially triggering employment, tax and other regulatory considerations.

f. Employment Rights and Preferences of Former and Current Regular Staff
In recognition of the unique nature of global operations, campus policy relating to reemployment does not apply. The University will reemploy or return to active employment workers in the country of original hire to the extent required by law.

g. Employment of Related Persons
University guidelines (as detailed in 2.1.2.c) regarding the Employment of Related Persons apply to global employees.

h. Age as a Hiring Factor
Consideration of age as a hiring factor will be in compliance with employment regulation in the country of hire.

 

Back to top

3. Policies and Practices – Search Phase

a. Job Descriptions
Global HR Programs will maintain a library of global job descriptions in a standard format. The hiring supervisor identifies the functions of the job, defines and describes the duties and responsibilities of the position, including required training, and develops objective criteria for the selection process. The unit Human Resources Manager reviews the description for clarity and content and works with Global HR Programs to define a recruitment strategy.

b. Announcing Job Openings
All regular vacancies must be listed with the unit’s Human Resource office and Global HR Programs. Due to the specific requirement of working outside of the US, global jobs are not posted online in the Stanford Careers website.

c. Recruitment of Applicants
Hiring supervisors should consult with the unit’s HR Manager, and ask for a copy of the International Human Resources Checklist for Stanford University Human Resources Managers.

d. Search Firms
Global hiring situations may require the use of a search firm in the country of hire to develop a candidate pool. Consult with the unit’s Human Resources Manager and Global HR Programs before making any arrangement with an outside firm or agency.

Back to top

4. Policies and Practices – Selection Phase

a. Employment Application Form
All interviewed applicants must complete and sign an application form. Applicants may cross out sections on the form that do not apply in the country of hire. At a minimum, the form must contain the employee’s legal name, current and former employer and dates of employment, including latest salary information, and highest education level with name of school awarding degree or diploma.

b. Interviewing
The hiring manager and/or interview committee interviews the candidates selected through the recruitment process. Initial interviews for job assignments outside of the US may utilize video conferencing and/or video recording. In all cases, the final candidate should be interviewed by the hiring supervisor in person. Finalists should be scheduled for a phone or video interview with campus stakeholders if appropriate.

c. Testing
When used, approved tests must directly relate to essential job functions and be given to all applicants or finalists under the same or equivalent conditions. The test must be scored, evaluated and used as a selection factor equally for all applicants or finalists.

d. Reference Checks
The hiring supervisor is required to obtain a minimum of two reference checks from previous employers. Reference checks must be part of the candidate’s evaluation and may be used as a factor in the hiring decision if the information is job-related. No offer of employment can be made before completing the hiring process, including reference checks.

e. Background Checks
Background checks (appropriate to the country in which the hire is being made) are conducted for all final candidates. No offer of employment can be made before completing the hiring process, including a background check.

f. Criminal Records
A criminal record will not automatically disqualify a job applicant. An applicant with a criminal record can only be barred from employment if the circumstances are reviewed by the unit’s Human Resources Manager, Global HR Programs and Employee and Labor Relations. In many countries, potential employers may not request prior criminal conviction records for job applicants. Stanford’s background check provider will advise on what information can be legally obtained during the hiring process.

g. False and/or Misleading Statements
Withdraw from consideration any applicant found to have misleading and/or false statements on the employment application or other documents.

h. Review of Personnel Files
Hiring supervisors have access to personnel files of current and former University employees who are finalists for the position. No offer of employment can be made before the hiring supervisor or Human Resources reviews the personnel files.

Back to top

5. Global Employment Decisions, Offers, and Documentation

a. Hiring Decisions
The hiring supervisor and/or next level of management is responsible for judging the relative qualifications of each applicant and for making the hiring decision, consistent with University policy and applicable governmental laws and regulations. The unit’s Human Resources Manager and Global HR Programs is responsible for reviewing proposed hiring decisions and for facilitating compliance with each country’s regulations, laws, and/or University employment policies.

b. Employment Offers
(1) Timing of Offer
Employment offers should be made after the employment action (including in-hire salary) has received all required approvals and after successful completion of the background check.
(2) Employment Offers
An offer letter must be issued by the hiring department to the successful applicant for positions with work locations outside of the US, using an approved country offer letter template. Depending on the country of hire, an employment contract may also be required. All such documentation should be reviewed with Global HR Programs to assure conformity with law in the country of hire and University policy.

c. Documentation and Record Keeping
(1) Pre-Employment
New, transferred, rehired or promoted employees may not start work in the new position until all appropriate forms have been signed and processed. This may include an employment contract or agreement, government tax withholding forms, or other forms as required in the country of hire.
(2) Patent and Copyright Agreement
All employees must complete a Stanford-approved Patent and Copyright Agreement Form as a condition of employment.

Back to top

12.2.3 Global Personnel Files and Data

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Globally affiliated employees are tracked as a separate group in Stanford’s HR information system. Forms to provide the information necessary to enter employment data into the system are available through Global HR Programs. Recordkeeping transactions for new employee information, changes in information and employee terminations are handled by University HR Transaction Services.

HR administration for globally affiliated employees is provided by the responsible school or department’s own HR team. Additional resource is available from University HR through Global HR Programs.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.2.4 Hiring Global Employees from Stanford Health Care

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

University policy applies when global employees are hired with previous service from Stanford Health Care. Hospital service applies toward Stanford service, in accordance with Administrative Guide policy.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.2.5 Global Compensation of Staff Employees

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

International hiring requires a variety of approaches to compensation. Stanford practices a total reward strategy to attract, reward, motivate and retain the best possible talent, while taking into account market conditions in the country of hire, programmatic need and budgetary considerations.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

1. Base Salary

Base salaries paid to staff hired in-country should be based on market conditions in each country of work. The salary should be expressed as a gross figure in each country’s currency. Compensation analysis can be provided by Global HR Programs. US salary ranges are not applicable in other countries. Global HR Programs will assist in providing comparable salary data, where available.

Back to top

2. Periodic Merit Salary Review

Annual review of salary should be adhered to in all countries where the University or its affiliates conduct operations. In locations where significant inflation or currency fluctuations are an issue, more frequent salary reviews may be necessary.

Back to top

3. Performance Review

An annual review of each staff member’s performance should provide summary feedback, recognize strong performers and identify progress toward goals. Salary increases and promotional opportunities are based on the performance review process as followed in each school, department or unit.

Back to top

4. Other Cash Compensation

Compensation elements in countries outside of the US may follow patterns unique to that country’s culture and/or tax code. In addition to customary base salary as described above, other forms of cash compensation need to be reviewed to assure that University policy as well as regulations and customs of the country of work are followed.

  • Variable/bonus pay
    The University supports the concept of providing additional incentive pay (variable pay, bonus pay) to promote exceptional performance. Funds for such bonus or incentive pay may be made available by schools or departments at their discretion. Bonus awards should be considered if in keeping with practice in the country of work.
  • Currency Exchange Rates/Fluctuations
    The exchange rate used for any payments should be noted on all documents (offer letter, HR records, payroll documentation) relating to the staff member salary, premium and allowances payments. The rate should be fixed and remain in effect until the staff member’s next salary review, unless currency fluctuations (greater than 10%) occur that will necessitate an earlier currency adjustment. It is the responsibility of management to assure adherence to any exchange control regulations that exist at the international location, along with all other required University financial controls and reporting requirements. Global Business Services is available for support.

Back to top

12.2.6 Global Vacations

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Stanford or its affiliated entities will establish a vacation policy in each country in compliance with that country’s laws. Country-by-country policies will be maintained and communicated by Global HR Programs. Stanford employees paid through Stanford’s US payroll will accrue and request vacation time in accordance with regular staff policies.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.2.7 Sick Time

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Stanford or its affiliated entities will establish a sick leave policy in each country in compliance with that country’s laws. Country-by-country policies will be maintained and communicated by Global HR Programs, in conjunction with University Benefits and disability providers. Stanford employees paid through Stanford’s US payroll will accrue and request sick leave in accordance with regular staff policies.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.2.8 Miscellaneous Authorized Absences

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

In addition to Vacations, Sick Leave and Paid Holidays, Stanford employees or employees of affiliates may be eligible for paid absences in compliance with regulations in the country of work.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

In addition to Vacations, Sick Leave and Paid Holidays, Stanford employees or employees of affiliates may be eligible for paid absences in compliance with regulations in the country of work. Many countries require paid leaves for circumstances such as the employee’s wedding, meeting civic requirements, etc. Paid time off should be granted as appropriate, with verification of the event and the law requiring payment after consultation with Global HR Programs and/or Global Business Services/Payroll.

Back to top

2. Unpaid Absences

The University or its affiliates will provide unpaid leaves of absence as required by law in each country and in conformance with general University policy regarding unpaid leaves. Consult with Global HR Programs if such leave is requested.

Back to top

3. Length of Leave

Each leave of absence must be for a definite period with specific starting and ending dates. A leave cannot extend beyond the end of a fixed-term appointment or employment contract.

Back to top

4. Return from Leave of Absence

As the law in each country varies widely on the release of employees to return to work following leave, Global HR Programs should be consulted.

Back to top

12.2.9 Separation from Global Employment

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

It is the goal of the University and its affiliates to separate regular employees in conformance with all laws and regulations. Global HR must be consulted before taking any termination or severance action outside of the US.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.2.10 Staff Retirement

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Stanford or its affiliates offer a variety of retirement plans to international employees, depending on the country of work and citizenship of the employee.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources.

1. Retirement Plans

Stanford or its affiliates offer a variety of retirement plans to international employees, depending on the country of work and citizenship of the employee. When it is not feasible to offer a retirement plan in a country, a monthly retirement allowance is provided in lieu of a formal retirement savings plan. Refer to Global HR Programs to determine eligibility for retirement benefits outside of the US.

Back to top

2. Official University Retirees

University Administrative Guide requirements to be an Official University Retiree may apply to global employees, depending on the relationship of the affiliate. Refer to Global HR Programs to determine eligibility.

Back to top

3. Official University Retiree Benefit Programs for Global Employees

  • US Taxpayers returning to the US: Official Retirees who are US taxpayers may participate in University-provided US retiree medical and dental plans on the same basis as campus employees. At age 65, retirees and spouses must apply for and maintain Medicare Parts A and B.
  • Official International Retirees: Official Retirees who are not US taxpayers do not qualify for US retiree medical plans as they are not eligible for Medicare. They may be eligible for Perquisites.
  • Perquisites: All Official Retirees may use University libraries and recreation/athletic facilities and receive staff discounts for certain athletic events, as provided by the rules and policies of the department which provides the services or facilities.

Back to top

12.2.11 Grievance Policy

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Does not apply to global employees.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.2.12 Global Staff Development Program

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Refer to University Administrative Guide Memo 2.1.12.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.2.13 Global Paid Holidays

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Paid holidays are determined by each country’s traditions, customs and law. Global HR Programs maintains a list of paid holidays in each country, which is updated and published annually.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.2.14 Senior Staff

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Does not apply to global employees.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.2.15 Global Trial/Probation Periods

Last updated on:
09/01/2014

The trial period is an initial period of service during which the manager or supervisor assesses the performance of a newly hired employee to determine if the employee meets the requirements and expectation of the position. To the extent permitted by each country’s law, each employee will serve a probationary trial period of no longer than 12 months. Supervisors should consult with their unit HR Manager and/or Global HR Programs regarding termination of an employee during or at the end of the trial period.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.2.16 Addressing Conduct and Performance Issues

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Does not apply to global employees.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.2.17 Layoffs

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Does not apply to global employees.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.2.18 Global Military Leave

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Each country has its own requirements for maintaining employment during a period of military leave. Stanford and its affiliates will be in compliance with law in the country of work. Please contact the unit HR Manager and/or Global HR Programs if military leave is requested outside of the US.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.2.19 Administrative Review Policy

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Does not apply to global employees.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.2.20 Relocation of Global Faculty and Staff

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

The University may provide certain relocation expenses for newly hired or transferred staff when it is appropriate based on programmatic need and budgetary constraints of the University or its affiliated operation. Any such expense reimbursement should be documented in the offer or assignment letter. Relocation expenses may be covered with an allowance or by requiring documented receipts of expenditure. In all cases, the University and its affiliated entities will follow each country’s tax rules regarding taxability of relocation payments.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.2.21 Global Telecommuting

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Employee requests to work in an international location for an extended period of time require the approval of the Dean, Vice Provost, or Vice President of the school/unit and the school/unit’s Human Resources Manager. Global HR Programs and Global Business Services must be consulted regarding employee requests to telecommute outside the country of hire prior to any decision, as there may be international laws and requirements to be considered. Work authorization and tax rules in other countries may make such arrangements cost-prohibitive regardless of the level of approval. Any agreement must contain information regarding the University’s right to end the agreement if necessary. Refer to Administrative Guide Memo 2.1.21 for more information about general University telecommuting policy.

An agreement between the telecommuting employee and the employee’s home department is required, and will be placed in the employee’s personnel file. Global HR Programs has draft agreements that include language necessary for international telecommuting situations. The telecommuting agreement may be modified or terminated at any time, with appropriate notice.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.2.22 International Employees

Last updated on:
04/01/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
2.2.13, 23.12

This Guide Memo presents policy for hiring, assigning international employees, and establishing international telecommuting arrangements.

Authority: 

This Guide Memo was approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs and Chief Financial Officer.

Applicability: 

This policy applies to all Stanford University employees, including SLAC and employees covered by collective bargaining unit agreements.

1. Definition

An “international employee” is defined as an employee of Stanford University whose work site is located outside of the U.S. and its territories for any relevant tax period, generally at least six months in any calendar year. This includes employees who are telecommuting under an arrangement specifically approved by their business unit that permits the employee to work remotely in an international location. All individuals defined in Guide Memo 2.2.2, are considered employees for the purpose of this Guide Memo.  Consultants, contractors and volunteers are not covered by this Memo.

Back to top

2. Policy

a. Stanford University international employees are subject to all employment and other related laws of the country, city or region in which they work.

The existence of Stanford University employees outside the United States may trigger additional compliance requirements including, but not limited to those relating to local jurisdiction employment, payroll tax and statutory benefits regulations. These requirements are likely to impose significant additional costs on the unit employing the individual. Therefore, hiring or assignment of employees to international positions, or telecommuting from an international location must be supported by an important University business purpose and not be merely an accommodation to the employee.  Such placements must be supported by compelling programmatic justification and demonstrated skill requirements that can only be met by hiring or transferring a Stanford employee in that role. The manager, with support from central administrative offices identified below, is responsible for evaluating the impact of the proposed arrangement on programmatic need and performance management objectives and for ensuring that the arrangement is in compliance with local laws and University information security and privacy requirements.  Further, individual employees bear the responsibility of evaluating and managing the impact of an international working arrangement, including, but not limited to, immigration, personal tax implications and additional costs that may be difficult to anticipate.

The school or unit approving the assignment is responsible for monitoring compliance with University, U.S. and international regulations, including but not limited to: visa and work authorizations,  tax law, employment regulations anti-corruption legislation, in-country banking and money handling, privacy and data protection. Guidance is available from Stanford’s global compliance administrators (Global Business Services, Internal Audit & Institutional Compliance, Risk Management, Office of General Counsel and Global HR Programs).

b. Approval
Approval of the hire, assignment or telecommuting arrangement must be obtained in advance in writing from the responsible Vice Provost, Vice President (or similar level equivalent to the highest administrative person within the organization unit), or his/her designee, identifying the key University business reasons for the assignment. All telecommuting arrangements must be consistent with the guidance provided for Flexible Work Options.  In addition, Global HR Programs and Global Business Services must be consulted prior to any commitments made to employees or prospective employees. Units must anticipate significant lead time and additional funding that may be required to implement a proposed international hire or assignment.

c. International Employment Relationship
Units are advised that it may not be possible to establish a Stanford University employment relationship in another country. If the presence of a Stanford employee triggers a requirement to register in-country, approval is required by the Senior Associate VP for Finance and General Counsel. If the requirement necessitates the establishment of a legal entity in country, approval of both the Vice President of Business Affairs and General Counsel will be required.  There must be persuasive business reasons and expectation of significant ongoing Stanford University presence in country to justify establishment of new legal entities. Due to the very significant compliance obligations of such actions, these steps require due consideration and advance planning. Stanford will not elect registration out of country for a single employee.

If a direct employment relationship in country is not appropriate, it is recommended that consideration be given to outsourcing arrangements with a temporary staffing agency or affiliating with an in-country partner. Global Business Services and Global HR programs are available to consult on available options, and develop required agreements.

d. Administrative Costs
International assignments, hires or telecommuting arrangements require due diligence and may trigger the need for tax and legal consultation outside of the University. The assigning unit is responsible for all externally incurred costs incurred as a result of engaging in an international employment relationship. Failure to notify Global Business Services of the proposed placement of an international employee can result in after-the-fact implications which can be of considerable cost to remedy, and which will be borne by the unit.

e. Taxation
United States citizens and residents are taxed on their worldwide income. The US is signatory to a network of international double tax treaties which may, under some limited circumstances in certain jurisdictions, protect employees from double taxation in the US and the country in which they are working. However, there are many countries in which income and payroll taxes may be due and payable by individual employees, or which may create employer withholding obligations in country that are difficult to discharge due to lack of registration status. Units are cautioned that international taxation can be extremely complex and is fact and circumstance driven, requiring consideration of individual and family circumstances. Consultation with external experts is frequently required and resulting costs will be borne by the assigning unit. By policy, Stanford does not sponsor tax equalization between jurisdictions with different tax rates. Employees are expected to absorb these costs individually, and are strongly advised to consult with a professional international tax advisor prior to committing to an international assignment. 

f. Benefits
In-country statutory benefits and Stanford-provided health and welfare benefit plan choices may be  different from those offered to employees who work on Stanford’s California campus. Contact Global HR Programs for international employee benefit information.

g. International Social Security Totalization Agreements
Employees who have divided their careers between the US and another country may incur dual Social Security taxation on the same earnings in both countries. Totalization agreements may eliminate dual Social Security taxation and may help fill gaps in benefit protection for workers. The US has executed totalization agreements with a number of countries, primarily in Europe. The list of current agreements can be found at U.S. International Social Security Agreements.

Consult with Global Business Services to determine if an assignment may trigger a social security tax exemption and resulting requirement to obtain a certificate of coverage.

h. When Employee Works in California
University Payroll must be notified of any days that the international employee is present in California on Stanford business. Compensation earned on such days is considered California-sourced taxable income regardless of employee’s country or state of residence and is subject to all California tax provisions. The international employee is responsible for submitting the Out-of-State Employee Days Worked in California form to report the number of days an international employee works in California.

Employees who travel frequently, or who are assigned internationally are advised to proactively track days spent  outside of the US, by country, for purposes of individual tax filings.

i. HR Administration
International employees are tracked as a separate group in the University’s HR Information System.  Forms to provide the information necessary to enter the data into the system are available through Global HR Programs.  New employee information, change in information and employee termination actions are handles by University HR Transactions Services.  HR administration for international employees is provided by the unit’s own HR team.  Additional assistance is available from University HR through Global HR Programs; email mailto: globalhrprograms@stanford.edu.

j. Registration of Foreign Activity
Stanford is required to report the number of international employees annually to the federal government. Accordingly, units are requested to register the activity relating to the foreign hire or assignment in the Foreign Activities Registry maintained by Global Business Services.

Back to top

3. For More Information

For international employees, visit Global Business Services.

Back to top

12.3.1 General Global Personnel Policies

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Management has the responsibility to assure that any University-affiliated operation adheres to laws and regulations in each country.

University managers should request the services of legal counsel through the Office of General Counsel (OGC) to provide advice on general business and employment-related matters. The OGC International group will provide resources for competent legal advisors in each country. Global HR Programs is available to consult on employment related matters. Business and financial resources are available through Global Business Services.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.3.2 Global Definitions

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

This policy applies to Stanford University employees at least 50% time with an appointment of at least 6 months, whose primary work location is outside of the US. The employee may be paid by a Stanford out-of-country organization or affiliate (in-country hire), or in rare cases may be paid in the U.S. (U.S. hire working abroad). Benefit eligibility may be determined by each country’s law.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.3.3 Global Payroll

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Stanford or its affiliated entities will establish payroll procedures in each country that are in compliance with law and appropriate for University staff. Country-by-country procedures will be maintained with University Payroll or the affiliated entity.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.3.4 Respectful Workplace Policy

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Applicable in the country of operation.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.3.5 Sexual Misconduct and Sexual Assault

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Refer to Stanford's Administrative Guide 1.7.3, to the extent required and applicable in the country of operation.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.3.6 Smoke-free Environment

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Refer to Stanford University's Administrative Guide Memo 2.2.6 to the extent required and applicable in the country of operation.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.3.7 Workplace Accommodations for Employees with Disabilities

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Refer to Stanford University's Administrative Guide Memo 2.2.7, to the extent required and applicable in the country of operation.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.3.8 Controlled Substances and Alcohol

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Refer to Stanford University's Administrative Guide Memo 2.2.8.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.3.9 Global Employee Training

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Some countries mandate employee training requirements, or specific jobs may have training or certification standards. Supervisors are responsible for identifying those employees who perform work requiring specific training and taking actions to enable the delivery of necessary training.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.3.10 Gifts and Awards for Global Employees

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Refer to Stanford University's Administrative Guide Memo 2.2.10.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.3.11 Violence in the Workplace

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Refer to Stanford University's Administrative Guide Memo 2.2.11.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.3.12 Out-of-State Employees

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Does not apply to global employees.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.4.1 Global Benefit Administration

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Global HR Programs is the responsible party to initiate employee benefits for Stanford and its affiliates in locations outside of the US. Global HR Programs will also typically administer these benefits, unless explicitly delegated to management in a specific country. Employee benefit plans outside of the US may be taxable to the employee, depending on each country’s tax code and reporting regulations. The sections below outline employee benefit provisions as they apply to Stanford University’s international staff groupings.

  • In-Country Hires
    Contact Global HR Programs if benefit plans are not already available in the country where Stanford or an affiliate will have in-country hires.
  • US Hires
    Benefits provided to US-based employees working outside of the US will generally reflect, as closely as possible, those provided to University staff residing in the United States.
Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.4.2 Survivor Benefit Plans

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Stanford makes available an international life insurance plan for affiliated employees outside of the US. US citizens and legal residents may be allowed to continue US-based life insurance programs. Contact Global HR Programs for specific information.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.4.3 Health Plans

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Stanford offers an international health (medical and dental) plan to employees and affiliated employees working outside of the US. In specific countries, a health plan that aligns with that country’s social insurance may be offered instead. In many countries the benefit insurance premiums paid by Stanford on the affiliated employee’s behalf (including contribution toward family premiums) are considered taxable income to the employee. More information is available from Global HR Programs.

 
Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.4.4 Tuition Privileges

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Refer to University Administrative Guide Memo 2.3.3.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.4.5 University Housing Programs

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Does not apply to global employees.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.4.6 Disability and Family Leaves

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Stanford provides disability coverage in each country in compliance with law and appropriate for University and affiliated staff. Leave and salary continuation policies will be maintained and communicated by Global HR Programs, in conjunction with University Benefits and disability carriers. Affiliated employees may be requested to assign their disability benefits to Stanford to continue on regular payroll in each country. Stanford disability leave, family leave, short-term and long-term disability policies remain in effect for all University employees on US payroll.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.4.7 University Resources

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Refer to University Administrative Guide Memo 2.3.6.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.5.1 Visas for and Employment of Foreign Nationals

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

The University and its affiliates will comply with each country’s visa and employment law at all times. All affiliated employees must have the legal right to work and reside in the country of employment.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.5.2 Directories and Distribution Lists

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Refer to University Administrative Guide Memo 2.4.2.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.5.3 Stanford Identification and Email Accounts

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Once an employee’s data is entered into the system, the department will be notified of the employee’s Stanford identification number. This number is then communicated to the employee to generate a SUNetID and Stanford email address, following the same process used on the Stanford campus. The SUNet ID enables access to secure University websites, specific system authority, and Stanford's computing network. The SUNet ID stays with the employee during all employment, student or other affiliation at Stanford. All security policies for Stanford ID, including AGM 2.4.3 and AGM 6.4.1, apply to globally affiliated employees.

Stanford ID cards are available to global employees and affiliated employees who visit the campus in California. Affiliated employees must present themselves in person to have a photo taken for the ID card, and must already have a Stanford identification number.

 
Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.5.4 Property and Liability Insurance

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Refer to University Administrative Guide Memo 2.4.4.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.5.5 Protection of Property

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Refer to University Administrative Guide Memo 2.4.5.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.5.6 Indemnification

Last updated on:
03/11/2014

Employment contracts or agreements will govern the indemnification of employees in each country.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President of Human Resources

12.6.1 Foreign Currency Hedging

Last updated on:
04/01/2014
Formerly Known As Policy Number: 
3.1.6; 34.7

This Guide Memo describes the requirements and considerations associated with entering into foreign currency hedging contracts to hedge operational exposures. This Guide Memo is not applicable to the Stanford Management Company.

Authority: 

Approved by the Vice President for Business Affairs & Chief Financial Officer.

1. Fundamentals of Currency Hedging

As a global University, Stanford faces foreign currency risk from its international business activities. Fluctuations in foreign currencies impact departmental budgets and the cash flows of its overseas operations. The University hedges currency risk exclusively for the purpose of reducing or eliminating volatility in departmental budgets and related cash flows. Currency hedges must be related to business transactions with a high level of certainty where the foreign currency amounts and payment dates are known. Projected receipts and disbursements related to transactions may be hedged by two types of instruments: Spot Contracts and Forward Contracts.

  • Foreign Currency Spot Contract: An agreement with a financial institution to buy one currency and sell another at the current market exchange rate. Spot transactions require an upfront cash payment and settle within two business days.
  • Foreign Currency Forward Contract: An agreement with a financial institution to buy or sell a currency at a set exchange rate at a specific date in the future. The forward rate is equivalent to the spot rate plus a premium or discount equal to the net present value of the interest rate differential between the two currencies. Cash payment is required when the contract matures.
  • The University does not use Option Contracts for currency hedging at this time.

The objectives of currency hedging at the University are to:

  • Reduce or eliminate volatility in the U.S. Dollar value of University's cash and cash flows, and
  • Support business activities that are denominated in foreign currencies.

Currency hedges may be used to protect the U.S. Dollar (USD) value of both foreign currency denominated receipts and payments. Spot transactions, such as routine foreign currency vendor payments that are currently due, are processed through Disbursements. The Treasurer's Office is responsible for foreign currency when it needs to be held for an extended period, a foreign currency denominated receipt in excess of $25,000 is expected, or when a future transaction denominated in foreign currency needs to be hedged.

Back to top

2. Hedging Considerations

Before requesting a currency hedge, one must evaluate the stability of the business transaction associated with the hedge and the potential impact of currency fluctuations on the budget. The department requiring the hedge bears the currency fluctuation risk if a contract is entered into to lock in an exchange rate for a vendor payment, and that payment is cancelled. Thus, the underlying transaction must be committed before requesting a hedge. If future cash flows, or timing of cash flows are uncertain, the risk can be mitigated by hedging a fraction of the exposure or by spreading contract maturities over multiple time periods. The currency hedging department is responsible for gains and losses associated with adjustments made to currency hedges. Departments are advised to include loss offset provisions in contracts priced in foreign currency, to pass through the financial risk associated with adjustments or cancellations.

Accounting treatment for the currency hedge should also be taken into consideration. The U.S. Dollar value of the currency held in a spot contract is subject to revaluation before the payment is completed. Individual departments' income statements will reflect the change in value of foreign currency held at fiscal year end and, the University will revalue its overall exposure at each month end.

Back to top

3. Setting the Maturity Date of a Currency Hedge

If foreign currency is needed on a specific date, the currency hedge is set to mature on this exact date and instructions can be provided in advance to the financial institution to deliver the foreign currency payment to the vendor on the maturity date. If the payment date is not defined, such as a payment date linked to a milestone, the currency hedge maturity is set on the earliest possible date that the funds will be needed. In that instance, foreign currency is held in a multi-currency account after the hedge matures until the vendor payment is completed. The Treasurer's Office must receive instructions to transfer payment at least five business days before payment is due. Departments requesting a spot currency purchase are required to fund the transaction when the purchase is completed.

Back to top

4. Approval Process

The Treasurer's Office can provide market quotes, modeling, and help clarify the hedging process. A request to enter into a currency hedge must be submitted to the Treasurer's Office and executed by a party with the appropriate spending authority. The currency hedge request form includes:

  • Amount of foreign currency to be hedged
  • Currency to be hedged
  • Direction of the hedge (sending or receiving currency)
  • Date that the foreign currency is needed
  • Business purpose of the currency hedge
  • Parties in the underlying business transaction (department and external party)
  • Departmental contact making request
  • PTA to which the currency hedge should be booked

Copies of executed contracts for the related business transaction, if applicable, and proof of spending authority or a delegation of authority for the requester should be included with the request. Foreign currency hedging requests are approved after a review of the related business transaction and receipt of all completed documentation. The Office of the Treasurer should be consulted for proposed hedges related to government-sponsored research as complex rules apply. Contact the Treasurer's Office at fx@lists.stanford.edu or visit the Office of the Treasurer's website for more information. 

Back to top

5. Responsibilities of Departments and Treasurer's Office

a. Any material changes to the underlying business activity being hedged should be reported to the Treasurer's Office promptly.

b. Requests to modify or cancel a hedge should be submitted in writing to the Treasurer's Office as soon as the change in the related business transaction is confirmed. The financial impact (loss or gain) of modifying or canceling a currency hedge will be the responsibility of the department requesting the hedge.

c. All requests to create or change currency hedges are subject to approval from the Office of the Vice President for Business Affairs & Chief Financial Officer.

d. Departments are responsible for tracking their hedges, maturity dates and foreign currency transfers.

e. The Treasurer's Office:

  • Is responsible for initiating and modifying currency hedges, tracking and revaluing hedges at the consolidated level in compliance with accounting rules.
  • Will facilitate funds transfers related to currency hedges and their related accounting.

Back to top